OS/2 Shareware BBS: SysTools/SysTools.zip/ICPAIND1.ZIP/prcp01.hlp

OS/2 Help File | 1994-05-23 | 625KB | 22,887 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. 7531 IBM INDUSTRIAL COMPUTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

7531 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF May 4, 1992)

Double click here to display picture

The 7531 is designed for information-handling applications in industrial plant
floor environments, where a system more resistant to harsh physical conditions
is required.  The 7531 is designed for floor-standing operation. It is based on
a high performance Intel 80286 microprocessor, and is equipped with a high
capacity (1.2Mb) diskette drive, 512Kb of standard memory, keyboard,
clock/calendar with battery backup, ROM-based BASIC language, and other
advanced features.

MODEL 041

System Unit/Keyboard, 512Kb Memory, high capacity 1.2Mb Diskette Drive, ROM
Based BASIC Language, clock/calendar with battery backup, diskette area cover
door with security keylock.

STANDARD FEATURES:

    o   Advanced high-performance Intel 80286 microprocessor
    o   ROM-based automatic power-on self-test of system components
    o   ROM-based BASIC language interpreter
    o   8086 compatible real address mode
    o   Protected virtual address mode
    o   512Kb of memory
    o   1.2Mb high-capacity diskette drive
    o   Combination fixed disk and diskette adapter
    o   Fixed disk-in-use indicator light (yellow)
    o   System clock/calendar/system configuration storage with battery backup
    o   Sound system
    o   System reset button
    o   Diskette area cover door with security keylock
    o   Bi-directional keyboard interface
    o   Keyboard
    o   Switchable worldwide power supply with cooling fan
    o   Cooling fan with removable filter
    o   Power-on indicator light (green)
    o   Eight input/output (I/O) expansion slots with retainer bar to secure
        feature cards
    o   Socket for Intel 80287 Math Co-processor
    o   24-bit addressing
    o   16-bit data path
    o   Seven-channel direct memory access (DMA)
    o   16-level interrupt
    o   Three programmable timers

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

    o   INTEL 80286 microprocessor
    o   6.0 MHz clock speed
    o   24-bit addressing
    o   16-bit data path
    o   64Kb ROM
            Access time - 150ns
            Cycle time - 355ns
    o   Dimensions:
            Depth:  600.0mm (23.6 in)
            Width:  266.0mm (10.5 in)
            Height:  650.0mm (25.6 in)
            Weight:  36.3 Kg (80 lbs.)

MODEL 111

The new Model 111 provides the following enhancements:

    o   Increased performance
    o   Support for 3.5-inch diskette media
    o   New memory expansion options and memory module kits
    o   Enhanced keyboard support without requiring a keyboard installation
        diskette
    o   Support for 3278/79 emulation and 5250 emulation
    o   Lower priced configurations than with the existing Model 041
    o   Standard 20Mb fixed-disk
    o   Increased performance using an 8 MHz 80286 microprocessor
    o   3.5-inch 720Kb Diskette Drive Option,
    o   128/640Kb Memory Expansion Option,
    o   512Kb/2Mb Memory Expansion Option,
    o   1Mb/6Mb Memory Expansion Adapter,
    o   Support of Advanced 3278/79 Emulation Adapter,
    o   Support of Enhanced 5250 Display Station Emulation Adapter,
    o   Support of AT/370 Option Kit,
    o   Support of IBM Token-Ring Network Adapters,
    o   Enhanced Keyboard support does not require use of the keyboard
        installation diskette,
    o   Standard 20Mb fixed-disk drive,

The new model is based on the high-performance 16-bit Intel 80286
Microprocessor.  This model also includes the BASIC language and clock/calendar
with battery backup.

The Model 111 system unit includes 512Kb of standard memory, a single 1.2Mb
High Capacity 5.25-inch Diskette Drive, a combination Fixed-Disk and Diskette
Drive Adapter, and a 20Mb Fixed-Disk Drive. Eight option (feature) slots
support feature cards for devices, features, or memory.  Six of the slots
support either the advanced 16-bit or the 8-bit option cards.  Two support
8-bit option cards only.  However, the Model 111 uses one 16-bit slot for the
standard combination fixed disk and diskette drive adapter.  The result is
seven available expansion slots.  A retainer bar is provided to secure the
feature cards.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The System Unit contains the following major functional components:

    o   Advanced high-performance Intel 80286 microprocessor at 8 MHz clock speed
    o   24-bit addressing
    o   16-bit data path
    o   ROM based automatic power-on self test of system components
    o   BASIC language interpreter
    o   64Kb ROM
        -   Access Time - 150 ns
        -   Cycle Time - 355 ns
    o   8086 compatible real address mode
    o   Limited protected virtual address mode functions
    o   512Kb of dynamic RAM on the system board
        -   Access Time - 150 ns
        -   Cycle Time - 275 ns
    o   Combination Fixed-disk and diskette drive adapter
    o   System clock/calendar/configuration w/CMOS RAM and battery backup
    o   Directionally-mounted speaker
    o   Diskette area cover door with protective keylock
    o   Bi-directional keyboard interface
    o   Enhanced Keyboard
    o   Power-on indicator (green)
    o   Eight expansion slots with retainer bar to secure feature cards
        -   Six slots support either the advanced 16-bit or 8-bit option cards,
        -   Two slots support 8-bit option cards only.
    o   Seven-Channel Direct Memory Access (DMA)
    o   16-level interrupt
    o   Three programmable timers
    o   Cooling fan with removable filter
    o   80287 math co-processor socket
    o   Dimensions of 7531:
        -   Depth:   600mm (23.6 in.)
        -   Width:   266mm (10.5 in.)
        -   Height:  650mm (25.6 in.)
    o   Weight of 7531 Model 111:  38.6 Kg (85.1 lbs.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. 7532 IBM INDUSTRIAL COMPUTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

7532 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF May 4, 1992)

Double click here to display picture

The 7532 Industrial Computer is designed for information-handling applications
in industrial plant floor environments, where a system more resistant to harsh
physical conditions is required.  The 7532 is installable inside a standard
19-inch rack.  It is based on a high performance Intel 80286 microprocessor,
and is equipped with a high capacity (1.2Mb) diskette drive, 512Kb of standard
memory, keyboard, clock/calendar with battery backup, ROM-based BASIC language,
and other advanced features.

STANDARD FEATURES:

    o   Advanced high-performance Intel 80286 microprocessor
    o   ROM-based automatic power-on self-test of system components
    o   ROM-based BASIC language interpreter
    o   8086 compatible real address mode
    o   Protected virtual address mode
    o   512Kb of memory
    o   1.2Mb high-capacity diskette drive
    o   Combination fixed disk and diskette adapter
    o   Fixed disk-in-use indicator light (yellow)
    o   System clock/calendar/system configuration storage with battery backup
    o   Sound system
    o   System reset button
    o   Diskette area cover door with security keylock
    o   Bidirectional keyboard interface
    o   Keyboard
    o   Switchable worldwide power supply with cooling fan
    o   Cooling fan with removable filter
    o   Power-on indicator light (green)
    o   Eight input/output (I/O) expansion slots with retainer bar to secure
        feature cards
    o   Socket for Intel 80287 Math Co-processor
    o   24-bit addressing
    o   16-bit data path
    o   Seven-channel direct memory access (DMA)
    o   16-level interrupt
    o   Three programmable timers

SYSTEM UNIT:

    o   INTEL 80286 microprocessor
    o   6.0 MHz clock speed
    o   24-bit addressing
    o   16-bit data path
    o   64Kb ROM
          Access time - 150ns
          Cycle time - 355ns
    o   Dimensions:
          Depth  -  513.4mm (20.2 in)
          Width  -  436.8mm (17.2 in)
          Height -  221.0mm (8.7 in)
          Weight -  21.3 Kg (47 lbs.)

MODEL 041

System Unit/Keyboard, 512Kb Memory, high capacity 1.2Mb Diskette Drive, ROM
Based BASIC Language, clock/calendar with battery backup, diskette area cover
door with security keylock.

MODEL 111

The IBM Industrial Computer family has been enhanced with the addition of a new
model of the 7532 Industrial Computer.  The Model 111 provides the following
enhancements:

    o   Increased performance
    o   Support for 3.5-inch diskette media
    o   New memory expansion options and memory module kits
    o   Enhanced keyboard support without requiring a keyboard installation
        diskette
    o   Support for 3278/79 emulation and 5250 emulation
    o   Lower priced configurations than with the existing Model 041
    o   Standard 20Mb fixed-disk

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Increased performance using an 8M Hz 80286 microprocessor
    o   3.5-inch 720Kb Diskette Drive Option
    o   128/640Kb Memory Expansion Option
    o   512Kb/2Mb Memory Expansion Option
    o   1Mb/6Mb Memory Expansion Adapter
    o   Support of Advanced 3278/79 Emulation Adapter
    o   Support of Enhanced 5250 Display Station Emulation Adapter
    o   Support of AT/370 Option Kit
    o   Support of IBM Token-Ring Network Adapters
    o   Enhanced Keyboard support does not require use of the keyboard
        installation diskette
    o   Standard 20Mb fixed-disk drive
    o   Model 111 can be configured for a lower price than a similarly configured

Model 041

The Model 111 system unit includes 512Kb of standard memory, a single 1.2Mb
High Capacity 5.25-inch Diskette Drive, a combination Fixed-Disk and Diskette
Drive Adapter, and a 20Mb Fixed-Disk Drive. Eight option (feature) slots
support feature cards for devices, features, or memory.  Six of the slots
support either the advanced 16-bit or the 8-bit option cards.  Two support
8-bit option cards only.  However, the Model 111 uses one 16-bit slot for the
standard combination fixed disk and diskette drive adapter.  The result is
seven available expansion slots.  A retainer bar is provided to secure the
feature cards.

The System Unit contains the following major functional components:

    o   Advanced high-performance Intel 80286 microprocessor at 8M Hz clock speed
    o   24-bit addressing
    o   16-bit data path
    o   ROM based automatic power-on self test of system components
    o   BASIC language interpreter
    o   64Kb ROM
        -   Access Time - 150 ns
        -   Cycle Time - 355 ns
    o   8086 compatible real address mode
    o   Limited protected virtual address mode functions
    o   512Kb of dynamic RAM on the system board
        -   Access Time - 150 ns
        -   Cycle Time - 275 ns
    o   Combination fixed-disk and diskette drive adapter
    o   System clock/calendar/configuration w/CMOS RAM and battery backup
    o   Directionally-mounted speaker
    o   Diskette area cover door with protective keylock
    o   Bi-directional keyboard interface
    o   Enhanced Keyboard
    o   Power-on indicator (green)
    o   Eight expansion slots with retainer bar to secure feature cards
        -   Six slots support either the advanced 16-bit or 8-bit option cards,
        -   Two slots support 8-bit option cards only.
    o   Seven-Channel Direct Memory Access (DMA)
    o   16-level interrupt
    o   Three programmable timers
    o   Cooling fan with removable filter
    o   80287 math co-processor socket
    o   Dimensions of 7532:
        -   Depth:  513.4mm (20.2 in.)
        -   Width:  436.8mm (17.2 in.)
        -   Height:  221.0mm (8.7 in.)
    o   Weight of 7532 Model 111:  23.6 Kg (52.1 lbs.)

MODEL 111 System Unit/Keyboard, 512Kb Memory, 20Mb Fixed-Disk, high capacity
1.2Mb Diskette Drive, ROM Based BASIC Language, clock/calendar with battery
backup, diskette area cover door with keylock.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. 7537 IBM INDUSTRIAL COMPUTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

7537 011 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF AUGUST 18, 1993)

Double click here to display picture

The IBM 7537 Industrial Computer is designed to complement and expand the low
end of the IBM industrial computer line.  It provides product improvements such
as increased processor speed, configuration flexibility, and VGA graphics over
the current IBM 7531 and 7532 Industrial Computers.  The 7537 provides a 20 MHz
80386SX microprocessor, 2MB of standard memory, selectable no fixed disk or 80
million byte (MB) capacity fixed disk drive versions, a standard 1.44MB media
sense diskette drive, selectable 197 Watt or 205 Watt with battery backup
capability (requires the optional Backup Battery) power supply, and selectable
bench-top or rack-mount versions, in a five adapter slot and four storage
device bay mechanical package.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Improved performance with the 20-MHz 80386SX microprocessor
    o   2MB of 85ns memory standard on the system board (expandable to 16MB)
    o   Five full-size 8/16-bit expansion card slots and four DASD bays (two bays
        available in fixed disk model and three bays available in diskette only
        model)
    o   Selectable disk drive, power supply, and mounting configuration
        capabilities
    o   Faster, industry-standard VGA graphics

MODEL 011

The 7537 Industrial Computer is available in one model, that provides the
ability to select the specific content desired for a number of features that
will be installed by IBM prior to shipping the system.  There are three
categories of features, each containing two or more alternative items to be
selected at the time the system is ordered.  One and only one of the features
in each category MUST be selected and ordered with the system order.  The
categories and alternative features available are as follows:

    o   Front Cover - for Bench Top or Rack Mount Use of the System
        -   Feature 6760 - Bench Top Front Cover
        -   Feature 6761 - Rack Mount Front Cover
    o   Power Supply - With or Without a Battery Backup Capability
        -   Feature 6772 - 197 Watt, No Battery Backup Capability
        -   Feature 6773 - 205 Watt, With Backup Capability
    o   Fixed Disk Drive Content - Installed as a Single Drive
        -   Feature 6766 - No Fixed Disk Drive
        -   Feature 6758 - 80MB Fixed Disk Drive

The IBM 7537 Industrial Computer is a four DASD bay and five 8/16-bit expansion
slot bench top/rack mount system which includes a 20MHz 80386SX microprocessor,
and is capable of operating in the extended environment of a plant floor or
other demanding area.  The 7537 Industrial Computer also offers a means to
protect system operation against brief losses of normal AC power.

The 7537 Industrial Computer standard features include:

    o   80386SX Processor running at 20MHz
    o   2MB (85ns) system board memory
    o   1.44MB, 3.5-inch diskette drive
    o   One selectable IBM installed 3.5-inch fixed disk drive option (No fixed
        disk or 80 million byte (MB) capacity).  The 80MB fixed disk drive has an
        integrated fixed disk controller.
        -   One empty bay for half-high 3.5" or 5.25" DASD devices
        -   One empty bay for half-high 3.5" DASD devices or an internal battery
    o   A selectable IBM installed power supply (197 Watt standard or 205 Watt
        with battery backup capability)
    o   Integrated on the system board or riser card:
        -   80387SX Math Co-Processor socket
        -   Three system board memory sockets
        -   Integrated system board diskette controller (supports up to three
            devices)
        -   16 bit Video Graphics Array (VGA) video
        -   Five full size 8/16 bit expansion slots
        -   TOD clock with battery
        -   Pointing Device port
        -   Serial/asynchronous port
        -   Parallel port
    o   Keyboard

The VGA graphics modes include 640 x 480 pels in 16 colors and 320 x 200 pels
in 256 colors, and text modes including 700 x 400 pels in 16 colors (9 x 16
character box). The system maintains compatibility with CGA and EGA modes.

The fixed disk drive capacities are 40MB and 80MB.  Both fixed disk drives have
an integrated fixed disk controller.

    Formatted Capacity      40 million bytes*   80 million bytes*
    Average Seek (ms)       17                  17
    Data Transfer Rate
       (MB/s)               1.35Mbytes          1.35Mbytes
    Average Latency (ms)    8.3ms               8.3ms
    Sector Interleave       1to1                1to1
    Interface               AT                  AT
    Buffer                  32K                 32K
* Actual user accessible capacity may vary slightly based on different
operating environments

The system has 128KB of BIOS, Compatibility BIOS (CBIOS) with memory
addressability of up to one megabyte to provide support for compatible
application programs and has extended memory addressability up to a maximum of
16 megabytes.

The 7537 Industrial Computer supports up to 16MB of system memory.  Memory can
be increased in increments of 1MB, 2MB, 4MB, and 8MB memory module kits. Memory
speed supported is 85 nanosecond and faster.  System base memory is 85
nanosecond.

The 80387SX Math Co-Processor provides for enhanced performance in arithmetic
calculations.  The Math Co-Processor socket is designed to be compatible with
the Intel 80387SX 20MHz co-processor or equivalent.  In addition, the system
includes security features in POST/CMOS and an external keylock.

Additional features of the system unit include five 8/16-bit I/O slots, a
standard 197 watt power supply or 205 watt power supply with Battery Backup
capability, and a time and date clock with battery backup.

The 7537 Industrial Computer also supports either vertical or horizontal
orientation.  However, since the 7537 is only offered in a bench top and rack
mount configuration, the customer is required to supply adequate mounting
capability for the 7537 when used in the vertical position.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Bench Top:
        Width:  440mm (17.3 inches)
        Depth:  450mm (17.7 inches)
        Height:  152mm (6.0 inches)
        Weight: 15.9kg (35.0 lbs)
    o   Rack Mount:
        Width:  483mm (19.0 inches)
        Depth:  450mm (17.7 inches)
        Height: 177mm (7.0 inches)
        Weight: 15.9kg (35.0 lbs)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. 7537 IBM INDUSTRIAL COMPUTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM 7537 Industrial Computer is a Personal Computer AT* system designed to
complement and expand the IBM industrial computer line.  As with the other IBM
industrial computers, the 7537 provides for operation in extended physical
environments and in mission-critical applications where loss of power source
for brief periods is of concern.  The various 7537 models and optional features
offer a wide range of functional capability in systems that are PC AT*
compatible.  Installation in standard 19 inch racks or on a desk or bench top
is supported.  Internal battery backup capability is also available.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Operation in higher temperature environments
    o   Internal battery backup capability
    o   Rack mounting capability
    o   Range of available microprocessors, based on individual model:
        -   IBM 386SLC 20MHz
        -   IBM 486SLC2 50/25MHz
    o   Up to 16MB of 70 nanosecond (ns) system memory
    o   Support for 2MB, 4MB, and 8MB Single In-Line Memory Modules
        (SIMMs) (refer to Limitations sections)
    o   5 available adapter slots
    o   A total of 4 storage device bays (2 available for expansion)
    o   Fixed disk drive capacity up to 1.3GB, based on model and
        configuration
    o   1.44MB diskette drive, providing support for the 720KB diskette
        drive, and the 2.88MB diskette drive with media sense
    o   Fast VGA or XGA-2 graphics, based on model and optional features

The 7537 Industrial Computer supports the customer's business objectives by
providing processor and graphics performance required by many users, in a
system that is capable of performing in difficult environments and with
protection against brief power interruptions.  The PC AT* architecture offers a
fast, efficient, and reliable data flow with a large selection of optional
adapters.  The 7537 Industrial Computer, with its optional features and
compatible operating systems and applications, provides a solution for a wide
range of applications.  With the enhanced performance available in the newest
models, the 7537 can now be used in additional applications and areas that may
not have been considered in the past due to system performance limitations or
cost.  Jointly with other systems of the Industrial Computer and PC AT*
families, IBM can provide a total stand-alone or network system solution, fully
expandable to the plant floor or other areas with demanding environments and
the need for system assurance through power-source fluctuations.

The high degree of compatibility between the 7537 and other IBM Industrial
Computers and PC AT* devices protects the investment the customer has made in
related hardware and software.  The past investment can now further be applied
to plant floor and other areas that would not be fully suited to standard PC
AT* systems. The customer's investment is protected with processor
enhancements, and with an extensive list of supported PC AT* options. The
system may be upgraded with the addition of up to five adapters and two
internal I/O devices.  Both Integrated Device Electronics (IDE) DASD devices
(up to two internally) and SCSI DASD devices (up to five - three internally,
and two externally) can be attached.  The SCSI devices are supported only with
the addition of the Future Domain(1) SCSI adapter.  The DOS and OS/2* operating
systems and compatible software are supported.  The available, flexible
capability for both power supply and mounting configuration will protect the
investment in the 7537 should customer needs in these areas change after the
initial system purchase. (1) Registered Trademark Future Domain Corporation

The 7537 Industrial Computer supports application development and growth
through expansion features, and expanded microprocessor performance limits. The
standard system memory may be expanded to 16MB. Five available 16-bit PC AT*
slots allow the addition of options for additional applications.  Two available
direct access storage devices (DASD) bays provide for the addition of DASD
devices (fixed disks, diskette drives, optical disk, CD-ROM, and so on).  With
the addition of larger hard disk drive capability, up to 1.3GB of internal disk
drive capacity is available.

The 7537 Industrial Computer increases user productivity by providing a range
of microprocessor, DASD, memory, and graphics performance capabilities that can
be matched with users' needs.  The available high performance content is
significantly above that previously available in the IBM industrial computer
line.  The system is provided with flexible bench top or rack-mount capability.
The rack mount configuration provides for front or rear service access.

The 7537 Industrial Computer is offered in multiple models to accommodate
varying customer needs and prices.  Within a particular model, additional
content flexibility is offered through customer selectable IBM-installed
feature content.  Model content and selectable IBM-installed features are as
listed below.

MODEL A11 (SEE SECTION ON MODEL A12) Base Content:

    o   50/25MHz IBM 486SLC2 microprocessor (Up to approximately 100%
        performance improvement compared to the 80386SLC 20MHz system)
    o   4MB memory SIMM (70ns) (maximum 16MB) (Limited to 15.914MB
        available for customer use)
    o   5 available 16-bit adapter slots
    o   170MB fixed disk drive
    o   Selectable and upgradable, power supply, and mounting
        configuration
    o   1.44MB diskette drive, providing support for the 720KB diskette
        drive, and the 2.88MB diskette drive with media sense
    o   ISO compliant, faster, high-resolution, industry standard XGA
        graphics
    o   Enhanced security features
Selectable IBM-Installed Features:

There are two categories of features, each containing two alternative items to
be selected at the time the system is ordered.  One and only one of the
features in each category MUST be selected and ordered with the system order.
The categories and alternative features available are as follows.  There are
different prices associated with the different feature selections.

    o   Front Cover - for Bench Top or Rack Mount Use of the System
        -   Feature 6760 - Bench Top Front Cover
        -   Feature 6761 - Rack Mount Front Cover
    o   Power Supply - With or Without a Battery Backup Capability
        -   Feature 6772 - 197 Watt, No Battery Backup Capability
        -   Feature 6773 - 205 Watt, Supports Optional Backup Battery

Models 012, A12 OEM systems that are limited to specific IBM customers that
have specific contracts in place with IBM.  The content of these models is
essentially the same as the X11 models, although some feature numbers may be
different.  Ordering of these models is controlled through restricted ("I"
listed) RPQs that must accompany and be approved for each order.  Applicable
RPQs are automatically added to orders for any of the X12 models.

All models of the 7537 Industrial Computer are Customer Set-up.  Set-up
instructions will be in the specific supported language for a given country.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION MODEL A11

The IBM 7537 Industrial Computer has four DASD bays for storage devices, and
five 16-bit PC AT* expansion slots.  It is a benchtop/rackmount system
(rackmount only in EMEA, can be converted to bench-top), which is capable of
operating in the extended environment of a plant floor or other demanding area.
The 7537 Industrial Computer also offers a means to protect system operation
against brief losses of normal AC power.

The 7537 Industrial Computer standard features include:

o   Integrated on the system board or riser:
    -   A 50/25MHz IBM 486SLC2 microprocessor
    -   An internal memory cache controller with 16KB memory cache
    -   Two system board memory sockets available, with additional 4MB
        SIMM on planar (70ns, 80ns, or 85ns memory compatible) (maximum
        16MB)
    -   Integrated system board diskette controller supporting up to
        three devices
    -   Integrated system board with IDE controller supporting up to two
        DASD devices internally
        A SCSI adapter option, requiring 1 slot, is available
        --  Supports SCSI Common Command Set Version 4.B (SCSI-2
            Compliant)
        --  Local Bus increasing data transfer speed
        --  Support for mixed SCSI devices and capacities
        --  Attachment of up to 5 SCSI physical devices per adapter
        --  Provides flexibility - connection of internal and external
            devices
        --  SCSI Data Transfer Rate - up to 5.0 MB/sec
        --  Supports Synchronous and Asynchronous SCSI Data Transfers
        --  Slew rate controlled SCSI drivers and filtered SCSI receivers
            for high data integrity.
    -   XGA-2 graphics chip set (high resolution 1024 x 768)
        Supports Interlaced and Non-Interlaced IBM displays, meets
        Industry Standards Organization (ISO) requirements.  The XGA-2
        graphics supports the following modes:
        --  Text Mode MFI 2 thru 5
        --  Graphics Mode 640 x 480 with 256 colors
        --  Graphics Mode 640 x 480 with 64000 colors
        --  Graphics Mode 800 x 600 with 256 colors
        --  Graphics Mode 800 x 600 with 64000 colors
        --  Graphics Mode 1024 x 768 with 16 colors
        --  Graphics Mode 1024 x 768 with 256 colors
        The system maintains compatibility with CGA, EGA, and VGA modes.
    -   Enhanced Security
        The following enhanced security functions are standard in these
        models:
        --  Lockable cover
        --  Power On Password
        --  Keyboard Password via OS/2
        --  Privileged-Access Password
        --  Secured Setup configuration
        --  Secured removable media via OS/2 (Optional via the optional
            Enhanced 2.88MB Diskette Drive).
    -   TOD clock
    -   Battery
    -   Standard Device External Ports/Connectors:
        --  Enhanced Graphics Array (XGA-2) (Supports Interlaced and
            Non-Interlaced IBM displays)
        --  Keyboard
        --  Pointing Device
        --  Serial/asynchronous port
        --  Parallel port
    -   One 1.44MB 3.5-inch diskette drive
    -   170MB Fixed Disk Drive
    -   A selectable IBM installed power supply (197 Watt standard or 205
        Watt which supports an optional backup battery)
    -   Keyboard

SUMMARY

    o   Processor:  486SLC2
    o   Speed (MHz):  50/25
    o   Internal Memory Cache:  16KB
    o   Memory (70ns):  4MB
    o   Max. Memory (70 - 85ns):  16MB
    o   Hard Disk:  170MB Fixed Disk Drive (no Fixed Disk Drive in EMEA)
    o   Diskette Drive:  1.44MB

DISKETTE DRIVES, IDE AND SCSI HARD DRIVE CHARACTERISTICS Standard 1.44MB
Diskette Drive Characteristics:

    Diskette size:              1 MB           2 MB
                                ----------     ----------
    Formatted Capacity (1)      720 KB         1.44 MB
    Bytes per sector            512            512
    Sectors per track           9              18
    Cylinders                   80             80
    Heads                       2              2
    Note: (1) Format capacity is diskette dependent.

Optional 2.88MB Diskette Drive Characteristics:

    Diskette size:              1 MB           2 MB           4 MB
                              ----------     ----------     ---------
    Formatted Capacity (1)      720 KB         1.44 MB        2.88 MB
    Bytes per sector            512            512            512
    Sectors per track           9              18             36
    Cylinders                   80             80             80
    Heads                       2              2              2
    Note: (1) Format capacity is diskette dependent.

IDE Fixed Disk Drive Characteristics:

                                 170 MB (3)     212 MB (4)
                                 ----------     ----------
    Formatted Capacity (1)       170 MB         212 MB
    Average Seek Time             16 ms          15 ms
    Data Transfer Rate           1.7Mb/sec      2.4Mb/sec
    Average latency              8.3 ms         8.5 ms
    Sector Interleave            1 to 1         1 to 1

(1) Actual user accessible capacity may vary slightly based on different
operating environments. (2) Manufacturing installed fixed disk drive on 011
Model (3) Standard fixed disk drive on A11 Model (4) Derated Environmental
Specifications - See Operating Enviroment Section.

A single keyboard is provided with and included in the price of the 7537
systems.  Two different keyboard types are available for customer selection at
the time of system order.  The enhanced industrial keyboard is 492 mm (19.4
inches) long by 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide.  The space-saving industrial keyboard
is 406 mm (16.0 inches) long by 190 mm (7.5 inches) wide.  Both keyboards are
58 mm (2.3 inches) high, and provide the same functions, some of which are
combined on common keys on the space-saving keyboard.

The system order will default to the enhanced 101-key industrial keyboard in US
English unless the alternative space saving 84-key industrial keyboard (in US
English) is ordered.  No keyboard needs to be ordered if the 101-key English
keyboard is desired.  If the space saving keyboard is desired, it must be
ordered along with the system order as feature #6903.

The system will ship with a single power cord that is included in the price of
the system.  The cord provided is a default power cord, based on the country of
order.  No cord needs to be ordered if the default cord is desired.  In some
countries an approved alternative cord is available for ordering in place of
the normal default cord.  If the alternative cord is desired it must be
specifically ordered along with the system order.  When ordered, the
alternative cord will be shipped with the system in place of the standard
default cord.

The IBM 7537 Industrial Computer is designed to maintain compatibility with the
following previously announced products.  Feature code numbers apply worldwide
unless otherwise noted.

The user should ensure that the total electrical power required to support the
desired system configuration is within the power provided by the IBM 7537
Industrial Computer system.

For information on compatible machine type products listed, refer to the
individual Sales Manuals for those products.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Bench Top:
            Width:  440mm (17.3 inches)
            Depth:  448mm (17.6 inches)
            Height: 170mm (6.7 inches)
            Weight: 15.9kg (35.0 lbs)
    o   Rack Mount:
            Width:  483mm (19.0 inches)
            Depth:  448mm (17.6 inches)
            Height: 177mm (7.0 inches)
            Weight: 15.9kg (35.0 lbs)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Note: Attachment of any external PS/2 products requires
that the operating environment be within the limits defined for those products.
(See Product Announcements and Sales Manual information for those products.)

    o   Ambient Air Temperature:
        -   Operating: 0 to 50C (32 to 122F)
            Notes:
            1.  Installation of 320MB, 400MB or 1GB SCSI fixed disk
                drives is restricted to the lower two center DASD bays
                in the system.  These devices may not be installed in
                the upper right bay position.
            2.  The operating temperature range is reduced to 5 to 45C
                (41 to 113 degree F) when one or more 212MB IDE fixed
                disk drives are installed in system.
            3.  The maximum operating temperature is reduced to 45C
                (113F) when one or more 320MB or 400MB SCSI fixed disk
                drives are installed in the system, either as shipped
                from IBM or as a separate feature.
            4.  The maximum operating temperature is reduced to 40C
                (104F) when one 1GB SCSI fixed disk drive is installed
                in the system, either as shipped from IBM or as a
                separate feature.
            5.  The maximum operating temperature is reduced to 35C (95F)
                when two 1GB SCSI fixed fisk drives are installed in the
                system.
            6.  The maximum operating temperature is reduced to 40C
                (104F) when the PS/2 3.5-Inch Rewritable Optical Drive
                (FC 0162) is installed in the system and media is in the
                drive.
        -   Non-operating: 0 to 55C (32 to 131F)
        -   Shipping: -40 to 60C (-40 to 140F)
    o   Relative Humidity: 5 to 95 percent (non-condensing)
        Note:  The operating relative humidity range is reduced to 8 to
        80% (non-condensing) when one or more 212MB IDE fixed disk drives
        are installed in the system.
    o   Wet Bulb:  29.4C (85F)
        Note:  The wet bulb rating is reduced to 26.0C when one or more
        212MB IDE
    o   Altitude:
        -   Operating: 0 to 7,000 feet (0 to 2135 meters)
        -   Non-operating: 0 to 15,000 feet (0 to 4575 meters)
    o   BTU Output:
        -   As-Shipped Configuration: 140 BTU/Hour
        -   Maximum Configuration:
            --  1033 BTU/Hour (197W Power Supply)
            --  999 BTU/Hour (205W Power Supply)
    o   Electrical:
        -   Power Supply: 197 watts or 205 watts (as selected when
            ordered)
        -   197W - Dual voltage controlled by manual switch
        -   205W - Auto-ranging (no manual switch)
        -   100 to 125 (nominal) VAC; 50 to 60 Hz
        -   200 to 240 (nominal) VAC; 50 to 60 Hz
    o   Noise Level: Class 0
    o   Corrosive Gas Contaminants:
        -   Total reactive sulfur: 3.2 micrograms/cubic meter
        -   Sulfur dioxide: 100 micrograms/cubic meter
        -   Nitrogen dioxide: 140 micrograms/cubic meter
        -   Ozone: 98 micrograms/cubic meter
        -   Acidic gaseous chlorine: 1.5 micrograms/cubic meter
    o   Particulate Contaminants:
        -   Suspended particulates: 500 micrograms/cubic meter
        -   Benzene soluble organics: 30 micrograms/cubic meter
        -   Settleable particulates: 1500 micrograms/square centimeter/
            30 days
    o   Shock:
        -   Operating: 30G at 3 milliseconds duration
    o   Vibration:
        -   Operating: 0.27G RMS random from 5Hz to 500Hz
            Note:  The maximum operating vibration levels for the system
            must be reduced to the following levels when one or more
            212MB IDE fixed disk drives are installed in the system:
            --  5 to 10Hz at .005 inch double amplitude displacement
            --  10 to 200Hz at .07G peak acceleration
            --  200 to 500Hz at .035G peak acceleration
    o   Equipment Approvals:
        -   US MS, AP, Canada, IBM LA:
            --  UL Listed (UL 1950, 1st Edition)
            --  CSA Certified (CSA22.2 No.950-M1990)
            --  FCC Class A
            --  VCCI Class 1
        -   EMEA:
            --  IOP
            --  VDE 0805
            --  TUV (EN60950/IEC 950)
            --  CISPR 22 Class A
            --  BABT - UK General Approval NS/G/J/1000003
            --  IEC Standard Compliance
                o   Shock (IEC 68-2-27) - 30G at 3 milliseconds duration
                    (1/2 sine wave)
                o   Vibration (IEC 68-2-6) - Random: 0.27G RMS from 5HZ
                    to 500Hz
                o   Electromagnetic Compatibility
                    -   Electro static discharge (IEC 801-2/EN55101-2)
                        Level 3, 6KV
                    -   Radiated susceptibility (IEC 801-3/EN55101-3)
                        Level 3, 10V/m
                    -   Fast transients/bursts (IEC 801-4) Level 3, 1KV
                    -   Power line surges (IEC 801-5) Level 3, 1KV
                    -   Conducted Immunity (IEC 801-6/EN55022) Level 2
                    -   Power line harmonics (IEC 555-2/EN60555)
                o   Enclosure (IEC 297-1) (Rack-mount units only)
                o   Environment (IEC 529) IP50 (Can be increased by
                    using an appropriate rack)

The 7537 has four available internal bays for DASD devices, as noted in the
list of supported DASD features.  Two of the four bays are accessible for
removable-media devices.  When the 205W power supply is installed in the 7537
with the optional backup battery in place, the maximum number of DASD devices
that can be installed internally is reduced to three.  This is because the
battery is located in a bay that could otherwise accept a DASD device.  Two of
the three bays remaining with the battery installed are accessible for
removable-media devices.

The maximum 50C operating temperature of the 7537 will be reduced when specific
devices are attached to or installed in the system.  Refer to the Operating
Environment section.

The 7537 is intended to be operated in a horizontal position.  While the system
will operate in a vertical position (left or right side down), no standard
mounting capability is provided for this orientation.  The user is responsible
to provide appropriate means if vertical orientation is desired.

DOS 5.0 is required if the 2.88MB Diskette Drive is installed.

Licensed system programs are provided on the IBM 7537 Industrial Computer
Reference Diskette.

If the KEYSTAT.COM utility is to be used for system operation with no keyboard
attached, the operating system and program software must also support operation
without a keyboard.

Double Byte Character Set (DBCS) applications are not supported.

DOS Version 5.0 does not support Video Mode 14 (MFI video attributes).

In addition the following adapters and or input/output (I/O) devices are not
supported:

    o   3363 Optical Disk
    o   6157 Streaming Tape Drive and Adapter
    o   8636 Multi-Function Adapter

MEMORY The 7537 supports only the following single in-line memory modules
(SIMM): 1MB and 2MB - 85 nanosecond; 2MB, 4MB, 8MB - 80 nanosecond: 2MB, 4MB,
and 8MB - 70 nanosecond.

The system ships with 4MB - 70ns memory (SIMM) standard.

With 24-bit addressing, the maximum addressable memory space is 16MB. The
system reserves 128KB of memory when BIOS/POST is copied to random access
memory (RAM) for execution in systems with less than 16MB of planar memory.
When 16MB of memory is installed there will be 15.914MB ( 15936KB) available
for use.

The IBM 7537 Industrial Computer requires an analog display (IBM 7544 or 7554
Industrial Displays, or equivalent).

Operating system software must be provided for the 7537 Industrial Computer.
The following levels of IBM operating system products are compatible with the
noted 7537 Industrial Computer models.

    IBM DOS, Version 5.0 IBM DOS, Version 5.02 OS/2*, Version 2.00.1 OS/2*,
    Version 2.0 AIX PS/2, Version 1.3

The A12 model is shipped with no publications.  The system reference diskette
is provided.  The A12 model is restricted to specific customers.

The following publications are shipped with the 7537-A11 product.

             Title                  Order Number
    -----------------------------   ------------
       Initial Group of
         Publications                 S41G-3741
           - Setup
           - Installing Options
           - User's Handbook
           - Problem Solving
     PS/2 XGA Device Drivers
     Installation Instructions        S41G-2928


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. 7541/7542 IBM INDUSTRIAL COMPUTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

7541 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF May 4, 1992)

7542 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF May 4, 1992)

Double click here to display picture

The 7541/7542 Industrial Computers are designed for industrial plant floor
environments where a system that can function in harsh physical conditions is
required.  The system is highlighted by Micro Channel* architecture with a 10M
Hz 80286 16-bit microprocessor with a capability of supporting up to 2Mb of
real memory on the system board, 30Mb of disk storage, a 1.44Mb diskette drive
and VGA graphics.  Total memory is expandable to 16Mb by adding 16-bit I/O slot
memory expansion feature cards.

The 7541 and the 7542 are identical in function and feature capacity; however,
they differ in form.  The 7541 is a bench top system and the 7542 is designed
to be installed in an industrial 19-inch rack. * Micro Channel is a trademark
of the International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Micro Channel Architecture with a 16 bit bus structure.
    o   Processing speed - 80286 at 10M Hz.
    o   1Mb memory standard on the system board, expandable to 2Mb
    o   VGA graphics on planar board, 3 available I/O expansion slots
    o   30Mb fixed disk, 1.44Mb (3.5-inch) diskette drive
    o   Optional 10M Hz 80287 Co-processor
    o   Universal, automatic voltage sensing power supply
    o   Advanced high-performance Intel 80286 microprocessor at 10M Hz clock
        speed
    o   24-bit addressing
    o   16-bit data path
    o   ROM-based automatic power-on self test of system components
    o   BASIC language interpreter
    o   128 bytes ROM
        -   Access Time:  170 ns max.
        -   Cycle Time:  200 ns
    o   8086 compatible real address mode
    o   Limited protected virtual address mode functions
    o   1Mb of dynamic RAM on the system board
        -   Access Time:  120ns
        -   Cycle Time:  220ns (one wait state)
    o   Direct access fixed-disk and diskette drive
    o   System clock/calendar/configuration with CMOS RAM and battery backup
    o   Directionally mounted speaker
    o   Diskette area cover door keylock (7542 only)
    o   Bi-directional keyboard interface
    o   Enhanced keyboard
    o   Power-on indicator (green)
    o   Three 16-bit Micro Channel expansion slots
        -   One slot contains the video extension signals
    o   Seven-Channel Direct Memory Access (DMA)
    o   16-level interrupt
    o   Three programmable timers
    o   Cooling fan with removable filter
    o   80287 Math Co-processor socket
    o   IBM 7541 Industrial Computer:
        Width:  436mm (17.2 in.)
        Depth:  420mm (16.5 in.)
        Height:  146mm (5.75 in.)
        Weight:  11.5kg (25.3 lbs)
    o   IBM 7542 Industrial Computer:
        Width:  487mm (19 in.)
        Depth:  627mm (24.5 in.)
        Height:  267mm (10.5 in.)
        Weight:  23.7kg (52 lbs)

7541 MODEL 111 Bench Top/30Mb hard file

    o   7541 Industrial Computer-Ship Group (110V AC) (#6505)
    o   7541 Industrial Computer-Ship Group (220V AC) (#6561)

7542 MODEL 111 Rack Mount/30 Mb hard file

    o   7542 Industrial Computer-Ship Group (110V AC) (#6596)
    o   7542 Industrial Computer-Ship Group (220V AC) (#6597)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. 7546 IBM INDUSTRIAL COMPUTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

7546 011 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF AUGUST 18, 1993)

Double click here to display picture

The IBM 7546 Industrial Computer is a Micro Channel* system designed to
complement and expand the low end of the IBM industrial computer line.  It
provides increased processor speed compared to the predecessor 7541 and 7542
Industrial Computers, combined with enhanced configuration flexibility, VGA
graphics, and an integrated small computer system interface (SCSI) input/output
(I/O) interface.  The 7546 Industrial Computer provides a 20 MHz 80386SX
microprocessor, 4 megabytes (MB) of standard memory, selectable 80 or 160
million byte capacity SCSI fixed-disk drives, a standard 2.88MB media-sense
diskette drive, available battery-backed power supply, and selectable bench-top
or rack-mount versions, in a 5 adapter-slot and 4 storage device-bay mechanical
package.  The 7546 supports up to 16MB of 70 nanosecond (ns) memory on the
planar in three single in-line memory module (SIMM) sockets.  The  system ships
with one 4MB SIMM installed.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Improved performance with the 20-MHz 80386SX microprocessor
    o   Memory expandable to 16MB on the system board
    o   Increased number of adapter slots and storage device bays
    o   Selectable and upgradable disk drive capacity, power supply, and mounting
        configuration
    o   Increased capacity 2.88MB diskette drive with media sense, providing
        support for the 720KB, the 1.44MB, and the new 2.88MB diskettes
    o   Faster industry-standard VGA graphics

The 7546 Industrial Computer is available in one model that provides the
ability to select the specific content desired for a number of features that
will be installed by IBM prior to shipping the system.  There are three
categories of features, each containing two alternative items to be selected at
the time the system is ordered.  One and only one of the features in each
category MUST be selected and ordered with the system order.  The categories
and alternative features available are as follows:

    o   Front Cover - for Bench Top or Rack Mount Use of the System
        -   Feature 6760 - Bench Top Front Cover
        -   Feature 6761 - Rack Mount Front Cover
    o   Power Supply - With or Without a Battery Backup Capability
        -   Feature 6772 - 197 Watt, No Battery Backup Capability
        -   Feature 6773 - 205 Watt, Supports Optional Backup Battery
            (Feature 6773 is not available until 5/92.)
    o   Fixed Disk Drive Content - Installed as a Single Drive
        -   Feature 6763 - 80 Million Byte (MB) SCSI Fixed Disk Drive
        -   Feature 6764 - 160MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive

The IBM 7546 Industrial Computer is a four storage device-bay and five 16-bit
micro channel expansion slot Micro Channel benchtop/rack mount system, which
includes a 20MHz 80386SX microprocessor, and is capable of operating in the
extended environment of a plant floor or other demanding area.  The 7546
Industrial Computer also offers a means to protect system operation against
brief losses of normal AC power.

STANDARD FEATURES The 7546 Industrial Computer standard features include:

    o   Integrated on the system board or riser card:
        -   Three system board memory sockets
        -   Integrated system board diskette controller (supports up to 3
            devices)
        -   Integrated system board SCSI controller (supports up to 7 devices, 3
            internal and 4 external)
        -   16 bit VGA video
        -   TOD clock
        -   Battery
        -   Five 16-bit Micro Channel feature card slots
        -   Standard device external ports/connectors:
          --  Video Graphics Array (VGA)
          --  Keyboard
          --  Pointing device
          --  SCSI port
          --  Serial/asynchronous port (FIFO and DMA serial support)
          --  Parallel port (DMA parallel support)
    o   4MB of 70ns memory
    o   One 2.88MB 3.5-inch diskette drive with media sense
    o   One selectable IBM installed 3.5-inch SCSI fixed disk drive (80 or 160
        million byte (MB) capacity)
    o   One empty bay for half-high 3.5-inch or 5.25-inch DASD devices
    o   One empty bay for half-high 3.5-inch DASD devices or an internal battery
    o   A selectable IBM installed power supply (197 Watt standard or 205 Watt
        which supports an optional backup battery)
    o   Keyboard

The VGA graphics modes include 640 x 480 pels in 16 colors and 320 x 200 pels
in 256 colors, and text modes including 700 x 400 pels in 16 colors (9 x 16
character box). The system maintains compatibility with CGA and EGA modes.
2.88MB Diskette Drive Characteristics:

    Diskette size:              1 MB           2 MB           4 MB
                                ----------     ----------     ---------
    Formatted Capacity (1)      720 KB         1.44 MB        2.88 MB
    Bytes per sector            512            512            512
    Sectors per track           9              18             36
    Cylinders                   80             80             80
    Heads                       2              2              2
  (1) Note: Format capacity is diskette dependent.

SCSI Fixed Disk Drive Characteristics:

                                      80MB          160MB
                                   ----------     ---------
    Formatted Capacity (2)           80 MB         160 MB
    Average Seek Time                17 ms          16 ms
    Data Transfer Rate              1.35Mb/sec     1.5Mb/sec
    Average latency                  8.3ms          8.3ms
    Sector Interleave                1to1           1to1

(2) Note: The licensed Systems Programs which include Basic Input Output System
(BIOS), set configuration and features, test, backup/restore and update System
Programs, are stored in three million bytes of protected partition on the fixed
disk drive.

The formatted capacity is therefore reduced by three million bytes and the
total user accessible capacity may vary slightly based on operating
environments.  This partition is not affected when the drive is formatted using
the Format command provided in DOS or OS/2.

The Licensed System Programs are also provided on the 7546 Industrial Computer
Reference Diskette.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Bench Top:
        Width:  440mm (17.3 inches)
        Depth:  450mm (17.7 inches)
        Height: 152mm (6.0 inches)
        Weight: 15.9kg (35.0 lbs)
    o   Rack Mount:
        Width:  483mm (19.0 inches)
        Depth:  450mm (17.7 inches)
        Height: 177mm (7.0 inches)
        Weight: 15.9kg (35.0 lbs)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. 7546 IBM INDUSTRIAL COMPUTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM 7546 Industrial Computer is a Micro Channel* system designed to
complement and expand the IBM industrial computer line.  As with the other IBM
industrial computers, the 7546 provides for operation in extended physical
environments and in mission-critical applications where loss of power source
for brief periods is of concern.  The various 7546 models and optional features
offer a range of functional capability in systems that are IBM Micro Channel
compatible.  Installation in standard 19 inch racks or on a desk or bench top
is supported.  Internal battery backup capability is also available.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Operation in higher temperature environments
    o   Internal battery backup capability - optional with 205W power
        supply - to protect against brief loss of AC power (approx. 10
        seconds)
    o   Rack mounting capability
    o   Range of available microprocessors, based on individual model:
        -   IBM 486SLC2 50/25MHz
        -   Intel i486DX2 66/33MHz
    o   Up to 16MB or 32MB of 70 nanosecond (ns) system memory, based on
        individual model
    o   Support for 2MB, 4MB, and 8MB Single In-Line Memory Modules
        (SIMMs) (refer to Limitations section)
    o   Up to 5 available adapter slots, based on individual model
    o   A total of 4 storage device bays (2 available for expansion)
    o   Fixed disk drive capacity up to 2.2GB, based on model and
        configuration
    o   2.88MB diskette drive with media sense, providing support for the
        720KB, the 1.44MB, and the new 2.88MB diskettes
    o   XGA-2 graphics

The 7546 Industrial Computer supports the customer's business objectives by
providing processor and graphics performance required by many users, in a
system that is capable of performing in difficult environments and with
protection against brief power interruptions.  The Micro Channel architecture
offers a fast, efficient, and reliable data flow with a large selection of
optional adapters.  The 7546 Industrial Computer, with its optional features
and compatible operating systems and applications,  provides a solution for a
wide range of applications.  With the enhanced performance available in the
newest models, the 7546 can now be used in additional applications and areas
that may not have been considered in the past due to system performance
limitations or cost.  Jointly with other systems of the Industrial Computer and
PS/2* families, IBM can provide a total stand-alone or network system solution,
fully expandable to the plant floor or other areas with demanding environments
and the need for system assurance through power-source fluctuations.

The high degree of compatibility between the 7546 and other IBM Industrial
Computers and PS/2 devices protects the investment the customer has made in
related hardware and software.  The past investment can now further be applied
to plant floor and other areas that would not be fully suited to standard PS/2
systems.  The customer's investment is protectecd with processor enhancements,
and with an extensive list of supported Micro Channel options.  The system may
be upgraded with the addition of up to five adapters and two internal I/O
devices. Up to seven SCSI devices can be attached, three internally and four
externally.  The DOS and OS/2* operating systems and compatible software are
supported.  The available flexible capability for both power supply and
mounting configuration will protect the investment in the 7546 should customer
needs in these areas change after the initial system purchase.

The 7546 Industrial Computer supports application development and growth
through expansion features, and expanded microprocessor performance limits. The
standard system memory may be expanded to 16MB or 32MB (model dependent). Up to
five available 16-bit or four available 16/32-bit Micro Channel slots (model
dependent) allow the addition of options for additional applications. Two
available direct access storage devices (DASD) bays provide for the addition of
DASD devices (fixed disks, diskette drives, optical disk, CD-ROM, and so on).
With the addition of larger hard disk drive capability, up to 2.2GB of internal
disk drive capacity is available.

The 7546 Industrial Computer increases user productivity by providing a range
of microprocessor, DASD, memory, and graphics performance capabilities that can
be matched with users' needs.  The available high performance content is
significantly above that previously available in the IBM industrial computer
line.  The system is provided with flexible bench top or rack-mount capability.
The rack mount configuration provides for front or rear service access.

The 7546 Industrial Computer is offered in multiple models to accomodate
varying customer needs and prices.  Within a particular model, additional
content flexibility is offered through customer selectable IBM-installed
feature content.  Model content and selectable IBM-installed features are as
listed below.

MODEL A11 (SEE SECTION ON MODEL A12) Base Content:

    o   50/25MHz IBM 486SLC2 microprocessor (Up to approximately 100%
        performance improvement compared to the 80386SLC 20MHz system)
    o   8MB memory SIMM (70ns) (maximum 16MB) (Limited to 15.914MB
        available for customer use)
    o   5 available 16-bit adapter slots
    o   Selectable and upgradable disk drive capacity, power supply, and
        mounting configuration
    o   2.88MB diskette drive with media sense, providing support for
        the 720KB, the 1.44MB, and the new 2.88MB diskettes
    o   ISO compliant, faster, high-resolution, industry standard XGA
        graphics
    o   Increased capacity, fast access SCSI hard disk drives
    o   Enhanced security features and Vital Product Data

MODEL 411 (SEE SECTION ON MODEL 412) Base Content:

    o   66/33MHz Intel i486DX2 microprocessor (Up to approximately 60%
        performance improvement compared to the 486SLC2 50/25MHz system)
    o   8MB memory SIMM (70ns) (maximum 32MB)
    o   4 available 16/32-bit adapter slots
    o   Selectable and upgradable disk drive capacity, power supply, and
        mounting configuration
    o   2.88MB diskette drive with media sense, providing support for
        the 720KB, the 1.44MB, and the new 2.88MB diskettes
    o   ISO compliant, faster, high-resolution XGA-2 Adapter/A installed
    o   Bus master cached SCSI controller and increased capacity, fast
        access SCSI hard disk drives

There are three categories of features, each containing two alternative items
to be selected at the time the system is ordered.  One and only one of the
features in each category MUST be selected and ordered with the system order.
The categories and alternative features available are as follows.  There are
different prices associated with the different feature selections.

    o   Front Cover - for Bench Top or Rack Mount Use of the System
        -   Feature 6760 - Bench Top Front Cover
        -   Feature 6761 - Rack Mount Front Cover
    o   Power Supply - With or Without a Battery Backup Capability
        -   Feature 6772 - 197 Watt, No Battery Backup Capability
        -   Feature 6773 - 205 Watt, Supports Optional Backup Battery
    o   Fixed Disk Drive Content - Installed as a Single Drive
        -   Feature 6912 - 212MB SCSI Hard Disk Drive
        -   Feature 6913 - 400MB SCSI Hard Disk Drive
        -   Feature 6914 - 1000MB (1GB) SCSI Hard Disk Drive

All models of the 7546 Industrial Computer are Customer Set-up.  Set-up
instructions will be in the specific supported language for a given country.

The IBM 7546 Industrial Computer has four DASD bays for storage devices, and
five 16-bit Micro Channel expansion slots.  It is a benchtop/rackmount system
which is capable of operating in the extended environment of a plant floor or
other demanding area.  The 7546 Industrial Computer also offers a means to
protect system operation against brief losses of normal AC power.

The 7546 Industrial Computer standard features include:

    o   Integrated on the system board or riser:
        -   A 50/25MHz IBM 486SLC2 or 66/33MHz 486DX2 microprocessor
        -   An internal memory cache controller with 16KB memory cache
        -   Three system board memory sockets with 1 - 8MB SIMM
            installed (70ns memory) (maximum 16MB) A11
        -   Four system board memory sockets with 1 - 8MB SIMM installed
            (70ns memory) (maximum 32MB)  411
        -   Integrated system board diskette controller supporting up to
            three devices
        -   Integrated system board SCSI controller supporting up to
            seven devices, three internal and four external
            --  Supports SCSI Common Command Set Version 4.B (SCSI-2
                Compliant)
            --  Local Bus increasing data transfer speed
            --  Support for mixed SCSI devices and capacities
            --  Attachment of up to 7 SCSI physical devices (internal
                and external)
            --  Allows multiple SCSI initiators for device sharing
            --  SCSI Data Transfer Rate - up to 5.0 MB/sec
            --  Supports Synchronous and Asynchronous SCSI Data Transfers
            --  Supports disconnection/reconnection of SCSI targets
            --  Automatic external SCSI bus detection (disables internal
                planar terminator automatically).
            --  Slew rate controlled SCSI drivers and filtered SCSI
                receivers for high data integrity.
        -   Enhanced XGA graphics chip set
            Supports Interlaced and Non-Interlaced IBM displays, meets
            Industry Standards Organization (ISO) requirements.  The
            enhanced XGA graphics supports the following modes:
            --  Text Mode MFI 2 thru 5
            --  Graphics Mode 640 x 480 with 256 colors
            --  Graphics Mode 640 x 480 with 64000 colors
            --  Graphics Mode 800 x 600 with 256 colors
            --  Graphics Mode 800 x 600 with 64000 colors
            --  Graphics Mode 1024 x 768 with 16 colors
            --  Graphics Mode 1024 x 768 with 256 colors
            The system maintains compatibility with CGA, EGA, and VGA
            modes.
        -   TOD clock
        -   Battery
        -   Five 16-bit Micro Channel feature card slots
        -   Standard Device External Ports/Connectors:
            --  Enhanced Graphics Array (Supports Interlaced and Non-
                Interlaced IBM displays)
            --  Keyboard
            --  Pointing Device
            --  SCSI port
            --  Two 9 pin Serial/asynchronous port (FIFO and DMA serial
                support)
            --  Parallel port (DMA parallel support)
    o   One 2.88MB 3.5-inch diskette drive with media sense
    o   Selectable 212MB, 400MB, or 1GB installed SCSI hard disk drive
    o   One empty bay for half-high 3.5-inch or 5.25-inch DASD devices
    o   One empty bay for half-high 3.5-inch DASD devices or an internal
        battery
    o   A selectable IBM installed power supply (197 Watt standard or
        205 Watt which supports an optional backup battery)
    o   Keyboard
    o   Enhanced Security
        The following enhanced security functions are standard in this
            model:
        -   Lockable cover
        -   Power On Password
        -   Keyboard Password via OS/2
        -   Privileged-Access Password
        -   Secured Initial Program Load source
        -   Secured Setup configuration
        -   Software system identification Vital Product Data (VPD)
            enabled A11
        -   Secured removable media via OS/2 (Optional via the optional
            Enhanced 2.88MB Diskette Drive). A11

SUMMARY A11

    o   Processor:  486SLC2
    o   Speed (MHz):  50/25
    o   Internal Memory Cache:  16KB
    o   Memory (70ns):  8MB
    o   Max. Memory (70ns):  16MB
    o   Hard Disk:  212MB, 400MB or 1GB
    o   Diskette Drive:  2.88MB

SUMMARY A11

    o   Processor:  486DX2
    o   Speed (MHz):  66/33
    o   Memory (70ns):  8MB
    o   Max. Memory (70ns):  32MB
    o   Hard Disk:  212MB, 400MB or 1GB
    o   Floppy Drive:  2.88MB

2.88MB Diskette Drive Characteristics:

    Diskette size:              1 MB           2 MB           4 MB
                              ----------     ----------     ---------
    Formatted Capacity (1)      720 KB         1.44 MB        2.88 MB
    Bytes per sector            512            512            512
    Sectors per track           9              18             36
    Cylinders                   80             80             80
    Heads                       2              2              2
    (1) Note: Format capacity is diskette dependent.

A single keyboard is provided with and included in the price of the 7546
systems.  Two different keyboard types are available for customer selection at
the time of system order.  The enhanced industrial keyboard is 492 mm (19.4
inches) long by 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide.  The space-saving industrial keyboard
is 406 mm (16.0 inches) long by 190 mm (7.5 inches) wide.  Both keyboards are
58 mm (2.3 inches) high, and provide the same functions, some of which are
combined on common keys on the space-saving keyboard.

The system order will default to the enhanced 101-key industrial keyboard in US
English unless the alternative space saving 84-key industrial keyboard (in US
English) is ordered.  No keyboard needs to be ordered if the 101-key English
keyboard is desired.  If the space saving keyboard is desired, it must be
ordered along with the system order as feature #6903.

The system will ship with a single power cord that is included in the price of
the system.  The cord provided is a default power cord, based on the country of
order.  No cord needs to be ordered if the default cord is desired.  In some
countries an approved alternative cord is available for ordering in place of
the normal default cord.  If the alternative cord is desired it must be
specifically ordered along with the system order.  When ordered, the
alternative cord will be shipped with the system in place of the standard
default cord.

In countries that support the #6878 power cord, a similar cord is available for
ordering as an additional 200-250V Type 5 power cord.  Feature #6374 provides
this additional cord at an additional charge.  When ordered, this cord will be
provided in addition to the default or selected cord that is included in the
price of the system.

The 7546 Industrial Computer contains licensed system programs, which include
BIOS, set configuration and features, test, copy an option diskette,
backup/restore, and update system program.  These system programs are stored in
a three-million byte protected partition on the fixed-disk drive.  The Initial
Machine Load (IML) loads the BIOS program from the fixed-disk drive into system
memory.  BIOS provides the hardware instructions and interfaces designed to
support the standard features of the 7546 and to maintain compatibility with
many software programs currently operating under DOS and OS/2 on the other IBM
Industrial Computer systems, the IBM Personal Computer XT*, IBM Personal
Computer AT*, and the IBM PS/2 family.

Due to the high level of integration, features such as the PS/2 Micro Channel
memory adapter options are not supported.

Because of the new 2.88MB diskette drive, earlier versions or releases of
operating systems or applications may not format diskette media correctly. Use
of the proper level of operating system along with the new 2.88MB diskette
drive will provide media sense of the 720KB, 1.44MB, and 2.88MB diskettes,
giving greater ease in formatting, reading, and writing diskettes.

The IBM 7546 Industrial Computer is designed to maintain compatibility with the
following previously announced products.  Feature code numbers apply worldwide
unless otherwise noted.

The user should ensure that the total electrical power required to support the
desired system configuration is within the power provided by the IBM 7546
Industrial Computer system.

For information on compatible machine type products listed, refer to the
individual Sales Manuals for those products.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Bench Top:
            Width:  440mm (17.3 inches)
            Depth:  448mm (17.6 inches)
            Height: 170mm (6.7 inches)
            Weight: 15.9kg (35.0 lbs)
    o   Rack Mount:
            Width:  483mm (19.0 inches)
            Depth:  448mm (17.6 inches)
            Height: 177mm (7.0 inches)
            Weight: 15.9kg (35.0 lbs)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Note: Attachment of any external PS/2 products requires
that the operating environment be within the limits defined for those products.
(See Product Announcements and Sales Manual information for those products.)

    o   Ambient Air Temperature:
        -   Operating: 0 to 50C (32 to 122F)
            Notes:
            1.  Installation of 320MB, 400MB or 1GB SCSI disk drives is
            restricted to the lower two center DASD bays in the system.
            These devices may not be installed in the upper right bay
            position.
            2.  The maximum operating temperature is reduced to 45C
            (113F) when one or more 320MB or 400MB SCSI Fixed Disk
            Drives are installed in the system, either as shipped from
            IBM or as a separate feature.
            3.  The maximum operating temperature is reduced to 40C
            (104F) when one 1GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive is installed in the
            system, either as shipped from IBM or as a separate feature.
            4.  The maximum operating temperature is reduced to 35C
            (95F) when two 1GB SCSI Hard Disk Drives are installed in
            the system.
        5.  The maximum operating temperature is reduced to 40C (104F)
            when the PS/2 3.5-Inch Rewritable Optical Drive (FC 0162) is
            installed in the system and media is in the drive.
        -   Non-operating: 0 to 55C (32 to 131F)
        -   Shipping: -40 to 60C (-40 to 140F)
    o   Relative Humidity: 5 to 95 percent (non-condensing)
    o   Wet Bulb:  29.4C (85F)
    o   Altitude:
        -   Operating: 0 to 7,000 feet (0 to 2135 meters)
        -   Non-operating: 0 to 15,000 feet (0 to 4575 meters)
    o   BTU Output:
        -   As-Shipped Configuration: 140 BTU/Hour
        -   Maximum Configuration:
            --  1033 BTU/Hour (197W Power Supply)
            --  999 BTU/Hour (205W Power Supply)
    o   Electrical:
        -   Power Supply: 197 watts or 205 watts (as selected when
            ordered)
        -   197W - Dual voltage controlled by manual switch
        -   205W - Auto-ranging (no manual switch)
        -   100 to 125 (nominal) VAC; 50 to 60 Hz
        -   200 to 240 (nominal) VAC; 50 to 60 Hz
    o   Noise Level: Class 0
    o   Corrosive Gas Contaminants:
        -   Total reactive sulfur: 3.2 micrograms/cubic meter
        -   Sulfur dioxide: 100 micrograms/cubic meter
        -   Nitrogen dioxide: 140 micrograms/cubic meter
        -   Ozone: 98 micrograms/cubic meter
        -   Acidic gaseous chlorine: 1.5 micrograms/cubic meter
    o   Particulate Contaminants:
        -   Suspended particulates: 500 micrograms/cubic meter
        -   Benzene soluble organics: 30 micrograms/cubic meter
        -   Settleable particulates: 1500 micrograms/square centimeter/
            30 days
    o   Shock:
        -   Operating: 30G at 3 milliseconds duration
    o   Vibration:
        -   Operating: 0.27G RMS random from 5Hz to 500Hz
    o   Equipment Approvals:
        -   US MS, AP, Canada, IBM LA:
            --  UL Listed (UL 1950, 1st Edition)
            --  CSA Certified (CSA22.2 No.950-M1990)
            --  FCC Class A
            --  VCCI Class 1
        -   EMEA:
            --  IOP
            --  VDE 0805
            --  TUV (EN60950/IEC 950)
            --  CISPR 22 Class A
            --  BABT - UK General Approval NS/G/J/1000003
            --  IEC Standard Compliance
                o   Shock (IEC 68-2-27) - 30G at 3 milliseconds duration
                    (1/2 sine wave)
                o   Vibration (IEC 68-2-6) - Random: 0.27G RMS from 5HZ
                    to 500Hz
                o   Electromagnetic Compatibility
                    -   Electro static discharge (IEC 801-2/EN55101-2)
                        Level 3, 6KV
                    -   Radiated susceptibility (IEC 801-3/EN55101-3)
                        Level 3, 10V/m
                    -   Fast transients/bursts (IEC 801-4) Level 3, 1KV
                    -   Power line surges (IEC 801-5) Level 3, 1KV
                    -   Conducted Immunity (IEC 801-6/EN55022) Level 2
                    -   Power line harmonics (IEC 555-2/EN60555)
                o   Enclosure (IEC 297-1) (Rack-mount units only)
                o   Environment (IEC 529) IP50 (Can be increased by
                    using an appropriate rack)

Only the options and features in the Compatible Product List and Special
Features sections of this Sales Manual are supported on the noted models of the
7546 system.

The 7546 supports only 2MB, 4MB, and 8MB 70 nanosecond single in-line memory
modules (SIMM). Models A11 and A12:

With 24-bit addressing, the maximum addressable memory space is 16 megabytes
(MB).  The system reserves 128KB of memory when BIOS/POST is copied to Random
Access Memory (RAM) for execution in systems with less than 16MB of planar
memory.  When 16MB of memory is installed there will be 15.914MB (15936KB)
available for use.  SIMMs may be intermixed in any combination with no impact
on system performance.

Models 411 and 412: With 32-bit addressing, the maximum addressable memory
space is 32MB.  The system reserves 128KB of memory when BIOS/POST is copied to
RAM for execution in systems with less than 32MB of planar memory.  SIMMs may
be intermixed in any combination with no impact on system performance.

The 7546 has four available internal bays for DASD devices, as noted in the
list of supported DASD features.  Two of the four bays are accessible for
removeable-media devices.  When the 205W power supply is installed in the 7546
with the optional backup battery in place, the maximum number of DASD devices
that can be installed internally is reduced to three.  This is because the
battery is located in a bay that could otherwise accept a DASD device.  Two of
the three bays remaining with the battery installed are accessible for
removeable-media devices.  Installation of 320MB, 400MB or 1GB SCSI disk drives
is restricted to the lower two center DASD bays in the system.  These devices
may not be installed in the upper right bay position.

The maximum 50C operating temperature of the 7546 will be reduced when specific
devices are attached to or installed in the system.  Refer to the Operating
Environment section.

The 7546 is intended to be operated in a horizontal position.  While the system
will operate in a vertical position (left or right side down), no standard
mounting capability is provided for this orientation.  The user is responsible
to provide appropriate means if vertical orientation is desired.

The licensed system programs include BIOS, set configuration and features, copy
an option diskette, test, backup/restore, and update system program. These
licensed system programs are stored in three million bytes of protected
partition on the fixed disk drive.  The formatted capacity is therefore reduced
by three million bytes and the total user-accessible capacity may vary slightly
based on operating environments.  This partition is not affected when the drive
is formatted using the FORMAT command provided in DOS or OS/2.  The licensed
system programs are also provided on the IBM 7546 Industrial Computer Reference
Diskette.  High performance BIOS uses 128KB of system memory.

Display adapter cards that use the Auxiliary Video Extension, when installed in
a system, require installation in slot 2 and attachment of a display to the
system video connector during configuration of the system.

The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) SCSI specification for the
total SCSI cable length connected to a SCSI interface is six meters
(approximately 19.7 ft.) maximum. The length of the SCSI cable inside the 7546
is one meter. Therefore, the total length of all SCSI cables for external
devices that operate from the external SCSI connector may not exceed a maximum
of five meters (approximately 16.5 ft.), including the cables inside each SCSI
device.

The IBM 7546 Industrial Computer requires an analog display (IBM 7544 or 7554
Industrial Displays, or equivalent).

Operating system software must be provided for the 7546 Industrial Computer.
The following levels of IBM operating system products are compatible with the
noted 7546 Industrial Computer models.

MODELS A11 AND A12

    o   IBM DOS Version 5.0
    o   IBM DOS Version 5.00.1
    o   IBM DOS Version 5.02
    o   IBM DOS Version J5.0/V
    o   IBM OS/2 Version 2.00.1
    o   IBM OS/2 Version J2.0
    o   IBM 4680 Operating System Version 4.0
MODELS 411 AND 412

    o   IBM DOS Version 5.0
    o   IBM DOS Version 5.0 with ISO Fonts
    o   IBM DOS Version 5.02
    o   IBM OS/2 Version 2.00.1
    o   AIX PS/2 Version 1.3

The A12 model is shipped with no publications.  The system reference diskette
is provided.  The A12 model is restricted to specific customers. The following
publications are shipped with the product A11

             Title                  Order Number
    -----------------------------   ------------
       Initial Group of
         Publications                 S41G-3751
           - Setup
           - Installing Options
           - User's Handbook
           - Problem Solving
     PS/2 XGA Device Drivers
       Installation Instructions      S41G-2928

The 412 model is shipped with no publications.  The system reference diskette
is provided.  The 412 model is restricted to specific customers. The following
publications are shipped with the product 411.

             Title                  Order Number
    -----------------------------   ------------
       Initial Group of
         Publications                 S41G-3714
           - Setup
           - Installing Options
           - User's Handbook
           - Problem Solving
     PS/2 XGA Device Drivers
       Installation Instructions      S41G-2928


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. 7552 IBM INDUSTRIAL COMPUTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

7552 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF May 4, 1992)

Double click here to display picture

The 7552 Industrial Computer is designed for applications where the computer is
an integral part of plant operation environment.  The 7552 is designed to meet
the reliability, serviceability, and environmental requirements of the
industrial market.  It can be installed in industrial panels (e.g., NEMA
enclosures) without requiring air conditioning.  The 7552 can also be mounted
in a 19-inch rack or can be floor mounted.  The Remote Terminal Interface (RTI)
is an adapter that is installed in an IBM Industrial Computer (5531, 7531,
7532, 7552) to provide the interface to connect the IBM Industrial Computer to
the 7552.

MODEL 040

Consists of processor, frame and backplane, power supply (170 Watts), Processor
Card in a Shroud, System Resource Card in a Shroud, Card Shrouds (7), and
"Installation and Operation Guide" with Diagnostic Diskette.

HIGHLIGHTS The 7552 integrates the following features and functions:

    o   Industrial packaging (can be installed in industrial panels as well as
        19-inch industrial rack and floor mounted)
    o   All components are pluggable in the frame including the processor cards,
        the power supply, and disk/diskette module
    o   The processor cards, the memory card, and the feature cards are enclosed
        in shrouds to protect components on the cards while the cards are being
        handled
    o   Extended temperature operation
    o   Extended vibration and shock operation
    o   Meets IEEE 472-1974 surge test
    o   Extended corrosive gasses operation
    o   Extended particulates operations
    o   High reliability
    o   Ease of Service (malfunction indicators and easy-to-access pluggable
        modules)
    o   Orderly shutdown in case of power failure (battery backup on entire
        system unit)
    o   Orderly startup after a power shutdown or machine malfunction
    o   Display and keyboard not required for system operation
    o   Single-bit error correction and double-bit error detection on all memory
        (Error Correcting Code - ECC)
    o   Digital outputs to activate external alarms in case of a machine or
        operation malfunction

The 7552 is based on a high-performance, 16/24-bit, 10M Hz Intel 80286
microprocessor, and 512Kb of memory standard.  The system memory may be further
expanded with memory card and 512Kb memory options.

The 7552 contains two cooling fans.  An optional filter package is available to
extend the particulate specification of the 7552.

DIMENSIONS:

    Width:  436.8mm (17.2 inches) (19 inches with mounting flanges)
    Depth:  256mm (10.0 inches)
    Height:  533mm (21.0 inches)
    Weight:
        Frame assembly:  5.0kg (11 lbs)
        Model 40:  15.3kg (34 lbs)

MODEL 540

    o   Increased standard fixed disk storage capacity to 20Mb
    o   Increased total disk storage capacity up to 41.44Mb
    o   Optional 20Mb fixed disk drive
    o   Optional 1.44Mb, 3.5-inch diskette drive
    o   Standard keyboard
    o   Support for 3278/79 and 5250 emulation.

The 7552 Industrial Computer Model 540 consists of:  frame, and backplane,
power supply (170 watts), processor card in shroud (including 512Kb of memory),
system resource card in shroud, Disk/Diskette Adapter Module II (Adapter Card
and 2x Wide Shroud), one 20Mb fixed disk drive (in Disk/Diskette Adapter Module
II), five card shrouds (available for optional cards), "Installation and
Operation Guide" with Diagnostic Diskette, keyboard, and cable.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Standard 20Mb fixed disk drive
    o   Increased total disk storage capacity
    o   IBM Operating System/2 support
    o   20Mb fixed disk drive option
    o   Standard Keyboard
    o   1.44Mb diskette drive option
    o   Support for 3278/79 Emulation Adapter
    o   Support for 5250 Display Station Emulation Adapter


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. 7561\7562 IBM INDUSTRIAL COMPUTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

7561 111 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF AUGUST 18, 1993)

7562 111 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF AUGUST 18, 1993)

Double click here to display picture

The 7561/7562 Industrial Computers are designed for industrial plant floor
environments where a system that can function in harsh physical conditions is
required. The system is highlighted by Micro Channel* architecture with a 20M
Hz 80386 32-bit microprocessor with a capability of supporting up to 16Mb of
memory (8Mb on planar), 80Mb of disk storage**, a 1.44Mb diskette drive, and
VGA graphics.

7561 MODEL 111 Bench Top/80Mb hard file

    o   7561 Industrial Computer-Ship Group (110V AC) (#6461)
    o   7561 Industrial Computer-Ship Group (220V AC) (#6496)

7562 MODEL 111 Rack Mount/80Mb hard file

    o   7562 Industrial Computer-Ship Group (110V AC) (#6577)
    o   7562 Industrial Computer-Ship Group (220V AC) (#6578)

7561 MODEL 211 (PF1175) Bench Top/160Mb hard file (Customer Installable)

    o   7561 Industrial Computer-Ship Group (110V AC) (#6461)
    o   7561 Industrial Computer-Ship Group (220V AC) (#6496)

7562 MODEL 211 (PF1178) Rack Mount/160Mb hard file (Customer Installable)

    o   7562 Industrial Computer-Ship Group (110V AC) (#6577)
    o   7562 Industrial Computer-Ship Group (220V AC) (#6578)

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Micro Channel Architecture with a 32 bit bus structure
    o   Processing speed - 80386 at 20M Hz
    o   85 nanosecond memory, expandable to 8Mb on the system board
    o   VGA graphics on planar board, four available I/O expansion slots
    o   80Mb fixed disk, 1.44Mb (3.5-inch) 1/3 high diskette drive
    o   Optional 20M Hz 80387 Co-processor
    o   180 Watt Universal, automatic voltage sensing power supply
        -   Battery Back-up Feature (Requires optional battery, F/C #6669)
        -   Provides continuous operation through brief main power interruptions
            (nominal 10 seconds default)
    o   Advanced high-performance Intel 80386 microprocessor at 20M Hz clock
        speed
    o   32-bit addressing
    o   32-bit data path
    o   ROM-based automatic power-on self test of system components
    o   BASIC language interpreter
    o   128 bytes ROM
        -   Access Time:  170ns maximum
        -   Cycle Time:  180ns
    o   8086 compatible real address mode
    o   Limited protected virtual address mode functions
    o   2Mb of dynamic RAM on the system board
        -   Access Time:  85ns
        -   Cycle Time:  160ns (zero wait state)
    o   Direct access fixed-disk and diskette drive
    o   System clock/calendar/configuration with CMOS RAM and battery backup
    o   Directionally mounted speaker
    o   Diskette area cover door keylock
    o   Bi-directional keyboard interface
    o   Enhanced keyboard
    o   Power-on indicator (green)
    o   Four expansion slots:
        -   Two 16-bit Micro Channel expansion slots w/video auxiliary interface
        -   Two standard 32-bit Micro Channel expansion slots
    o   Eight-Channel Direct Memory Access (DMA)
    o   16-level interrupt
    o   Three programmable timers
    o   Cooling fan with removable filter
    o   80387 Math Co-processor socket

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    o   IBM 7561 Industrial Computer:
        Width:  436mm (17.2 inches)
        Depth:  420mm (16.5 inches)
        Height:  146mm (5.75 inches)
        Weight:  12.4kg (27.3 lbs)
    o   IBM 7562 Industrial Computer:
        Width:  487mm (19 inches)
        Depth:  627mm (24.5 inches)
        Height:  267mm (10.5 inches)
        Weight:  27.6kg (60.7 lbs)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. 7568 IBM INDUSTIRAL COMPUTER (GEARBOX MODEL 800) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

7568 MODEL 040 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF May 4, 1992)

7568 MODEL 150 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF May 4, 1992)

7568 MODEL C40 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF January 6, 1993)

Double click here to display picture

The GEARBOX* Model 800 is a member of the family of industrial computer
products.  With increased environmental tolerance, ease of service and flexible
mounting, the 7568 system permits the customer to meet the requirements of
mission critical server and control applications.  The Micro Channel* bus in
this industrialized chassis form factor allows upgrades in processor, storage
and I/O for installed systems, and support for selected PS/2* Micro Channel
compatible features.

The unique form factor of the GEARBOX Model 800 provides a backplane into which
all functional elements are pluggable, including the processor, video, SCSI and
other standard Micro Channel features.  A 300 Watt world wide power supply is
also pluggable with quick disconnect.  This provides new levels of service and
accessibility with front access for all elements, resulting in a reduced time
to repair.

High availability is achieved with special hardware features and the ability
for the user to create and control a predictable sequence for start up and
shutdown.  A non-volatile processor status word provides the status of power,
temperature limits, internal errors and software shutdown checkpoints. The user
controls what actions occur in the event of system failure.  External digital
output permits external signaling and writable hex displays can show program
sequence and status.  Internal battery back up and availability of external DC
power supply connection provide power assurance alternatives.

The GEARBOX Model 800 is designed specifically to operate in demanding factory
floor or other industrial environments.  The Model 800 can be used in a wide
range of applications, including distributed and stand-alone large and small
cell control, production monitoring, quality monitoring and control, and other
applications where high availability under difficult environments is important.
With recent enhancements to disk drive capacity, memory, and processor speed,
the Model 800 can also be used in LAN server applications, taking full
advantage of the GEARBOX design to provide a system with high availability  and
the necessary functional capability to satisfy this role. Panel and rack
mounting are available.

The introduction of the D40 model (7568-D40), further strengthens the
capability of the GEARBOX line through the availability of an Intel486** DX2 50
MHz based processor card system.  A customer installable 486 DX2 50MHz
Processor Card feature (#6872 in US, AP, Canada, and IBM LA); (#2773 in EMEA),
is also available for replacement of the processor cards on previously
installed 7568 systems.  In addition, the D40 supports up to 32Mb of error
correcting code (ECC) memory, fully supports faster graphics through the PS/2*
XGA Display Adapter/A feature (#5887), and can support up to four SCSI fixed
disk drives with the use of the 7568 Auxiliary DASD Module (#6885). New SCSI
fixed disk drive features are now available, in both 400 million byte (Mb) and
1004Mb (1.0Gb) capacities.

User memory is provided in either 4Mb or 8Mb levels and memory module types
(customer selectable at the time of system order).  The D40 also includes
customer selectability of either the enhanced 101-key/102-key industrial
keyboard or the new space saving 84-key industrial keyboard, and provides a
customer selected GEARBOX Language Extension product as part of the base system
order.  An internal NICAD battery (#6221) is also included with the system
order.  With these changes, the model D40 provides a complete customer
solution, with outstanding configuration flexibility.

Attachment of the PS/2 3.5-Inch Rewritable Optical Drive in the PS/2 SCSI
(Small Computer System Interface) Storage Enclosure continues to be supported
through the PF1199 RPQ.  Note that attachment of the PS/2 optical drive reduces
the environmental limits to those supported by that product (see feature #0162
information).

MODEL C40 Includes:

    o   Frame and Backplane
    o   Power Supply
    o   Processor Card (80486DX/25MHz Microprocessor, with 4Mb System Memory)
    o   System Resource Card
    o   Enhanced Keyboard and Cable
    o   DASD Content as Selected with System Order, either
        -   No DASD Content (Nine Card Shrouds - empty in seven positions), or
        -   DASD Content
            --  120Mb or 320Mb SCSI Disk Drive (as selected)
            --  Disk Module (DASD Shroud and Adapter Card)
            --  1.44Mb Diskette Drive
            --  Seven Card Shrouds (empty in five positions)
    o   Installation and Operation Guide

MODEL D40 Includes:

    o   Frame and Backplane
    o   Power Supply
    o   Processor Card
        (Intel486 DX2 50 MHz Microprocessor, with Selectable 4Mb or 8Mb
        System Memory)
    o   System Resource Card
    o   Selected Keyboard and Cable
    o   DASD Content as Selected with System Order, either
        -   No DASD Content (Nine Card Shrouds - empty in seven positions), or
        -   DASD Content
            --  120Mb, 400Mb, or 1.0Gb SCSI Disk Drive (as selected)
            --  Disk Module (DASD Shroud and Adapter Card)
            --  1.44Mb Diskette Drive
            --  Seven Card Shrouds (empty in five positions)
    o   Internal NICAD Battery
    o   Installation and Operation Guide
    o   Selected GEARBOX Language Extension Product

An operating system program must be provided.  Language extensions for the
selected Operating System are recommended to take full advantage of the unique
error notification and orderly shutdown/startup capabilities of the GEARBOX
Model 800 system.

The D40 model includes a customer selection of one of the available language
extension products at the time of system order. NOTE: Generally, the latest
Corrective Service Diskette (CSD) for a given operating system should be used
with the GEARBOX Model 800.

The following operating systems are supported for the noted models.

Model C40:

    o   IBM DOS 3.30 (Program Number 6280-060) (dual media)
    o   IBM DOS 4.0 (Program Number 6280-256) (3.5-inch media)
    o   IBM DOS 5.0 (Program Number 84F9-775) (3.5-inch media)
    o   IBM OS/2 Standard Edition 1.2 (Program Number 6024-926) (3.5-inch media) (1)
    o   IBM OS/2 Standard Edition 1.3 (Program Number 84F7-588) (3.5-inch media) (1)
    o   IBM OS/2 Extended Edition 1.2 (Program Number 15F7-143) (3.5-inch media) (1)
    o   IBM OS/2 Extended Edition 1.3 (Program Number 15F7-195) (3.5-inch media) (1)
    o   IBM Operating System/2 Version 2.0
    o   OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0 -- Entry (with OS/2 SE 1.3 or 2.0)
    o   OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0 -- Advanced (with OS/2 SE 1.3)
    o   AIX PS/2 Version 1.2.1 (Program Number 5713-AEQ) (Requires PTF #210800 or
        higher)

Model D40:

    o   IBM DOS 5.0 (2)
    o   OS/2 Standard Edition 1.30.2 (2)
    o   OS/2 Extended Edition 1.30.2 (2)
    o   Operating System/2 Version 2.0
    o   Extended Services for OS/2 Version 1.0
    o   OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0 -- Entry (with OS/2 SE 1.3 or 2.0)
    o   OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0 -- Advanced (with OS/2 SE 1.3)
    o   AIX PS/2 Version 1.2.1 (Program Number 5713-AEQ) (Requires PTF #210800 or
        higher)

Note (1):   OS/2 SE and EE Versions 1.2 and 1.3 will result in a "system hang"
on the   7568-C40 if "Control-Alt-Delete" is entered through the keyboard.
C-A-D   should not normally be used with the GEARBOX Model 800.  The keyswitch
"Reset" position is provided for this purpose.  If C-A-D is entered the
system will have to be powered down and restarted, or the keyswitch can   be
used to reset the system.  The 1.30.1 CSD for these editions   eliminates the
"system hang" occurrence with this model.

Note (2):   While the D40 model may be generally compatible with selected
earlier   versions of these operating systems, the earlier levels are no longer
formally supported by IBM.  In addition, certain D40 hardware   capabilities
may not be supported by such earlier versions (for example   DOS 3.3 supports
no more than two fixed  disk drives).   OS/2 SE and EE Versions 1.2 and 1.3
will result in a "system hang" on the   7568-D40 if "Control-Alt-Delete" is
entered through the keyboard.  C-A-D   should not normally be used with the
GEARBOX Model 800.  The keyswitch   "Reset" position is provided for this
purpose.  If C-A-D is entered the   system will have to be powered down and
restarted, or the keyswitch can   be used to reset the system.

The GEARBOX Language Extension products provide program calls to interact with
the extended hardware features of the GEARBOX, such as AC power fail
notification for orderly shutdown, and the ability for the user to operate a
discrete digital output or write to the hex display on the processor card.

    o   GEARBOX Language Extensions for PC DOS (Program Number 5601-052)
    o   GEARBOX Language Extensions for OS/2 (Program Number 5601-136)
    o   GEARBOX Language Extensions for AIX PS/2 (Program Number 5799-PNZ) (PRPQ
        PS0050)

All models and features for the GEARBOX Model 800 are customer setup.  Setup
instructions will be in the specific supported language for a given country.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Extended Operating Environment Specifications
    o   Panel, Wall, or Rack Mount
    o   All Functional Elements Front Accessible
    o   Battery Back-Up, with Orderly Shutdown Capability
    o   300 Watt Power Supply with DC Voltage Startup/Operation Capability
    o   All Error Correcting Code (ECC) Memory
    o   High Availability Through Self Monitoring and External Notification
        Capability
    o   Micro Channel Architecture with a 16/32 Bit Bus
    o   Up to 7 Expansion Slots
    o   Intel 80386DX Micro Processor (25 MHz), with 32Kb of Cache Memory (Models
        040 and 150) (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of May 4, 1992)
    o   Intel 80486DX Micro Processor (25 MHz), with 8Kb Internal Cache (Model
        C40)
    o   Intel486 DX2 Micro Processor (50 MHz), with 8Kb Internal Cache (Model
        D40)
    o   Minimum 4Mb Base Memory Standard (Model Dependent), Expandable to 16Mb
        (Models 040, 150, C40) or 32Mb (Model D40) on the Processor Card
    o   Support for 120Mb, 320Mb, 400Mb, and 1.0Gb Small Computer Systems
        Interface (SCSI) Fixed Disk Drives (Up to Four Total Drives Internal with
        the 7568 Auxiliary DASD Module Feature)
    o   SCSI Disk/Diskette Adapter Card with 0.5MB Cache Memory
    o   Supported by IBM DOS, OS/2, and AIX PS/2
    o   Integrated VGA Graphics, Serial/Parallel Ports, and Keylock
    o   Wide Range of Supported PS/2 and Other Features

The GEARBOX Model 800 provides a highly capable system in the world of rugged,
high-availability industrial computers.  As a member of the GEARBOX family, the
Model 800 carries on the valued reliability and availability in demanding
environments that characterize the product line.  In addition, the GEARBOX
Model 800 (7568-D40) brings a new level of IBM performance and flexibility to
industrial applications, including support of the IBM CIM Advantage products
and related application programs.

The system uses the Micro Channel architecture and a 16/32 bit bus to enhance
overall system capabilities, and provides compatibility with selected features
available from the broad and growing list of PS/2 functions and applications.
Integration of many functions on the standard system cards leaves a higher
number of slots available for customer use (up to 7 on systems with no DASD
installed).

MODELS 040 AND 150 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF MAY 4, 1992) The
7568-040 and 7568-150 are based on an Intel 80386DX microprocessor, operating
at 25MHz, and support an optional 80387 Math Co-Processor.  The base memory is
8Mb on the Model 150, or 4Mb on the Model 040.  Memory on the Processor Card
can be expanded to 16Mb through the use of 4Mb Memory Module Kits - see
complete information under feature #3933 in the Special Features section.  In
addition, these models support the 0-16Mb Extended Memory Adapter (#6345) (For
IBM US, No Longer Available as of May 4, 1992) as another means of providing
the maximum supported system memory of 16Mb.  Note that using the extended
memory adapter has a higher cost than using all memory on the processor card,
and that system performance will be reduced when the extended memory adapter is
installed, compared to performance when all memory is on the processor card.
All memory is Error Correcting Code ( ECC).  Performance is further enhanced
through 32Kb of cache memory on the Processor Card, a 120Mb SCSI Disk Drive
with 23 ms access time, and 0.5Mb of DASD cache memory on the Disk/Diskette
Adapter Card.  A 120Mb Disk Drive (#6223) and 320Mb SCSI Disk Drive (#6542) are
also available as optional features.

The 7568-C40 provides the same basic content as the earlier 7568 models except
that it contains an Intel 80486DX microprocessor operating at 25MHz on the
processor card, providing improved processor and system performance compared to
the 040 and 150 models.  The C40 comes with base memory of 4Mb with ECC, in the
form of 4Mb memory modules, and can be expanded to 16Mb through the use of 4Mb
Memory Module Kits.  The C40 model does NOT support the 0-16Mb Extended Memory
Adapter (#6345).  The C40 can be ordered with three different DASD
configurations, through the use of selectable IBM installed features that are
ordered when the C40 order is placed. NOTE: IBM installed DASD includes a
double-wide shroud, a disk/diskette adapter card, a 1.44Mb diskette drive, and
the selected fixed disk drive.

Additional 120Mb (#6223), 320Mb (#6542), 400Mb (#6873) or 1.0Gb (#6874) SCSI
fixed disk drives are available as customer installed features, up to the
maximum of two per system or up to a maximum of four per system if the 7568
Auxiliary DASD Module feature (#6885) is also installed.  (The Auxiliary DASD
Module was initially available as RPQ PF1184.)

NOTE: Refer to the Operating Environment section in this Sales Manual for
limitations that may exist for the maximum number of fixed disk drives in a
system configuration.

Ship group content is provided with each system, including the Installation and
Operation Guide (with the system reference diskette), an enhanced industrial
keyboard and cable, the Three Port Cable Assembly, and an inventory checklist.

The 7568-D40 provides the same basic content as the earlier 7568 models, with
enhancements in the following areas.  The D40 contains an Intel486 DX2 50/25Mhz
microprocessor on the processor card, it supports up to 32Mb of system memory,
and it supports the installation of the PS/2 XGA Display Adapter/A for improved
graphics performance.  The new microprocessor operates at an internal clock
speed of 50Mhz and external speed of 25Mhz.  The D40 also includes an internal
battery (#6221) for customer installation.  In addition, the D40 provides
increased customer selectability of IBM installed content, including memory,
DASD and keyboard type, and also offers selectability of a specific GEARBOX
Language Extension product as part of the base system order.  The D40 model
does NOT support the 0-16Mb Extended Memory Adapter (#6345).  Details on
customer selectability of IBM installed content are as follows:

Memory installed by IBM consists of two memory modules, one of which is
dedicated to providing the ECC capability, and one of which is available for
user memory.  The D40 supports two different type memory modules (4Mb and 8Mb),
but only one type can be installed at any time on a system processor card.  4Mb
and 8Mb memory modules MUST NOT be mixed on the same processor card, or a
system memory error will result.

Since the maximum of 32Mb of memory can be achieved only with 8Mb modules
installed, the customer is offered a choice of memory module type to be
installed on the base system as shipped by IBM.  If no use above 16Mb is ever
projected, the customer may select base memory in the form of 4Mb modules.
Memory ordered as 4Mb modules will provide 4Mb of user memory, and will
generally be less expensive than 8Mb modules.  Note that systems ordered with
4Mb modules will need to have all the 4Mb modules replaced with 8Mb modules if
memory above 16Mb is ever desired.

Memory ordered as 8Mb modules will provide 8Mb of user memory, and will
generally be more expensive than 4Mb modules.  Note that additional memory must
be added in 8Mb memory module increments, unless all the 8Mb modules are
removed and replaced with 4Mb modules, for which 4Mb memory increments can be
added.

The choice of 4Mb or 8Mb IBM installed memory requires a customer trade-off of
current and projected system memory needs and memory module costs.  One of the
following memory selections must be ordered at the time of system order.

    -   4Mb SIMM (Single In-Line Memory Module) Processor Card - #6876
    -   8Mb SIMM Processor Card - #6877

The D40 can be ordered with four different DASD configurations, through the use
of selectable IBM installed features that are ordered when the D40 order is
placed.  IBM installed DASD includes a double-wide shroud, a disk/diskette
adapter card, a 1.44Mb diskette drive, and the selected fixed disk drive.

Additional 120Mb (#6223), 320Mb (#6542), 400Mb (#6873) or 1.0Gb (#6874) SCSI
fixed disk drives are available as customer installed features, up to the
maximum of two per system or up to a maximum of four per system if the 7568
Auxiliary DASD Module feature (#6885) is also installed.

NOTE: Refer to the Operating Environment section in this Sales Manual for
limitations that may exist for the maximum number of fixed disk drives in a
system configuration.

The Disk/Diskette Adapter Card also contains an external SCSI interface for
customer use.  Use of this interface requires that the customer provide a
software device driver for interface to the intended operating system.  No such
software device driver is is provided with the system.  Selected PS/2
attachable features are compatible with the 7568 external SCSI interface.

All models of the GEARBOX Model 800 include a 300 total watt worldwide,
autoranging power supply, which features two fans to assure system cooling. The
Model 800 also provides for DC voltage startup and operation through one of two
optional External Voltage Modules (EVM) (#6231 and #6528).  Operation at 24V
and 48 to 60V is supported.  The selected EVM also provides surge and polarity
protection for external battery connection to assure continuity of system
operation in the event of main power loss.  An available internal battery will
assure continuity of operation through brief main power disturbances, and also
provide power for an orderly shutdown period if main power is lost and no
external DC power source is in place.

NOTE: Either the internal battery or an EVM (with connected external DC voltage
source) must be ordered and installed to assure retention of system setup
information during periods when the system is disconnected from AC power or
when AC power is lost.  Model D40 systems are shipped with the internal battery
feature for customer installation.

A Three Port Cable Assembly is included for connection from the System Resource
Card.  Serial and parallel ports are provided along with a unique GEARBOX port
which provides an audio speaker output, which can be user programmed for
external signaling.  The standard system can be panel, wall or rack mounted.

COMPATIBILITY AND LIMITATION INFORMATION NOTE: Also refer to information in the
Special Features and Compatible Product List sections of this Sales Manual.

Five IBM PC software languages are supported.

    o   IBM BASIC Compiler/2
    o   IBM C/2
    o   IBM FORTRAN/2
    o   IBM Macro Assembler/2
    o   IBM Pascal Compiler/2

Initial setup and loading of diagnostic software on a GEARBOX Model 800 system
with no DASD requires the use of the Setup and Service Device (FC 6230).

Installation of supported PS/2 form factor Micro Channel adapters in a GEARBOX
Model 800 system requires the use of the applicable interposer card to
interface with the system backplane.  Available interposer cards are #6224,
#6225, and #6875 (in US, AP, IBM LA, and Canada), #2779 (in EMEA).

The 486 DX2 50MHz Processor Card is compatible with and may be installed in
earlier versions of the Model 800.  Full support for 8Mb memory modules and for
system memory greater than 16Mb require that this feature be installed in
earlier Model 800 systems.

The 7568-D40, and earlier systems with the 486 DX2 50MHz Processor Card
installed, do not support the 0-16Mb Extended Memory Adapter, (#6345) (no
longer available as of May 4, 1992).

Support for the PS/2 XGA Display Adapter/A requires either a 7568-D40 or that
the System Resource Card Graphics Support Upgrade (#6886) be installed on
earlier models of the GEARBOX Model 800.  Support for the XGA Display Adapter/A
(and for all other adapters that exclusively use 32 bit slots) also requires
that the 32 Bit Micro Channel Adapter Interposer (#6875) be used when
installing these adapters.  Using a 16 Bit Micro Channel Adapter feature
(#6224) may lead to functional problems related to a specific adapter's use of
a memory block above the 16Mb level.  Adapters that require 32 bit slots should
be used only with the 32 Bit Micro Channel Adapter Interposer.

32 bit Micro Channel adapters that can be installed in either 16 or 32 bit
slots may have improved functional performance if they are installed using a 32
Bit Micro Channel Adapter Interposer.

Installation of the 7568 Auxiliary DASD Module is supported only in C40 or D40
systems, or in 040 or 150 systems that have had either the 80486 Processor Card
Upgrade Kit (#6543) or the 486 DX2 50MHz Processor Card Upgrade (#6872)
installed on the system.  Installation of the 7568 Auxiliary DASD Module also
requires that the base system have a Disk Module installed, either as part of
the original system or as the Disk Module feature (#6222).

Installation of the 400Mb or 1.0Gb SCSI Fixed Disk Drives (#6873 and #6874
respectively) in earlier 040 or 150 systems requires reference diskette version
1.20 for proper setup and diagnostic support.  The 1.20 level was provided on
all systems shipped after December 21, 1990, and was also available through RPQ
PF1193, which was orderable from December 1990 through July 1991.  Diagnostics
for these systems does not report the capacity of a defective disk drive.

Support for attachment of the PS/2 3.5-inch Rewritable Optical Drive in the
PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure requires that all operating environment conditions
be within the limits defined for that product.  (See Product Announcements
191-082, dated June 6, 1991, and 191-053, dated April 23, 1991, and Sales
Manual information for these products.)

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    Width:   482mm (19 inches)
    Depth:   256mm (10 inches)
    Height:  533mm (21 inches)
    Weight:  Model 040 and C40 (with no DASD): 15.4kg (34 pounds)
    Weight:  Model 150 and C40 (with DASD): 19.1kg (42 pounds)
    Air Temperature:
        -   Operating: 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)
        -   Non-operating: 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)
        -   Shipment: -40 to 60C (-40 to 140F)
    Vibration/Shock:
        Vibration:
            Random: 0.27G RMS from 5Hz to 500Hz
        Shock:
            30G for 3 milliseconds duration (1/2 sine wave)
    Equipment Approvals:
        -   UL Listed (UL 1950 first edition)
        -   CSA Certified (CSA22.2  No. 50-M1990)
        -   BABT (UK General Approval NS/G/1234/J/100003)
        -   FCC Class A
        -   VCCI Class 1 *
        -   CISPR 22 Class A *
        -   VDE or TUV (EN60950/IEC-950) *

 * When this requirement is imposed, the 7568 system is limited to a maximum of
two (2) of the 1.0GB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive features (#6874), even with the 7568
Auxiliary DASD Module installed (#6885).

The GEARBOX Model 800 has been designed for industrial plant floor or other
demanding environments.  Non-IBM adapter cards that may be operated in the
Model 800 may have different environmental, physical, and electronic
specifications than the GEARBOX system.  Potential users must refer to the
suppliers of these products for specifications in these and other areas.  In
addition, potential users of such products in the Model 800 should consult with
their IBM marketing representative and the suppliers of the non-IBM products on
questions about specific applications.

IBM is not responsible for any impact on the environmental or other
specification values of the GEARBOX Model 800 system that is related to any
limits that may be imposed by installation of these adapters.

While IBM has performed a functional test of the listed adapters in the Model
800 system, IBM does not warrant that any given application will perform in the
Model 800 as advertised by the supplier of the adapter.  Potential users should
consult with their IBM marketing representative and the suppliers of the
adapters on questions as to specific applications or problems. **Intel486 is a
Trademark of Intel Corporation. **Mapware is a Trademark of Concord
Communications, Inc. **Ethernet is a Trademark of Xerox Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. 5532 INDUSTRIAL COLOR DISPLAY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

5532 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF May 4, 1992)

The 5532 provides the capability for programs running on the 5531 Industrial
Computer system to display text and graphics output in color.

The 5532 is a customer setup machine.  Detailed setup and operational
instructions are included with each machine.

    o   Direct-drive color display
    o   Connects to 5531 through the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter and a 150cm
        (5 foot) cable that is provided
    o   330mm (13 inch) (diagonal) monitor capable of displaying 16 colors
    o   Easily adjustable with brightness and contrast controls
    o   Cooling fan with replaceable filter
    o   The 5532 Color Display has the following characteristics:
        -   Screen size:  330mm (13 inch) (diagonal) monitor, 640 (horizontal) X
            200 (vertical) addressability
        -   16 Colors:  red, green, blue, white, yellow, black, cyan, magenta,
            brown, light gray, dark gray, light blue, light green, light cyan,
            light red, and light magenta
        -   Horizontal scanning frequency:  15.75 KHz +/- 200 Hz
        -   Vertical Drive:  60 Hz
        -   Temperature:  Operating, 4 C to 46.1 C ambient (39.2 F to 115 F);
            Storage, 4 C to 51.7 C ambient (39.2 F to 125 F)
        -   Relative humidity:  8% to 80% (non-condensing) when on; 20% to 80%
            (non-condensing) when off
        -   Dimensions:
            Width - 392mm (15.4 inches)
            Depth - 407mm (15.6 inches)
            Height - 297mm (11.7 inches)
            Weight:  Approximately 12.3 kg (27 pounds)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. 7534 IBM INDUSTRIAL GRAPHICS DISPLAY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

7534 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF May 4, 1992)

Double click here to display picture

The 7534 is designed for applications in industrial plant floor environments
where a display that is resistant to harsh physical conditions is required.

When used with the IBM Enhanced Graphics Adapter (#1200), the 7534 provides an
improved color graphics level for the IBM Industrial Computer to which it is
attached.

    o   Direct-drive color display
    o   Operates with the IBM Enhanced Graphics Adapter (#1200) or with the IBM
        Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter (#4910)
    o   330mm (13 in.) (diagonal) monitor
    o   Cooling fan with replaceable filter
    o   Provides 640 x 350 picture element (PEL) definition in up to 64 colors
        for graphics (16 colors at one time when operating with the IBM Enhanced
        Graphics Adapter, lower limits when operating with the IBM Color/Graphics
        Monitor Adapter)
    o   Displays high quality (8 x 14 character box) text in color
    o   Includes a dual frequency design that permits 22KHz for enhanced
        operation (640 x 350) and 15.75KHz for compatibility modes (640 x 200 and
        320 x 200)
    o   Provides brightness and contrast control located on the side of the
        display
    o   Has a protective clear screen cover

The 7534, when used with the IBM Enhanced Graphics Adapter (#1200), is designed
to provide improved color graphics in the plant floor environment for IBM
Industrial Computer users.  The 7534 provides 640 x 350 PEL definition from a
palette of 64 colors.  Sixteen colors may be used at one time when operating
with the IBM Enhanced Graphics Adapter (#1200).

The compatibility modes allow the 7534 to operate with either the IBM Enhanced
Graphics Adapter or the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter.

The 7534 is designed for desk/tabletop use.  With the addition of the Display
Mounting Kit (#6025), the 7534 can be installed inside a standard 19-inch rack
that is 22 inches to 30 inches in depth.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

    o   Horizontal scan frequency 22KHz or 15.75KHz, depending on the polarity of
        the vertical sync signal from the adapter.
    o   Vertical scan frequency 50 to 60 Hz
    o   0.31mm dot pitch
    o   Non-interlaced operation
    o   Normal persistence phosphors (P22 equivalent)
    o   Max. wet bulb dew point 27 degrees Celsius
    o   Dimensions:
        -   Width  - 392mm (15.4 in.)
        -   Depth  - 407mm (15.6 in.)
        -   Height - 297mm (11.7 in.)
        -   Weight - Approximately 14.4Kg (29 lbs.)
    o   Signal cable length:  3 ft., 6 in.
    o   Electrical:
        -   Operating Voltages:  90 to 137 volts AC, nominal 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
        -   Power line lighting surges of +/- 2500 volts, as outlined in FCC
            Docket 19528 - Part 68
    o   FCC Class A


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. 7544 IBM INDUSTRIAL GRAPHICS DISPLAY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The 7544 Industrial Graphics Display is designed for industrial plant floor
environments, where a display that is resistant to harsh physical conditions is
required.  The 7544 is designed to provide an improved level of color graphics
when used with the VGA Display Adapter (#6257 or #6260) for users of the IBM
Industrial Computer Systems.  The 7544 provides 640 X 480 pel definition in all
points addressable mode.  When operating with the VGA Display Adapter 16
simultaneous colors are available from a palette of 262,144 colors, and when
operated in the 320 x 200 mode 256 colors from the palette of 262,144 colors
may be displayed simultaneously.

MODEL 001

100 - 125V AC; 47-63 Hz; power 0.1K VA

MODEL 002

200 - 240V AC; 47-63 Hz; power 0.1K VA

NOTE: IBM VGA Display Adapters:  These adapters are not features of the 7544.
These adapters are features of the Industrial Computers and must be ordered
against the corresponding machine in which they will be installed.  Order
feature code #6257 for the 7531/7532 Industrial Computers.  Order feature code
#6260 for the 7552 Industrial Computer.

The VGA Display Adapter must be selected for the Industrial Computer, and
installed.  (#6257 for the 7531/32 or #6260 for the 7552.) When the VGA Display
Adapter is installed in a 7552, feature code #6077 (Adapter Card) for the 7552
must be ordered as a prerequisite.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Hardened for shop floor environment.
    o   13-inch (diagonal) viewing area.
    o   Operates with the VGA Display Adapter.
    o   Provides 640 X 480 pel definition in all points addressable mode.
    o   Displays 16 simultaneous colors from a palette of 262,144 colors when
        operating in the 640 x 480 mode.
    o   Displays 256 simultaneous colors from a palette of 262,144 colors when
        operating in the 320 x 200 mode.
    o   Provides 720 X 400 pel definition when operating in text mode.
    o   Displays high quality (9 x 16 character box) text in color.
    o   The display includes a protective screen glare filter.
    o   The Display may be mounted in a 19-inch rack using Accessory #6025.

The 7544 is a 13-inch (diagonal viewing) industrial color graphics display with
an analog attachment interface.  The analog interface is provided by the VGA
Display Adapter.

The operator controls available are:

    o   An on/off switch
    o   A brightness control
    o   A contrast control

A green front panel light-emitting diode will indicate a power-on condition.

The 7544 is a free standing desk top device and may be rack mounted in a
standard 19-inch rack with the use of the Display Rack Mounting Accessory
(#6025).

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    Vertical scan frequency 60 to 70 Hz
    0.31mm dot pitch
    Non-interlaced operation
    Operating temperature:  0 to 50C (32 to 122F)
    Relative humidity:  8 to 90 percent (non-condensing)
    Width:  392mm (15.5 in.)
    Depth:  432mm (17 in.)
    Height:  292mm (11.5 in.)
    Weight:  15.9kg. (35 lbs.)
    Signal cable length:  1.8m (5 ft. 11 in.)
    Electrical:  110V AC nominal, 50-60 Hz US and WTC; 220V AC nominal, 50-60
    Hz US and WTC
    Altitude:  Operating limits up to 2,134m (7,000 ft.)
    FCC Requirements: Class A.
    VCCI Requirements: Class 1.
    VDE Requirements: Class A.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. IBM 9518 COLOR DISPLAY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM 9518 color display supports the new International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) conforming PS/2* system units and is designed to meet the
ISO 9241 Part 3 standard providing a flicker-free system. The display also
complies with MPR-II 1990;08 guidelines for low emissions.

The IBM 9518 color display is a 14-inch (nominal) VGA color monitor, using a
conventional CRT with a viewable area of 250mm x 187mm.  It features enhanced
reliability and front-of-screen performance when compared to earlier IBM VGA
displays.

As a result of IBM's continued commitment to improve product reliability, the
new Premier PS/2 product line, all IBM 9518 models will now carry an on site
3-year warranty.  In addition, an optional 1-year warranty will be available
via Special Bid.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Flicker-free and improved ergonomics - ISO 9241 Part 3
    o   Low emissions - MPR-II 1990;08
    o   3 year IBM On-site Repair warranty; 1 year option via Special Bid
    o   Optimized for 640 x 480 at 75Hz non-interlaced operation
    o   14 inch (nominal) 0.28mm dot pitch conventional color CRT for crisp
        clear bright characters and sharp graphics and images

For the VGA user, the IBM 9518 color display screen size and resolution are
optimized to more fully utilize existing applications.  The higher refresh rate
results in flicker-free operation.

The introduction of the IBM 9518 color display exhibits IBM's continuing
commitment to emerging standards as it meets both the hardware requirements of
ISO 9241 Part 3 and the MPR-II 1990;08 requirements in full.

Supported VGA display modes are:

    o   640 x 480 pels APA  75Hz non-interlaced at 39kHz horizontal rate
    o   720 x 400 pels TEXT 88Hz non-interlaced at 39kHz horizontal rate
    o   720 x 350 pels TEXT 88Hz non-interlaced at 39kHz horizontal rate

The IBM 9518 Color Display design efficiency results in a low component count.
This provides the user with the benefit of higher reliability and lower service
costs compared with previous IBM VGA displays.  Supporting this is an On-site
3-year warranty as standard.  A 1-year option is available via Special Bid.

The IBM 9518 Color Display will appeal to the corporate customer, providing
flicker-free operation and a higher reliability supporting high usage and
longer life.

The display is suitable for general purpose applications, including:

    o   Spreadsheets
    o   Word processing
    o   Information query and retrieval
    o   Business graphics

The IBM 9518 Color Display accommodates all VGA applications without
modification, a potential saving for the customer in programming assets.

The display is designed to meet emerging environmental standards, such as ISO
9241 Part 3 and MPR-II 1990;08.  These are being demanded by an increasing
number of people who work with display terminals as a normal part of conducting
their business.

MODELS Model 001: Northern Hemisphere, low voltage with power cord and
Tilt/swivel

The IBM 9518 Color Display is customer set-up.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

    o   Supported display modes:
        -  640 x 480 pels APA   75Hz non-interlaced at 39kHz horizontal rate
        -  720 x 400 pels TEXT  88Hz non-interlaced at 39kHz horizontal rate
        -  720 x 350 pels TEXT  88Hz non-interlaced at 39kHz horizontal rate
    o   Other display modes for text:
        -  640 x 400 pels  400 line mode
        -  640 x 350 pels  350 line mode
    o   MFI Emulation modes:
        -  3270 Mode 2  80 by 25
        Support of these modes is a function of the Emulator used by the
        attaching system unit.
    o   14 inch (nominal) conventional color CRT
    o   Viewable area: 250mm x 187mm
    o   Pels/inch:     65 in APA mode
    o   Shadow mask:   0.28mm dot pitch
    o   Fine etch anti-reflective screen treatment
    o   Anti-static screen treatment
    o   Lift           120mm (Lift/tilt/swivel stand only)
    o   Tilt           -5, +20 degrees (+15 degrees Lift/tilt/swivel)
    o   Swivel (both left and right)  150 degrees

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS The dimensions and weight of the IBM 9518 color display
are:

    Width:  355mm (14.0 in)
    Depth:  390mm (15.3 in)
    Height: 345mm (13.6 in) with Tilt/swivel
            375mm (14.8 in) to 495mm (19.5 in) with Lift/tilt/swivel
    Weight: 13kg (29 pounds) unpacked with Tilt/swivel
            17kg (38 pounds) unpacked with Lift/tilt/swivel
            15kg (33 pounds) packed with Tilt/swivel
            19kg (42 pounds) packed with Lift/tilt/swivel

The life of any display can be extended and energy saved by switching it off at
nights, weekends or if it is not in use for extended periods during the day.

POWER REQUIREMENTS

    o   Model 001: 90 to 137 Vac, 1 Phase, 3 Wire, 50/60Hz
    o   Model 002: 90 to 265 Vac, 1 Phase, 3 Wire, 50/60Hz
    o   Model 003: 90 to 265 Vac, 1 Phase, 3 Wire, 50/60Hz
    o   Model 004: 90 to 265 Vac, 1 Phase, 3 Wire, 50/60Hz
       Power consumption: 75 watts max (0.1 KVA)
       Heat dissipation: 256 BTU/hr
       Earth leakage current: 500 microamps max

TEMPERATURE

    Operating:  10 to 35 degrees C,  8 to 80  percent RH
    Power off:  10 to 43 degrees C, 20 to 80  percent RH
    Storage  :   1 to 60 degrees C,  5 to 80  percent RH
    Shipping : -20 to 60 degrees C,  5 to 100 percent RH
    Wet Bulb :  27 degrees C max

Declared acoustical noise emissions LWAD = 4.5 bels or less. The noise emission
level stated is the declared (upper limit). A-weighted sound power level, in
bels, for a random sample of displays. All measurements are made in accordance
with ANSI S12.10, and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.

Maximum altitude: 2134m (7000 feet)

All models meet the Swedish Board for Technical Accreditation (SWEDAC)
guideline, MPR-II 1990;08.

All models meet the hardware requirements of the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) standard, 9241 Part 3.

EXTERNAL AGENCY APPROVALS

    CE Mark
    CISPR 22 Class B               (EMC)
    CSA C22.2 No.950               (Canada: Safety)
    DEMKO, SETI, NEMKO, SEMKO      (Scandinavia)
    DHHS                           (Safety)
    FCC Class B                    (EMC)
    IEC 950                        (Safety)
    NZRFS
    OEVE                           (Austria: Certification)
    PTB                            (Germany: X-ray protection)
    PTT NS/G/23/J/100003           (UK: Safety)
    Royal Spanish Decree No. 1250
    SASO                           (Saudi Arabia)
    SEV                            (Switzerland)
    UL 1950 First Edition          (Safety)
    VCCI Class 2                   (Japan: EMC)
    VDE 0806                       (Germany: Safety)

The IBM 9518 color display does not attach to:

    o   IBM PS/2 XGA Display Adapter/A
    o   IBM PS/2 Image Adapter/A
    o   IBM PS/2 Display Adapter/A 8514/A

The IBM 9518 color display does not attach directly to IBM 85nn PS/2 system
units.

When attached to IBM 85nn PS/2 system units via the IBM PS/2 XGA-2 Display
Adapter/A, the IBM 9518 color display does not support earlier VGA modes and
video rates.

The IBM 9518 color display is designed to operate only in VGA modes.

The IBM 9518 color display requires one of the following display adapters to
attach to a PS/2 system unit:

    o   IBM PS/2 XGA-2* Display Adapter/A (P/N 87F4773)
    o   IBM PS/2 XGA-2 subsystem chip set on the system board of the IBM
        95nn systems
    o   Radius** XGA-2 Display Adapter

Other devices that can attach the IBM 9518 color display are:

    o   IBM InfoWindow* II 3488 Modular Display Station

The IBM 9518 color display features preset display modes.  The actual display
modes that are used are a function of the attaching system unit.

The IBM 95nn PS/2 systems are supported by:

    o   IBM Disk Operating System
    o   IBM Operating System/2*
    o   IBM AIX PS/2
    o   SCO** UNIX** System V/386
    o   SCO XENIX** System V
    o   Open Desktop**
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.
** Radius is a trademark of Radius, Incorporated.
** XENIX is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
** Open Desktop and SCO are trademarks of Santa Cruz Operation,
   Incorporated.
** UNIX is a trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Incorporated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. 7554 IBM INDUSTRIAL GRAPHICS DISPLAY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM 7554 Industrial Graphics Display is an industrialized, high
performance, 19 inch medium/high resolution color graphics display.  The
display will operate in medium (640 X 480) resolution mode or the high (1024 X
768) resolution mode and display up to 256 colors.  The display has an analog
interface making it compatible with the Industrial Computers (7531/7532 7552)
in medium resolution mode, as well as the PS/2 Models 50, 60, 70 and 80 in both
medium and high resolution modes.

MODEL 001

    Description    Minimum   Maximum   Nominal      Frequency    Power
    Low Voltage     85 VAC   135 VAC   100-125 VAC   47-63 Hz   .138 KVA
    High Voltage   180 VAC   270 VAC   200-240 VAC   47-63 Hz   .145 KVA
    Line voltage selection (110V/220V nominal) is automatic.

The 7554 is designed to connect to the IBM 7531/7532 using Feature #6257 and to
the IBM 7552 using Feature #6260, and to the IBM PS/2 models 50, 60, 70, and 80
Native attachment in medium resolution mode and using Feature #4054 (8514/A)
for high resolution mode, also Feature #4081 (Memory Expansion Kit for the
8514/A) may be used.  (For IBM US, Features #4054 and #4081 are No Longer
Available as of October 2, 1991.)

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Operates with the IBM VGA Display Adapter (Feature #6257) for medium
        resolution in the 7531/7532 and (Feature #6260) in the 7552 Industrial
        Computers.  The 7554 Display will also operate in medium resolution when
        connected with the native display attachment in the PS/2 models 50, 60,
        70, and 80 as well as high resolution mode (1024 X 768) if the 8514/A
        Display attachment card (Feature #4054) is installed in the PS/2 Models
        50, 60, 70, and 80.
    o   The 7554 Display will be grey in color to match the Industrial Computers
        and will incorporate an optical anti-glare screen filter as a standard
        part of the unit.
    o   Provides 640 x 480 pel definition in up to 262,144 colors for graphics
        (16 colors at one time when operating with the IBM VGA Display Adapter)
        and a 720 x 400 pel definition when operating in the text mode.
    o   When operating in 320 x 200 mode, the display will provide 256 colors at
        one time from a palette of 262,144 colors.
    o   Provides 1024 X 768 or 640 X 480 resolution in up to 262,144 colors for
        graphics, 16 colors at one time when operating with the 8514/A attachment
        card (Feature # 4054) installed in the PS/2 (Model 50, 60, 70, and 80)
        without the memory expansion kit installed and up to 256 colors at one
        time with the memory expansion kit installed (Feature #4081) on the
        8514/A card.
    o   These modes provide a combination of color content and addressability
        designed for advanced graphics applications and image applications
        involving pictures or documents.
    o   The display has a horizontal scan frequency of 31.5 KHz in medium
        resolution modes and 35.5 kHz in high resolution mode.
    o   The vertical refresh rate is 50 Hz to 70 Hz in medium resolution mode,
        non-interlaced and 43.48 Hz in high resolution mode, interlaced.

The 7554 Industrial Graphics Display is an industrialized, high performance, 19
inch medium/high resolution color graphics display.  The display will operate
in medium (640 X 480) resolution mode or the high (1024 X 768) resolution mode
and display up to 256 colors. The display has an analog interface making it
compatible with the Industrial Computers as well as the PS/2, models 50, 60,
70, and 80.  There will be a 19 inch Rack Mount Accessory available and can be
used to mount the display in a standard 19 inch rack.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Width:  451mm (17.75 inches)
    Depth:  476mm (18.75 inches)
    Height:  400mm (15.75 inches)
    Weight:  29.55kg. (65 lbs)
    Signal cable length:  1.8m (5'11")


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. SCSI OVERVIEW ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following SCSI adapters and accesories are available: Adapter  (16 bit,
includes terminator) Adapter  with Cache (32 bit) Adapter  with Cache (32 bit)
Terminator  Card to Option Cable  Option to Option Cable


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. PERSONAL SYSTEM/2 MICRO CHANNEL SCSI ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1005

Part Number  6451109

POS ID: 8EFE

Bus Master  YES

A 16-bit bus master adapter that provides expandability for all PS/2 computers
with the Micro Channel bus.  The adapter provides connection for multiple
internal and/or external SCSI devices and has a 6.6MB per second Micro Channel
bus burst transfer rate.  The adapter card may be installed in a 16- or 32-bit
card slot and provides the ability to connect SCSI high performance fixed disk
drives, scanners, printers, CD-ROM drives, and other SCSI peripherals.

This adapter includes a Terminator which must remain on the adapter when no
EXTERNAL devices are installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. IBM ISA EXTERNAL CD-ROM DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  3509001

Bus Master  No

The IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive (3509001) enhances Industry Standard
Architecture-bus (ISA-bus) / IBM AT(R)-bus compatible personal computer systems
(including IBM PS/ValuePoint(TM) and select Personal System/2(R) (PS/2(R))
systems) by enabling access to the growing number and variety of applications
available on compact discs.  It has also been independently certified as
compatible with a broad mix of third party, non-IBM computer systems by XXCAL
Testing Laboratories.

The IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive is an inexpensive option that provides all of
the common CD-ROM features available in the market today and performs at a
maximum sustained data rate of 300 kB/sec, twice the speed of most CD-ROM
drives.

The IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive includes a compact disc-read only memory
drive in an external enclosure, adapter, cable and other items required to
complete the external attachment to compatible systems. (TM) Trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation. (R) Registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Recommended CD-ROM external solution for any ISA-bus system
    o  Low cost option providing all of the common CD-ROM features
       available today
    o  Maximum sustained data transfer rate of 300 kB/sec, twice as fast
       as most CD-ROM drives installed to date.
    o  Independently certified as compatible with a broad mix of third
       party, non-IBM computer systems by XXCAL Testing Laboratories.

IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive performs at a maximum sustained data transfer
rate of 300 kB/sec, twice the speed of the typical CD-ROM installed to date.
This allows the customer to transfer data off of a typical 600MB CD-ROM in a
very short period of time.

The fast data transfer rate of the IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive provides an
excellent means to load operating system and applications software on to ISA
personal computer systems.  The typical large capacity (600MB) of the CD-ROM
provides the system user a convenient alternative to installing software when
compared to a typical installation of multiple floppy diskettes.

The IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive enhances IBM PS/ValuePoint and select
Personal System/2 (PS/2) systems by allowing access to a myriad of CD titles
offered in such categories as:

    o  General reference
    o  Application and operating system software
    o  Education
    o  Entertainment
    o  Finance
    o  Science and technology
    o  Geography
    o  Medicine
    o  Law
    o  Graphics and clip art.

The IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive provides all of the common CD-ROM features
available in the market today, such as:

    o  MPC compliance
    o  Kodak Photo CD(1) compatible
    o  CD-XA capable
    o  Audio playback
    o  Electronic eject
    o  Software volume control.
(1) Trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.

The adapter card included in the IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive (3509001)
adheres to the personal computer ISA-bus / IBM AT-bus Architecture.

The IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive functions with compact discs that are
compatible with:  ISO 9660, High Sierra, Kodak Photo CD (Orange Book), and
CD-Digital Audio (Red Book) formats.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Dimensions:

    Width:  158.0 mm
    Depth:  315.0 mm
    Height:  57.2 mm
    Weight:   2.5 kg

Drive Specifications:

    Capacity                600MB (typical)

    Performance             Data Transfer     Aver Access
                            Rate

       -  1x speed          150 kB/sec        380 ms
          max
          sustained
       -  2x speed          300 kB/sec        320 ms
          max
          sustained
       -  burst             2.3 MB/sec        --

    Rotation Speed          CLV (Constant Linear Velocity)
    Data Buffer             64 KB

    Power Supply            110/220 V auto sensing

Equipment Approvals/Safety:

    FCC Class B                   Yes
    UL/CSA Recognized             Yes
    VCCI Class 2                  Yes
    GOP VDE Class B               Yes
    CSA 22.2 # 950                Yes
    CISPR-B                       Yes

Operating Environment:

    Temperature (degrees C) 5-45
    Relative Humidity (system on) 8-80%

Machine Requirements:  ISA / IBM AT-bus Architecture slot available for the
adapter included in the IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive. (R) Registered trademark
of International Business Machines Corporation.

Compatibility with Non-IBM Systems:  The IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive has been
independently certified as compatible with a broad mix of third party, non-IBM
computer systems by XXCAL Testing Laboratories.

Programming Requirements:  The following operating systems and extensions
support the IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive:

    o  OS/2(R) 2.0, 2.00.1, 2.1
    o  DOS 5.0, or later
       -  Windows(2) 3.0, or later
       -  Windows MME 1.0
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (2)
Trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Compatibility:  The IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive is designed to maintain
compatibility with current software support that uses the standard defined
basic input/output system interfaces.  Installable device drivers are included
with the drive.

The IBM ISA External CD-ROM Drive functions with Compact Disks that are
compatible with:  ISO 9660, High Sierra, Kodak Photo CD (Orange Book), and
CD-Digital Audio (Red Book) formats.

Security and auditability features of the system to which this product is
attached are:

    o  A mechanical lock to allow the user to lock the system cover.
    o  A user-invoked password function used to prevent the use of the
       system by unauthorized persons.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. IBM ISA INTERNAL CD-ROM DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  32G2961

Feature Code 5516

Bus Master  No

The IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive (32G2961, FC 5516) enhances Industry Standard
Architecture-bus (ISA-bus) / IBM AT(R)-bus compatible personal computer systems
(including IBM PS/ValuePoint(TM) and select Personal System/2(R) (PS/2(R))
systems) by enabling access to the growing number and variety of applications
available on compact discs.  It has also been independently certified as
compatible with a broad mix of third party, non-IBM computer systems by XXCAL
Testing Laboratories.

The IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive is an inexpensive option that performs at a
maximum sustained data rate of 300 kB/sec, twice the speed of most CD-ROM
drives.

The IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive includes a compact disc-read only memory
drive, adapter, cables, and other items required to complete the internal
installation in compatible systems. (TM) Trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (R) Registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Recommended CD-ROM solution for any ISA system with an available
       industry standard 5.25-inch half-high storage bay
    o  Low cost option providing all of the common CD-ROM features
       available today
    o  Maximum sustained data transfer rate of 300 kB/sec, twice as fast
       as most CD-ROM drives installed to date.
    o  Independently certified as compatible with a broad mix of third
       party, non-IBM computer systems by XXCAL Testing Laboratories.

The IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive performs at a maximum sustained data transfer
rate of 300 kB/sec, twice the speed of the typical CD-ROM installed to date.
This allows the customer to transfer data off of a typical 600MB CD-ROM in a
very short period of time.

The fast data transfer rate provides an excellent means to load operating
system and applications software on to ISA personal computer systems.

The typical large capacity (600MB) of the CD-ROM provides the system user a
convenient alternative to installing software when compared to a typical
installation of multiple floppy diskettes.

The IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive enhances IBM PS/ValuePoint and select
Personal System/2 (PS/2) systems by allowing access to a myriad of CD titles
offered in such categories as:

    o  General reference
    o  Application and operating system software
    o  Education
    o  Entertainment
    o  Finance
    o  Science and technology
    o  Geography
    o  Medicine
    o  Law
    o  Graphics and clip art.

The IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive provides all of the common CD-ROM features
available in the market today, such as:

    o  MPC compliance
    o  Kodak Photo CD(1) compatible
    o  CD-XA capable
    o  Audio playback
    o  Electronic eject
    o  Software volume control.
(1) Trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.

The adapter card included in the IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive (32G2961)
adheres to the personal computer ISA / IBM AT-bus Architecture.

The IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive functions with compact discs that are
compatible with:  ISO 9660, High Sierra, Kodak Photo CD (Orange Book), and
CD-Digital Audio (Red Book) formats.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Dimensions:

    Width:  146.0 mm
    Depth:  196.0 mm
    Height:  41.3 mm

Drive Specifications:

    Capacity                600MB (typical)

    Performance             Data Transfer     Aver Access
                            Rate

       -  1x speed          150 kB/sec        380 ms
          max
          sustained

       -  2x speed          300 kB/sec        320 ms
          max
          sustained
       -  burst             2.3 MB/sec        --

        Rotation Speed      CLV (Constant Linear Velocity)
        Data Buffer         64 KB

Equipment Approvals/Safety:

    FCC Class B                   Yes
    UL/CSA Recognized             Yes
    VCCI Class 2                  Yes
    GOP VDE Class B               Yes
    CSA 22.2 # 950                Yes
    CISPR-B                       Yes

Operating Environment:

    Temperature (degrees C) 4-45
    Relative Humidity (system on) 8-80%

Machine Requirements:  Installation of the IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive
requires an available ISA/IBM AT-bus Architecture expansion slot and an
available 5.25-inch half-high industry standard storage bay.

Installation of the IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive in bay #2 of a PS/2 Model 40
SX or Industrial Computer (7537) also requires IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive
Kit A (#32G3133).

Installation of the IBM 3.5-Inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive (#6451295,
FC 1295) in IBM PS/ValuePoint and other personal computer systems with an
available 5.25-inch half-high industry standard storage bay requires the IBM
3.5-Inch Rewritable Optical Drive Kit B (#32G2963).  Similar installation of
the IBM 3.5-Inch Rewritable Optical Drive (#6450162, FC 0162) requires P/N
92F0268 in addition to the IBM 3.5-Inch Rewritable Optical Drive Kit B.  This
part can be ordered through the IBM Parts Order Center by calling
1-800-388-7080. (R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.

Compatibility with Non-IBM Systems:  The IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive has been
independently certified as compatible with a broad mix of third party, non-IBM
computer systems by XXCAL Testing Laboratories.

Programming Requirements:  The following operating systems and extensions
support the IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive:

    o  OS/2(R) 2.0, 2.00.1, 2.1
    o  DOS 5.0, or later
       -  Windows(2) 3.0, or later
       -  Windows MME 1.0
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (2)
Trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Compatibility:  The IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive is designed to maintain
compatibility with current software support that uses the standard defined
basic input/output system interfaces.  Installable device drivers are included
with the drive.

The IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive functions with compact disks that are
compatible with:  ISO 9660, High Sierra, Kodak Photo CD (Orange Book), and
CD-Digital Audio (Red Book) formats.

Security and auditability features of the system in which this product is
installed are:

    o  A mechanical lock to allow the user to lock the system cover.
    o  A user-invoked password function used to prevent the use of the
       system by unauthorized persons.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. IBM ISA INTERNAL CD-ROM DRIVE KIT A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  32G3133

Feature Code 5638

Bus Master  No

The IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM Drive Kit A (32G3133, FC 5638) provides the
necessary hardware for the internal installation of the IBM ISA Internal CD-ROM
Drive in bay #2 of the PS/2 Model 40 SX and Industrial Computer (7537) systems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. IBM 540MB AND 1.0GB FAST SCSI-2 HARD DISK DRIVE OPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  32G4151

Part Number  32G4198

Feature Code 5341

Feature Code 7127

Bus Master  No

Two new hard disk drive options enhance IBM's SCSI-2 family of storage options
and provide customers the choice of attaining higher capacity and exceptional
performance.

In addition, a number of new cables enhance the ability to increase the number
of single device enclosures (3510-0V0) attached and provide active termination.

    o  540MB Fast SCSI-2 Option (540 million bytes, #5341/32G4151)
    o  1.0GB Fast SCSI-2 Option (1000 million bytes, #7127/32G4198)
    o  Option to Option Cable-Short (#4396/32G3917)
    o  Card to SCSI Option Cable (#5012/32G4143)
    o  8-bit Active Terminator (#4398/32G3919)

These SCSI-2 hard disk drives adhere to the American National Standard for
Information Systems (ANSI) X3T9.2/375R Revision 10K dated 3/17/93.  The drives
provide configuration flexibility by only requiring a single slot for the
SCSI-2 adapter card allowing multiple unit connections.  These drives should be
considered for additional growth for systems in which fast seek times and
additional capacity are critical. (R) Registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  540MB SCSI-2 (540 million bytes)
       -  Average media data rate: 30.1Mb/sec, 3.8MB/sec
       -  Average seek time: 8.7ms
       -  SCSI data transfer rate: 10MB/sec
       -  Tagged Command Queuing (TCQ) and Automatic Defect Reallocation
          (ADR)
    o  1.0GB SCSI-2 (1000 million bytes)
       -  Average media data rate: 38.4Mb/sec, 4.8MB/sec
       -  Average seek time: 8.6ms
       -  SCSI data transfer rate: 10MB/sec
       -  Tagged Command Queuing (TCQ) and Automatic Defect Reallocation
          (ADR)
    o  Particularly effective in high-performance desktop and server
       environments.
    o  X3T9.2/375R Revision 10K

The 540MB and 1.0GB SCSI-2 drives provide exceptional performance to customers
across a wide range of environments.  With average seek times of 8.7 and 8.6ms
respectively, user productivity is greatly enhanced.  These drives are designed
to provide customers additional storage capacity with exceptional performance.

The performance characteristics of these SCSI drives will greatly increase user
productivity.

These drives represent IBM's continued commitment to investment protection by
allowing customers the ability to upgrade existing systems with these new hard
disk drive options.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Physical Specifications:

                540MB             1.0GB
    Width:      101.6mm           101.6mm
    Depth:      146.0mm           146.0mm
    Height:      25.4mm            25.4mm

Drive Specifications:

                               540MB             1.0GB
    Formatted Capacity:        540 million       1000 million
                                bytes *           bytes *
    Ave Media Data Rate:       30.1Mb/sec,       38.4Mb/sec,
                               3.8MB/sec         38.4Mb/sec,
                                                 4.8MB/sec
    Ave Seek Time:             8.7ms             8.6ms
    Ave Latency:               4.76ms            5.56ms
    Sector Interleave:         1 to 1            1 to 1

Equipment Approvals/Safety:

                              All Devices

    FCC Class B                       Yes
    UL/CSA Recognized                 Yes
    VCCI Class 2                      Yes
    GOP VDE                           Yes
    CSA Number 220                    Yes

Operating Environment:

                                           540MB       1.0GB
    Operating Temperature (Degrees C)       5-55        5-55
    Relative Humidity (system on)          10-95%       5-90%

Programming Requirements:  All hard disk drives are supported in the following
Operating System environments:

    OS/2(R) Standard Edition and Extended Edition 1.30.1
    OS/2 Standard Edition and Extended Edition 1.30.2
    OS/2 2.0
    OS/2 2.0 Plus Service Pak *
    OS/2 2.1
    OS/2 Extended Services(TM) 1.0
    OS/2 LAN Server 2.0
    OS/2 LAN Server 3.0 and NTS/2
    DOS 5.0 and Above
    NetWare(1) v3.11
    AIX(R) PS/2 1.3
    SCO(2) XENIX 2.3.4, UNIX(3) System V/386 3.2v.4, Open Desktop(4) 2.0
* For users of OS/2 2.0 or 2.00.1, the fix for APAR #PJ07991 is required for
use with the 1.0GB drive.  Customers should call the IBM support Center at
1-800-237-5511 and the fix will be sent to them. (TM) Trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation. (R) Registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation. (1) Trademark of Novell
Corporation, Inc. (2) Trademark of Santa Cruz Corporation, Inc. (3) Registered
trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. (4) Trademark of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc.

Compatibility:  These IBM SCSI drives are designed to maintain compatibility
with current software support that uses the standard defined BIOS interfaces.

PS/1 and PS/ValuePoint System Support -- 540MB/1.0GB SCSI-2 Drives:  These
drives are only supported when attached externally to the PS/1 and
PS/ValuePoint systems using the 3510-0V0 External SCSI Storage Enclosure.  The
systems must be configured with the AT Fast SCSI Adapter Kit A (#32G4088/4313).

Nominal Operating Current:  It is possible to shut down the system if the total
amount of nominal operating current required exceeds the available current of
the power supply in the PS/2 system.

Security and auditability features of the system in which this product is
installed are:

    o  A mechanical lock to allow the user to lock the system cover
       (PS/2)
    o  A user-invoked password function to prevent use by unauthorized
       persons.

Limitations:  Small Computer System Interface (SCSI), as defined in the
American National Standard for Information (ANSI) X3T9.2/375R Revision 10K
dated 3/17/93, allows for multiple SCSI adapters (initiators) on the SCSI bus.
The SCSI bus may be internal or external to the system unit.  The IBM PS/2 SCSI
adapters are in conformance with this standard and have an external port.

A data security exposure exists even with Power-On Password installed, since
external SCSI adapters can attach through the external SCSI port and gain
undetected read or write access to data stored on internal and external SCSI
devices.

Physical access to the system and external SCSI devices must be controlled to
limit this exposure.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. OPTION TO OPTION CABLE (SHORT), CARD TO OPTION CABLE AND 8-BIT ACTIVE TERMINATOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  32G4143

Part Number  32G3917

Part Number  32G3919

Feature Code 5012

Feature Code 4396

Feature Code 4398

Bus Master  No

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

    Part
    Number      Length               Description

    32G3917     0.3M                 Option to Option
    32G4143     1.5M                 Card to Option Cable
    32G3919     Negligible           8-bit Active Terminator


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. IBM LANSTREAMER MC 16 ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  59G8998

Feature Code 8998

The IBM LANStreamer(TM) MC 16 Adapter is designed to operate with IBM PS/2(R)
Models 8556 and above that support the Micro Channel(R) architecture.  It
offers improved performance and increased function.

The IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter supports operation at either 16 million or 4
million bits per second (Mbps) over Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) or IBM
Cabling System media.  Remote Program Load (RPL) is standard with the adapter.
(TM) Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (R) Registered
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Improved performance provided by the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter
       extends the time before additional hardware is required as local
       area network (LAN) activity increases.  With the adapter providing
       media speed on the LAN, user response time is improved as
       application demands increase.
    o  Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) support provides the user with
       greater flexibility and improved usability without requiring an
       external filter, and allows easy movement of the adapter in the
       customer's environment to adapt to either UTP or Shielded Twisted
       Pair (STP) wiring schemes.
    o  RPL provides the capability for improved security and simplified
       initial program load (IPL) content administration for
       workstations, and is provided at no extra cost.
    o  Device drivers included with the adapter provide the capability
       to operate with many of today's leading network operating systems,
       including OS/2(R) LAN Server and NetWare(1) Network Driver
       Interface Specification (NDIS) capabilities provided by the
       device drivers ease the user's migration of new applications.
    o  Multiple group address (MGA) support on the IBM LANStreamer MC 16
       Adapter allows the user to configure the group addresses to take
       advantage of the capability to send information to particular
       stations, similar to the multicasting capability provided by
       Ethernet(2) environments.  LAN Support Program 3.1 with program
       temporary fix (PTF) UR37950, or LAN Support Program 3.11 without
       the PTF, provides up to 256 MGA on the IBM LANStreamer MC 16
       Adapter.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (1)
Registered trademark of Novell, Inc. (2) Trademark of Xerox Corporation.

The new enhanced token-ring technology supported on the IBM LANStreamer MC 16
Adapter provides performance improvements.  The new architecture allows the IBM
LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter to send and receive data at media speed for both
small and large frames providing greater throughput for the growing customer's
environments.

The additional throughput provided by the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter
protects the customer's current hardware investment by extending the time
before additional hardware is required as LAN activity increases.

The new technology provides a platform for the customer to allow growth to new
higher demand networks.  The multiple receive and priority transmit channels
included in the new technology allow multimedia application to also use this
adapter.

Both UTP and STP connectors are offered on the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter,
providing greater flexibility in meeting customers wiring plans.  The dual
connections provide portability in the growing Token-Ring Network without
requiring customers to rewire existing buildings.

The device drivers included with the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter are NDIS and
ODI compliant, providing the capability to operate with many of today's leading
network operating systems.

The RPL function in every IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter allows a workstation to
be used in the RPL or non-RPL environment with no additional hardware cost or
changes.

In addition, the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter is compatible with other IBM
Token-Ring Adapters operating at the same speed (16Mbps or 4Mbps).  The
protocols conform to IEEE 802.5 and ECMA 89 standards.

The device drivers shipped with each adapter include both OS/2 and DOS NDIS
workstation and server drivers.  NetWare 3.1 server driver and Open Data-Link
Interface (ODI) workstation drivers that support NetWare 3.1 and 4.0 are
shipped with each adapter.  Easy access to the drivers reduces the amount of
time needed to install the new adapters and increases the user's productivity.

The IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter is a media-speed 16-bit Busmaster adapter at
all frame sizes.  The increased throughput capabilities can provide as much as
a 44% file transfer performance improvement over the existing IBM Token-Ring
Network 16/4 Adapter/A in a NetWare 3.1 client.  The IBM LANStreamer MC 16
Adapter busmastering capability results in an 80% reduction in system CPU
utilization compared to the existing IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Adapter/A.  In
desktops using multitasking operating systems such as OS/2 or Microsoft(3)
Windows(4) NT, this feature will produce significantly higher CPU availability
for other tasks.

The device drivers included with the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter provide easy
access to OS/2, DOS, and NetWare 3.1 for installation. (3) Registered trademark
of Microsoft Corporation. (4) Trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

The IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter offers both UTP and STP connections at 16Mbps
or 4Mbps without the use of external filters.  The dual connectivity makes the
adapter very portable and easy to adapt to either media installation.

New personal computer platforms are used for an increasing number of business
applications.  The IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter's additional throughput
capability, coupled with the new platforms, makes this a desirable combination
for enhanced growth in these new solutions.

Filters to support token-ring operations over UTP media at 16Mbps or 4Mbps are
included on the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter.

The customer can choose either telephone twisted-pair media, which is less
costly and already wired in many establishments, or IBM Cabling System media,
which provides less signal noise and thus greater potential for upgrading to
higher media speeds.

Multiple group address (MGA) provides a simplified means to update a group of
information (for example, time of day, stock quotes, etc.) or locate control
entities (for example, network management, bridges, servers, etc.).  This
function is treated as a broadcast function, but only those stations
recognizing this configured address will receive and process the data.  Up to
256 group addresses can be configured for IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter.

The new architecture of the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter integrates many
functions into the hardware, greatly improving the frame processing and overall
performance of the new LAN adapter over existing products.  New priority
transmit and receive channels have also been included in the new technology,
providing an easy migration to the multimedia applications without the addition
of new hardware.

The improved throughput of the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter gives customers
the potential to run additional applications on their PS/2 machines.

The IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter protocols conform to IEEE 802.5 and ECMA 89
standards.

The capability to monitor the token-ring from a central network manager is
supported on the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter.  The same level of information
is provided on the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter that is offered by the
existing IBM 16/4 Token-Ring Adapter/A.

Its conformance to the IEEE 802.5 standard allows the IBM LANStreamer MC 16
Adapter to be monitored and managed by the same tools used today.  The On-Card
Self Test verifies the adapter prior to its insertion into the ring.  The Ring
Error Monitor program shipped with the product provides a view of the condition
of the ring if problems are being encountered.

The RPL feature in every IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter provides the capability
for improved security and simplified administration of workstation IPL modules.
The RPL feature makes it possible for the customer to load application programs
from one computer connected to a token-ring network into another computer on
the same token-ring network.  The IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter with RPL may be
used in environments requiring the additional security provided by medialess
workstations with no additional cost incurred.  It can be used to simplify the
updating and control of RPL content on any workstation.  The RPL content can be
changed at the server and, the next time a workstation is "IPL'd", the revised
content is automatically received by the workstation.  Both OS/2 and NetWare
RIPL are supported on IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter.

IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter conforms to IEEE 802.5, ECMA 89.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Physical Specifications:

    Width:  8.827cm (3.476 inches)
    Length: 20.32cm (8 inches)
    Depth:  2.667cm (1 inch)
    Weight: 5.33 oz.

Operating Environment:  This product meets FCC Class A criteria up to 6
adapters per machine when configured with shielded cabling which meets the IBM
specifications.  This product meets FCC Class A criteria up to 6 adapters per
machine when configured with unshielded cabling (UTP) which meets the IBM
specifications.

    Temperature:  10.0 to 40.0 degrees C (50 to 104 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity:  8% to 80%
    Wet Bulb:  .6 to 29.4 C (33 to 85 degrees F)

Programming Requirements:  The IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter is designed to
operate with the following programs: IBM DOS (Server or Workstation
environment)

    o  IBM DOS 3.3, 4.0, 5.0, and 6.0
    o  IBM LAN Support Program 1.3 or higher (See note 1 below)
    o  DOS NDIS device drivers, included on the device driver diskette
       packaged with IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter for token-ring
       networks
    o  IBM Personal Communications/3270 Version 2.0
Note 1 -- To take advantage of the multiple group address function of the IBM
LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter, IBM LAN Support Program 1.3 with PTF No. UR37950
installed must be used, or LAN Support Program 1.33 without the PTF.

OS/2 Extended Services(TM):

    o  IBM OS/2 Extended Services 1.0
    o  OS/2 NDIS device drivers, included in the device driver diskette
       packaged with the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter for Token-Ring
       networks.
(TM) Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

OS/2 LAN Services:

    o  OS/2 LAN Server Version 3.0
    o  OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0
    o  OS/2 NDIS device drivers, included in the device driver diskette
       packaged with the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter for token-ring
       networks.
The OS/2 NDIS device drivers operate with the following OS/2 operating systems:

    o  OS/2 Standard Edition (OS/2 SE) 1.30
    o  Operating System/2(R) Version 2.0
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Novell NetWare:

    o  Novell NetWare Version 3.11 and 4.0
    o  Novell NetWare device drivers, included in the device driver
       diskette packaged with the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter for
       token-ring networks

Device Driver Support Supplied with IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter:

    o  IBM DOS NDIS Driver
    o  IBM OS/2 NDIS Driver
    o  Novell NetWare 3.11 and 4.0 Server Driver
    o  Novell DOS Open Data-Link Interface (ODI) Workstation Driver
    o  Novell OS/2 Open Data-Link Interface (ODI) Workstation Driver
Software Support Supplied with IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter

    o  Device Driver Diskette
    o  Ring diagnostic program to assist in problem determination for the
       token-ring.
    o  Adapter diagnostic program to assist in problem determination for
       the token-ring adapter.

Compatibility:  The following products have been tested and operate properly
with the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter:

    o  IBM OS/2 Extended Services Version 1.0
    o  IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0
    o  IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 3.0
    o  IBM Personal Communications/3270 Version 2.0, and later releases
    o  OS/2 Communications Manager/2

Software Vendor Support:  The following software vendors have notified IBM they
have tested the IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter, P/N 59G8998, in workstations and
servers, and have certified its compatibility with the products listed below.
IBM has not evaluated these products and makes no comment or judgements about
their functions, quality, performance, etc.  Listed products may not be
available in all countries.

    Company                       Product
    Novell(5), Inc.               NetWare(5) v3.11
    Microsoft(6) Corporation      LAN MANAGER(6) 2.0
(5) Registered Trademark of Novell, Inc. (6) Registered Trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.

Limitations:  A maximum of six IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter products may be
installed in a machine.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24. IBM ETHERSTREAMER MC 32 ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  59G9066

Feature Code 9066

Utilizing the latest advances in IBM adapter technology, the IBM EtherStreamer
MC 32 Adapter provides customers with a high-performance Ethernet adapter for
IBM Personal System/2(R) (PS/2(R)) or non-IBM machines implementing Micro
Channel(R) architecture.  The IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter is a 32-bit
Ethernet busmaster adapter designed for servers and high-performance
workstations.  It provides media speed throughput at all frame sizes and has
40MB data streaming capability, increasing the network performance by reducing
the number of host CPU cycles required to send and receive data on the network
and by increasing the throughput of data onto the Ethernet network.  In
addition, the IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter can operate in full duplex or
half duplex modes, allowing transmission on the Ethernet network at 20Mbps or
10Mbps respectively, and supports Ethernet bridging using transparent bridging
or source routing techniques.

The IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter allows attachment to an Ethernet network
using 10BaseT (twisted-pair), 10Base2 (thin coaxial) or AUI (thick coaxial or
fiber) media.  It contains an autosense capability which automatically detects
and configures the adapter for the media type connected.  The IBM EtherStreamer
MC 32 Adapter contains upgradeable microcode and is compatible with other IBM
Ethernet adapters operating at the same speed over the Ethernet network.  The
protocols conform to IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet Version 2 standards.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Utilizes leading-edge VLSI chip technology to provide media speed
       throughput at all frame sizes.
    o  Provides quick response times when downloading files with its
       32-bit busmaster adapter design and 40MB data streaming
       capability.
    o  Supports both full duplex and half duplex modes of operation,
       providing data transmission at either 20Mbps or 10Mbps,
       respectively.
    o  Provides customers with a single IBM high-performance adapter
       solution for all common Ethernet wiring environments.
    o  Supports most of today's leading network operating systems,
       including NetWare(1), OS/2(R) LAN Server, and LAN Manager.
    o  Supports Ethernet bridges using transparent bridging or source
       routing techniques.
    o  Contains an autosense capability that automatically senses and
       configures the adapter for the attached media type.
    o  Provides for easy upgrades and problem fixes through its
       upgradeable microcode.
    o  Protects the customer's investment with a five-year warranty.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (1)
NetWare is a trademark of Novell.

The high performance of the IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter protects the
customer's current hardware investment by extending the time before additional
hardware is required as LAN activity increases.  This is accomplished in two
ways -- a reduction in the number of host CPU cycles required to send and
receive data on the network, and an increase in the adapter throughput.  The
following features of the IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter which provide this
capability are:

    o  Leading-edge VLSI chip technology which provides media speed
       throughput at all frame sizes.
    o  32-bit address and 32-bit data operation.
    o  Busmaster capability.
    o  40MB data streaming capability.
    o  Support for full duplex and half duplex modes of operation,
       providing data transmission at either 20Mbps or 10Mbps,
       respectively, over 10Base-T Ethernet networks.  A switched
       Ethernet concentrator with full duplex support is required for
       the adapter to operate at the 20Mbps rate with other devices on
       the Ethernet network.

Because of the IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter's increased throughput capacity,
more clients can be supported using a single adapter without degrading customer
response time.  In addition, the adapter's faster file transfer performance can
result in a reduction of the time it takes customers to download files from
their servers.

Compatibility ensures customers that the product they have purchased will work
with other products in their environment, whether the other products were
purchased from the same vendor or different vendors.

    o  The IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter provides customers with a
       single adapter solution for all common Ethernet wiring
       environments.  Customers can use the IBM EtherStreamer MC 32
       Adapter whether they have 10Base-T (twisted-pair), 10Base2
       (thin coax), or AUI (thick coax or fiber) media for their
       network
       wiring.
    o  The device drivers included with the IBM EtherStreamer MC 32
       Adapter provide the capability to operate with many of today's
       leading network operating systems, including OS/2 LAN Server,
       NetWare, and LAN Manager.
    o  The IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter is compatible with other IBM
       Ethernet adapters operating at the same speed (10Mbps).  The
       protocols conform to the IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet Version 2
       standards.
    o  The five-year warranty period of the IBM EtherStreamer MC 32
       Adapter protects the customer's investment in the product.
    o  The IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter was designed and developed by
       IBM's Local Area Network Hardware Development Lab in Research
       Triangle Park, North Carolina -- an ISO9000-certified development
       laboratory.  The ISO9000 certification ensures customers that a
       high quality design and development process was used to develop
       this product.
    o  The IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter contains upgradeable microcode.
       If an upgrade to the microcode becomes available to improve
       performance, provide more function, or to fix potentially serious
       problems, customers will only need to download a software program
       rather than physically replace the PROMS.

The IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter protocols conform to the IEEE 802.3 and
Ethernet Version 2 standards.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Physical Specifications:

    Width:  314mm (12.35 inches)
    Depth:   21mm (0.83 inches)
    Height: 100mm (3.93 inches)
    Weight: .260kg (0.60 lb)

Operating Environment:  The IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter meets FCC Class A
(Business), CSPR22-A, and IOP operating criteria.

    Temperature: 10.0 to 35.0 degrees C (50 to 95 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity: 8% to 80%
    Wet Bulb: 23.0 degrees C (73 degrees F)

Programming Requirements:  The following are required when operating the IBM
EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter in the following environments: Novell NetWare
(server environment)

    o  Novell NetWare Version 3.11 or Version 4.0
    o  NetWare device drivers, included in the option diskette packaged
       with the adapter.

NetWare from IBM (server environment)

    o  NetWare from IBM Version 3.11 or Version 4.0
    o  NetWare device drivers, included in the option diskette packaged
       with the adapter.

OS/2 LAN Server (server environment)

    o  IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 3.0
    o  OS/2 NDIS device driver, included in the option diskette packaged
       with the adapter.

Microsoft(2) LAN Manager (server environment)

    o  Microsoft LAN Manager Version 3.0
    o  DOS or OS/2 NDIS device driver, included in the option diskette
       packaged with the adapter.
(2) Registered trademark of Microsoft.

IBM DOS (DOS server environment)

    o  IBM DOS 3.3 or later
    o  IBM PC LAN Program (PCLP) Version 1.34
    o  DOS NDIS device driver, included in the option diskette packaged
       with the adapter.

IBM DOS (workstation environment)

    o  IBM DOS 3.3 or later
    o  IBM LAN Support Program Version 1.33 or later
    o  DOS NDIS device driver, included in the option diskette packaged
       with the adapter.
NetWare (DOS workstation environment)

    o  NetWare from IBM or Novell NetWare V2.2 or later
    o  IBM DOS 3.3 or later
    o  DOS ODI device driver, included in the option diskette packaged
       with the adapter.

NetWare (OS/2 workstation environment)

    o  NetWare from IBM or Novell NetWare Version 2.2 or later
    o  IBM OS/2 Version 1.3 or Version 2.0
    o  OS/2 ODI device driver, included in the option diskette packaged
       with the adapter.

Microsoft Windows (workstation environment)

    o  Microsoft Windows Version 3.0 or higher
    o  NDIS device drivers, included in the option diskette packaged
       with the adapter.

OS/2 Extended Edition

    o  IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.30.2.
    o  OS/2 NDIS device driver, included in the option diskette packaged
       with the adapter.

Compatibility:  The following products have been tested and operate properly
with the IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter:

    o  IBM LAN Support Program Version 1.33
    o  IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.30.2
    o  IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 3.0
    o  IBM Extended Services(TM) (ES) Version 1.0
    o  IBM PC LAN Program Version 1.34
    o  IBM Personal Communications/3270 Version 2.0
    o  OS/2 Communication Manager/2 Version 1.0.
    o  TCP/IP Version 1.2.1 for OS/2
    o  TCP/IP Version 2.1 for DOS
(TM) Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.1. FDDI ADAPTER ENHANCEMENTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  58G6540 MC

Service Part Number   58G6540

Feature Code 6540

Marketing Part Number  58G6541 EISA

Service Part Number   58G6541

Feature Code 6541

Marketing Part Number  58G6542 ISA

Service Part Number   58G6542

Feature Code 6542

The IBM FDDI Adapter family is enhanced by new, low-price fiber distributed
data interface (FDDI) adapters supporting the TP-PMD/306 standard, FDDI
synchronous bandwidth allocation, and extended operating systems.

    o   The new adapters provide low-cost connection to a 100 megabits
        per second (Mbps) FDDI network through copper unshielded twisted
        pair (in conformance with TP-PMD/306) cabling.  They support all
        the software environments and functions provided by the previous
        IBM FDDI Adapters.
               Three new adapters are offered:
        -   IBM FDDI UTP5 Base MC Adapter
        -   IBM FDDI UTP5 Base ISA Adapter
        -   IBM FDDI UTP5 Base EISA Adapter
               The adapters can be used with:
        -   The IBM PS/2 (R), IBM Industrial Computers, and non-IBM
            workstations implementing the Micro Channel (R) Architecture
        -   The IBM PS/2, IBM PS/ValuePoint (TM), IBM Industrial
            Computers, and compatible personal computers implementing the
            ISA (AT (R)) bus
        -   Non-IBM workstations implementing the EISA bus
    o   FDDI multimedia support is enhanced by providing FDDI synchronous
        frame transmission and bandwidth allocation with the OS/2 (R)
        NDIS device driver on MCA, ISA, and EISA systems.
    o   The following extended operating systems are supported:
        -   Latest levels of DOS and OS/2
        -   Microsoft Windows NT**
        -   Latest Novell NetWare** and SFT III** levels
        -   SCO**
        -   Interactive**

The synchronous bandwidth allocation and the new software environments are
supported by the new adapters and by the current IBM FDDI Adapter family (part
numbers 58G6406, 58G6407, 58G6408, 58G6409, 58G6410, 58G6411, 58G6412, 58G6413,
58G6414, 58G6415) without a hardware upgrade. (R) Registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation (TM) Trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation ** Product or company name is a trademark or
registered trademark of   its respective holder.

IN BRIEF . . .

    o   New IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters for a wide range of IBM and
        competitive workstations
        -   Standards-based, American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
            X3T9.5 and International Organization for Standardization
            (ISO) 9314 workstation adapters
        -   Unshielded twisted pair TP-PMD/306 support
        -   Micro Channel, ISA, and EISA bus support
        -   16- and 32-bit Micro Channel PS/2 support
    o   FDDI synchronous support (free-of-charge software upgrade for
        installed adapters)
    o   Extended range of device driver and operating system support
        (free-of-charge software upgrade for installed adapters)
        -   Latest level (SMT 7.3) of station management
        -   Remote IPL in Novell environment now available for the
            already available IBM FDDI Adapters and the new IBM FDDI UTP5
            Adapters
        -   Ring Diag Tool now supported by the complete IBM FDDI Adapter
            family

IBM FDDI UTP5 COPPER ADAPTERS:  The new adapters provide customers with
low-cost quality networking solutions for a range of IBM and non-IBM
workstations running applications that require high-speed data exchange.

Access to new applications for which FDDI performance is critical is now
possible for customers willing to migrate from their Token-Ring or their
Ethernet applications by retaining their existing IBM Cabling System of
unshielded twisted pair cabling.

    o   IBM FDDI MC Adapter
               This adapter should be proposed for IBM Personal System/2
        (R) (PS/2) Premium systems (for server and client environments),
        particularly in OS/2 LAN Server and NetWare server environments,
        and for IBM Industrial Computers complying with the Micro Channel
        Architecture where UTP5 copper media attachment is a requirement.
    o   IBM FDDI ISA Adapter

This adapter should be proposed for IBM Personal System/ValuePoint (TM)
systems, Personal System/2 (PS/2) systems, the IBM 7537 Industrial Computers,
and non-IBM systems that implement ISA, particularly in DOS and NetWare client
environments where UTP5 copper media attachment is a requirement. It can also
be proposed for competitive workstations complying with the Industry Standard
Architecture (ISA).

    o   IBM FDDI EISA Adapter

This adapter should be proposed for non-IBM workstations implementing the
Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus.  It should be proposed in
all cases where UTP5 copper media attachment is a requirement.

FDDI SYNCHRONOUS BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION:  Synchronous support allows the IBM FDDI
Adapters to be proposed in cases where guaranteed bandwidth is a requirement.
Synchronous FDDI is a cost-effective 100Mbps solution for multimedia and
file-transfer-based applications that demand a fixed allocated bandwidth and
predictable delay.

The synchronous support is well suited to server environments and real-time
applications with stringent timing requirements, such as industrial process
control applications.

EXTENDED OPERATING SYSTEMS SUPPORT:  The new operating systems supported extend
the market segment for which IBM FDDI Adapters can be proposed.

For example, Microsoft Windows NT and SFT III environments significantly extend
the field coverage of the IBM FDDI Adapters.

The IBM FDDI Adapters are based on ANSI X3T9.5 and ISO 9314 standards and
support IBM and non-IBM workstations with Micro Channel, ISA, and EISA bus
architectures.

    o   New UTP5 Connectivity
        The new IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters allow users to take advantage of
        the 100Mbps FDDI throughput on a low-cost UTP type 5 or FTP
        copper cable medium.  (As defined in the UTP5 and FTP standards,
        the distance between FDDI stations is limited to 100 meters in
        this case.)
        These adapters allow you to install an FDDI network over existing
        UTP type 5 cabling (formerly used by a Token-Ring network, for
        example), which means an easy and low-cost upgrade to a high-
        performance network.
        The IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters support only the Single Access Station
        (SAS) type of connection to the FDDI network.  The Dual Access
        Station (DAS) connection type is not supported.
        These adapters use existing interfaces.
    o   FDDI Synchronous Support
        The Network Driver Interface Specification (NDIS) OS/2 device
        driver on MCA, ISA, and EISA systems is synchronous enabled.
        The characteristics of FDDI synchronous transmission offer the
        support many multimedia applications require.
        This function is supported by the complete IBM FDDI Adapter
        family.
    o   Extended Range of Operating System Support
        These new IBM FDDI Adapters are delivered with one or more
        diskettes that provide support of the adapters by most popular
        operating systems (DOS, OS/2, Windows (1), Windows NT, NetWare,
        SFT III, and UNIX**).
    o   Station Management at the Current Level of FDDI Standards
        The IBM FDDI Adapters are delivered with the current level
        (SMT 7.3) of the FDDI standard for station management, allowing
        users to upgrade their network stations to the last published SMT
        level.
    o   Remote IPL
        This function is supported in NetWare environments by the
        complete IBM FDDI Adapter family.
    o   Ring Diag Tool

The IBM FDDI Ring Diagnostic Tool gathers information about the operation of a
single FDDI ring segment.  The information is primarily used for network
problem determination and fault isolation.

This tool is not packaged with the adapters.  IBM customers can get it free of
charge through their IBM representative.

The Ring Diag Tool is supported by all IBM FDDI Adapters. (1) Trademark of
Microsoft Corporation

These FDDI Adapter enhancements complement the current FDDI offering.

    o   The new IBM FDDI UTP5 Base ISA Adapter and IBM FDDI UTP5 Base MC
        Adapter attach PS/2, PS/ValuePoint, or other Micro Channel and
        ISA compatible workstations to FDDI networks through UTP5 copper
        cabling.
               The IBM FDDI UTP5 Base EISA Adapter attaches non-IBM EISA
        workstations to FDDI networks, allowing access to most
        workstations through UTP5 copper cabling for applications
        requiring the performance of FDDI networks.
    o   Synchronous frame transmission and bandwidth allocation provide a
        guaranteed bandwidth with high reliability to time-critical
        applications.  Multimedia applications and applications requiring
        intensive network use (for example, server backup applications)
        will directly benefit from this new function.
    o   With the new FDDI device drivers offering, network oriented
        applications running over SFT III, Windows NT, Santa Cruz
        Operation**, and Interactive will benefit from FDDI network
        performance.

Investment protection for an FDDI network is centered around continued
compliance with the FDDI standards.

The IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters are compatible with the FDDI ANSI X3T9.5 and ISO
9314 standards and can interoperate with other compatible IBM and non-IBM FDDI
equipment (workstations, concentrators, hubs, and so on).  The products you
have purchased will work with other products in your environment, whether the
other products were purchased from the same vendor or different vendors.

In addition to unshielded twisted pair wiring, both optical fiber and copper
wiring are offered on the IBM FDDI Adapters, providing greater flexibility in
meeting the user's wiring plans.

The new device drivers significantly expand compatibility with and connectivity
to Novell, Microsoft, SCO, and Interactive operating systems.

Many users' installed base of unshielded twisted pair category 5 cabling is
significant, and tends to increase with time.  The new IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters
allow the reuse of this existing cabling, and thus minimize the overall network
cost.

Because IBM now provides FDDI adapters at low prices for a wide range of
workstations and device drivers, users are able to

    o   The faster response times inherent in a 100Mbps network will
        result in improved user productivity.  Transmission of large data
        files to and from other users and file servers will occur at much
        faster data rates than on existing Ethernet or Token-Ring
        networks.
    o   FDDI synchronous support opens the window to a new range of
        multimedia applications over FDDI.
    o   With these new FDDI device drivers, network oriented applications
        running over SFT III, Windows NT, Santa Cruz Operation, and
        Interactive will benefit from FDDI network performance.

The IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters provide for ease of installation via easy-to-follow
setup and configuration procedures.  The skill level and training requirements
of service personnel are minimized by:

    o   Configuration capabilities in installation procedures
    o   Diagnostic capabilities
    o   Simplicity in design

Simplicity in installation (setup and configuration) and availability of
diagnostics minimize service, increase maintainability, and maximize the
productivity of users.

Ease of system management is protected via IBM's commitment to base FDDI
hardware and software on current standards for station management (SMT 7.3).
The new IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters are shipped with the SMT code at the 7.3 level,
and are fully interoperable with the IBM 8244 FDDI Concentrator, the FDDI SNMP
Proxy Agent, and the IBM 8250 Intelligent Hub.

The IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters are based on current levels of the ISO 9314 and ANSI
X3T9.5 standards for 100Mbps FDDI network operations, as well as on TP-PMD/306.

The synchronous feature is based on the Synchronous Forum Implementer's
Agreement and ANSI X3 T9.5 standards.

The IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters are the complementary IBM FDDI offerings for the
PS/2 family of products (Micro Channel Architecture and ISA busses) and for
competitive workstations implementing Micro Channel, ISA, and EISA busses.

The IBM FDDI UTP5 MC Adapters complement the current IBM FDDI Workstation
Adapters for PS/ValuePoint and ISA PS/2 system units as well as non-IBM
machines (Micro Channel, ISA, or EISA busses).

FDDI synchronous support opens the window to a new range of multimedia
applications over FDDI.

With the new FDDI device drivers, network oriented applications running over
SFT III, Windows NT, Santa Cruz Operation, and Interactive will benefit from
FDDI network performance.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    o   IBM FDDI UTP5 Base MC Adapter
        -   Length:  292 mm (11.5 inches)
        -   Height:  88.3 mm (3.5 inches)
        -   Thickness:  17.9 mm (.7 inches)
    o   IBM FDDI UTP5 Base ISA Adapter
        -   Length:  339 mm (13.4 inches)
        -   Height:  107 mm (4.2 inches)
        -   Thickness:  17.1 mm (.7 inches)
    o   IBM FDDI UTP5 Base EISA Adapter
        -   Length:  275 mm (10.9 inches)
        -   Height:  127 mm (5.0 inches)
        -   Thickness:  17.1 mm (.7 inches)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT:

    o   Temperature:  10 (degs) to 40 (degs)C (50 (degs) to 104 (degs)F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8% to 80%
    o   Wet Bulb: 27 (degs)C
    o   Electrical Power:
        -   IBM FDDI UTP5 MC Adapters:  9.0 W
        -   IBM FDDI UTP5 ISA Adapters:  10.0 W
        -   IBM FDDI UTP5 EISA Adapters:  12.9 W
           The IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters meet FCC Class A
operating criteria.

IBM FDDI MC ADAPTER:  The IBM FDDI MC Adapter is a 16/32-bit, Bus Master
adapter designed for the PS/2 family of products and for competitive
workstations implementing the Micro Channel Architecture.

The IBM FDDI MC Adapter complies with the October 1992 level of the Micro
Channel Architecture document.

       Applicable IBM PS/2 machine types are:

  8550      8573      9577
  8555      8580      9585
  8556      8590      9590
  8557      8595      9595 (including 560 Server)
  8560      9556      8600 (195 and 295 Servers)
  8565      9557
  8570      9576

The following IBM Industrial Computers may also be configured with the IBM FDDI
MC Adapter in building environments only:

  7546
  7568

IBM FDDI ISA ADAPTER:  The IBM FDDI ISA Adapter is a 16-bit bus adapter
designed for the low end of the PS/2 family of products (those workstations
implementing the AT bus), for PS/VP (Personal System/ValuePoint (TM))
workstations, and for compatible personal computers that implement ISA.

The IBM FDDI ISA Adapter complies with the July 1991 level of the Personal
System/2 Hardware Interface Technical Reference AT-Bus Systems (Model 35 and
Model 40), and with IEEE Personal Computer Bus Standard P996 for ISA 16-Bit Bus
Systems. Applicable IBM machine types are:

o   PS/ValuePoint systems: 6382 and 6384
o   PS/2 systems: 8535 and 8540

The following IBM Industrial Computer may also be configured with the IBM FDDI
ISA Adapter in building environments only:

o   IBM 7537 Industrial Computer
NOTE: The IBM FDDI Adapter has NOT been tested with ALL personal computers that
implement ISA.

IBM FDDI EISA ADAPTER:  The IBM FDDI EISA Adapter is a 32-bit bus adapter
designed for those industry personal computers that implement the Extended
Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus.

It complies with Version 3.12 of the EISA specification. NOTE: The IBM FDDI
EISA Adapter has NOT been tested with ALL personal computers that implement
EISA.

OPERATING/NETWORK SYSTEM SUPPORT:  The current IBM FDDI Adapters and the new
IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters will support the following operating system levels (new
features are highlighted):

           Extended Operating Systems Support 1
    o   OS/2 2.1, 2.0, and 1.3.2 with
        -   Extended Services (TM) 1.0
        -   Extended Services with Database Server
        -   NTS2 (Network Transport Services/2)
        -   LAN Server 2.0 and 3.0 (Entry and Advanced)
        -   IBM TCP/IP 1.2.1 (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
            Protocol)
    o   IBM DOS 4.0, 5.0, 5.02, and 6.1 with
        -   IBM LSP 1.3 (LAN Support Program)
        -   IBM PC LAN Program Version 1.3.4
        -   IBM PC/3270 Version 2.0
        -   IBM TCP/IP 2.1
    o   Novell NetWare 3.11, 3.12, and 4.0
    o   Novell SFT III (NetWare 3.11 version)
    o   Microsoft LAN Manager 2.2
    o   Microsoft Windows 2.0 and 3.1
    o   Microsoft Windows NT for EISA, ISA, and MCA
    o   Microsoft DOS 3.3, 4.0, and 6.2
    o   SCO Version 2.1  for ISA and EISA
    o   Interactive 2.1 for IBM FDDI ISA Adapter and IBM FDDI EISA
        Adapter machines
    o   Digital Research Inc. DOS 6.0
    Extended Operating Systems Support 2
    o   SCO Version 2.0 for MCA
    o   Interactive 2.0 for MCA

DEVICE DRIVERS:  The IBM FDDI Adapters and new IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters work
properly with the following device drivers:

    o   DOS NDIS (see note 1) 2.02 device driver
    o   Windows NT NDIS 3.0 device driver
    o   OS/2 NDIS 2.02 device driver with synchronous function (see note
        2)
    o   DOS ODI (see note 2) Workstation device driver
    o   Novell SFT III ODI device driver
    o   OS/2 ODI (see note 1) Workstation device driver
    o   Novell NetWare 3.11/3.12/4.0 ODI Server device driver
    o   SCO (Santa Cruz Operation, Inc.) device driver
    o   Interactive device driver

NOTES:

1.  NDIS and ODI device drivers are two types of common industry
    device drivers that are offered for use with the adapters:
    o   Network Driver Interface Specification (NDIS), jointly
        authored by 3Com and Microsoft Corporations
        -   For DOS, OS/2, and Windows NT operating systems
        -   Based on NDIS Version 2.01
        -   IEEE 802.5 type Media Access Control (MAC) drivers that
            allow existing NDIS applications to operate on FDDI as
            they do on Token-Ring
    o   Open Data Link Interface (ODI) from Novell Corporation
        -   Available for the NetWare operating systems as well as
            the DOS and OS/2 operating systems
2.  NDIS OS/2 device driver with synchronous function:
    o   The synchronous feature is packaged with the NDIS OS/2 device
        driver.  No hardware upgrade on current IBM FDDI Adapters is
        required for synchronous support.
    o   The IBM NDIS OS/2 device driver is upgraded to support the
        synchronous transmission mode of operation defined by the
        ANSI MAC and SMT standards, and the FDDI Synchronous Forum
        Implementer's Agreement.  This support guarantees access to
        the high-priority transmission capabilities an FDDI
        synchronous adapter provides.  The intended applications
        include time-sensitive interactive video conferencing,
        multimedia playback, and similar applications.
               Two synchronous upgrades are provided.  The first,
        end-station support, deals with the FDDI node's ability to
        prioritize synchronous traffic over normal asynchronous
        traffic.  Because the traffic prioritization is performed on
        the transmit path, synchronous support is well suited for
        servers with time-critical applications.  This prioritization
        is based on 802.5 Priority Bits content and is thus
        compatible with IBM LAN Server Ultimedia (R).
               The synchronous end-station support includes an
        interaction with a Synchronous Bandwidth Allocator (SBA) for
        the purpose of getting permission to transmit high-priority
        traffic.  The second upgrade includes the SBA.  This SBA
        application, when enabled by the user, will manage the pool
        of synchronous bandwidth.
               The SBA protocol supports the following functions:
        -   Managing the allocation of the limited synchronous
            bandwidth resource
        -   Monitoring the amount of synchronous bandwidth allocated
            for use
        -   Monitoring the ring for over-allocation of synchronous
            bandwidth
        -   Monitoring for and recovering from ring instability due
            to over-allocation of the total bandwidth

SOFTWARE VENDOR SUPPORT:  The IBM FDDI Adapters will be tested by Novell Inc.
in workstations and servers and their compatibility with Novell's NetWare 4.0
and SFT III should be certified by Novell Inc. as soon as the tests are
completed.

IBM has not evaluated other-vendor products and makes no comment or judgement
about their functions, quality, or performance. The other-vendor products may
not be available in all countries.

COMPATIBILITY:  The IBM FDDI Adapters' synchronous function has been tested and
operates properly with:

    o   The IBM 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator.
    o   The IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator.
    o   The IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub.
    o   The 3172 Interconnect Controller Model 002.
    o   The IBM PS/2 workstations currently equipped with the IBM FDDI
        Workstation Adapters (part numbers 58G6540/41/42,
        58G6406/07/08/09/10/11/12/13).
    o   The IBM LAN Server Ultimedia.  APAR IC076262 has to be installed,
        to get users of LS 3.0 plus LAN Server Ultimedia with FDDI.

The IBM UTP5 Adapters have been tested and operate properly   with:

    o   The IBM 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator
    o   The IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub

They have also been designed to work properly with all workstations meeting the
bus specifications indicated in HARDWARE

REQUIREMENTS, but have NOT been tested with ALL personal computers implementing
the bus architectures supported.

LIMITATIONS:

    o   Industrial Computers (7537, 7546, and 7568) are supported only
        when the operating environment is limited to the ranges defined
        for the IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapters.
    o   The installation of an IBM FDDI UTP5 Adapter requires a 16/32-bit
        empty slot.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection, and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures, and appropriate controls in
application systems and communication facilities.

FIELD-INSTALLABLE FEATURE:  Yes

WARRANTY PERIOD:  One year

CUSTOMER SETUP:  Yes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25. IBM FDDI ADAPTERS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  58G6406

Part Number  58G6407

Part Number  58G6408

Part Number  58G6409

Part Number  58G6410

Part Number  58G6411

Part Number  58G6412

Part Number  58G6413

Part Number  58G6414

Part Number  58G6415

Feature Code 6406

Feature Code 6407

Feature Code 6408

Feature Code 6409

Feature Code 6410

Feature Code 6411

Feature Code 6412

Feature Code 6413

Feature Code 6414

Feature Code 6415

The IBM FDDI Adapters are a family of new, low-price fiber distributed data
interface (FDDI) adapters for IBM PS/2(R) systems family and non-IBM
competitive workstations with Micro Channel(R) (MC), Industry Standard
Architecture (ISA), and Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) busses.

These adapters will provide connection of a wide range of IBM and competitive
workstations to a 100 megabits per second (Mbps) FDDI networks through optical
fiber and shielded twisted-pair cabling.

Workstations supported are:

    o  the IBM PS/2, Industrial Computers and non-IBM workstations
       implementing the Micro Channel Architecture,
    o  the IBM PS/2, PS/ValuePoint(TM), Industrial Computers and industry
       compatible personal computers implementing the ISA (AT(R)) bus,
    o  and also non-IBM workstations implementing the EISA bus

The increased bandwidth of a 100Mbps network to the desktop will provide users
a low-cost solution to migrate to higher density applications running on IBM or
competitive workstations when their current Token-Ring or Ethernet networks can
no longer support their bandwidth requirements.

These new IBM FDDI Adapters are replacing the current IBM FDDI Workstation
Adapters.  See IBM Product Announcement PCC 93-302, dated June 22, 1993.  The
new IBM FDDI Adapters have attractive new prices and improved performance.
Support under new operating systems with corresponding device drivers is also
offered.  In addition a new range of IBM (AT bus) and competitive (MC, ISA, and
EISA bus)  workstations are supported by this new IBM FDDI Adapters offering.

The IBM FDDI Adapters are shipped at the latest level of FDDI Station
Management Standard (SMT 7.3).  The IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator, and the FDDI
SNMP Proxy Agent used to perform the network management, are also upgraded to
the same SMT 7.3 level of the FDDI Standard. (TM) Trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation. (R) Registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  New IBM FDDI Adapters for a wide range of IBM and competitive
       workstations
       -  Standards-based, American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
          X3T9.5 and International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
          9314 workstation adapters
       -  Micro Channel, ISA, and EISA bus support
       -  16 and 32-bits Micro Channel PS/2 support
    o  Attractive new prices
    o  Improved performance, low power consumption and better use of
       system slots
    o  Extended range of device driver and operating system support
    o  Latest level (SMT 7.3) of station management for the new IBM FDDI
       Adapters
    o  Upgrade of the IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator and the FDDI SNMP Proxy
       Agent to the same level of standards (SMT 7.3).
    o  Remote Program Update (RPU) function now available with the new
       FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent.
DESCRIPTION

    o  New IBM FDDI Adapters for a wide range of IBM and competitive
       workstations:
         These new standards-based, ANSI X3T9.5 and ISO 9314 workstation
         adapters:
       -  Provide an easy migration of networks from Ethernet and Token
          Ring to FDDI as business needs require.
       -  Allow an IBM FDDI solution for all the user's workstations.
          IBM and non-IBM workstations with Micro Channel, ISA, and EISA
          bus architectures are supported.
          -- PS/2 models and Industrial Computers with Micro Channel
             Architecture are supported.  Original equipment manufacturer
             (OEM) workstations implementing the Micro Channel
             Architecture are also supported.  The IBM FDDI MC Adapters
             comply with the September 1991 level of the Micro Channel
             Architecture document.
          -- IBM AT bus PS/2 models and Industrial Computers and
             competitive workstations implementing the ISA bus are
             supported.
             The IBM FDDI ISA Adapters comply with the July 1991 level
             of the Personal System/2(R) Hardware Interface Technical
             Reference AT-Bus Systems (Model 35 and Model 40).
             The IBM FDDI ISA Adapters comply also with the IEEE
             Personal Computer Bus Standard P996 for ISA 16-Bit Bus
             Systems.
          -- Competitive workstations implementing the EISA bus are also
             supported.  The IBM FDDI EISA Adapters comply with the
             version 3.12 of the EISA specification.
    o  Attractive new prices
       These new IBM FDDI Adapters are attractively priced compared to
       the current IBM and competitive adapters.
    o  Improved performance and low power consumption
       The new IBM FDDI Adapters provide attractive performance, allowing
       new applications requiring large data bandwidth to be run by the
       user's workstations.
       The new IBM FDDI Adapters have significantly reduced the power
       consumption of the host system unit, allowing full use of the
       workstations' slot capacity.
    o  Extended range of operating system support
       These new IBM FDDI Adapters are delivered with diskette(s)
       allowing support of the adapters by most of popular industry
       operating systems.
    o  Station management upgraded to the current level of FDDI
       standards  The IBM FDDI Adapters are delivered with the current
       level (SMT 7.3) of the FDDI standard for station management,
       allowing users to upgrade their networkstations to the last
       published SMT level.
       The FDDI SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Proxy Agent
       (OS/2(R) application which is used to convert SMT to SNMP
       protocols for use by AIX(R) NetView(R)/6000 or any OEM SNMP-
       based network management system) is upgraded in order to be able
       to support workstations at SMT 6.2 and 7.3 levels on the same FDDI
       ring.  The Remote Program Update (RPU) function which is used to
       upgrade the IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator microcode from a PS/2
       workstation, will be now available with the Proxy Agent.
       The IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator is upgraded to the current level
       (SMT 7.3) of the FDDI standard of station management.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

These new FDDI offerings complement other IBM Token-Ring and Ethernet LAN
offerings.  The customer may choose FDDI because of large bandwidth
requirements of the current workstation operating systems.  The attractive
prices of these new IBM FDDI Adapters make now this FDDI technology affordable.

The IBM FDDI Adapters are standard-compliant interface cards and, as such, the
IBM or non-IBM workstations in which they are installed will interoperate with
standard-compliant equipment from IBM or from other vendors installed on the
same network.

Connection to the FDDI network is established by the standard and provides for
three types of attachment.  Providing a choice of attachments optimizes
utilization of the Adapters and other system hardware as network requirements
and configurations evolve.

    o  Single access stations (SASs) connect to the network through a
       concentrator (for example, IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator).
    o  Dual homing is a type of connection whereby one workstation or
       device can be connected to two lobes on one concentrator or two
       separate concentrators.
       In this configuration only one link is active while the second
       remains in standby mode.
    o  Dual access stations (DASs) provides direct connection between
       the workstation and the FDDI ring, without the use of a
       concentrator.  The IBM FDDI Adapters may also be used in dual
       mode to link local workstations together without use of a
       concentrator or connection to the fiber optic FDDI backbone
       ring.

The configuration, performance and reliability of FDDI Local Area Networks
provide the customer with the essential LAN capabilities to solve complex
business workstation networking requirements.

The IBM FDDI Adapters provide access also to a wide range of new applications
for which FDDI performance is critical, such as multimedia, computer-aided
design (CAD), simulations, modeling, and graphics.

The new IBM FDDI MC Adapters and IBM FDDI ISA Adapters are available to attach
PS/2, PS/ValuePoint or other Micro Channel and ISA compatible workstations to
FDDI networks through optical fiber and copper cabling.

The IBM FDDI EISA Adapters are also available to attach non-IBM EISA
workstations to FDDI networks, allowing the customer the access of most of its
workstations to applications requiring the performance of FDDI networks.

Multiple group address (MGA) provides a simplified means to update a group of
information (for example, time of day, stock quotes, etc.) or locate  control
entities (for example, network management, bridges, servers, etc.).  This
function is treated as a broadcast function, but only those stations
recognizing this configured address will receive and process the data.  Up to
16 group addresses can be configured.

Because IBM now provides FDDI Adapters at low prices for a wide range of
workstations, users are now able to progressively migrate all their
workstations to FDDI.

The new enhanced FDDI technologies incorporated on the IBM FDDI Adapters
provide significant performance improvements.  These include frame processing
capacity of up to twice the throughput of current IBM FDDI Workstation Adapters
and very low latency (under 50 microseconds for 64 byte frame size).

The IBM FDDI MC Adapters provide both data and addressing support for 16/32
bits of information to be passed across the bus, thus providing greater
throughput as well as addressing capabilities for the growing customers'
environments requiring addressing above the 16MB range.  This plus the 32MB/sec
streaming data capability make the IBM FDDI MC Adapters ideal for the high end
workstations and servers in today's environments.

The reliability of a fiber connection to the ring and the faster response times
inherent in a 100Mbps network will result in improved user productivity.
Transmission of large data files to and from other users and file servers will
occur at much faster data rates than on existing Ethernet or Token-Ring
networks.

Because of the Adapter's increased throughput capacity, more clients can be
supported on the LAN without degrading customer response time.  In addition,
the Adapters' faster file transfer performance can result in drastic reductions
in the time it takes customers to download files from their servers in a
NetWare environment.

Investment protection for an FDDI network is centered around continued
compliance with the FDDI standards.

The IBM FDDI Adapters are compatible with the FDDI ANSI X3T9.5 and ISO 9314
standards and can interoperate with other compatible IBM and non-IBM FDDI
equipments (workstations, concentrators, hubs, etc).

This will ensures customers that the products they have purchased will work
with other products in their environment, whether the other products were
purchased from the same vendor or different vendors.

Both optical fiber and copper wirings are offered on the IBM FDDI Adapters,
providing greater flexibility in meeting the customer's wiring plans.

The improved throughput brought by the FDDI gives the customers the potential
to run additional applications on their systems without upgrading the hardware.

The additional throughput provided by the FDDI adapters protects the customer's
current hardware investment by extending the time before new additional
hardware or new faster technologies are required as LAN activity increases.

The device drivers offered provide compatibility and connectivity to most of
popular IBM (OS/2, DOS) and non-IBM (Novell(1), Microsoft(2) and UNIX (3)
SCO(4) operating systems. (1) Registered trademark of Novell Corporation. (2)
Trademark of Microsoft Corporation. (3) Trademark of UNIX System Laboratories,
Inc. (4) Trademark of Santa Cruz Operation, Inc.

The IBM FDDI Adapters provide for ease of installation via easy-to-follow setup
and configurability procedures.  The skill level and training requirements of
service personnel are minimized by:

    o  Configuration capabilities in installation procedures
    o  Diagnostic capabilities
    o  Simplicity in design.

Simplicity in installation (setup and configuration) and availability of
diagnostics minimize service, increase maintainability and maximize
productivity of customers.

Customer system management is protected via IBM's commitment to base FDDI
hardware and software on current standards for station management (SMT 7.3).
The new IBM FDDI Adapters are shipped with the SMT code at 7.3 level.  The IBM
8240 FDDI Concentrator and the SNMP Proxy Agent are also upgraded to this same
level of SMT Standard.

Open Enterprise:  The IBM FDDI Adapters are based on current levels of the ISO
9314 and ANSI X3T9.5 standards for 100Mbps FDDI network operations.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Physical Specifications:

    o  IBM FDDI Base MC Adapters
       Length: 292mm (11.5-inches)
       Height: 88.3mm (3.5-inches)
       Thickness: 17.9mm (.7-inches)
    o  IBM FDDI Extender MC Adapters
       Length: 168mm (6.6-inches)
       Height: 88.3mm (3.5-inches)
       Thickness: 17.9mm (.7-inches)
    o  IBM FDDI Base ISA Adapters
       Length: 339mm (13.4-inches)
       Height: 107mm (4.2-inches)
       Thickness: 17.1mm (.7-inches)
    o  IBM FDDI Extender ISA Adapters
       Length: 162mm (6.4-inches)
       Height: 99mm (4.0-inches)
       Thickness: 17.1mm (.7-inches)
    o  IBM FDDI Base EISA Adapters
       Length: 275mm (10.9-inches)
       Height: 127mm (5.0-inches)
       Thickness: 17.1mm (.7-inches)
    o  IBM FDDI Extender EISA Adapters Length: 162mm (6.4-inches)
       Height: 99mm (4.0-inches)
       Thickness: 17.1mm (.7-inches)

Operating Environment:

    o  Temperature:  10 to 40 degrees C (50 to 104 degrees F)
    o  Relative Humidity:  8 to 80% (percent)
    o  Wet Bulb: 27 degrees C

Electrical power:

    o  IBM FDDI MC Adapters (SAS):  9.0 W
    o  IBM FDDI ISA Adapters (SAS): 10.0 W
    o  IBM FDDI EISA Adapters (SAS): 12.9 W
    o  IBM FDDI MC Adapters (DAS): 13.0 W
    o  IBM FDDI ISA Adapters (DAS): 12.0 W
    o  IBM FDDI EISA Adapters (DAS): 14.9 W

Note: SAS: Single Access Station (Base Adapter only) DAS: Dual Access Station
(Base plus Extender Adapters)

The IBM FDDI Adapters meet FCC Class A operating criteria. Note: These IBM FDDI
EISA Adapters have NOT been tested with ALL personal computers that implement
EISA.

Programming Requirements: Operating/Network System Support:  The IBM FDDI
Adapters will support the following operating system levels:

    o  OS/2  2.0 and 1.3.2 with
       -  Extended Services(TM) 1.0
       -  Extended Services with Database Server
       -  NTS2 (Network Transport Services/2)
       -  LAN Server 2.0 and 3.0 (Entry and Advanced)
       -  IBM TCP/IP 1.2.1 (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
          Protocol)
    o  DOS 4.0, 5.0 and 5.02 with
       -  IBM LSP 1.3 (LAN Support Program)
       -  IBM PC LAN Program Version 1.3.4
       -  IBM PC/3270 Version 2.0
       -  IBM TCP/IP 2.1
    o  Novell NetWare(8) 3.11
    o  Microsoft(9) LAN Manager 2.2
    o  Microsoft Windows 2.0 and 3.1
    o  Microsoft DOS 3.3 and 4.0
    o  UNIX(10) systems (Santa Cruz Operation Inc.) Version 2.0
    o  Digital Research Inc. DOS 6.0
(8) Novell and NetWare are trademarks of Novell Inc. (9) Microsoft and Windows
are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. (10) UNIX is a trademark of UNIX
System Laboratories, Inc. (TM) Trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.

Device Drivers:  The IBM FDDI Adapters are delivered with the following device
drivers:

    o  DOS NDIS (see note) 2.02 Device Driver
    o  OS/2 NDIS 2.02 Device Driver
    o  DOS ODI (see note) Workstation Device Driver
    o  OS/2 ODI Workstation Device Driver
    o  Novell NetWare/386 ODI Server Device Driver
    o  UNIX SCO (Santa Cruz Operation, Inc.) Device Driver (*)
(*) Not available for the IBM FDDI MC Adapters.

Note:  NDIS and ODI device drivers are two types of common industry device
drivers which are offered for use with the adapters:

    o  Network Driver Interface Specification (NDIS) jointly authored by
       3Com and Microsoft Corporations
       -  For DOS and OS/2 operating systems
       -  Based on NDIS Version 2.01
       -  IEEE 802.5 type Media Access Control (MAC) drivers that allow
          existing NDIS applications to operate on FDDI as they do on
          Token-Ring
    o  Open Data Link Interface (ODI) from Novell Corporation
       -  Available for the NetWare operating systems as well as the DOS
          and OS/2 operating systems.

SMT 7.3 upgrade for the IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator and the Proxy Agent:  A
package to upgrade the IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator microcode and the FDDI SNMP
Proxy Agent will be electronically available on July 30, 1993 from the MKTTOOLS
disk (FDDIPROX PACKAGE).

Software Vendor Support:  The IBM FDDI Adapters will be tested by Novell Inc.
in workstations and servers and their compatibility with Novell's NetWare 3.11
should be certified by Novell Inc. as soon as the tests are completed.

IBM has not evaluated vendor products and makes no comment or judgement about
their functions, quality, or performance.  The vendor products may not be
available in all countries.

Compatibility:  The new IBM FDDI Adapters have been tested and operate properly
with:

    o  the IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator,
    o  the IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub,
    o  the 3172 Interconnect Controller Model 002,
    o  the IBM PS/2 workstations currently equipped with the IBM FDDI
       Workstation Adapters.

They have also been designed to work properly with all workstations meeting the
bus specifications indicated in machine requirements but have NOT been tested
with ALL personal computers implementing the bus architectures supported.

Limitations:

    o  Only Base Adapters can be installed in the 7568 Industrial
       Computer (the 7568 cannot be a DAS station).
    o  Industrial Computers (7537, 7546, 7561, 7562 and 7568) are
       supported only when the operating environment is limited to the
       ranges defined for the IBM FDDI Adapters.
    o  The installation of a Base adapter (SAS) requires a 16/32 bit
       empty slot.  The installation of Base and Extender Adapters (DAS)
       requires two adjacent empty slots.
    o  The current Proxy Agent version (at SMT 6.2 level) will not
       operate in a network with the new IBM FDDI adapters installed.
    o  The current 8240 Maintenance Facility version (at SMT 6.2 level)
       will not operate in a network with the new IBM FDDI adapters
       installed.
    o  The IBM FDDI MC Adapters are NOT physically compatible with the
       previous IBM FDDI Workstation Adapters (FC 0345/0346/0347/0348).
       A mix of Base and Extenders Adapters from these two families will
       not fit together.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26. IBM ENHANCED INTERNAL CD-ROM II DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  32G2958

Feature Code 5512

Bus Master  No

The IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive (P/N 32G2958, FC 5512) enhances
personal computer systems with Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) support,
by enabling access to the growing number and variety of applications available
on compact discs.  A myriad of CD titles are offered in such categories as:

    o  General reference
    o  Application and operating system software
    o  Education
    o  Entertainment
    o  Finance
    o  Science and technology
    o  Geography
    o  Medicine
    o  Law
    o  Graphics and clip art

The IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive is a synchronous SCSI high
performance, high reliability compact disc-read only memory drive.  This drive
performs at a maximum sustained data rate of 327 kB/sec, better than twice the
speed of most CD-ROM drives installed to date.  It also has an average access
of 205ms, which is among the fastest available.

The IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive has also been independently certified
as compatible with a broad mix of third party, non-IBM computer systems and
SCSI adapters, by XXCAL Testing Laboratories. (R) Registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Recommended internal SCSI CD-ROM solution for a wide variety of
       computer systems with an available 5.25-Inch storage bay.
    o  High performance synchronous SCSI CD-ROM drive providing all of
       the common features available today, such as:
       -  MPC compliance
       -  Kodak Photo CD(1) compatible
       -  CD-XA capable
       -  Analog audio output
       -  CD-DA audio over SCSI
       -  Electronic eject
       -  Software volume control.
    o  Maximum sustained data transfer rate of 327 kB/sec, better than
       twice as fast as most CD-ROM drives installed to date.
    o  Fast average access
    o  Independently certified as compatible with a broad mix of third
       party, non-IBM computer systems and SCSI adapters by XXCAL Testing
       Laboratories.
(1) Trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.

High Speed Data Transfer Rate:  The IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive
performs at a maximum sustained data transfer rate of 327 kB/sec, better than
twice the speed of the typical CD-ROM installed to date.  This allows the
customer to transfer data off of a typical 600MB CD-ROM in a very short period
of time.

IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive:  The fast data transfer rate of the IBM
Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive provides an excellent means to load operating
system and applications software on to personal computer systems.  The typical
large capacity (600MB) of the CD-ROM provides the system user a convenient
alternative to installing software when compared to a typical installation of
multiple floppy diskettes.

Industry Standard Compliance:  The IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive
provides all of the common CD-ROM features available in the market today, such
as:

    o  MPC compliance
    o  Kodak Photo CD compatible
    o  CD-XA capable
    o  Analog audio output
    o  CD-DA audio over SCSI
    o  Electronic eject
    o  Software volume control.

IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive:  Adherence to industry standards with
the IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive will insure compatibility with
virtually all of the CD-ROM disks available today.

The IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive (32G2958) adheres to the Small
Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) X3.131-1986.

The IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive functions with compact discs that are
compatible with:  ISO 9660, High Sierra, Kodak Photo CD (Orange Book), and
CD-Digital Audio (Red Book) formats.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Dimensions:

    o  Width    146.3 mm
    o  Depth    203.2 mm
    o  Height    41.5 mm

Drive Specifications:

    Capacity                           600MB (Typical)

    Performance                   Data Transfer Rate        Aver Access
     -- 1x speed max sustained           150 kB/sec               330 ms
     -- 2x speed max sustained           327 kB/sec               205 ms
     -- burst                            4.0 MB/sec                 --

    Rotation Speed                CLV  (Constant Linear Velocity)
    Data Buffer                   256 KB

Equipment Approvals/Safety:

    FCC Class B                   YES
    UL/CSA Recognized             YES
    VCCI Class 2                  YES
    GOP VDE Class B               YES
    CSA 22.2 # 950                YES
    CISPR-B                       YES

Operating Environment:

    o  Temperature (degrees C)    10-45
    o  Rel. Humidity (system on)   8-80%

Machine Requirements:  The system is required to have SCSI support and an
available 5.25-Inch storage bay.

Installation of the IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive in a PS/2 Model 90
also requires IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive C (P/N 32G2960). Additional
installation kits, 6451145 or 6451146, may be required to complete installation
of the IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive (see list below).

Attachment to Non-IBM Systems:  The IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive has
also been independently certified as compatible with a broad mix of third
party, non-IBM computer systems and SCSI adapter cards by XXCAL Testing
Laboratories.

Programming Requirements:  The following operating systems and extensions
support the IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive:

    o  OS/2(R) Standard Edition 1.30.1, 1.30.2
    o  OS/2 Extended Edition 1.30.1, 1.30.2
    o  OS/2 2.0, 2.00.1, 2.1
    o  OS/2 IBM Multimedia Presentation Manager/2(TM)
    o  OS/2 LAN Server 2.0, 3.0
    o  Extended Services for OS/2(TM)
    o  OS/2J 1.3 Extended Edition
    o  OS/2J 2.0
    o  DOS 5.0, or later
       -- Windows(2) 3.0, or later
       -- Windows MME 1.0, or later
    o  AIX(R) PS/2 1.3, or later
    o  SCO(3) UNIX(4) System V/386 3.2v.4
    o  SCP XENIX(3) System Version 2.3.4
    o  NetWare(5) 3.11, or later
(2) Trademark of Microsoft Corporation. (3) Trademark of Santa Cruz
Corporation. (4) Trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. (5) Trademark of
Novell, Inc. (TM) Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (R)
Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Compatibility:  The IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive is designed to
maintain compatibility with current software support that uses the standard
defined basic input/output system interfaces.  Installable device drivers are
included with the drive.

The IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive functions with Compact Disks that are
compatible with:  ISO 9660, High Sierra, Kodak Photo CD (Orange Book), and
CD-Digital Audio (Red Book) formats.

Limitations:  Multi-session Photo CD support requires OS/2 2.1.  Single-session
Photo CD support is available with prior versions of OS/2.

User Group Requirements:  The IBM Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive option
satisfies customer requests for a high performance internal SCSI CD-ROM drive.

Security and auditability features of the system to which the IBM Enhanced
Internal CD-ROM II Drive is attached are:

    o  A mechanical lock to allow the user to lock the system cover.
    o  A user-invoked password function used to prevent the use of the
       system by unauthorized persons.
    o  Enhanced security feature (Privileged-Access Password) when used
       with 9556 and 9557.
    o  The drive is enabled for software controlled eject and the
       ability to lock media in or out of the drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27. IBM ENHANCED EXTERNAL CD-ROM II DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  3510005

Bus Master  No

The IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive (3510005) enhances personal computer
systems with Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) support, by enabling access
to the growing number and variety of applications available on compact discs. A
myriad of CD titles are offered in such categories as:

    o  General reference
    o  Application and operating system software
    o  Education
    o  Entertainment
    o  Finance
    o  Science and technology
    o  Geography
    o  Medicine
    o  Law
    o  Graphics and clip art

The IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive includes a high performance,
synchronous SCSI, compact disc-read only memory drive in an external enclosure.
This option allows for the attachment of the CD-ROM drive, through the SCSI
port, for systems without internal expansion capability.  This drive performs
at a maximum sustained data rate of 327 kB/sec, better than twice the speed of
most CD-ROM drives installed to date.  It also has an average access of 205ms,
which is among the fastest available.

The IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive has also been independently certified
as compatible with a broad mix of third party, non-IBM computer systems and
SCSI adapters, by XXCAL Testing Laboratories.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Recommended external SCSI CD-ROM solution for a wide variety of
       computer systems
    o  High performance synchronous SCSI CD-ROM drive providing all of
       the common features available today, such as:
       -  MPC compliance
       -  Kodak Photo CD(1) compatible
       -  CD-XA capable
       -  Analog audio output
       -  CD-DA audio over SCSI
       -  Electronic eject
       -  Software volume control
    o  Maximum sustained data transfer rate of 327 kB/sec, better than
       twice as fast as most CD-ROM drives installed to date
    o  Fast average access
    o  Independently certified as compatible with a broad mix of third
       party, non-IBM computer systems and SCSI adapters by XXCAL
       Testing Laboratories
(1) Trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.

IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive performs at a maximum sustained data
transfer rate of 327 kB/sec, better than twice the speed of the typical CD-ROM
installed to date.  This allows the customer to transfer data off of a typical
600MB CD-ROM in a very short period of time.

The fast data transfer rate of the IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive
provides an excellent means to load operating system and applications software.
The typical large capacity (600MB) of the CD-ROM provides the system user a
convenient alternative to installing software when compared to a typical
installation of multiple floppy diskettes.

The IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive provides all of the common CD-ROM
features available in the market today, such as:

    o  MPC compliance
    o  Kodak Photo CD compatible
    o  CD-XA capable
    o  Analog audio output
    o  CD-DA audio over SCSI
    o  Electronic eject
    o  Software volume control

Adherence to industry standards with the IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive
will insure compatibility with virtually all of the CD-ROM disks available
today.

Open Enterprise:  The IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive (3510005) adheres
to the Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) X3.131-1986.

The IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive functions with compact discs that are
compatible with:  ISO 9660, High Sierra, Kodak Photo CD (Orange Book), and
CD-Digital Audio (Red Book) formats.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

    Dimensions:
    Width                 240.0 mm
    Depth                 280.0 mm
    Height                 79.0 mm
    Weight                  4.0 kg

Drive Specifications:

    Capacity                            600MB (typical)
    Performance                     Data Transfer Rate      Aver Access
     -- 1x speed max sustained             150 kB/sec             330 ms
     -- 2x speed max sustained             327 kB/sec             205 ms
     -- burst                              4.0MB/sec                --

    Rotation Speed                  CLV  (Constant Linear Velocity)
    Data Buffer                     256 KB

    Power Supply                    110 / 220 V auto sensing

Equipment Approvals/Safety:

    FCC Class B                     YES
    UL/CSA Recognized               YES
    VCCI Class 2                    YES
    GOP VDE Class B                 YES
    CSA 22.2 # 950                  YES
    CISPR-B                         YES

Operating Environment:

    Temperature (degrees C)   10-45
    Rel. Humidity (system on)  8-80%

Machine Requirements:  The system is required to have SCSI support.

Attachment to Non-IBM Systems:  The IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive has
also been independently certified as compatible with a broad mix of third
party, non-IBM computer systems and SCSI adapter cards by XXCAL Testing
Laboratories. (R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.

Programming Requirements:  The following operating systems and extensions
support the IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive:

    o  OS/2(R) Standard Edition 1.30.1, 1.30.2
    o  OS/2 Extended Edition 1.30.1, 1.30.2
    o  OS/2 2.0, 2.00.1, 2.1
    o  OS/2 IBM Multimedia Presentation Manager/2(TM)
    o  OS/2 LAN Server 2.0, 3.0
    o  Extended Services for OS/2(TM)
    o  OS/2J 1.3 Extended Edition
    o  OS/2J 2.0
    o  DOS 5.0, or later
            -- Windows(2) 3.0, or later
            -- Windows MME 1.0, or later
    o  AIX(R) PS/2 1.3, or later
    o  SCO(3) UNIX(4) System V/386 3.2v.4
    o  SCP Xenix(3) System Version 2.3.4
    o  NetWare(5) 3.11, or later
(2) Trademark of Microsoft Corporation. (3) Trademark of Santa Cruz
Corporation. (4) Trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. (5) Trademark of
Novell, Inc. (TM) Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (R)
Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Compatibility:  The IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive is designed to
maintain compatibility with current software support that uses the standard
defined basic input/output system interfaces.  Installable device drivers are
included with the drive.

The IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive functions with Compact Disks that are
compatible with:  ISO 9660, High Sierra, Kodak Photo CD (Orange Book), and
CD-Digital Audio (Red Book) formats.

Limitations:  Multi-session Photo CD support requires OS/2 2.1.  Single-session
Photo CD support is available with prior versions of OS/2.

User Group Requirements:  The IBM Enhanced External CD-ROM II Drive option
satisfies customer requests for a high performance external SCSI CD-ROM drive.

Security and auditability features of the system to which this product is
attached are:

    o  A mechanical lock to allow the user to lock the system cover.
    o  A user-invoked password function used to prevent the use of the
       system by unauthorized persons.
    o  Enhanced security feature (Privileged-Access Password) when used
       with 9556 and 9557.
    o  The drive is enabled for software controlled eject and the
       ability to lock media in or out of the drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28. OPERATOR INPUT BEZEL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

Part Number: RPQ PF1054

Feature Code: 1054

Bus Master: No

Provides an alternative input device for industrial environments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29. IBM PS/2 MICRO CHANNEL SCSI ADAPTER WITH CACHE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number: 6451110

Feature Code: 1018

Bus Master: Yes

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF JUNE 24, 1992)

A 32-bit bus master adapter that provides expandability for all PS/2* computers
with the Micro Channel* bus.  This adapter can be installed in either a 16- or
32-bit card slot, has a 12.3MB burst transfer rate, 512KB Cache buffer, and
adheres to the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) that supports connection
for multiple internal and/or external SCSI devices.

These devices include SCSI high performance fixed disk drives, scanners, CD-ROM
drives, and other SCSI peripherals.

This adapter does NOT include a Terminator (T-RES). A terminator is required
when no EXTERNAL devices are installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30. LIFT/TILT/SWIVEL STAND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  07G9780

Feature Code XXXX

Bus Master  No

Can be ordered separately.  It is designed to replace the tilt/swivel stand
that is fitted as standard on Model 001.  The lift/tilt/swivel stand is
customer installable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31. SCSI CARD TO OPTION CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM PS/2 Card to Option Cable provides the capability to attach the first
external SCSI device to the Micro Channel SCSI adapter.

The PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter Option Interface Terminator, included with
the PS/2 Card to Option Cable, is a terminator that is installed on the last
SCSI device to terminate the SCSI bus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32. IBM PS/2 4MB MEMORY MODULE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450128

Feature Code 0128

Bus Master  No

This 4MB Kit provides 4MB of 70 nanosecond memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33. IBM PS/2 2MB MEMORY MODULE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450902

Feature Code 0129

Bus Master  No

This 2MB Kit provides 2MB of 70 nanosecond memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34. IBM PS/2 8MB MEMORY MODULE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450130

Feature Code 5116

Bus Master  No

This 8MB Kit provides 8MB of 70 nanosecond memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35. IBM PS/2 1MB MEMORY MODULE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450603

Feature Code 5212

Bus Master  No

This 1MB Kit provides 1MB of 85 nanosecond memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 36. IBM PS/2 2MB MEMORY MODULE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450604

Feature Code 5213

Bus Master  No

This 2MB Kit provides 2MB of 85 nanosecond memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37. IBM PS/2 2MB MEMORY MODULE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450608

Feature Code 5214

Bus Master  No

This 2MB Kit provides 2MB of 80 nanosecond memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38. IBM PS/2 4MB MEMORY MODULE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  87F9977

Feature Code 3933

Bus Master  No

This 4MB Kit provides 4MB of 80 nanosecond memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39. IBM PS/2 8MB MEMORY MODULE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450129

Feature Code 1401

Bus Master  No

This 8MB Kit provides 8MB of 80 nanosecond memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40. IBM PS/2 4MB SYSTEM BOARD MEMORY KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451060

Feature Code 1060

Bus Master  No

This 4MB Kit provides 4MB of 80 nanosecond memory for 8580 models A16/A21/A31.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41. IBM PS/2 1-8MB 286 MEMORY EXPANSION OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450685

Feature Code 8285

POS ID: F7F7

Bus Master  No

With this adapter IBM enhances its family of memory expansion products for the
PS/2 computers.  This adapter provides 1MB of memory expansion with
Lotus/Intel/Microsoft Expanded Memory Specification (LIM EMS) Version 4.0
support for all PS/2 Model 50, 50Z, 55 SX, 60 and 65 SX computers.  It is
functionally equivalent to IBM's 2-8MB 80286 Memory Expansion Option (#8286,
6450609), but with 1MB of standard 85ns memory.

It is expandable in increments of 1MB or 2MB up to a maximum of 8MB by using
existing Single In-Line Memory Modules (SIMMs), the 1MB Memory Module Kit-85ns
(#5212, 6450603) or the 2MB Memory Module Kit-85ns (#5213, 6450604).  It can be
used with OS/2 SE 1.2 and 1.3, or OS/2 EE 1.2 and 1.3 as extended memory, or it
can be used as expanded memory.  An expanded memory device driver compatible
with LIM EMS Version 4.0 is included.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 42. IBM PS/2 2-8MB 80286 MEMORY EXPANSION OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450609

Feature Code 8286

POS ID: F7F7

Bus Master  No

A new memory adapter expandable up to 8MB for all models of the PS/2 computer
Models 50, 50Z, 55 SX, 60 and 65 SX.  This adapter provides memory expansion up
to 8MB by using existing memory kits  1MB Memory Module Kit -- 85ns (PN
6450603) and 2MB Memory Module Kit -- 85ns (6450604).  This memory expansion
option can be used with OS/2 computer software as extended memory, or as
expanded memory.  An expanded memory device driver compatible with LIM EMS
Version 4.0 is included


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43. IBM PS/2 ENH. 80386 MEMORY EXP. OPTION 2MB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  87F9856

Feature Code 9856

POS ID: FDDE

Bus Master  No

This 2MB Kit contains a 32-bit full length adapter card with 2MB of memory
installed.  It can be installed in any open 32- bit expansion slot of the PS/2
Model 70 or 80 computer and in the full-sized expansion slot of the PS/2 Model
P70 computer.

This 2MB Kit is expandable up to 14MB with the installation of up to three
additional 1MB, 2MB, and/or 4MB Memory Module Kits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44. IBM PS/2 ENH. 80386 MEMORY EXP. OPTION 4MB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  87F9860

Feature Code 9860

POS ID: FDDE

Bus Master  No

This 4MB Kit contains a 32-bit full length adapter card with 4MB of memory
installed.  It can be installed in any open 32- bit expansion slot of the IBM
PS/2 Model 70 or 80 computer and in the full sized  expansion slot of the PS/2
Model P70 computer.  This 4MB Kit is expandable up to 14MB with the
installation of up to three additional 1MB, 2MB, and/or 4MB Memory Module Kits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45. IBM PS/2 IMAGE ADAPTER/A 1MB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  06G8215

Feature Code 0072

POS ID: 8DF0

Bus Master  No

A 16-bit PS/2 display adapter capable of driving up to 1600 x 1200 resolution
at up to four Greyscales.  All existing IBM PS/2 monitors (including 8506/7/8)
are supported at all resolutions, depending on the operating system used, and
with the number of colors/Greyscales being dependant on the amount of memory
added.  By the addition of the PS/2 Image Adapter Memory Expansion Kit (#3231,
P/N 07F4406), the adapter can support 1600 x 1200 up to 16 Greyscales.  Further
addition of two PS/2 Video Memory Expansion Kits (#4007, P/N 75X5889), will
enable support of 1360 x 1024 at 256 Greyscales for high quality non-interlaced
display using the IBM 8508 Display.  With this additional memory, the IBM PS/2
Image Adapter/A 1MB is equivalent to the IBM PS/2 Image Adapter/A 3MB (#0073,
P/N 06G8216) (In EMEA, #0079, P/N 06G8219).

With this additional memory installed, the IBM 6091-019 Color Display can be
attached by a special cable (#4217, P/N 58F2901).  This gives support for 1280
x 1024 resolution up to 256 colors.

Compatibility with existing PS/2 Display Modes - VGA and 8514/A, is provided
via the DOS Adapter Interface that is shipped with the adapter.  This allows
customers to run existing applications on the higher resolution displays.

Support under OS/2 1.2 SE and EE is provided by Presentation Manager and under
DOS via the DOS Adapter Interface drivers shipped with the product. AIX PS/2
and X-Windows V1.2 drivers, MS Windows/286 V2.1, and AutoCAD drivers are also
supplied with the products.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46. IBM PC NETWORK ADAPTER II-FREQUENCY 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF FEBRUARY 17, 1993.)

Part Number  96X5645

Feature Code 5645

Bus Master  No

Feature cards that provide new RF transmit and receive channels for connecting
IBM Personal Computers to the broadband IBM PC Network.  The new channels used
by #5645 (channels 2' and O) and #5646 (channels 3' and P) provide capabilities
that are considered particularly important in industrial, educational,
research, financial, government, and other large broadband network
environments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47. PC NETWORK SHORT DISTANCE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F3855

Feature Code 0231

Bus Master  No

Provides one-foot of cable to attach a processor with a PC Network Adapter to
the Network Base Expander (#0230) in order to extend the distance between the
processor and the 5178 Unit, when used in combination with PC Network Cabling
Segments.  Limitations:  A maximum of eight Network Distance Kits may be used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48. PC NETWORK MEDIUM DISTANCE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F3856

Feature Code 0232

Bus Master  No

Provides 400 feet of cable to attach a processor with a PC Network Adapter to
the PC Network Base Expander (#0230) in order to extend the distance between
the processor and the 5178 Unit, when used in combination with PC Network
Cabling Segments.  Limitations:  A maximum of eight Network Distance Kits may
be used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49. PC NETWORK LONG DISTANCE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F3857

Feature Code 0233

Bus Master  No

Provides 800 feet of cable to attach a processor with a PC Network Adapter to
the PC Network Base Expander (#0230) in order to extend the distance between
the processor and the 5178 Unit, when used in combination with PC Network
Cabling Segments.  Limitations:  A maximum of eight Network Distance Kits may
be used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50. PC NETWORK CABLING SEGMENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  NETCBLE

Feature Code 0234, 0235, 0236, 0237

Bus Master  No

PC NETWORK CABLING SEGMENT

    o   PC Network 25 Foot Cabling Segment (#0234)
    o   PC Network 50 Foot Cabling Segment (#0235)
    o   PC Network 100 Foot Cabling Segment (#0236)
    o   PC Network 200 Foot Cabling Segment (#0237)

Provides four different cable length segments to attach a processor with a PC
Network Adapter to the PC Network Base Expander (#0230) in order to extend the
distance between the processor and the 5178 Unit, when used in any combination
with one of the PC Network Distance Kits.  Limitations:  A maximum of eight
Network Distance Kits may be used.  Field Installation: Yes.  Customer Setup:
Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51. PC NETWORK TRANSFORMER UNIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450238

Feature Code 0238

Bus Master  No

This unit is packaged separately, but is required for the operation of the PC
Network Translator Unit (#5178).  It is a 120V transformer that plugs into a
standard grounded outlet.  Customer Setup:  Yes.  Order as a feature for
5778-001.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52. PC NETWORK BASE EXPANDER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F3854

Feature Code 0230

Bus Master  No

When installed in the 5178 PC Network Translator Unit, provides the ability to
attach up to eight Short Distance Kits, Medium Distance Kits, and/or Long
Distance Kits in any combination to further extend the distance between the
system with the Network Adapter installed and the 5178 Unit.  Field
Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53. PS/2 VIDEO MEMORY EXPANSION OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  75X5889

Feature Code 4007

Bus Master  No

This is a field installed feature. A maximum of one may be installed on FC
5887.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 54. IBM PS/2 IMAGE ADAPTER/A 3MB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  06G8216

Feature Code 0073

POS ID: 8DF0

Bus Master  No

A 16-bit PS/2 display adapter capable of driving up to 1600 x 1200 resolution
at up to four Greyscales.  All existing IBM PS/2 monitors (including 8506/7/8)
are supported at all resolutions, depending on the operating system used, and
with the number of colors/Greyscales being dependant on the amount of memory
added.  By the addition of the PS/2 Image Adapter Memory Expansion Kit (#3231,
P/N 07F4406), the adapter can support 1600 x 1200 up to 16 Greyscales.  Further
addition of two PS/2 Video Memory Expansion Kits (#4007, P/N 75X5889), will
enable support of 1360 x 1024 at 256 Greyscales for high quality non-interlaced
display using the IBM 8508 Display.  With this additional memory, the IBM PS/2
Image Adapter/A 1MB is equivalent to the IBM PS/2 Image Adapter/A 3MB (#0073,
P/N 06G8216) (In EMEA, #0079, P/N 06G8219).

With this additional memory installed, the IBM 6091-019 Color Display can be
attached by a special cable (#4217, P/N 58F2901).  This gives support for 1280
x 1024 resolution up to 256 colors.

Compatibility with existing PS/2 Display Modes - VGA and 8514/A, is provided
via the DOS Adapter Interface that is shipped with the adapter.  This allows
customers to run existing applications on the higher resolution displays.

Support under OS/2 1.2 SE and EE is provided by Presentation Manager and under
DOS via the DOS Adapter Interface drivers shipped with the product. AIX PS/2
and X-Windows V1.2 drivers, MS Windows/286 V2.1, and AutoCAD drivers are also
supplied with the products.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55. PS/2 IMAGE ADAPTER MEMORY EXPANSION KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  07F4406

Feature Code 3231

Bus Master  No

By the addition of the PS/2 Image Adapter Memory Expansion Kit (#3231, P/N
07F4406), the adapter can support 1600 x 1200 up to 16 Greyscales.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56. IBM PS/2 486SLC3 PROCESSOR UPGRADE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  61G2090

Service Part Number  61G2099

Feature Code 9021

Bus Master  No IBM PS/2 486SLC3 PROCESSOR UPGRADE FOR SELECTED PREMIUM SYSTEMS

The IBM PS/2 (R) 486SLC3 Processor Upgrade features the IBM 486SLC3
microprocessor and provides capability to enhance all of the following systems:

    o   IBM PS/2 Model 56 SX (8556-043, 045, 14X, 24X)
    o   IBM PS/2 Model 56 SLC (8556-055, 059, 15X, 25X)
    o   IBM PS/2 Model 57 SX  (8557-045, 049)
    o   IBM PS/2 Model 56 SLC2 (9556-0B6, 0BA, DB6, DBA)
    o   IBM PS/2 Model 57 SLC2 (9557-0B6, 0BA, DB6, DBA, DBG, 1BA, 2BA)
    o   IBM PS/2 M57 SLC (259)
    o   IBM 7546 Industrial Computer
    o   IBM PS/2 Model 57 SLC (8557-055, 059 ,05F)
    o   IBM PS/2 Model 56 SLC2 (9556-QB6, QBA, KB6, KBA)
    o   IBM PS/2 Model 57 SLC2 (9557-QB6, QBA, QBG, KB6, KBA, KBG)

The microprocessor includes an internal memory cache controller and 16KB memory
cache.  The IBM PS/2 486SLC3 Processor Upgrade operates at triple the system
clock speed (75/60MHz) for internal operations and at the system clock speed
(25/20MHz) for external operations.  The combination of triple clock speed,
integrated cache and optimized instructions provide sizable performance
improvements.  Depending on application (processor-intensive, non-floating
point), a 25MHz IBM PS/2 56/57 486SLC2 50/25 system with IBM PS/2 486SLC3
Processor Upgrade achieves up to 40% performance improvement, upgrading a 20MHz
IBM PS/2 56/57 386SLC or IBM PS/2 56/57 386SX systems with IBM PS/2 486SLC3
Processor Upgrade achieves up to 187% and 424% performance improvement
respectively.

The key attributes are:

    o   Increases the processor speed up to three times the external
        clock speed.
    o   Ease of Installation
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Features Triple Clock IBM 486SLC3 microprocessor (75MHz
        Internal/25MHz External) or (60MHz Internal/20MHz External)
        dependent on base system planar clock speed.
    o   Internal Memory Cache Controller and Integrated 16KB Cache Memory
    o   Allows upgrades of IBM PS/2 Model 56 SX, 56 SLC and SLC2 Model 57
        SX, 57 SLC, 57 SLC2, systems
    o   Depending on application*, provides performance improvement up
        to:
        -   424% in IBM PS/2 56/57 386SX  (20MHz systems)
        -   187% in IBM PS/2 56/57 386SLC (20MHz systems)
        -   40%  in IBM PS/2 56/57 486SLC2 (25/50MHz systems)
    o   486 compatible Instruction Set
    o   Provides a socket for 80387SX 20/25MHz or equivalent Math
        Co-processor
    o   16MB Real memory addressability
    o   Customer Installable
* Lotus 1-2-3 V2.01 for DOS NSTL benchmark.

The processor operates at three times the speed of the base system planar.  The
base planar of the 8556/57, M57 and IBM 7546 Industrial operates at 20Mhz while
the base planar of the 9556/57 operates at 25Mhz.  Therefore, the achieved
processor speeds are 60Mhz and 75Mhz respectively.

The IBM PS/2 486SLC3 Processor Upgrade provides increased processor performance
while maintaining software compatibility with a wide range of Personal System/2
(R) operating systems.  This optional feature allows customers to achieve
greater performance in their system while protecting their initial investment
in their IBM PS/2 Model 56 SX, 56 SLC and SLC2 Model 57 SX, 57 SLC, 57 SLC2.
The IBM PS/2 486SLC3 Processor Upgrade can be installed when computing power
demand increases on the IBM PS/2 Model 56 SX, 56 SLC and SLC2 Model 57 SX, 57
SLC, 57 SLC2, systems. (R) Registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS:  This product is designed to comply with Subpart J,
Part 15, FCC Rules (Class B) for the IBM PS/2 Model 56 SX, 56 SLC and SLC2
Model 57 SX, 57 SLC, 57 SLC2 family of systems. Complies with Subpart J, Part
15, FCC Rules (Class A) for the IBM Industrial Computer 7546.

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS:  The IBM PS/2 486SLC3 Processor Upgrade can be installed
only in the 80387SX Math Co-processor socket connector on the system board of
the IBM PS/2 Model 56 SX, 56 SLC and SLC2 Model 57 SX, 57 SLC, 57 SLC2,
systems.  If IBM PS/2 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade is insta the system, it must be
removed.  In this case, IBM PS/2 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade is an optional
feature that can no longer be used with the IBM PS/2 486SLC3 Processor Upgrade.
If a Math Co-processor is installed in the system, it must be removed along
with the co-processor socket and the Math Co-processor should be installed in
the Math Co-processor socket provided on the IBM PS/2 486SLC3 Processor
Upgrade.

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS:  This feature supports the operating systems
supported by IBM PS/2 Model 56 SX, 56 SLC and SLC2 Model 57 SX, 57 SLC, 57 SL.

LIMITATIONS:  The Micro Channel (R) adapters not supported by IBM PS/2 Model 56
SX, 56 SLC and SLC2 Model 57 SX, 57 SLC, 57 SLC2, are supported when the IBM
PS/2 486SLC3 Processor Upgrade is used in the systems. (R) Registered trademark
of International Business Machines Corporation.

CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES:  The IBM PS/2 486SLC3 Processor Upgrade is designed
to be installed by customer.

CABLE ORDERS:  No cables are required.

The IBM PS/2 486SLC3 Processor Upgrade uses the security and auditability
features of the IBM PS/2 Model 56 SX, 56 SLC and SLC2 Model 57 SX, 57 SLC, 57
SLC2, in which it is installed.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57. IBM PS/2 486SLC2 PROCESSOR UPGRADE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  32G3606

Feature Code 2310

Bus Master  No

The PS/2 (R) 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade (#2310, 32G3606) features the new IBM
486SLC2 microprocessor and enhances all models of the PS/2 Model 56 SX and 56
SLC and Model 57 SX, 57 SLC and M57 SLC systems by providing the capability to
upgrade to 486SLC2 technology.

FEATURES AND PERFORMANCE ENHANCEMENTS

    o   Double clock IBM 486SLC2 microprocessor (40MHz internal/20MHz
        external)
    o   486SX-compatible Instruction Set
    o   Internal memory cache controller and integrated 16KB cache memory
    o   Improves processor throughput up to 271% for 386SX-20 based
        systems and up to 99% for 386SLC-20 based systems, depending on
        the application
    o   Improves processor throughput up to 53% greater than 486SX-20
        based systems and up to 20% greater than 486SX-25 based systems,
        depending on the application
    o   16-byte wide cache line size
    o   Enhances system performance, particularly compute-intensive
        applications
    o   Allows upgrade of PS/2 Model 56 SX and 56 SLC and Model 57 SX,
        57 SLC and M57 SLC systems
    o   Installs into a Math Co-Processor socket connector
    o   Provides a socket for 80387SX 20MHz, or equivalent Math
        Co-Processor
    o   16MB real memory addressability
    o   64TB (TB = terabytes) virtual memory addressability
    o   Customer installable

(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

*  Sale or delivery of the IBM PS/2 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade is subject to FCC
approval.

The PS/2 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade provides the ability for customers to
upgrade the PS/2 Model 56 SX and 56 SLC and Model 57 SX, 57 SLC and M57 SLC
systems to 486SLC2 technology.  The PS/2 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade is an
excellent choice for users with applications that require faster processor
throughput.  The additional processing power provides an advantage in all
applications, and is most evident in compute-intensive and emerging database
environments.  This upgrade should be proposed to customers who need additional
performance for currently installed systems or customers who desire processor
upgradeability as investment protection in the future.

The PS/2 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade provides a significant processor performance
upgrade and software compatibility with a wide range of PS/2 operating systems.
The option allows customers to achieve greater performance in the system while
protecting initial investments in the PS/2 Model 56 SX and 56 SLC and Model 57
SX, 57 SLC and M57 SLC system units.  The PS/2 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade can be
installed when computing power demand increases on the PS/2 Model 56 SX and 56
SLC and Model 57 SX, 57 SLC and M57 SLC systems.

The PS/2 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade, when installed in the PS/2 Model 56 SX and
56 SLC and Model 57 SX, 57 SLC and M57 SLC system units, is designed to
maintain the user-friendly and interactive features, and the high productivity
of the PS/2 family of systems.  Depending on the application, the PS/2 486SLC2
Processor Upgrade improves system throughput up to:

    o   271% for 386SX-20 based systems
    o   99% for 386SLC-20 based systems
    o   53% greater than 486SX-20 based systems
    o   20% greater than 486SX-25 based systems.

The processor option enhances end-user productivity by maintaining hardware and
software compatibility with the base system, features and applications.  The
common user interface enables significant performance enhancements and
increased productivity without new system education, commands or unique
instruction sets.

The PS/2 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade can be installed only in the 80387SX Math
Co-Processor socket connector on the system board of the PS/2 Model 56 SX and
56 SLC and Model 57 SX, 57 SLC and M57 SLC systems.  If the PS/2 Cached
Processor Option (#1231, 6451231) is installed in the system, it must be
removed.  If a Math Co- Processor is installed in the system, it must be
removed along with the co-processor socket, and the Math Co-Processor is then
installed in the Math Co-Processor socket provided on the PS/2 486SLC2
Processor Upgrade.

The Micro Channel (R) adapters not supported by the PS/2 Models 56 SX and 56
SLC and Models 57 SX, 57 SLC and M57 SLC are not supported when the PS/2
486SLC2 Processor Upgrade is used in the systems. (R) Registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 58. IBM PS/2 CACHED PROCESSOR OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451231

Feature Code 1231

Bus Master  No

This option features the 20MHz IBM 386SLC microprocessor and provides the
capability of processor performance enhancement on the IBM PS/2 Model 8557
family of systems. The option significantly increases system processor
performane in compute intensive applications while providing investment
protection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59. IBM PS/2 212MB SCSI HARD DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451242

Feature Code 1242

Bus Master  No

The IBM family of SCSI hard disk drives has been enhanced with the addition of
the IBM Personal System/2 (R) (PS/2 (R)) 212MB (million bytes) SCSI Hard Disk
Drive (#1242, 6451242).  With a 212MB capacity and 12 ms average seek time,
this drive provides exceptional performance for the SCSI-based PS/2 Micro
Channel (R) systems.  The drive may be installed internally in all PS/2 systems
with SCSI controllers standard and externally attached to all SCSI-based PS/2
Micro Channel systems when installed in the PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure
(3510-0V0) or the PS/2 External Enclosure for SCSI Devices (3511-003).  The
drive may also be installed in the IBM Industrial Computer 7546.

The IBM PS/2 212MB SCSI Hard Disk Drive enhances the SCSI family of storage
options by providing a high-performance drive at an entry-level capacity that
can be installed internally in systems shipped with SCSI controllers standard.
The drive can be installed externally in the 3510-0V0 and 3511-003 enclosures
when attached to all SCSI-based Micro Channel systems.  The drive may also be
installed internally in the IBM Industrial Computer 7546.

This 212MB SCSI hard disk drive adheres to the industry standard SCSI interface
X3.131-199X and provide system configuration flexibility by requiring only one
slot for multiple unit connections.

This drive should be considered for additional growth for systems in which fast
seek times are critical.

212MB SCSI HARD DISK DRIVE

    o   Recommended solution for any environment requiring a
        high-performance 3.5-inch drive.
    o   May be installed in all PS/2s shipped with SCSI standard, and
        externally in the PS/2 SCSI enclosures, (3510-OVO, 3511-003) when
        attached to any SCSI-based PS/2 Micro Channel system.  May also
        be installed in the IBM Industrial Computer 7546.
    o   Fast data transfer (12 ms average seek time) and a 6.9 ms latency
        enhances user productivity.

The PS/2 212MB SCSI drive provides exceptional performance to customers across
a wide range of environments.  With 12 ms average seek times and a 6.9 ms
average latency, user productivity is enhanced.

The IBM PS/2 212MB SCSI Hard Disk Drive provides customers with exceptional
performance at an entry-level capacity.

SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

                          212MB
                           SCSI
    Width:               101.6 mm
    Depth
      (with card):       146.0 mm
    Depth
      (HDA):             135.0 mm
    Height:               19.9 mm

Drive Specifications:

    Formatted
      Capacity:            212MB *
    Average Data
      Transfer Rate:       2.5MB/sec
    Average Seek
      Time:                12 ms
    Average
      Latency:             6.94 ms
    Sector
      Interleave:          1 to 1
*  Numbers in million of bytes; actual user capacity may vary
   slightly based on different operating environments.

Equipment Approvals/Safety:

                           212MB
                            SCSI
    FCC Class B             Yes
    UL/CSA
      Recognized            Yes
    VCCI Class 2            Yes
    GOP VDE                 Yes
    CSA No. 220             Yes

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT:

    Temperature
      ( (degs)C)        5-55 (degs)
    Relative
      Humidity
      (system on)          8-90%

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS:  The 212MB lntstalls on models of the following systems:

          8556           8590
          8557           8595
          9556           8565
          9557           9590 (except in U.S.)
          9576           9595
          9577           8580*
          3510           IBM Industrial Computer 7546.
          3511
    *  8580 Models 081, 161, 321, A16 and A31 only.

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS:  The following operating systems and extensions
support the IBM PS/2 212MB SCSI and IBM 170/212MB AT drives:

    o   OS/2 (R) Standard Edition Version 1.30.1
    o   OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.30.2
    o   OS/2 2.0
    o   OS/2 2.0 LAN Server Version 2.0
    o   Extended Services Version 1.0 for OS/2
    o   OS/2J 1.3EE
    o   OS/2J 2.0
    o   DOS 4.0, or later
        -- Windows (1) 3.0
    o   Advanced Interactive Executive Personal System/2 (AIX (R) PS/2)
        Version 1.2.1
    o   SCO UNIX (2) System V/386 3.2v.4
    o   SCP (2) XENIX (3) System V2.3.4
    o   OPEN DESKTOP (2) 1.1
    NOTE: AIX PS/2 will exploit these drives with the application of PTF
    P211300.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (1)
Trademark of Microsoft Corporation. (2) Registered trademark of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. (3) Trademark of Santa Cruz Corporation, Inc.

COMPATIBILITY:  The IBM SCSI and AT drives are designed to maintain
compatibility with current software support that uses the standard defined BIOS
interfaces.

Security and auditability features of the system in which this product is
installed are:

    o   A mechanical lock to allow the user to lock the system cover
        (PS/2)
    o   A user-invoked password function used to prevent the use of the
        system by unauthorized persons.

The Small Computer System Interface (SCSI), as defined in the American National
Standard Institute (ANSI) standard X3.131-199X, provides for multiple SCSI
adapters (initiators) on the SCSI bus.  The SCSI bus may be internal or
external to the system unit.  The IBM PS/2 SCSI adapters are in conformance
with this standard and have an external port.

A data security exposure exists even with Power-On Password installed, since
external SCSI adapters can attach through the external SCSI port and gain
undetected read or write access to data stored on internal and external SCSI
devices.

Physical access to the system and external SCSI devices must be controlled to
limit this exposure.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60. IBM 170 AND 212MB AT HARD DISK DRIVES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  32G3861

Part Number  6451296

Feature Code 3861

Feature Code 1296

Bus Master  No

The IBM family of AT (R) hard disk drives has been enhanced with the addition
of the IBM 170 and 212MB (million bytes) AT Hard Disk Drives (#1296, 6451296),
(#3861, 32G3861).  With 16/15 ms average seek times and 170 and 212MB
capacities, these drives offer the highest performance and capacity available
today from IBM for AT bus systems.  These drives are supported as options in
the following systems:

    o   PS/2:  8525-SX (170MB only), 8535, 8540 systems
    o   PS/1 (R)*:  2133 or 2155 386SX-25 Models X1X, 486SX-20 Models X4X
        and the 486DX-33 Models X7X
    o   IBM Industrial Computer:  7537.

The IBM 170 and 212MB AT Hard Disk Drives enhance the non-Micro Channel family
of storage options by providing both high capacity and performance.  The
intended customer set for these drives spans both the PS/1 and PS/2 families.

These drives should be considered for systems in which increased capacity and
performance are required.

HIGHLIGHTS 170/212MB AT DRIVES

    o   Recommended for users requiring high-capacity AT bus drives with
        competitive performance.
    o   May be installed in the following systems:
        -   PS/2:  8525-SX (170MB only), 8535 and 8540 systems
        -   PS/1:  2133 or 2155 386SX-25 Models X1X, 486SX-20 Models X4X
            and the 486DX-33 Models X7X
        -   IBM Industrial Computer: 7537.

The IBM 170MB and 212MB AT bus drives provide customers with high-capacity
storage and very competitive performance.

User productivity will increase with both the SCSI and AT files because of the
performance characteristics of the drives.

The IBM 170/212MB AT drives provide comparatively high-capacity storage and
very good performance for AT bus systems.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

                                 170MB            212MB
                                   AT               AT
    Width:                      101.6 mm         101.6 mm
    Depth
      (with card):              146.0 mm         146.1 mm
    Depth
      (HDA):                    135.0 mm           N/A
    Height:                      19.9 mm          25.4 mm

Drive Specifications

    Formatted
      Capacity:                170MB *          212MB *
    Average Data
      Transfer Rate:           1.66MB/sec       2.4MB/sec
    Average Seek
      Time:                    16 ms            15 ms
    Average
      Latency:                 8.33 ms          8.45 ms
    Sector
      Interleave:              1 to 1           1 to 1
*  Numbers in million of bytes; actual user capacity may vary
slightly based on different operating environments.

Equipment Approvals/Safety:

                                   170MB        212MB
                                     AT           AT
    FCC Class B                     Yes          Yes
    UL/CSA
      Recognized                    Yes          Yes
    VCCI Class 2                    Yes          Yes
    GOP VDE                         Yes          Yes
    CSA No. 220                     Yes          Yes

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT:

    Temperature
      ( (degs)C)           5-55 (degs)  5-50 (degs)
    Relative
      Humidity
      (system on)                   8-90%        8-80%

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS: The 170MB and 212MB AT features are supported in all
models of the following systems:

    o   PS/2:  8525-SX (170MB only), 8535 and 8540
    o   PS/1:  2133 or 2155 386SX-25 Models X1X, 486SX-20 Models X4X and
        the 486DX-33 Models X7X
    o   IBM Industrial Computer:  7537.

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS:  The following operating systems and extensions
support the IBM 170/212MB AT drives:

    o   OS/2 (R) Standard Edition Version 1.30.1
    o   OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.30.2
    o   OS/2 2.0
    o   OS/2 2.0 LAN Server Version 2.0
    o   Extended Services Version 1.0 for OS/2
    o   OS/2J 1.3EE
    o   OS/2J 2.0
    o   DOS 4.0, or later
        -- Windows (1) 3.0
    o   Advanced Interactive Executive Personal System/2 (AIX (R) PS/2)
        Version 1.2.1
    o   SCO UNIX (2) System V/386 3.2v.4
    o   SCP (2) XENIX (3) System V2.3.4
    o   OPEN DESKTOP (2) 1.1
    NOTE: AIX PS/2 will exploit these drives with the application of PTF
    P211300.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (1)
Trademark of Microsoft Corporation. (2) Registered trademark of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. (3) Trademark of Santa Cruz Corporation, Inc.

COMPATIBILITY:  The IBM AT drives are designed to maintain compatibility with
current software support that uses the standard defined BIOS interfaces.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61. IBM PS/2 5.25-INCH DISKETTE ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451007

Feature Code 1007

POS ID: DFFA

Bus Master  No

An adapter card that attaches either of the external 5.25 inch diskette drives
(4869-001 for 360KB or 4869-002 for 1.2MB) to the PS/2 Model 50, 50Z, 55 SX, 57
SX, 60, 65 SX, 70, P70, 80, 90 or 95 computers,  or the internal diskette drive
feature (6451006) to the PS/2* Model 60, 65 SX, or 80 computers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 62. IBM PS/2 FAXCONCENTRATOR ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  94X2530

Feature Code 2530

POS ID: EFE2

Bus Master  No

High function microprocessor based FAX adapter that can provide voice
prompting, telephone tone detection, and optical mark recognition functions
when used with a suitable application program.  Features  include real-time
processing of tasks such as compression (Image to Group 3), decompression, and
format conversions (Group 3 to Group 4) within the adapter, as opposed to doing
these tasks with software in the PS/2* computer's  main processor.  Can
communicate with Group 3 facsimile devices over the public switched telephone
network for the purpose of routing FAX data.  Supports the IBM Facsimile
Support/400 program offering for the PS/2 computers, although it can be used
with suitably developed programs for other PS/2 computer applications.  This
FAX card is available worldwide in more countries than any other FAX card.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63. IBM PS/2 IMAGE ADAPTER/A 3MB 6091 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  06G8217

Feature Code 0074

POS ID: 8DF0

Bus Master  No

This adapter provides, in addition to the IBM* PS/2* Image Adapter/A 3MB, an
attachment cable for the IBM 6091-019 Color Display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64. IBM PS/2 XGA-2 DISPLAY ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  87F4773

Feature Code 2561

POS ID: DA8F

Bus Master  Yes

The IBM PS/2 XGA*-2 Display Adapter/A provides additional function and
significant performance improvements over the existing IBM XGA Display
Adapter/A.  In some cases, specific operations have been improved as mush as 32
times that of the XGA Display Adapter. Performance improvements measured at the
application level are up to 2.5 times that of the XGA Display Adapter.

New higher screen refresh rate and non-interlaced scanning enhance ergonomic
benefits to the customer in the of "flicker free" performance even at high
resolution (1024 x 768).  The XGA-2 Display Adapter/A also offers enhanced
color features, support for the new IBM 95XX and existing 85XX monitors, and
conforms with new industry and government standards, such as International
Standards Organization (ISO) standard 9241/3.

Maximum:  The XGA-2 Display Adapter/A can be installed in either a 16-bit or
32-bit Micro Channel connector that does not have an auxiliary video extension
(AVEC).  Up to eight XGA-2 display adapters may be installed in a system unit.
XGA-2 Display Adapter/A can coexist with the following video subsystems:

    o   VGA on a PS/2 planar
    o   XGA chipset on a PS/2 planar
    o   XGA-2 chipset on a PS/2 planar
    o   Up to three IBM Image Adapter/A or Image Adapter/A 1MB, 3MB, or
        3MB 6091 cards
    o   Up to five XGA Display Adapter/A cards
    o   An IBM Display Adapter 8514/A card
    o   Adapters that utilize the AVEC

All models of the following machine types are supported:

    8555       8573       9557       7546
    8556       8580       9576       7561
    8557       8590       9577       7562
    8565       8595       9585       7568 - D40 only
    8570       9556       9595

The XGA-2 Display Adapter/A can provide ISO compliant VGA and XGA application
support with appropriate display attached.

The XGA-2 Display Adapter/A does not have fixed resolutions. They are
completely programmable, thereby supporting a wide range of display timings.
The resolutions available to an application or device driver are dependant upon
the display attached rather than a function of the subsystem.

The XGA-2 Display Adapter/A has an integrated high performance VGA.  As such,
it supports all the VGA supported resolutions. However, it can display those
resolutions at a variety of rates, depending upon the monitor attached.

The following are examples of the resolutions that are available with the XGA-2
Display Adapter/A when running XGA applications or Device Drivers which exploit
DMQS.  The XGA-2 Display Adapter/A is limited only by a maximum PEL clock rate
of 90MHz.


                                      IBM 85XX Monitor Support
                                      ------------------------
                            Number of 8503 8507 8517
  Horizontal  Frame Line I   Colors / 8504 8514
      x       Rate  Rate or Shades of 8512 8515
   Vertical              NI   Gray    8513 8516
  ----------  ----- ---- -- --------- ---- ---- ----
   640x480     60   31.6 NI 65536/256  X    X    X
           *   72   37.9 NI 65536/256
               72   37.8 NI 65536/256
               75   39.4 NI 65536/256
   800X600 **  56   35.2 NI 65536/256
           **  60   37.9 NI 65536/256
           *   72   48.1 NI   256/256
               75   50.0 NI   256/256
  1024x768     43.5 35.6  I   256/256       X    X
           **  60   48.4 NI   256/256
               70   57.0 NI   256/256            X
           *   70   56.5 NI   256/256
               72   58.1 NI   256/256
               75   61.1 NI   256/256
  1280x1024    50   53.4  I    16/16
               * = Video Electronic Standards Association (VESA) Standard
              ** = VESA Guideline
               I = Interlaced
              NI = Non-Interlaced

                                      IBM 95XX Monitor Support
                                      ------------------------
                            Number of 9518 9515 9517
  Horizontal  Frame Line I   Colors /
      x       Rate  Rate or Shades of
   Vertical              NI   Gray
  ----------  ----- ---- -- --------- ---- ---- ----
   640x480     60   31.6 NI 65536/256
           *   72   37.9 NI 65536/256
               72   37.8 NI 65536/256
               75   39.4 NI 65536/256  X    X    X
   800X600 **  56   35.2 NI 65536/256
           **  60   37.9 NI 65536/256
           *   72   48.1 NI   256/256
               75   50.0 NI   256/256
  1024x768     43.5 35.6  I   256/256
           **  60   48.4 NI   256/256
               70   57.0 NI   256/256
           *   70   56.5 NI   256/256
               72   58.1 NI   256/256            X
               75   61.1 NI   256/256       X
  1280x1024    50   53.4  I    16/16
               * = Video Electronic Standards Association (VESA) Standard
              ** = VESA Guideline
               I = Interlaced
              NI = Non-Interlaced

The software supplied with the XGA-2 Display Adapter/A automatically exploits
IBM 85XX and 95XX monitors at the best resolution and refresh rate possible for
the monitor attached.

Supported resolutions detailed above that are not available on IBM displays,
are available with some non-IBM (OEM) displays. These displays range in
capability from low cost/low function to high cost/high function.  Most of
these displays respond as an IBM 8514 display when queried by the software
supplied with the XGA-2 subsystem. As a result, IBM 8514 resolutions and
refresh rates are used as default.

The software supplied with the IBM XGA-2 Display Adapter/A, allows the user to
override the default screen resolution. Overriding with a resolution which does
not meet (or exceeds) the capability of the attached display, can yield
unpredictable results.

Some multi-frequency displays may appear to function correctly; however damage
may occur over time.

    o   The user must only select resolutions which are suitable for the
        display attached to the XGA-2 Display Adapter/A.
    o   The use of the resolution override should be avoided if the display
        attached to the XGA-2 Display Adapter/A is to be changed frequently
        with displays of varying characteristics.

The IBM PS/2 XGA-2 Display Adapter/A along with certain IBM displays, computers
and some software has been certified to meet the International Standards
Organization (ISO) standard 9241/3. IBM cannot guarantee that all OEM displays
attached to the XGA-2 Display Adapter/A will provide acceptable front of screen
characteristics or meet the ISO 9241/3 standard.  for more details on
resolution and monitor support.

The following table provides details of the IBM PS/2 displays mentioned above:

  Monitor     Monitor                       Dot
  Model       Description                   Pitch
  Number                                     (mm)
  -------     ---------------------------   -----
  8503        12 Inch Monochrome            0.28
  8504        12 Inch Monochrome            0.28
  8507        19 Inch Monochrome            0.35
  8512        14 Inch Color                 0.41
  8513        12 Inch Color                 0.28
  8514        16 Inch Color                 0.31
  8515        14 Inch Color                 0.28
  8516        14 Inch Color                 0.28
  8517        17 Inch Color                 0.28
  8518        14 Inch Color                 0.28
  9518        14 Inch Color                 0.28
  9515        14 Inch Color                 0.28
  9517        17 Inch Color                 0.28
  7554        19 Inch Color(Industrial)     0.31

The XGA-2 Display Adapter/A is supported by the following operating systems:

    o   IBM Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 3.3 and higher
    o   IBM Operating System/2 (OS/2) Version 1.3 and higher (requires
        installation of CSD # XR05100 for OS/2 SE V1.3 or CSD # WR05100
        for OS/2 EE V1.3 support)
    o   IBM AIX Personal System/2 1.3 and higher

XGA-2 Display Adapter/A device drivers are available for the following
environments:

    o   OS/2 Version 1.3 Presentation Manager
        -   640 x 480 16 or 256 colors
        -   1024 x 768 16 or 256 colors
    o   OS/2 Version 2.0 Presentation Manager
        -   640 x 480 16, 256 or 64K colors
        -   800 x 600 256 or 64K colors
        -   1024 x 768 16 or 256 colors
    o   XGA DOS Adapter Interface 1.0
        -   640 x 480 256 colors
        -   1024 x 768 256 colors
    o   Microsoft Windows Version 3.0, 3.1
        -   640 x 480 256 or 64K colors
        -    800 x 600 16, 256 or 64K colors
        -   1024 x 768 16 or 256 colors
    o   AIX Personal System/2 1.3
        -   X11R5
            --  640 x 480 16 colors (VGA)
            --  1024 x 768 256 colors
        -   GSL
            --  640 x 480 16 or 256 colors
            --  1024 x 768 16 or 256 colors
        -   AIX DD
            --  640 x 480 16, 256 or 64K colors
            --  800 x 600 16, 256 or 64K colors
            --  1024 x 768 16 colors
            --  1280 x 1024 16 colors
    o   AutoCAD Release 10, 11
        -   640 x 480 16, 256 or 64K colors
        -   1024 x 768 16 or 256 colors

While providing additional capabilities, the XGA-2 Display Adapter/A is fully
compatible with the XGA Display Adapter/A.

In VGA mode, XGA-2 Display Adapter/A is fully compatible with XGA Display
Adapter/A.  No application modifications are required.

In 132 column text mode XGA-2 Display Adapter/A supports the same 8-pixel
characters and resolutions (1056 x 200, 1056 x 350, 1056 x 400) as XGA.  In
addition, XGA-2 Display Adapter/A provides 9-pixel characters with resolutions
of 1188 x 200, 1188 x 350, and 1188 x 400.  132 column text mode can be
displayed with either ISO or non-ISO refresh rates, but should be invoked only
when the attached monitor can accept the appropriate video rates.

IBM recommends that applications developers use the BIOS mode 14h call to
invoke 132 column text mode to ensure future compatibility.  Applications
written to XGA hardware for 132 column support (1056 PELS) will also get 1056
PELS with XGA-2 hardware. Applications written to BIOS mode 14h will get 1056
PEL on XGA hardware and 1188 PELS on XGA-2 hardware.

In extended graphics mode, XGA-2 Display Adapter/A supports all the same
functions as the XGA Display Adapter/A and provides the following additional
capabilities:

    o   Enhanced coprocessor support for 16-bit direct color mode.
    o   Enhanced DACs for expanded color selection.

Application modifications may be required depending on the type of monitor
attached.

Software Compatibility: OS/2 V1.3 environment:

Supported applications

    o   PM applications
    o   Full screen OS/2 protect mode applications (including XGA
        applications)
    o   Full screen VGA DOS applications

Un-supported applications

    o   8514/A OS/2 adapter interface applications
    o   DOS XGA application (full screen or windowed)
    o   DOS CGA applications in a window on the PM desktop

Note: OS/2 v1.3 requires the installation of CSD # XR05100 for OS/2 SE v1.3 and
CSD # WR05100 for OS/2 EE v.1.3 for XGA-2 Display Adapter/A support.

OS/2 V2.0 environment: Supported applications

    o   PM applications
    o   Full screen OS/2 protect mode applications (including XGA
        applications)
    o   Full screen VGA DOS applications
    o   VGA DOS text mode applications in a window on the PM desktop
    o   Full screen XGA DOS applications (DOS AI and hardware)
    o   Seamless windows support
    o   full screen windows support

Un-supported applications

    o   8514/A OS/2 adapter interface applications
    o   DOS XGA application in a windows on the PM desktop
    o   DOS VGA graphics applications in a window on the PM desktop

Note: Support of non-interlaced frequencies requires the installation of CSD #
XR06050 for OS/2 V2.00 , or the purchase of a system unit pre-installed with
OS/2 V2.00.1 or higher. OS/2 V2.00 level does not supply seamless Windows
support (only full screen support).

Windows 3.0, 3.1 environment: Supported applications

    o   Windows applications
    o   VGA DOS text mode applications in a window
    o   full screen VGA applications (text or graphics)

Un-supported applications

    o   DOS XGA application (full screen or windowed)
    o   VGA graphics applications in a window

Note: For above support, the customer must utilize XGA device driver diskette
V1.2 or higher.

DOS environment: Supported applications

    o   VGA applications
    o   132 column text mode applications (written using the BIOS mode
        14h call)
    o   DOS adapter interface applications (8514/A AI compatibility)
    o   XGA applications
    o   applications written to the AI of Image Adapter/A supporting
        resolutions up to 1024 x 768

Un-supported applications

    o   applications written to the 8514/A hardware registers

Note: For above support, the customer must utilize XGA device driver diskette
V1.2 or higher.

The following XGA device drivers will provide XGA function when used with XGA-2
Display Adapter/A and existing PS/2 85XX monitors:

    o   OS/2 1.3 Presentation Manager XGA device driver (requires
        installation of CSD # XR05100 for OS/2 SE V1.3 or CSD # WR05100
        for OS/2 EE V1.3)
    o   OS/2 2.0 Presentation Manager XGA device driver
    o   Microsoft Windows 3.0 XGA device driver
    o   AutoCAD Release 10 XGA device driver

No application or driver modifications are required for extended graphics mode
on existing PS/2 monitors.  Support of new 95XX monitors, however, requires
modification to applications and device drivers to implement DISPLAY MODE QUERY
AND SET (DMQS), a comprehensive new method for identifying monitor and display
adapter characteristics.  DMQS better enables applications and drivers to
maintain compatibility with changes in adapter and monitor products.

IBM recommends that XGA-2 applications be written to the API's of O/S 2
Presentation Manager and Microsoft Windows rather than to the XGA-2 hardware
registers or the XGA-2 DOS AI.  If writing to the hardware registers, consult
the "PS/2 XGA Adapter Interface Technical Reference", S15F-2154-00, to ensure
XGA/XGA-2 register compatibility.  The XGA-2 DOS AI does not support 132 column
text mode or direct color mode.

Customer Setup:  Yes.  Field Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  With monitor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65. IBM PS/2 XGA DISPLAY ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF FEBRUARY 19, 1993.)

Part Number  75X5887

Feature Code 5887

POS ID: 8FDB

Bus Master  Yes

High-performance 32-bit bus master adapter based on Extended Graphics Array
(XGA), a new video subsystem for the IBM PS/2 computer family of Micro Channel
bus-based products.

Designed to be compatible with existing Video Graphics Array (VGA) software
applications while offering many new advanced video features.  The video
subsystem is an evolution of VGA and provides the user with enhanced
resolution, color content and hardware function.  XGA design has been optimized
for use by window managers and other Graphical User Interfaces.

Standard on PS/2 Model 95 XP Intel486 microprocessor family of computers and
available as an option for selected PS/2 computers with the Micro Channel bus.
Supports 14 inch IBM PS/2  Color Display 8515 with its high resolution 1024 x
768 capability, 16 inch IBM  PS/2 Color Display 8514, and other PS/2 monochrome
and color displays including 8503, 8507, 8512, 8513 and 8604 depending on
resolution and application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66. IBM PS/2 5.25-INCH EXTERNAL DISKETTE ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450245

Feature Code 8760

Bus Master  No

This feature allows the IBM 4869-001 5.25-inch External Diskette Drive (360KB)
to be connected to the PS/2 Model 50, 50Z, 60, 70, or 80 (Model 041, 071, 111,
311 only) computers.

The feature consists  of an adapter card, an internal cable assembly, and a
feature card.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67. IBM ISDN INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR/2 MODEL 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  44F7228

Feature Code 7228

POS ID: EFB0

Bus Master  No

Expansion adapter that provides attachment to the Integrated Services Digital
Network Basic Rate Interface (ISDN BRI) and, when operating with supporting IBM
software, enables full duplex data transmission concurrently and independently
on- demand over each of the two 64,000 bits per send information channels.
Enables a PS/2 Model 50 or above computer ISDN connectivity not only to other
similarly equipped PS/2 computers, but also to a wide range of IBM systems
using either the IBM 7820 ISDN Terminal Adapter or the IBM 3174 ISDN Basic Rate
Interface Adapter.  The adapter comes with Network/Switch Support Code to
enable attachment to the different Telephone Company's ISDN networks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK 16/4 ADAPTER II ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  03F0215

Part Number  03F0255

Feature Code 5120

Feature Code 0255

Bus Master  No

The IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Adapter II provides for the attachment of IBM
Personal System/2 (PS/2) computers that implement the Industry Standard
Architecture (ISA) to the IBM Token-Ring Network.  Attachment is provided for
rings operating at either 16 million or 4 million bits per second (Mbps).  It
requires one feature slot in the PS/2 and may be installed in the following
machine types:  7537, 8525, 8530, 8535, and 8540.  Maximum:  Three.
Prerequisites:  None.  Corequisites:  None.  Compatibility Conflicts:  None.
Customer Setup:  Yes.  Field Installable: Yes.  Cable Order: IBM Token-Ring PC
Adapter Cable, P/N 6339098, #3390, may be ordered for attachment to the
network.  Also, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cabling can be used for
attachment to the IBM Token-Ring Network. The UTP cable must have an RJ-45
connector on one end for the adapter. The other end of the cable should have
the appropriate connector for attachment to the customer's wall outlet.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69. IBM LAN ADAPTER FOR ETHERNET ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  48G7169

Feature Code 7169

Bus Master  No

The IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet provides for the attachment of IBM Personal
System/2 (PS/2) computers that implement the Industry Standard Architecture
(ISA) to the Ethernet network.  Attachment is provided for networks using
10BaseT (twisted-pair), 10Base5 (thick coaxial), or 10Base2 (thin coaxial)
media.  It requires one feature slot in the PS/2 and may be installed in the
following machine types:  7537, 8525, 8530, 8535, and 8540.  Maximum:  Two.
Prerequisites:  None.  Corequisites:  None.  Compatibility Conflicts:  None.
Customer Setup:  Yes.  Field Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  A customer
supplied cable is required to attach the IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet to the
Ethernet network.  Customers can choose 10BaseT (twisted-pair), 10Base2 (thin
coax), or 10Base5 (thick coax via AUI attachment cable and 10Base5 transceiver)
media.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70. IBM LAN ADAPTER/A FOR ETHERNET ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  48G7171

Feature Code 7171

POS ID: XXXX

Bus Master  No

The IBM LAN Adapter/A for Ethernet is used to attach an IBM Personal System/2
(PS/2) implementing Micro Channel Architecture to the Ethernet network.  It
requires one feature slot in the PS/2 and may be installed in the following
machine types:  7546, 7561, 7562, 7568, 8550, 8555, 8556, 8557, 8560, 8570,
8573, 8580, 8590 and 8595.  Maximum:  Two.  Prerequisites:  None. Corequisites:
None.  Compatibility Conflicts:  None.  Customer Setup:  Yes. Field
Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  A cable supplied by the customer is required
to attach the IBM LAN Adapter/A for Ethernet to the Ethernet network.
Customers can choose 10BaseT (twisted-pair), 10Base2 (thin coax), or 10Base5
(thick coax via AUI attachment cable and 10Base5 transceiver) media.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 71. ENH. M-MOTION VIDEO ADAPTER/A FOR THE IBM PS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 95F1091

Feature Code 1991

POS ID: 80B3

Bus Master  No

A display adapter for PS/2 computers with Micro Channel bus to display full
motion, interactive color video and VGA graphics and text on a standard PS/2
color display.  It also provides full line audio input/output capabilities with
limited digital record and playback.  Composite Sync (CS) output is available
to synchronize up to three compatible video input sources at the same time.
Replaces the original M-Motion Video Adapter/A (Feature Code 3487, Part Number
34F3087).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72. IBM PS/2 LEASED LINE MODEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 26F1862

Feature Code 1862

Bus Master  No

Provides high performance FDX or HDX synchronous transmission on four-wire
leased telephone lines with Communication Network Management (CNM) for PS/2
Model 50, 60, 70 and 80 computers.

It is certified for operation in the U.S. and Canada, in a commercial
environment.  Compatible with the IBM 786x series of modems and can transmit at
data rates up to 14.4 kbps over leased telephone lines.  It provides two-wire
Switched Network Back Up with auto-answer, and LPDA-2 functions of IBM CNM
modems operating with NetView software.  This modem is a full length feature
card powered by the Micro Channel bus interface.  It requires a PS/2
communication adapter for data and control signals, connected via its external
EIA RS-232 interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73. IBM PS/2 MULTI-PROTOCOL ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 33F6968

Feature Code 3043

POS ID: DEFF

Bus Master  No

Provides a full- or half-duplex multi-protocol serial data transmission
channel.  Supports asynchronous, bisynchronous, HDLC, or SDLC protocols.  Will
support modems or direct attachment at speeds of up to 19,200 bps and supports
automatic protocol switching via software at setup.  Supports all PS/2 Model
50, 55 SX, 60, 70, P70 and 80 computers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74. IBM PC NETWORK ADAPTER II/A-FREQUENCY 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF FEBRUARY 17, 1993.)

Part Number 96X5647

Feature Code 5647

POS ID: EFEF

Bus Master  No

Provides additional RF channels for connecting to the broadband IBM PC Network.
The broadband channels used by the Frequency 2 adapter are 2' and O.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75. IBM PC NETWORK ADAPTER II/A-FREQUENCY 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF FEBRUARY 17, 1993.)

Part Number 96X5648

Feature Code 5648

POS ID: EFEF

Bus Master  No

Provides additional RF channels for connecting to the broadband IBM PC Network.
The broadband channels used by the Frequency 3 adapter are 3' and P.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76. IBM PC NETWORK ADAPTER II/A-FREQUENCY 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF FEBRUARY 17, 1993.)

Part Number 33F6964

Feature Code 5647

Bus Master  No

Provides additional RF channels for connecting to the broadband IBM PC Network.
The broadband channels used by the Frequency 2 adapter are 2' and O.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 77. IBM PC NETWORK ADAPTER II/A-FREQUENCY 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF FEBRUARY 17, 1993.)

Part Number 33F9285

Feature Code 5648

Bus Master  No

Provides additional RF channels for connecting to the broadband IBM PC Network.
The broadband channels used by the Frequency 3 adapter are 3' and P.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78. IBM PC NETWORK BASEBAND ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 33F9281

Feature Code 1223

POS ID: EFEF

Bus Master  No

The card includes a modular baseband modem for connecting to the baseband IBM
PC Network.  The adapter features a 2 megabit/second transmission speed with a
CSMA/CD access protocol and supports the IEEE 802.2 protocols via the IBM Local
Area Network Support Program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79. IBM PC NETWORK BASEBAND ADAPTER CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9292

Feature Code 1229

Bus Master  No

Has modular telephone connectors at each end and is designed to serially
connect the IBM PC Network Baseband Adapter or the IBM PC Network Baseband
Adapter/A to other baseband PC Network workstations or to the 5173 PC Network
Baseband Extender.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80. ALL CHARGECARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  34F2863

Feature Code 3863

Bus Master  No

The All Chargecard provides the IBM Personal System/2 Model 30 286 with an
advanced memory management unit.  The All Chargecard supports the
Lotus/Intel/Microsoft Expanded Memory Specification 4.0 (LIM EMS 4.0).  The
Chargecard can be used to move up to 288Kb of DOS Files, Buffers, Lastdrive,
some Device Drivers, and some Terminate and Stay Resident Programs into memory
addresses above 640Kb and below 1024Kb.  This capability can be used in some
LAN and Host Attach environments to increase the amount of memory available for
other applications.  The Chargecard installs directly on the system board and
does not require an open option card slot.  However, installation of the
Chargecard does reduce the size of the option card that can be installed in one
of the three slots from a full sized card to a card eight inches long or less.
The Chargecard works with all IBM memory installed on the system board or in an
IBM memory card installed in an open option card slot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81. IBM 3.0MB EXPANDED MEMORY ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  34F2864

Feature Code 3864

Bus Master  No

The 3.0Mb Expanded Memory Adapter combines six 0.5Mb Memory Module Kits with
the Personal System/2 Multifunction Adapter and the All Chargecard.
Installation of the adapter on the system board and in an option card slot
provides 3.5Mb of expanded memory when combined with the 0.5Mb originally
installed on the system board.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82. IBM 4.0MB EXPANDED MEMORY OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  34F2866

Feature Code 3866

Bus Master  No

The 4.0Mb Expanded Memory Option combines two 2.0Mb Memory Module Kits with the
All Chargecard.  Installation of this option on the system board provides 4.0Mb
of expanded memory without the use of an option card slot. Installation of this
kit will require the removal of the previously installed 0.5Mb or 1.0Mb of
system board memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83. 3532-023 IBM PS/2 2.3GB EXTERNAL SCSI TAPE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The family of IBM PS/2* Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) storage options
is enhanced through the introduction of the IBM PS/2 2.3GB External SCSI Tape
Drive (3532-023).  This self-contained external SCSI tape drive has the
flexibility to be attached to any IBM PS/2 Micro Channel system equipped with
either a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter or a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter
with Cache.  The 3532 is a high performance, large capacity, tape drive that
has an instantaneous data transfer rate of 245KB per second and can store up to
2.3GB of data on one 8mm tape cartridge.  Device reliability is enhanced
through the use of powerful Error Correction Code (ECC) function.

Also available with the IBM PS/2 2.3GB External SCSI Tape Drive (3532-023) are
two new SCSI cables which are unique to this device.  The IBM SCSI Controller
Cable (FC 2830, P/N 31F4187) is required to attach the 3532 to the PS/2 system
unit (via the external port of the SCSI adapter).  The SCSI Device-to-Device
Cable (FC 3131) (P/N 31F4186) is required to attach the 3532 to another 3532,
or to other SCSI devices already present.  If other SCSI devices are to be
added in a "daisy-chain" fashion, consult the appropriate device information
for cabling requirements.  Either the Sytos Plus (1) OS/2 (P/N 15F7193) or
Sytos Plus/IBM DOS (P/N 15F7194) File Backup Utility is required for operation.
These utilities, when used with the 3532-023, provide a high-performance, large
capacity, easy-to-use tape backup/restore system.  Support in the NOVELL (2)
environment is provided by Cheyenne Software, Inc.  with their ARCserve (2)
program.

HIGHLIGHTS

    Helps protect customers data investment, when used as a backup/restore
    tape drive, in the event of catastrophic system failure
    User productivity is enhanced by the high performance, large capacity of
    this tape drive which allows more convenient backup/restore capability
    Device reliability is enhanced through the use of powerful Error
    Correction Code (ECC) function
    Provides growth enablement for the PS/2 Micro Channel* Systems by
    adhering to the ANSI SCSI standard (X3.131-1986) which supports up to
    seven SCSI devices attached to a SCSI adapter
    Up to seven SCSI devices can be attached to a SCSI adapter.

The PS/2 2.3GB External SCSI Tape Drive (3532-023) can be attached to a PS/2
Micro Channel system with either a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter or a PS/2
Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache installed. *Signifies a trademark or
registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (1)
Registered trademark of Sytron Corporation (2) Registered trademark of Novell,
Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84. IBM PC NETWORK BASEBAND GENERAL PURPOSE CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9297

Feature Code 1228

Bus Master  No

Connects an IBM PC Network Baseband Adapter or IBM PC Network Baseband
Adapter/A to a non-modular telephone receptacle.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85. INTEGRATED ATTACHMENT CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6403635

Feature Code 2877

Bus Master  No

Required to permit attachment of the Enhanced Display Station Emulation Adapter
to the system twinaxial cables of the S/34, S/36, S/38, 5294 Remote Control
Unit.  Prerequisites:  Enhanced Display Station Emulation Adapter. Maximum:
One.  Field Installation:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86. EXTERNAL VOLTAGE MODULE - 48 TO 60 VOLTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  6528

Part Number  ___6528

Bus Master  No

This EVM feature allows the connection of an external DC voltage source either
for additional battery backup to the main AC power, or as a main DC power
source.  EVM #6528 must be used when the external source is in the 48 to 60
volts range.  No other external voltages are to be used as a main source or as
a back-up.

NOTE: Either one of the EVMs (#6231 or #6528) with connected external DC
voltage source, or the internal nicad battery (#6221) must be ordered and
installed to assure retention of system setup information during periods when
the system is disconnected from AC power or when AC power is lost.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87. 486 DX2 PROCESSOR CARD FOR MT 7568 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  6872

Part Number  ___6872

Bus Master  No

This feature provides the means to upgrade a 7568-040 or 7568-150 system (with
an 80386DX processor card) or a 7568-C40 system (with a 25MHz 80486DX processor
card) to the Intel486 DX2 50Mhz processor card that comes standard in the
7568-D40.  The replacement processor card is provided without memory (the
memory modules on the installed processor card are to be removed and
re-installed on this feature).  Both 4Mb or 8Mb memory modules are supported on
the 486 DX2 processor card, but NOT when mixed on the card (either all 4Mb or
all 8Mb memory modules must be installed).  A maximum of 32Mb of system memory
is supported when all positions are filled with 8Mb memory modules. NOTE: 2Mb
memory modules are not supported on the 486 DX2 processor card.

A replacement system reference diskette is also provided with the (#6872, #2773
in EMEA) feature.  The old/new reference diskettes are not interchangeable in
that they support only the specific processor card version (old - 80386 or
80486DX, new - 486 DX2).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 88. 1.0GB SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE FOR MT 7568 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  6874

Part Number  ___6874

Bus Master  No

This SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) disk drive is a customer
installable feature only.  This disk drive feature is not available as a
factory installed feature (feature #6867 must be ordered at the time of the
7568 system order if a 1.0Gb fixed disk drive is to be installed by IBM prior
to system shipment).  The disk drive can be installed in the current
double-wide DASD shroud, either singly or in combination with a another
supported fixed disk drive feature.  Installation of this feature in a 7568
system without DASD requires that a Disk Module feature (#6222) be ordered and
installed.  The 1.0Gb SCSI Fixed Disk Drive for MT 7568 feature includes the
necessary mounting hardware to position the drive(s) in the DASD shroud, as
well as instructions on system setup and drive jumper positions.

Installation of this feature reduces the operating temperature limits of the
7568 system.  Refer to the Operating Environment section of this Sales Manual.

The disk drive features synchronous SCSI mode operation and 3.5 inch half high
form factor, and complies with SCSI for single ended devices.

Specifications of the drive are as follows:

     Formatted Capacity                     1004 million bytes*
     Bytes/Sector                            512
     Sectors/Track                            66
     Cylinders                              2051 (data)
     Sector Buffer Size                      256Kb (read look ahead)
     Number of Data Heads                     14
     Data Transfer Rate                      3.0Mbytes/s
     Average Seek Time                      11.0ms
     Average Latency                        6.95ms
     Disks                                     8
     Sector Interleave                       1 to 1
  * Actual user accessible capacity may vary slightly based
    on different operating environments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 89. 32 BIT MICRO CHANNEL ADAPTER INTERPOSER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  6875

Part Number  ___6875

Bus Master  No

The 32 Bit Micro Channel Adapter Interposer allows the plugging of selected 16
bit or 32 bit Micro Channel cards with a PS/2 form factor into the GEARBOX
Model 800 backplane.  The Display Adapter 8514/A (#4054) must use the 16 Bit
Micro Channel Video Adapter (#6225) for installation in the GEARBOX Model 800.
The 32 bit adapter interposer provides full support for standard 32 bit Micro
Channel adapter functions.

Support for the XGA Display Adapter/A (and for all other adapters that
exclusively use 32 bit slots) requires that the 32 Bit Micro Channel Adapter
Interposer be used when installing these adapters.  Using a 16 Bit Micro
Channel Adapter feature (#6224) may lead to functional problems related to a
specific adapter's use of a memory block above the 16MB level.  Adapters that
require 32 bit slots should be used only with the 32 Bit Micro Channel Adapter
Interposer.

32 bit Micro Channel adapters that can be installed in either 16 or 32 bit
slots may have improved functional performance if they are installed using a 32
Bit Micro Channel Adapter Interposer.

NOTE: See the list of PS/2 and other adapters that are supported on this
system.  PS/2 adapters should not be installed in the slot #9 position.  This
is due to limitations with setup and diagnostic code recognizing such adapters
in that position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 90. 7568 AUXILIARY DASD MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  6885

Part Number  ___6885

Bus Master  No

This feature provides a second DASD shroud and associated hardware for the 7568
system.  The double-wide shroud can be installed in the frame of the 7568,
replacing two standard card shrouds.  Along with the standard system disk
module that must be installed, the Auxiliary DASD Module will permit up to a
total of four SCSI fixed disk drives to be installed internal to the 7568.  A
maximum of one Auxiliary DASD Module can be installed in a 7568 system.

The content provided with this feature is as follows.

    o   Double-Wide Shroud and Shroud Label
    o   Front Plate and SCSI Connector with Cable
    o   DASD Power Card
    o   Internal SCSI Cable
    o   External SCSI Cable
    o   Installation Instructions
    o   Maintenance Part Information

All IBM SCSI Fixed Disk Drives that are supported on the 7568 system are also
supported when installed in the Auxiliary DASD Module.  The 7568 Auxiliary DASD
Module does NOT support installation of a diskette drive.

This Auxiliary DASD Module includes a 50-pin external connector on the front of
the shroud.  This connector may be used with the PS/2 Option to Option Cable
(#1042) to attach external SCSI devices that are supported on the 7568 system.
Only devices that are specifically supported on the 7568 can be attached with
this connector and cable.  The #1042 cable must be ordered separately.

When any of the 320Mb, 400Mb, or 1.0Gb SCSI Fixed Disk Drives are installed in
the 7568 Auxiliary DASD Module, the maximum ambient operating temperature for
the 7568 system is reduced to 45C (113F).  Refer to the Operating Environment
section of this Sales Manual for complete environmental information.

NOTE: The 7568 Auxiliary DASD Module can be directly installed only in a model
D40 or C40 which has a standard Disk Module installed in the system.
Installation in earlier 7568 systems (model 040 or 150) requires that the 80486
Processor Card Upgrade Kit (#6543) or the 486 DX2 Processor Card Upgrade for MT
7568 (#6872, #2773 in EMEA) be installed in those systems, as well as standard
system Disk Module.  See the installation information for specific models
below.

Installation Requirements by 7568 Model:

    Model Number           Features Required for Installation
    -----------      ---------------------------------------------
        040          - Either #6543, 80486 Processor Card Upgrade Kit, or
                       #6872, 486 DX2 Processor Card Upgrade for MT 7568,
                                         and
                     - #6222, Disk Module (with Adapter Card)
        150          - Either #6543, 80486 Processor Card Upgrade Kit, or
                       #6872, 486 DX2 Processor Card Upgrade for MT 7568
        C40          - Either #6546 or #6547 ordered at the time of system
                       order (120Mb or 320Mb SCSI Fixed Disk Drive IBM
                       installed DASD content), or
                       Feature 6222, Disk Module (with Adapter Card),
                       if Feature 6551 (no DASD content) was ordered at
                       the time of system order
        D40          - Either #6546, #6866, or #6867 ordered at the time of
                       system order (120Mb, 400Mb, or 1.0Gb SCSI Fixed Disk
                       Drive IBM installed DASD content), or
                       Feature 6222, Disk Module (with Adapter Card),
                       if Feature 6551 (no DASD content) was ordered at
                       the time of system order


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 91. SYSTEM RESOURCE CARD GRAPHICS SUPPORT UPGRADE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  6886

Part Number  ___6886

Bus Master  No

This feature may be installed on the system resource card of 7568-040,
7568-150, and 7568-C40 systems, providing support for the installation and full
operation of the PS/2 XGA Display Adapter/A (#5887) feature.  This capability
is provided as part of the standard 7568-D40 system.  Without this graphics
support feature installed, the earlier models do not support operation of the
XGA Display Adapter/A.

Full functional performance of the XGA Display Adapter/A also requires that the
32 Bit Micro Channel Adapter Interposer (#6875, #2779 in EMEA) be used when
installing this adapter.  A 16 Bit Micro Channel Adapter (#6224) may be used
for installing the XGA Display Adapter/A, but this will result in reduced
graphics speed compared to when the 32 Bit Micro Channel Adapter Interposer is
used for this installation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 92. RACK MOUNT FRONT COVER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  42G0749

Feature Code 6916

Bus Master  No

This feature is limited to the A11 model. #6916 provides the means to convert a
system with a bench top front cover to one capable of being installed in a
standard 19-inch rack.  In addition to the rack mount front cover, some kind of
platform or bracket/slide capability must be provided to complete the
installation of the 7546 in the customer-provided rack.  These items must be
customer provided (see #6023, #6024, #6771 and #6908 for some items available
through IBM).  Prerequisite: None.  Customer Setup: Yes.  Publication included
with feature: None, covered in system publication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 93. RACK MOUNT FRONT COVER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  41G3777

Feature Code 6918

Bus Master  No

This feature is limited to the 411 model. #6918 provides the means to convert a
system with a bench top front cover to one capable of being installed in a
standard 19-inch rack.  In addition to the rack mount front cover, some kind of
platform or bracket/slide capability must be provided to complete the
installation of the 7546 in the customer-provided rack.  These items must be
customer provided (see #6023, #6024, #6771 and #6908 for some items available
through IBM).  Prerequisite: None.  Customer Setup: Yes.  Publication included
with feature: None, covered in system publication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 94. RACK MOUNT FRONT COVER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  41G3776

Feature Code 6917

Bus Master  No

This feature is limited to the A11 model. #6917 provides the means to convert a
system with a bench top front cover to one capable of being installed in a
standard 19-inch rack.  In addition to the rack mount front cover, some kind of
platform or bracket/slide capability must be provided to complete the
installation of the 7537 in the customer-provided rack.  These items must be
customer provided (see #6023, #6024, #6771 and #6908 for some items available
through IBM).  Prerequisite: None.  Customer Setup: Yes.  Publication included
with feature: None, covered in system publication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 95. MULTI-TYPE KEYBOARD RACK MOUNT DRAWER (NO LOCK) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  6908

Part Number  ___6908

Bus Master  No

This drawer provides hardware to mount multiple keyboard types into a standard
19-inch rack.  This feature accepts the Enhanced Keyboard (101 or 102-key), the
Space Saving Keyboard (84-key), and selected commercially available keyboards.
The Enhanced Keyboard must be rotated 90 degrees and placed into the drawer for
closure.  The Space Saving Keyboard remains mounted in the drawer, in the same
position, for both usage and storage.  The Multi-Type Drawer is a lightweight,
compact design that features less drawer travel, built-in stop in the maximum
out position, and a covered enclosure to protect the keyboard from
contamination while inside the rack.  The drawer meets IP 55 (front cover) per
IEC 529 and DIN 40 040 when installed in a rack.  This drawer will fit in all
19 inch cabinets or frames with mounting holes according to standards IEC
297-1, DIN 41495 part 1, or EIA-RS-310-C. The drawer is not provided with a
lock.  (If a locking drawer is desired, see #6193.)  Pictorial-only
instructions are included with the #6908 feature.

Physical specifications are:

    Width:  481.3mm (18.9 inches)
    Depth:  514.5mm (20.3 inches)
    Height:  88.9mm ( 3.5 inches)
    Weight:   4.5kg (10.0 pounds)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 96. PS/VALUEPOINT ISA ETHERNET ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  32G4134

Part Number  32G4136

Feature Code 5604

Feature Code 5613

Bus Master  No

The PS/ValuePoint ISA 10Base-T Ethernet Adapter and PS/ValuePoint ISA 10Base2
Ethernet Adapter provide customers with a high-quality, low-cost Ethernet
networking solution.  These adapters are designed to operate in IBM
PS/ValuePoint systems, IBM Personal System/2 (PS/2) systems, and non-IBM
systems which implement Industry Standard Architecture (ISA).  The
PS/ValuePoint ISA 10Base-T Ethernet Adapter and PS/ValuePoint ISA 10Base2
Ethernet Adapter allow attachment to an Ethernet network using 10Base-T
(twisted-pair) or 10Base2 (thin coax) media, respectively.  These products also
have the following attributes:

    o   Half-size ISA (16-bit data interface) adapter
    o   board Remote Program Load (RPL) and Power On Self Test (POST)
        EPROM
    o   NE2000 Compatible
    o   Supports IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD Standards

These adapters are certified to FCC Class B. Prerequisites:  The PS/ValuePoint
ISA 10Base-T Ethernet Adapter and PS/ValuePoint ISA 10Base2 Ethernet Adapter
require a half-size feature slot within the system in which they are installed.
Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 97. IBM PS/2 3.5-INCH ENHANCED REWRITABLE OPTICAL DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451295

Feature Code 1295

Bus Master  No

The Personal System/2(R) (PS/2(R)) 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive
provides a flexible, expandable and inexpensive solution for personal computing
storage needs.  The optical drive offers price and function advantages when
compared to diskette and fixed disk drives with improved performance and
removable media formatted capacity of 127MB on highly reliable 3.5-inch optical
cartridges.

The IBM PS/2 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive can be installed either
internally or externally on most IBM systems.  IBM offers both Micro Channel(R)
and ISA SCSI adapters.  The appropriate choice depends on system configuration
and desired performance characteristics.

External attachment is achieved with either the PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure
(3510-0V0) or the PS/2 External Enclosure for SCSI Devices (3511-003,
3511-0V0.)

The IBM Personal System/2 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive has been
independently certified as compatible with a broad mix of OEM computer systems
and SCSI adapter cards by XXCAL Testing Laboratories(1).

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Recommended solution for any environment requiring high-performance
       removable media storage devices.
    o  May be installed in or attached to all IBM PS/2 SCSI systems or attached to
       other IBM personal computer systems with the appropriate SCSI adapter.
    o  External attachment is achieved with any one of the PS/2 SCSI enclosures
       (3510-0V0, 3511-003, 3511-010).
    o  Larger read-ahead data buffer (256KB) and faster rotation (3000rpm), results
       in faster data transfer rates.
    o  Faster average seek time (40ms) enhances user productivity.
    o  Enhanced security feature (Privileged-Access Password) when used with the
       9556 and 9557
    o  The drive is enabled for software controlled eject and the ability to lock
       media in or out of the drive.
    o  Provides support for read/write media (127MB MO), read-only media (122MB
       O-ROM) and partial read-only media (122MB P-ROM).

IBM PS/2 Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive (6451295, #1295) provides for a
flexible, expandable and inexpensive solution for personal computing storage
needs through the use of high-capacity (127MB) removable optical cartridges. It
is well suited for data interchange between systems, data distribution,
secondary storage and save/restore operations.

High Capacity Removable Media:  IBM PS/2 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical
Drive provides for large amounts of data (127MB) to be exchanged between
optical devices or archived on highly reliable 3.5-inch optical cartridges.

Open Enterprise:  The IBM PS/2 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive
adheres to the Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) X3.131-1986.  The media
adheres to the ISO/IEC standard:  JTC1 SC23/WG2 CD10090.

The IBM Personal System/2 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive provides
for large amounts of data storage (127MB) on 3.5-inch removable optical
cartridges at an economical price.  The IBM Personal System/2 3.5-inch Enhanced
Rewritable Optical Drive performance and reliability lends itself to all the
generic uses of secondary storage as well as data interchange between systems.

The IBM Personal System/2 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive provides a
great number of opportunities for business solutions and should be considered
for:  technical workstations, desktop publishing, save/restore operations, data
distribution, data interchange and program distribution.

The IBM PS/2 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive provides a flexible,
expandable and inexpensive solution for personal computing storage needs.  The
IBM PS/2 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive offers price and function
advantages when compared to diskette drives and fixed disk drives, by the use
of high capacity removable optical cartridges.  The ability to read and rewrite
large amounts of data on removable media lends itself to all the generic uses
of secondary storage, as well as enabling new applications to take advantage of
high capacity optical media.

This optical drive accepts three media types; 3.5-inch magneto-optical (MO)
cartridge (127MB), 3.5-inch optical read-only-memory (O-ROM) cartridge (122MB)
and 3.5-inch partial-read-only-memory (P-ROM) cartridge (122MB).  P-ROM,
supported by the IBM PS/2 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive for the
first time, is a hybrid of both MO and O-ROM media, with a designated portion
of the optical media being read only and the remainder being rewritable.  O-ROM
and P-ROM, with typical capacities of 122MB, can be used by
software/application developers to distribute CD-ROM like applications.

The IBM Personal System/2 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive provides a
great number of opportunities for business solutions and should be considered
for: technical workstations, desktop publishing, save/restore operations, data
distribution and program distribution.

This drive is well suited for other applications:  are:

    o  Distribution of large segments of data requiring periodic updates
    o  Application sets where the quantities of copies are not sufficient
       to justify the mastering cost of CD-ROM.

To obtain assistance with the mastering of data sets for optical media,
customers, suppliers and internal developers are invited to contact the
Software Manufacturing Company in Boulder, CO, at 800-879-2755 or 303-939-3800;
or they may write to:

    International Business Machines Corporation
    Manager, Department EBG/025E
    6300 Diagonal Highway
    Boulder, CO 80301-9191

TECHNICAL INFORMATION IBM Personal System/2 Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive:

    Width:                   101.6mm
    Depth (w/card):          169.0mm
    Height:                  41.3mm

Drive Specifications:

    Formatted Capacity:      127MB (MO), 122MB
                               (O-ROM, P-ROM) *
    Sustained Data Rates:
      Read Rate:             640KB/sec
      Write Rate:            213KB/sec
    Average Seek Time:       40 ms
    Rotation Speed:          3000 rpm
    Data Buffer:             256KB
*  Actual user capacity may vary slightly.

Equipment Approvals/Safety:

    FCC Class B              Yes
    UL/CSA Recognized        Yes
    VCCI Class 2             Yes
    GOP VDE Class B          No
    CSA 22.2 # 950           Yes

Operating Environment:

    Temperature         10 deg. C
                        40 deg. C
    Relative Humidity
    (system on)         8% to 80%

Attachment to Non-IBM Systems:  The IBM Personal System/2 3.5-inch Enhanced
Rewritable Optical Drive has been independently certified as compatible with a
broad mix of OEM computer systems and SCSI adapter cards by XXCAL Testing
Laboratories.

IBM Personal System/2 Enhance Rewritable Optical Drive:  The following
operating systems and extensions support the IBM Personal System/2 Enhance
Rewritable Optical Drive:

    o  OS/2(R) Standard Edition 1.30.1
    o  OS/2 Extended Edition 1.30.2
    o  OS/2 2.0, 2.00.1
    o  OS/2 2.0 LAN Server 2.0
    o  Extended Services Version 1.0 for OS/2
    o  OS/2J 1.3EE
    o  OS/2J 2.0
    o  DOS 5.0 (and later)
       -  Windows(2) 3.0 (and later)
    o  Advanced Interactive Executive PS/2 (AIX(R) PS/2) 1.2.1 (PFT level
       1000 and later)
    o  SCO(3) UNIX(4) System V/386 3.2v.4
    o  SCP Xenix(3) System Version 2.3.4
    o  Open Desktop(4) 1.1 (and later)
    o  Novell NetWare(5) 3.11 (and later)
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (2)
Trademark of Microsoft Corporation. (3) Trademark of Santa Cruz Corporation,
Inc. (4) Trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. (5) Trademark of Novell,
Inc.

Compatibility:  The IBM Personal System/2 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical
Drive is designed to maintain compatibility with current software support that
uses the standard defined BIOS interfaces.  Installable device drivers that
utilize the File Allocation Table (FAT) structure are included with the optical
drive.  These drivers allow DOS and OS/2 to support the rewritable optical
drive as if it were a very fast, very large diskette drive.

Limitations:  IBM PS/2 Enhance Rewritable Optical Drive:  Some application
software packages include an installation program.  A few of them will not
install to a removable disk.  In this case, it is recommended that the software
be installed to the fixed disk drive and then copied to the optical disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 98. 3511-0V0 PS/2 EXTERNAL STORAGE ENCLOSURE FOR SCSI DEVICES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The External Enclosure for SCSI Devices Model 0V0 (3511-0V0) is a
floor-standing expansion unit similar in appearance to the PS/2* Model 95,
which can attach to a PS/2 Micro Channel* system with either a PS/2 Micro
Channel Adapter or a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache installed. The
unit can be populated with a maximum of seven internal devices, such as fixed
disk drives, a CD-ROM Drive, or a tape drive.  The unit has a new 400 Watt
power supply.

The new power supply, when compared to the previous supply, increases the
wattages available for the DASD, reduces the AC input line current by
approximately 35 percent, and eliminates the problem of harmonics through
active power factor correction.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides customers with the capability to tailor their system
        configuration to meet expanding application requirements.
    o   Adhering to the industry standard SCSI interface provides a
        high degree of hardware and software compatibility.

The External Enclosure for SCSI Devices provides customers with additional
expansion capabilities for their PS/2 Micro Channel desktop and floor-standing
systems.  Customers now have the capability to add many and varied SCSI storage
devices, when it is not practical or possible to install internal SCSI devices.
These SCSI storage devices include SCSI fixed disks, CD-ROM drives, and SCSI
Tape drives.  PS/2 SCSI storage options adhere to the industry standard SCSI
interface, maintaining a high degree of hardware and software compatibility.
The SCSI enclosure ensures customers that they can tailor their system
configuration to meet expanding application requirements.

Up to seven SCSI devices can be installed in a PS/2 Model 3511-0V0.  The
maximum number of internal/external SCSI devices supported by a PS/2 SCSI
adapter, including the SCSI devices in the external enclosure is seven.

The IBM Personal System/2 External Storage Enclosure for SCSI Devices has two
3.5-inch half high bays, one 5.25-inch half high bay, and two 5.25-inch full
high bays.  The 5.25-inch full high bays include two removable 3.5-inch half
high SCSI device mounting trays installed in each bay.  These trays provide the
capability to install two 3.5-inch half high SCSI devices in each 5.25-inch
full high bay bringing the total number of installable internal SCSI devices to
seven.  The maximum number of internal/external SCSI devices supported by a
PS/2 SCSI adapter, including the SCSI devices installed in the external storage
enclosure, is seven.  The maximum number of external storage enclosures
attached to a PS/2 system with four PS/2 SCSI adapters installed, is four.
These devices must meet the ANSI SCSI Standard (X3.131-1986) for single ended
devices.

The PS/2 External Storage Enclosure for SCSI Devices is intended for use as a
floor-standing device and is designed to operate in a vertical position only.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Width:  203.2mm (8.0 inches)
    Depth:  508mm   (20.0 inches)
    Height:  501.6mm (19.75 inches)
    Weight:  20.7kg  (46 lbs.) (minimum configuration)

Equipment Approvals and Safety:

    FCC  Class A - Yes
    VCCI Class 1 - Yes
    GOP VDE Class B - No
    CSA 22.2 # 950 - Yes

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

                                 SCSI Enclosure
                                 --------------
    Temperature (degrees C)      16-32 (Sys on)
    Rel. Humidity (system on)    8-80%

The PS/2 External Storage Enclosure for SCSI Devices requires either a PS/2
Micro Channel SCSI Adapter (FC 1005, P/N 6451109) or a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI
Adapter with Cache (FC 1132, P/N 6451133) plus a PS/2 Card to Option Cable (FC
1140, P/N 6451139) to connect to a PS/2 Micro Channel system. * Signifies a
trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 99. 7568 ATTACHMENT SUPPORT FOR PS/2 REWRITEABLE OPTICAL DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1199

Part Number  _PF1199

Bus Master  No

This RPQ provides the necessary code for recognition of the 7568 Disk/Diskette
adapter and enables support for attachment of the PS/2 Rewriteable Optical
Drive (#0162) to the GEARBOX Model 800.  Attachment of this device to the 7568
is NOT supported in the absence of this RPQ.

The optical drive must be installed in the PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure (Machine
type 3510-0V0) for attachment to the GEARBOX Model 800.  PS/2 features #1039
and #1140 are also involved with the attachment of this device and the SCSI
Storage Enclosure to the GEARBOX system.  The #1039 External Terminator is
required to be installed on the GEARBOX external SCSI port when the card to
option cable is removed after having been attached.  The #1140 cable is
required to connect the 3510-0V0 PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure to the GEARBOX
external SCSI port when attaching the PS/2 optical drive to the system.

Use of the optical drive and the required media is limited to environments as
specified for these products.  See Product Announcements 191-082, dated June
11, 1991, and 191-053, dated April 23, 1991, and Sales Manual information for
these products. *Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 100. IBM PS/2 SCSI 400MB SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  6873

Part Number  6451235

Bus Master  No

A SCSI fixed disk drive that features 400 million bytes (400MB) formatted
capacity, 128KB look ahead buffer, 11.5ms average seek time, synchronous mode
operation, 3.5-inch half high form factor, and complies to the ANSI SCSI
STANDARD X3.131-1986 for single ended devices.  This drive can be installed
with with the PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter (FC 1005 P/N 6451109) or the PS/2
Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache (FC 1018 P/N 6451110) installed. In
addition, this drive can be installed in the PS/2 External Storage Enclosure
for SCSI Devices (3511-003).  The PS/2 Models 60, 65, and 80 require the PS/2
SCSI Fixed Disk Drive Kit A (FC 1053 P/N 6451053) when installing a SCSI fixed
disk drive in the bay located at the front of the system.

Drive specifications:

    Formatted Capacity        400 million bytes *
    Bytes/Sector              512
    Sectors/Track             48
    Cylinders                 1201
    Sector buffer size        128KB look ahead buffer
    Number of Heads           14
    Disks                     8
    Data Transfer Rate        2.0MBytes/s
    Average Seek Time         11.5ms
    Average Latency           6.95ms
    Sector Interleave         1to1
    Nominal Operating Current: .7A on +5V Line, 1.2A on +12V Line

Actual user accessable capacity may vary slightly based on different operating
environment.

Dimensions:

    Width:  4.00 inch (101.6mm)
    Depth (HDA):  5.75 inch (152.37mm)
    Height:  1.62 inch (41.275mm)

Limitations: It is possible to damage the power supply or shutdown the system
if the total amount of nominal operating current required for the devices
installed exceeds the available current of the power supply in the PS/2 Models
90, 95, and 3511-003.  The following chart lists the nominal operating currents
for many of the devices that can be installed in a PS/2 system.  Use this chart
to add up the nominal operating currents of all the devices installed, and
compare your totals to the TOTAL ALLOWED CURRENTS chart for the appropriate
PS/2 system.

Maximum:  None.  Cable Order:  None.  Field Installed:  Yes.  Prerequisites:
PS/2 SCSI Adapter installed.  Corequisites:  None.  Customer Setup:  It is
recommended that a Service Representative set up and install these SCSI
devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 101. CD-ROM-II DRIVE,CD-ROM-II DRIVE KIT A,CD-ROM-II DRIVE B ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

Part Number  6451104

Feature Code 1104

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 CD-ROM-II Drive (#1104, P/N 6451104) is an internal
Compact Disc-Read Only Memory drive.  This device expands application solutions
for all PS/2 Micro Channel and non-Micro Channel Systems with a PS/2 SCSI
adapter installed, by enabling various applications typically distributed on
compact discs to be accessed by computer.  The IBM PS/2 CD-ROM-II Drive adheres
to the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) and and supports compact discs
with 600MB typical capacity.  In addition, CD-ROM-II adds capabilities
including CD-ROM/XA, Compact Disc-Digital Audio (CD-DA) over SCSI and Software
Volume Control not available in CD-ROM.  The Extended Architecture (XA)
specifies a standard for interleaving data types:  video, audio and text.
These enhancements in the PS/2 CD-ROM-II Drive allows exploitation of advanced
multimedia applications.

The IBM PS/2 CD-ROM-II Drive Kit A (#1145, P/N 6451145) is specifically
designed and required to support the installation of a PS/2 CD-ROM-II Drive in
all floor-standing PS/2 systems.  The IBM PS/2 CD-ROM Drive, combined with PS/2
SCSI enclosure (3510-0V0) and IBM PS/2 CD-ROM-II Drive Kit B (#1150, P/N
6451146), offers the CD-ROM function to all IBM PS/2 Micro Channel and
non-Micro Channel Systems.  When installing the PS/2 CD-ROM-II Drive in PS/2
non-Micro Channel or PS/1 Model 386SX machines, an IBM SCSI Adapter Kit must be
used.

Highlights:

    o   Supports all IBM PS/2 Micro Channel and Non-Micro Channel Systems
    o   Industry Standard SCSI Interface (single ended)
    o   Industry Standard Compact Disc (ISO 9660)
    o   Enabled to support new CD-ROM/XA formats
    o   600MB Typical Formatted Capacity (disc dependent)
    o   330MS Average Access Time
    o   Data Transfer Rates:  150KB/sec sustained; 1.5MB/sec burst
    o   Analog Stereo Headphone Output Jack

Customers will realize productivity enhancements with the IBM PS/2 CD- ROM-II
Drive in many ways:

    o   Distribute publications and periodicals economically, including
        comprehensive documents such as catalogs and sales manuals utilizing
        high-capacity compact discs
    o   Online acccess to specialized materials such as legal and financial
        databases
    o   Enhance desktop publishing with a wealth of available CD-ROM clip-art
        illustrations and graphics
    o   Enhance productivity with CD-ROM programmer's libraries
    o   Multimedia applications

The IBM Personal System/2 CD-ROM-II Drive expands application solutions for all
IBM PS/2 Micro Channel Systems with a PS/2 SCSI adapter installed and in
selected Micro Channel Industrial Computers.  The IBM PS/2 CD-ROM-II Drive Kit
A is required to install the PS/2 CD- ROM-II Drive in all PS/2 floor-standing
systems.  The IBM PS/2 CD-ROM-II Drive combined with a PS/2 SCSI Storage
Enclosure (3510-0V0) and a PS/2 CD-ROM-II Drive Kit B offers CD-ROM function to
all PS/2 Micro Channel desktop or floor-standing systems with a PS/2 SCSI
adapter installed.  When installing a PS/2 CD-ROM-II Drive in PS/2 non-Micro
Channel or PS/1 Model 386SX systems, an IBM SCSI Adapter Kit must be used.

DOS and OS/2 requires the installation of DOS and OS/2 device drivers and file
extensions supplied with the option.  The following operating systems support
the PS/2 CD-ROM-II Drive in Micro Channel Systems:

    o   Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 3.3 and above
    o   OS/2 Standard Edition 1.30.1
    o   OS/2 Extended Edition 1.30.2
    o   OS/2 2.0
    o   OS/2 2.0 Lan Server 2.0
    o   Extended Services Version 1.0 for OS/2
    o   OS/2 IBM Multimedia Presentation Manager/2
    o   Advanced Interactive Executive Personal System/2 (AIX PS/2) 1.2.1 (A)
    o   WINDOWS 3.0
    o   WINDOWS MME 1.0
    o   Novell Netware V3.11 and above
    o   XENIX 2.3.4 (2)
    o   System V (3)
    o   SCO UNIX System 3.2v.4 (1)
    o   V/386 (3)
    o   Open Desktop 1.1 (3)

Notes: (A) AIX PS/2 will exploit the PS/2 CD-ROM-II Drive with the application
of PTF #P211300. (1) Trademark of Santa Cruz Operation, Inc (SCO) (2) Trademark
of Microsoft Corporation (3) Requires SCO's IBM Operating System EFS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 102. IBM PC NETWORK BROADBAND ADAPTER II/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF FEBRUARY 17, 1993.)

Part Number 33F9284

Feature Code 1222

POS ID: EFEF

Bus Master  No

The adapter includes a modular broadband modem for connecting to the broadband
IBM PC Network.  The adapter features a 2 megabit/second transmission speed
with a CSMA/CD access protocol and supports the IEEE 802.2 protocols via the
IBM Local Area Network Support Program.  The broadband channels used by this
adapter are T14 and J.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 103. IBM PS/2 ADAPTER/A FOR ETHERNET TWISTED-PAIR NETWORKS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451136

Feature Code 1136

POS ID: EFE5

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Twisted-Pair Networks provides
a connection to an Ethernet LAN on all models of the following PS/2 Micro
Channel Systems:  8550, 8555, 8556, 8557, 8560, 8565, 8570, 8573, 8589, 8590,
8595, and Industrial Computers 7546, 7561, 7562, GEARBOX Model 800 (7568).

This LAN adapter provides the ability to attach IBM PS/2 Micro Channel bus
systems to Ethernet networks.  The adapter supports Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE
802.3 CSMA/CD with data transfers at 10 Mbps via an attachment unit interface
(AUI) or RJ 45 connector.  Connection to 10Base-T (unshielded twisted-pair
cable) is provided through the RJ 45 connector.  Connection to 10Base2 (thin
coaxial cable) or 10Base5 (thick coaxial cable) is provided through the AUI
connector and a user provided external transceiver.

Remote Program Load (RPL) is included standard for systems requiring this
capability.  Maximum: Two.

The following are programming requirements when operating an Ethernet/802.3
network with the IBM PC Disk Operating System (DOS), OS/2 EE or LAN Services.
IBM PC DOS:

    o   IBM PC Disk Operating System Version 3.3, or higher.
    o   IBM Local Area Network Support Program Version 1.23.
    o   DOS NDIS device drivers are included in the option diskette packaged with
        the IBM PS/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Twisted-Pair Networks.

OS/2 Extended Edition:

    o   IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.3.2.
    o   OS/2 NDIS device drivers, included in the option diskette packaged with
        the PS/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Twisted-Pair Networks.

OS/2 LAN Services:

    o   IBM OS/2 LAN Services Version 2.0.
    o   OS/2 NDIS device drivers, included in the option diskette packaged with
        the IBM PS/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Twisted-Pair Networks.

Novell Netware:

    o   Novell Netware Version 2.2 or 3.11.
    o   Novell device drivers, included in the option diskette packaged with the
        PS/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Twisted-Pair Networks.

Corequisites:  None.  Compatibility Conflicts:  None.  Customer Setup:  Yes.
Limitations:  None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 104. IBM S/370 PARALLEL CHANNEL ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 89F8857

Feature Code RPQ 8P1456

Bus Master  No

The Parallel Channel Adapter and its associated microcode provide connection of
a Micro Channel bus to a S/370 channel, allowing data transfers between two
systems at up to 4.5MB per second.  Appropriate software and microcode must be
running in the S/370 and the Micro Channel bus-based system.  Currently this
adapter is available as an "I Listed" RPQ for PS/2 32- bit computers -- Models
70, 80, 90 and 95.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 105. IBM LANSTREAMER MC 32 ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  92F8942

Feature Code 8942

Bus Master  Yes

The IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter is designed to operate with an IBM Personal
System/2(R) (PS/2(R)) Micro Channel(R) architecture.  It offers improved
performance, increased function, and supports 40MB/sec streaming data
capabilities.  The IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter supports operation at either
16 million or 4 million bits per second (Mbps) over Unshielded Twisted Pair
(UTP) or IBM Cabling System media.  Remote Program Load (RPL) is standard with
the adapter. (R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Improved performance for servers provided by the IBM LANStreamer
       MC 32 Adapter extends the time before additional hardware is
       required as local area network (LAN) activity increases.  With the
       adapter providing media speed on a 16 Mbps token-ring, user
       response time is improved as application demands increase.
    o  Address and data parity across the Micro Channel provide data
       integrity for customer's mission critical applications.
    o  Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) support provides the user with
       greater flexibility and improved usability without requiring an
       external filter, and allows easy movement of the adapter in the
       customer's environment to adapt to either UTP or Shielded Twisted
       Pair (STP) wiring schemes.
    o  RPL provides the capability for improved security and simplified
       initial program load (IPL) content administration for workstations,
       and is provided at no extra cost.
    o  Device drivers included with the adapter provide the capability
       to operate with many of today's leading network operating systems,
       including OS/2(R) LAN Server and NetWare(1).  NDIS capabilities
       provided by the device drivers ease the user's migration of new
       applications.
    o  Multiple group address (MGA) support on the IBM LANStreamer MC 32
       Adapter allows the user to configure the group addresses to take
       advantage of the capability to send information to particular
       stations, similar to the multicasting capability provided by
       Ethernet environments.  LAN Support Program 3.1 with PTF UR37950
       provides up to 256 MGA on the IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter.
(1) Registered trademark of Novell, Inc. (R) Registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.

The new enhanced Token-Ring technology incorporated on the IBM LANStreamer MC
32 Adapter provides significant performance improvements.  These include frame
processing capacity of over 30,000 frames per second and very low latency
(under 50 microseconds).  The IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter provides both data
and addressing support for 32 bits of information to be passed across the Micro
Channel.  This provides greater throughput as well as addressing capabilities
for the growing customers' environments requiring addressing above the 16MB
range.  This, plus the 40MB/sec streaming data capability, make the IBM
LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter ideal for the high-end workstations and servers in
today's environments.

The additional throughput provided by the IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter
protects the customer's current hardware investment by extending the time
before additional hardware is required as LAN activity increases.

The new technology provides a platform for the customer to allow growth to new
higher demand networks.  The multiple receive and priority transmit channels
included in the new technology allow multimedia application to also use this
adapter.

Both UTP and STP connectors are offered on the IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter,
providing greater flexibility in meeting customer's wiring plans.  The dual
connections provide portability in the growing Token-Ring Network without
requiring customers to rewire existing buildings.

The device drivers included with the IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter are NDIS and
ODI compliant, providing the capability to operate with many of today's leading
network operating systems.

The RPL function in every IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter allows a workstation to
be used in the RPL or non-RPL environment with no additional hardware cost or
changes.

In addition, the IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter is compatible with other IBM
Token-Ring adapters operating at the same speed (16Mbps or 4Mbps).  The
protocols conform to IEEE 802.5 and ECMA 89 standards.

The device drivers shipped with each adapter include both OS/2 and NetWare 3.1
and 4.0 (when available) server drivers.  DOS NDIS server and workstation
drivers, OS/2 workstation NDIS driver, and ODI workstation driver will be
available April 30, 1993.  Easy access to the drivers reduces the amount of
time needed to install the new adapters and increases the user's productivity.
Because of the IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter's increased throughput capacity,
more clients can be supported using a single adapter without degrading customer
response time.  In addition, the adapter's faster file transfer performance can
result in reduction of 20% to 30% in the time it takes customers to download
files from their servers in a NetWare 3.11 environment.  Similar improvements
can be expected in a LAN server environment.

The device drivers included with the IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter provide easy
access to OS/2, DOS (when available), and NetWare 3.1, 4.0 (when available) for
installation.

The IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter offers both UTP and STP connections at 16Mbps
or 4Mbps without the use of external filters.  The dual connectivity makes the
adapter very portable and easy to adapt to either media installation.

Filters to support token-ring operations over UTP media at 16Mbps or 4Mbps are
included on the IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter.  The customer can either choose
telephone twisted-pair media, which is less costly and already wired in many
establishments, or IBM Cabling System media, which provides less signal noise
and thus greater potential for upgrading to higher media speeds.

Multiple group address (MGA) provides a simplified means to update a group of
information (for example, time of day, stock quotes, etc.) or locate  control
entities (for example, network management, bridges, servers, etc.).  This
function is treated as a broadcast function, but only those stations
recognizing this configured address will receive and process the data.  Up to
256 group addresses can be configured for IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter.
Performance is improved in the network since this is provided via the hardware.

Many applications require access to random access memory (RAM) above the 16MB
range.  The IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter and associated software provide this
capability to applications, thus freeing the memory ranges below 16MB.

The new architecture of the IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter integrates many
functions into the hardware, greatly improving the frame processing and overall
performance of the new LAN adapter over existing products.  New priority
transmit and receive channels have also been included in the new technology
providing an easy migration to the multimedia applications without the addition
of new hardware.

The IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter protocols conform to IEEE 802.5 and ECMA 89
standards.

The capability to monitor the token ring from a central network manager is
supported on the IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter.  The same level of information
is provided on the IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter that is offered by the
existing IBM 16/4 Token-Ring Adapter/A.

Its conformance to the IEEE 802.5 standard allows the IBM LANStreamer MC 32
Adapter to be monitored and managed by the same tools used today.  The On-Card
Self Test verifies the adapter prior to its insertion into the ring.  The Ring
Error Monitor program shipped with the product provides a view of the condition
of the ring if problems are being encountered.

The RPL feature in every IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter provides the capability
for improved security and simplified administration of workstation IPL modules.
The RPL feature makes it possible for the customer to load application programs
from one computer connected to a token-ring network into another computer on
the same token-ring network.  The IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter with RPL may be
used in environments requiring the additional security provided by medialess
workstations with no additional cost incurred.  It can be used to simplify the
updating and control of RPL content on any workstation.  The RPL content can be
changed at the server and, the next time a workstation is "IPL'd", the revised
content is automatically received by the workstation.

IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter conforms to IEEE 802.5, ECMA 89.

IBM intends to use the new IBM LANStreamer technology with the IBM Token-Ring
Bridge Program to provide improved performance.  The announcement and
availability of the referenced function will be based on IBM's business and
technical judgement.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Physical Specifications:

    Width:      8.827cm (3.476 inches)
    Length:     20.32cm (8 inches)
    Depth:      2.667cm (1 inch)
    Weight:     5.33 oz.

Operating Environment:  This product meets FCC Class A criteria up to 6
adapters per machine when configured with shielded cabling which meets the IBM
specifications.  This product meets FCC Class A criteria up to 6 adapters per
machine when configured with unshielded cabling (UTP) which meets the IBM
specifications.

    Temperature:         10.0 to 40.0 degrees C
                         (50 to 104 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity:   8% to 80%
    Wet Bulb:            .6 to 29.4 C (33 to 85 degrees F)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 106. IBM LOW-COST ETHERNET ADAPTERS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  60G0605

Part Number  60G0615

Feature Code 0605

Feature Code 0615

Bus Master  No

The IBM Low-Cost Ethernet Adapters provide customers with a high-quality,
low-cost Ethernet networking solution.  These adapters include:

    IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet TP
    IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet CX

The IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet TP and the IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet CX are
designed to operate in IBM PS/ValuePoint(TM), IBM Personal System/1(TM)
(PS/1(R)), and IBM Personal System/2(R) (PS/2(R)) machines implementing
Industry Standard Architecture (ISA).  The IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet TP and
the IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet CX allow attachment to an Ethernet network
using 10BaseT (twisted-pair) or 10Base2 (thin coaxial) media, respectively.

Remote Initial Program Load (RIPL) is standard with the adapters and the
adapters carry a 5 year warranty. (TM) Trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (R) Registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Provides customers with a low-cost IBM Ethernet networking
       solution.
    o  Provides device drivers that allow the capability to operate with
       many of today's leading network operating systems including
       OS/2(R) LAN Server and NetWare from IBM.
    o  Provides the capability for improved security and simplified
       Initial Program Load (IPL) content control for workstations
       through the RIPL function standard on every adapter.
    o  Eases the work required when making configuration changes through
       a user-friendly software configuration program.
    o  Assures customers of IBM quality and reliability with a five year
       warranty.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Compatibility ensures customers that the product they have purchased will work
with other products in their environment, whether the other products were
purchased from the same vendor or different vendors.

Software configuration allows the customer to manually or automatically change
adapter parameters such as interrupt level and adapter memory location, through
a simple, understandable software program.

The RIPL feature makes it possible for the customer to download application
programs from a server to a client workstation on the same Ethernet network.

The IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet TP and the IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet CX
protocols conform to the IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet Version 2 standards.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Specified Operating Environment Physical Specifications
-- Product:

The IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet TP:

    Width:      175mm (7.00 inches)
    Depth:       20mm (0.79 inches)
    Height:      75mm (3.00 inches)
    Weight:     .270kg (0.25 lbs)

The IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet CX:

    Width:      175mm (7.00 inches)
    Depth:       20mm (0.79 inches)
    Height:      75mm (3.00 inches)
    Weight:     .270kg (0.25 lbs)

Physical Specifications -- Packaged Product: The IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet
TP:

    Width:      191mm (7.5 inches)
    Depth:       38mm (1.5 inches)
    Height:     229mm (9.0 inches)
    Weight:     .132kg (0.3 lbs)

The IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet CX:

    Width:      191mm (7.5 inches)
    Depth:       38mm (1.5 inches)
    Height:     229mm (9.0 inches)
    Weight:     .132kg (0.3 lbs)

Operating Environment The IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet TP and the IBM LAN
Adapter for Ethernet CX meet FCC Class A (Business), FCC Class B (Home),
CSPR22-A (Business), CSPR22-B (Home), and IOP operating criteria.:  The IBM LAN
Adapter for Ethernet TP and the IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet CX have not been
approved by the Federal Communications Commission.  The adapters will not, and
may not, be offered for sale or lease, or sold or leased until the approval of
the FCC has been obtained.

    Temperature:         10.0  to 35.0 degrees C
                         (50 to 95 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity:   8% to 80%
    Wet Bulb:            23.0 degrees C (73 degrees F)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 107. AUI CONNECTOR CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  59G9004

Feature Code xxxx

Bus Master  No

The AUI Connector Cable is used to connect the IBM MicroChannel Ethernet
adapter with connectors for all three common Ethernet media (10BaseT, 10Base2
and 10Base5) to an Ethernet network using 10Base5 media.  The AUI Connector
Cable connects on one end to the mini AUI connector on the adapter.  The other
end of the AUI Connector Cable connects to a customer supplied AUI attachment
cable.

The IBM adapters requiring the AUI Connector Cable are the IBM LAN Adapter/A
for Ethernet (FC7171, IBM PN 48G7171), and the IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter
(FC9066, 6609 and 3310--IBM PN 59G9066, 59G6609 and 60G3310)

The AUI Connector Cable (101.6 mm in length) is designed for customer set-up.

End-user management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation
of security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 108. IBM 16/4 ISA-16 ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  73G2032

Feature Code 7462

Bus Master  No

The IBM 16/4 ISA-16 Adapter is a high-performance Token-Ring Local Area Network
(LAN) adapter designed to operate with an Industry Standard Architecture (ISA)
bus computer.  It supports operation at either 16 million or 4 million bits per
second (Mbps) over Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) or IBM Cabling System media.

The adapter is available in both a single adapter and multiple adapter package.
The multiple adapter package is a convenient packaging alternative for users
who are installing multiple workstations.  It includes 30 adapters and one set
of documentation and diskettes, eliminating the extra documentation, diskettes,
and other materials required when each adapter is purchased separately.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  16-bit data path for improved data throughput
    o  Onboard Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) filters
    o  ISA bus connection to 16/4 Token-Ring Networks
    o  Remote Program Load (RPL) included
    o  Device drivers included
       -  DOS, OS/2(R), Novell Netware(1)
       -  Reduced memory DOS transport modules for DOS 802.2 and NETBIOS
          applications
(1) NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. (R) Registered trademark
of International Business Machines Corporation.

The IBM 16/4 ISA-16 Adapter is an ISA adapter that features a 16-bit data path
for improved data throughput.

The high performance gives customers the potential to run additional
applications on their systems without upgrading their hardware.

The improved throughput improves the response time for end users.

The high performance protects the customer's hardware investment by extending
the time before additional hardware is required as LAN activity increases.

Compatibility:  Compatibility ensures customers that the product they purchase
will work in their environment with both their existing products and their
future products, regardless of the vendor.

    o  By supporting both UTP (with onboard filters) and STP cabling,
       users have more cabling options and flexibility, and should be
       able to utilize their existing cabling investment.
    o  Being plug compatible with the current IBM Token-Ring Network
       16/4 Adapter allows the customer to easily migrate to the new
       adapter while still being able to utilize their existing
       hardware and software.
    o  The adapter is designed to operate in any ISA bus computer that
       is compliant with ISA specifications.
    o  The adapter is compatible with other Token-Ring adapters operating
       at the same speed (4 or 16Mbps).  The protocols conform to
       Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.5 and
       European Manufacturer's Association (ECMA) 89 standards.
    o  Conformance to IEEE 802.5 allows the adapter to be monitored and
       managed by the same tools used today, including the On-Card Self
       Test (which checks the adapter prior to insertion into the ring)
       and the Ring Error Monitor (which checks the condition of the
       ring).  The adapter can also be monitored as a critical resource
       by the IBM LAN Network Manager.
    o  Device drivers included with the adapter provide the capability
       to operate with many of today's leading network operating systems,
       including OS/2, DOS and NetWare.  In addition, DOS 802.2 and
       NETBIOS applications can use the reduced memory DOS transport
       modules included with the adapter.  These modules provide the
       equivalent function of the IBM LAN Support Program for DOS 802.2
       and NETBIOS environments, for a maximum of one adapter per
       machine.

Remote Program Load (RPL):  The RPL feature allows the user to download
application programs from the server to a client workstation on the same
network.

The RPL feature, which is standard on the adapter, provides the capability for
improved security and simplified administration of workstations.

Reliability:  Reliability implies a high quality level in the product.
Customers expect to be able to use the product over the product's lifetime
without fear of breakdown or inconsistent performance.

    o  The adapter offers a five-year warranty to protect the customer's
       investment in the product.
    o  The adapter was designed and developed by IBM's Local Area Network
       Hardware Development Lab in Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
       -- an ISO9000 certified laboratory.  The ISO9000 certification
       ensures customers that a high quality design and development
       process was used to develop this product.
    o  Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.5
    o  European Computer Manufacturer's Association (ECMA) 89 Version
       3.12, 1992 (BCPR Services, Inc).

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

    Width:  10.7 cm  (4.2-inches)
    Length: 17.3 cm  (6.8-inches)
    Depth:   2.4 cm  (0.95-inches)
    Weight:  210 g   (0.46 lbs)

Operating Environment:  This product meets FCC Class A criteria when configured
with either shielded cabling or unshielded cabling (UTP) which meets the IBM
specifications

    o  Temperature : 10 to 35 degrees C (50 to 95 degrees F)
    o  Relative Humidity : 8 to 80 (percent)
    o  Wet Bulb : 23 degrees C (73 degrees F)
    o  Electrical power : 5VDC @ 0.9A

Machine Requirements:  The IBM 16/4 ISA-16 Adapter is designed to operate on
all ISA bus computers that comply with ISA specifications.

The IBM 16/4 ISA-16 Adapter has been tested on the following computer types:

    o  IBM ValuePoint
    o  IBM PS/2 E
    o  IBM PS/2
    o  IBM PS/1(R)
    o  IBM PC
    o  Compaq(2)
    o  Dell(3)
    o  Zenith Data Systems(4)
(2) Compaq is a registered trademark of Compaq Computer Corporation. (3) Zenith
Data Systems is a registered trademark of Zenith Data Systems Corporation. (4)
Dell is a registered trademark of Dell Computer Corporation. (R) Registered
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Programming Requirements:  The IBM 16/4 ISA-16 Adapter is designed to operate
with the following operating systems and network environments.  These products
have been tested and operate properly with the IBM 16/4 ISA-16 Adapter.

IBM or MS DOS 3.3, 4.0, and 5.0:

    o  IBM LAN Support Program Version 1.33 or higher
    o  IBM Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.0
    o  DOS NDIS device drivers are included on the diskette packaged with
       the IBM 16/4 ISA-16 Adapter.
    o  Reduced memory DOS transport modules for DOS 802.2 and NETBIOS
       applications are included with the adapter.  These modules provide
       the equivalent function of the IBM LAN Support Program for DOS
       802.2 and NETBIOS environments, for a maximum of one adapter per
       machine.

IBM OS/2 Standard Edition (OS/2 SE) 1.30, IBM OS/2 Extended Edition (OS/2 EE)
1.30.2, or IBM OS/2 Version 2.0.

    o  IBM OS/2 Extended Services(TM) Version 1.0
    o  IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0 and Version 3.0
    o  IBM OS/2 Communications Manager/2
    o  OS/2 and DOS NDIS device drivers are included on the diskette
       packaged with the IBM 16/4 ISA-16 Adapter.

Note: The use of Communications Manager/2 on a local area network requires the
LAN adapter and Protocol Support (LAPS) function.  The Communications Manager
products do not provide this LAPS function but can utilize the LAPS component
that is provided with one of several other products.  The products include the
LAN Requester of the IBM LAN Server Version 2.0, the LAPS component shipped
with the IBM LAN Server Version 3.0, and the Extended Services for OS/2(TM)
product.  If one of these products is not installed on the workstation, the
LAPS function can be acquired by installing the IBM Network Transport
Services/2 (NTS/2) product. (TM) Trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.

Novell NetWare:

    o  Novell NetWare Version 3.11 and 4.0
    o  NetWare from IBM Version 3.11 and 4.0
    o  Novell NetWare and Open Data-Link Interface (ODI) device drivers
       are included in the diskette packaged with the IBM 16/4 ISA-16
       Adapter.

SOFTWARE SUPPORT SUPPLIED WITH THE IBM 16/4 ISA-16 ADAPTER DISKETTE The drivers
come on a 3.5-inch, 720KB diskette.

    o  IBM DOS Network Device Interface Specification (NDIS) 2.01 Device
       Driver
    o  IBM OS/2 NDIS 2.01 Device Driver
    o  Module providing IEEE 802.2 protocol interface -- DOS Device
       Driver
    o  Module providing Netbios interface -- DOS Device Driver
    o  Novell DOS ODI Workstation Driver
    o  Novell OS/2 ODI Workstation Driver
    o  Novell Netware 4.00 ODI Server Device Driver
    o  Ring Diagnostic program to assist in problem determination for the
       Token-Ring on which the machine resides
    o  Adapter Diagnostic program to assist in problem determination for
       the adapter.

Compatibility:  The IBM 16/4 ISA-16 Adapter is compatible with other IBM
Token-Ring adapters operating at the same speed (16Mbps or 4Mbps).

The IBM 16/4 ISA-16 Adapter is designed to operate in an ISA bus computer that
is compliant with ISA specifications.

The IBM 16/4 ISA-16 Adapter supports the IBM LAN Network Manager Version V1.1
and can be monitored as a critical resource in a LAN Network Manager managed
domain.

Limitations:

   o  A maximum of two IBM 16/4 ISA-16 Adapter products may be installed
      in a machine.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 109. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK 16/4 ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 74F9410

Feature Code 0149

POS ID: E001

Bus Master  No

Provides attachment of PS/2 computers with the Micro Channel bus to the IBM
Token-Ring Network.  It transmits and receives data at a rate either of 4
million or 16 million bits/second, and it has 64K bytes of RAM.  The Remote
Program Load feature has been upgraded to provide support as a standard feature
for this adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 110. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 33F9280

Feature Code 4790

POS ID: E000

Bus Master  No

Provides for connection to the IBM Token-Ring Network.  It contains a
microprocessor operating under control of adapter resident microcode.  The
adapter transmits and receives at a speed of 4 million bits/second using
protocols conforming to IEEE 802.5 and ECMA 89 standards.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 111. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK PS/2 MODEL P70 386 ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 39F9598

Feature Code 1598

Bus Master  No

Permits attachment of the IBM PS/2 Model P70 386 computer to the IBM Token-Ring
Network.  This adapter is half-length and designed to fit in the short slot.
It transmits and receives at four million bits/second using protocols
conforming to IEEE 802.5 and ECMA 89 standards.  It provides 16K bytes of RAM
and all of the function of the IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter/A.

A special L-angle connector/cable is provided to facilitate attachment to the
IBM PS/2 Model P70 386 computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 112. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK 16/4 BUSMASTER SERVER ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 74F4140

Feature Code 4041

POS ID: 8FC8

Bus Master  Yes

Used to attach a PS/2 computer with the Micro Channel bus, configured as a
server, to an IBM Token-Ring Network operating at either 16 million or 4
million bits per second.

Provides high throughput capability while requiring less host- processor
involvement than previous IBM Token-Ring adapters.

This reduction in host-processor involvement is enabled through the bus master
capability of the adapter which allows adapter-to-system-memory transfer of
data independent of the host-processor.  The server's processor is available
for other tasks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 113. TOKEN-RING NETWORK 16/4 TRACE AND PERFORMANCE ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 74F5130

Feature Code 5130

POS ID: E001

Bus Master  No

This multi-function feature card for the PS/2 computers with the Micro Channel
bus works with the Token-Ring Network 16/4 Trace and Performance Program to
provide a real time view of the traffic on Token-Ring networks operating at 4
million bits per second (bps) or 16 million bps.  This combination of hardware
and software has facilities to analyze trace data, measure media usage and
collect ring station traffic statistics.  Using this data the customer can get
valuable information for use in debugging application software, capacity
planning and network reconfiguration.  When this adapter is not being used for
16/4 TRN Trace and Performance activities, it will function the same as
described for the IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Adapter/A (feature Code 1133, PN
16F1133); thus not requiring the total dedication of the PS/2 computer to
network management functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 114. VIDEO CAPTURE ADAPTER/A FOR THE IBM PS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  34F2785

Feature Code 2785

POS ID: 704E

Bus Master  No

Provides the capability to capture, display and digitize high quality video
images for use in presentations and applications with the PS/2 Model 50, 55SX,
60, 65 SX, 70 and 80 computers.

Supported video signals  for input and output are NTSC, Y/C (S-video), and RGB.
Intended for use with the Audio Visual Connection (AVC) licensed program.
Accepts video input signals through a multi-pin connection on the adapter.  The
on-board processor converts analog signals to digital format that can be
manipulated, compressed and stored by software for later use.  Sophisticated,
detailed image processing techniques employed in the AVC Image Editor
Components enable users to alter the characteristics of the digitized image.

Output connectors, for attachment to a monitor, allow viewing of live or
captured images.  Technical information is provided with the adapter to allow
independent application development directly to the adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 115. IBM SYSTEM 36/38 WORKSTATION EMULATION ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 33F9286

Feature Code 6279

POS ID: FFF8

Bus Master  No

Provides emulation capability for twinaxial attachment of an PS/2 Model 50, 55
SX, 60, 65 SX, 70, P70, 80, 90 or 95 computer as a workstation to the IBM
AS/400, IBM System/36 and IBM System/38.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 116. IBM PERSONAL SYSTEM/2 6157 TAPE DRIVE ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 92X1458

Feature Code 4160

POS ID: DFBF

Bus Master  No

Provides QIC-02 attachment (5MB/min burst data rate) of the IBM 6157 Streaming
Tape Drives, both Model 001 and 002, to PS/2 computers with the Micro Channel
bus (except Model 57 SX).  When used with SYTOS PLUS FILE BACKUP UTILITIES, for
IBM DOS and OS/2 computer software files can be compressed up to 70% (50%
average) effectively doubling the drive's capabilities.  The full Presentation
Manager programs support unattended backup requirements for IBM OS/2 Local Area
Network (LAN) Server Version 1.2 and the IBM Personal Computer LAN Program
Version 1.3, including some OS/2 files that are always open, such as OS2SYS.INI
and OS2.INI configuration files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 117. IBM PERSONAL SYSTEM/2 DUAL ASYNC ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 33F6965

Feature Code 1014

POS ID: EEFF

Bus Master  No

Provides asynchronous communications on two independent RS- 232C ports.  The
feature is programmable and supports communications speeds from 50 to 19,200
bps.  This adapter supports signal transmission across 50 feet of cable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 118. IBM RTIC MULTIPORT/2 AND RELATED FEATURES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 09F1897

Feature Code 6263

POS ID: EFF0

Bus Master  No

A versatile, programmable, intelligent, 80186-based co- processor that provides
up to 8 serial input/output ports through various separately ordered interface
boards (RS-232 and/or RS-422).  Asynchronous protocol hardware support is
provided on all ports with bit synchronous and character synchronous protocol
support available on up to 6 ports. Communication data rates up to 64,000 bps
full duplex can be achieved on one port or all 8 ports may be operated
concurrently at up to 9,600 bps full duplex.  The Co-Processor provides a
realtime multitasking environment for supporting user applications and is
supplied with 512KB of dual-ported memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 119. IBM HIGH-SPEED COMMUNICATION CO-PROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  04G5835

Feature Code 0619

POS ID: EFF0

Bus Master  No

Related features include:

    Cable Option X.21, FC 6321
    Cable Option V.24, FC 6322
    Cable Option V.35, FC 6323

The High-Speed Communication Co-Processor is a full length single slot,
intelligent communciations adapter for the Micro Channel architecture machines.
This adapter is designed to support the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Version
2.2 or later at speeds up to 2.048Mbps.  The adapter has a Intel 80C186
microprocessor and 512KB of dual-ported parity memory and provides the
co-processing power to offload the host system of data reduction, protocol
management, and other tasks oriented to managing a communications port.

This adapter provides a single port whose electrical interface is determined by
the attaching cable:  X.21bis V.24, X.21bis V.35, X.21 non-switched.

Data rates up to 2.048Mbps are supported as full-duplex, synchronous, on a
CCITT V.35 or CCITT X.21 electrical interface.  CCITT V.24 is also supported up
to 19.2Kbps.

Maximum:  One.  Prerequisites:  Micro Channel machine with availability of a
full length slot.  Corequisites:  None.  Compatibility Conflicts:  The
High-Speed Communication Co-Processor is not software compatible with other
Micro Channel Realtime Interface Co-Processor adapters.  The Realtime Control
Microcode (RCM) has been validated for support of the Token-Ring Network Bridge
Program only.  Customer Set-up:  Yes.  Limitations:  Slot availability.
Because of identical card IDs the High-Speed Communication Co-Processor will
cause co-existence problems when running diagnostics with the following
Realtime Interface Co-Processor adapters:

    o   X.25 Interface Co-Processor/2 (#6401, P/N 16F1858)
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport/2 (#6263, P/N 09F1897; or
        #6247, P/N 16F1820)

Field Installable:  Yes.  Cables:  The following cables are currently available
to be ordered separately.

    o   Cable Option X.21 (#6321, P/N 16F1865)
    o   Cable Option V.24 (#6322, P/N 16F1869)
    o   Cable Option V.35 (#6323, P/N 16F1871)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 120. IBM X.25 INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  71G6460

Service Part Number   71G6458

Feature Code 6753

Bus Master  No

The X.25 Interface Co-Processor is the ISA channel version of the popular X.25
Interface Co-Processor/2 Micro Channel(R) adapter.  This ISA adapter allows
applications currently residing in a Micro Channel system to operate on
AT(R)-bus compatible systems, such as ValuePoint(TM).  This new, single slot,
intelligent adapter provides a single serial I/O port whose electrical
interface is selected by cable option. (TM) Trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (R) Registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  ISA adapter based on the X.25 Interface Co-Processor/2
    o  Intel(1) 80186 with 512KB
    o  Selectable electrical interface:
       -  X.21 up to 64Kbps full duplex
       -  V.35 up to 64Kbps full duplex
       -  V.24 up to 19.2Kbps full duplex
    o  Complete with Realtime Control Program microcode
(1) Registered Trademark of Intel Corporation.

Customer applications currently operating on a Micro Channel system with the
X.25 Interface Co-Processor/2 can be transferred to an ISA bus system with this
new adapter.  This capability allows the user to select a system environment
based upon performance and cost without being restricted by system
architectures.

This one slot, full length adapter adheres to the ISA channel architecture and
is compatible with AT-bus systems like ValuePoint.  In addition, this adapter
provides one serial I/O port from which the electrical interface is
cable-selected from X.21, V.35, or V.24 CCITT standards.

This intelligent adapter with its own processor, memory, control program
functions and selectable electrical interfaces, enables many connectivity
options.  The application can manage standard and non-standard protocols and
execute data reduction directly on the adapter freeing the host for other
functions.  Applications can also be interchanged with Micro Channel systems
thus providing flexibility/selection governed by performance and costs.

This adapter adheres to the ISA channel architecture.  The electrical
interfaces adhere to:

    o  X.21 bis V.24 (EIA RS-232/CCITT V.24)
    o  X.21 bis V.35 (CCITT V.35)
    o  X.21 non-switched.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Physical Specifications:

    Length:  200.0mm ( 8.0inches)
    Width:   66.7 (2.6 inches)
    Height: 169.1mm (6.4 inches)
    Weight: 0.23kg (0.5 lbs)

Operating Environment:

    Temperature:  5 to 60 degrees C ( 40 to 140 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent

Machine Requirements:  This adapter requires a full length slot in an ISA
channel system.  These systems include 6381, 6382, 6384, 6387, 8525, 8530,
8535, 8540, 7531, 7532, 7537, and 7552.

Programming Requirements:  This adapter is supported by the following support
programs:

   OS/2(R) based systems...
     o  IBM Operating System/2(R) 2.0 or higher.
     o  Realtime Interface Co-Processor OS/2 Support, Version 1.04
     o  IBM Operating System/2 Communication Manager/2, Ver 1.1 or higher
   DOS based systems...
     o  IBM DOS 3.3 or higher.
     o  Realtime Interface Co-Processor DOS Support, Version 1.03
     o  IBM X.25 Co-Processor Support Program, Version 1.02
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Compatibility:  This adapter presents the same programming interfaces to the
application as the Micro Channel version, X.25 Interface Co-Processor/2.  All
functions that are available on the Co-Processor/2 are also available on the
ISA X.25 Interface Co- Processor.

Limitations:  The number of adapters that can be installed in a system unit is
dependent on the power consumption of the total system configuration and the
availability of full length slots in the system.

User Group Requirements:  This announcement satisfies the need for the function
and capability of the Micro Channel adapter X.25 Interface Co-Processor/2 to
operate on ISA channel systems such as ValuePoint.  In conjunction with OS/2
CM/2, X.25 communication applications can now be enabled on ISA channel
systems.

Cable Orders:  Cables are ordered separately for direct attachment of customer
equipment to this adapter.  Depending on the desired electrical interface, the
following are offered:

    o  Cable Option X.21, (#6321, 16F1865)
    o  Cable Option V.24, (#6322, 16F1869)
    o  Cable Option V.35, (#6323, 16F1871)

These cables are identical to the cable group used by the X.25 Interface
Co-Processor/2 adapter.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 121. IBM X.25 INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 16F1857

Feature Code 6401

POS ID: EFF0

Bus Master  No

A programmable, intelligent 80186-based co-processor that provides a powerful
and flexible interface for applications requiring high speed, full duplex,
synchronous or asynchronous communications through a single serial I/O port
(X.21, V.35, or X.21bis/V.24).  The Co-Processor provides a realtime
multitasking environment for supporting user applications and is supplied with
512KB of dual-ported memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 122. IBM 3117 ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 65X1925

Feature Code 1029

Bus Master  No

Provides a unique interface for attaching the 3117 Scanner to the PS/2 Model
50, 60, 65 SX, 70, P70 and 80 computers via the 3117 PC Cable.  The 3117
Adapter/A has the function of Digital halftone, Partial page scanning and
Darkness control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 123. IBM 3119 PAGESCANNER ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 94X2415

Feature Code 5442

Bus Master  No

Provides a unique interface for attaching the 3119 PageScanner to the PS/2
Model 50, 55 SX, 60, 65 SX, 70, P70 and 80 computers.  The 3119 Adapter/A has
the function of Digital halftone, Partial page scanning, Gray darkness control,
Gray contrast control and Resolution conversion (1 x 1 to 600 x 600 pels per
inch by 1 pel).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 124. IBM PS/2 HIGH SPEED ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number 65X1905

Feature Code 1028

Bus Master  No

Provides an RS-422A industry standard interface for attaching the 3118 Scanner
or 3117 Scanner with 3117 Extension Unit to the PS/2 Model 50, 55 SX, 60, 70,
P70 and 80 computers via a Serial Adapter Cable (PN: 6450217).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 125. PS/2 WIZARD ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  64F7351

Feature Code 3462

Bus Master  Yes

An application accelerator that can significantly increase the performance of
advanced, numeric-intensive applications on the PS/2 Model 70 and 80 computers.
This bus master adapter uses the Intel i860 microprocessor which features a
RISC integer core, an advanced floating point processing unit, a graphics unit,
internal instruction cache and internal data cache in a single 1-million
transistor chip.  The adapter also contains 2MB of random access memory (RAM),
which is expandable to a total of 8MB using the IBM PS/2 Wizard Memory
Expansion Option (PN 34F3061).  The adapter uses a set of application device
drivers, shipped with the product, that enable operation with IBM Operating
System/2 and AIX PS/2 computer software.  Software toolkits are available that
enable developers to port C and FORTRAN applications to execute on the PS/2
Wizard Adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 126. M-AUDIO CAPTURE AND PLAYBACK ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  87F9909

Feature Code 3909

POS ID: 6E6C

Bus Master  No

Provides the capability to capture, digitize and playback high quality audio on
standard PS/2 computers with the Micro Channel bus.  Easy to use.  Works with
standard audio input devices, including microphones, compact disc players, and
cassette players.  Support a variety of audio output  devices for playback,
including headphones, speakers and amplifiers. p.Enhanced  DOS software drivers
provide compatibility with software that requires the IBM Speech Adapter.  This
enhancement allows use with IBM educational courseware such as Writing to
Read*, LinkWay, Basic Skills and Primary Editor. p.The DOS software drivers
also enable use as high quality audio recording workstations for courseware
developers.  High quality CVSD audio can be recorded and played back on a
variety of audio boards including the IBM Speech  Adapter.

The software drivers can be used in a network and stand-alone environment.
Works in conjunction with Audio Visual Connection* software.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 127. 512KB MEMORY EXPANSION OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 0203

Bus Master  No

Adds memory above 1Mb, in 512Kb increments.  Up to five options may be plugged
into the I/O expansion slots of the system unit to provide a total of 3Mb of
primary storage.  Performance characteristics are the same as other 7531 user
memory.  Note:  This option may not be used for address storage from 512Kb to
640Kb.  The memory range from 640Kb to 1Mb is reserved for system functions.
Each memory increment requires one 16-bit expansion slot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 128. 128KB MEMORY EXPANSION OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523435

Feature Code 0209

Bus Master  No

Expands the memory from 512Kb to 640Kb.  Performance characteristics are the
same as other 7531 user memory.  Only one #0209 may be installed.  It requires
a 16-bit expansion slot.  Limitation:  Cannot be installed with the 128Kb
Memory Board for the Combination Adapter II (#6040).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 129. MATH CO-PROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523436

Feature Code 0211

Bus Master  No

A high performance numeric 80287 processor extension with floating point,
extended integer, and BCD data types, compatible with the Intel 8087 Math
Co-Processor.  When installed, the system fully conforms to the proposed IEEE
Floating Point Standard and is an excellent facility for high-performance
numeric processing.  Only one #0211 can be installed in a system unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 130. SERIAL/PARALLEL ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523438

Feature Code 0215

Bus Master  No

Provides a serial port and a parallel port.  The serial portion is fully
programmable and supports asynchronous communications from 50 to 9600 baud.

The back of the adapter has a nine-pin D-shell connector that is classified as
an RS-232-C port.  When the optional 10-foot Serial Adapter Cable (#0217) or
10-inch Serial Adapter Connector (#0242) is connected to the adapter, the
25-pin end of the cable or connector has all the signals of a standard EIA
RS-232-C interface.  The parallel portion of the adapter provides the ability
to attach various devices that accept eight bits of parallel data.  The
parallel port is provided by a 25-pin, D-shell connector.  A maximum of two
Serial/Parallel Adapters may be installed.  Only one Serial/Parallel Adapter
may be installed if a Combination Adapter II (#6020) is installed.  Each
requires one expansion slot of either type.  Note:  This adapter does not
support current loop operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 131. PROTOTYPE ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523440

Feature Code 0220

Bus Master  No

This adapter is 4.8 inches high by 13.12 inches long.  Two card edge tabs, one
2 by 31 positions and one 2 by 18 positions, provide all system control signals
and voltages.  No components are shipped with this card.

The adapter contains a voltage bus (+5 Vdc) and a ground bus (0 Vdc).  Each bus
borders the adapter with the ground bus on the component side and the voltage
bus on the pin side.  A system interface (wiring only) is also provided with a
space for a jumper to specify whether the device has an 8- or a 16-bit data
bus.  This adapter also accommodates a D-shell connector from 9 to 37
positions.  A recommended system interface logic diagram is available along
with a list of recommended components to be used to interface custom logic to
the 7531.  Up to five Prototype Adapters can be installed in a system unit.
Each requires a 16-bit expansion slot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 132. ENHANCED GRAPHICS ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523451

Feature Code 1200

Bus Master  No

Provides support for the new 7534 Industrial Graphics Display and enhanced
support for the 5532 Industrial Color Display.  It requires one expansion slot
of either type.  The IBM Graphics Memory Expansion Card (#1201) expands the IBM
Enhanced Graphics Adapter's 64Kb memory to 128Kb and increases the color range
for 640 x 350 graphics from four colors to 16 colors.  The IBM Graphics Memory
Module Kit (#1203) expands the expansion's card memory to 256Kb providing
additional graphics function.

The Enhanced Graphics Adapter:

    o   Supports the 5532 Industrial Color Display or the 7534 Industrial
        Graphics Display.
    o   Allows full 16-color graphics with the 5532 Industrial Color Display in
        either 320 x 200 medium definition graphics or 640 x 200 high definition
        graphics modes
    o   Provides 640 x 350 support in up to 16 colors for graphics on the 7534
        Industrial Graphics Display.
    o   Provides high quality (8 x 14 character box) text in color on the 7534
        Industrial Graphics Display.
    o   Allows users to select under program control from a palette of 64 colors
        when connected to the 7534 Industrial Graphics Display.
    o   Provides 64Kb graphics memory on the IBM Enhanced Graphics Adapter
        expandable to 128Kb with the Graphics Memory Expansion Card.
    o   Expands graphics memory to 256Kb with the Graphics Memory Module Kit.
        This added memory may be used to support smooth scrolling, panning
        (scanning sequentially through graphics memory), and additional pages of
        graphics data.
    o   Allows compatibility modes to execute programs written for the IBM
        Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter with the 5532 Industrial Color Display.
        Composite video support for attaching analog monitors or TV sets is not
        provided.
    o   Allows RAM-resident character generator to be loaded from user programs
        allowing any set of 256 characters to be incorporated into applications.
    o   Allows character space expansion to 512 with the IBM Graphics Memory
        Expansion Card and to 1024 with the IBM Graphics Memory Module Kit.
    o   Allows character box sizes up to 32 dots high and 8 dots wide.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 133. BINARY SYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  1501204

Feature Code 1204

Bus Master  No

Provides an EIA RS-232-C interface.  It is compatible with the 7532 Industrial
Computer, the 5531 Industrial Computer, the IBM Personal Computer, the IBM
Personal Computer XT, the IBM Portable Personal Computer, and the IBM Personal
Computer AT.  A maximum of two BSC Adapters may be installed.  Only one BSC
Adapter may be installed if an SDLC Adapter (#1205) is installed. Each adapter
requires one expansion slot of either type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 134. SDLC COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523412

Feature Code 1205

Bus Master  No

Provides an EIA RS-232-C interface.  It is compatible with the 7532 Industrial
Computer, the 5531 Industrial Computer, the IBM Personal Computer, the IBM
Personal Computer XT, the IBM Portable Personal Computer, and the IBM Personal
Computer AT.  Only one SDLC Adapter may be installed.  It requires one
expansion slot of either type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 135. PC NETWORK ADAPTER II ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF FEBRUARY 17, 1993.)

Part Number  16F2482

Feature Code 1220

Bus Master  No

The IBM PC Network Adapter II supports original IBM PC Network protocol
(contained on the IBM PC Network Adapter) via IBM PC Network Protocol Driver
(6280-061), supports connection to IBM Token-Ring Networks or other IBM PC
Network based networks via the IBM Token-Ring Network/PC Network Interconnect
Program (6467-036), and supports 802.2/LLC protocols via IBM Local Area Network
Support Program (83X7-873).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 136. PC NETWORK BASEBAND ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  16F2484

Feature Code 1221

Bus Master  No

The IBM PC Network Baseband Adapter (#1221) supports IEEE 802.2 LLC protocols
via IBM Local Area Network Support Program (83X7873).  It supports daisy chain
as well as star topologies via the IBM 5173 PC Network Baseband Extender.  Up
to eight work stations can be linked together in a daisy chain topology with up
to 200 ft of 4-wire twisted pair IBM Cabling System Type 3 specification
telephone wire.  Up to ten daisy chains can be linked together with a single
IBM PC Network Baseband Extender.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 137. DATA ACQUISITION AND CONTROL ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523415

Feature Code 1502

Bus Master  No

An analog and digital I/O card that can be plugged directly into the system
unit.  This option can be used in a scientific/industrial laboratory setting to
control processes, monitor transducers (flow, pressure, temperature, etc.), and
automate electronic testing.  It requires one expansion slot of either type.

The IBM Data Acquisition and Control Adapter Distribution Panel (#1504) is an
optional feature that provides easy access to the I/O signals, voltages, and
grounds of the IBM Data Acquisition and Control Adapter.  The distribution
panel is connected to the adapter by a shielded cable.  The distribution panel
is a printed circuit board with four barrier-type screw terminal strips for a
total of 88 terminations.  A shielded flat cable with a 60-pin connector is
permanently attached to the board.  The cable and terminal board assembly is
housed in a metal enclosure that is slotted to allow user cabling to enter or
exit.  The cable is approximately 34 inches long.

Up to four IBM Data Acquisition and Control Adapters can be attached to the
7531.

The Adapter has:

    o   Four analog input channels (12-bit resolution)
    o   Two analog output channels (12-bit resolution)
    o   16-channel digital input port
    o   16-channel digital output port
    o   Programmable sampling rates provided by a 32-bit timer
    o   Event counter, programmable rate generator, or programmable time delay
        provided by a 16-bit user timer/counter

The Distribution Panel has:

    o   Screw terminals provided to attach devices to the distribution panel
    o   Multiple grounds for twisted pair terminations
    o   Shielded construction to minimize noise interference.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 138. GENERAL PURPOSE INTERFACE BUS ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523416

Feature Code 1503

Bus Master  No

Provides an interface between the 7531 and the IEEE-488 General Purpose
Interface Bus (GPIB), allowing control of multiple devices or instruments (such
as plotters, multimeters, and disk drives).  Up to four GPIB Adapters can be
installed in a system unit.  Each adapter requires one expansion slot of either
type.  The GPIB Adapter can perform as a controller, a talker, or a listener
with compatible devices.  The GPIB Adapter also provides capabilities for data
transfer between work stations, and the connection of several computers for
sharing of instruments or peripheral I/O devices.

The GPIB Adapter is designed to the ANSI/IEEE-488 standard, including the
488A-1980 supplement, and:

    o   Supports up to 14 devices or instruments
    o   Provides a direct memory access data rate of up to 300Kb/second
    o   Provides a programmed I/O data rate of up to 20Kb/second
    o   Allows user selection of direct memory access channels
    o   Allows user to select interrupt level
    o   FCC classification of this feature is "A".


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 139. COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F4407

Feature Code 2067

Bus Master  No

This cable allows the user to connect the Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter (#1204) or the SDLC Communications Adapter (#1205) to a modem via a
plug at the rear of the 7531.  The cable is double shielded and approximately
3m (10 ft) long.  A wrap connector is provided  to test the cable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 140. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK PC ADAPTER CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9291

Feature Code 2067

Bus Master  No

The 2.4m (8 ft) cable is used to attach the IBM Industrial Computer with a
network adapter to the IBM Cabling System.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 141. MEMORY EXPANSION ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  16F1986

Feature Code 3619

Bus Master  No

The Multifunction Memory Adapter provides up to 12Mb of memory, split memory
processing, a parallel printer port, and an asynchronous serial communications
port.  This adapter provides the identical features offered in the Memory
Expansion Adapter (#3400).  Memory module kits can be added in increments of
0.5Mb or 2Mb up to a maximum of 3Mb or 12Mb per adapter.  The adapter is sold
without memory, which must be purchased separately.

The Multifunction Memory Adapter can use either the 0.5Mb Memory Module Kit
(#3397, P/N 30F5348) or the 2Mb Memory Module Kit (#7833, P/N 30F5360).  The
0.5Mb and 2Mb modules cannot be installed together on the same adapter card.

Each adapter requires one 16-bit slot.  Adapters are customer installable.  A
maximum of two serial and two parallel ports are supported by the 7531
Industrial Computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 142. COLOR/GRAPHICS MONITOR ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523422

Feature Code 4910

Bus Master  No

To attach a color display to the 7531, either a "direct-drive RGB" signal or a
"composite" video signal can be selected.  The display can be a direct-drive
5532 Industrial Color Display, 7534 Industrial Graphics Display, a video
monitor, or, through a customer-supplied RF modulator, a standard TV set.
Either a color or black and white monitor or TV can be attached.

Sixteen foreground and eight background colors are supported in text
(character) mode.  This attachment also provides support for 4-color medium
definition graphics (320 dots horizontal, 200 dots vertical) and black and
white high-definition graphics (640 dots horizontal, 200 dots vertical).  256
characters are available in "text" mode, 128 in medium or high definition
graphics.  The adapter provides 16Kb of built-in memory to store multiple
display screen contents and supports a customer-supplied light-pen.  It
requires one expansion slot of either type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 143. IBM PC NETWORK ADAPTER II-FREQUENCY 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF FEBRUARY 17, 1993.)

Part Number  16F1985

Feature Code 5646

Bus Master  No

Feature cards that provide new RF transmit and receive channels for connecting
IBM Industrial Computers to the broadband IBM PC Network.  The new channels
used by #5645 (channels 2' and O) and #5646 (channels 3' and P) provide
capabilities that are considered particularly important in industrial,
educational, research, financial, government, and other large broadband network
environments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 144. 20MB FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523432

Feature Code 6019

Bus Master  No

Two optional fixed disk drives may be installed on the 7531, providing a total
of 40Mb of fixed disk storage capacity.  Space and power are provided in the
system unit for the drive(s).  All fixed disk or diskette drives use the
standard combination fixed disk and diskette drive adapter in the system unit.
A dedicated landing zone for the read/write heads is available to protect the
file and its contents during shipping, movement, or storage.  The number of
fixed disk drives and diskette drives must not exceed three.  No more than two
fixed disk drives can be installed in a system unit.

Characteristics:

    o   20Mb of storage
    o   512 bytes per sector
    o   17 sectors per track
    o   75 ms average access time
    o   3600 RPM
    o   5M bit per second transfer rate
    o   Dimensions:
        Height -  82.55mm (3.25 in.)
        Width  -  146.05mm (5.75 in.)
        Depth  -  203.20mm (8.00 in.)
        Weight -  2.3 Kg (5.1 lbs.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 145. COMBINATION ADAPTER II ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523466

Feature Code 6020

Bus Master  No

Provides the 7531 with four main functions:  an asynchronous communications
interface, a parallel printer interface, a programmable timer, and a thermal
sensor interface.  The adapter requires one 16-bit expansion slot.

The asynchronous communications interface is fully programmable and supports
asynchronous communications only.  All of the specifications of this interface
match those of the Serial/Parallel Adapter (#0215).  In addition, the serial
interface can be configured to support an RS-422 interface.  The cable
interface to the asynchronous communications port is via a 9-pin connector at
the rear of the system unit.  The Combination Adapter Cable (#6001) is required
to convert the 9-pin Asynchronous Communications port of che Combination
Adapter II to a 25-pin "D" shell, male type connector for attachment to an
external modem or other asynchronous devices.  The cable is double shielded and
approximately 3m (10 ft) long.  A wrap connector is provided to test the cable.

The parallel printer interface is specifically designed to attach printers with
a parallel interface.  All of the specifications of this interface match those
of the Serial/Parallel Adapter (#0215).

The programmable timer has a counter resolution of 4/1,000 of a second.

The thermal sensor interface connects to a thermal sensor inside the system
unit and allows the system processor to sense when the system unit is over its
specified temperature range.  A bit in the sensor port is set by the thermal
sensor to indicate to the system software (DOS) that the system unit is over
its specified temperature range.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 146. HIGH CAPACITY DISKETTE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523433

Feature Code 6038

Bus Master  No

This is a half-high, 5-1/4 inch, dual-sided drive with 1.2Mb storage capacity.
Space and power have been provided in the system unit for up to two drives.
The drive is fully self-contained and consists of a spindle drive system, a
read positioning system and a read/write/erase system. One of these drives is
standard in the 7531.  An optional second drive  may be installed in the system
unit adjacent to the first if the space is not occupied by another diskette
drive.  Both drives use the standard combination fixed disk and diskette drive
adapter in the system unit.  The number of fixed disk drives and diskette
drives must not exceed three.

The drive uses the new 96-TPI, high density media.  In addition, it will read
or write 48-TPI, single- or dual-sided media written for the 5531 Industrial
Computer and IBM Personal Computers, giving a high level of compatibility with
existing applications.  However, once the 48-TPI media has been written in this
drive, it may only be read by a high capacity diskette drive.

Characteristics:

    o   1.2Mb storage
    o   512 bytes per sector
    o   15 sectors per track
    o   96 tracks per inch
    o   Two sides
    o   80 tracks per side
    o   360 RPM
    o   Supports 300 and 500K bits/second data transfer rate
    o   94 ms average access time in 96-TPI mode
    o   Dimensions:
        Height -  42.9mm (1.7 in.)
        Width  -  149.0mm (5.9 in.)
        Depth  -  202.1mm (8.0 in.)
        Weight -  1.6 Kg (3.5 lbs.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 147. DUAL-SIDED DISKETTE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523434

Feature Code 6039

Bus Master  No

This diskette drive permits the exchange of 320/360Kb diskette media between
the 7531, the 5531 Industrial Computer, and IBM Personal Computers.  It is a
half-high, 5.25-inch, dual-sided drive with a 320/360Kb storage capacity. Space
and power for one drive have been provided in the system unit.  The drive is
fully self-contained and consists of a spindle drive system, a read positioning
system, and a read/write/erase system.

This drive is installed in the system unit adjacent to the standard high
capacity diskette drive if the space is not occupied by another diskette drive.
This drive uses the standard combination fixed disk and diskette drive adapter
in the system unit.  The number of fixed disk drives and diskette drives must
not exceed three.

Characteristics:

    o   320/360Kb of storage
    o   512 bytes per sector
    o   8/9 sectors per track
    o   Two sides
    o   91 ms average access time
    o   40 tracks per surface
    o   48 tracks per inch
    o   300 RPM
    o   Transfer rate of 250K bits/second
    o   Dimensions:
        Height -  42.9mm (1.7 in.)
        Width  -  149.0mm (5.9 in.)
        Depth  -  202.1mm (8.0 in.)
        Weight -  1.6 Kg (3.5 lbs.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 148. 128KB MEMORY BOARD FOR THE COMBINATION ADAPTER II ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6523467

Feature Code 6040

Bus Master  No

Plugs into the Combination Adapter II (#6020) and expands the memory from 512Kb
to 640Kb without requiring an expansion slot.  Performance characteristics are
the same as other 7531 user memory.  Only one 128Kb Memory Board may be
installed on a Combination Adapter II.  Limitation: Cannot be installed with
128Kb Memory Expansion (#0209).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 149. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  85X1970

Feature Code 6050

Bus Master  No

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor is an interface subsystem for IBM
Industrial Computers and IBM Personal Computers.  A Realtime Interface
Co-Processor (ARTIC) in conjunction with its software support provides support
for attachment of Programmable Controllers in industrial applications.

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor will be available with either 128Kb or
512Kb of standard memory and either 5.25- or 3.5-inch program media.

    o   Standard Features
        -   Advanced high-performance Intel(1) 80186 microprocessor
        -   128Kb or 512Kb of dual-ported memory with parity for error detection
            (128Kb expandable to 256Kb, 512Kb expandable to 1024Kb)
        -   8-bit mode and 16-bit mode data bus support
        -   Two-channel direct memory access for use between the co-processor
            storage and its interface ports
        -   Eight selectable interrupt levels
        -   Zilog(2) 8030 Serial Communications Controller
        -   Two serial I/O ports
        -   Data rates up to 64K bps full duplex with external clocking on one
            port, while the second port is operated at 19.2K bps full duplex.
        -   Transmit and Receive status-indicators
        -   Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex operation
        -   Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol
            hardware support
        -   CRC generation and checking
        -   Pluggable Interface Boards
        -   Custom Interface Board support
        -   Byte-wide I/O Interface available at Interface Board Connector
        -   All external signals available at Interface Board connector
        -   Five programmable hardware timers
        -   Watchdog timer
        -   Watchdog timer status-indicator
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Guide to Operations
            --  Hardware setup
            --  Software setup
            --  Problem determination procedures
            --  Customer diagnostics diskette.
        -   Realtime Control Program microcode
            --  Multi-tasking, preemptive priority
            --  Co-Processor memory management
            --  Timer support
            --  Watchdog timer support
            --  Queue management
            --  Inter-task communications
            --  Initial Program Load.
        -   ROM-based automatic power-on self-test of Co-processor components
        -   ROM-based I/O utility routines
        -   ROM-based bootstrap loader
    o   Optional Features
        -   EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 Interface Board (#6051)
        -   EIA RS-422-A Interface Board (#6064)
        -   CCITT V.35 Interface Board (#6053)
        -   20ma Current Loop Interface Board (#6066)
        -   Realtime Interface Co-Processor 128Kb Memory Expansion (#6055) (can
            only be used with features #6050 and #6165)
        -   Realtime Interface Co-Processor 512Kb Memory Expansion (#6161) (can
            only be used with features #6160 and #6166)
        -   RS-232-C Direct Attach Interface Cable (#6056)
        -   RS-232-C Modem Attach Interface Cable (#6057)
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference (#6058)
            --  Hardware technical information
            --  Realtime Control Program microcode description
            --  Interface Board design information.
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Hardware Maintenance and Service
            (#6059)
            --  Problem determination procedures
            --  Advanced Diagnostics Diskette
            --  Wrap connector
        -   CCITT V.35 Interface Cable (#6061)

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor has been designed for use in industrial
applications of the IBM Industrial Computers and IBM Personal Computers.  The
Co-Processor is compatible with the 5531, 7531, 7532, 5160, and 5170 computer
systems.  The 5531 Industrial Computer and 5160 Personal Computer are based on
the Intel(1) 8088 microprocessor.  The 7531 and 7532 Industrial Computers and
5170 Personal Computer are based on the Intel(1) 80286 microprocessor.

The Co-Processor can be connected to a wide variety of industrial devices and
systems.  It provides the capability of off-loading applications and device
drivers from the Industrial or Personal Computer processor, thus providing a
dedicated high-performance subsystem for these applications.

The Co-Processor is based on a high-performance, 16-bit Intel(1) 80186
microprocessor.  Provided as a standard feature are two independent serial
ports that operate at speeds up to 64K bps using direct memory access.  One
port can operate at 64K bps full duplex, while the second is operated at a
maximum of 19.2K bps full duplex.  These ports can be programmed for
asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocols, using
either direct memory access or interrupt mode.  In order to accommodate the
different possible physical interfaces encountered in industrial environments,
the Co-Processor is designed to accept two optional interface boards or user
developed custom Interface boards.  These pluggable interface boards allow the
user to selectively configure the ports of the Co-Processor.

The optional interface boards available for the Interface Co-Processor are:

    o   EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 Interface Board
    o   EIA RS-422-A Interface Board
    o   20ma Current Loop Interface Board
    o   CCITT V.35 Interface Board.

A maximum of two Interface Boards may be installed on the Co-Processor.
Interface Boards may be installed in any combination.  For those users with
unique Interface Board requirements, detailed technical information on
Interface Board design can be found in the optional "Realtime Interface
Co-Processor Technical Reference" (#6058).

The Co-Processor's memory is dual-ported.  Communications between the
Co-Processor and the system unit are done via I/O ports and shared memory.
Communication is synchronized by interrupts between the Co-Processor and system
unit.  Interrupt levels are selectable.  The Co-Processor can operate in 8-bit
mode on the 5531 and 5160 and in 8-bit or 16-bit mode on the 7531, 7532 and
5170.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor will be available in two memory capacities,
128Kb and 512Kb, and will be shipped with either 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch program
media.

    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 128Kb of memory and 5.25-inch
        program media (#6050)
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 128Kb of memory and 3.5-inch
        program media (#6165)
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 512Kb of memory and 5.25-inch
        program media (#6160)
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 512Kb of memory and 3.5-inch
        program media (#6166)

All Realtime Interface Co-Processor features are functionally equivalent.
Features #6050 and #6165 are shipped with 128Kb of memory, upgradeable to
256Kb, and features #6160 and #6166 are shipped with 512Kb of memory,
upgradeable to 1024Kb.  To expand the memory capacity of the Realtime Interface
Co-Processor, the following expansion options are available:

    o   128Kb Memory Expansion Option (#6055) (Can only be used with features
        #6050 and #6165)
    o   512Kb Memory Expansion Option (#6161) (can only be used with features
        #6160 and #6166)

Detailed technical information on the Realtime Interface Co-Processor is
provided in the optional Realtime Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference
(#6058).

Realtime Control Program:  The Realtime Control Program is microcode for the
Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  It is included with the Co-processor feature
and is shipped on a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch dual-sided double density diskette.

The Realtime Control Program microcode provides a realtime, multi-tasking
operational environment for supporting user applications running on the
Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  The Realtime Control Program microcode is
loaded from the system unit memory to the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
memory.  Once loaded, the Realtime Control Program microcode initializes itself
and the Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  It then signals the system unit
processor that it is loaded and ready.

The Realtime Control Program microcode supports up to 253 concurrent tasks
running on the Co-Processor.  Tasks are loaded from the system unit memory.

A task running under the Realtime Control Program microcode may communicate
with another task running under the control program or with an application
program running in the system unit.

The Realtime Control Program microcode provides support for interfacing IBM
Industrial Computer or Personal Computer applications to the Realtime Control
Program microcode and uses the IBM PC Macro Assembler as the
program-preparation facility.

The Realtime Control Program microcode supports dynamic memory management.
Storage is allocated in multiples of 16-byte paragraphs upon request of a task.
Timer support is also provided.  There may be up to 256 software timers with
increments ranging from 5 ms to 327 seconds.

The dispatch queue functions as a priority queue with round-robin dispatching
on any priority level.  The possible priority levels range from 1 to 255; 1,
being the highest priority.

Intertask communications is accomplished by the wait/post mechanism.  Data may
be passed between tasks by user queues.

The watchdog timer support is used to signal an error condition should the
Co-Processor fail.  It will interrupt both the system unit processor and the
Realtime Interface Co-Processor upon failure.  It will also switch on an error
indicator on the Co-Processor card.

Detailed information on the operational characteristics of the Realtime Control
Program microcode is provided in the optional Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Technical Reference (#6058).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 150. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  85X2786

Feature Code 6160

Bus Master  No

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor is an interface subsystem for IBM
Industrial Computers and IBM Personal Computers.  A Realtime Interface
Co-Processor (ARTIC) in conjunction with its software support provides support
for attachment of Programmable Controllers in industrial applications.

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor will be available with either 128Kb or
512Kb of standard memory and either 5.25- or 3.5-inch program media.

    o   Standard Features
        -   Advanced high-performance Intel(1) 80186 microprocessor
        -   128Kb or 512Kb of dual-ported memory with parity for error detection
            (128Kb expandable to 256Kb, 512Kb expandable to 1024Kb)
        -   8-bit mode and 16-bit mode data bus support
        -   Two-channel direct memory access for use between the co-processor
            storage and its interface ports
        -   Eight selectable interrupt levels
        -   Zilog(2) 8030 Serial Communications Controller
        -   Two serial I/O ports
        -   Data rates up to 64K bps full duplex with external clocking on one
            port, while the second port is operated at 19.2K bps full duplex.
        -   Transmit and Receive status-indicators
        -   Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex operation
        -   Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol
            hardware support
        -   CRC generation and checking
        -   Pluggable Interface Boards
        -   Custom Interface Board support
        -   Byte-wide I/O Interface available at Interface Board Connector
        -   All external signals available at Interface Board connector
        -   Five programmable hardware timers
        -   Watchdog timer
        -   Watchdog timer status-indicator
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Guide to Operations
            --  Hardware setup
            --  Software setup
            --  Problem determination procedures
            --  Customer diagnostics diskette.
        -   Realtime Control Program microcode
            --  Multi-tasking, preemptive priority
            --  Co-Processor memory management
            --  Timer support
            --  Watchdog timer support
            --  Queue management
            --  Inter-task communications
            --  Initial Program Load.
        -   ROM-based automatic power-on self-test of Co-processor components
        -   ROM-based I/O utility routines
        -   ROM-based bootstrap loader
    o   Optional Features
        -   EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 Interface Board (#6051)
        -   EIA RS-422-A Interface Board (#6064)
        -   CCITT V.35 Interface Board (#6053)
        -   20ma Current Loop Interface Board (#6066)
        -   Realtime Interface Co-Processor 128Kb Memory Expansion (#6055) (can
            only be used with features #6050 and #6165)
        -   Realtime Interface Co-Processor 512Kb Memory Expansion (#6161) (can
            only be used with features #6160 and #6166)
        -   RS-232-C Direct Attach Interface Cable (#6056)
        -   RS-232-C Modem Attach Interface Cable (#6057)
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference (#6058)
            --  Hardware technical information
            --  Realtime Control Program microcode description
            --  Interface Board design information.
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Hardware Maintenance and Service
            (#6059)
            --  Problem determination procedures
            --  Advanced Diagnostics Diskette
            --  Wrap connector
        -   CCITT V.35 Interface Cable (#6061)

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor has been designed for use in industrial
applications of the IBM Industrial Computers and IBM Personal Computers.  The
Co-Processor is compatible with the 5531, 7531, 7532, 5160, and 5170 computer
systems.  The 5531 Industrial Computer and 5160 Personal Computer are based on
the Intel(1) 8088 microprocessor.  The 7531 and 7532 Industrial Computers and
5170 Personal Computer are based on the Intel(1) 80286 microprocessor.

The Co-Processor can be connected to a wide variety of industrial devices and
systems.  It provides the capability of off-loading applications and device
drivers from the Industrial or Personal Computer processor, thus providing a
dedicated high-performance subsystem for these applications.

The Co-Processor is based on a high-performance, 16-bit Intel(1) 80186
microprocessor.  Provided as a standard feature are two independent serial
ports that operate at speeds up to 64K bps using direct memory access.  One
port can operate at 64K bps full duplex, while the second is operated at a
maximum of 19.2K bps full duplex.  These ports can be programmed for
asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocols, using
either direct memory access or interrupt mode.  In order to accommodate the
different possible physical interfaces encountered in industrial environments,
the Co-Processor is designed to accept two optional interface boards or user
developed custom Interface boards.  These pluggable interface boards allow the
user to selectively configure the ports of the Co-Processor.

The optional interface boards available for the Interface Co-Processor are:

    o   EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 Interface Board
    o   EIA RS-422-A Interface Board
    o   20ma Current Loop Interface Board
    o   CCITT V.35 Interface Board.

A maximum of two Interface Boards may be installed on the Co-Processor.
Interface Boards may be installed in any combination.  For those users with
unique Interface Board requirements, detailed technical information on
Interface Board design can be found in the optional "Realtime Interface
Co-Processor Technical Reference" (#6058).

The Co-Processor's memory is dual-ported.  Communications between the
Co-Processor and the system unit are done via I/O ports and shared memory.
Communication is synchronized by interrupts between the Co-Processor and system
unit.  Interrupt levels are selectable.  The Co-Processor can operate in 8-bit
mode on the 5531 and 5160 and in 8-bit or 16-bit mode on the 7531, 7532 and
5170.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor will be available in two memory capacities,
128Kb and 512Kb, and will be shipped with either 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch program
media.

    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 128Kb of memory and 5.25-inch
        program media (#6050)
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 128Kb of memory and 3.5-inch
        program media (#6165)
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 512Kb of memory and 5.25-inch
        program media (#6160)
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 512Kb of memory and 3.5-inch
        program media (#6166)

All Realtime Interface Co-Processor features are functionally equivalent.
Features #6050 and #6165 are shipped with 128Kb of memory, upgradeable to
256Kb, and features #6160 and #6166 are shipped with 512Kb of memory,
upgradeable to 1024Kb.  To expand the memory capacity of the Realtime Interface
Co-Processor, the following expansion options are available:

    o   128Kb Memory Expansion Option (#6055) (Can only be used with features
        #6050 and #6165)
    o   512Kb Memory Expansion Option (#6161) (can only be used with features
        #6160 and #6166)

Detailed technical information on the Realtime Interface Co-Processor is
provided in the optional Realtime Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference
(#6058).

Realtime Control Program:  The Realtime Control Program is microcode for the
Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  It is included with the Co-processor feature
and is shipped on a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch dual-sided double density diskette.

The Realtime Control Program microcode provides a realtime, multi-tasking
operational environment for supporting user applications running on the
Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  The Realtime Control Program microcode is
loaded from the system unit memory to the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
memory.  Once loaded, the Realtime Control Program microcode initializes itself
and the Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  It then signals the system unit
processor that it is loaded and ready.

The Realtime Control Program microcode supports up to 253 concurrent tasks
running on the Co-Processor.  Tasks are loaded from the system unit memory.

A task running under the Realtime Control Program microcode may communicate
with another task running under the control program or with an application
program running in the system unit.

The Realtime Control Program microcode provides support for interfacing IBM
Industrial Computer or Personal Computer applications to the Realtime Control
Program microcode and uses the IBM PC Macro Assembler as the
program-preparation facility.

The Realtime Control Program microcode supports dynamic memory management.
Storage is allocated in multiples of 16-byte paragraphs upon request of a task.
Timer support is also provided.  There may be up to 256 software timers with
increments ranging from 5 ms to 327 seconds.

The dispatch queue functions as a priority queue with round-robin dispatching
on any priority level.  The possible priority levels range from 1 to 255; 1,
being the highest priority.

Intertask communications is accomplished by the wait/post mechanism.  Data may
be passed between tasks by user queues.

The watchdog timer support is used to signal an error condition should the
Co-Processor fail.  It will interrupt both the system unit processor and the
Realtime Interface Co-Processor upon failure.  It will also switch on an error
indicator on the Co-Processor card.

Detailed information on the operational characteristics of the Realtime Control
Program microcode is provided in the optional Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Technical Reference (#6058).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 151. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WITHDRAWN FROM MARKETING ON APRIL 25, 1994

Part Number  85X2710

Feature Code 6165

Bus Master  No

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor is an interface subsystem for IBM
Industrial Computers and IBM Personal Computers.  A Realtime Interface
Co-Processor (ARTIC) in conjunction with its software support provides support
for attachment of Programmable Controllers in industrial applications.

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor will be available with either 128Kb or
512Kb of standard memory and either 5.25- or 3.5-inch program media.

    o   Standard Features
        -   Advanced high-performance Intel(1) 80186 microprocessor
        -   128Kb or 512Kb of dual-ported memory with parity for error detection
            (128Kb expandable to 256Kb, 512Kb expandable to 1024Kb)
        -   8-bit mode and 16-bit mode data bus support
        -   Two-channel direct memory access for use between the co-processor
            storage and its interface ports
        -   Eight selectable interrupt levels
        -   Zilog(2) 8030 Serial Communications Controller
        -   Two serial I/O ports
        -   Data rates up to 64K bps full duplex with external clocking on one
            port, while the second port is operated at 19.2K bps full duplex.
        -   Transmit and Receive status-indicators
        -   Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex operation
        -   Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol
            hardware support
        -   CRC generation and checking
        -   Pluggable Interface Boards
        -   Custom Interface Board support
        -   Byte-wide I/O Interface available at Interface Board Connector
        -   All external signals available at Interface Board connector
        -   Five programmable hardware timers
        -   Watchdog timer
        -   Watchdog timer status-indicator
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Guide to Operations
            --  Hardware setup
            --  Software setup
            --  Problem determination procedures
            --  Customer diagnostics diskette.
        -   Realtime Control Program microcode
            --  Multi-tasking, preemptive priority
            --  Co-Processor memory management
            --  Timer support
            --  Watchdog timer support
            --  Queue management
            --  Inter-task communications
            --  Initial Program Load.
        -   ROM-based automatic power-on self-test of Co-processor components
        -   ROM-based I/O utility routines
        -   ROM-based bootstrap loader
    o   Optional Features
        -   EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 Interface Board (#6051)
        -   EIA RS-422-A Interface Board (#6064)
        -   CCITT V.35 Interface Board (#6053)
        -   20ma Current Loop Interface Board (#6066)
        -   Realtime Interface Co-Processor 128Kb Memory Expansion (#6055) (can
            only be used with features #6050 and #6165)
        -   Realtime Interface Co-Processor 512Kb Memory Expansion (#6161) (can
            only be used with features #6160 and #6166)
        -   RS-232-C Direct Attach Interface Cable (#6056)
        -   RS-232-C Modem Attach Interface Cable (#6057)
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference (#6058)
            --  Hardware technical information
            --  Realtime Control Program microcode description
            --  Interface Board design information.
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Hardware Maintenance and Service
            (#6059)
            --  Problem determination procedures
            --  Advanced Diagnostics Diskette
            --  Wrap connector
        -   CCITT V.35 Interface Cable (#6061)

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor has been designed for use in industrial
applications of the IBM Industrial Computers and IBM Personal Computers.  The
Co-Processor is compatible with the 5531, 7531, 7532, 5160, and 5170 computer
systems.  The 5531 Industrial Computer and 5160 Personal Computer are based on
the Intel(1) 8088 microprocessor.  The 7531 and 7532 Industrial Computers and
5170 Personal Computer are based on the Intel(1) 80286 microprocessor.

The Co-Processor can be connected to a wide variety of industrial devices and
systems.  It provides the capability of off-loading applications and device
drivers from the Industrial or Personal Computer processor, thus providing a
dedicated high-performance subsystem for these applications.

The Co-Processor is based on a high-performance, 16-bit Intel(1) 80186
microprocessor.  Provided as a standard feature are two independent serial
ports that operate at speeds up to 64K bps using direct memory access.  One
port can operate at 64K bps full duplex, while the second is operated at a
maximum of 19.2K bps full duplex.  These ports can be programmed for
asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocols, using
either direct memory access or interrupt mode.  In order to accommodate the
different possible physical interfaces encountered in industrial environments,
the Co-Processor is designed to accept two optional interface boards or user
developed custom Interface boards.  These pluggable interface boards allow the
user to selectively configure the ports of the Co-Processor.

The optional interface boards available for the Interface Co-Processor are:

    o   EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 Interface Board
    o   EIA RS-422-A Interface Board
    o   20ma Current Loop Interface Board
    o   CCITT V.35 Interface Board.

A maximum of two Interface Boards may be installed on the Co-Processor.
Interface Boards may be installed in any combination.  For those users with
unique Interface Board requirements, detailed technical information on
Interface Board design can be found in the optional "Realtime Interface
Co-Processor Technical Reference" (#6058).

The Co-Processor's memory is dual-ported.  Communications between the
Co-Processor and the system unit are done via I/O ports and shared memory.
Communication is synchronized by interrupts between the Co-Processor and system
unit.  Interrupt levels are selectable.  The Co-Processor can operate in 8-bit
mode on the 5531 and 5160 and in 8-bit or 16-bit mode on the 7531, 7532 and
5170.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor will be available in two memory capacities,
128Kb and 512Kb, and will be shipped with either 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch program
media.

    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 128Kb of memory and 5.25-inch
        program media (#6050)
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 128Kb of memory and 3.5-inch
        program media (#6165)
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 512Kb of memory and 5.25-inch
        program media (#6160)
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 512Kb of memory and 3.5-inch
        program media (#6166)

All Realtime Interface Co-Processor features are functionally equivalent.
Features #6050 and #6165 are shipped with 128Kb of memory, upgradeable to
256Kb, and features #6160 and #6166 are shipped with 512Kb of memory,
upgradeable to 1024Kb.  To expand the memory capacity of the Realtime Interface
Co-Processor, the following expansion options are available:

    o   128Kb Memory Expansion Option (#6055) (Can only be used with features
        #6050 and #6165)
        o   512Kb Memory Expansion Option (#6161) (can only be used with features
        #6160 and #6166)

Detailed technical information on the Realtime Interface Co-Processor is
provided in the optional Realtime Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference
(#6058). Realtime Control Program:  The Realtime Control Program is microcode
for the Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  It is included with the Co-processor
feature and is shipped on a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch dual-sided double density
diskette.

The Realtime Control Program microcode provides a realtime, multi-tasking
operational environment for supporting user applications running on the
Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  The Realtime Control Program microcode is
loaded from the system unit memory to the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
memory.  Once loaded, the Realtime Control Program microcode initializes itself
and the Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  It then signals the system unit
processor that it is loaded and ready.

The Realtime Control Program microcode supports up to 253 concurrent tasks
running on the Co-Processor.  Tasks are loaded from the system unit memory.

A task running under the Realtime Control Program microcode may communicate
with another task running under the control program or with an application
program running in the system unit.

The Realtime Control Program microcode provides support for interfacing IBM
Industrial Computer or Personal Computer applications to the Realtime Control
Program microcode and uses the IBM PC Macro Assembler as the
program-preparation facility.

The Realtime Control Program microcode supports dynamic memory management.
Storage is allocated in multiples of 16-byte paragraphs upon request of a task.
Timer support is also provided.  There may be up to 256 software timers with
increments ranging from 5 ms to 327 seconds.

The dispatch queue functions as a priority queue with round-robin dispatching
on any priority level.  The possible priority levels range from 1 to 255; 1,
being the highest priority. Intertask communications is accomplished by the
wait/post mechanism.  Data may be passed between tasks by user queues.

The watchdog timer support is used to signal an error condition should the
Co-Processor fail.  It will interrupt both the system unit processor and the
Realtime Interface Co-Processor upon failure.  It will also switch on an error
indicator on the Co-Processor card.

Detailed information on the operational characteristics of the Realtime Control
Program microcode is provided in the optional Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Technical Reference (#6058).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 152. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  85X2706

Feature Code 6166

Bus Master  No

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor is an interface subsystem for IBM
Industrial Computers and IBM Personal Computers.  A Realtime Interface
Co-Processor (ARTIC) in conjunction with its software support provides support
for attachment of Programmable Controllers in industrial applications.

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor will be available with either 128Kb or
512Kb of standard memory and either 5.25- or 3.5-inch program media.

    o   Standard Features
        -   Advanced high-performance Intel(1) 80186 microprocessor
        -   128Kb or 512Kb of dual-ported memory with parity for error detection
            (128Kb expandable to 256Kb, 512Kb expandable to 1024Kb)
        -   8-bit mode and 16-bit mode data bus support
        -   Two-channel direct memory access for use between the co-processor
            storage and its interface ports
        -   Eight selectable interrupt levels
        -   Zilog(2) 8030 Serial Communications Controller
        -   Two serial I/O ports
        -   Data rates up to 64K bps full duplex with external clocking on one
            port, while the second port is operated at 19.2K bps full duplex.
        -   Transmit and Receive status-indicators
        -   Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex operation
        -   Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol
            hardware support
        -   CRC generation and checking
        -   Pluggable Interface Boards
        -   Custom Interface Board support
        -   Byte-wide I/O Interface available at Interface Board Connector
        -   All external signals available at Interface Board connector
        -   Five programmable hardware timers
        -   Watchdog timer
        -   Watchdog timer status-indicator
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Guide to Operations
            --  Hardware setup
            --  Software setup
            --  Problem determination procedures
            --  Customer diagnostics diskette.
        -   Realtime Control Program microcode
            --  Multi-tasking, preemptive priority
            --  Co-Processor memory management
            --  Timer support
            --  Watchdog timer support
            --  Queue management
            --  Inter-task communications
            --  Initial Program Load.
        -   ROM-based automatic power-on self-test of Co-processor components
        -   ROM-based I/O utility routines
        -   ROM-based bootstrap loader
    o   Optional Features
        -   EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 Interface Board (#6051)
        -   EIA RS-422-A Interface Board (#6064)
        -   CCITT V.35 Interface Board (#6053)
        -   20ma Current Loop Interface Board (#6066)
        -   Realtime Interface Co-Processor 128Kb Memory Expansion (#6055) (can
            only be used with features #6050 and #6165)
        -   Realtime Interface Co-Processor 512Kb Memory Expansion (#6161) (can
            only be used with features #6160 and #6166)
        -   RS-232-C Direct Attach Interface Cable (#6056)
        -   RS-232-C Modem Attach Interface Cable (#6057)
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference (#6058)
            --  Hardware technical information
            --  Realtime Control Program microcode description
            --  Interface Board design information.
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Hardware Maintenance and Service
            (#6059)
            --  Problem determination procedures
            --  Advanced Diagnostics Diskette
            --  Wrap connector
        -   CCITT V.35 Interface Cable (#6061)

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor has been designed for use in industrial
applications of the IBM Industrial Computers and IBM Personal Computers.  The
Co-Processor is compatible with the 5531, 7531, 7532, 5160, and 5170 computer
systems.  The 5531 Industrial Computer and 5160 Personal Computer are based on
the Intel(1) 8088 microprocessor.  The 7531 and 7532 Industrial Computers and
5170 Personal Computer are based on the Intel(1) 80286 microprocessor.

The Co-Processor can be connected to a wide variety of industrial devices and
systems.  It provides the capability of off-loading applications and device
drivers from the Industrial or Personal Computer processor, thus providing a
dedicated high-performance subsystem for these applications.

The Co-Processor is based on a high-performance, 16-bit Intel(1) 80186
microprocessor.  Provided as a standard feature are two independent serial
ports that operate at speeds up to 64K bps using direct memory access.  One
port can operate at 64K bps full duplex, while the second is operated at a
maximum of 19.2K bps full duplex.  These ports can be programmed for
asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocols, using
either direct memory access or interrupt mode.  In order to accommodate the
different possible physical interfaces encountered in industrial environments,
the Co-Processor is designed to accept two optional interface boards or user
developed custom Interface boards.  These pluggable interface boards allow the
user to selectively configure the ports of the Co-Processor.

The optional interface boards available for the Interface Co-Processor are:

    o   EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 Interface Board
    o   EIA RS-422-A Interface Board
    o   20ma Current Loop Interface Board
    o   CCITT V.35 Interface Board.

A maximum of two Interface Boards may be installed on the Co-Processor.
Interface Boards may be installed in any combination.  For those users with
unique Interface Board requirements, detailed technical information on
Interface Board design can be found in the optional "Realtime Interface
Co-Processor Technical Reference" (#6058).

The Co-Processor's memory is dual-ported.  Communications between the
Co-Processor and the system unit are done via I/O ports and shared memory.
Communication is synchronized by interrupts between the Co-Processor and system
unit.  Interrupt levels are selectable.  The Co-Processor can operate in 8-bit
mode on the 5531 and 5160 and in 8-bit or 16-bit mode on the 7531, 7532 and
5170.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor will be available in two memory capacities,
128Kb and 512Kb, and will be shipped with either 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch program
media.

    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 128Kb of memory and 5.25-inch
        program media (#6050)
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 128Kb of memory and 3.5-inch
        program media (#6165)
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 512Kb of memory and 5.25-inch
        program media (#6160)
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor with 512Kb of memory and 3.5-inch
        program media (#6166)

All Realtime Interface Co-Processor features are functionally equivalent.
Features #6050 and #6165 are shipped with 128Kb of memory, upgradeable to
256Kb, and features #6160 and #6166 are shipped with 512Kb of memory,
upgradeable to 1024Kb.  To expand the memory capacity of the Realtime Interface
Co-Processor, the following expansion options are available:

    o   128Kb Memory Expansion Option (#6055) (Can only be used with features
        #6050 and #6165)
    o   512Kb Memory Expansion Option (#6161) (can only be used with features
        #6160 and #6166)

Detailed technical information on the Realtime Interface Co-Processor is
provided in the optional Realtime Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference
(#6058).

Realtime Control Program:  The Realtime Control Program is microcode for the
Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  It is included with the Co-processor feature
and is shipped on a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch dual-sided double density diskette.

The Realtime Control Program microcode provides a realtime, multi-tasking
operational environment for supporting user applications running on the
Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  The Realtime Control Program microcode is
loaded from the system unit memory to the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
memory.  Once loaded, the Realtime Control Program microcode initializes itself
and the Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  It then signals the system unit
processor that it is loaded and ready.

The Realtime Control Program microcode supports up to 253 concurrent tasks
running on the Co-Processor.  Tasks are loaded from the system unit memory. A
task running under the Realtime Control Program microcode may communicate with
another task running under the control program or with an application program
running in the system unit.

The Realtime Control Program microcode provides support for interfacing IBM
Industrial Computer or Personal Computer applications to the Realtime Control
Program microcode and uses the IBM PC Macro Assembler as the
program-preparation facility.

The Realtime Control Program microcode supports dynamic memory management.
Storage is allocated in multiples of 16-byte paragraphs upon request of a task.
Timer support is also provided.  There may be up to 256 software timers with
increments ranging from 5 ms to 327 seconds.

The dispatch queue functions as a priority queue with round-robin dispatching
on any priority level.  The possible priority levels range from 1 to 255; 1,
being the highest priority. Intertask communications is accomplished by the
wait/post mechanism.  Data may be passed between tasks by user queues.

The watchdog timer support is used to signal an error condition should the
Co-Processor fail.  It will interrupt both the system unit processor and the
Realtime Interface Co-Processor upon failure.  It will also switch on an error
indicator on the Co-Processor card.

Detailed information on the operational characteristics of the Realtime Control
Program microcode is provided in the optional Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Technical Reference (#6058).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 153. EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 INTERFACE BOARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  85X1971

Feature Code 6051

Bus Master  No

Adapts one of the Co-Processor's serial ports for compatibility with EIA
RS-232-C and CCITT V.24 interfaces.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 154. EIA RS-422-A INTERFACE BOARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  85X1972

Feature Code 6064

Bus Master  No

Adapts one of the Co-Processor's serial ports for compatibility with EIA
RS-422-A interfaces.  This board supports cable lengths up to 4000 ft, however,
these cables should never exit the establishment.  See the "IBM Realtime
Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference" for details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 155. CCITT V.35 INTERFACE BOARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  85X1973

Feature Code 6053

Bus Master  No

Adapts one of the Co-Processor's serial ports for compatibility with CCITT V.35
interfaces.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 156. 20MA CURRENT LOOP INTERFACE BOARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  85X1974

Feature Code 6066

Bus Master  No

Adapts one of the Co-Processor's serial ports for compatibility with 20ma
interfaces.  The current loop Interface Board also has the capability to
provide the 20ma current source if required.  The line speed at which this
board can operate is dependent on the type and length of cable used. These
cables should never exit the establishment.  See the "IBM Realtime Interface
Co-Processor Technical Reference" for details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 157. REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR 128KB MEMORY EXPANSION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  85X1975

Feature Code 6055

Bus Master  No

Expands the Realtime Interface Co-Processor (#6050 and #6165) memory from 128Kb
to 256Kb.  Only one 128Kb Memory Expansion Option may be installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 158. REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR 512KB MEMORY EXPANSION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  85X2787

Feature Code 6161

Bus Master  No

Expands the Realtime Interface Co-Processor (#6160 and #6166) memory from 512Kb
to 1024Kb.  Only one 512Kb Memory Expansion Option may be installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 159. EIA RS-232-C DIRECT ATTACH INTERFACE CABLE OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  85X1976

Feature Code 6056

Bus Master  No

Allows the user to connect one port of the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
directly to other devices without using a modem.  The cable is shielded and is
approximately 2m (6 ft) long.  The cable terminates in a 25-pin female
connector.  A wrap connector is provided to test the cable with the Advanced
Diagnostics.

NOTE: This cable can be used only when the EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 Interface
Board (#6051) is installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 160. EIA RS-232-C MODEM ATTACH INTERFACE CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  85X1977

Feature Code 6057

Bus Master  No

Allows the user to connect one port of the Realtime Interface Co-Processor to a
modem.  The cable is shielded and is approximately 2m (6 ft) long. The cable
terminates in a 25-pin male connector.  A wrap connector is provided to test
the cable with the Advanced Diagnostics.

NOTE: This cable can be used only when the EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 Interface
Board (#6051) is installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 161. CCITT V.35 INTERFACE CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  85X1980

Feature Code 6061

Bus Master  No

Allows the user to connect one port of the Realtime Interface Co-Processor to a
CCITT V.35 modem.  The cable is shielded and is approximately 2m (6 ft) long.
The cable terminates in a 34-pin male connector.  A wrap connector is provided
to test the cable with the Advanced Diagnostics.

NOTE: This cable can be used only when the CCITT V.35 Interface Board (#6053)
is installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 162. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR MULTIPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WITHDRAWN FROM MARKETING ON APRIL 25, 1994

Part Number  00F5525

Feature Code 6240

Bus Master  No

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport adapter is designed as a
single-slot multiple device interface subsystem for IBM Personal Computers and
IBM Industrial Computers.  This feature includes the realtime control microcode
which provides a realtime, multitasking operational environment for supporting
applications running on the Co-Processor.  The Co-Processor is designed to
attach to a wide variety of equipment.  The Co-Processor is based on a
high-performance Intel(1) 80186 microprocessor with up to 512Kb of user memory.
Typical applications include protocol and/or data conversion for outboard
devices, multiline communication concentrator, and other functions to offload
the Personal or Industrial Computer.

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport will be available as follows:

    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport 4 Port, 128Kb Memory, 5.25 inch
        media (#6240, P/N 00F5525)
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport 4 Port, 128Kb Memory, 3.5 inch
        media (#6241, P/N 00F5527)
    (1) Registered trademark of Intel Corporation

Limitations:  Other IBM Computers, Industrial Computers, Personal Computers,
options, adapters, or devices not specifically listed under "Compatibility" are
not supported.

The Co-Processor, under control of the realtime control microcode, permits
offloading function from the PC DOS with tasks written to the realtime control
microcode interface.

Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport adapters can be installed as follows:

    o   One per system - 8530
    o   Up to 3 per system - 5162, 5170, 7531 and 7532
    o   Up to 4 per system - 7552

The architecture of the 7531, 7532, 7552 based IBM Industrial Computer and the
5162, 5170 IBM Personal Computers prohibits an 8-bit adapter (e.g., IBM
Enhanced Graphics Adapter, PC Network Adapter, etc.)  to be co-resident with a
16-bit adapter (Realtime Interface Co-Processor) within the same 128Kb memory
region.  Refer to "IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference for
complete details.

Hardware Requirements:  The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport must be
installed in one of the following systems:

    o   7531 Industrial Computer
    o   7532 Industrial Computer
    o   7552 Industrial Computer
    o   5162 Personal Computer XT/286
    o   5170 Personal Computer AT
    o   8530 Personal System/2

Applications for the Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport must be written
in IBM Personal Computer Assembler Language or IBM Personal Computer C
Language.  Applications for the system unit processor can be written in IBM PC
Assembler, IBM interpretive and compiled BASIC, IBM C Language, or IBM PASCAL.

To operate the Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport, application code is
required for both the system processor and the Co-Processor.  To aid in
developing these applications the following are available:

    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference (SC28-8006)
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor C Language Support (5656-094)
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Developer's Kit (5669-176)

Highlights:

    o   Advanced high-performance Intel(1) 80186 microprocessor
    o   128Kb or 512Kb of dual-ported memory with parity for error detection
    o   8-bit mode and 16-bit mode data bus support
    o   Two-channel direct memory access for use between the Co-Processor storage
        and the first two ports
    o   Eight selectable interrupt levels
    o   Zilog(2) 8030 Serial Communications Controller
    o   Four or eight EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports
    o   Supports 19.2K bps full duplex ASYNC protocols and 38.4K bps full duplex
        HDLC/SDLC protocols.  All eight ports may be run concurrently at up to
        9.6K bps.
    o   Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex operation
    o   Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol
        hardware support on two ports.  Asynchronous hardware support on the
        remaining two or six ports
    o   CRC generation and checking
    o   Eight programmable hardware timers
    o   Watchdog timer
    o   Watchdog timer status indicator
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Guide to Operations
        -   Hardware setup
        -   Software setup
        -   Problem Determination Procedures
        -   Customer diagnostics diskette.
    o   Realtime Control Microcode
        -   Multitasking, preemptive priority
        -   Co-Processor memory management
        -   Timer support
        -   Watchdog timer support
        -   Queue management
        -   Inter-task communications
        -   Initial Program Load.
    o   ROM-based automatic power-on self-test of Co-Processor components
    o   ROM-based I/O utility routines
    o   ROM-based bootstrap loader
    (2) Registered trademark of Zilog Incorporated

Operating Environment: Electrical - FCC Class A:  Installation of the Realtime
Interface Co-Processor Multiport changes the FCC rating of the 5170 system unit
to FCC Class A.  The Realtime Interface Co-Processor is shipped with a FCC
Class A label attached.  Refer to "IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Multiport Guide To Operations" for the FCC Statement.

Description:  The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport has been designed
for use in the IBM Personal Computers and IBM Industrial Computers.  The
Co-Processor is compatible with the 7531, 7532, 7552, 5162, 5170, and 8530
computer systems.

The Co-Processor can be connected to a wide variety of communication, terminal,
or industrial devices as well as systems.  It provides the capability of
off-loading applications and device drivers from the Personal or Industrial
Computer processor, thus providing a dedicated high-performance subsystem for
these applications.

The Co-Processor is based on a high-performance, 16-bit Intel 80186
microprocessor.  Provided as a standard feature are four (eight with the
optional feature) independent serial ports that operate at speeds up to 38,400
bps using direct memory access.  One port can operate at 38,400 bps full
duplex, while a second is operated at a maximum of 19,200 bps full duplex.  All
four or eight ports may be operated concurrently at 9.6Kb per second full
duplex.  The first two ports can be programmed for asynchronous, bit
synchronous, and character synchronous protocols, using either direct memory
access or interrupt mode, whereas the remaining ports are asynchronous using
interrupt mode.

The Co-Processor's memory is dual-ported.  Communications between the
Co-Processor and the system unit are done via I/O ports and shared memory.
Communication is synchronized by interrupts between the Co-Processor and system
unit.  Interrupt levels are selectable.  The Co-Processor can operate in 8-bit
or 16-bit mode on the 7531, 7532, 7552, 5162, 5170 and 8530. The Realtime
Interface Co-Processor Multiport will be available with either 128Kb or 512Kb
of memory, four or eight ports, and will be shipped with either 5.25-inch or
3.5-inch program media.

The realtime control microcode for the Realtime Interface Co-processor
Multiport is included with the Co-processor feature shipped on a 5.25-inch or
3.5-inch dual-sided double density diskette.

The realtime control microcode (RCM) provides a realtime, multitasking
operational environment for supporting user applications running on the
Co-Processor.  The RCM is loaded from the system unit memory to the
Co-Processor memory.  Once loaded, the RCM initializes itself and the
Co-Processor.  It then signals the system unit processor that it is loaded and
ready.

The RCM supports up to 253 concurrent tasks running on the Co-Processor. Tasks
are loaded from the system unit memory.  A task running under the RCM may
communicate with another task running under the same control program or with an
application program running in the system unit.

The IBM PC Macro Assembler can be used as the program-preparation facility for
generating the application tasks residing in the Co-Processor memory. The
realtime control microcode supports dynamic memory management.  Storage is
allocated in multiples of 16-byte paragraphs upon request of a task.

Timer support is also provided.  There may be up to 255 software timers with
increments ranging from 5 milliseconds to 327 seconds.

The dispatch queue functions as a priority queue with round-robin dispatching
on any priority level.  The possible priority levels range from 1 to 255; 1,
being the highest priority.

Task synchronization is accomplished by a wait/post or suspend/resume
mechanism.

The watchdog timer support is used to signal an error condition should the
Co-Processor fail.  It will interrupt both the system unit processor and the
Co-Processor upon failure and switch on an error indicator on the Co-Processor
card.

Detailed information on the operational characteristics of the realtime control
microcode is provided in the optional "Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Technical Reference" (#6058, P/N 67X1234).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 163. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR MULTIPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WITHDRAWN FROM MARKETING ON APRIL 25, 1994

Part Number  00F5527

Feature Code 6241

Bus Master  No

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport adapter is designed as a
single-slot multiple device interface subsystem for IBM Personal Computers and
IBM Industrial Computers.  This feature includes the realtime control microcode
which provides a realtime, multitasking operational environment for supporting
applications running on the Co-Processor.  The Co-Processor is designed to
attach to a wide variety of equipment.  The Co-Processor is based on a
high-performance Intel(1) 80186 microprocessor with up to 512Kb of user memory.
Typical applications include protocol and/or data conversion for outboard
devices, multiline communication concentrator, and other functions to offload
the Personal or Industrial Computer.

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport will be available as follows:

    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport 4 Port, 128Kb Memory, 5.25 inch
        media (#6240, P/N 00F5525)
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport 4 Port, 128Kb Memory, 3.5 inch
        media (#6241, P/N 00F5527)
    (1) Registered trademark of Intel Corporation

Limitations:  Other IBM Computers, Industrial Computers, Personal Computers,
options, adapters, or devices not specifically listed under "Compatibility" are
not supported.

The Co-Processor, under control of the realtime control microcode, permits
offloading function from the PC DOS with tasks written to the realtime control
microcode interface.

Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport adapters can be installed as follows:

    o   One per system - 8530
    o   Up to 3 per system - 5162, 5170, 7531 and 7532
    o   Up to 4 per system - 7552

The architecture of the 7531, 7532, 7552 based IBM Industrial Computer and the
5162, 5170 IBM Personal Computers prohibits an 8-bit adapter (e.g., IBM
Enhanced Graphics Adapter, PC Network Adapter, etc.)  to be co-resident with a
16-bit adapter (Realtime Interface Co-Processor) within the same 128Kb memory
region.  Refer to "IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference for
complete details.

Hardware Requirements:  The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport must be
installed in one of the following systems:

    o   7531 Industrial Computer
    o   7532 Industrial Computer
    o   7552 Industrial Computer
    o   5162 Personal Computer XT/286
    o   5170 Personal Computer AT
    o   8530 Personal System/2

Applications for the Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport must be written
in IBM Personal Computer Assembler Language or IBM Personal Computer C
Language.  Applications for the system unit processor can be written in IBM PC
Assembler, IBM interpretive and compiled BASIC, IBM C Language, or IBM PASCAL.

To operate the Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport, application code is
required for both the system processor and the Co-Processor.  To aid in
developing these applications the following are available:

    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Technical Reference (SC28-8006)
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor C Language Support (5656-094)
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Developer's Kit (5669-176)

Highlights:

    o   Advanced high-performance Intel(1) 80186 microprocessor
    o   128Kb or 512Kb of dual-ported memory with parity for error detection
    o   8-bit mode and 16-bit mode data bus support
    o   Two-channel direct memory access for use between the Co-Processor storage
        and the first two ports
    o   Eight selectable interrupt levels
    o   Zilog(2) 8030 Serial Communications Controller
    o   Four or eight EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports
    o   Supports 19.2K bps full duplex ASYNC protocols and 38.4K bps full duplex
        HDLC/SDLC protocols.  All eight ports may be run concurrently at up to
        9.6K bps.
    o   Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex operation
    o   Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol
        hardware support on two ports.  Asynchronous hardware support on the
        remaining two or six ports
    o   CRC generation and checking
    o   Eight programmable hardware timers
    o   Watchdog timer
    o   Watchdog timer status indicator
    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Guide to Operations
        -   Hardware setup
        -   Software setup
        -   Problem Determination Procedures
        -   Customer diagnostics diskette.
    o   Realtime Control Microcode
        -   Multitasking, preemptive priority
        -   Co-Processor memory management
        -   Timer support
        -   Watchdog timer support
        -   Queue management
        -   Inter-task communications
        -   Initial Program Load.
    o   ROM-based automatic power-on self-test of Co-Processor components
    o   ROM-based I/O utility routines
    o   ROM-based bootstrap loader
    (2) Registered trademark of Zilog Incorporated

Operating Environment: Electrical - FCC Class A:  Installation of the Realtime
Interface Co-Processor Multiport changes the FCC rating of the 5170 system unit
to FCC Class A.  The Realtime Interface Co-Processor is shipped with a FCC
Class A label attached.  Refer to "IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Multiport Guide To Operations" for the FCC Statement.

Description:  The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport has been designed
for use in the IBM Personal Computers and IBM Industrial Computers.  The
Co-Processor is compatible with the 7531, 7532, 7552, 5162, 5170, and 8530
computer systems.

The Co-Processor can be connected to a wide variety of communication, terminal,
or industrial devices as well as systems.  It provides the capability of
off-loading applications and device drivers from the Personal or Industrial
Computer processor, thus providing a dedicated high-performance subsystem for
these applications.

The Co-Processor is based on a high-performance, 16-bit Intel 80186
microprocessor.  Provided as a standard feature are four (eight with the
optional feature) independent serial ports that operate at speeds up to 38,400
bps using direct memory access.  One port can operate at 38,400 bps full
duplex, while a second is operated at a maximum of 19,200 bps full duplex.  All
four or eight ports may be operated concurrently at 9.6Kb per second full
duplex.  The first two ports can be programmed for asynchronous, bit
synchronous, and character synchronous protocols, using either direct memory
access or interrupt mode, whereas the remaining ports are asynchronous using
interrupt mode.

The Co-Processor's memory is dual-ported.  Communications between the
Co-Processor and the system unit are done via I/O ports and shared memory.
Communication is synchronized by interrupts between the Co-Processor and system
unit.  Interrupt levels are selectable.  The Co-Processor can operate in 8-bit
or 16-bit mode on the 7531, 7532, 7552, 5162, 5170 and 8530.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport will be available with either
128Kb or 512Kb of memory, four or eight ports, and will be shipped with either
5.25-inch or 3.5-inch program media.

The realtime control microcode for the Realtime Interface Co-processor
Multiport is included with the Co-processor feature shipped on a 5.25-inch or
3.5-inch dual-sided double density diskette.

The realtime control microcode (RCM) provides a realtime, multitasking
operational environment for supporting user applications running on the
Co-Processor.  The RCM is loaded from the system unit memory to the
Co-Processor memory.  Once loaded, the RCM initializes itself and the
Co-Processor.  It then signals the system unit processor that it is loaded and
ready.

The RCM supports up to 253 concurrent tasks running on the Co-Processor. Tasks
are loaded from the system unit memory.  A task running under the RCM may
communicate with another task running under the same control program or with an
application program running in the system unit.

The IBM PC Macro Assembler can be used as the program-preparation facility for
generating the application tasks residing in the Co-Processor memory.

The realtime control microcode supports dynamic memory management.  Storage is
allocated in multiples of 16-byte paragraphs upon request of a task.

Timer support is also provided.  There may be up to 255 software timers with
increments ranging from 5 milliseconds to 327 seconds.

The dispatch queue functions as a priority queue with round-robin dispatching
on any priority level.  The possible priority levels range from 1 to 255; 1,
being the highest priority.

Task synchronization is accomplished by a wait/post or suspend/resume
mechanism.

The watchdog timer support is used to signal an error condition should the
Co-Processor fail.  It will interrupt both the system unit processor and the
Co-Processor upon failure and switch on an error indicator on the Co-Processor
card.

Detailed information on the operational characteristics of the realtime control
microcode is provided in the optional "Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Technical Reference" (#6058, P/N 67X1234).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 164. REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR 512KB MEMORY EXPANSION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  00F5529

Feature Code 6242

Bus Master  No

Replaces the 128Kb of Co-Processor memory with 512Kb of memory.  This feature
upgrades the Co-Processor, #6240 or #6241, to the maximum memory capacity of
512Kb.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 165. REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR MULTIPORT FOUR PORT ADDITION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  00F5530

Feature Code 6245

Bus Master  No

Provides four additional EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports. Only one
Four Port Addition may be installed to present a maximum of eight ports for
each Multiport adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 166. EIA RS-232-C MULTIPORT INTERFACE CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  00F5531

Feature Code 6246

Bus Master  No

This cable is used to distribute eight electrical interfaces away from the
physical constraints of the back panel of the Industrial Computer or Personal
Computer.  One end of the cable provides for 78-pin connector to mate with the
Co-Processor card.  At the other end of the cable are eight 25-pin connectors
which will connect up to eight (8) EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 devices.  A wrap
connector is provided to test the cable when using the diagnostics provided.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 167. IBM ARTIC960 CO-PROCESSOR PLATFORM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ARTIC960 Adapter

Marketing Part Number  61G2925

Service Part Number   61G2916

Feature Code      6930

1MB Memory

Marketing Part Number  61G2930

Service Part Number   59F4581

Feature Code      6931

Cable, EIA-530 (RS422)

Marketing Part Number  61G2923

Service Part Number   61G2924

Feature Code      6932

4MB Memory

Marketing Part Number  61G2940

Service Part Number   70F9973

Feature Code      6933

8MB Memory

Marketing Part Number  61G2945

Service Part Number   70F9976

Feature Code      6934

16MB Memory

Marketing Part Number  61G2950

Service Part Number   61G3865

Feature Code      6935

4-Port AIB

Marketing Part Number  61G2960

Service Part Number   61G2961

Feature Code      6940

Cable, EIA-232

Marketing Part Number  61G2918

Service Part Number   61G2919

Feature Code      6941

Cable, ISO 4903 (V.21)

Marketing Part Number  61G2928

Service Part Number   61G2929

Feature Code      6943

Cable, ISO 4902 (V.36)

Marketing Part Number  61G2933

Service Part Number   61G2934

Feature Code      6944

Bus Master  Yes

The ARTIC960 is a high-speed, high through-put co-processor adapter with
multiple memory options designed to operate in 32-bit Micro Channel compatible
systems.  The ARTIC960 relieves the host from compute-intensive tasks
associated with I/O communication applications and protocols. It also provides
bus-mastering capabilities for peer to peer transfers across the Micro Channel.
The ARTIC960's wide bandwidth provides co-processor performance 4-6 times that
of previously released IBM co-processors.

The ARTIC960 is intended to be utilized as a co-processor platform by third
party Industrial Remarketers and IBM development organizations that will attach
their design-specific applications via an Application Interface Board (AIB, or
daughter card).  A Developer's Kit is offered that provides AIB design
information, sample programs, a programmer's guide and reference, and a
hardware technical reference manual.  As part of the Developer's Kit a
Developer's Assistance Program (DAP) provides technical Q and A service
supported by telephone and E-mail.

Included here is a high-speed 4-Port Multi-interface AIB that offers either
EIA-232 or EIA-530 (RS-422) or ISO 4903 (X.21) or ISO 4902 (V.36) electrical
interfaces for generalized applications.  The selection of the specific
interface is achieved by a matching cable (4 ports of 232 or 4 ports or 422 or
4 ports of X.21 or 4 ports of V.36).

The ARTIC960 is ideally suited for applications in credit card banking,
satellite high-speed data retrieval, telephony, airline reservation systems,
and graphic imaging, and for network routers and generalized local area network
(LAN) applications ranging from X.25 to integrated services digital network
(ISDN) to Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).

Limitations:  There is no limitation on the quantity of ARTIC960 cards per
system other than 32-bit Micro Channel long slot availability and the amount of
power furnished by the system.  A typical ARTIC960 adapter, without the AIB,
draws 12.5 watts of 5VDC power.  The AIB (daughter card) in this announcement
draws 3.7 watts.  Prerequisites:  None.  Corequisites:  None. Compatibility
Conflicts:  None.  Customer Setup:  Yes.  Field Installable: Yes.

Cable Order: IBM recommends that one of the following cables be ordered with
the 4-Port AIB. The cable choice determines the AIB's electrical interface.
Other interface cables can be ordered at published prices. Each cable set is
1.8 meters in length and has four connectors in a fanout fashion terminating in
a 100-pin connector that plugs into the AIB.

    o   Cable Option EIA-232 (#6941, P/N 61G2918)
    o   Cable Option EIA-530 (RS 422) (#6932, P/N 61G2923)
    o   Cable Option ISO 4903 (X.21) (#6943, P/N 61G2928)
    o   Cable Option ISO 4902 (V.36) (#6944, P/N 61G2933)

This product includes two new ARTIC cables required by the 8600 system for
previously released Multiport and Portmaster co-processors.

There are two, Eight-Port Direct Modem Attach Cables used for direct attachment
of customer devices such as modems to the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
(ARTIC) Multiport, Multiport/2 and Portmaster adapters.  These cables are 1.8
meters in length originating from a single 100-pin or 78-pin adapter connector
and terminating in eight separate 25-pin male connectors. These cables may be
used in lieu of the currently available multiport cables listed below that
terminate in a molded distribution block.

These new cables are a prerequisite for use with the Multiport/2 or Portmaster
adapters when used in the PS/2 8600 systems where internal cable routing is
restrictive.

For use with the Multiport and Multiport/2 ARTIC adapters in place of cable P/N
00F5531:  8-Port Direct Modem Attach Cable (#7423, P/N 71G3494).

For use with the Portmaster and Multiport Model 2 ARTIC Adapters in place of
cable P/N 53F2619:  8-Port Direct Modem Attach Cable (#7446, P/N 71G3497).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 168. SELECTABLE INTERFACE BOARD/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F2616

Feature Code 6365

Bus Master  No

This interface board, attached to the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A or Multiport Adapter, Model 2, provides the appropriate
drivers and receivers to support up to four serial I/O ports with the following
electrical interface options.  Protocols for these electrical interfaces are
user programmable.

    o   Port 0 - RS-232-C, RS-422-A, CCITT V.35, or CCITT X.21
    o   Port 1 - RS-232-C or CCITT V.35
    o   Port 2 - RS-232-C or RS-422-A (asynchronous only)
    o   Port 3 - RS-232-C only

The interface board includes a 78 pin connector for external communication. The
physical interface can be selected for each port by connecting to the
appropriate connector on the Selectable Cable (#6367) or directly with the X.21
Cable (#6717) or V.35 Cable (#6718).  The Selectable Interface Board supports
the following communication data rates with up to four ports running
concurrently:

    o   CCITT V.35 running up to 64Kbps
    o   RS-422-A (port 0) running up to 64Kbps
    o   RS-422-A (port 2) running up to 57.6Kbps with internal clocking
    o   CCITT X.21 running up to 64Kbps
    o   RS-232-C running up to 38.4Kbps

The Selectable Interface Board/A supports the following communication data
rates with only one port running:

    o   V.35 running up to 2.048Mbps on the Portmaster Adapter/A or up to
        1.544Mbps on the Multiport Adapter, Model 2.
    o   RS-422-A (port 0) running up to 2.048Mbps on the Portmaster Adapter/A or
        up to 1.544Mbps on the Multiport Adapter, Model 2
    o   CCITT X.21 running up to 64Kbps
    o   RS-232-C running up to 38.4Kbps

Actual performance may vary depending on user's application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 169. SELECTABLE CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F2622

Feature Code 6367

Bus Master  No

This cable is used in conjunction with the Selectable Interface Board/A (#6365)
and enables user selection of up to four electrical interfaces supported by the
Interface Board.  The following connectors are used to provide the physical
interface through an array of D-shell connectors housed in a molded block at
the end of this cable.

    o   25-pin D-shell connectors for RS-232-D and RS-422-A ports
    o   15-pin D-shell connectors for CCITT V.35 and CCITT X.21 ports
p.User provided cables are required for device attachment in conformance with
ISO standards.  Limitation:  Cable run length for each RS-422-A interface
should not exceed 122 meters (400 feet) in length and not exceed 15 meters (50
feet) for the X.21, V.35 or RS-232-C interfaces.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 170. X.21 CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  57F2746

Feature Code 6717

Bus Master  No

This cable provides a direct connection from the interface board 78 pin
connector to a single 15 pin D-shell connector.  Limitation:  The cable run
should not exceed 15 meters (50 feet) or exit the customer's establishment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 171. V.35 CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  57F2748

Feature Code 6718

Bus Master  No

This cable provides for a high speed (greater than 1Mbps), direct connection
from the interface board 78 pin connector to a single 34 pin D-shell male
connector.  Limitation:  The cable run should not exceed 15 meters (50 feet) or
exit from the customer's establishment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 172. REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR MULTIPORT ADAPTER, MODEL 2 1MB MEMORY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F8791

Feature Code 6590

Bus Master  No

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport Adapter, Model 2, is a Personal
Computer XT/286, Personal Computer AT compatible adapter that both complements
and extends the capabilities of the current family of Realtime Interface
Co-Processor adapters.  The key performance and operational characteristics of
the adapter are described below.

    o   10 MHz Intel* 80C186 microprocessor
    o   1Mb on-board user memory
    o   Up to eight serial input/output ports (asynchronous or synchronous)
        available through a family of Interface Boards and cables
    o   Performance of 64K bps full-duplex for each of eight ports
    o   Performance up to 1.5M bps full-duplex for single port
    o   Realtime Multitasking Kernel
    * Registered Trademark of the Intel Corporation.

A variety of electrical interfaces is supported through attachment of Interface
Boards/A and cables.  With the selection of the appropriate interface board,
data rates of 64K bps full-duplex running simultaneously on each of eight ports
or up to 1.544M bps full-duplex for a single port can be achieved with this
adapter.  All ports can be programmed for asynchronous, bit synchronous, and
character synchronous protocols, using either DMA or interrupt mode.

This adapter is offered with 1Mb of user memory installed.  Adapter storage is
dynamically managed in multiples of 16-byte paragraphs upon request of a task.

Up to 255 software timers with increments ranging from 5 milliseconds to 327
seconds are provided in addition to a "watchdog" timer function for signalling
the host should the adapter fail.

Machine Prerequisites and Maximums:  The Multiport Adapter, Model 2, requires a
full length slot in one of the following system units.  The maximum number of
adapters per system unit are also noted.

    o   One per system - 8525, 8530
    o   Up to three per system - 7531, 7532, 7552

Related Features:  Feature Codes #6361, #6362, #6363, #6366 are used with the
Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport Adapter, Model 2 to provide a variety
of electrical interfaces and cabling.

Prerequisite and maximum of the Interface Boards:  The Interface Boards attach
directly to the Multiport Adapter, consequently one and only one Interface
Board/A and the corresponding cable must be selected for each Multiport
Adapter.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport Adapter, Model 2 Guide to
Operations is included with Features #6209 and #6590.  Additional copies will
not be available. * Trademark of the International Business Machines
Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 173. 2MB MEMORY MODULE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  16F2537

Feature Code 7833

Bus Master  No

Expands the memory capacity of the Multifunction Memory Expansion Adapter
(#3619) in increments of 2Mb up to a maximum of 12Mb per adapter.  Each kit
consists of two 1,024Kb memory modules that are inserted into memory module
sockets on the adapter.  A maximum of six kits can be added to each adapter.
Kits are customer installable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 174. ENHANCED DISPLAY STATION EMULATION ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  05F6088

Feature Code 2911

Bus Master  No

This option provides for direct attachment of the IBM Industrial Computer to
the System/34, System/36 and System/38, using the IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation
Program Version 2.12.  It can attach remotely via the 5251 Model 12.  The IBM
Industrial Computer will emulate the 5250 work station family displays and
printers.  The IBM Industrial Computer can also be attached to the System/36 or
System/38 remotely via the 5294 Remote Control Unit.

The Enhanced Display Station Emulation Adapter is a printed circuit card that
is installed in one of the 7531 expansion slots.  Also available are the
integrated attachment cable for connecting the adapter to the twinax line (line
termination resistors are part of the cable assembly), an Installation and
Problem Determination Procedures Manual, and a 5.25-inch diskette containing
diagnostic programs.

The design of the circuit card allows the IBM Industrial Computer to establish
one or two sessions with the System/34, System/36 and System/38. Host device
address(es) are set under program control.

The Enhanced 5250 Emulation Installation Convenience Kit (#2910) includes all
parts, software and manuals required to install the Enhanced Display Station
Emulation Adapter and Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program Version 2.12 in the IBM
Industrial Computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 175. IBM 1MB TO 6MB MEMORY EXPANSION ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  00F5497

Feature Code 3400

Bus Master  No

This multifunction adapter provides up to 6Mb of memory, split memory
addressing, a parallel printer port and an asynchronous serial communications
port.  The adapter comes with 1Mb of memory installed.  Memory Module Kits can
be added in increments of 1Mb up to a maximum of 6Mb per adapter.  A maximum of
three adapters may be installed, providing 16Mb of additional memory.  The
split memory addressing feature allows the base memory to be filled to the
640Kb limit with the remaining adapter memory automatically becoming part of
the expansion memory area.

The asynchronous serial communications port is a 9-pin D-shell RS-232-C
connector for interfacing to a modem, remote display terminal, a serial printer
or other serial device.  When the optional 10-foot Serial Adapter Cable (#0217)
or 10-inch Serial Adapter Connector (#0242) is connected to the adapter, the
25-pin end of the cable or connector has all the signals of a standard EIA
RS-232-C interface.  The parallel printer port provides a 25-pin connector to
connect a parallel printer.

One 16-bit expansion slot is required for each adapter.  Adapters are customer
installable.  A maximum of two serial and two parallel ports are supported by
the 7531 Industrial Computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 176. 1MB MEMORY MODULE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  00F5498

Feature Code 3402

Bus Master  No

Expands the memory capacity of the Memory Expansion Adapter (#3400) in
increments of 1Mb up to a maximum of 6Mb per adapter.  Each kit consists of two
512Kb memory modules inserted into memory module sockets on the adapter card.
A maximum of five kits can be added to each adapter card.  Memory Module Kits
are customer installable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 177. ADVANCED 3278/79 EMULATION ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  92X2399

Feature Code 5050

Bus Master  No

The Advanced 3278/79 Emulation Adapter is a circuit card that plugs into any
one of the expansion slots in the IBM Industrial Computer System Unit.  A cable
receptacle mounted on the card provides for attachment of a customer-supplied
coaxial cable, IBM Cabling System media (3274 attachment only), or telephone
twisted-pair via IBM/ROLM Coax-to-Twisted-Pair Adapter at the rear of the
system unit.  Most, but not all, functions of the emulated displays are
supported.

The Advanced 3278/79 Emulation Adapter provides host communications support via
3278/79 emulation.  When used with the IBM PC 3270 Emulation Program Entry
Level or IBM equivalent, the Industrial Computer can emulate the functions of a
3278 Display Station Model 2 or a 3279 Color Display Station Model 2A or S2A
with certain restrictions and can support file transfer with certain host
systems.  Both the host-controlled 3270 session and a local IBM Disk Operating
System (DOS) session can be active concurrently and the user can interact with
either session alternatively.

The 3270-PC File Transfer Program (5664-281 for Virtual Machine/System Product
(VM/SP), 5665-311 VSE/SP 2.1.1, 2.1.2, or SSX/VSE 1.4.1, or IBM equivalent) is
required for file transfer. File transfer to the 4700 system is not supported.

The following are additional highlights of the Advanced 3278/79 Emulation
Adapter:

    o   Distributed function terminal mode operation - Allows distribution of
        3270 data stream processing from the control unit to the Industrial
        Computer and allows implementation of advanced capabilities such as
        multiple concurrent 3270 sessions.  Requires corresponding capability in
        the upstream node (available with the 3274 Control Unit) and in an IBM
        Personal Computer 3270 Emulation program (available with 3270-PC Control
        Program).  Additional information is available in the IBM Personal
        Computer 3278/79 Emulation Adapter Technical Reference for the Advanced
        Adapter.
    o   Low power usage
    o   Attachment of the IBM Industrial Computer to:
        -   IBM 3274 Control Unit
        -   IBM 4321 Processor Display/Printer Adapter
        -   IBM 4331 Processor Display/Printer Adapter
        -   IBM 4361 Processor Display/Printer Adapter
        -   IBM 4701 Finance Communication Controller
    o   No host hardware or host system software modifications required for 3270
        emulated functions.
    o   Supports attachment to the 3274 via the 3299 Terminal Multiplexer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 178. AT/370 OPTION KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  00F5503

Feature Code 6115

Bus Master  No

This option, along with VM/PC 1.1, allows the 7531 Industrial Computer to be a
System/370 work station.  A 3278/79 Emulation Adapter (#5050) may be installed
with this AT/370 Option Kit in the system unit for a host 3278/79 session and
data transfer.

Highlights of the AT/370 Option Kit and VM/PC 1.1 are:

    o   Support of unique concurrent sessions via "hot key":
        -   Local System/370 CMS session
        -   Host 3278/79 session via an optional 3278/79 Emulation Adapter that
            will provide a coaxial connection to an:
            --  IBM 3274 Control Unit
            --  IBM 4321/4331/4361 Processor via a Display/Printer Adapter
            --  IBM 4361 Processor via a Work Station Adapter
            --  IBM 4701 Finance Communication Controller via a Device Cluster
                Adapter (host server functions not supported)
        -   Remote 3101 emulation session with IBM Personal Computer 3101
            Emulation licensed program (6024042) and serial/parallel adapter
            installed
        -   System/370 Processor Control Session
    o   Ability to execute many unaltered host System/370 VM/CMS programs
    o   Hardware relocate to support up to 8Mb virtual addressing
    o   7531 Industrial Computer functional capabilities unchanged after this
        option kit is installed.

The AT/370 Option Kit consists of two (PC/370-P2 and PC/370-M2) cards that
allow the 7531 Industrial Computer to execute many of the System/370
instructions.

The PC/370-P2 card consists of three microprocessors, a page table and
attendant circuitry.

The first microprocessor executes most of the commonly used fixed point
System/370 instructions.  It performs all instruction fetches and decoding and
all effective address calculations.  The general purpose registers (GPR) and
program status word (PSW) are kept in this microprocessor.

The second microprocessor emulates the remaining non-floating point System/370
instructions, interprets the diagnose instruction, manipulates the page table,
handles exceptional conditions, and performs hardware housekeeping as required.

The third microprocessor executes System/370 floating point instructions. The
floating point registers are kept in this microprocessor.

The page table consists of two static RAM devices arranged in a 2048 x 12
array.  Each virtual page is assigned to an entry in the page table.  Each
entry contains its real page number and status bits.

The PC/370-M2 card contains 512Kb of parity checked RAM accessible from either
the PC/370-P2 card or the microprocessor for the 7531 Industrial Computer.
Concurrent requests for memory accesses are arbitrated.

This memory (512Kb) is viewed in native mode as a 128Kb storage area that
begins at the end of the 512Kb of required memory in the 7531 Industrial
Computer.

The PC/370-P2 card views the 512Kb memory as two separate areas which are not
contiguously addressable.  The area from 0 to 480Kb is addressed from 0 to
480Kb and is real System/370 space.  The area from 480Kb to 512Kb is addressed
from 0 to 32Kb and is control store for the second microprocessor on the
PC/370-P2 card.

The optional features that are usable in a 7531 Industrial Computer with an
AT/370 Option Kit and VM/PC 1.1 are:

    o   IBM Advanced 3278/79 Emulation Adapter (#5050)
    o   IBM 5532 Industrial Color Display via a Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
        (#4910) or Enhanced Graphics Adapter (#1200) for local or host 3279 Model
        2A or S2A emulation sessions.
    o   IBM 7534 Industrial Graphics Display via a Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
        (#4910) or Enhanced Graphics Adapter (#1200) for local or host 3279 Model
        2A or S2A emulation sessions.
    o   Memory Expansion Options (maximum three since the System/370 Processor,
        System/370 memory, and combination fixed disk and diskette adapter occupy
        three of the six sixteen-bit slots on the system board.
    o   Serial/parallel adapter
    o   20Mb fixed disk drive
    o   High capacity diskette drive (1.2Mb)
    o   Double-sided diskette drive (360Kb)

Other optional features such as the following are not explicitly supported by
the AT/370 Option Kit with VM/PC 1.1 but are supported in stand-alone (native)
mode.

    o   Math Co-processor (#0211)
    o   PC Network Adapter (#0213)
    o   Prototype Adapter (#0220)
    o   Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#1204)
    o   Synchronous Data Link Control Communications Adapter (#1205)
    o   Cluster Adapter (#1206)
    o   Data Acquisition and Control Adapter (#1502)
    o   General Purpose Interface Bus Adapter (#1503)
    o   Enhanced Display Station Emulation Adapter (#2911)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 179. 3.5-INCH 720KB DISKETTE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  76X1349

Feature Code 6163

Bus Master  No

This feature is a half-high, double-sided 3.5-inch diskette drive supporting
the 3.5-inch media with 720Kb storage capacity.

The option provides data transfer between 5.25-inch and 3.5-inch media,
allowing greater compatibility with other IBM equipment.

The drive uses the combination fixed-disk and diskette drive adapter, standard
on the 7531 and 7532.  The drive requires the IBM Disk Operating System (DOS)
Version 3.2 or higher, and must be installed as drive B of the system unit.

With unlike diskette drives installed, special considerations are necessary if
a backup copy or working copy of 5.25-inch diskettes are required.  The backup
or working copy will be on a 3.5 inch diskette that cannot be used in the
5.25-inch diskette drive A.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 180. SURGE PROTECTION ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F2625

Feature Code 6361

Bus Master  No

The Realtime Interface Co-processor Surge Protection Adapter can be used to
provide voltage suppression circuitry in conjunction with the Eight Port RS-422
Interface Board/A and Eight Port Cable for each port.  A Surge Protection
Adapter is necessary for each port when its individual cable run exceeds 122
meters (400 feet) in length or is used in conjunction with outdoor cabling.
This adapter is usable for asynchronous communications only.  This adapter
consists of two 25-pin connectors connected by the appropriate surge protection
circuitry.  Prerequisite:  One Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport
Adapter, Model 2 #6590, one Eight Port RS-422 Interface Board/A (#6363), and
one Eight Port Cable (#6366) is required.  Maximum:  Up to eight Surge
Protection Adapters (#6361) can be used per Eight Port Cable (#6366).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 181. EIGHT PORT RS-422 INTERFACE BOARD/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F2613

Feature Code 6363

Bus Master  No

This interface board provides the appropriate drivers and receivers to support
eight serial I/O ports of RS-422-A at cable lengths up to 122 meters (400 feet)
or cable lengths up to 1220 meters (4,000 feet) with surge protection.  (For
outdoor cabling considerations consult the "IBM Physical Planning Instruction
Manual" for surge protection).  Up to two of these ports may be defined as
CCITT X.21.  Protocols for these electrical interfaces are user programmable.
The interface board attaches to the Multiport Adapter, Model 2 and includes a
100-pin connector for external communication. Asynchronous or synchronous modes
may be individually selected for each of the eight ports.  The following
full-duplex data rates are supported by the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Multiport Adapter, Model 2 using this interface board.

    o   One RS-422-A port running alone
        -   synchronous using external clocking up to 1.5Mbps
        -   asynchronous using internal clocking up to 115.2Kbps
    o   Eight Ports running concurrently
        -   synchronous using external clocking up to 64Kbps
        -   synchronous using internal DPLL clocking up to 57.6Kbps
        -   asynchronous using internal clocking up to 57.6Kbps

Actual performance may vary depending on users application.  Prerequisite: One
Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport Adapter, Model 2, #6590. Maximum:
One Interface Board (#6363) can be used per Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Multiport Adapter, Model 2, #6590.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 182. X.21 CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  57F2746

Feature Code 6717

Bus Master  No

This cable provides a direct connection from the interface board 78 pin
connector to a single 15 pin D-shell connector.  Limitation:  The cable run
should not exceed 15 meters (50 feet) or exit the customer's establishment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 183. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK 16/4 ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9210

Feature Code 7367

Bus Master  No

The IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Adapter provides for the attachment of Personal
Computers 5160, 5162, 5170, and Personal System/2 8525 and 8530 to the IBM
Token-Ring Network.  Attachment is provided for rings operating at either 4 or
16M bps.  It requires a single standard length (approximately eight inches)
feature slot in the PCs and PS/2s.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 184. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK REMOTE PROGRAM LOAD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  83X7839

Feature Code 7839

Bus Master  No

The IBM Token-Ring Network Remote Program Load feature makes it possible for an
IBM Personal Computer or IBM Personal System/2 to gain access to the Token-Ring
Network and request that it be loaded with programs, even though it may not
have a disk or diskette drive.  It is required for each of the devices on the
network that are required to be loaded from a controlling station.  The Remote
Program Load (RPL) feature is a module designed to be plugged into an available
socket on the IBM Token-Ring Network Adapters (#3391, #5063, or #9858.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 185. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK PC ADAPTER II ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9042

Feature Code 9858

Bus Master  No

The IBM Token-Ring Network PC Adapter II provides for the attachment of
Personal Computers 5160, 5162, 5170, and Personal System/2 8525 and 8530 to the
IBM Token-Ring Network.  Attachment is provided for rings operating at 4M bps.
It requires a single short or standard length feature slot in the PCs and
PS/2s.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 186. RACK MOUNTING SLIDES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6421815

Feature Code 6023

Bus Master  No

These slides may be used to install the 7537 in a standard 19-inch rack. They
are required for use with the Keyboard Mounting Kit (#6024).  The slides adjust
from 56 cm (22 inches) to 61 cm (24 inches).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 187. KEYBOARD MOUNTING KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6421816

Feature Code 6024

Bus Master  No

This kit is used to mount the keyboard that comes with the 7537 in a standard
19-inch rack.  The kit requires the use of the Rack Mounting Slides (#6023).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 188. 4-PORT RS-232 ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 4704

Bus Master  No

This option provides a 3-meter cable which converts the 10-pin connector on the
4-Port RS-232 Asynchronous Communications Adapter (#4763) to the standard
25-pin, D-shell, male-type connector for attachment to external RS-232
asynchronous devices.  Maximum:  Four per adapter card.  Prerequisites: None.
Co-requisites:  A 4-Port RS-232 Asynchronous Communications Adapter (#4763)
Compatibility Conflicts:  None.  Limitations:  None.  Customer Setup: Yes.
Field Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 189. 4-PORT RS-232 ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 4763

Bus Master  No

This option provides an additional four RS-232 asynchronous communications
ports in the the IBM 7537 Industrial Computer.  The option requires one
expansion slot.  Each communications port is fully programmable and supports
asynchronous communications from 300 to 9600 baud.  This adapter is a 16-bit
adapter card.  This adapter is a FCC Class A Device.

The cable interface for each port is via a 10-pin connector at the rear of the
system unit.  Cables are also offered to convert the 10-pin connector to the
standard RS-232 25-pin, D-shell connector for attachment to external
asynchronous devices.  Maximum:  Two per system unit.  Prerequisites:  None.
Co-requisites:  None.  Compatibility Conflicts:  None.  Limitations: Software
and technical support for these additional communications ports is limited to
IBM AML/2 Manufacturing Control System software (7505-CAB) and IBM IBM AML/2
Automation Control System software (5621-123 announced in Europe only).
Customer Setup:  Yes.  Field Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  Two cables can
be ordered that attach to this communications adapter:

    FC    Length    Name                               Interface
    4704    3M      4-Port RS-232 Async. Comm. Cable   25 Pin, male D-Shell
    6104   10M      4-Port RS-232 Rollup Cable         25 Pin, female D-Shell


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 190. 48 POINT DI/DO ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6100

Bus Master  No

This option provides 48 points of digital input and/or digital output while
utilizing one expansion slot in the IBM 7537 Industrial Computer.  The digital
points may be configured in groups of eight as either inputs or outputs.  Both
input and output signals are non-isolated at TTL levels and are available via a
single 62-pin D-shell connector on the rear of the system unit.  This adapter
is an 8-bit adapter card.  This adapter is a FCC Class A Device.  Maximum:
Four per system unit.  Prerequisites:  None. Co-requisites:  None.
Compatibility Conflicts:  None.  Limitations: Software and technical support
for these digital I/O ports is limited to IBM AML/2 Manufacturing Control
System software (7505-CAB) and IBM IBM AML/2 Automation Control System software
(5621-123 announced in Europe only). Customer Setup:  Yes.  Field Installable:
Yes.  Cable Order:  A cable is offered to provide an interface to industry
standard optical isolation module boards (#6101).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 191. 48 POINT DI/DO ADAPTER CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6101

Bus Master  No

This optional cable is 1.5 meters long.  It attaches directly to the 62-pin
D-shell connector on the 48-Point DI/DO card (#6100) and terminates in two edge
connectors that connect directly to industry standard 24-position optical
isolation module boards.  Maximum:  One per adapter card. Prerequisites:  None.
Co-requisites:  A 48 Point DI/DO Adapter (#6100) Compatibility Conflicts:
None.  Limitations:  None.  Customer Setup:  Yes. Field Installable:  Yes.
Cable Order:  None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 192. 4-PORT RS-232 ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER ROLLUP CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6104

Bus Master  No

This option is intended for attaching an IBM Industrial Computer, an IBM
Personal Computer or an IBM Personal System/2 to the IBM 7537 Industrial
Computer for the purpose of developing automation control programs using the
IBM AML/2 Application Development Environment.

The option provides a 10-meter cable which converts the 10-pin connector on the
4-Port RS-232 Asynchronous Communications Adapter (#4763) to a 25-pin, D-shell,
RS-232 female connector.  Maximum:  One per system unit. Prerequisites:  None.
Co-requisites:  A 4-Port RS-232 Asynchronous Communications Adapter (#4763)
Compatibility Conflicts:  None.  Limitations: None.  Customer Setup:  Yes.
Field Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  This cable can then used in conjunction
with one of the following cables to interface to a variety of external IBM
processors if they do not provide the proper interface.

    (#0217) Serial Adapter Cable           9-pin (type B) to 25-pin male
    (#0242) Serial Adapter Connector       9-pin (type B) to 25-pin male
    (#2067) Asynchronous Comm. Cable       25-pin to 25-pin male
    (#6001) Combination Adapter II Cable   9-pin (type A) to 25-pin male


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 193. TEACH PENDANT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6105

Bus Master  No

This feature is used as the operator interface in automation control
environments using the IBM AML/2* language.  The pendant is used for four main
tasks: setting up and installing the automation control system, running
diagnostics, teaching and/or updating taught points in a robotics application
program, and, depending on the application, acting as an input/output device
for the operator.  This is an FCC Class A device.

The pendant is a hand-held device which plugs into the Teach Pendant Cable
(#6852).  The teach pendant cable is connected to the IBM 7537 Industrial
Computer via customer supplied connections to a standard RS-232 serial port.

The customer must also supply external power for the pendant.  The pendant
contains 32 membrane-type pushbuttons with a green LED in the upper left corner
of each button.  The pendant also contains a 4-line, 16 character display (64
characters total).  Each button, LED and display position is addressable by the
programming language.  For safety, a pendant enable switch is provided on the
left and right sides of the pendant to prevent accidental pressing of a pendant
button.  Provided with each pendant is a slide-in template that specifies the
function of each button while in teach mode (under AML/2).  Maximum:  One per
system unit.  Prerequisites:  None. Co-requisites:  None.  Compatibility
Conflicts:  None.  Limitations: Software and technical support for the Teach
Pendant is limited to IBM AML/2 Manufacturing Control System software
(7505-CAB) and IBM AML/2 Automation Control System software (5621-123,
announced in Europe only).  Customer Setup:  Yes.  Field Installable:  Yes.
Cable Order:  The Teach Pendant is interfaced to the system unit via the Teach
Pendant Cable (#6852 sold separately) and customer supplied connections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 194. BENCH TOP FRONT COVER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6760

Bus Master  No

This feature provides a front cover for bench-top systems, installed by IBM
prior to shipping the system.  This feature or #6761 must be ordered as part of
the system order.  Prerequisite: None.  Customer Setup: No.  Publication
included with feature: None, system comes with "Quick Reference" publication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 195. RACK MOUNT FRONT COVER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6761

Bus Master  No

This feature provides a front cover that is needed for rack mounting of the
system, installed by IBM prior to shipping the system.  This feature or #6760
must be ordered as part of the system order.  In addition to the rack mount
front cover, some kind of platform or bracket/slide capability must be provided
to complete the installation of the 7537 in the customer-provided rack.  These
items must be customer provided (see #6023, #6024, and #6771 for some items
available through IBM).  Prerequisite: None.  Customer Setup: No. Publication
included with feature: None, system comes with "Quick Reference" publication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 196. FIXED DISK DRIVE OPTIONS, 0 MILLION BYTE CAPACITY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6766

Bus Master  No

One and only one of these fixed disk drives options can be selected by the
customer and configured by IBM before shipping the system.  The customer must
select the feature desired as part of the system order.  Additional fixed disk
drives are available for customer installation (see #1073, and 1074).  A
maximum of two total fixed disk drives can be installed internal to the 7537
without restrictions (some restrictions when #6773 or #6774 is installed on the
system).  Prerequisite: None.  Customer Setup: Yes.  Publication included with
feature: None, system comes with "Quick Reference" publication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 197. FIXED DISK DRIVE OPTIONS, 80 MILLION BYTE CAPACITY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6758

Bus Master  No

One and only one of these fixed disk drives options can be selected by the
customer and configured by IBM before shipping the system.  The customer must
select the feature desired as part of the system order.  Additional fixed disk
drives are available for customer installation (see #1073, and 1074).  A
maximum of two total fixed disk drives can be installed internal to the 7537
without restrictions (some restrictions when #6773 or #6774 is installed on the
system).  Prerequisite: None.  Customer Setup: Yes.  Publication included with
feature: None, system comes with "Quick Reference" publication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 198. BRACKETS FOR RACK MOUNT SLIDES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6771

Bus Master  No

This feature provides the brackets needed for using the available rack mounting
slides (#6023) (or other available standard slides) such that the 7537 can be
mounted with slides in a standard 19-inch rack.  Note that rack mounting
requires that the system unit have the rack mount front front cover (#6761 when
ordered as an IBM installed item, or #6845 if ordered for customer
installation).  Prerequisite: None Customer Setup: Yes Publication included
with feature: None, system comes with "Quick Reference" publication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 199. POWER SUPPLY 197 WATT STANDARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6772

Bus Master  No

One and only one of these power supplies will be installed by IBM before
shipping the system.  The customer must select the feature desired as part of
the system order.  The power supplies have the same capabilities and
characteristics except for the difference in wattage levels and the additional
battery backup capability that is provided by #6773.  FC 6773 provides the
capability for assuring system operation through brief AC power losses (10
seconds or less) when the optional Backup Battery feature #6853 is installed.
The battery installs in a location which otherwise can accept a DASD device.
Therefore when the battery is in place in the 7537 the maximum number of DASD
devices that can be installed internally is reduced to three. #6773 is an
auto-ranging Power Supply.  Prerequisite: None.  Customer Setup: No.
Publication included with feature: None, system comes with "Quick Reference"
publication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 200. POWER SUPPLY 205 WATT WITH BACKUP CAPABILITY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6773

Bus Master  No

One and only one of these power supplies will be installed by IBM before
shipping the system.  The customer must select the feature desired as part of
the system order.  The power supplies have the same capabilities and
characteristics except for the difference in wattage levels and the additional
battery backup capability that is provided by #6773.  FC 6773 provides the
capability for assuring system operation through brief AC power losses (10
seconds or less) when the optional Backup Battery feature #6853 is installed.
The battery installs in a location which otherwise can accept a DASD device.
Therefore when the battery is in place in the 7537 the maximum number of DASD
devices that can be installed internally is reduced to three. #6773 is an
auto-ranging Power Supply.  Prerequisite: None.  Customer Setup: No.
Publication included with feature: None, system comes with "Quick Reference"
publication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 201. 205 WATT POWER SUPPLY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6774

Bus Master  No

This is a customer installed power supply which provides the capability for
assuring system operation through brief AC power losses (10 seconds or less)
when the optional Backup Battery feature #6853 is installed.  This feature
(#6774) has the same content as #6773 which may be ordered along with the
system order for IBM installation prior to shipping the system.  When the
battery is in place in the 7537 the maximum number of DASD devices that can be
installed internally is reduced to three.  FC 6774 is an auto-ranging Power
Supply.  This feature has the same content as #6773 which may be ordered along
with the system order for IBM installation prior to shipping the system.
Prerequisite: None.  Customer Setup: Yes.  Publication included with feature:
Installation Instructions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 202. RACK MOUNT FRONT COVER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6769

Bus Master  No

This feature provides the means to convert a system with a bench top front
cover to one capable of being installed in a standard 19-inch rack.  In
addition to the rack mount front cover, some kind of platform or bracket/slide
capability must be provided to complete the installation of the 7537 in the
customer-provided rack.  These items must be customer provided (see #6023,
#6024, and #6771 for some items available through IBM). Prerequisite: None.
Customer Setup: Yes.  Publication included with feature: Installation
Instructions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 203. TEACH PENDANT CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6852

Bus Master  No

This feature provides the physical interface between the IBM Teach Pendant
(#6105) and the IBM 7537 Industrial Computer.  The cable consists of a 13-meter
cable with a 15-pin male D-shell on one end and a plastic enclosure that
interfaces to the Teach Pendant on the opposite end.  The enclosure also
contains a 40-mm in diameter, red, mushroom type, emergency stop switch for
interfacing the customer supplied control circuits.

The Teach Pendant Cable does not directly plug into the IBM 7537 Industrial
Computer.  The customer must supply the connections between the 15-pin D-shell
on the cable and a standard RS-232 serial port within the Industrial Computer.
Also, the customer must supply +5 VDC and +/- 12 VDC to power the pendant
externally.  Maximum:  One per system unit.  Prerequisites:  None.
Co-requisites:  The IBM Teach Pendant (#6105) Compatibility Conflicts:  None.
Limitations:  Technical support for the Teach Pendant Cable is limited to IBM
AML/2 Manufacturing Control System software (7505-CAB) and IBM IBM AML/2
Automation Control System software (5621-123, announced in Europe only).
Customer Setup:  Yes.  Field Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 204. AXIS CONTROL CARD AND CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6848

Bus Master  No

The IBM Axis Control Card provides the IBM 7537 Industrial computer with the
capability to control servo motor systems with a +/- 10 VDC velocity or torque
command interface and with an incremental, three track, encoder feedback
system.  Each Axis Control Card can control two axes at once, for a maximum of
six axes per system unit.  Software support for this adapter is provided by the
IBM AML/2 automation control language.

The IBM Axis Control Card is a Motorola 68000 co-processor adapter that uses a
shared memory (16 KB) interface with the system unit processor.  The external
interfaces for the card are provided via a 62-pin, female, D-shell connector in
the rear of the system unit.  This adapter is an 8-bit adapter card.  This
adapter is a FCC Class A Device.  Maximum:  Three per system unit.
Prerequisites:  None.  Co-requisites:  None.  Compatibility Conflicts: None.
Limitations:  Software and technical support for this adapter is limited to IBM
AML/2 Manufacturing Control System software (7505-CAB). Customer Setup:  Yes.
Field Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  A 1.78 meter cable is included with the
card that connects to the 62-pin D-shell adapter connector and converts that to
a 50-pin, male D-shell connector for the customer interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 205. BACKUP BATTERY (INTERNAL) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6853

Bus Master  No

The optional Backup Battery allows continuous operation through brief main
power interruptions (nominal 10 seconds or less) when used in conjunction with
the 205 Watt Power Supply (#6773 or #6774).  FC 6853, when installed reduces
the maximum number of DASD devices that can be installed internally is reduced
to three.  Prerequisite: #6773 or #6774 (205 Watt power supply) Customer Setup:
Yes.  Publication included with feature: None, system comes with "Quick
Reference" publication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 206. IBM PERSONAL SYSTEM/2 ACTIONMEDIA II DISPLAY ADAPTER 2MB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  69F9730

Feature Code 9730

Bus Master  No

The ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MB is designed to operate in IBM PS/2
Models 35 SX and 40 SX and provides for the decoding and presentation of
compressed motion video, audio and natural image stills as part of a DVI
application replay configuration.  Graphical and text information from the host
personal computer's VGA can be overlayed on the video and stills information
shown on the Personal System/2 display monitor using the ActionMedia II Video
Cable supplied, and under the transparency control of the application.

Single monitor configurations operating in VGA 640 x 480 non-interlaced mode
are supported, when the text and graphics information provided by the host
Personal System/2 may be overlayed on the images provided by the ActionMedia II
display adapter.  In these configurations, the keying of the overlay is
controlled by the output of the host graphics adapter, such that a zero (black)
output results in the host information becoming transparent to the images
provided by the ActionMedia II adapter.

A dual monitor configuration is also supported, with one monitor used for the
host's graphics adapter and a second monitor used for the images provided by
the ActionMedia II display adapter, but that does not allow any host text or
graphics overlay.  Application developers are provided with the Audio Video
Kernel (AVK) device driver interface which gives access to and control of the
basic functions provided by the adapter.

The adapter uses the Intel i82750 PB and DB chip set to provide the video
processing and display controller functions, together with Video Random Access
Memory (VRAM) to hold the information being processed by the adapter.

The video and still image information is stored and processed internally in a
YUV form of data encoding.  Two forms of that encoding are supported.  For all
motion video information and for JPEG stills, the 9 bit YUV form is used, but
for the highest quality still images when no motion video or JPEG stills are
also being displayed, an alternative 16 bit form is available.

The video processor supports DVI Technology Production Level Video
decompression, Real Time Video (RTV) compression and decompression, 9 bit and
16 bit DVI still image compression and decompression, and 9 bit JPEG
decompression.  Motion video is supported up to a maximum rate of 30 frames per
second.

A Digital Signal Processor is also provided for processing the audio
information.  The audio output is two channels, each of 2 volts maximum
peak-to-peak, with an output impedance of 600 ohms.  Signal to noise ratio is
70 dB. and channel separation is 50 dB. over a 15 Hz to 15K Hz bandwidth.

An internal connector is also available for the attachment of a PS/2 Internal
SCSI CD-ROM Drive (#0845), which may then be used to store and supply video and
audio data to the adapter when running a DVI application.

The PS/2 display monitor is connected to the ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MB
using the standard Personal System/2 monitor cable and the special ActionMedia
II Video Cable, which also plugs into the VGA output socket on the PS/2 models
35 SX and 40 SX.

The ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MB will support the following host and DVI
operating mode combinations, and the DVI application viewport may be
manipulated in the same way as other OS/2 application viewports, with PLV, RTV
and still image scaling and cropping performed by the ActionMedia II hardware.

                        Host Display           DVI Image
                           Mode              Resolution (Max)
    PLV replay           640 x 480             256 x 240
    RTV 2.0              640 x 480             256 x 240
    (Deletion)
    Real-time monitor    640 x 480             512 x 480
    Stills(9 and 16 bit) 640 x 480             512 x 480

In addition to the capability to mix the DVI images with the text and graphics
output of the personal computer's VGA graphics adapter, an additional output is
provided for the DVI images only, to be encoded and provided as either NTSC or
PAL signals for use with standard commercial S-VHS video tape recorders or
television monitors.  The VGA information is not available on this output
connector.

The Audio Video Kernel device driver and programming libraries provide
application programming support through a 'C' callable interface with the
following functional capabilities:

    1.  Replay of motion video from a DVI format file into a window which may:
        a.  fill the screen
        b.  fill a display viewport of arbitrary size.
        and with the provision of the following replay controls:
        a.  pause and resume
        b.  play at variable speeds up to 30 frames per second
        c.  stop on a frame
        d.  preload video data without display
        e.  purge data
        f.  play from one arbitrary frame to another arbitrary frame
        g.  play invisibly and scan to a frame
    2.  Monitor incoming video and audio information connected through the
        Capture Option, displaying the video on the attached monitor, and with
        quality control of the color, brightness and contrast of the video
        images.
    3.  Capture incoming video and audio information connected through the
        Capture Option and compress the video using the RTV compression algorithm
        at up to a maximum of 30 frames per second.
    4.  Still image display and manipulation including the following abilities:
        a.  capture stills at up to 512 x 480 in 9 bit format through the Capture
            Option
        b.  display stills at up to 512 x 480 in 9 bit format
        c.  display any number of stills on a single application viewport, within
            adapter memory limitations
        d.  display multiple overlapped 9 bit stills together with motion video
        e.  compress and decompress 9 bit still images in both DVI Technology and
            baseline Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) formats.
        f.  display stills at up to 512 x 480 in DVI Technology 16 bit format
        g.  copy and scale with conversion, DVI Technology 16 bit formatted
            stills into a 9 bit format
        h.  capture stills in 24 bit format at up to 612 x 576, through the
            Capture Option, with optional conversion to 9 bit or DVI Technology
            16 bit formats
    5.  Audio functions including:
        a.  programmable volume control on the left and the right channels
        b.  monitoring or capturing of incoming audio
        c.  monitoring of incoming audio together with incoming video
        d.  capturing of incoming audio together with incoming video
        e.  programmable input level sensitivity
        f.  digital filtering with:
            1)  upsampling to 44,100 KHz output rate
            2)  one set of filter coefficients per input sample rate
            3)  one sample rate for all active streams
            4)  digital filtering using analog to digital converters with
                software assistance at some sample rates

Maximum number of features:  Only one ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MB may be
installed in a personal computer when used with the Audio Video Kernel device
drivers.  Only one Capture Option can be installed on an ActionMedia II Display
Adapter 2MB.

Pre-requisites:  The ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MB with the Audio Video
Kernel requires a minimum of 4M Bytes of system memory.  A minimum of 6M Bytes
is recommended when a DVI application is required to run in the Personal
System/2 together with other OS/2 applications.  Co-requisites: An IBM Personal
System/2 analog color display monitor, operating in 640 x 480 non-interlaced
display mode (VGA mode 18).  Customer Set-up: Yes.

Limitations:  The SCSI connector on the ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MB is
for use only with a PS/2 Internal SCSI CD-ROM Drive (#0845), which may then be
used only to provide data to a DVI application running on that Display Adapter
2MB.  Such a drive cannot be fitted in a Personal System/2 Model 35SX.

When configuring a Personal System/2 with ActionMedia II, it may be necessary
to limit the utilisation of system expansion slots to avoid the possibility of
overloading the 12 volt power supplies.  If ActionMedia II is being installed
WITH the Capture Option, then it is necessary to have a minimum of:

    1.  either one empty expansion slot, or
    2.  one expansion slot occupied by an option card NOT requiring +12 and/or
        -12 volt power.  As a guide, it may be assumed that option cards
        providing networking or communications support are likely to require 12
        volt power.

Field Installable: Yes.  Cable orders:  The special cable required to connect
the ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MB to the standard Personal System/2
display monitor cable, is supplied with the adapter.  A cable for connecting
the ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MB to an internal CD-ROM drive is also
supplied with the product.

The selection, ordering and installation of all cables used for the connection
of other audio and video input and output peripheral devices are the customer's
responsibility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 207. IBM PERSONAL SYSTEM/2 ACTIONMEDIA II DISPLAY ADAPTER 2MBA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  69F9732

Feature Code 9732

POS ID: EFDC

Bus Master  No

The ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MBa.  is designed to operate in an IBM
Personal System/2 with Micro-Channel Architecture, and provides for the
decoding and presentation of compressed motion video, audio and natural image
stills as part of a DVI application replay configuration.  Graphical and text
information from the host personal computer's VGA or XGA can be overlayed on
the video and stills information shown on the Personal System/2 display monitor
using the ActionMedia II Video Cable supplied, and under the transparency
control of the application.

Single monitor configurations, operating in either VGA 640 x 480 non-interlaced
or in XGA 1024 x 768 interlaced modes, are supported when the text and graphics
information provided by the host Personal System/2 may be overlayed on the
images provided by the ActionMedia II display adapter.  In these
configurations, the keying of the overlay is controlled by the output of the
host graphics adapter, such that a zero (black) output results in the host
information becoming transparent to the images provided by the ActionMedia II
adapter.

A dual monitor configuration is also supported, with one monitor used for the
host's graphics adapter and a second monitor used for the images provided by
the ActionMedia II display adapter, but that does not allow any host text or
graphics overlay.  Application developers are provided with the Audio Video
Kernel (AVK) device driver interface which gives access to and control of the
basic functions provided by the adapter.  The adapter uses the Intel i82750 PB
and DB chip set to provide the video processing and display controller
functions, together with Video Random Access Memory (VRAM) to hold the
information being processed by the adapter.  The video and still image
information is stored and processed internally in a YUV form of data encoding.
Two forms of that encoding are supported.  For all motion video information and
for JPEG stills, the 9 bit YUV form is used, but for the highest quality still
images when no motion video or JPEG stills are also being displayed, an
alternative 16 bit form is available.

The video processor supports DVI Technology Production Level Video
decompression, Real Time Video (RTV) compression and decompression, 9 bit and
16 bit DVI still image compression and decompression, and 9 bit JPEG
decompression.  Motion video is supported up to a maximum rate of 30 frames per
second.

A Digital Signal Processor is also provided for processing the audio
information.  The audio output is two channels, each of 2 volts maximum
peak-to-peak, with an output impedance of 600 ohms.  Signal to noise ratio is
70 dB. and channel separation is 50 dB. over a 15 Hz to 15K Hz bandwidth. The
PS/2 display monitor is connected to the ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MBa.
using the standard Personal System/2 monitor cable and the ActionMedia II Video
Cable, which also plugs into the VGA or XGA output socket on the Personal
System/2.

The ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MBa. will support the following host and
DVI operating mode combinations, and the DVI application viewport may be
manipulated in the same way as other OS/2 application viewports, with PLV, RTV
and still image scaling and cropping performed by the ActionMedia II hardware.

                        Host Display           DVI Image
                           Mode              Resolution (MAX)
    PLV replay           640 x 480             256 x 240
    RTV 2.0              640 x 480             256 x 240
    (Deletion)
    Stills(9 and 16 bit) 640 x 480             512 x 480
    Real-time monitor    640 x 480             512 x 480
    PLV replay          1024 x 768             256 x 240 (windowed)
    RTV 2.0             1024 x 768             256 x 240 (windowed)
    (Deletion)
    PLV replay          1024 x 768             256 x 192 (full screen)
    RTV 2.0             1024 x 768             256 x 192 (full screen)
    Stills (9 bit)      1024 x 768             410 x 384
    Stills (16 bit)     1024 x 768             820 x 768

In addition to the capability to mix the DVI images with the text and graphics
output of the personal computer's VGA or XGA graphics adapter, an additional
output is provided for the DVI images only, to be encoded and provided as
either NTSC or PAL signals for use with standard commercial S-VHS video tape
recorders or television monitors.  The VGA or XGA information is not available
on this output connector.

The Audio Video Kernel device driver and programming libraries provide
application programming support through a 'C' callable interface with the
following functional capabilities:

    1.  Replay of motion video from a DVI format file into a window which may:
        a.  fill the screen
        b.  fill a display viewport of arbitrary size.
        and with the provision of the following replay controls:
        a.  pause and resume
        b.  play at variable speeds up to 30 frames per second
        c.  stop on a frame
        d.  preload video data without display
        e.  purge data
        f.  play from one arbitrary frame to another arbitrary frame
        g.  play invisibly and scan to a frame
    2.  Monitor incoming video and audio information connected through the
        Capture Option, displaying the video on the attached monitor, and with
        quality control of the color, brightness and contrast of the video
        images.
    3.  Capture incoming video and audio information connected through the
        Capture Option and compress the video using the RTV compression algorithm
        at up to a maximum of 30 frames per second.
    4.  Still image display and manipulation including the following abilities:
        a.  capture stills at up to 512 x 480 in 9 bit format through the Capture
        Option
        b.  display stills at up to 512 x 480 in 9 bit format
        c.  display any number of stills on a single application viewport, within
            adapter memory limitations
        d.  display multiple overlapped 9 bit stills together with motion video
        e.  compress and decompress 9 bit still images in both DVI Technology and
            baseline Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) formats.
        f.  display stills at up to 820 x 768 in DVI Technology 16 bit format
        g.  copy and scale with conversion, DVI Technology 16 bit formatted
            stills into a 9 bit format
        h.  capture stills in 24 bit format at up to 612 x 576, through the
            Capture Option, with optional conversion to 9 bit or DVI Technology
            16 bit formats
    5.  Audio functions including:
        a.  programmable volume control on the left and the right channels
        b.  monitoring or capturing of incoming audio
        c.  monitoring of incoming audio together with incoming video
        d.  capturing of incoming audio together with incoming video
        e.  programmable input level sensitivity
        f.  digital filtering with:
            1)  upsampling to 44,100 KHz output rate
            2)  one set of filter coefficients per input sample rate
            3)  one sample rate for all active streams
            4)  digital filtering using analog to digital converters with
                software assistance at some sample rates

Maximum number of features:  Only one ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MBa. may
be installed in a personal computer when used with the Audio Video Kernel
device drivers.  Only one Capture Option can be installed on an ActionMedia II
Display Adapter 2MBa.

Pre-requisites:  The ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MBa. with the Audio Video
Kernel requires a minimum of 4M Bytes of system memory.  A minimum of 6M Bytes
is recommended when a DVI application is required to run in the Personal
System/2 together with other OS/2 applications. Co-requisites:  An IBM Personal
System/2 analog color display monitor, operating in either 640 x 480
non-interlaced display mode, or 1024 x 768 interlaced display mode.

Compatibility: The ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MBa.  cannot be used in
conjunction with the following Personal System/2 options:

    o   The 8514/A Display Adapter, #4054
    o   The PS/2 Image Adapter/A 1MB, #0072
    o   The PS/2 Image Adapter/A 3MB, #0073
    o   The PS/2 Image Adapter/A 3MB 6091, #0074
    o   The PS/2 M-Motion Video Adapter/A, #1991.

Customer Set-up: Yes.  Limitations:  The Display Adapter 2MBa.  is required to
be installed either in a 16 bit expansion slot, or in a 32 bit expansion slot
without Multimedia Extensionsx., of any supported Personal System/2 computer.

When configuring a Personal System/2 with ActionMedia II, it may be necessary
to limit the utilisation of system expansion slots to avoid the possibility of
overloading the 12 volt power supplies.  If ActionMedia II is being installed
WITH the Capture Option, then it is necessary to have a minimum of:

    1.  either one empty expansion slot, or
    2.  one expansion slot occupied by an option card NOT requiring +12 and/or
        -12 volt power.  As a guide, it may be assumed that option cards
        providing networking or communications support are likely to require 12
        volt power.

Field Installable: Yes.  Cable orders:  The special cable required to connect
the ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MBa. to the standard Personal System/2
display monitor cable, is supplied with the adapter.

The selection, ordering and installation of all cables used for the connection
of other audio and video input and output peripheral devices are the customer's
responsibility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 208. IBM PERSONAL SYSTEM/2 ACTIONMEDIA II CAPTURE OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  69F9734

Feature Code 9734

Bus Master  No

The ActionMedia II Capture Option is designed to be installed on either an
ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MB or an ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MBa.
It adds the capability of capturing and digitizing both video and audio analog
information to the display adapters, where it can be shown on the personal
computer's display screen, or compressed using the DVI Technology Real Time
Video (RTV) capabilities.  Video images may be captured at up to a maximum
resolution of 512 x 480 in 9 bit format, and 612 x 576 in 24 bit format.

Video signal input can be either NTSC or PAL standard having either composite,
S-VHS or RGB encodings of the picture signal.  Audio signal input can be either
line or microphone level and two separate channels are supported.

Maximum number of features:  Only one Capture Option can be installed on an
ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MB or Display Adapter 2MBa. Pre-requisites:
Either an ActionMedia II Display Adapter 2MB or Display Adapter 2MBa.
Co-requisites:  None.  Customer Set-up: Yes.  Limitations:

When configuring a Personal System/2 with ActionMedia II, it may be necessary
to limit the utilisation of system expansion slots to avoid the possibility of
overloading the 12 volt power supplies.  If ActionMedia II is being installed
WITH the Capture Option, then it is necessary to have a minimum of:

    1.  either one empty expansion slot, or
    2.  one expansion slot occupied by an option card NOT requiring +12 and/or
        -12 volt power.  As a guide, it may be assumed that option cards
        providing networking or communications support are likely to require 12
        volt power.

The capture of NTSC video material from devices having a dual standard,
providing a hybrid "NTSC - 4.43" signal, will not give correct color
information.  Other true multi-standard devices which support the full PAL and
NTSC standards will work correctly.  Field Installable: Yes. Cable orders:  The
special cable required to connect the ActionMedia II Capture Option to audio
and video input devices is supplied with the adapter.

This capture cable plugs into an 8 pin DIN connector on the ActionMedia II
display adapters, and is provided with two consumer RCA phono connectors to
facilitiate the connection of suitable audio signal sources, and with 4 BNC
connectors for video signal sources.  In addition to this cable, two BNC to RCA
phono socket adapters, and a dual BNC to Y-C (S-VHS) adapter are also supplied.

The selection, ordering and installation of all other cables used for the
connection of audio and video input and output peripheral devices are the
customer's responsibility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 209. BATTERY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  60X9070

Feature Code 6072

Bus Master  No

The battery provides power to support the system, for ten seconds, during a
power failure.  This will allow the user to program a backup procedure during
the power failure.

The realtime clock is powered by this feature, and the battery should be a part
of configuration for proper operation.  Critical data, such as the date, the
time, and an error log could be lost.  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes
(only).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 210. EXTERNAL VOLTAGE MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  60X9000

Feature Code 6073

Bus Master  No

This feature should be ordered if an external power source will be used for the
system unit.  Limitation : This feature is mutually exclusive with the Battery
feature (#6072).  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes (only).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 211. 512KB TO 3MB MEMORY ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  60X8910

Feature Code 60742067

Bus Master  No

This feature adds up to 3Mb of memory to the 7552.  The first 512Kb increment
of memory comes standard with this adapter and five additional 512Kb memory
increments can be added.  For additional memory, order Memory Expansion feature
(#6075).  Field Installation:  Yes (only).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 212. 512KB MEMORY EXPANSION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  60X8920

Feature Code 6075

Bus Master  No

This feature adds 512Kb of memory to the Memory Adapter (#6074).  Field
Installation:  Yes (only).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 213. CARD SHROUD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  60X8970

Feature Code 6076

Bus Master  No

This is a card shroud only that can be used with any processor, memory, or
feature card.  It provides:  1) Protection for the components on the card while
the card is being handled; 2) Positive retention of the card in the frame; 3)
An effective path for the air to cool the card.  The 7552 is shipped with all
empty slots filled with empty Card Shrouds (#6076).  This feature should only
be ordered if spare Card Shrouds are required.  Field Installation:  Yes
(only).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 214. IBM PC CARD ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  60X8980

Feature Code 6077

Bus Master  No

This feature is required when an IBM PC feature adapter is to be plugged in the
7552.  It provides an interposing card and other hardware to mount an IBM PC
feature card in the 7552 Card Shroud.  Field Installation:  Yes (only).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 215. 20MB FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  05F6263

Feature Code 6083

Bus Master  No

This feature adds one 20Mb fixed disk drive to the 7552.  On the 7552 Model
040, feature (#6180) is required.  On the Model 540, one 20Mb Disk Drive is
standard.  Comes with cabling for installation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 216. MEMORY ADAPTER AND CARD SHROUD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  60X9155

Feature Code 6095

Bus Master  No

This feature is a combination of a Memory Adapter (#6074) and a Card Shroud
(#6076).  The Memory Adapter is installed in the Shroud and a label on the
front of the Shroud identifies the card inside to be the Memory Adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 217. FILTERS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  60X9080

Feature Code 6096

Bus Master  No

Provides air filtering for the 7552 system unit to extend the particulate
specification for environments requiring additional protection.  Field
Installation:  Yes (only).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 218. KEYBOARD RACK MOUNT HARDWARE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  00F5390

Feature Code 6097

Bus Master  No

This feature includes a keyboard and the hardware to mount the keyboard in a
standard 19-inch rack.  Field Installation:  Yes (only).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 219. DISK/DISKETTE ADAPTER MODULE II ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  16F2220

Feature Code 6180

Bus Master  No

This module allows disk and/or diskette capability on 7552 Model 040. Included
in this module are the Disk/Diskette adapter card and the Disk/Diskette shroud.
Up to two Fixed Disks (any combination of 10Mb #6082 and 20Mb #6083) and one
diskette drive (#6071) can be installed in the Disk/Diskette Module.  The
Disk/Diskette Module II is a standard feature of the 7552 Model 540.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 220. KEYBOARD RACK MOUNT HARDWARE WITHOUT KEYBOARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  90X6049

Feature Code 6193

Bus Master  No

This feature provides hardware to mount the 7552 keyboard in a standard 19-inch
rack.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 221. 0-16MB EXTENDED MEMORY ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8590

Feature Code 6345

Bus Master  No

This adapter is a full-length memory expansion option with ECC (Error
Correction Code) capability.  It comes standard with 0Mb installed.  Up to ten
2Mb Memory Module Kits (85 ns) (#5213) can be added to the card to provide up
to 16Mb of memory.

The 0-16Mb Extended Memory Adapter requires RPQ PF1079 (BIOS Upgrade) to be
installed on the processor card prior to the installation of the IBM 0-16Mb
Extended Memory Adapter (#6345).  This RPQ supplies new BIOS to provide support
of the IBM 0-16Mb Extended Memory Adapter on all models of the 7552 (e.g., 040,
042, 043, 142, 143, 540, 542, and 543).  PF1079 is required for all 7552
Industrial Computers shipped before October 1989 or with serial numbers less
than 25000.  See description under 0-16Mb Memory Adapter BIOS Upgrade (PF1079.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 222. 42MB FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9213

Feature Code 6536

Bus Master  No

More than doubles the capacity of the largest drive previously available on the
7552.  This drive also reduces the access time from approximately 80 ms to 25
ms.  Increased fixed disk capacity and reduced disk access time result in more
effective operation with large programs in a standalone or distributed
application, increased flexibility, and a broader base for potential
applications.  Feature #6536 is compatible with current base system hardware
and software and provides a path for application growth.  It is plug compatible
on all models of the 7552 GEARBOX system and is supported under OS/2 and PC DOS
operating systems (Version 3.3 or higher.)  Installation of the 42Mb drive will
require running system setup to identify the newly installed drive type.  (This
drive was previously orderable only as an RPQ, #PF1149.)  Comes with cabling
for installation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 223. FIELD INSTALLABLE BATTERY FOR THE 180 WATT POWER SUPPLY WITHOUT BATTERY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  57F0844

Feature Code 6669

Bus Master  No

The IBM 7561 and 7562 Industrial Computer Field Installable Battery (#6669) for
the 180 Watt Power Supply (#6737) allows continuous operation through brief
main power interruptions (nominal 10 seconds default) thus protecting the
integrity plant environment.  This feature is available as a field upgrade for
those customers who currently have the 180 Watt Battery Backed Power Supply
without Battery (#6737) and wish to upgrade (enable) their 7561 and 7562
Industrial Computer with this support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 224. FACTORY INSTALLED 180 WATT POWER SUPPLY WITHOUT BATTERY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  57F2728

Feature Code 6737

Bus Master  No

The IBM 7561 and 7562 Industrial Computer 180 Watt Power Supply (#6737) can be
upgraded with FC 6669.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 225. FACTORY INSTALLED 180 WATT BATTERY BACKED POWER SUPPLY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6736

Bus Master  No

The IBM 7561 and 7562 Industrial Computer 180 Watt worldwide, autoranging
Battery Backed Power Supply allows continuous operation through brief main
power interruptions (nominal 10 seconds default) thus protecting the integrity
plant environment.  This feature is only available at the time of order of the
original system unit.  The customer MUST select either the 180 Watt (Standard)
Power Supply without Battery (#6737), or the 180 Watt Battery Backed Power
Supply (#6736).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 226. FIELD INSTALLABLE 180 WATT BATTERY BACKED POWER SUPPLY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number

Feature Code 6738

Bus Master  No

The IBM 7561 and 7562 Industrial Computer Field Installable 180 Watt worldwide,
autoranging Battery Backed Power Supply allows continuous operation through
brief main power interruptions (nominal 10 seconds default) thus protecting the
integrity plant environment.  This feature is available as a field  upgrade
for  those  customers  who wish to upgrade their 7561 and 7562 Industrial
Computer with with the new 180 Watt Battery Backed Power Supply.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 227. BATTERY, NICAD (INTERNAL) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8599

Feature Code 6221

Bus Master  No

This internally mounted battery allows continuous operation through brief main
power interruptions (nominal 1.5 seconds default).  Also, if the interruption
continues beyond this period, the battery maintains DC voltages to allow the
system to perform an orderly shutdown.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 228. DISK MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8592

Feature Code 6222

Bus Master  No

The Disk Module allows for adding DASD to a Model 040.  The Disk Module
consists of a double-wide shroud and a Disk/Diskette Adapter Card, to be
plugged into the Model 040 frame in place of two empty card shrouds.  The
Disk/Diskette Adapter Card contains 0.5Mb of DASD Cache Memory, and supports up
to two 120Mb Disk Drives and a 1.44Mb Diskette Drive installed inside the
shroud.

The Disk/Diskette Adapter Card also contains an external SCSI interface for
customer use.  Use of this interface requires that the customer provide a
software device driver for interface to the intended operating system.  No such
software device driver is provided with the system or feature.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 229. 120MB DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8593

Feature Code 6223

Bus Master  No

The 120Mb Disk Drive is the same as the drive that comes standard on the Model
150.  The 120Mb Disk Drive can be used along with the Disk Module to provide a
disk drive on the Model 040, or can be added to the Model 150 to provide a
total of 240Mb of Disk Drive capacity.

Specifications of the drive are as follows:

    Formatted Capacity                        120 million bytes*
    Bytes/Sector                              512
    Sectors/Track                             32
    Cylinders                                 920
    Sector Buffer Size                        32Kb
    Number of Data Heads                      8
    Data Transfer Rate                        1.25Mbytes/s
    Average Seek Time                         23ms
    Average Latency                           8.3ms
    Media (# Disks)                           4
    Sector Interleave                         1to1
  * Actual user accessible capacity may vary slightly based on
    different operating environments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 230. 16 BIT MICRO CHANNEL ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8595

Feature Code 6224

Bus Master  No

The 16 Bit Micro Channel Adapter allows the plugging of selected 16 bit Micro
Channel cards with a PS/2 form factor into the GEARBOX Model 800 backplane.

The Display Adapter 8514/A (#4054) must use the 16 Bit Micro Channel Video
Adapter (#6225) for installation in the GEARBOX Model 800.

NOTE: PS/2 adapters should not be installed in the slot #9 position.  This is
due to limitations with setup and diagnostic code code recognizing such
adapters in that position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 231. 16 BIT MICRO CHANNEL VIDEO ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8596

Feature Code 6225

Bus Master  No

This 16 Bit Micro Channel Video adapter is required for installing the Display
Adapter 8514/A (#4054) in the system.

NOTE: PS/2 adapters should not be installed in the slot #9 position.  This is
due to limitations with setup and diagnostic code code recognizing such
adapters in that position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 232. 1.44MB DISKETTE DRIVE (SLIM-LINE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8527

Feature Code 6229

Bus Master  No

The 1.44Mb Diskette Drive is the same as that which comes installed on the
Model 150.  The 1.44Mb Diskette Drive can be used along with the Disk Module
(#6222) to provide diskette function on a Model 040.  The Model 150 is limited
to one diskette drive and can not accept the 1.44Mb Diskette Drive in addition
to the already installed device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 233. SETUP AND SERVICE DEVICE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F7225

Feature Code 6230

Bus Master  No

The Setup and Service Device is a stand-alone 1.44Mb, 3.5-inch diskette drive
and cable in an enclosure, which must be used during initial system setup and
to load diagnostics and record test results on a Model 040 (no DASD model). The
cable plugs into a port on the System Resource Card.

NOTE:  1.  A minimum of one Setup and Service Device should be available at
each    physical site (for example, a building or plant site) in which Model
040    systems are installed.  2.  Due to the limitations on the diskette drive
and media involved, this    device is limited to physical environments that do
not exceed 0 to 50    degrees C (32 to 122 degrees F), and which meet the
reduced gaseous    capabilities of the diskette media (See Technical
Information section).    This device is intended as a setup and service tool,
and is not    recommended for a continuous operating requirement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 234. EXTERNAL VOLTAGE MODULE - 24 VOLTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8600

Feature Code 6231

Bus Master  No

This EVM feature allows the connection of an external DC voltage source either
for additional battery backup to the main AC power, or as a main DC power
source.  EVM #6231 must be used when the external source is 24 volts. No other
external voltages are to be used as a main source or as a back-up.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 235. CARD SHROUD - MACHINE TYPE 7568 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8601

Feature Code 6530

Bus Master  No

This Card Shroud is the same as those that come standard on the system.  The
Card Shroud permits installation of adapter cards in extra shrouds for
immediate insertion in a GEARBOX Model 800 system, without having to open an
installed shroud/card assembly for replacement of the card in the shroud.

The Card Shroud could also be used to fill the open positions if the Disk
Module were to be removed from a Model 150 system (two Card Shrouds would be
needed).

NOTE: The Card Shroud (#6530) is not compatible with the IBM 7552 Industrial
Computer Processor and System Resource cards, due to different locations of
openings in the shroud for LED indicators.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 236. 80387 MATH CO-PROCESSOR - 25 MHZ INDUSTRIAL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8594

Feature Code 6532

Bus Master  No

Provides additional processing power and performance for application programs
requiring many or repetitive arithmetic calculations.  The 80387 conforms to
the ANSI/IEEE floating-point standard, and runs most applications written for
80286/80287 and 8086/8087 based systems, unmodified.  This option is installed
in the Math Co-Processor socket on the processor card, and does not require an
expansion slot.  The 80387 Math Co-Processor (Industrial) has been modified to
meet the environmental requirements of the GEARBOX system.  This feature is NOT
supported on the model C40 or on the 80486 processor card.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 237. 320MB SCSI DISK DRIVE FOR 7568 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF January 6, 1993)

Part Number

Feature Code 6542

Bus Master  No

The SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) disk drive is a customer installable
feature only.  This disk drive is not available as a factory installed feature.
The disk drive can be installed in the current double-wide DASD shroud, either
singly or in combination with a 120Mb drive or a second 320Mb drive feature.
As with the 120Mb drive, installation of the feature in a Model 040 system will
require that a previously announced Disk Module feature (#6222) be ordered and
installed.  The 320Mb SCSI Disk Drive for 7568 feature includes the necessary
mounting hardware to position the drive(s) in the DASD shroud, as well as
instructions on system setup and drive jumper positions.

    Formatted Capacity                        320 million bytes*
    Bytes/Sector                              512
    Sectors/Track                             48
    Cylinders                                 949 (data)
    Sector Buffer Size                        64Kb (read look-ahead)
    Number of Data Heads                      14
    Data Transfer Rate                        2.0Mbytes/s
    Average Seek Time                         12.5ms
    Average Latency                           6.95ms
    Disks                                     8
    Sector Interleave                         1to1
 * Actual user accessible capacity may vary slightly based
   on different operating environments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 238. 80486 PROCESSOR CARD UPGRADE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF January 6, 1993)

Part Number

Feature Code 6543

Bus Master  No

This feature provides the means to upgrade a 7568-040 or 7568-150 model (with
an 80386 processor card) to the 80486 processor card that comes standard in the
7568-C40.  The replacement processor card is provided without memory (the
memory on the installed 80386 processor card is to be removed and re-installed
on the 80486 processor card).  Both 2Mb or 4Mb memory modules are supported on
the 80486 processor card, but NOT when mixed on the card (either all 2Mb or all
4Mb memory modules must be installed).  A replacement system reference diskette
is also provided.  The old/new reference diskettes are not interchangeable in
that they support only the specific processor card version (old -80386, new -
80486).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 239. IBM 7554 TOUCHSELECT FOR 19-INCH DISPLAYS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  92F2213

Feature Code 6784

Bus Master  No

The IBM 7554 TouchSelect for 19-inch Displays is a customer installable feature
that brings touch screen operation to the IBM 7554 Industrial Graphics Display.
This feature is intended for application areas where touch is used for user
input and interaction.  The feature attaches easily to the 7554 display,
enabling customers with installed displays to upgrade to touch screen
operation.  The operation of the 7554 display is not affected by the addition
of the IBM 7554 TouchSelect.

Touch screen device drivers are supplied with the feature to support touch
operation with the IBM Disk Operating System (DOS), IBM OS/2* Standard Edition,
IBM OS/2 Extended Edition or Microsoft Windows 3.0 operating system. Maximum:
One.  Prerequisites:  Machine Requirements for operation of the IBM

7554 TouchSelect are as follows:

    o   The IBM 7554 Industrial Graphics Display
    o   An available Pointing Device Port on any model of the 7537, 7541, 7542,
        7546, 7561, 7562 and 7568.
    o   An available PS/2 Pointing Device Port on any model of the following PS/2
        systems:  30-286, 35 SX and LS, 40 SX, 50Z, 55 SX and LS, 57 SX, 60, 65
        SX, 70 386 and 486, P70 386 and 486, 80 386, 90 XP 486, 95 XP 486.

Programming Requirements and application support are as follows: Device Drivers
for Touch Operation:  Device drivers for touch operation are supplied with the
product for operation under the following operating systems:

    o   IBM Disk Operating System Versions 3.3, 4.0 and 5.0
    o   IBM Operating System/2 Standard Edition Versions 1.2 and 1.3 and IBM
        Operating System/2 Extended Edition Versions 1.2 and 1.3
        -   Presentation Manager
            Single button mouse emulation (identify and select) can be used for
            some Presentation Manager actions.  A mouse or keyboard is still
            required for actions normally assigned to mouse button 2.  The
            services of Presentation Manger may be used to reach an application
            that uses an OS/2 full screen session, and such an application may be
            written to operate in touch sensing mode.
            A Presentation Manager window application that chooses to operate in
            full touch sensing mode as opposed to mouse emulation mode must be
            aware that the application has full control of the touch device.  The
            application is responsible for translating the full screen touch
            coordinates to the coordinates of the Presentation Manager window.
            For supported operating systems, the IBM 7554 TouchSelect will
            operate in either single button PS/2 mouse emulation mode (identify
            and select) or full sensing mode (all parameters returned).  This is
            determined by the calls made to the touch device driver by the
            application software.
    o   Microsoft Windows 3.0

Application Support:  The IBM 7554 TouchSelect is supported by several enablers
and applications, including: Enablers:  Enablers are authoring and presentation
software packages that give the customer the tools to prepare very
sophisticated presentations that integrate images and text, including
full-motion video and voice, if desired.

    o   IBM M-Control Program/2
        The IBM M-Control Program/2 which includes program interfaces for IBM
        Disk Operating System and OS/2 Toolkit, provides functional support for
        application developers.
    o   Audio Visual Connection (R) Releases 1.03 and 1.04
        Audio Visual Connection is an application enabler for presentations
        including still-frame video, full-motion video, digitized video and
        hypertext.

Applications:

    o   Distributed Automation Edition (DAE)*
    o   PlantWorks*
    o   Paperless*
    o   IBM Executive Decisions/VM and IBM Executive Decisions/MVS:  These
        products provide a touch screen interface to business information,
        external news sources, electronic mail, address book and calendar
        information.
        Executive Decisions /VM and /MVS version 1.1.2 is only supported in VGA
        mode.
    o   IBM LinkWay*
        LinkWay is a hypermedia authoring system.
    o   IBM THINKable*
        THINKable is a versatile entry level tool for clinicians and researchers
        who provide and explore innovative remedial services for people with
        cognitive disorders.
    o   Applications generated for the IBM InfoWindow 4055 touch display may be
        run with the IBM 7554 TouchSelect in conjunction with the IBM Learning
        System/1 or the IBM InfoWindow Presentation System, the IBM M-Motion
        Video Adapter/A and the IBM M-DOS Control Program/2.

The IBM 7554 TouchSelect for 19-inch Displays is compatible with

    o   the IBM M-Motion Video Adapter/A, which gives full motion video support
        under M-Control Program/2 or Audio Visual Connection Release 1.04
    o   the IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter, and M-Audio Capture and
        Playback Adapter/A, which provide audio support under Audio Visual
        Connection Release 1.03 and 1.04.

Customer Set-up:  Yes. Limitations:  The touch screen functions provided by IBM
7554 TouchSelect can only be operated if the supplied touch device drivers are
installed.  It operates in full sensing mode if the application makes specific
calls. Otherwise operation will be in emulation mode for a PS/2 single button
mouse (identify and select).

The following are not supported:

    o   Applications dependent on two button mouse unless they can operate in
        single button mode with the sue of a real mouse or keyboard to provide
        the second button function.
    o   Levels of operating systems other than quoted in the Programming
        Requirements section.
    o   Personal Computer (5150), PC/XT (5160), PC AT(R) (5170), 3270 PC and PS/2
        Model 30 (8086 processor)
    o   PC/370 or derivatives auxiliary pointing device port on the IBM 7554
        TouchSelect.
    o   Japanese 3270PC coexistence (under IBM Disk Operating System J4.0X).

Field Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  A cable is attached to the display for
connection to the system unit pointing device port.  The customer is not
required to order any cables.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 240. IBM RADIO FREQUENCY TERMINAL MODELS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 7524 is a family of environmentally rugged Radio Frequency terminals
that allow the collection of data in a wireless environment.  This family of
wireless data collection terminals is designed for use on the manufacturing
plant floor or in other harsh conditions where a durable, portable terminal is
required.  The IBM 7524 can be used with a PC, PS/2, Industrial Computer,
AS/400, S/390, or RISC System/6000 computer as a wireless terminal to input and
retrieve data or access an application from anywhere within the local area
covered by the radio.  It is supported in a PC, PS/2, or Industrial Computer
environment with IBM 7524 Extended Terminal Services and support provided by
selected versions of the Data Collection Software.  The IBM 7524 is also
supported in AS/400 or S/390 applications by using 5250 or 3270 terminal
emulation, and with the RISC System/6000 by using VT/220 emulation.

With IBM 7524 Extended Terminal Services or terminal emulation (5250, 3270, or
VT220) data such as inventory, warehousing, shipping, receiving, or production
control information can be entered using the IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Terminal.
Any environment is conducive where running wires for the terminal is impossible
or inconvenient.

Any data on the host system can be updated online, ensuring the availability of
complete and current records.  Information on a host system is immediately
accessible from anywhere covered by the radio network, within the facility.

MODEL ABSTRACT 7524-101 The IBM 7524 Model 101 Radio Frequency Terminal is a
UHF portable, hand held terminal that uses a frequency in the UHF radio band
and operates with a host system using standard screen design aids to format
screens for any application.

MODEL ABSTRACT 7524-102 The IBM 7524 Model 102 Radio Frequency Terminal is an
SST portable, hand held terminal that uses spread spectrum technology (SST) in
the 902MHz to 928MHz radio band and operates with a host system using standard
screen design aids to format screens for any application.

MODEL ABSTRACT 7524-201 The IBM 7524 Model 201 Radio Frequency Terminal is a
UHF mobile mount terminal that operates the same as the hand held UHF terminal,
but is a rugged mobile rated terminal designed to be mounted on a fork lift
truck.

MODEL ABSTRACT 7524-202 The IBM 7524 Model 202 Radio Frequency Terminal is an
SST mobile mount terminal that operates the same as the hand held SST terminal
but is a rugged mobile rated terminal designed to be mounted on a fork lift
truck.

MODEL ABSTRACT 7524-301 The IBM 7524 Model 301 Radio Frequency Controller is
the control unit used in the radio frequency network to connect a UHF base
station to the host computer.

MODEL ABSTRACT 7524-302 The IBM 7524 Model 302 Radio Frequency Controller is
the control unit used in the radio frequency network to connect a SST base
station to the host computer.

MODEL ABSTRACT 7524-310 The IBM 7524 Model 310 Radio Frequency Controller is an
SST LAN Repeater used in the wired backbone of the SST network to re-drive the
communications line from the base station to the controller.

MODEL ABSTRACT 7524-401 The IBM 7524 Model 401 Radio Frequency Base Station is
the UHF base station used to connect the wireless UHF terminals to the radio
frequency backbone network.

MODEL ABSTRACT 7524-402 The IBM 7524 Model 402 Radio Frequency Base Station is
the SST base station used to connect the wireless SST terminals to the radio
frequency backbone network.

HIGHLIGHTS The IBM 7524 Radio Frequency products collectively provide the
following benefits:

    o   Wireless data collection, from either the full alpha-numeric
        keyboard, integrated bar code reader, or bar code wand at the
        source
    o   Transmission of the data, via radio frequency, directly to a PC,
        PS/2, Industrial Computer, S/390, AS/400, or RISC System/6000
        system
    o   Remote interactive updates of online host applications
    o   Immediate access to information:
        From anywhere covered by the radio frequency network:
        -   Ability to access data
        -   Ability to input data

"Real-time" radio frequency (RF) data collection systems vastly improve
productivity and control in manufacturing, warehousing/distribution,
transportation, and other application areas.

During manufacturing, the systems monitor work in process, aid quality control
and help with line staffing decisions.  In warehousing they assist with
picking, receiving, shipping, cycle counting, and put-away applications.

For transportation, RF helps track shipments, monitor cargo/container
transfers, and creates bills of lading.

The popularity of RF is exploding.  But to be most useful, RF networks must
rapidly complete data transactions between the hand-held terminals and the host
computers.  The amount of work a network performs can be measured by its data
throughput rate.

To achieve highest possible data rates we offer both ultra high frequency (UHF)
and spread spectrum technology (SST).  Under certain conditions, SST systems
can transmit data at higher rates than UHF systems.  But that speed advantage
is meaningless if other parts of the network are slowing data throughput.  A
data network is only as fast as its weakest link.

Now the IBM 7524 provides the total answer to speeding RF throughput.  All IBM
7524 components are designed to compliment one another for maximum performance,
reliability, and connectivity.  Components can include hand-held and fork truck
mounted, spread spectrum and UHF terminals, wireless and cabled base stations,
controllers, and LAN cabling.  The size and complexity of the network can be
unlimited.

To get the most performance and highest reliability from the IBM 7524, all
radio frequency systems require that a site survey be completed to insure that
all the terminals and related products operate properly together and at the
highest efficiency and data rate possible.

The site survey must be performed by someone trained, competent, and certified
to perform a site survey.

For information on obtaining a services contract to have a site survey
conducted or to have any other custom site installation or preparation
performed call 407-443-6201.

MODEL DESCRIPTION 7524-101 A UHF portable, hand held terminal.

MODEL DESCRIPTION 7524-201 A UHF mobile mount terminal.

MODEL DESCRIPTION 7524-202 An SST mobile mount terminal.

MODEL DESCRIPTION 7524-301 A UHF control unit.

MODEL DESCRIPTION 7524-302 An SST control unit.

MODEL DESCRIPTION 7524-310 An SST LAN Repeater.

MODEL DESCRIPTION 7524-401 A UHF base station.

MODEL DESCRIPTION 7524-402 An SST base station.

MODEL SUMMARY MATRIX

                           Product
  Model    Machine          Type
  -----  ------------  ----------------
   101   Terminal      UHF Portable
   102   Terminal      SST Portable
   201   Terminal      UHF Mobile
   202   Terminal      SST Mobile
   301   Controller    Control Unit
   302   Controller    Control Unit
   310   Controller    SST LAN Repeater
   401   Base Station  UHF Base Station
   402   Base Station  SST Base Station

The IBM 7524 is a family of wireless Radio Frequency products that operate
either SST or UHF.  SST and UHF can not be intermixed.  The controller is
connected to the host machine via RS232.  The family consists of various RF
terminals with either and integrated CCD or laser scanner, there is also a
model with no scanner available.  There are also base stations and controllers
available to fill out the Radio Frequency system.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

  IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Terminal (Portable):

  Width:   11.3cm (4.17 inches) Display, 7.5cm (2.62 inches) Body
  Depth:   6.5 - 9.5cm (2.6 - 3.75 inches) Display, varies with options
           3.4cm (1.38 inches) Body
  Length:  24.75 - 29.3cm (9.75 - 11.6 inches), varies with options
  Weight:  .8 - 1.0kg (1.75 - 2.2 lbs), varies with options

IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Terminal (Mobile Mount):

  Width:  31.75cm (12.50 inches)
  Depth:   7.62cm ( 3.00 inches)
  Height:  25.4cm (10.00 inches)
  Weight:  6.24kg (13.75 lbs)

  IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Controller:

  Width:    6.4cm ( 2.5 inches)
  Depth:   25.4cm (10.0 inches)
  Length:  21.6cm ( 8.5 inches)
  Weight:   2.7kg ( 6.0 lbs)

  IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Controller:

  Width:   17.14cm (6.75 inches)
  Depth:    5.08cm (2.00 inches)
  Length:  24.76cm (9.75 inches)
  Weight:   1.21kg (3.25 lbs)

  IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Base Station:

  Length:  12.8cm ( 5.0 inches)
  Width:   33.3cm (13.0 inches)
  Height:  75.6cm (20.5 inches)
  Weight:   5.5kg (12.0 lbs)

  IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Base Station:

  Length:  30.48cm (12.0 inches)
  Width:   16.25cm ( 6.4 inches)
  Height:   6.35cm ( 2.5 inches)
  Weight:   1.95kg ( 4.3 lbs)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT  IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Terminal (Portable):

  Temperature:
    Operating:   0 to +50 degrees C (+32 to +122 degrees F)
    Storage:   -30 to +70 degrees C (-22 to +158 degrees F)
    Recharging:  5 to 40 degrees C (+41 to +120 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity:  10 to 90 percent, non-condensing

  IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Terminal (Mobile Mount):

  Temperature:
    Operating:  -30 to +50 degrees C (-22 to +120 degrees F)
    Storage:    -30 to +70 degrees C (-22 to +120 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity:  0 to 90 percent, non-condensing

  IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Controller:

    Operating:  0 to 50 degrees C (+32 to +122 degrees F)
    Storage:  -40 to 70 degrees C (-40 to +158 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity:  0 to 90 percent, non-condensing

  IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Controller:

    Operating:  -20 to +50 degrees C (-4 to +122 degrees F)
    Storage:  -30 to +60 degrees C (-22 to +140 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity:  0 to 95 percent, non-condensing

  IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Base Station:

    Operating:    0 to 50 degrees C (32 to +122 degrees F)
    Storage:    -30 to 60 degrees C (-22 to +140 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity:  10 to 90 percent, non-condensing

  IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Base Station:

    Operating:  -20 to 50 degrees C (-4 to +122 degrees F)
    Storage:    -30 to 60 degrees C (-22 to +140 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity:  5 to 90 percent, non-condensing

The IBM 7524 Radio Frequency terminal family is designed to operate as a
hardened wireless terminal, in harsh environment, for a PC, PS/2, Industrial
Computer, AS/400, S/390, or RISC System/6000 computer.

The IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Control Units can be connected to any host system
that supports SNA interactive terminals.  Host systems that support 3270 SNA
(3278-2 on 3174), like S/390 mainframes can now serve as hosts for wireless
applications.  Connectivity of 5250 SNA (5250 on 5394) to the AS/400 is also
supported.

The IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Controller supports a total of 64 high speed SNA
sessions.  A range of SDLC line options is available, from RS232 at 2400 bps to
V.35 at 64Kbps.  Direct, remote, point-to-point, and multipoint connections are
also supported.  The IBM 7524 implementation of 3270 and 5250 support allows
existing applications to be run on the wireless network as well as new
applications to be added using existing system tools.

The IBM 7524 Radio Frequency Terminals operate with a PC, PS/2, or Industrial
Computer using the built in IBM 7524 support of selected versions of the Data
Collection Software, or with any host system using standard screen design aids
to format new or existing application screens to fit the screen size of the IBM
7524 displays.

SPECIAL FEATURE CODES -- CHARGEABLE

  Description                                 Type  Model  Feature
  ------------------------------------------  ----  -----  -------
  Radio Frequency Terminal (Portable/SST)     7524   101
  Radio Frequency:
     (Must Specify a RF frequency; the
     frequency is ordered by specifying
     either a primary frequency or an off-set
     frequency in the Remarks field of the AAS
     order.  This frequency is required before an
     order can be scheduled or built.)

  Factory-Installed Features:
    Must specify one from each group,
    limit quantity to one (1).
    ---------------------------
  Emulation Features (Must Specify One):
  UHF W/7524 Extended Terminal Services (Available 9/30/94)  1011
  UHF W/5250 Emulation                                       1013
  UHF W/3270 Emulation                                       1015
  UHF W/VT220 Emulation                                      1017

  Integrated Scanner Features
     (Must Specify One):
  None                                                       1020
  Internal CCD                                               1021
  Internal VLD                                               1022
  Internal Long range VLD                                    1023
  Internal VIN VLD                                           1024

  Battery Features (Must Specify One):
  NiCad Battery  (No Charge)                                 1101
  NIMH Battery                                               1103

ACCESSORIES

  Description                                              Feature
  -------------------------------------------------------  -------
  Accessories for use with 7524-001:
  Accessories for use with 7524-002:

  Bar Code Wand:
  External Wand                                              2575

  Spare Batteries:
  NiCad Battery                                              2576
  NIMH Battery                                               2577

  Vehicle Mounts:
  Powered Communications Adapter                             2578
  Unpowered Terminal Holder                                  2579

  Deskmount kit for Feature 2578                             2580
  Deskmount kit for Feature 2579                             2581
  Scanner Cup, works with all scanners and mounts            2582

  Vehicle Mount Cables:
  Nine-pin RS-232                                            2583
  Twenty-five pin RS-232                                     2584

  Battery Chargers:
  In Terminal Charger                                        2585
  Personal Pack Charger                                      2586

  Carrying Cases:
  For 7524-101                                               2593
  Carrying case belt                                         2595

  Environmental Carrying Cases:
  For 7524-101 with no Scanner                               2596
  For 7524-101 with CCD (FC 1021) or laser scanner (FC1022)  2597

  Miscellaneous:
  Scanning Handle for 7524-10x                               2600
  Holster for 7524-10x                                       2601
  Belt for holster, 30-38 inches                             2602
  Belt for holster, 38-50 inches                             2603

SPECIAL FEATURE CODES -- CHARGEABLE

  Description                                 Type  Model  Feature
  ------------------------------------------  ----  -----  -------
  Radio Frequency Terminal (Portable/SST)     7524   102

    Factory-Installed Features:
    Must specify one from each group,
    limit quantity to one (1).
    ---------------------------
  Emulation Features (Must Specify One):
  SST W/7524 Extended Terminal Services (Available 9/30/94)  1025
  SST W/5250 Emulation                                       1026
  SST W/3270 Emulation                                       1027
  SST W/VT220 Emulation                                      1028

  Integrated Scanner Features (Must Specify One):
  None                                                       1020
  Internal VLD                                               1022
  Internal Long range VLD                                    1023
  Internal VIN VLD                                           1024

  Battery Features (Must Specify One):
  NiCad Battery                                              1101
  NIMH Battery                                               1103

SPECIAL FEATURE CODES -- CHARGEABLE

  Description                                 Type  Model  Feature
  ------------------------------------------  ----  -----  -------
  Radio Frequency Terminal (Mobile Mount UHF) 7524   201

  Radio Frequency:
     (Must Specify a RF frequency; the
     frequency is ordered by specifying
     either a primary frequency or an off-set
     frequency in the Remarks field of the AAS
     order.  This frequency is required before an
     order can be scheduled or built.)

   Factory-Installed Features:
   Must specify one from each group,
   limit quantity to one (1).
   ---------------------------
  Emulation Features (Must Specify One):
  UHF W/7524 Extended Terminal Services (Available 9/30/94)  2011
  UHF W/3270 Emulation                                       2013
  UHF W/5250 Emulation                                       2015
  UHF W/VT220 Emulation                                      2017

  Installation Features:
  Fork Lift Installation Kit                                 2041
  Desk Mount Installation Kit                                2042

  Temperature Range:
  Low Temperature Operation Feature UHF                      2201

ACCESSORIES

  Description                                              Feature
  -------------------------------------------------------  -------
  Accessories for use with 7524-201:

  Additional Fork Lift Installation Kit                      2604
  Desktop  Installation Kit                                  2605

SPECIAL FEATURE CODES -- CHARGEABLE

  Description                                 Type  Model  Feature
  ------------------------------------------  ----  -----  -------
  Radio Frequency Terminal (Mobile Mount SST) 7524   202
        (Includes mounting kit)

   Factory-Installed Features:
   Must specify one from each group,
   limit quantity to one (1).
   ---------------------------
  Emulation Features (Must Specify One):
  SST W/7524 Extended Terminal Services (Available 9/30/94)  2012
  SST W/5250 Emulation                                       2014
  SST W/3270 Emulation                                       2016
  SST W/VT220 Emulation                                      2018

  Installation Features:
  Fork Lift Installation Kit                                 2041
  Desk Mount Installation Kit                                2042

  Temperature Range:
  Low Temperature Operation Feature SST                      2202

ACCESSORIES

  Description                                              Feature
  -------------------------------------------------------  -------
  Accessories for use with 7524-202:

  Additional Fork Lift Installation Kit                      2604
  Desktop  Installation Kit                                  2605

  Accessories for use with SST RS-485 Network:

  SST LAN Repeater Install Kit                               2617
  SST LAN Splice Kit                                         2618
  LAN Connect Kit                                            2619
  3 dB Antenna Kit (Remote Antenna)                          2620
  LAN "Y" Adapter                                            2621
  LAN Coupling Transformer                                   2622
  LAN Terminator                                             2623
  LAN Terminator/Coupling Transformer                        2624
  DE9M Connector                                             2625
  DE9F Connector                                             2626
  Connector Housing                                          2627
  Contact Pins                                               2628
  Copper Tape (Roll)                                         2629
  DE9M Male Ribbon Connector                                 2630
  DE9F Female Ribbon Connector                               2631
  Ribbon Cable (per quantity = 12 inches)                    2632

SPECIAL FEATURE CODES -- CHARGEABLE

  Description                                 Type  Model  Feature
  ------------------------------------------  ----  -----  -------
  Radio Frequency Controller (UHF)            7524   301

   Factory-Installed Features:
   Must specify one from each group,
   limit quantity to one (1).
   ---------------------------
  Emulation Features (Must Specify One):
  UHF W/5250 Emulation                                       3013
  UHF W/3270 Emulation                                       3015
  UHF W/ASYNC (used with VT220 and 7524 ETS)                 3017

  Server Code for Host Computer (Optional):
  Native Server for AIX                                      3019
  Native Server for AIX Additional Site License              3020

ACCESSORIES

  Description                                              Feature
  -------------------------------------------------------  -------
  Accessories for use with 7524-301:

  Vertical Wall-mount kit                                    2606
  V.35 Direct Synch Cable with                               2607
     GMCT34 Female connector
  V.35 Modem  Synch Cable with                               2609
     GMCT34 Male connector
  RS-232 direct Synch or Asynch with                         2610
     25-pin male conn. to host, 25 ft
  RS-232 direct Synch or Asynch with                         2611
     25-pin male conn. to host, 50 ft
  RS-232 direct Synch or Asynch with                         2612
     DB25 female conn. to host, 25 ft
  RS-232 direct Synch or Asynch with                         2613
     DB25 female conn. to host, 50 ft
  RS-232 Modem Synch or Asynch with                          2614
     DB25 male conn. to host, 6  ft
  RS-232 Modem Synch or Asynch with                          2615
     DB25 male conn. to host, 25 ft
  RS-232 Modem Synch or Asynch with                          2616
     DB25 male conn. to host, 50 ft
  SST Installation Kit                                       2644

SPECIAL FEATURE CODES -- CHARGEABLE

  Description                                 Type  Model  Feature
  ------------------------------------------  ----  -----  -------
  Radio Frequency Controller (SST)            7524   302

   Factory-Installed Features:
   Must specify one from each group,
   limit quantity to one (1).
   ---------------------------
  Emulation Features (Must Specify One):
  SST W/5250 Emulation                                       3014
  SST W/3270 Emulation                                       3016
  SST W/ASYNC (used with VT220 and 7524 ETS)                 3018

ACCESSORIES

  Description                                              Feature
  -------------------------------------------------------  -------
  Accessories for use with 7524-302:

  Vertical Wall-mount kit                                    2606
  V.35 Direct Synch Cable with                               2607
     GMCT34 Female connector
  V.35 Modem  Synch Cable with                               2609
     GMCT34 Male connector
  RS-232 direct Synch or Asynch with                         2610
     25-pin male conn. to host, 25 ft
  RS-232 direct Synch or Asynch with                         2611
     25-pin male conn. to host, 50 ft
  RS-232 direct Synch or Asynch with                         2612
     DB25 female conn. to host, 25 ft
  RS-232 direct Synch or Asynch with                         2613
     DB25 female conn. to host, 50 ft
  RS-232 Modem Synch or Asynch with                          2614
     DB25 male conn. to host, 6  ft
  RS-232 Modem Synch or Asynch with                          2615
     DB25 male conn. to host, 25 ft
  RS-232 Modem Synch or Asynch with                          2616
     DB25 male conn. to host, 50 ft
  SST Installation Kit                                       2644

  Accessories for use with SST RS-485 Network:

  SST LAN Repeater Install Kit                               2617
  SST LAN Splice Kit                                         2618
  LAN Connect Kit                                            2619
  3 dB Antenna Kit (Remote Antenna)                          2620
  LAN "Y" Adapter                                            2621
  LAN Coupling Transformer                                   2622
  LAN Terminator                                             2623
  LAN Terminator/Coupling Transformer                        2624
  DE9M Connector                                             2625
  DE9F Connector                                             2626
  Connector Housing                                          2627
  Contact Pins                                               2628
  Copper Tape (Roll)                                         2629
  DE9M Male Ribbon Connector                                 2630
  DE9F Female Ribbon Connector                               2631
  Ribbon Cable (per quantity = 12 inches)                    2632

SPECIAL FEATURE CODES -- CHARGEABLE

  Description                                 Type  Model  Feature
  ------------------------------------------  ----  -----  -------
  Radio Frequency Controller
    (SST LAN Repeater)                        7524   310

  None

ACCESSORIES

  Description                                              Feature
  -------------------------------------------------------  -------
  Accessories for use with 7524-310:

  Vertical Wall-mount kit                                    2606
  V.35 Direct Synch Cable with                               2607
     GMCT34 Female connector
  V.35 Modem  Synch Cable with                               2609
     GMCT34 Male connector
  RS-232 direct Synch or Asynch with                         2610
     25-pin male conn. to host, 25 ft
  RS-232 direct Synch or Asynch with                         2611
     25-pin male conn. to host, 50 ft
  RS-232 direct Synch or Asynch with                         2612
     DB25 female conn. to host, 25 ft
  RS-232 direct Synch or Asynch with                         2613
     DB25 female conn. to host, 50 ft
  RS-232 Modem Synch or Asynch with                          2614
     DB25 male conn. to host, 6  ft
  RS-232 Modem Synch or Asynch with                          2615
     DB25 male conn. to host, 25 ft
  RS-232 Modem Synch or Asynch with                          2616
     DB25 male conn. to host, 50 ft
  SST Installation Kit                                       2644

  Accessories for use with SST RS-485 Network:

  SST LAN Repeater Install Kit                               2617
  SST LAN Splice Kit                                         2618
  LAN Connect Kit                                            2619
  3 dB Antenna Kit (Remote Antenna)                          2620
  LAN "Y" Adapter                                            2621
  LAN Coupling Transformer                                   2622
  LAN Terminator                                             2623
  LAN Terminator/Coupling Transformer                        2624
  DE9M Connector                                             2625
  DE9F Connector                                             2626
  Connector Housing                                          2627
  Contact Pins                                               2628
  Copper Tape (Roll)                                         2629
  DE9M Male Ribbon Connector                                 2630
  DE9F Female Ribbon Connector                               2631
  Ribbon Cable (per quantity = 12 inches)                    2632

SPECIAL FEATURE CODES -- CHARGEABLE

  Description                                 Type  Model  Feature
  ------------------------------------------  ----  -----  -------
  Radio Base (UHF)                            7524   401

  Radio Frequency:
     (Must Specify a RF frequency; the
     frequency is ordered by specifying
     either a primary frequency or an off-set
     frequency in the Remarks field of the AAS
     order.  This frequency is required before an
     order can be scheduled or built.)

  Mandatory feature:
   (Configure one of below based on
   Radio/Interface /Packaging
   feature specified)
  Power supply for FC 4011 4012                              2203
  Power supply for FC 4013 4014                              2204

  Factory-Installed Features:
   Must specify one from each group,
   limit quantity to one (1).
   ---------------------------
  Radio/Interface/Packaging Features (Must Specify One):
  UHF W/RS-232 interface                                     4011
  UHF W/RS-422 interface                                     4012
  UHF W/RS-232 and NEMA-12 enclosure                         4013
  UHF W/RS-422 and NEMA-12 enclosure                         4014

ACCESSORIES

  Description                                              Feature
  -------------------------------------------------------  -------
  Accessories for use with 7524-401:

  Extra power supply for 7524-401                            2645
     which has FC 4011 or 4012 (non-NEMA4)

  5dB Magnetic Mount Antenna                                 2647
  1/4 Wave Ground Antenna                                    2648
  10dB YAGI Antenna                                          2649
  6dB Pole Antenna                                           2650

  RG58/U 5' BNC plug/UHF plug                                2651
  RG213/U 18' BNC plug/UHF plug                              2652
  RG213/U 36' BNC plug/UHF plug                              2653
  RG213/U 50' BNC plug/UHF plug                              2654
  RG213/U 75' BNC plug/UHF plug                              2655
  RG213/U 100'BNC plug/UHF plug                              2656
  RG58/U 5' BNC plug-in jack                                 2657
  RG58/U 18' BNC plug-in jack                                2658
  RG213/U 5' BNC plug-in jack                                2659
  RG213/U 18' BNC plug-in jack                               2660
  RG213/U 36' BNC plug-in jack                               2661
  RG213/U 50' BNC plug-in jack                               2662
  RG213/U 75' BNC plug-in jack                               2663
  RG213/U 100'BNC plug-in jack                               2664

  1dB Attenuator                                             2665
  2dB Attenuator                                             2666
  3dB Attenuator                                             2667
  6dB Attenuator                                             2668
  10dB Attenuator                                            2669
  20dB Attenuator                                            2670
  49dB Attenuator                                            2671
  Metal Shield                                               2672

SPECIAL FEATURE CODES -- CHARGEABLE

  Description                                 Type  Model  Feature
  ------------------------------------------  ----  -----  -------
  Radio Base (SST with RS-485 Network)        7524   402

  Factory-Installed Features:
   Must specify one from each group,
   limit quantity to one (1).
   ---------------------------
  Radio Features (Must have both):
  SST W/RS485 LAN connection                                 4015
  Flash memory loading                                       4017

ACCESSORIES

  Description                                              Feature
  -------------------------------------------------------  -------
  Accessories for use with 7524-402:

  Install kit for 7524-402                                   2633

  Accessories for use with SST RS-485 Network:

  SST LAN Repeater Install Kit                               2617
  SST LAN Splice Kit                                         2618
  LAN Connect Kit                                            2619
  3 dB Antenna Kit (Remote Antenna)                          2620
  LAN "Y" Adapter                                            2621
  LAN Coupling Transformer                                   2622
  LAN Terminator                                             2623
  LAN Terminator/Coupling Transformer                        2624
  DE9M Connector                                             2625
  DE9F Connector                                             2626
  Connector Housing                                          2627
  Contact Pins                                               2628
  Copper Tape (Roll)                                         2629
  DE9M Male Ribbon Connector                                 2630
  DE9F Female Ribbon Connector                               2631
  Ribbon Cable (per quantity = 12 inches)                    2632
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 241. 7525 DATA COLLECTION TERMINAL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

7525 001, 002, 003, and 004 (NO LONGER AVAILABLE IN US, APRIL 21, 1992)

The IBM 7525 Data Collection Terminal is a compact, microprocessor based unit
that attaches to the terminal control computer.  The terminal function is
personalized by a user created download from the host.  The IBM 7525 DCT has
four models to support bar code and/or magnetic input.  The terminal is
designed to operate in an industrial environment.

MODEL 1  001

Includes keyboard, display, and bar code wand port.

MODEL 2  002

Includes all features of the Model 001, plus a visible light bar code slot
reader.

MODEL 3  003

Includes all features of the Model 001, plus an infrared bar code slot reader.

MODEL 4  004

Includes all features of the Model 001, plus a magnetic slot reader.

The IBM 7525 Data Collection Terminal is microprocessor based and attaches to
the IBM 7531 and 7532 Industrial Computers, IBM Personal Computer AT (except
AT/370), and IBM Personal System/2 Models 30, 50, 50Z and 60.  The terminal
attaches to the terminal control computer via an asynchronous serial RS-422
interface.  Up to 16 terminals can be attached to each RS-422 communications
port in the terminal control computer.  A desk mount accessory, wall mount
accessory, or a customer provided power supply is required by the 7525 Data
Collection terminal.

The terminal attaches to the host computer via an asynchronous serial RS-422
interface. Each terminal is addressable, and up to 16 terminals can be attached
to each RS-422 communications port located in the host computer. All models of
the IBM 7525 DCT are customer setup.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides a range of four models for flexible configuration.
    o   One line by 40 character LCD display.
    o   25Kb memory with capacitive backup available to user.
    o   Provides audible and visual feedback to operator.
    o   Combination membrane keyboard with 12 numeric (includes nine special
        characters) and 28 alpha/function keys.
    o   Provides magnetic and bar code reading.
    o   An RS-422 electrical interface allows attachment to the host computer.
    o   A self test diagnostic mode initiated at power on.

The IBM 7525 Data Collection Terminal is a compact data collection device
capable of reading bar codes, magnetic stripes or keyboard input.  Built to
withstand the physical conditions of the industrial environment, the IBM 7525
DCT provides a reliable terminal for data entry requirements.

The IBM 7525 Data Collection Terminal is available in four models:

    o   Model 001 with keyboard, display, and bar code wand input.
    o   Model 002 with all the features of the Model 001, plus a bar code slot
        reader with the capability of reading Code 3 of 9, UPC-A, interleaved 2
        of 5, EAN 8 and EAN 13.
    o   Model 003 with all the features of the Model 001, plus an infrared bar
        code slot reader with the capability of reading Code 3 of 9, UPC-A,
        interleaved 2 of 5, EAN 8 and EAN 13.
    o   Model 004 with all the features of the model 001, plus a magnetic slot
        reader with a read capability for Track 2 or full-width encoding ABA
        standard format, F/2F encoding.

The IBM 7525 Data Collection Terminal is easy to set up and simple to use. All
models offer a 40-key membrane keyboard which includes 12 numeric (including 9
special characters) and 28 user-definable function keys.  A changeable keyboard
overlay allows the user to tailor the terminal to address specific need.

All models of the IBM 7525 Data Collection Terminal support four varieties of
bar code wands.  The user can select visible light or infrared light bar code
wands that offer high resolution (six mil aperture) or low resolution (ten mil
aperture).  The terminal also supports customized mounting options by providing
either a desk or wall mount. These desk and wall mount options come with a
power supply unit.  A desk mount accessory, wall mount accessory, or a customer
supplied power supply is required by the 7525 Data Collection Terminal.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Width:  356mm (14 inches)
    Depth:  191mm (7.5 inches)
    Height:  38mm (1.5 inches)
    Weight:  2.3kg (5 pounds)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 242. 7526 DATA COLLECTION TERMINAL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM 7526 Data Collection Terminal (DCT) models 100, 150, 155, and 200
enhance the IBM DCT family and can provide an all IBM solution using an
Industrial Computer or PS/2* system unit as the data collection controller. The
7526 can reside on the same communications line and utilize the same software
as the IBM 7525 and 7527 DCTs.  All read devices are the same as the 7527.

HIGHLIGHTS All models include:

    o   RS-422/485 upstream communications port
    o   Bar code and/or magnetic input from wands and slot readers
    o   Eight points of DI or DO
    o   Upgrade-able memory to 256KB

IBM 7526 MODEL 100

    o   One-line-by-sixteen-character back-lit display.
    o   32KB minimum memory
    o   Keypad with eight keys

IBM 7526 MODEL 150

    o   Two-line-by-forty-character back-lit display.
    o   32KB minimum memory.
    o   Keypad with eight function keys, ten numeric keys, shift key and
        enter key.

IBM 7526 MODEL 155

    o   Two-line-by-forty-character back-lit display.
    o   128KB minimum memory.
    o   Keypad with eight function keys, ten numeric keys, shift key and
        enter key
    o   Optional integrated bar code or magnetic badge slot reader
    o   Cover set suitable for a business office environment.

IBM 7526 MODEL 200

    o   Two-line-by-forty-character back-lit display.
    o   128KB minimum memory.
    o   Keyboard with 40 keys for functions and characters.

The 7526 Data Collection Terminal supports the customer business objectives by
providing bar code and magnetic reading capability required by many users, in a
product that is capable of performing in difficult environments and with
protection against brief power interruptions. The 7526 Data Collection
Terminal, with its selection of features, provides a solution for a wide range
of applications.  The terminal will support Custom Function Routines (CFR's)
and user variables.

Along with other terminals of the Data Collection family, it can provide a Data
Collection Solution on the plant floor and other areas with demanding
environments and the need for data integrity through power fluctuations.

The high degree of compatibility between the 7526 and the other IBM Data
Collection terminals (7525 and 7527) protects the investment the customer has
made in hardware and software. The available upgrade capability for memory and
bar code decode will protect the investment in the 7526 should customer needs
in these areas change after the initial product purchase.

The 7526 increases user productivity by providing easy to read display
information, 2 programmable LED's for visual feedback and an adjustable volume
speaker for audible feedback. There are standard features which allow both bar
code and magnetic wands and readers to be used on the same unit and up to 8
points of digital input and/or digital output.  The 7526 is easily installable
with either wall or bench mounting. A box mount environmental sealing gasket
kit is available for models 100, 150 and 200 to allow mounting the product in a
customer provided enclosure.

The 7526 Data Collection Terminal supports growth through its wide selection of
optional features.  The standard 32KB memory of the model 100 and 150 can be
upgraded to 160KB by addition of the 128KB memory upgrade feature, or to 256KB
by removal of the 32KB standard memory and installation of a second 128KB
memory upgrade.  The model 155 and 200 standard memory of 128KB may be upgraded
to 256KB by addition of one 128KB memory upgrade.  The base 7526 may be
configured to read 3 of 9, Interleaved 2 of 5, UPC or EAN bar codes.  Only one
code may be configured at a time.  The bar code decoding coprocessor feature
provides support of additional bar code symbols in the 7526 Data Collection
Terminal, on input port A.

The IBM 7526 models 100 and 200 supports U.S. English and National Languages
for U.K.  English, French, Canadian French, German, Italian, Spanish, Danish,
Finnish, Dutch, Norwegian, Portuguese, and Swiss.  The displays support a
subset of Personal Computer Code Page 850. The installation documentation and
publications are available in some national languages.

MODEL 100 One-line-by-16 character display, 8-key keypad.

MODEL 150 Two-line-by-40 character display, 20-key keypad.

MODEL 155 Two-line-by-40 character display, 20-key keypad, office covers.

MODEL 200 Two-line-by-40 character display, 40-key alphanumeric.  keyboard

A maximum of 32 7526 terminals may be installed on each RS-422/485
communications port in the IC/PC controller.

The IBM 7526 data collection terminal Models 100, 150, 155 and 200 are Customer
Set Up.

The IBM 7526 data collection terminal utilizes a V25 PLUS microprocessor which
is derated to run at 8 MHz (using a 16 MHz crystal) because of the extended
operating temperature range of the terminal. The V25 PLUS is a 16-bit
microcomputer with an 8-bit external data bus. It is 8086/8088 compatible with
integrated PPI, interrupt controller, two 16 bit timers, programmable wait
state generator and two independent full duplex serial channels.

There is a total of 128K bytes of ROM/EPROM for microcode.

There are two RAM sockets, each capable of accepting either 32K x 8 static RAM
or 128K x 8 static RAM.  The model 100 and 150 will be populated with a single
32KB module as standard equipment, and the model 155 and 200 will be populated
with a single 128KB module. The unit has intelligent addressing so that any
configuration of 32KB and/or 128KB modules (except 0 RAM) is allowed.

The processor card has two bar code/magnetic sensor ports. The same circuitry
is used in the 7525-001/2/3/4 but the connector is wired the same as the 7527.
Also supported are 3 LED-controlling DO points per port.

There are eight points of DI/DO configurable four bits wide. The interface
circuitry is similar to the 7527 and the connector is wired the same. In
addition, the DI points create a processor interrupt upon state changes.  The
audio sound is generated by a piezo-electric buzzer. The volume is controlled
by a digital potentiometer for which the microcode will provide
operator-adjustability. Two front-panel LEDs (yellow and green) are
independently programmable.

Three different keyboards are supported.  The model 100 has 8 keys, the model
150 and 155 has 20 keys, and the model 200 has 40 keys. Also two different LCD
displays are supported. The model 100 has a 1-line-by-16 character, LED
backlit, extended-temperature integrated LCD display.  Models 150, 155, and 200
have 2-line-by-40 character, LED backlit, extended-temperature LCD displays.
The contrast is controlled by a digital potentiometer for which the microcode
provides operator-adjustability.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Models 100, 150 and 200:
            Width:  279 mm  (11 inches)
            Depth:  63.5 mm (2.5 inches)
            Height: 178 mm  (7  inches)
            Weight: 2.2 kg  (5 lbs)
    o   Model 155:
            Width:  320 mm (12.6 inches)
            Depth:  100 mm ( 4  inches)
            Height: 280 mm  (11 inches)
            Weight: 2.7 kg  (6 lbs)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT:

    o   Models 100, 150, 155, and 200:
            Temperature:  -20 to 50.0C (-4 to 122F)
            Relative Humidity:  5 to 95 percent
            Wet Bulb:  30.0C (86F)

A maximum of 32 7526 terminals may be installed on each RS-422/485
communications port in the terminal control computer.

The IBM 7526 Data Collection Terminal is micro-processor-based which attaches
to the following:

    o   IBM 7531, 7532 (except model 310), 7552, 7541, 7542, 7561, 7562,
        7537, 7546;
    o   GEARBOX* Model 800 Industrial Computers
    o   the IBM Personal Computer AT*
    o   PS/2 Models 30, 30-286, 40, 50, 50Z, 55SX, 57, 60, 70, 80, 90,
        95.

The 7526 terminal connects to the terminal control via an asynchronous serial
RS-422/485 interface. Up to 32 terminals can be attached to each RS-422
communications port in the terminal control computer.

The following programs support the 7526 Data Collection Terminal:

    o   Plant Floor Series - DATA COLLECTION EDITION
        -   DOS Products
            --  Data Collector
            --  5250 & MAPICS Data Services
            --  3270 & COPICS Data Services
        -   OS/2 Products
            --  Data Collection Control/2
            --  Data Collector for Distributed Application Environment
            --  Host Interactive Screen Support/2 PRPQ
    o   Distributed Application Environment - Data Collection Device Support/2

SPECIAL FEATURES

   Description               Machine(s)     Model(s)   Feature(s)
   --------------------      ----------     --------   ----------
   Data Collection Terminal    7526           100
   Data Collection Terminal    7526           150
   Data Collection Terminal    7526           155
   Data Collection Terminal    7526           200
   BC Slot Reader Visible      7526           155          4248
   BC Slot Reader Infrared     7526           155          4249
   Magnetic Badge Reader       7526           155          4250
   DI/DO Cable-Four Position   7526      100,150,155,200   4257
   Hi-perf BCR Coproc          7526      100,150,155,200   5293
   Mem Expansion Opt           7526      100,150,155,200   5296
   Box-Mnt Env Seal Gasket     7526          100,150,200   5298
   Oper Battery Pack           7526      100,150,155,200   5302
   Power Supply 100-125 VAC    7526      100,150,155,200   5305
   BC/Mag Sensor Ext Cable     7526      100,150,155,200   6637
   Magnetic Badge Reader       7526          100,150,200   6638
   BC Wand Low Res Visible     7526      100,150,155,200   6642
   BC Wand Med Res Visible     7526      100,150,155,200   6643
   BC Wand High Res Infrared   7526      100,150,155,200   6644
   BC Slot Reader Visible      7526          100,150,200   6645
   BC Slot Reader Infrared     7526          100,150,200   6646
   Magnetic Doc Slot Reader    7526      100,150,155,200   6647
   Magnetic Wand Reader        7526      100,150,155,200   6648
   BC Wand Mount Kit           7526      100,150,155,200   6652
   Badge Slot Reader Mount Kit 7526          100,150,200   6653
   Mag Wand Mount Kit          7526      100,150,155,200   6655

One of the following no charge feature codes must be selected when ordering the
7526 model 100 or 200 data collection terminal.  Information on the keypads
does not require translation for the model 150 and 155.

      Keyboard Inserts
                                    7526                Feature
      Language                      Model               Number

      English                       100, 200            5626
      French                        100                 5310
                                    200                 5327
      German                        100                 5313
                                    200                 5335
      Italian                       100                 5315
                                    200                 5342
      Spanish                       100                 5317
                                    200                 5349
      Portuguese                    100                 5319
                                    200                 5356
      Dutch                         100                 5323

ACCESSORIES

  Description                Machine          Models        Part #
   Network Junction Box        7526      100,150,155,200   33F9763
   DI/DO Cable-Eight Position  7526      100,150,155,200   33F5180
   Comm Drop Cable             7526      100,150,155,200   33F5182
   Junction Box Cable          7526      100,150,155,200   33F5184
   Dual Port Artic Cable       7526      100,150,155,200   85F0124
   Multiport/2 Artic Cable     7526      100,150,155,200   85F0125
   Portmaster/Multiport Cbl    7526      100,150,155,200   85F0126
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 243. 7684 IBM TOUCHMOBILE SYSTEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Touchmobile system consists of:

    o   IBM 7684 Portable Data Collection Terminal (PDCT) Model 002
    o   IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station (SDS) Model 001
    o   IBM 7686 Vehicle Docking Station (VDS) Model 001

The IBM 7684 PDCT is an environmentally hardened, light weight, battery
powered, hand held computer containing an LCD display, full screen touch panel,
integrated non-contact laser scanner, real time clock, and an audible alarm.

It has been designed for mobile workers whose normal environment may be vehicle
based (pickup and delivery, service, route sales, etc.), on a dock or
manufacturing floor, or within a distribution center.

The PDCT includes an infrared link for communication and an untethered stylus
for signature capture.

Data may be entered by any combination of:

    1.  Finger or stylus on the touch screen
    2.  Stylus for signatures
    3.  Integrated laser bar code scanner

The PDCT screen has a user friendly interface.  Icons, text, and graphics may
be displayed to ease the worker through a series of work-related tasks.

The IBM 7685 SDS is intended for use at a central location. It contains 16
slots for 7684s, charging control circuits, an infrared transceiver, and an
RS-485 port for communication with a personal computer. It provides two
functions:

    -   Upload/download of data and programs
    -   Recharging of the 7684 Portable Data Collection Terminals

An RS-485 communication link  allows up to eight, IBM 7685s to be multi-dropped
along a maximum cable length of 2,000 feet. TouchMobile DOS for IBM 7684 PDCT
is included in IBM 7685 ship group.

The 7686 VDS is a vehicle mounted unit that secures the 7684 unit during
travel.  It provides for trickle charging of the 7684 unit. A single RS-232
serial port allows for the attachment of an I/O device to the VDS. Data may be
communicated between the IBM 7686 and the 7684 unit via the infrared serial
port.

HIGHLIGHTS IBM 7684 Portable Data Collection Terminal (PDCT):

    o   Environmentally Hardened Data Collection Terminal
    o   Light Weight
    o   Finger or stylus on the touch screen
    o   Stylus for signatures
    o   Integrated laser bar code scanner

IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station (SDS):

    o   Infrared link to communicate with IBM 7684 PDCT
    o   Upload/download of data and programs
    o   Recharging of up to 16 IBM 7684 PDCT's

IBM 7686 Vehicle Docking Station (VDS):

    o   Provides vehicle mounting of IBM 7684 PDCT
    o   IR link to communicate with IBM 7684 PDCT
    o   Trickle charges IBM 7684 PDCT

Product design enables increased productivity for many functions.  Users can
capture information on item pick up and delivery, capture bar code data through
the scanner, capture signatures, send and receive data/messages with
appropriate OEM communications equipment, store and display work instructions
to the user, record work action through a touch screen interface, all in a hand
held compact terminal.

The design of the product includes functions which allow application
development for dissemination and recording of work related information, bar
code scanning, signature capture, and communication of data/messages, enabling
the using organization to eliminate paperwork, multiple manually prepared forms
and associated data entry otherwise needed for related applications.  This
contributes to a significant cycle time reduction and improving customer
service by providing access to delivery and location status or work status.

Additional functions and additional applications are made practical with
minimum investment of resources for application development, training, testing
and installation compared to traditional product approaches.

Application Developer productivity should be greatly enhanced due to the
functions of the application concept, the user interface (touch sensitive
screen presentation), the automated distribution and installation of new
applications and application changes, together with the features of the
Application Generator program.

MODEL 002 IBM 7684 Portable Data Collection Terminal (PDCT)

MODEL 001 IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station (SDS)

MODEL 001 IBM 7686 Vehicle Docking Station (VDS)

IBM 7684 PDCT is a battery powered, hand held device.  It contains an 80C88
microprocessor, 1.5MB system storage, 64K ROM, audible alarm (beeper), LCD
display, touch panel, and a barcode scanner.  Also included is an untethered
stylus for signature capture, power management features and an infrared link
for communications.

The processor for IBM 7684 PDCT is an 80C88 running at 4.77 or 8 MHz.  The
default speed is 8 MHz.  IN addition an I/O processor is also provided.
following functions are supported:

    o   Beeper control
    o   Timer clock generator
    o   System clocks
    o   Real time clock
    o   Bus controller
    o   DMA controller
    o   Interrupt controller
    o   Memory interface
    o   Power management

IBM 7684 PDCT has 1.5MB of main system storage for programming and data. A real
time clock that combines a complete time-of-day clock with alarm, a one hundred
year calendar, and a programmable periodic interrupt.

The 82C425 is a display controller module.  It is compatible with the IBM CGA
display adapter after initialization.  It supports 80 x 25 and 40 x 25 text
modes and 640 x 200 CGA graphics mode.

The LCD display is a 640 x 200 pixel liquid crystal display with cathode
fluorescent backlighting.  The visual area of the display is 73 mm by 163 mm,
and the pixel area is 70 mm by 160 mm with a dotpitch of .35 mm by .25 mm. The
display will support character or graphics mode.  The contrast is software
adjustable.

The touch overlay is mounted above the display surface.  This overlay is
sensitive to touch by the operator's finger or by an untethered stylus and is
used by attached controller to derive position information.  Device drivers are
used to pass information to the application program for processing.  The
signature capture resolution is 256 dots per inch.

The stylus is an electronic assembly which broadcasts to and receives signals
from the IBM 7684 Model 002 TouchMobile Data Collection Terminal, allowing it
to be untethered.  The stylus consists of a plastic housing shaped like a
conventional pen containing circuitry powered by a battery.  As the stylus
approaches the touch screen surface, it takes priority over finger touch
providing hand rejection during signature capture.

The bar code scanner uses a visible laser diode light.  The scanner and has a
working distance from 0 to 12 inches, depending on the narrow bar element, with
a maximum field width of 20 inches.  Bar codes supported are Code 39, UPC A and
E, EAN 8 and 13, interleaved 2 of 5, Codabar, and Code 128.  The scanner
auto-discriminates between the codes.

Communication between IBM 7684 PDCT and the IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station
(SDS) is via a half duplex serial infrared communication port.  The BAUD rate
is 19,200 BAUD.  The baud rate for IBM 7684 PDCT and the IBM 7685 Stationary
Docking Station (SDS) must be the same for proper communication. Main battery
type - 7.2 VDC, 1.7 amp-hours, rechargeable nickel-cadmium.

Backup battery type - 3.6 VDC, 110 ma-hours, rechargeable nickel-cadmium. The
main battery along with backup battery will power memory for up to 14 days.
FCC Classification:  Class B.

IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station (SDS) is intended for use at a central
location where IBM 7684 PDCTs which have been used to receive data in the field
are returned.  At the central location the IBM 7684 PDCTs are inserted in the
IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station (SDS) where they are stored.

While inserted in the IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station (SDS) the IBM 7684
PDCTs are recharged. While recharging, information can be sent to or received
from the host.

The IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station (SDS) has three major functions:

    o   Charging
    The IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station (SDS) contains 16 slots for
    IBM 7684 PDCTs and monitors the charge rate, charges the IBM 7684
    PDCTs and automatically prevents overcharging.
    o   Communications
    The IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station (SDS) processor is capable of
    sending and receiving data and commands via the RS-485 half duplex
    serial port at 19,200 BAUD.
    o   Diagnostics
    The IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station (SDS) processor can be given
    commands from the personal computer diagnostics to help detect and
    identify failing system components.
    It also performs a power-on diagnostic test and reports errors.

The IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station (SDS) power supply is used to power the
processor card and charging circuits for 16 IBM 7684 Model 002 TouchMobile Data
Collection Terminals. Input:

    o   115 and 230 V AC +/- 10 percent; 50 or 60 Hz

Output:

    o   9.6 volts DC
    o   18 amps maximum continuous

Charger Rates Each charger circuit (16 total) is independent of any other
charging circuit. The following conditions are supported by any charging
circuit when from 0 to 16 circuits in the IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station
(SDS) are fully loaded:

    o   Fast charge rate - 1.0 amp, constant current
    o   Slow charge rate - 0.4 amp, constant current

Each charger output to be 9.6 VDC at 1 amp maximum.  FCC Classification: Class
A.

The 7686 Vehicle Docking Station (VDS) is designed to provide charging and
communications capability to the IBM 7684 PDCT when in vehicle.  It provides
the following functions:

    o   Provide trickle charging capability to the IBM 7684 PDCT via 12
        VDC vehicle power or 115/220 V AC power.
    o   Provide the interface for the 7684 to communicate with auxiliary
        I/O devices, via an RS-232 serial port.
    o   Meets or exceed the environmental requirements specified by SAE
        J1455.
    o   It holds the stylus and the IBM 7684 PDCT securely in place in
        case of a vehicle collision.
    o   A lighted power on/off switch is furnished, as well as an LED
        display to notify the user of any operational or error conditions.
    o   A beeper controlled by the IBM 7684 PDCT is provided

The VDS uses an 8031 microprocessor with 32K of RAM and a 32K PROM.  This
component controls the infrared communications link, the serial port
communications link, the charging circuitry, and provides feedback to the user
via an LED display.

Due to the unique layout of the dashboard in a user's vehicle, the VDS will not
include a mounting bracket.  Mounting holes are provided in the back panel of
the VDS so that a customer designed mounting bracket may be fastened.

The VDS can be mounted such that the IBM 7684 PDCT unit is oriented in either a
vertical or horizontal position.  It can also be set on a flat surface such as
a table-top, however, no mounting holes are provided in the base to permanently
affix the VDS to a horizontal surface.

The VDS will provide a trickle charge to the IBM 7684 PDCT unit in two modes.
When the PDCT's backlight is off, the VDS will charge at a rate of 400mA. When
the PDCT's backlight is on, the VDS will charge at a rate of 700mA. This will
provide a slightly positive net charge to the PDCT. The VDS communicates to the
hand held unit via a serial infrared port. Power Supply meets the requirements
outlined in SAE J1455.

A 2 m cable is provided to attach to the vehicle's power.  It may be routed
through the ignition system or directly to the vehicle's battery.  The cable
has a phenolic in-line fuse holder to meet UL requirements.

When the VDS is powered on, it runs a power on self test (POST) of the
processor and external RAM.  If a failure occurs, the unit will display a
blinking E on the LED display.

When the IBM 7684 PDCT and stylus are placed in the VDS, a latch will secure
them in place. This latch can be locked with a key to prevent theft of the PDCT
and stylus when the driver is away from the vehicle. The enclosure meets SAE
J1455 specifications.

The VDS sources its power from either the vehicle (12 VDC, negative ground
only), or from a 110/220 V AC source.  FCC Classification:  Class A.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   IBM 7684 Models 002
        -   Width:  100.8 mm (4.0 inches)
        -   Depth:  050.4 mm (2.0 inches)
        -   Height: 214.2 mm (8.5 inches)
        -   Weight: 1.1 kg  (2.4 lb)
    o   IBM 7685 Model 001
        -   Width:  1008.0 mm (40.0 inches)
        -   Depth:   300.0 mm (12.0 inches)
        -   Height:  226.8 mm (09.0 inches)
        -   Weight: 12.3 kg (027 lb)
    o   IBM 7686 Model 001
        -   Width:  175.0 mm (6.8 inches)
        -   Depth:  145.0 mm (5.7 inches)
        -   Height: 300.8 mm (11.8 inches)
        -   Weight:  2.3 kg  (5 lb) (without IBM 7684)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT For IBM 7684 Model 002

    o   Temperature Range:  32 to 122F
    o   Humidity Range:  5 to 95 percent

For IBM 7685 Model 001

    o   Temperature Range:  32 to 122F
    o   Humidity Range:   8 to 80 percent

For IBM 7686 Model 001

    o   Temperature Range:  -40 to 185F (VDS) Humidity Range:  98 percent
        at 100F (VDS)

An IBM PS/1*, PS/2*, or Industrial Computer configured to operate with OS/2
(current version) is required for the IBM TouchMobile System.

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS

    o   53G4-409 TouchMobile Programming Application Environment
        Services/DOS
    o   53G4-407 TouchMobile Management Services/2
    o   The IBM 7684 PDCT's requires a TouchMobile DOS for PDCT's for its
        operation.

Note:  TouchMobile DOS for PDCT's is shipped with the IBM 7685 SDS.

AC ADAPTER FOR IBM 7686 VEHICLE DOCKING STATION (#1100, P/N 67G0300) Maximum:
999 Limitation:  None. Prerequisite:  IBM 7686 Model 001. Field installation:
Yes (via P/N Only).  Customer Setup: Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 244. 7527 DATA COLLECTION TERMINAL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The 7527 Data Collection Terminal has two models; the Model 001 with a two line
by forty character LCD display, and the Model 002 with a 320 x 200 All Points
Addressable LCD display.  Both models are upgradeable with 128Kb and 256Kb
memory expansion features and are compatible with the 7525 Data Collection
Terminal.  The 7527 is recommended when increased data collection function is
required.

MODEL 001

Model 001 has a two line by forty character display.

MODEL 002

Model 002 has a 320 by 200 All Points Addressable (APA) display.

A maximum of 16 7527 Terminals may be installed on each RS-422 communications
port in the IC/PC controller except when a PS/2 Model 30 is the PC controller.
The PS/2 Model 30 will support a maximum of 10 7527 terminals.

The IBM 7527 Data Collection Terminal is micro processor based and attaches to
the IBM 7531, 7532 (except Model 310), 7552, 7541, 7542, 7561, 7562 and GEARBOX
Model 800 Industrial Computers and the IBM Personal Computer AT, Personal
System/2 Models 30, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 55 SX, 60, 70, and 80.  The 7527 Data
Collection Terminal connects to the terminal control computer via an
asynchronous serial RS-422 interface.  Up to 16 terminals can be attached to
each RS-422 communications port in the terminal control computer.  When the
Data Collection Edition family software is used to support the 7527, reference
Information RPQs PF1084 and PF1085 for RS-422 Communications Adapter
information and requirements.

BAR CODE SCANNERS Various bar code scanners (LASER and Charge-coupled
device--CCD) can be attached to the 7527. Attachment may be via:

    o   The bar code/magnetic sensor ports
        Scanners that emulate bar code wands may be connected directly to the
        sensor ports.  The scanner reads and decodes the bar code, and then
        re-codes it (either in the original code or translated to 3 of 9 code)
        and transmits a "perfect" bar code signal to the 7527.  Scanners that
        draw less than 350mA peak at 5VDC may be powered directly from the sensor
        ports.
        No special programming of the 7527 is required.  The scanner is usually
        programmed via a bar coded menu card to set it to auto-discriminate
        certain symbologies and to set wand emulation parameters.
    o   The RS-232 Port
        Scanners with RS-232 serial asynchronous output of the decoded data may
        be interfaced to the RS-232 port, with proper programming support. The
        scanner must be powered by an external source, usually a combination
        decoder/power supply available from the scanner manufacturer.  High power
        Helium-Neon LASER scanners usually fit into this category.

PRINTERS Various printers may be attached to the 7527, either by way of the
built-in parallel printer port, or through the RS-232 port.  Proper software
support is required in either case.

Parallel printers include:

    IBM Proprinter (all models)
    IBM Quietwriter
    IBM Quickwriter
    IBM 5533 Industrial Printer
    IBM 6252-AP8 Line Printer
    IBM Graphics Printer
    TEC Industrial Bar Code Printer B-63
    IBM 6252-AS8 Line Printer
    Eaton Corp. (CYPHER IV) Demand Label Printers
    Other parallel printers (Centronics-style)

RS-232 Serial Asynchronous Printers include:

    IBM Proprinters with internal serial adapter
    IBM Quickwriter with serial cable
    Zebra Techologies Corp. ZEBRA 60, ZEBRA 130, and others
    TEC Industrial Bar Code Printer B-63
    Eaton Corp. (CYPHER IV) Demand Label Printers
    Other RS-232 asynchronous serial devices supporting
    XON-XOFF pacing

NOTE: IBM does not warrant or service the OEM Bar Code Scanners or Printers
listed above.  Users should contact the appropriate manufacturer or dealer to
obtain the devices and service.

Up to 16 7527 terminals may be attached to each RS-422/485 port in the host
IC/PC controller with the exception of the PS/2 Model 30.  The PS/2 Model 30
will support up to 10 7527 terminals.

The IBM 7527 Data Collection Terminal, Models 001 and 002, are customer setup.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides two models for a choice of a two line by forty character
        backlighted super-twist LCD display or a 320 by 200 All Points
        Addressable backlighted super-twist LCD display.
    o   128Kb memory standard and upgradeable to 256Kb or 384Kb.
    o   Accepts Bar Code and/or Magnetic input from wands and slot readers.
    o   Both models have 62-key keyboard that provides alpha, numeric, and
        control functions.
    o   Provides 8 point DI/DO/Parallel port to user.
    o   Includes RS-232 downstream communications port.
    o   Both models are wall or bench mountable.
    o   A self test diagnostic mode is initiated at power on.

The IBM 7527 Data Collection Terminal is an increased function, compact device
capable of reading bar codes, magnetic stripes and keyboard input.

The Model 002 also provides the capability of graphics display and a touch
screen feature. Built to withstand the physical conditions of the industrial
environment, the IBM 7527 DCT provides a reliable terminal for data entry
requirements.

MODEL 001

    o   Two line by forty character backlighted super-twist LCD display
    o   62 key alpha/numeric/function keyboard
    o   Magnetic support for both wands and slot readers
    o   Bar code support for both wands and slot readers
    o   8 points of DI/DO or parallel port
    o   128K of memory which may be upgraded to 256K or 384K
    o   110V AC power supplies available
    o   Includes RS-232 downstream communications port
    o   Terminal is wall or bench mountable.

MODEL 002

    o   Provides all of the features of the Model 001
    o   Includes a 320 by 200 All Points Addressable backlighted super-twist LCD
        display that provides graphics capability.  High definition text can be
        shown in either 20 line by 40 character or 14 line by 32 character modes.
    o   A touch screen feature is available for the Model 002.

The 7527 is designed for the industrial environment.  Its low-power CMOS logic
design helps it run cool in temperatures to 50C (122F) without the need for
louvers or fans that could allow entry of airborne contaminants.  Special
attention to design allows it to start up and operate at freezing temperatures
(0C).  The ability to withstand industrial levels of vibration, shock,
electro-static discharge, and power line transients are designed into the 7527.
The monolithic silicone key pads and gasketed display lens seals the 7527 from
spilled liquids or settleable mists and droplets.

The IBM 7527 Data Collection Terminal is designed for ease of use and high user
acceptance:

    o   The displays are back-lit for high visibility, and the contrast can be
        easily adjusted from the key pad.
    o   The key pads feature full-travel silicone keys that provide tactile
        feedback and a comfortable feel.
    o   Bar code and magnetic slot readers, as well as wands, can be mounted to
        the left or right--or both--sides of the terminal.
    o   "Good Read" Light-Emitting Diodes on the front of the 7527 and on the
        optional magnetic wand provide easy to see visual feedback.
    o   Built in Power On Self Test, Customer Diagnostics, Statistics function,
        and Advanced Diagnostics provide powerful trouble shooting facilities.

The IBM 7527 Data Collection Terminal is a powerful and flexible addition to
the IBM Data Collection family.  It provides many features sophisticated data
collection applications, with plenty of room for growth.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Width:  320mm (12.6 inches)
    Depth:  100mm (4 inches)
    Height: 280mm (11 inches)
    Weight: 2.7kg (6 lbs)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 245. POWER SUPPLY, 100-125 VAC, 50/60 HZ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9675

Feature Code 6631

Bus Master  No

This feature provides (nominal) 26V DC power to the 7527 terminal from the
customer's branch circuit.  It includes an integrated 3m (10 foot) cable from
the Power Supply to the 7527.  The power cordset provided is 1.8m (6 ft) long.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 246. BAR CODE/MAGNETIC SENSOR EXTENSION CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9773

Feature Code 6637

Bus Master  No

This cable allows use of a bar code or magnetic wand or slot reader 6.1m (20
feet) from the 7527 terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 247. MAGNETIC BADGE SLOT READER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9778

Feature Code 6638

Bus Master  No

This feature is a bi-directional slot reader that allows reading of ABA Track 2
or full width, F2F-encoded magnetic stripes on a wide variety of media.
Document thickness may range from 0.56mm (0.022 in.)  to 0.89mm (0.035 in.)
(typical credit card or ID card plastic stock).  Encoding density of 75 to 128
bits/inch can be read, as well as 210 bits/inch if tested on the user's
magnetic material.  Up to 100 hex characters can be read, in either a
10-character numeric or 63-character alphanumeric character set, with or
without a secure header.  The attachment cable is 1m (3.3 ft).  The reader can
be mounted directly to a wall or bench or, using the Bar Code/Magnetic Badge
Slot Reader Mounting Kit (#6653), to either or both sides of the 7527 terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 248. BAR CODE READING COPROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  ___5293

Feature Code 5293

Bus Master  No

The Bar Code Reading Coprocessor feature consists of a customized
microcontroller and a 2Kx8 CMOS static RAM.  Both are inserted by the customer
into sockets on the processor board.  The Coprocessor feature allows:

    o   Autodiscrimination of:
        -   Code 128 (USD-6)
        -   Interleaved 2 of 5 (USD-1)
        -   3 of 9 Code (a.k.a. Code 39 (1))
        -   3 of 9 Full ASCII (a.k.a. Extended 3 of 9)
        -   Code 11
        -   MSI (Model 10 check digit)
        -   Codabar (USD-4)
        -   UPC A and E
        -   EAN 8 and 12/JAN
        -   UPC/EAN with title and issue (2 digit and 5 digit
            supplements).
    o   Verification of various optional check digits and options to
        strip or return the digits
    o   Capability to decode direct LASER scanner output
    o   Capability to simultaneously decode one scan by the built-in
        microcode of the terminal while decoding another scan on a
        different sensor with the coprocessor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 249. 128KB MEMORY EXPANSION KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  ___5296

Feature Code 5296

Bus Master  No

The memory expansion feature consists of a 128KB CMOS Static RAM.

This feature takes the Model 100 terminal from 32KB up to 160KB.  The standard
base 32KB chip may be removed and a second 128KB feature installed in order to
bring the total memory to 256KB.  In the Model 200, this chip supplements the
base memory of 128KB to make a total of 256KB.  All memory is battery-backed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 250. BOX MOUNT ENVIRONMENT SEALING GASKET KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  ___5298

Feature Code 5298

Bus Master  No

For users who require a high-security mounting or a NEMA-4, NEMA-4X or IP66
rating, the 7526 terminal may be mounted in a face cut-out in the front cover
of an off-the-shelf commercial enclosure.  The enclosure may be a standard,
flush-mounted electrical pull box for high security controlled access/T-A
applications, or may be an environmentally-sealed enclosure for hose-down or
outdoor applications.

The mounting kit feature will be required to allow installation to the face of
the enclosure.  This kit consists of:

    o   A gasket for sealing the terminal to the face of the enclosure
    o   Ten threaded standoffs for extending tie-down points on the
        terminal to its rear surface
    o   Fourteen screws.

Cap screws are run from inside the enclosure, through the gasket and into the
standoffs and threaded holes in the terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 251. OPERATIONAL BATTERY BACKUP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  ___5302

Feature Code 5302

Bus Master  No

This feature consists of a pre-assembled pack of eight batteries, a positive
temperature coefficient (PTC) current limiter, a trickle-charge current
limiting resistor and a discharge diode.  This pack is encapsulated in tape and
PVC film.  It is mounted by the customer in a recess in the back cover, using
double-sided velcro fasteners.  A two-wire cable connects it to the 7526
processor board.

The battery pack will power the 7526 terminal for between 1.8 to 2.5 hours of
operation, depending on the model and features attached.  This allows customers
to continue to collect and report transactions even when their AC power has
failed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 252. POWER SUPPLY, 100-125 V AC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  ___5305

Feature Code 5305

Bus Master  No

This feature provides (nominal) 22V DC power to the 7526 terminal from the
customer's branch circuit.  The power supply cord to be supplied with this
feature is a 100-125 V ac 3-wire cable 1.8m (6 ft) in length.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 253. 128KB MEMORY EXPANSION KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9781

Feature Code 6639

Bus Master  No

This feature provides a daughter-card that expands the 7527's memory to 256Kb
of battery-backed RAM.  One 128Kb kit or one 256KB kit can be installed in a
7527.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 254. 256KB MEMORY EXPANSION KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9784

Feature Code 6640

Bus Master  No

This feature provides a daughter-card that expands the 7527's memory to 384Kb
of battery-backed RAM.  One 256Kb kit or one 128KB kit can be installed in a
7527.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 255. TOUCH SCREEN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9787

Feature Code 6641

Bus Master  No

This feature is a resistive-membrane touch screen that is installed in place of
the standard display lens.  The touch screen segments the display area into a
8-column by 5 row matrix of touch-sensitive rectangular pads, each
approximately 15mm width x 20mm height.  The touch pads are lined up with the
rows and columns of character text.  Software controlled configuration allows
use as an 8 x 5 matrix or a 4 x 5 matrix of touch points.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 256. BAR CODE WAND, LOW RESOLUTION, VISIBLE RED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9790

Feature Code 6642

Bus Master  No

This feature is a low resolution bar code wand with visible red (655 nm)
illumination and a 0.38mm (0.013in.) aperature.  This wand is often the best
choice for reading bar codes printed with a 9-pin dot matrix printers. Included
is a coiled, 1.8m (6 ft) attachment cable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 257. BAR CODE WAND, MEDIUM RESOLUTION, VISIBLE RED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9790

Feature Code 6643

Bus Master  No

This feature is a medium resolution bar code wand with visible red (655 nm)
illumination and a 0.19mm (0.0075 in.) aperature.  This wand is often the best
choice for reading a wide variety of bar code printing methods. Included is a
coiled, 1.8m (6 ft) attachment cable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 258. BAR CODE WAND, HIGH RESOLUTION, INFRA-RED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9796

Feature Code 6644

Bus Master  No

This feature is a high resolution bar code wand with infra-red (820 nm)
illumination and a 0.13mm (0.005in.) aperature.  This wand is often the best
choice for reading very high density bar codes, and less dense (but with
high-quality printing) bar codes in a dirty environment (excluding carbon-based
dirt).  Care must be taken to ensure bar code printing methods used yield
proper contrast ratio for infra-red light (i.e.  requires carbon in the
printing ink).  The high resolution will not tolerate voids and spots within
bar codes as well as a medium or low resolution wand can.  Included is a
coiled, 1.8m (6 ft) attachment cable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 259. BAR CODE SLOT READER, VISIBLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9799

Feature Code 6645

Bus Master  No

This feature provides a bar code slot reader with visible red (660 nm)
illumination and a 0.19mm (0.0075in.) aperature.  This slot reader is often the
best choice for reading a wide variety of bar code printing methods.  The
attachment cable is 1.2m (4 ft).  The reader can be mounted directly to a wall
or bench or, using the Bar Code/Magnetic Badge Slot Reader Mounting Kit (FC
#6653), to either or both sides of the 7527 terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 260. BAR CODE SLOT READER, INFRA-RED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9802

Feature Code 6646

Bus Master  No

This feature provides a bar code slot reader with infra-red (880 nm)
illumination and a 0.19mm (0.0075in.) aperature.  This slot reader is often the
best choice for reading bar codes in a dirty environment (excluding
carbon-based dirt).  Care must be taken to ensure bar code printing methods
used yield proper contrast ratio for infra-red light (i.e. requires carbon in
the printing ink).  The attachment cable is 1.2m (4 ft).  The reader can be
mounted directly to a wall or bench or, using the Bar Code/Magnetic Badge Slot
Reader Mounting Kit (#6653), to either or both sides of the 7527 terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 261. MAGNETIC DOCUMENT SLOT READER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9805

Feature Code 6647

Bus Master  No

This feature is a bi-directional slot reader that allows reading of ABA Track 2
or full width, F2F-encoded magnetic stripes on a wide variety of media.
Document thickness may range from 0.18mm (0.007in.)  (punch card stock) to
1.14mm (0.045in.) (heavy plastic card stock).  Encoding density of 75 to 128
bits/inch can be read, as well as 210 bits/inch if tested on the user's
magnetic material.  Up to 100 hex characters can be read, in either a
10-character numeric or 63-character alphanumeric character set, with or
without a secure header.  The attachment cable is 1m (3.3 ft).  The reader can
be mounted directly to a wall or bench or, using the Magnetic Document Slot
Reader mounting kit (#6654), to either or both sides of the 7527 terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 262. MAGNETIC WAND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9808

Feature Code 6648

Bus Master  No

This feature is a bi-directional magnetic wand reader that allows reading of
F/2F-encoded magnetic stripe media.  Since the wand is hand-held, encoding
across the full width of the stripe is required for ease of reading. Encoding
density of 128 bits/inch can be read, as well as 75 bits/inch if tested on the
user's magnetic material.  Up to 100 hex characters can be read, in either a
10-character numeric or 63-character alphanumeric character set, with or
without a secure header.  The magnetic wand comes with a 1.8m (6 ft) straight
cable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 263. BAR CODE WAND MOUNTING KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F5140

Feature Code 6652

Bus Master  No

This kit includes a black, vinyl-dipped coiled-wire wand holder and attachment
screws, and allows any of the bar code wands (#6642, #6643, and #6644) to be
easily stored in the mounting attached to either or both sides of the 7527
terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 264. BAR CODE/MAGNETIC BADGE SLOT READER MOUNTING KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F5143

Feature Code 6653

Bus Master  No

This kit includes a mounting platform and attachment screws, and allows
mounting of either visible (#6645) or infra-red (#6646) Bar Code Slot Readers
or the Magnetic Badge Slot Reader (#6638) to either or both sides of the 7527
terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 265. MAGNETIC DOCUMENT SLOT READER MOUNTING KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code 6654

Bus Master  No

This kit includes a mounting platform and attachment screws, and allows
mounting of the Magnetic Document Slot Reader (#6647) to either or both sides
of the 7527 terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 266. MAGNETIC WAND MOUNTING KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F5137

Feature Code 6655

Bus Master  No

This feature kit includes a black, vinyl-dipped formed-wire wand holder and
attachment screws, and allows the Magnetic Wand (#6648) to be easily stored in
the mounting attached to either or both sides of the 7527 terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 267. DATA COLLECTION NETWORK JUNCTION BOX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9763

Feature Code

Bus Master  No

This is a junction box that provides a "T"-type tap connection into the Data
Collection Network.  Field wiring terminal blocks allow quick installation of
field-stripped, 2 twisted-pair wiring of the main network trunk line as well as
the Data Collection Network Drop Cable (P/N 33F5182) to the local 7525/7527
terminal.  A multi-pole push-on/push-off switch allows cut-off of either the
locally dropped terminal, or the downstream network, depending on how the
junction box is installed.  The junction box features rugged steel construction
and sealing/strain-relieving glans for each cable entry. Installation of a
junction box is recommended wherever a 7525/7527 terminal is, or may be,
installed, as well as wherever a network disconnection point may be desired for
maintenance or trouble-shooting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 268. DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F5180

Feature Code

Bus Master  No

This cable interfaces the 7527's Printer/DI-DO port to an industry-standard
8-position optical isolator input/output board, such as made by Opto-22,
Potter-Brumfield, Gordos-Arkansas, and others.  When the proper jumper(s) is
installed on the optical isolator board, the 7527 can supply power to the
terminal side of the optical isolators.  Cable length is 1.8m (6 ft).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 269. DATA COLLECTION NETWORK DROP CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F5182

Feature Code

Bus Master  No

This cable provides a link dropped from the Data Collection Network trunk line
to the 7527 terminal.  The cable is fitted with a mating connector on the
terminal end, and is pre-stripped at the other end for ready termination to the
Data Collection Network Junction Box (P/N 33F9677).  Use of the Drop Cable, in
conjunction with Junction Box, is recommended wherever a 7527 terminal is to be
installed.  The cable is 6.1m (20 ft.) long.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 270. COMMUNICATION ADAPTER - JUNCTION BOX CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F5184

Feature Code

Bus Master  No

This cable provides ready connection of the Personal Computer or PS/2
RS-422/485 Communications Adapter to the first Data Collection Network Junction
Box on the network.  The adapter end is fitted with a mating connector, and the
other end is pre-stripped for easy termination to the terminal block in the
Junction Box.  One Adapter - Junction Box cable is recommended for each port
used on the communications adapter.  The cable is 7.6 m (25 ft.) long.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 271. BASIC WALL/BENCH MOUNTING KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F5186

Feature Code

Bus Master  No

This kit supplies a rugged steel plate that can be secured to a wall, pole, or
bench top, and special shoulder bolts which are used to attach the 7527
terminal to the plate.  Also included are various screws and anchors for
attachment of the plate.  Use of the plate is recommended wherever a terminals
needs to be attached to a surface in a minimum-security manner. Use is highly
recommended for vertical surface-type mounting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 272. SECURITY HOUSING KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F5188

Feature Code

Bus Master  No

This kit provides a lockable access door over the 7527's connector panel area,
as well as providing facilities for installation of conduit to the terminal.
The kit's construction is welded steel, painted to match the 7527.

With the Security Housing door locked into place, the connectors for wands,
slot readers, and other attachments, as well as the screw attaching the 7527 to
the Basic Wall/Bench Mounting Kit, are protected from tampering.  Cabling to
attached slot readers is protected from tampering, also.  The Basic Wall/Bench
Mounting Kit is a pre-requisite for use of the Secuity Housing Kit.  The
Security Housing kit is recommended wherever a higher degree of terminal
security is required.  It is also required when use of conduit for power and
communications cabling is desired.  All Security Housing kits are keyed alike.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 273. POWER SUPPLY TERMINAL MOUNTING KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F5190

Feature Code

Bus Master  No

This kit provides the function of the Basic Wall/Bench Mounting kit and the
Security Housing kit and also provides branch circuit field wiring terminals
for connection of AC power, internal mounting for the Power Supply module, and
conduit connection ports for power and communications.  Construction is welded
steel, painted to match the color of the 7527 terminal.  Various mounting
fasteners and anchors are included.  Use is recommended for wall or pole
mounting where high security and ease of permanent conduit installation is
desired.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 274. ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS WRAP HARNESS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9678

Feature Code

Bus Master  No

This accessory provides wrap-around capability for running advanced dianostics.
One harness is shipped with the Maintenance Information Manual (P/N 33F5173).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 275. KEYBOARD OVERLAY, ENGLISH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F5192

Feature Code

Bus Master  No

This accessory provides an English replacement overlay for the alphanumeric
50-key portion of the 7527's keyboard.  The English overlay is factory
installed on all 7527 terminals.  In some countries, a translated, national
language overlay is provided also.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 276. VISIBLE LIGHT LOW RES BAR CODE WAND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8780

Feature Code 6339

Bus Master  No

The Visible Light Low Res Bar Code Wand is a digital, visible light, 10 mil
aperture hand held wand capable of reading bar codes 3 of 9, I 2 of 5, and
UPC-A.  The wand operates in the 660 nanometer range.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 277. VISIBLE LIGHT HI RES BAR CODE WAND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8778

Feature Code 6340

Bus Master  No

The Visible Light Hi Res Bar Code Wand is a digital, visible light, 6 mil
aperture hand held wand capable of reading bar codes 3 of 9, I 2 of 5, and
UPC-A.  The wand operates in the 660 nanometer range.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 278. INFRARED LOW RES BAR CODE WAND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8784

Feature Code 6341

Bus Master  No

The Infrared Low Res Bar Code Wand is a digital, infrared 10 mil aperture hand
held wand capable of reading bar codes 3 of 9, I 2 of 5, and UPC-A.  The wand
operates in the 880 nanometer range.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 279. INFRARED HI RES BAR CODE WAND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8782

Feature Code 6342

Bus Master  No

The Infrared Hi Res Bar Code Wand is a digital, infrared 6 mil aperture hand
held wand capable of reading bar codes 3 of 9, I 2 of 5, and UPC-A.  The wand
operates in the 880 nanometer range.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 280. IBM PS/2 MOUSE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

Part Number  33F6969

Feature Code 8770

Bus Master  No

The 2-button Mouse is available for applications that operate more efficiently
using a pointing device.  The Mouse attaches to the system pointing device port
and requires no additional hardware features or external power.  A device
driver is packaged with each Mouse for addition to the operating system.
Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup: Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 281. IBM PS/2 MOUSE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

Part Number

Feature Code 8770

Bus Master  No

The 2-button Mouse is available for applications that operate more efficiently
using a pointing device.  The Mouse attaches to the system pointing device port
and requires no additional hardware features or external power.  A device
driver is packaged with each Mouse for addition to the operating system.
Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup: Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 282. IBM PS/2 80286 MEMORY EXPANSION OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F6966

Feature Code 3006

Bus Master  No

The 80286 Memory Expansion Option provides 512Kb of memory standard.  Up to
three 80286 Memory Expansion Kits (#3012, P/N 6450345), with 512Kb each, can be
added to the expansion option to provide a total of 2Mb of memory for each
card.

Up to three fully-populated Memory Expansion Options can be installed in the
8550 to provide 6Mb of memory on the system in addition to the 1Mb standard on
the system board.  No switch setting is required. This option requires an
expansion slot.  Maximum:  Three for the 8550.  Field Installation:  Yes.
Prerequisite:  An available expansion slot.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 283. IBM PS/2 ENHANCED 80386 MEMORY EXPANSION OPTION 4MB KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  34F3011

Feature Code 3011

Bus Master  No

This feature has been replaced by the Enhanced 80386 Memory Expansion Adapter
4MB Kit (FC 9860, P/N 87F9860.)

The IBM Personal System/2 Enhanced 80386 Memory Expansion Option 4Mb Kit
combines the Enhanced 80386 Memory Expansion Option (32 bit memory card) with
the 4Mb Memory Module Kit (FC 3933, P/N 87F9977) to provide 4Mb of standard
memory expandable to 14Mb by adding up to three (in any combination) of the 1Mb
(#5212, P/N 6450603), 2Mb (FC 5213, P/N 6450604), or 4Mb (FC 3933, P/N 87F9977)
Memory Module Kits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 284. IBM PS/2 80286 MEMORY EXPANSION KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9288

Feature Code 3012

Bus Master  No

The 80286 Memory Expansion Kit provides 512Kb of memory and can only be
installed on the 80286 Memory Expansion Option (#3006, P/N 6450344).  No switch
setting is required.  Maximum:  Three per Memory Expansion Option. Field
Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.  Prerequisite:  #3006.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 285. IBM PS/2 80386 MEMORY EXPANSION KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450367

Feature Code 3019

Bus Master  No

The 80386 Memory Expansion Option is a Micro Channel card that comes standard
with 2Mb 80ns memory.  Up to two Memory Expansion Kits can be added to the card
to provide a total of 6Mb of memory.  Additional 80386 Memory Expansion Options
can be installed to provide a maximum of 16Mb of memory on the system.  This
option can be used without fully populating the system board memory slots and
has no switch setting requirements.  Limitations:  16Mb of memory (the 16-bit
channel of the DMA addresses only 16Mb).  Maximum:  Two. Field Installation:
Yes.  Prerequisite:  An available 32-bit expansion slot. Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 286. IBM PS/2 80386 MEMORY EXPANSION KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450372

Feature Code 3064

Bus Master  No

This 80386 Memory Expansion Kit uses 1Mbit chips, provides 2Mb of 80 nanosecond
memory and can be installed only on the 80386 Memory Expansion Option card
(#3019).  No switch setting is required.  Maximum:  Two per Memory Expansion
Option.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 287. IBM PS/2 ENHANCED 80386 MEMORY EXPANSION OPTION 2MB KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  34F3077

Feature Code 3077

Bus Master  No

This feature has been replaced by the Enhanced 80386 Memory Expansion Adapter
2MB Kit (FC 5211, P/N 87F9856). The IBM Personal System/2 Enhanced 80386 Memory
Expansion Option 2Mb Kit combines the Enhanced 80386 Memory Expansion Option
(32 bit memory card) with the 2Mb Memory Module Kit-85ns (FC 5213, P/N 6450604)
to provide 2Mb of standard memory expandable to 14Mb by adding up to three (in
any combination) of the 1Mb (FC 5212, P/N 6450603), 2Mb (FC 5213, P/N 6450604),
or 4Mb (FC 3933, P/N 87F9977) Memory Module Kits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 288. IBM PS/2 0.5MB MEMORY MODULE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9289

Feature Code 3397

Bus Master  No

This kit expands the memory capacity of the IBM Personal System/2* 0-8Mb
Expanded Memory Adapter/A (#7259) in increments of 512Kb up to a maximum of 2Mb
per adapter.  Each kit consists of two 256Kb memory modules which are inserted
into memory module sockets on the adapter.  A maximum of four kits can be added
to each adapter and the kits are customer installable.  The 0.5Mb Memory Module
Kit may be installed with the 2Mb Memory Module Kit on the same card as long as
the memory modules are installed in pairs on the four socket banks on the
adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 289. IBM PS/2 IBM PS/2 WIZARD MEMORY EXPANSION OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  34F3061

Feature Code 3461

Bus Master  No

IBM PS/2 Wizard Memory Expansion Option is a 6Mb memory expansion card for use
with the IBM PS/2 Wizard Adapter.  It allows the user to expand the total
memory for IBM PS/2 Wizard Adapter applications to 8Mb.  It attaches to the IBM
PS/2 Wizard Adapter through connectors provided on the adapters and a cable
included with IBM PS/2 Wizard Memory Expansion Option.  It requires no
additional software.  These products are FCC Class A Devices. Limitations:
Installation of this adapter(s) requires the user to allocate two full
expansion slots, due to power constraints.  The IBM PS/2 Model 80-111 and
80-311 require planar EC C00835 in order to operate with the IBM PS/2 Wizard
Adapter.  Customers with PS/2 Model 80-111 with serial numbers 72-6000000
through 72-6039999 or PS/2 Model 80-311 with serial numbers 72-65000000 through
72-6509999 should contact their IBM Marketing Representative or Authorized
Dealer for information on obtaining this modification.  Maximum:  One per
system.  Pre-requisites:  An IBM PS/2 Wizard Adapter must be installed in order
to install an IBM PS/2 Wizard Memory Expansion Option adapter.  Cable Orders:
A cable is provided with IBM PS/2 Wizard Memory Expansion Option for attachment
to the IBM PS/2 Wizard Adapter (FC 3462).  Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer
Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 290. IBM PS/2 IBM PS/2 80286 EXPANDED MEMORY ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  1497252

Feature Code 3920

Bus Master  No

Provides 2Mb of expanded memory function for the IBM Personal System/2 Models
50 and 60.  It also supports the device drivers resident within the 3270 Work
Station Program Versions 1.0 or 1.1 which provide application programs with
expanded memory support, an "EMS" interface, and up to two PC DOS virtual disk
interfaces.

The "EMS" is the Expanded Memory Specification issued by Lotus, Intel and
MICROSOFT.

The IBM Personal System/2 80286 Expanded Memory Adapter/A extends the memory of
IBM Personal System/2 Models 50 AND 60 up to 2 million bytes of memory when
using the 3270 Work Station Program Versions 1.0 or 1.1.  Users may run up to
six PC DOS sessions and/or up to four host sessions concurrently.  PC DOS
applications written to the Expanded Memory Specification and/or requiring
virtual disk are also supported by the 3270 Work Station Program when utilizing
the IBM Personal System/2 80286 Expanded Memory Adapter/A. The IBM Personal
System/2 80286 Expanded Memory Adapter/A on the 8550 and 8560 extends the
memory to 3 million bytes of memory when using IBM Operating System/2 (Standard
and Extended Edition).  Multiple IBM Personal System/2 80286 Expanded Memory
Adapter/A features may be installed to extend the system memory when running
IBM Operating System/2 (Standard and Extended Edition).  Customer Setup:  Yes.
Limitations:  One per 8550 and 8560 when using the 3270 Work Station Program.
Field Installation:  Yes.  Cable Order: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 291. IBM PS/2 2-8MB 80386 MEMORY EXPANSION OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F7047

Feature Code 5211

Bus Master  No

This feature has been replaced by Enhanced Memory Expansion Adapter 2MB Kit (FC
9856, P/N 87F9856).

The 2-8Mb 80386 Memory Expansion Option is a single, full-length, memory
expansion card for the IBM 8570.  It comes standard with 2Mb of 85 nonosecond
memory installed.  Up to three 1Mb Memory Module Kits - 85ns (FC 5212) or up to
three 2Mb Memory Module Kits - 85ns (#5213) can be added to FC 5211 to provide
a maximum of 8Mb of memory on the card.  FC 5212 and FC 5213 may be intermixed
on a #5211.  Two 2-8Mb 80386 Memory Expansion Options (FC 5211) can be
installed in the 8570 to provide a maximum of 16Mb of memory.  No switch
setting is required.  Maximum: Two. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisites:  An
available 32-bit expansion slot(s). Customer setup: Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 292. IBM PS/2 0-8MB EXPANDED MEMORY ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  1497259

Feature Code 7259

Bus Master  No

This memory adapter is expandable up to 8Mb for all models of the IBM Personal
System/2 Model 55.  This adapter provides the added functions of memory
expansion up to 8Mb by using two memory kits, and includes expanded memory
device drivers compatible with the "LIM EMS" Version 3.2,
(Lotus/Intel/Microsoft Expanded Memory Specification Version 3.2).  The adapter
provides support for expanded and extended memory applications.  For expanded
memory, support is provided for the IBM 3270 Work Station Program Version 1.1
and for software applications that adhere to the "LIM EMS" Version 3.2.  For
extended memory, IBM Personal System/2 0-8Mb Expanded Memory Adapter/A provides
support for up to 8Mb of contiguous memory for use with the OS/2 Standard and
Extended Editions, Versions 1.0 and 1.1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 293. IBM PS/2 2MB MEMORY MODULE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  30F5360

Feature Code 7833

Bus Master  No

This kit expands the memory capacity of the IBM Personal System/2 0-8Mb
Expanded Memory Adapter/A and the IBM Personal System/2 80286 Expanded Memory
Adapter/A in increments of 2Mb up to a maximum of 8Mb per adapter.  Each kit
consists of two 1024Kb memory modules which are inserted into memory module
sockets on the adapter.  A maximum of four kits can be added to each adapter
and the kits are customer installable.  The 2Mb Memory Module Kit may be
installed with the 0.5Mb Memory Module Kit on the same card as long as the
memory modules are installed in pairs on the four socket banks on the adapter.
Installation of the 2Mb Memory Module Kit on the IBM Personal System/2 80286
Expanded Memory Adapter/A will require removing a pair of installed 256Kb
memory modules before inserting the 1024Kb memory modules in their place.  The
removed memory modules will be retained by the customer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 294. IBM PS/2 80386 SYSTEM BOARD MEMORY EXPANSION KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450379

Feature Code 8722

Bus Master  No

This 80386 Memory Expansion Kit provides 2Mb of 80 nanosecond memory on the
system board.  The addition of this feature completes the 4Mb capacity of the
system board.  No switch setting is required.  Maximum:  One.  Field
Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 295. IBM PS/2 1.44MB DISKETTE DRIVE OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451130

Feature Code 0030

Bus Master  No

The IBM PS/2 1.44MB Diskette Drive option is specifically designed for the PS/2
Model 35 SX, LS, 40SX, 56SX or 57 SX.  This 3.5-inch 1-inch high form factor
diskette drive features read/write compatibility with 720MB formatted
diskettes, and media sense capability.

Device Specifications

    Formatted Capacity         1.44MB
    Bytes/Sector               512
    Sectors/Track              18
    Cylinders                  80
    Number of Heads            2

The IBM PS/2 1.44MB Diskette Drive is specifically designed for PS/2 Models 35
SX, LS, 40 SX, or 57 SX.

The IBM PS/2 5.25-Inch External Diskette Drive Adapter Cable is specifically
designed for PS/2 Models 35 SX, LS, or 40 SX.

The IBM PS/2 Upgrade Kit for Diskette Drives and IBM PS/2 Model 35 LS Upgrade
Kit for Hardfiles are specifically designed to upgrade a PS/2 Model 35 LS to
accept either a 3.5-inch or 5.25-inch diskette drives and either a PS/2 40MB or
80MB fixed disk drives.

The following operating systems support the IBM PS/2 1.44MB Diskette Drive, IBM
PS/2 5.25-Inch External Diskette Drive Adapter Cable, IBM PS/2 Upgrade Kit for
Diskette Drives, and IBM PS/2 Model 35 LS Upgrade Kit for Hardfiles:

    Operating System/2* (OS/2*) Extended Edition 1.30.1
    Operating System/2* (OS/2*) Standard Edition 1.30.1
    Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 3.3, 4.0, 5.0

Dimensions

    Width:  101.6mm
    Depth:  150mm
    Height:  25.4mm
    Ambient Air Temperature:  10.0 - 35.0C (system on)
    Humidity:  8 to 80 percent RH (system on); 8 to 80 percent RH (system off)                                                                                                     .

Limitations:  Designed to be installed in a PS/2 Models 35 SX, LS, 40 SX, or 57
SX.  Maximum:  Two.  Cable Order:  None.  Field Installed:  Yes. Prerequisites:
PS/2 Model 35 SX, LS, 40 SX, 57 SX.  Corequisites:  None. Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 296. IBM PS/2 3.5-INCH REWRITABLE OPTICAL DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

Part Number  6450162

Feature Code 0162

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 3.5-Inch Rewritable Optical Drive (FC 0162, P/N
6450162) is an internal 3.5-inch rewritable optical drive.  It accepts either a
single removable 3.5-inch magneto-optical (MO) cartridge with up to 127 million
bytes (127MB) formatted capacity which may be written and read many times, or a
3.5-inch optical read only memory (O-ROM).  The drive adheres to the industry
standard Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) X3.131-1986 for single ended
devices.

The IBM Personal System/2 128MB Rewritable Optical Cartridge (38F8645 single
pack, 38F8646 five pack), is a 3.5-inch MO cartridge, similar in appearance to
3.5-inch diskette media. This cartridge has a formatted capacity of up to 127
million bytes (127MB), which can be read and rewritten many times. The drive
also supports O-ROM, which is 3.5-inch optical read only memory with up to 122
million bytes (122MB) typical capacity.  This media can be used by
software/application developers to distribute CD-ROM like applications.

The IBM Personal System/2 Optical Drive Kit A (FC 1121, P/N 6451126) is
specifically designed and required to support the installation of either a PS/2
3.5-Inch Rewritable Optical Drive (FC 0162, P/N 6450162) in PS/2 Models 60 and
80-041, 071, 111, and 311 with either PS/2 SCSI adapter installed.

The kit contains installation instructions and SCSI cable required to attach to
a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI adapter.

Drive Specifications:

    Average Seek Time          66 msec
    Track to Track             1 msec
    Average Latency            16.7 msec
    Disk Data Rate             4.35Mbits/sec (sustained)
    Disk Rotational Speed      1800 rpm

Media Specifications - Rewritable Optical Cartridge (MO)

    Formatted Capacity         127 million bytes
    Track Density              15.9 K tracks per inch
    Linear Density             24.4 K bits per inch
    Number of Tracks           9952
    Number of Sectors/Track    25
    Number of Bytes/Sector     512

Media Specifications - Optical Read Only Cartridge (O-ROM) Storage Capacity
122 million bytes typical application

Dimensions

    Width:  4.00 inch (101.6mm)
    Depth (W/Card):  6.00 inch (169.0mm)
    Depth (ODA):  5.75 inch (146.0mm)
    Height:  1.63 inch (41.3mm)
    Operating Ambient Air Temperature:  10 - 35C
    Operating Relative Humidity:  8 - 80 percent non-condensing

Machine Requirements:  The PS/2 3.5-inch Rewritable Optical Drive option can be
installed in PS/2 Models 57 SX, 60, 65 SX, 80, 90 XP, and 95 XP with either a
PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter or a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache
installed.  This drive can also be installed in either a 3510-0V0 or 3511-003.
When combined with either of the PS/2 SCSI enclosures (3510-0V0 or 3511-003),
this versatile drive offers optical function to any PS/2 Micro Channel desktop
or floor-standing system with a PS/2 SCSI adapter installed.

The PS/2 Optical Drive Kit is specifically designed and required to install a
PS/2 3.5-inch Rewritable Optical Drive (#0162, P/N 6450162) in the front bay of
PS/2 Models 60 and 80 041, 071, 111, and 311 with either PS/2 SCSI adapter
installed.  The kit contains installation instructions and the necessary cable
to attach the drive to the SCSI adapter. Limitations:  The PS/2 Optical Drive
Kit A is required to install this device in the front bay of PS/2 Models 60,
80-041, 071, 111, and 311.  Maximum: System dependent.  Cable Order:  None.
Field Installed:  Yes. Prerequisites:  An IBM PS/2 SCSI adapter installed in a
PS/2 Micro Channel system.  The PS/2 Optical Drive Kit A is required to support
installation in PS/2 Models 60 and 80-041, 071, 111, and 311 with either PS/2
Micro Channel SCSI adapters installed.  Corequisites:  None.  Customer Setup:
Recommend that a Service Representative set up and install this SCSI device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 297. IBM 16-BIT AT FAST SCSI ADAPTER KITS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  32G4088

Part Number  32G4089

Feature Code 4313

Feature Code 4315

Bus Master  No

Interface to PS/2(R) SCSI options.  The IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Kit
(#4313, 32G4088), and IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter External Cable Kit
(#4315, 32G4089) provide customers a way to connect IBM PS/2 Models 25/286 SX,
30/286 SX, 35/SX SLC(TM), 40/SX SLC; PS/VP 6384 Models 325T, 425SX, 433DX,
466DX2; PS/1(R) 2121, 2123, 2133 and 2155 and the IBM 7537 Industrial Computers
to IBM PS/2 80MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive, 104MB SCSI Hard Disk Drive, 160MB SCSI
Fixed Disk Drive, 212MB SCSI Hard Disk Drive, 320MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive,

400MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive, 1GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive, PS/2 Tape Drives (IBM
3532-023 2.3GB and 4mm DAT Tape Drives), PS/2 CD-ROM II Drive, and SCSI
3.5-inch and 5.25-inch SCSI Rewritable Optical Disk Drives.  IBM 3510 External
SCSI Storage Enclosure is also supported with this adapter for most of IBM SCSI
devices mentioned above.  Software drivers are included with the adapter kit to
provide device supports.  A SCSI diagnostic utility is also included.

The IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter is capable of SCSI-2 fast support for SCSI
device to have fast data transfer per ANSI Small Computer System Interface 2
(X3T9 Rev. 10G) on SCSI-2 features. (TM) Trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (R) Registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Enables future system growth through expanded IBM SCSI options
    o  Provides business solution to customer storage requirements
    o  To cope with multimedia requirements for low-end IBM PC offerings

With emerging multimedia and more data intensive applications, it becomes very
important from the user's view, that affordable SCSI controller, capable of
dealing with data intensive application for AT-based systems, is pervasive.

Customers will realize additional growth opportunities with the IBM 16-Bit AT
Fast SCSI Adapter Kits in many ways:

    o  Provides the ability to attach IBM CD-ROM II technology for
       utilizing high-capacity compact discs and fast data rate.
    o  Provides the ability to attach IBM 3.5-inch and 5.25-inch
       Rewritable Optical drives for greater storage capacity and data
       backup with better performance.
    o  Provides the ability to attach IBM Tape drives for data backup
       with low cost.
    o  Provides the ability to connect additional SCSI Fixed Disk Drives
       with better performance for low-end PC offerings.
    o  Provides flexibility when connecting SCSI options to a system
       unit by allowing attachment internal, external or both.
    o  Provides expanded growth capabilities by operating in DOS,
       Windows(1) and OS/2(R) environments.
(1) Trademark of Microsoft Corporation. (R) Registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

    Width:  159mm (6.25 inches)
    Height: 95mm (3.75 inches)
    Weight: 114g  (4 oz.)
    External cable:
     50-pin high density SCSI cable (36 inches).
     (As a part of Feature 32G4089)
    Internal cable:
     50-pin to 50-pin SCSI ribbon cable (36 inches).
     (As a part of Feature 32G4088)
    Terminator:
     50-pin external SCSI terminator.
     (As a part of Feature 32G4089)
    FCC certificate:  FCC class-B has been
                      granted to this Adapter as an ISA/AT
                      system adapter card.
    (FCC ID:          HK9224TMC1680)
    Safety Agency:    UL/CSA approval has
                      been granted.

Machine Requirements:  The IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Kits support up to
seven IBM SCSI option devices per adapter and as many as two adapters per
machine may be installed.  Total cable length is defined dependent of the
device types attached as follows:

    With Asynchronous SCSI devices:            Up to 6 meters
    With Synchronous SCSI devices:             Up to 6 meters
    With Synchronous SCSI fast devices:        Up to 3 meters

The IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Kits (P/N 32G4088 and 32G4089) can be
installed in the IBM PS/2 Models 25/286 SX, 30/286 SX, 35/SX SLC, 40/SX SLC;
PS/VP 6384 Models  325T, 425SX, 433DX, 466DX2; PS/1 Models 2121 ,2123, 2133,
2155 and IBM 7537 Industrial Computer (all models).  IBM 3510 External SCSI
Storage Enclosure as well as some of IBM SCSI units with their own enclosure
will be connected to the adapter which is housed in the system mentioned above.

 Programming Requirements:  The following operating systems support the IBM
16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Kits:

    o  Disk Operating Systems Version 3.3 and above (A)
    o  OS/2 Version 2.0 and above (A)
    o  Windows 3.0 and 3.1
For Tape Drives and 3.5-inch Rewritable Optical Drive, Sytos Plus File Backup
Manager(3) (Rel. 1.33 or higher for DOS and 1.35 or higher for OS/2) is
available and supports the IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter. (A) When attaching
to the IBM Rewritable Optical Drive, OS/2 2.0 or above and DOS Version 4.0 with
all CSD installed or above must be used. (2) Trademark of Sytron Corporation.

Compatibility:  The IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Kits will support the
following IBM SCSI options:

    o   80MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive
    o  160MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive
    o  212MB SCSI Hard Disk Drive
    o  320MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive
    o  400MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive
    o  1.0GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive
    o  SCSI Tape Drives (2.3GB, 2.0GB 4mm DAT)
    o  IBM  CD-ROM II Drive
    o  IBM  3.5-inch Rewritable Optical Drive
    o  IBM  3431-001 Rewritable Optical Disk Drive (5.25")
    o  3510 External SCSI Storage Enclosure.

Customer Responsibilities:  The IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Kits are
designed to be customer installable.

Cable Orders:  The IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Kit (#4313, 32G4088)
includes a 50-pin SCSI ribbon cable and capable of attaching two internal SCSI
devices depending on the system capability.

The IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter External Cable Kit (#4315, 32G4089) need
only be ordered if a customer is installing the IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter
Kit and wants to also add external SCSI options.

Problem Determination:  The IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Kit contains a
customer SCSI Device Analyzer Diagnostic Utility Program that can assist in
isolating a defective adapter card.  Standard system error indications should
be followed to resolve all problems.

This product uses the security and auditability features of the installed PS/2,
PS/VP, PS/1 or 7537 Industrial Computer.

Limitations:  Small Computer System Interface (SCSI), as defined in the
American National Standard Institute (ANSI) standard X3.131-1986, provides a
port for the attachment of external devices.  The SCSI bus may be internal or
external to the system unit.  The IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Kits are in
conformance with this standard and have an external port.  This Adapter
conforms with ANSI SCSI-2 and will work with SCSI-2 fast devices.

A data security exposure exists even with Power-on Password installed, since
external SCSI adapters can attach through the external SCSI port and gain
undetected read or write access to data stored on internal and external SCSI
devices.

Physical access to the system and external SCSI devices must be controlled to
limit this exposure.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 298. IBM PS/2 CD-ROM DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

Part Number  6450845

Feature Code 0845

Bus Master  No

A Compact Disc-Read Only Memory drive that expands application solutions for
all PS/2 Models 8580, 8565, and 8560 by enabling various applications; such as,
catalogs, libraries, and archives that reside on Compact Discs to be accessed
by a computer.  The PS/2 CD-ROM Drive is a 5.25 inch half-high form factor
drive which utilizes the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) and supports
compact discs with 600Mb typical capacity.  The drive has a 380ms average
access time and features an analog stereo headphone output jack for sound
reproduction.  A "CD-ROM Installation and Operators Instruction" Manual
(S57F-1938 P/N 57F1938) is shipped with the product.  Customer Setup:  None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 299. IBM PS/2 CD-ROM DRIVE KIT A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450847

Feature Code 0847

Bus Master  No

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF JUNE 24, 1992)

Specifically designed and required to support the installation of a PS/2 CD-ROM
Drive in PS/2 Models 8580, 8565, and 8560 with a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI
Adapter (#1005 P/N 6451109) or the PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache
(#1018 6451110) installed.  The kit contains a bezel, cables and installation
instructions required to install an internal CD-ROM Drive in the 5.25-inch full
high bay, located in the front of the system.  A "PS/2 CD-ROM Installation Kit
A" Manual (S15F-2142 P/N 15F2142) is shipped with the product.  Customer Setup:
None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 300. IBM PS/2 5.25-INCH SLIM DISKETTE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451066

Feature Code 1066

Bus Master  No

This feature is an internal 5.25-inch 1.2Mb diskette drive that provides a
method for users to transfer data files from 5.25-inch media and execute
programs that follow DOS and BIOS procedures. Maximum:  One.  Field
Installation:  Yes. Customer Setup:  Yes.  Prerequisites:  An available system
Bay


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 301. IBM PS/2 5.25-INCH INTERNAL DISKETTE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451006

Feature Code 1006

Bus Master  No

This feature is an internal 5.25-inch 1.2Mb diskette drive that provides a
method for users to transfer data files from 5.25-inch media and execute
programs that follow DOS and BIOS procedures.  The option consists of an
internal diskette, a signal cable, a power cable, a ground cable, a bezel (face
plate), and installation instructions.  The diskette drive is installed as a
second disk drive occupying the D position and the signal cable is connected to
P/N 6451007.  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes. Customer Setup:  Yes.
Prerequisites:  An available system D slot and available I/O slot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 302. IBM PS/2 1.44MB 1 INCH HIGH DISKETTE DRIVE KIT B ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451035

Feature Code 1035

Bus Master  No

This kit provides the parts and instructions necessary to install the 1.44MB 1
Inch High Diskette Drive in the Model 55 LS.  The kit contains a diskette drive
cable, a diskette drive bezel, and installation instructions. The drive uses
the diskette controller on the system board.  When installed, it becomes the A
drive in the Model 55 LS.  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer
Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 303. IBM PS/2 80MB FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451043

Feature Code 1043

Bus Master  No

This 3.5-inch half-high storage option feature 80 million bytes of formatted
capacity, and 16ms average seek time.  This storage option may be installed in
a PS/2 Model 55 LS, which is a medialess system for a LAN environment.

Drive Specifications

    Formatted Capacity *  80million bytes
    Data Transfer Rate    1.5MBytes/s
    Average Seek Time     16ms
    Average Latency       8.3ms
    Sector Interleave     1.1

* Actual user accessable capacity may vary slightly based on different
operating environment.

Dimensions:

    Width:  4.00 inch (101.6mm)
    Depth (HDA):  5.75 inch (152.37mm)
    Height:  1.62 inch (41.275mm)

The following operating systems support the PS/2 80MB Hard Disk Drives
installed in a PS/2 Model 55 LS:

    Operating System/2 (OS/2) Extended Edition 1.2
    Operating System/2 (OS/2) Standard Edition 1.2
    Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 3.3 or 4.0
    IBM 4680 Operating System Version 2, 3, and 4

Limitations:  Installed in a PS/2 Model 55 LS that currently does not have a
fixed disk drive installed Maximum:  One.  Cable Order:  None.  Field
Installed:  Yes.  Prerequisites:  None.  Corequisites:  None.  Customer Setup:
Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 304. IBM PS/2 40MB FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451047

Feature Code 1047

Bus Master  No

This 3.5-inch half-high storage option feature 40 million bytes of formatted
capacity, and 17ms average seek time.  This storage option may be installed in
a PS/2 Model 55 LS, which is a medialess system for a LAN environment.

Drive Specifications

    Formatted Capacity *  40million bytes
    Data Transfer Rate    1.5MBytes/s
    Average Seek Time     17ms
    Average Latency       8.3ms
    Sector Interleave     1.1

* Actual user accessable capacity may vary slightly based on different
operating environment.

Dimensions:

    Width:  4.00 inch (101.6mm)
    Depth (HDA):  5.75 inch (152.37mm)
    Height:  1.62 inch (41.275mm)

The following operating systems support the PS/2 40MB Hard Disk Drives
installed in a PS/2 Model 55 LS:

    Operating System/2 (OS/2) Extended Edition 1.2
    Operating System/2 (OS/2) Standard Edition 1.2
    Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 3.3 or 4.0
    IBM 4680 Operating System Version 2, 3, and 4

Limitations:  Installed in a PS/2 Model 55 LS that currently does not have a
fixed disk drive installed Maximum:  One.  Cable Order:  None.  Field
Installed:  Yes.  Prerequisites:  None.  Corequisites:  None.  Customer Setup:
Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 305. IBM PS/2 1.44MB 1-INCH HIGH DISKETTE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451072

Feature Code 1072

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 1.44MB 1-Inch High Diskette Drive replaces a similar
current option.  In addition, this feature can be installed as a second
diskette drive on a PS/2 8530-E01 that has the first diskette drive light BELOW
the media insertion slot.  The IBM PS/2 1.44MB 1-Inch High Diskette Drive Kit A
(FC 1034, P/N 6451034), which contains the diskette drive cable, bezel, and
installation instructions, is required.

The IBM Personal System/2 1.44MB 1-Inch High Diskette Drive is NOT supported as
a second diskette drive on an 8530-E01, if the first diskette drive light is
ABOVE the media insertion slot.  The IBM PS/2 Diskette Drive (FC 3057 P/N
6450353) and the IBM PS/2 1.44MB Diskette Drive Kit A (FC 1037 P/N 6451037) are
required in this instance.  The kit contains the diskette drive cable, bezel,
and installation instructions.

The IBM PS/2 1.44MB Diskette Drive Kit B (FC1035 P/N 6451035) is required to
install a IBM Personal System/2 1.44MB 1-Inch High Diskette Drive (FC 1072 P/N
6451072) in a PS/2 Model 55 LS.  The kit contains the diskette drive cable,
bezel, and installation instructions.

The IBM Personal System/2 1.44MB 1-Inch High Diskette Drive (FC 1072 P/N
6451072) supersedes the current PS/2 1.44MB 1-Inch High Diskette Drive (FC 1026
P/N 6451026).

Device Specifications:

    Formatted Capacity         1.44MB
    Bytes/Sector               512
    Sectors/Track              18
    Cylinders                  80
    Number of Heads            2

Physical Characteristics:

    Width:  101.6mm (4.0-inch)
    Depth:  157.5mm (6.2-inch)
    Height: 25.4mm (1.0-inch)

Limitations:  The IBM PS/2 Model 30-E01 requires a kit when installing as a
second diskette drive.  Maximum:  None.  Cable Order:  None.  Field
Installation:  Yes.  Prerequisites:  The IBM PS/2 Model 30-E01 requires a kit
when installing as a second drive.  The IBM PS/2 Model 55 LS requires a kit to
install a IBM Personal System/2 1.44MB 1-Inch High Diskette Drive.
Corequisites:  None.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 306. IBM PS/2 PS/2 2.88MB DISKETTE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451106

Feature Code 1106

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 2.88MB Diskette Drive (#1106, P/N 6451106) is a
3.5-inch 1-inch high diskette drive, features media sense capability, and
provides up to 2.88MB of formatted capacity when a 3.5-inch 4MB Diskette
(72X6111 ten pack) is installed.  In addition, this drive maintains read/write
compatibility with 720KB and 1.44MB diskette drives.  The drive is designed to
install in either a PS/2 Models 35 SX, LS, 40 SX, or 57 SX.

    Device Characteristics:
    Diskette size:             1MB        2MB        4MB
                               ------     ------     ------
    Formatted Capacity         720KB      1.44MB     2.88MB
    Bytes/Sector               512        512        512
    Sectors/Track              9          18         36
    Cylinders                  80         80         80
    Number of Heads            2          2          2

Dimensions:

    Width:  101.6mm
    Depth:  150mm
    Height:  25.4mm
    Ambient Air Temperature:  10.0 - 35.0C (system on)
    Humidity:  8 - 80 percent RH (system on); 8 - 80 percent RH (system off)

The following operating systems support the IBM PS/2 2.88MB Diskette Drive:

    Operating System/2 (OS/2) Extended Edition 1.30.1
    Operating System/2 (OS/2) Standard Edition 1.30.1
    Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 5.0

Limitations:  The IBM PS/2 2.88MB Diskette Drive requires either DOS 5.0, OS/2
SE 1.30.1, or OS/2 EE 1.30.1 to support 2.88MB of formatted capacity and media
sense capability.  Maximum:  PS/2 Model 35 SX, LS - two; PS/2 Model 40 SX -
four; PS/2 Model 57 SX - two.  Cable Order:  None.  Field Installed: Yes.
Prerequisites:  PS/2 Model 35 SX, LS, 40 SX, or 57 SX.  Corequisites: None.
Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 307. IBM PS/2 PS/2 CD-ROM DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

Part Number  6451113

Feature Code 1113

Bus Master  No

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF JUNE 24, 1992)

The IBM Personal System/2 CD-ROM Drive is a Compact Disc-Read Only Memory drive
that replaces a similar current option.  This internal device expands
application solutions by enabling various applications such as catalogs,
libraries and archives which reside on Compact Disc to be accessed by computer.
The PS/2 CD-ROM Drive is a 5.25 half-high form factor drive which adheres to
the ANSI SCSI STANDARD X3.131.1986 and supports industry standard Compact Disc
(ISO 9660) with 600 million bytes (600MB) typical capacity.  The drive has a
380ms average seek time and features an analog stereo output headphone jack for
sound reproduction. The IBM Personal System/2 CD-ROM Drive supersedes the
current PS/2 CD-ROM Drive (FC 0845 P/N 6450845).

Device Specifications:

    Standard 5-1/4 inch Half High Form Factor
    Standard SCSI Interface connector
    De-Facto Standard Caddy
    Analog stereo headphone output jack
    Storage Capacity:  600 million bytes; typical application; (disc
    dependent).
    Data Transfer Rate:  150 Kbytes/sec (sustained); 1.5 Mbytes/sec (burst).
    Seek Time:  380 msec (average)
    700 msec (maximum)
    Dimensions:  Standard 5-1/4-inch Half High Form Factor

Limitations:  None Maximum:  None.  Cable Order:  None.  Field Installed: Yes.
Prerequisites:  An IBM PS/2 SCSI Adapter installed.  Corequisites: None.
Customer Setup:  It is recommended that a Service Representative set up and
install these SCSI devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 308. IBM PS/2 1.44MB DISKETTE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450353

Feature Code 3057

Bus Master  No

This feature is a double-sided, 3.5-inch diskette drive that supports 3.5-inch
media with 1.44Mb of formatted storage capacity.  The drive uses the diskette
controller on the system board.  When installed, it becomes the B drive.

The drive will operate in two modes:  low density and high-density.  In low
density mode, it will be totally compatible to the 720Kb (3.5-inch) diskette
drive.  In high-density mode, it doubles the data capability to 1.44Mb and the
data rate to 500K bps.  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes. Customer
Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 309. IBM PS/2 314MB FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450381

Feature Code 6023

Bus Master  No

Attaches via the high performance Enhanced Small Device Interface (ESDI) disk
drive adapter provided with the system unit and does not require an additional
expansion slot.  The fixed disk not only features a large storage capacity, but
also reduces the average seek time to 23ms, making it one of the fastest fixed
disks in the Personal System/2 family.

Drive Specifications:

    Formatted Capacity:  314MB
    Disk Platters:  8
    Cylinders:  1,225
    Sectors/Track:  34
    Data Bytes/Sector:  512
    Data Trasfer Rate:  10.0 million bits/sec
    Average Seek Time:  23ms


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 310. IBM PS/2 60MB FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450666

Feature Code 6666

Bus Master  No

This field installable optional feature provides a 60Mb/27ms Fixed-Disk upgrade
for the IBM Personal System2/ Model 50 or Model 50 Z to replace the original
fixed-disk drive.  The customer retains the components that are removed when
the feature is installed.  The required replacement adapter is included with
the feature.  Customer set-up:  Yes.  Field Installation:  Yes. Limitation:
Available for IBM Personal System/2 Model 50 (8550-021) and Model 50 Z
(8550-031)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 311. IBM PS/2 INTERNAL OPTICAL DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  63X4166

Feature Code 8700

Bus Master  No

This feature provides 200Mb of storage capacity per removable Optical Disk
Cartridge (P/N 63X4199).  Once written, files cannot be erased but can be
removed from directories.  It is recommended as a supplement to a fixed disk
for higher capacity storage, and for applications where removability of the
disk is important (security, archive, or portable data bases).  This feature
includes the 5.25-inch drive, the controller adapter, device support software
(including a save/restore function) for Personal Computer DOS 3.3 or higher,
and a diagnostic diskette.  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes.
Prerequisites:  An available expansion slot and disk drive D position. Customer
Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 312. IBM PS/2 115MB FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450377

Feature Code 8730

Bus Master  No

The 115Mb Fixed Disk Drive is provided for the 8580-071, 111, and 8560-071.
This file attaches via the high performance (ESDI) disk adapter provided with
the system unit and does not require an additional expansion slot.  Maximum:
One.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 313. IBM PS/2 300/1200 INTERNAL MODEM/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450349

Feature Code 0349

Bus Master  No

The 300/1200 Internal Modem/A provides the capability to transmit data in
duplex mode over the Public Switched Telephone Network at 300 or 1200 bits per
second and supports the "AT" Command set.  The 300/1200 modem is compatible
with the Bell 212A and 103 practice (asynchronous only) recommendation for
transmitting data over the Public Switched Telephone Network.  Compatible IBM
modems include:  IBM Personal Computer 1200 bps Modem and the 5841 Modem
(asynchronous mode only).

This modem provides Canadian Approval for the Terminal Attachment Program (TAP)
standard CS-03.

A seven foot communications cable and a diagnostic diskette are supplied with
the modem adapter.  Maximum:  Seven.  Field Installation:  Yes. Prerequisite:
An available expansion slot.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 314. IBM PS/2 ADAPTER/A FOR ETHERNET NETWORKS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451091

Feature Code 1091

POS ID: EFE5

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Networks provides the ability
to attach IBM PS/2 Micro Channel system to an Ethernet network. The adapter
supports the Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802.3 (CSMA/CD) interfaces, and data
transfers at 10 Mbps via 10Base5 (thick cable), 10Base2 (thin cable), or
10BaseT (twisted pair) through an Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) connection
and user provided external transceiver. Remote Program Load (RPL) is included
as standard for systems requiring this capability.  Only the Banyan Vines and
Novell NetWare operating systems specified in the "Programming Requirements"
section currently support Remote Program Load.  The feature will automatically
issue a request to a loading Server device anytime the workstation is reset,
has no system disk available, or the disk program boot has been disabled.

IBM OS/2* Extended Edition (EE), IBM DOS, and PS/2 related programming are
supported.

Highlights The IBM Personal System/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Networks provides:

    Additional business solutions for offering both Ethernet and Token-Ring
    products to create intelligent LANs
    Growth by allowing Ethernet/802.3 customers to expand their networks.
    Support of multiple interfaces and LAN software facilitates growth and
    application exploitation
    Investment protection by supporting Ethernet Version 2 and 802.3
    (CSMA/CD) interfaces.

System Management -  a user-friendly interface is provided for installation and
setup, configuration and diagnostic capabilities, and maintainability.

The configurability, performance, and reliability of Ethernet networks ensure
the customer has the essential capabilities to solve complex business
solutions.

This Ethernet offering complements Token-Ring where both Ethernet and
Token-Ring are installed or the decision to go to Ethernet has been made for
reasons of interoperability with existing interfaces, smaller network demands,
or potentially lower initial cost.

Remote Program Load for Ethernet networks enables centralized configuration
management.  The resulting enhanced security and control capabilities enable
complex business solutions.

Supporting Ethernet, interfaces, and the availability of LAN software allows
continued growth and connection capability for customers seeking to expand
their network.

Customers can run IBM LAN software on existing workstations with the Ethernet
adapters to protect their investment.

The LAN drivers offered provide compatibility and connectivity to IBM OS/2, IBM
DOS, and Novell NetWare 286 and 386.

The IBM Personal System/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Networks provides ease of
installation via easy-to-follow setup and configurability procedures.

Service Personnel skill level and training requirements are minimized by:

    Configuration capabilities in installation procedures
    Diagnostic capabilities
    Power-on Self Test (POST)
    Simplicity in design.

Simplicity in installation (setup and configuration), and availability of POST
and diagnostics will minimize service, increase maintainability, and maximize
productivity of customers.  Finally, RPL in a client/server environment enables
configuration management, and enhanced security.

Technical Description

    10Mbps Thick/Thin Ethernet Micro Channel native adapter card
    Supports all IBM PS/2 Micro Channel systems
    Remote Program Load support
    Memory mapped system interface for enhanced throughput
    CSMA/CD, Differential Manchester encoding, Baseband and Broadband with
    external modem.
    Power-on Self Test (POST)

The following are programming requirements when operating an Ethernet/802.3
network with the IBM PC Disk Operating System (DOS) or the OS/2 EE.

    IBM PC Disk Operating System Version 3.3, and Version 4.0
    IBM Local Area Network Support Program Version 1.2
    MACETH.DOS and MACETH2.DOS NDIS device drivers, included in the option
    diskette packaged with the IBM PS/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Networks.
    IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2
    MACETH.OS2, and MACETH2.OS2 NDIS device drivers, included in the option
    diskette packaged with the PS/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Networks.

Additional Requirements:

    Memory required by NDIS driver - 15KB (bytes)
    Adapter requires 16KB RAM, 32KB of I/O address space
    IBM Programming Support:  (Note 1)
    DOS Database Requestor, packaged with OS/2 EE Version 1.2 (Note 2)
    DOS LAN Requestor, packaged with OS/2 LAN Server (Note 2)
    DOS LAN Support Program Version 1.2 (Note 2)
    DOS PC LAN Program Version 1.33 (Note 2)
    DOS IBM PC Communication/3270 Version 1.01  (Note 3)
    OS/2 EE Version 1.2 Communications Manager
    LAN Async Connection Server Program Version 2.0
    IBM TCP/IP Version 1.1 for DOS
    IBM TCP/IP Version 1.1 for OS/2

Note 1  The IBM Industrial Computer systems have not been tested with all of
the listed programs.  Refer to the individual product announcements or the
sales manual to verify the support status.

Note 2  These products support 802.3/Ethernet LANs.  However, they have not
been tested for connectivity to Token-Ring LANs via an IBM 8209 LAN Bridge.
Remote Program Load is not supported. Only one Server per network is supported
by the IBM PS/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Networks.

Note 3  IBM Personal Communications/3270 supports 802.3/Ethernet LANs with the
following conditions:

Supported only when run in a conventional memory environment.  Running in
Expanded Memory Specification (EMS) memory is not supported. Only the
workstation function is supported.  The PC/3270 gateway function is not
supported.

Host connectivity for 802.3/Ethernet workstations are supported via an IBM 8209
LAN Bridge to Token-Ring attached 3270 gateway products.

Only the IEEE 802.2 protocol is supported.  The NETBIOS protocol is not
supported.

Software Support Supplied with Ethernet Adapter/A:

    IBM OS/2, IBM DOS, and Novell NetWare 286 and 386 drivers
    Diagnostics to assist in problem determination

DOS utility (RPLBOOT.COM) to disable the active bootable DOS partition on the
hardfile and allow remote program load of a DOS workstation with a hardfile
installed.

Independent Software Vendor (ISV) Certification:  (Note 4)

The following products have been tested.  These products operate substantially
as described in their program documentation.  IBM has not evaluated these
products and makes no comments or judgement about their functions, quality,
performance, etc.

    Banyan Vines 4.0 (1) (Note 5)
    Novell Advanced NetWare Version 2.15C, SFT NetWare Version 2.15C, ELS
    NetWare Version 2.15C, and Novell NetWare 386 Version 3.1 (2) (Note 6)
    SCO UNIX System V/386 Version 3.2v2.0, SCO XENIX System V Version 2.3.2,
    Open Desktop Version 1.0 (3,4,5) (Note 7)
    3COM 3+ Open Manager Version 1.1 (6)

Note 4  The IBM Industrial Computer systems have not been tested and are not
supported with any of these non-IBM products. Note 5  Banyan Vines 4.0 supports
Remote Program Load.  Contact Banyan Systems, Inc. for Remote Program Load
support information. Note 6  Novell device drivers are included with this
adapter. Remote Program Load is supported on Novell Advanced NetWare Version
2.15C, SFT NetWare Version 2.15C, and Novell NetWare 386 Version 3.1 Note 7
Open Desktop Version 1.0 requires a supplemental diskette for use.  The
supplemental diskette is available from SCO.

Limitations:  When a PS/2 Adapter/A card is installed in a system, other than
the PS/2 Model 55LS, setup, configuration, and diagnostics must be done for all
adapters locally from a reference diskette via a diskette drive. Remote Program
Load is supported by Banyan Vines and Novell NetWare at this time.  IBM intends
to enhance OS/2 LAN Server to support Remote Program Load of both OS/2 and DOS
on an Ethernet network.  Maximum:  A maximum of two cards can be installed per
system.  Cable Orders:  Cables, terminators, and external transceivers are not
supplied with the IBM PS/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Networks.  Cabling:  When
setting up a network, it is recommended that you follow the standards set by
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ Institute of Electronics and
Electrical Engineers (IEEE).

The network adapter has two type on connectors.  These connectors enable the
attachment of a computer to a network that uses thin 50-ohm (IEEE standard
802.3 10BASE2 Enhanced) shielded coaxial cable, or thick 50-ohm (IEEE standard
802.3 10BASE5) double-shielded coaxial cable.

The D-shell connector is used when connecting the workstation to a thick (IEEE
standard 802.3 10BASE5) coaxial cable.  The BNC jack is for attaching the BNC
T-type connector provided with the adapter.  A BNC T-type connector is then
used to interconnect the thin (IEEE standard 802.3 10BASE2) coaxial cable
between the computers.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Prerequisites: None.
Corequisites:  None.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 315. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK 16/4 ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F7352

Feature Code 1133

Bus Master  No

The IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Adapter/A provides for the attachment of
Personal System/2 Computers, Models 50 and up, using the Micro Channel I/O bus
to the IBM Token-Ring Network.  Attachment is provided for rings operating at
either 4 or 16M bps.  It requires a single standard length (approximately 12
inches) feature slot in the PS/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 316. IBM PS/2 300/1200/2400 INTERNAL MODEM/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  94X1755

Feature Code 1755

POS ID: E016

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 300/1200/2400 Internal Modem/A offers high-function,
internal modem support for PS/2 Models 50, 55SX, 56SX, 57SX, 60, 65SX, 70, 80,
90, 95. and P70 systems.  This modem is Hayes compatible*, and provides
standard compatibility via CCITT V.22 bis, Bell 212A, and Bell 103 full duplex
operation.  Most functions of the modem are compatible with the IBM 5853
External Modem.  It has automatic dial/auto answer function, and the ability to
direct-connect into US public or private switched network telephone lines.

A half-length, 16-bit PS/2 Micro Channel adapter, it includes NS16550A FIFO
asynch support, eight programmable port assignments, and system speaker for
telephone line monitoring.  Cable (#2716) can be ordered as a feature code of
special ordering vehicle 8550-ZZZ.

The following programs support the IBM Personal System/2 300/1200/2400 Modem/A:

    IBM Operating System/2 Extended Edition version 1.1
    IBM DOS 4.0
    IBM DOS 3.3.

The following components of the IBM Operating System/2 Extended Edition
Communication Manager support the Modem/A:

    IBM 3101 Model 20 Emulation
    DEC VT100 Terminal Emulation
    Asynchronous Communications Device Interface (ACDI)
    The transfer element that works with the 3270-PC File Transfer Program
    XMODEM file transfer
    Send ASCII Text File transfer

* Certain unique functions are not supported.  See "Technical Reference" Manual
for details.  Prerequisites:  An available slot.  Limitations:  AIX PS/2
support.  Maximum:  One.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 317. IBM PS/2 3270 CONNECTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9287

Feature Code 2000

POS ID: E1FF

Bus Master  No

Adapter card necessary for 3278/79 emulation.  It provides 3270 Display Station
emulation for the Micro Channel system units.  This feature will fit in either
the floor or desk-top model.  Diagnostics are provided with the card.
Prerequisites:  None.  Customer Setup (CSU):  Yes.

Highlights:

    Attachment of the Micro Channel system units to the following:
    -   3174 Control Unit
    -   3274 Control Unit
    -   4321 Processor Display/Printer Adapter
    -   4331 Processor Display/Printer Adapter
    -   4361 Processor Display/Printer Adapter
    -   4702 Finance Communication Processor
    -   3276 Control Unit
    -   9370 Workstation Subsystem Controller

Supports emulation of 3278 Display Station Model 2 and 3279 Color Display
Station Model 2A or S2A, with certain restrictions.

Supports both CUT and DFT modes of operation.  (Supports DFT mode only on
controllers that have the DFT feature installed).

Supports CUT mode only when attached to a 9370 Workstation Subsystem
Controller.

Can be installed by the customer.

No host hardware or host system software modifications required for 3270
emulated functions.

Attachment of the 3274, 3174 or 9370 Workstation Subsystem Controller via the
3299 terminal multiplexer is supported.

Description:  The 3270 Connection is a circuit card that plugs into a slot of
the Micro Channel system.  A cable receptacle mounted on the card provides for
attachment of a customer supplied coaxial cable, IBM cabling system media
(3174, 3274 or 9370 Workstation Subsystem Controller attachment only) or
telephone twisted-pair via IBM/ROLM coax to twisted-pair adapter at the rear of
the system unit.  Most, but not all of the emulated displays are supported.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 318. IBM PS/2 MULTI-PROTOCOL ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450348

Feature Code 3042

Bus Master  No

This option provides a full-duplex or half-duplex multi-protocol serial data
transmission channel.  It supports asynchronous, bisynchronous, HDLC, or SDLC
protocols.  It will support modems or direct attachment.  The option is
programmable at speeds from 50 bps to 19.2K bps and it supports automatic
protocol switching via software at setup.  Maximum:  Two.  Field Installation:
Yes.  Prerequisite:  An available expansion slot.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 319. IBM PS/2 MULTI-PROTOCOL ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451114

Feature Code 3043

POS ID: DEFF

Bus Master  No

This option can provide a full-duplex or half duplex multiprotocol serial data
transmission channel. It supports asynchronous, bisynchronous, HDLC, or SDLC
protocols and conforms to the CCITT V.25 bis communication standard, and
EIA-232C industry standard with optional "Failsafe" feature.  It will support
modems or direct attachment. This option is fully programmable at speeds of up
to 19,200 bps and supports automatic protocol switching via software at setup.
Maximum:  Two. Field Installation:  Yes.  Prerequisite:  An available expansion
slot.  There are no cables that ship with this product; however a cable is
required. The three meter Communications Adapter Cable, P/N 1502067, #2067 or
equivalent, is recommended.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 320. IBM PS/2 TOKEN-RING NETWORK 16/4 TRACE AND PERFORMANCE ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  74F5121

Feature Code 5121

Bus Master  No

Feature cards that can be installed in IBM Personal Computers and Personal
System/2 (PS/2.)  These feature cards work with the Token-Ring Network 16/4
Trace and Performance Program to provide a realtime view of the traffic on
Token-Ring networks operating at 4 million bits per second (bps) or 16 million
bps.  This combination of hardware and software has facilities to analyze trace
data, measure media usage, and collect ring station traffic statistics.  Using
this data, the customer can get valuable information for use in debugging
application software, capacity planning and network reconfiguration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 321. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK TRACE AND PERFORMANCE ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  96X5774

Feature Code 5774

Bus Master  No

The Token-Ring Network Trace And Performance Adapter/A is a feature card for
the Personal Systems/2 Micro Channel system.  When directed by the Token-Ring
Network Trace and Performance Program, copies selected ring traffic or ring
utilization statistics for later analysis.

The Token-Ring Network Trace and Performance Adapter/A performs as an
Token-Ring Network adapter in Token-Ring Networks when it is not in the trace
or performance monitoring mode.  In addition, on completion of the trace or
performance activity, this adapter will reset to function as an Token-Ring
Network adapter.

This adapter requires one slot in the machine that they operate.  The adapter
contains a microprocessor operating under the control of the adapter resident
microcode.  It works in conjunction with the Token-Ring Network Trace and
Performance Program, and provides visibility to the data on the ring as well as
ring utilization statistics.  The adapter collects all or part of ring traffic
into a database contingent upon user-defined parameters such as source and/or
destination addresses.

The adapter provides data security by notifying the LAN Manager Version 1.0
when in trace mode. This adapter is packaged with a diskette that contains an
adapter description file, an adapter diagnostic and a single ring network
diagnostic.  The adapter diagnostic program is used as an aid in network
problem determination.  Permanent and recoverable error conditions are
detected, and information on the probable source of error is presented.  The
"IBM Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide", SX27-3710, may be
obtained for instructions on how to use the ring diagnostics.  An Installation
and testing document is included with the adapter to assist the customer setup.
Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 322. IBM S/36/38 WORKSTATION EM ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  69X6292

Feature Code 6279

Bus Master  No

The System 36/38 Workstation Emulation Adapter/A and Attachment Cable offer a
Personal System/2 emulation product for twinax attachment to the System/36 and
System/38 as a workstation.  These products offer enhanced functions beyond
that established by the Enhanced 5250 Emulation Product.

The System 36/38 Workstation Emulation Adapter/A and Attachment Cable allows
specified Personal System/2 models to emulate either 3196 or 5292-2 workstation
displays or 5256, 5219, 5224, or 5225 printers.  The adapter is attached to the
twinax cable used in System 36/38 environments.  In combination with the System
36/38 Workstation Emulation, Version 1.1.0, this adapter allows the user to
access the application programs on the System 36/38 as if he were at a 3196 or
5292-2 workstation.  As a printer, the user can print the output of System
36/38 application programs on a printer attached to the Personal System/2.  The
System 36/38 Workstation Emulation Program provides limited multi-tasking
capabilities which allows the Personal System/2 to interact with the System
36/38 as if it were four separate terminals or printers.  That is, the user can
easily switch between up to four different System 36/38 tasks as well as one
DOS task. Prerequisites:  None.  Customer Setup (CSU):  Yes.

Highlights:

    Four Workstation Sessions
    The System 36/38 Workstation Emulation program allows the user to
    establish one to four sessions with a System/36 or System/38.  The
    sessions can be any combination of printer, display, or host graphics
    sessions that does not exceed four sessions total.
    On-Card 8088 Processor
    The on-card 8088 processor reduces the timing dependencies on the PC
    processor.

Standard Features:  The System 36/38 Workstation Emulation Adapter/A, System
36/38 Workstation Emulation Adapter/A and Attachment Cable.

Physical Specifications of Hardware:

    Width - 11.5 inches
    Depth - Less than 1 inch
    Height - 3.5 inches
    Weight - Less than 1 pound

Operation Environment:  The specific operating environment of the System 36/38
Workstation Emulation Adapter/A is the same as the system unit in which it is
installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 323. IBM SURGE PROTECTION ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F2625

Feature Code 6361

Bus Master  No

The Realtime Interface Co-processor Surge Protection Adapter can be used to
provide voltage suppression circuitry in conjunction with the Eight Port RS-422
Interface Board/A and Eight Port Cable for each port.  A Surge Protection
Adapter is necessary for each port when its individual cable run exceeds 122
meters (400 feet) in length or is used in conjunction with outdoor cabling.
This adapter is usable for asynchronous communications only.  This adapter
consists of two 25-pin connectors connected by the appropriate surge protection
circuitry.  Prerequisite:  One Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport
Adapter, Model 2 #6590, one Eight Port RS-422 Interface Board/A (#6363), and
one Eight Port Cable (#6366) is required.  Maximum:  Up to eight Surge
Protection Adapters (#6361) can be used per Eight Port Cable (#6366).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 324. IBM EIGHT PORT RS-232 INTERFACE BOARD/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F2610

Feature Code 6362

Bus Master  No

This interface board provides the appropriate drivers and receivers to support
eight serial I/O ports of RS-232-D/CCITT V.24.  Protocols for these electrical
interfaces are user programmable.  The interface board attaches to the
Portmaster Adapter/A and includes a 100-pin connector for external
communication.  Asynchronous or synchronous modes may be individually  selected
for each of the eight ports.  All ports are supported at up to 38.4K bps
full-duplex running concurrently.  Actual performance may vary depending on the
users application.  Prerequisite:  One Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A (FC 6360, FC 6364, or FC 6368) is required.  Maximum: One
Interface Board (FC 6362) can be used per Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A (FC 6360, FC 6364, or FC 6368).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 325. IBM SELECTABLE INTERFACE BOARD/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F2616

Feature Code 6365

Bus Master  No

This interface board, attached to the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A or Multiport Adapter, Model 2, provides the appropriate
drivers and receivers to support up to four serial I/O ports with the following
electrical interface options.  Protocols for these electrical interfaces are
user programmable.

    Port 0 - RS-232-C, RS-422-A, CCITT V.35, or CCITT X.21
    Port 1 - RS-232-C or CCITT V.35
    Port 2 - RS-232-C or RS-422-A (asynchronous only)
    Port 3 - RS-232-C only

The interface board includes a 78 pin connector for external communication. The
physical interface can be selected for each port by connecting to the
appropriate connector on the Selectable Cable (#6367) or directly with the X.21
Cable (#6717) or V.35 Cable (#6718).  The Selectable Interface Board supports
the following communication data rates with up to four ports running
concurrently:

    CCITT V.35 running up to 64Kbps
    RS-422-A (port 0) running up to 64Kbps
    RS-422-A (port 2) running up to 57.6Kbps with internal clocking
    CCITT X.21 running up to 64Kbps
    RS-232-C running up to 38.4Kbps

The Selectable Interface Board/A supports the following communication data
rates with only one port running:

V.35 running up to 2.048Mbps on the Portmaster Adapter/A or up to 1.544Mbps on
the Multiport Adapter, Model 2.

RS-422-A (port 0) running up to 2.048Mbps on the Portmaster Adapter/A or up to
1.544Mbps on the Multiport Adapter, Model 2

CCITT X.21 running up to 64Kbps

RS-232-C running up to 38.4Kbps

Actual performance may vary depending on user's application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 326. IBM 4250 PRINT ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  70X8320

Feature Code 7122

Bus Master  No

Provides the capability to communicate with a 4250 II ElectroCompositer or a
4250 Printer.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Prerequisite:  Available expansion
slot.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 327. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK ADAPTER/A - REMOTE PROGRAM LOAD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  25F8887

Feature Code 8881

Bus Master  No

Token-Ring Network Adapter/A - Remote Program Load (RPL) is an EPROM designed
to be plugged into an available socket on the Token-Ring Network Adapter/A
(#4790) card.  It is required for each of the devices on the network which are
to be loaded from a loading device.  The RPL feature will automatically issue a
request to be loaded any time the device is reset and if the device has no
system disk available.  (Example: Power-on, CTRL-ALT-DEL).  The loading device
program is the responsibility of the user and is not provided with this
feature.

Each RPL Feature Kit contains one 8K EPROM module with micro code, a 3 1/2-inch
diskette containing a sample program for the loading device, and a publication.
The publication contains the following:  Introduction, Installing the Remote
Program Load module, and Programming Requirements.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 328. IBM SERIAL ADAPTER CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9275

Feature Code 0217

Bus Master  No

This is a 3m (10 ft) cable with a 9 pin D-shell to connect to the Dual Async
Adapter/A and a 25-pin D-shell connector providing all the signals of an EIA
RS-232-C interface which can connect the serial port to an appropriate serial
device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 329. IBM SERIAL ADAPTER CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9276

Feature Code 0242

Bus Master  No

This adapter is a 10 inch cable with a 9 pin D-shell to connect to the Dual
Async Adapter/A and a 25-pin D-shell connector providing all the signals for an
EIA RS-232 interface for connecting the serial port to an appropriate serial
device which has its own cable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 330. IBM PS/2 SCSI OPTION TO OPTION CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451042

Feature Code 1042

Bus Master  No

Is a standard SCSI cable that provides the capability to attach an external
SCSI device to another external SCSI device. Limitations:  Support of SCSI
devices other than fixed disks, is not a part of the base operating system
support.  Devices other than fixed disks require the use of a device driver
module that will function with the IBM SCSI Adapter BIOS and the operating
system. Device driver modules are usually shipped with the SCSI device.

Machine Requirements:  The PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter can be installed in
all IBM PS/2 Micro Channel systems, PS/55 Models 5570-T/V, 5550-S/T/V, and
5530-S/T.  The IBM PS/2 Card to Option Cable allows connection from the systems
to SCSI external devices with termination at the last device.  The

PS/2 Option to Option Cable allows an external SCSI device to be connected to
another external SCSI device.

Programming Requirements:  The following operating systems support the PS/2
Micro Channel SCSI Adapter:

    Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 3.3 and 4.0 (See Note 2.)
    Operating System/2 (OS/2) Extended Edition 1.1 and 1.2 (See Note 1.)
    OS/2 Standard Edition 1.2 (See Note 1.)
    Advanced Interactive Executive Personal System/2  (AIX PS/2)
    (See Note 3.)

Notes: 1.  OS/2 Version 1.1 supports up to two fixed disks. OS/2 Version 1.2
supports up to seven fixed disks.

2.  DOS 3.3 supports up to two fixed disks in a system.  DOS 4.0 supports up to
seven fixed disks when Corrective Service Diskette (CSD) #UR29015 is installed.
This CSD is also required to support Expanded Memory Support (EMS) in DOS 4.0.

3.  IBM intends to support PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter in the PS/2 8580,
8570, 8565, 8555 (061), and 8573 (061 and 121) by the Advanced Interactive
Executive Personal System/2 (AIX PS/2).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 331. IBM PS/2 SCSI CARD TO OPTION CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451139

Feature Code 1140

Bus Master  No

The PS/2 Card to Option Cable, with the improved PS/2 Micro Channel* SCSI
Adapter Option Interface Terminator included, provides the capability to attach
the first external SCSI device to a PS/2 Micro Channel adapter.  The improved
terminator is connected to the last SCSI device to terminate the SCSI bus.
Additional external SCSI devices are attached in a "daisy chain" fashion
through the PS/2 Option to Option Cable (#1042, P/N 6451042) and must adhere to
the ANSI SCSI Standard (X3.131-1986) for single ended devices.

This cable is supported on all PS/2 Micro Channel systems with either PS/2
Micro Channel SCSI adapter installed.  This cable replaces Card to Option Cable
(#1041, P/N 6451041).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 332. IBM COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  1502067

Feature Code 2067

Bus Master  No

The Communications Adapter Cable feature supports the attachment of a modem to
the Multi-Protocol Adapter/A or the system unit serial port connector at the
rear of the 8570.  The cable is double-shielded and approximately 3m (10 ft)
long with 25-pin D-shell connectors on both ends, providing the signals of an
RS-232-C interface.  A wrap connector is provided to test the cable.

This cable is required to connect the BSC or SDLC adapter to an external modem
or other data communications equipment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 333. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK PC ADAPTER CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6339098

Feature Code 3390

Bus Master  No

The 2.4m (8 ft) cable is used to attach the IBM Personal System/2 with a
network adapter to the IBM Cabling System or directly to an access unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 334. IBM GENERAL PURPOSE INTERFACE BUS (GPIB) CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  63X4882

Feature Code 5040

Bus Master  No

The General Purpose Interface Bus Cable provides the IEEE-488 communications
link between the PS/2 and external device, for example the IBM InfoWindow
Display.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Prerequisites:  General Purpose Interface
Bus Adapter (#1503).  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 335. IBM PRINTER CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  1525612

Feature Code 5612

Bus Master  No

Cable available to connect to the Printer Adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 336. IBM EIGHT PORT CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F2619

Feature Code 6366

Bus Master  No

This cable is used in conjunction with either the 8-Port RS-232 (FC 6362) or
8-Port RS-422 (FC 6363) Interface Board/A.  The cable connects the 100-pin
connector on the Interface Board to eight 25-pin connectors (RS-232/CCITT
V.24/ISO 2110 standard) housed in a molded block at the end of this cable.
Prerequisite:  One Realtime Interface Co-Processor Portmaster Adapter/A (FC
6360, FC 6364, or FC 6368) and one Eight Port Interface Board/A (FC 6362 or FC
6363) is required.  Maximum:  One Eight Port Cable (FC 6366) can be used per
Interface Board/A (FC 6362 or FC 6363)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 337. IBM SELECTABLE CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F2622

Feature Code 6367

Bus Master  No

This cable is used in conjunction with the Selectable Interface Board/A (#6365)
and enables user selection of up to four electrical interfaces supported by the
Interface Board.  The following connectors are used to provide the physical
interface through an array of D-shell connectors housed in a molded block at
the end of this cable.

       25-pin D-shell connectors for RS-232-D and RS-422-A ports
       15-pin D-shell connectors for CCITT V.35 and CCITT X.21 ports

User provided cables are required for device attachment in conformance with ISO
standards.  Limitation:  Cable run length for each RS-422-A interface should
not exceed 122 meters (400 feet) in length and not exceed 15 meters (50 feet)
for the X.21, V.35 or RS-232-C interfaces.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 338. PS/2 STORE LOOP ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  73G0985

Feature Code 5903

Bus Master  No

Summary: The PS/2 Store Loop Adapter provides the capability for sellected IBM
PS/2s to act as store controllers when using the IBM 4690 Operating System
Version 1 on IBM's Store Loop Network.  It provides 32K of non-volatile RAM
when used in conjunction with the IBM 4690 Operating System Version 1 to ensure
that hard file data is correctly written to disk should a power failure occur.
When used with the IBM 4690 Operating System Version 1 on a store loop network,
this adapter enables the store controller to communicate with the following
point of sale terminals: IBM 4693 Model 5X1, 4X1, 3X1 and IBM 4683 Model 001,
A01, PX1 or 421. The number of terminals that can be attached via the PS/2
Store Loop Adapter depends upon throughput and response time requirements,
therefore these requirements should be reviewed with the user's IBM Marketing
Representative.  The PS/2 Store Loop Adapter also provides a dump switch that
when used in conjunction with the IBM 4690 Operating System Version 1, provides
diagnostic capability so that problem determination can easily be performed.

Maximum Number of Features: Two PS/2 Store Loop Adapters per PS/2. The second
PS/2 Store Loop Adapter when installed in a PS/2 store controller can control
another primary loop or provide backup capability for another PS/2 store
controller. When used for backup capability, the PS/2 controller will monitor
the back-up loop for store controller activity. When controller inactivity
becomes evident, the monitoring store controller will take over control of that
store loop.  Users of this second "backup" PS/2 Store Loop Adapter should
review their requirements with their IBM representative concerning the number
of point-of-sale terminals involved and throughput requirements.

Hardware Prerequisites: An expansion slot on the PS/2 and a store loop cable,
PS/2 feature code 6601; part number, 93F0808.

Software Prerequisites: The IBM 4690 Operating System Version 1

Compatibility: The current PS/2 Store Loop Adapters, PS/2 feature code 6500 and
PS/2 feature code 6701, can be used in place of the PS/2 Store Loop Adapter
(Feature Code 5903) when migrating to the IBM 4690 Operating System Version 1.
However these existing adapters only support 4K of non-volatile RAM.  However,
the existing loop adapters, feature code 6500 and 6701, only support 4K of
NVRAM.  In some large store environments with high customer throughput, it has
been recommended to use 2 of the current 4K loop adapters in the file server
controller to increase the performance rate of mirrored writes that can be done
in the system. With the new PS/2 Store Loop Adapter being announced today and
the IBM 4690 Operating System Version 1, a second loop adapter is not necessary
for this environment because the additional NVRAM required to hold records for
multiple mirrored writes is now available on one PS/2 loop adapter.

Customer Set-Up:  YES

Limitations: The maximum number of intelligent 4683 and 4693 terminals
supported by each PS/2 Store Loop Adapter is 64.

Field Installable:  YES

Cable Order:  The Store Loop Cable (FC 6601, P/N 93F0808) provides the
connection between the PS/2 Store Loop Adapter and the store loop wiring It
must be ordered separately as listed below:

    o   Store Loop Cable, PS/2 feature code 6601, P/N 93F0808


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 339. IBM STORE LOOP CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6316840

Feature Code 6601

Bus Master  No

This cable provides the connection between the Store Loop Adapter/A and the
store loop wiring.  The shielded cable is 4m (13 ft) long and has an IBM
Cabling System data connector (self-shorting) at the end that connects to the
store wiring and an SDL plug at the end that connects to the Store Loop
Adapter/A at the rear of the system unit.  Prerequisite:  A Store Loop
Adapter/A Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 340. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR 6-PORT V.35 INTERFACE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  72F0163

Feature Code 1210

Bus Master  No

The Six-Port V.35 Interface Board/A provides another electrical interface
option to the Realtime Interface Co-Processor Portmaster Adapter/A.  This
feature provides six ports of compatible V.35/V.36 electrical interfaces.

Performance:

    Data rates as a single port up to 2.048 Mbps as a DTE
    (external clocking)
    Data rates up to 230 Kbps simultaneously on six ports as a DCE
    (internal clocking)
    Data rates up to 256 Kbps simultaneously on six ports as a DTE
    (external clocking)

Other data rate combinations are achieveable and will be identified by the
using applications.  Actual performance may vary depending on the user's
application.  Maximum:  Only one V.35 Interface Board/A can be attached to the
Portmaster Adapter/A.  Prerequisites:  Portmaster Adapter/A (FC #6360, 6364,
6368).  Corequisites:  None.  Compatibility Conflicts:  None.  Customer Set-up:
Yes.  Limitations:  One V.35 board per Portmaster Adapter/A.  Field
Installable:  Yes.  Cables: The Six-Port Cable is available for ordering FC
1211.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 341. IBM SIX-PORT V.35 CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  72F0165

Feature Code 1211

Bus Master  No

This 1.2 meter (4 foot) cable provides a direct connection from the Six-Port
V.35 Interface Board/A to a distribution outlet consisting of a block of six
25-pin connections.  Customer sourced cables are connected at this point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 342. IBM SIX-PORT V.35 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE LIBRARY SUPPLEMENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  72F0166

Feature Code 1212

Bus Master  No

The HML provides maintenance information, diagnostics, one 25-pin V.35 wrap
plug, and one 100-pin V.35 wrap plug to service the Six-Port V.35 Interface
Board (FC 1210) and the Six-Port V.35 Cable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 343. IBM PS/2 80287 MATH COPROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F6967

Feature Code 3001

Bus Master  No

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of September 11, 1991.)

The 10MHz 80287 Math Coprocessor provides additional processing power and
performance for application programs requiring many or repetitive arithmetic
calculations.  The 80287 conforms to the ANSI/IEEE floating-point standard.
This option is installed in the math coprocessor socket on the system board and
does not require an expansion slot.  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation: Yes.
Customer Setup:  Yes.  Installation of this feature should be performed by a
technically skilled person.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 344. IBM PS/2 80287 MATH COPROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450369

Feature Code 3002

Bus Master  No

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of September 11, 1991.)

The 16M Hz 80387 Math Coprocessor provides additional processing power and
performance for application programs requiring many or repetitive arithmetic
calculations.  The 80386/80387 conforms to the ANSI/IEEE floating-point
standard and runs most applications, written for the 80286/80287 and 8086/8087
based systems, unmodified.  This option is installed in the Math Coprocessor
socket on the system board and does not require an expansion slot.
Limitations:  8570 E61 only.  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation: Yes.
Customer Setup:  Yes.  Installation of this feature should be performed by a
technically skilled person.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 345. IBM PS/2 16MHZ 80387SX MATH CO-PROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  27F4676

Feature Code 4676

Bus Master  No

The 16MHz 80387SX Math Co-processor provides additional processing power and
performance for application programs requiring many or repetitive arithmetic
calculations.  The 80386SX/80387SX conforms to the ANSI/IEEE floating-point
standard and runs most applications written for the 80386/80387, 80286/80287,
and 8088/8087 based systems, unmodified.  This option is installed in the Math
Co-processor socket on the system board and does not require an expansion slot.
Installation of this feature should be performed by a technically skilled
person.  Maximum: One.  Field Installation:  Yes. Customer Setup: Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 346. IBM REAL-TIME INTERFACE COPROCESSOR MULTIPORT/2, 1MB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  16F1820

Feature Code 6247

POS ID: EFF0

Bus Master  No

The Realtime Interface Coprocessor Multiport/2 is designed as a single-slot
multiple device interface subsystem for the Personal System/2.  This adapter
and its related features has the facilities to support applications requiring a
realtime, multitasking environment.  The Coprocessor is based on a
high-performance Intel 80186 microprocessor and is available with either 512Kb
or 1Mb of user memory.

Highlights:

    512Kb or 1Mb of dual-ported memory with parity for error detection.
    Up to eight serial input/output (I/O) ports available through the
    Interface Boards.
    Asynchronous hardware support is provided on all ports.  Asynchronous,
    bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware support is
    available on up to six ports.
    Nine programmable timers.

Description:  Communications between the Coprocessor and the system unit is
done via shared memory and is synchronized by interrupts between the two.
Interrupt levels are selectable.  Once the realtime control microcode is
loaded, the following functions are available:

    Supports up to 253 concurrent tasks
    Dynamic memory management
    Up to 255 software timers with increments of 5ms to 327 seconds
    Dispatch queue functions
    Watchdog timer support
    Related Features:

Eight Port RS-232-C Interface Board (FC 6265, P/N 09F1952).  Provides eight EIA
RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports.  The Interface Board attaches to the
Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78-pin connector. Asynchronous, bit
synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware support on first two
ports.  Asynchronous hardware support on remaining ports.  Can support 19.2K
bps full duplex ASYNC protocols and 38.4K bps full duplex HDLC/SDLC protocols
on either of the first two ports.

Four Port RS-232-C Interface Board (FC 6267, P/N 09F1955).  Provides four EIA
RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports.  The Interface Board attaches to the
Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78-pin connector. Asynchronous, bit
synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware support on first two
ports.  Asynchronous hardware support on remaining ports.  Can support 19.2K
bps full duplex ASYNC protocols and 38.4K bps full duplex HDLC/SDLC protocols
on either of the first two ports.  Only one Four Port Board may be attached to
a Coprocessor. RS-232-C/RS-422-A Interface Board (FC 6266, P/N 09F1958).
Provides four EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports, ports 0 through 3, and
four ports of EIA RS-422-A serial ports, ports 4 through 7.  The Interface
Board attaches to the Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78 pin connector.
Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware
support on first two ports.  Asynchronous hardware support on remaining ports.
Can support 19.2K bps full duplex ASYNC protocols and 38.4K bps full duplex
HDLC/SDLC protocols on either of the first two ports.

Eight Port RS-422-A Interface Board (FC 6326, P/N 15F8852).  Provides eight EIA
RS-422-A serial ports.  The Interface Board attaches to the Coprocessor adapter
and includes a 78-pin connector.  The interface board provides asynchronous,
bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware support on the
first port.  Asynchronous hardware support is provided on the remaining ports.
The first port can operate at 64K bps full-duplex.  Line speeds in excess of
64K bps can be achieved with appropriate adapter resident communication
programs.

  Six Port RS-232-C Synchronous Interface Board (FC 6327, P/N 15F8861).
Provides six synchronous EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports.  The
Interface Board attaches to the Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78-pin
connector.  Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol
hardware support is provided on all six ports.  Can support 38.4K bps full
duplex HDLC/SDLC protocols on either of the first two ports.

Multiport Interface Cable (FC 6246, P/N 00F5531).  This cable can be used with
the four-port and eight-port interface boards (FC 6265, FC 6266, FC 6267, and
FC 6326).  One end of this cable connects to the 78-pin connector of the
Interface Board.  The other end provides eight 25-pin connectors for attachment
of up to eight devices.  Wrap connectors are provided to test the cable when
using the diagnostics.

Synchronous Interface Cable (FC 6328, P/N 15F8866).  This cable is available
for use with the Six Port RS-232-C Synchronous Interface Board [FC 6327).  One
end of the cable connects to the 78-pin connector of the Interface Board.  The
other end provides six 25-pin connectors for attachment of up to six devices.
A wrap connector is provided to test the cable when using the diagnostics.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 347. IBM REAL-TIME INTERFACE COPROCESSOR MULTIPORT/2, 512KB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  16F1897

Feature Code 6263

POS ID: EFF0

Bus Master  No

The Realtime Interface Coprocessor Multiport/2 is designed as a single-slot
multiple device interface subsystem for the Personal System/2.  This adapter
and its related features has the facilities to support applications requiring a
realtime, multitasking environment.  The Coprocessor is based on a
high-performance Intel 80186 microprocessor and is available with either 512Kb
or 1Mb of user memory.

Highlights:

    512Kb or 1Mb of dual-ported memory with parity for error detection.
    Up to eight serial input/output (I/O) ports available through the
    Interface Boards.
    Asynchronous hardware support is provided on all ports.  Asynchronous,
    bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware support is
    available on up to six ports.
    Nine programmable timers.

Description:  Communications between the Coprocessor and the system unit is
done via shared memory and is synchronized by interrupts between the two.
Interrupt levels are selectable.  Once the realtime control microcode is
loaded, the following functions are available:

    Supports up to 253 concurrent tasks
    Dynamic memory management
    Up to 255 software timers with increments of 5ms to 327 seconds
    Dispatch queue functions
    Watchdog timer support
    Related Features:

Eight Port RS-232-C Interface Board (FC 6265, P/N 09F1952).  Provides eight EIA
RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports.  The Interface Board attaches to the
Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78-pin connector. Asynchronous, bit
synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware support on first two
ports.  Asynchronous hardware support on remaining ports.  Can support 19.2K
bps full duplex ASYNC protocols and 38.4K bps full duplex HDLC/SDLC protocols
on either of the first two ports.

Four Port RS-232-C Interface Board (FC 6267, P/N 09F1955).  Provides four EIA
RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports.  The Interface Board attaches to the
Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78-pin connector. Asynchronous, bit
synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware support on first two
ports.  Asynchronous hardware support on remaining ports.  Can support 19.2K
bps full duplex ASYNC protocols and 38.4K bps full duplex HDLC/SDLC protocols
on either of the first two ports.  Only one Four Port Board may be attached to
a Coprocessor. RS-232-C/RS-422-A Interface Board (FC 6266, P/N 09F1958).
Provides four EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports, ports 0 through 3, and
four ports of EIA RS-422-A serial ports, ports 4 through 7.  The Interface
Board attaches to the Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78 pin connector.
Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware
support on first two ports.  Asynchronous hardware support on remaining ports.
Can support 19.2K bps full duplex ASYNC protocols and 38.4K bps full duplex
HDLC/SDLC protocols on either of the first two ports.

Eight Port RS-422-A Interface Board (FC 6326, P/N 15F8852).  Provides eight EIA
RS-422-A serial ports.  The Interface Board attaches to the Coprocessor adapter
and includes a 78-pin connector.  The interface board provides asynchronous,
bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware support on the
first port.  Asynchronous hardware support is provided on the remaining ports.
The first port can operate at 64K bps full-duplex.  Line speeds in excess of
64K bps can be achieved with appropriate adapter resident communication
programs.

Six Port RS-232-C Synchronous Interface Board (FC 6327, P/N 15F8861). Provides
six synchronous EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports.  The Interface Board
attaches to the Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78-pin connector.
Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware
support is provided on all six ports.  Can support 38.4K bps full duplex
HDLC/SDLC protocols on either of the first two ports.

Multiport Interface Cable (FC 6246, P/N 00F5531).  This cable can be used with
the four-port and eight-port interface boards (FC 6265, FC 6266, FC 6267, and
FC 6326).  One end of this cable connects to the 78-pin connector of the
Interface Board.  The other end provides eight 25-pin connectors for attachment
of up to eight devices.  Wrap connectors are provided to test the cable when
using the diagnostics.

Synchronous Interface Cable (FC 6328, P/N 15F8866).  This cable is available
for use with the Six Port RS-232-C Synchronous Interface Board (FC 6327).  One
end of the cable connects to the 78-pin connector of the Interface Board.  The
other end provides six 25-pin connectors for attachment of up to six devices.
A wrap connector is provided to test the cable when using the diagnostics.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 348. IBM PS/280387 MATH COPROCESSOR-25MHZ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450607

Feature Code 6320

Bus Master  No

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of September 11, 1991.)

The 80387 Math Coprocessor provides additional processing power and performance
for application programs requiring many or repetitive arithmetic calculations.
The 80387 runs at 25M Hz and is for use on the 8570 Model A21/A61 only.  The
80386/80387 conforms to the ANSI/IEEE floating-point standard and runs most
applications, written for the 80286/80287 and 8086/8087 based systems,
unmodified.  This option is installed in the Math Coprocessor socket on the
processor board and does not require an expansion slot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 349. SIX PORT RS-232-C SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE BOARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8861

Feature Code 6327

Bus Master  No

Provides six synchronous EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports.  The
Interface Board attaches to the Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78-pin
connector.  Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol
hardware support is provided on all six ports.  Can support 38.4K bps full
duplex HDLC/SDLC protocols on either of the first two ports.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 350. EIGHT PORT RS-422-A INTERFACE BOARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8852

Feature Code 6326

Bus Master  No

Provides eight EIA RS-422-A serial ports.  The Interface Board attaches to the
Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78-pin connector.  The interface board
provides asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol
hardware support on the first port.  Asynchronous hardware support is provided
on the remaining ports.  The first port can operate at 64K bps full-duplex.
Line speeds in excess of 64K bps can be achieved with appropriate adapter
resident communication programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 351. FOUR PORT RS-232-C INTERFACE BOARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  09F1955

Feature Code 6267

Bus Master  No

Provides four EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports.  The Interface Board
attaches to the Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78-pin connector.
Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware
support on first two ports.  Asynchronous hardware support on remaining ports.
Can support 19.2K bps full duplex ASYNC protocols and 38.4K bps full duplex
HDLC/SDLC protocols on either of the first two ports.  Only one Four Port Board
may be attached to a Coprocessor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 352. RS-232-C/RS-422-A INTERFACE BOARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  09F1958

Feature Code 6266

Bus Master  No

Provides four EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports, ports 0 through 3, and
four ports of EIA RS-422-A serial ports, ports 4 through 7.  The Interface
Board attaches to the Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78 pin connector.
Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware
support on first two ports.  Asynchronous hardware support on remaining ports.
Can support 19.2K bps full duplex ASYNC protocols and 38.4K bps full duplex
HDLC/SDLC protocols on either of the first two ports.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 353. EIGHT PORT RS-232-C INTERFACE BOARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  09F1952

Feature Code 6265

Bus Master  No

Provides eight EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24 serial I/O ports.  The Interface Board
attaches to the Coprocessor adapter and includes a 78-pin connector.
Asynchronous, bit synchronous, and character synchronous protocol hardware
support on first two ports.  Asynchronous hardware support on remaining ports.
Can support 19.2K bps full duplex ASYNC protocols and 38.4K bps full duplex
HDLC/SDLC protocols on either of the first two ports.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 354. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR PORTMASTER ADAPTER/A 512KB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F2601

Feature Code 6360

POS ID: 8F70

Bus Master  Yes

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Portmaster Adapter/A is a Micro Channel bus
master co-processor that both complements and extends the capabilities of the
current family of IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor adapters.  The key
performance and operational characteristics of the adapter are described below.

    12.5 MHz Intel(7) 80C186 microprocessor
    Up to 2Mb on-board user memory
    Adapter-to-system and adapter-to-adapter Micro Channel bus master support
    Up to eight serial input/output ports (asynchronous or synchronous)
    available through a family of Interface Boards and cables
    Performance of up to 64K bps full-duplex for each of eight ports running
    simultaneously
    Performance up to 2.048M bps full-duplex for single port
    Realtime, multitasking kernel

Feature Summary:

    Description                                Feature   Part #
    Realtime Interface Co-Processor
    Eight Port RS-232 Interface Board/A        6362     53F2610
    Eight Port RS-422 Interface Board/A        6363     53F2613
    Eight Port Cable                           6366     53F2619
    Surge Protection Adapter                   6361     53F2625
    Portmaster Adapter/A, 512K                 6360     53F2601
    Portmaster Adapter/A, 1Mb                  6364     53F2604
    Portmaster Adapter/A, 2Mb                  6368     53F2607

Technical Data:  Bus master extensions for the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A include capabilities and services that address both
adapter-to-system and adapter-to-adapter data transfers under DMA control.  The
adapter utilizes the multi-master capability of the Micro Channel bus
architecture by taking control of the system unit bus and communicating
directly with system memory or with other I/O adapters.

All Realtime Interface Co-Processor family adapters are user programmable,
utilize Intel 80186 microprocessors, and support the off-loading of multiple,
realtime, high-speed tasks.  Application examples include communications
control, data conversion, protocol handling, and terminal interface support.

A variety of electrical interfaces is supported through attachment of Interface
Boards and cables.  With the selection of the appropriate Interface Board, data
rates of up to 64K bps full-duplex running simultaneously on each of eight
ports or up to 2.048M bps full-duplex for a single port can be achieved with
the Portmaster Adapter/A.  All ports can be programmed for asynchronous, bit
synchronous, and character synchronous protocols, using either DMA or interrupt
mode.

Microcode for the Portmaster Adapter/A is included with the adapter feature's
"Guide to Operations" and is loaded from the system unit memory to the adapter
memory.  Up to 248 realtime tasks can be loaded from the system unit memory and
executed concurrently on the adapter.  A task running on the adapter may
communicate with another task running on the same adapter, with an application
running in the system unit, or with an application running on another adapter.
Task synchronization is accomplished by a wait/post or suspend/resume
mechanism.

Adapter storage is dynamically managed in multiples of 16-byte paragraphs upon
request of a task.  The top 1Mb of the 2Mb adapter is accessed via a
bank-switching technique.

Up to 255 software timers with increments ranging from 5 milliseconds to 327
seconds are provided in addition to a hardware "watchdog" timer function for
signalling the host should the adapter fail.

Machine Prerequisites and Maximums:  The Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A requires an available slot in a system unit.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Portmaster Adapter/A and all of the Related
Features are Field Installable and Customer Set-Up. Features FC 6361, FC 6362,
FC 6363, and FC 6366 are used with the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A to provide a variety of electrical interfaces and cabling.
See individual feature descriptions for detailed information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 355. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR PORTMASTER ADAPTER/A 1MB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F2604

Feature Code 6364

POS ID: 8F70

Bus Master  Yes

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Portmaster Adapter/A is a Micro Channel bus
master co-processor that both complements and extends the capabilities of the
current family of IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor adapters.  The key
performance and operational characteristics of the adapter are described below.

    12.5 MHz Intel(7) 80C186 microprocessor
    Up to 2Mb on-board user memory
    Adapter-to-system and adapter-to-adapter Micro Channel bus master support
    Up to eight serial input/output ports (asynchronous or synchronous)
    available through a family of Interface Boards and cables
    Performance of up to 64K bps full-duplex for each of eight ports running
    simultaneously
    Performance up to 2.048M bps full-duplex for single port
    Realtime, multitasking kernel

Feature Summary:

    Description                                Feature   Part #
    Realtime Interface Co-Processor
    Eight Port RS-232 Interface Board/A        6362     53F2610
    Eight Port RS-422 Interface Board/A        6363     53F2613
    Eight Port Cable                           6366     53F2619
    Surge Protection Adapter                   6361     53F2625
    Portmaster Adapter/A, 512K                 6360     53F2601
    Portmaster Adapter/A, 1Mb                  6364     53F2604
    Portmaster Adapter/A, 2Mb                  6368     53F2607

Technical Data:  Bus master extensions for the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A include capabilities and services that address both
adapter-to-system and adapter-to-adapter data transfers under DMA control.  The
adapter utilizes the multi-master capability of the Micro Channel bus
architecture by taking control of the system unit bus and communicating
directly with system memory or with other I/O adapters.

All Realtime Interface Co-Processor family adapters are user programmable,
utilize Intel 80186 microprocessors, and support the off-loading of multiple,
realtime, high-speed tasks.  Application examples include communications
control, data conversion, protocol handling, and terminal interface support.

A variety of electrical interfaces is supported through attachment of Interface
Boards and cables.  With the selection of the appropriate Interface Board, data
rates of up to 64K bps full-duplex running simultaneously on each of eight
ports or up to 2.048M bps full-duplex for a single port can be achieved with
the Portmaster Adapter/A.  All ports can be programmed for asynchronous, bit
synchronous, and character synchronous protocols, using either DMA or interrupt
mode.

Microcode for the Portmaster Adapter/A is included with the adapter feature's
"Guide to Operations" and is loaded from the system unit memory to the adapter
memory.  Up to 248 realtime tasks can be loaded from the system unit memory and
executed concurrently on the adapter.  A task running on the adapter may
communicate with another task running on the same adapter, with an application
running in the system unit, or with an application running on another adapter.
Task synchronization is accomplished by a wait/post or suspend/resume
mechanism.

Adapter storage is dynamically managed in multiples of 16-byte paragraphs upon
request of a task.  The top 1Mb of the 2Mb adapter is accessed via a
bank-switching technique.

Up to 255 software timers with increments ranging from 5 milliseconds to 327
seconds are provided in addition to a hardware "watchdog" timer function for
signalling the host should the adapter fail.

Machine Prerequisites and Maximums:  The Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A requires an available slot in a system unit.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Portmaster Adapter/A and all of the Related
Features are Field Installable and Customer Set-Up. Features FC 6361, FC 6362,
FC 6363, and FC 6366 are used with the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A to provide a variety of electrical interfaces and cabling.
See individual feature descriptions for detailed information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 356. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR PORTMASTER ADAPTER/A 2MB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F2607

Feature Code 6368

POS ID: 8F70

Bus Master  Yes

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Portmaster Adapter/A is a Micro Channel bus
master co-processor that both complements and extends the capabilities of the
current family of IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor adapters.  The key
performance and operational characteristics of the adapter are described below.

    12.5 MHz Intel(7) 80C186 microprocessor
    Up to 2Mb on-board user memory
    Adapter-to-system and adapter-to-adapter Micro Channel bus master support
    Up to eight serial input/output ports (asynchronous or synchronous)
    available through a family of Interface Boards and cables
    Performance of up to 64K bps full-duplex for each of eight ports running
    simultaneously
    Performance up to 2.048M bps full-duplex for single port
    Realtime, multitasking kernel

Feature Summary:

    Description                                Feature   Part #
    Realtime Interface Co-Processor
    Eight Port RS-232 Interface Board/A        6362     53F2610
    Eight Port RS-422 Interface Board/A        6363     53F2613
    Eight Port Cable                           6366     53F2619
    Surge Protection Adapter                   6361     53F2625
    Portmaster Adapter/A, 512K                 6360     53F2601
    Portmaster Adapter/A, 1Mb                  6364     53F2604
    Portmaster Adapter/A, 2Mb                  6368     53F2607

Technical Data:  Bus master extensions for the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A include capabilities and services that address both
adapter-to-system and adapter-to-adapter data transfers under DMA control.  The
adapter utilizes the multi-master capability of the Micro Channel bus
architecture by taking control of the system unit bus and communicating
directly with system memory or with other I/O adapters.

All Realtime Interface Co-Processor family adapters are user programmable,
utilize Intel 80186 microprocessors, and support the off-loading of multiple,
realtime, high-speed tasks.  Application examples include communications
control, data conversion, protocol handling, and terminal interface support.

A variety of electrical interfaces is supported through attachment of Interface
Boards and cables.  With the selection of the appropriate Interface Board, data
rates of up to 64K bps full-duplex running simultaneously on each of eight
ports or up to 2.048M bps full-duplex for a single port can be achieved with
the Portmaster Adapter/A.  All ports can be programmed for asynchronous, bit
synchronous, and character synchronous protocols, using either DMA or interrupt
mode.

Microcode for the Portmaster Adapter/A is included with the adapter feature's
"Guide to Operations" and is loaded from the system unit memory to the adapter
memory.  Up to 248 realtime tasks can be loaded from the system unit memory and
executed concurrently on the adapter.  A task running on the adapter may
communicate with another task running on the same adapter, with an application
running in the system unit, or with an application running on another adapter.
Task synchronization is accomplished by a wait/post or suspend/resume
mechanism.

Adapter storage is dynamically managed in multiples of 16-byte paragraphs upon
request of a task.  The top 1Mb of the 2Mb adapter is accessed via a
bank-switching technique.

Up to 255 software timers with increments ranging from 5 milliseconds to 327
seconds are provided in addition to a hardware "watchdog" timer function for
signalling the host should the adapter fail.

Machine Prerequisites and Maximums:  The Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A requires an available slot in a system unit.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Portmaster Adapter/A and all of the Related
Features are Field Installable and Customer Set-Up. Features FC 6361, FC 6362,
FC 6363, and FC 6366 are used with the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Portmaster Adapter/A to provide a variety of electrical interfaces and cabling.
See individual feature descriptions for detailed information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 357. IBM PS/2 SYSTEM/2 MATH COPROCESSOR-20 MHZ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F7046

Feature Code 8720

Bus Master  No

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of September 11, 1991.)

The 20 MHz 80387 Math Coprocessor provides additional processing power and
performance for applications programs requiring many and repetitive arithmetic
calculations.  The 80386/80387 conforms to the ANSI/IEEE floating-point
standard and runs most applications, written for the 80286/80287 and 8086/8087
based systems, unmodified.  This option is installed in the Math Coprocessor
socket on the system board and does not require an expansion slot.
Limitations:  8570-061/121 only.  Maximum:  One. Field Installation:  Yes.
Customer Setup:  Yes. NOTE: Installation of this feature should be performed by
a technically skilled person.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 358. IBM PS/2 DISPLAY ADAPTER 8514/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9282

Feature Code 4054

Bus Master  No

This adapter provides support for advanced interactive text, image and graphics
applications.  The following display modes are supported:

   640 x 480 pels in 16 colors and gray scales
   1,024 x 768 pels in 16 colors and gray scales

The Display Adapter 8514/A provides support for attachment of one of the
following displays:  8503, 8512, 8513, and 8514.  Maximum:  One.  Field
Installation:  Yes.  Prerequisite:  An available expansion slot.  Customer
Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 359. IBM PS/2 8514 MEMORY EXPANSION KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F9283

Feature Code 4081

Bus Master  No

This Memory Expansion Kit provides an 512Kb of additional memory and can be
installed only on the Display Adapter 8514/A (FC 4054).  This option increases
the number of colors supported to 256 and gray scale to 64. Maximum:  One.
Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 360. IBM PS/2 S36/38 WORKSTATION EMULATION CONVENIENCE KIT VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  33F7325

Feature Code 6287

Bus Master  No

This option provides System/36 and System/38 terminal Emulation as a 3196
Display attached via the normal Twinaxial Interface and supports four display
sessions, file transfer, and concurrent operation.  Host Printer Emulation and
Host Graphics Emulation are also supported.

This option includes the System 36/38 Workstation Emulation Adapter, System
36/38 Workstation Emulation Program, System 36/38 Workstation Emulation
Attachment Cable, Diagnostic Diskette, Quick Reference Manual and Software
Users Guide.  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Prerequisite:  An
available expansion slot.  Customer Set-up:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 361. IBM PS/2 DISPLAY STATION EMULATION ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  92X0743

Feature Code 7743

Bus Master  No

The Display Station Emulation Adapter/A (which includes the Display Station
Emulation Adapter/A Quick Reference and Reference Diskette) and the Display
Station Emulation Attachment Cable (FC 7742) offer emulation capability for
twinax attachment of the Personal System/2 Micro Channel system as a work
station to the 5520.  These products are used with the 5520 Personal System/2
Attachment Program Version 1.0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 362. IBM PS/2 MICRO CHANNEL SCSI ADAPTER EXTERNAL TERMINATOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1039

Part Number  6451039

Bus Master  No

A plug required to terminate the SCSI bus at the external port on the SCSI
adapter.  The external terminator is installed at the SCSI adapter port when no
external SCSI devices are attached.  Limitations:  Support of SCSI devices
other than fixed disks, is not a part of the base operating system support.
Devices other than fixed disks require the use of a device driver module that
will function with the IBM SCSI Adapter BIOS and the operating system. Device
driver modules are usually shipped with the SCSI device.

The PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache can be installed in any IBM PS/2
Micro Channel system. The IBM PS/2 SCSI Adapter External Terminator is required
when no external SCSI device is attached to the IBM PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI
Adapter with Cache.

The IBM PS/2 Card to Option Cable allows connection from the SCSI adapter to an
external SCSI device.

The PS/2 Option to Option Cable allows an external SCSI device to be connected
to another external SCSI device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 363. IBM PS/2 80MB SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1045

Part Number  6451045

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 80MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive is a SCSI fixed disk drive
that features 80 million bytes (80MB) formatted capacity, 32KB buffer, 17ms
average seek time, synchronous SCSI mode operation, 3.5-inch half high form
factor, and complies to the ANSI SCSI STANDARD X3.131-1986 for single ended
devices.  This drive is installed with the PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter (FC
1005 P/N 6451109) or the PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache (FC 1018
P/N 6451110) installed.  In addition, this drive can be installed in the PS/2
Model 3511-003.  The PS/2 Model 60, 65, and 80 require the PS/2 SCSI Fixed Disk
Drive Kit A (FC 1053 P/N 6451053) when installing a SCSI fixed disk drive in
the bay located at the front of the system.

Drive specifications:

    Formatted Capacity        80 million bytes *
    Bytes/Sector              512
    Sectors/Track             39
    Cylinders                 1021
    Sector buffer size        32KB
    Number of Heads           4
    Disks                     2
    Data Transfer Rate        1.35MBytes/s
    Average Seek Time         17ms
    Average Latency           8.3ms
    Sector interleave         1to1

Actual user accessable capacity may vary slightly based on different operating
environments

Dimensions:

    Width               4.00 inch (101.6   mm)
    Depth (HDA)         5.75 inch (146.0   mm)
    Height              1.63 inch ( 41.3   mm)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 364. IBM PS/2 80MB SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1045

Part Number  6451045

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 80MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive is a SCSI fixed disk drive
that features 80 million bytes (80MB) formatted capacity, 32KB buffer, 17ms
average seek time, synchronous SCSI mode operation, 3.5-inch half high form
factor, and complies to the ANSI SCSI STANDARD X3.131-1986 for single ended
devices.  This drive is installed with the PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter (FC
1005 P/N 6451109) or the PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache (FC 1018
P/N 6451110) installed.  In addition, this drive can be installed in the PS/2
Model 3511-003.  The PS/2 Model 60, 65, and 80 require the PS/2 SCSI Fixed Disk
Drive Kit A (FC 1053 P/N 6451053) when installing a SCSI fixed disk drive in
the bay located at the front of the system.

Drive specifications:

    Formatted Capacity        80 million bytes *
    Bytes/Sector              512
    Sectors/Track             39
    Cylinders                 1021
    Sector buffer size        32KB
    Number of Heads           4
    Disks                     2
    Data Transfer Rate        1.35MBytes/s
    Average Seek Time         17ms
    Average Latency           8.3ms
    Sector interleave         1to1

Actual user accessable capacity may vary slightly based on different operating
environments

Dimensions:

    Width               4.00 inch (101.6   mm)
    Depth (HDA)         5.75 inch (146.0   mm)
    Height              1.63 inch ( 41.3   mm)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 365. IBM PS/2 160MB SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1046

Part Number  6451046

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 160MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive is a SCSI fixed disk
drive that features 160 million bytes (160MB) formatted capacity, 32KB buffer,
16ms average seek time, synchronous SCSI mode operation, 3.5-inch half high
form factor, and complies with the ANSI SCSI STANDARD X3.131-1986 for single
ended devices.  This drive can be installed in PS/2 Models 60, 65, 80, 90, and
95 with either a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter (FC 1005 P/N 64511109) or a
PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache (FC 1018 P/N 6451110) installed.  In
addition, this drive can be installed in the PS/2 Model 3511-003.  The PS/2
Models 60, 65, and 80 require the PS/2 SCSI Fixed Disk Drive Kit A (FC 1053 P/N
6451053) when installing a SCSI fixed disk drive in the bay located at the
front of the system.

Drive specifications:

    Formatted Capacity        160 million bytes *
    Bytes/Sector              512
    Sectors/Track             39
    Cylinders                 1021
    Sector buffer size        32KB
    Number of Heads           8
    Disks                     4
    Data Transfer Rate        1.50MB/s
    Average Seek Time         16ms
    Average Latency           8.3ms
    Sector interleave         1to1

Actual user accessable capacity may vary slightly based on different operating
environments.

    Width               4.00 inch (101.6   mm)
    Depth (HDA)         5.75 inch (146.0   mm)
    Height              1.63 inch ( 41.3   mm)

Limitations:  None.  Maximum:  None.  Cable Order:  None.  Field Installed:
Yes.  Prerequisites:  PS/2 SCSI Adapter installed.  Corequisites:  None.
Customer Setup:  Recommend that a Service Representative set up and install
these SCSI devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 366. IBM PS/2 160MB SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1046

Part Number  6451046

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 160MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive is a SCSI fixed disk
drive that features 160 million bytes (160MB) formatted capacity, 32KB buffer,
16ms average seek time, synchronous SCSI mode operation, 3.5-inch half high
form factor, and complies with the ANSI SCSI STANDARD X3.131-1986 for single
ended devices.  This drive can be installed in PS/2 Models 60, 65, 80, 90, and
95 with either a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter (FC 1005 P/N 64511109) or a
PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache (FC 1018 P/N 6451110) installed.  In
addition, this drive can be installed in the PS/2 Model 3511-003.  The PS/2
Models 60, 65, and 80 require the PS/2 SCSI Fixed Disk Drive Kit A (FC 1053 P/N
6451053) when installing a SCSI fixed disk drive in the bay located at the
front of the system.

Drive specifications:

    Formatted Capacity        160 million bytes *
    Bytes/Sector              512
    Sectors/Track             39
    Cylinders                 1021
    Sector buffer size        32KB
    Number of Heads           8
    Disks                     4
    Data Transfer Rate        1.50MB/s
    Average Seek Time         16ms
    Average Latency           8.3ms
    Sector interleave         1to1

Actual user accessable capacity may vary slightly based on different operating
environments.

    Width               4.00 inch (101.6   mm)
    Depth (HDA)         5.75 inch (146.0   mm)
    Height              1.63 inch ( 41.3   mm)

Limitations:  None.  Maximum:  None.  Cable Order:  None.  Field Installed:
Yes.  Prerequisites:  PS/2 SCSI Adapter installed.  Corequisites:  None.
Customer Setup:  Recommend that a Service Representative set up and install
these SCSI devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 367. IBM PS/2 60MB SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1049

Part Number  6451049

Bus Master  No

A SCSI fixed disk drive that features  60 million bytes (60MB) formatted
capacity, 32Kb buffer, 23ms average access time, 3.5 inch half high form
factor, and complies with the Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI).  This
drive can be installed in PS/2 Models 8580, 8565, and 8560 with the PS/2 Micro
Channel SCSI Adapter (#1005 P/N 6451109) or the PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter
with Cache (#1018 P/N 6451110) installed.

Drive specifications:

    Formatted Capacity        60Mb
    Bytes/Sector              512
    Sectors/Track             32
    Cylinders                 920(data)
    Sector buffer size        32Kb
    Number of Heads           4
    Disks                     2
    Data Transfer Rate        1.275Mb/sec (buffer to/from media)
    Average Access Time       23.0ms
    Average Latency           8.33ms
    Sector interleave         1to1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 368. IBM PS/2 120MB SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1050

Part Number  6451050

Bus Master  No

A SCSI fixed disk drive that features 120 million bytes (120MB) formatted
capacity, 32Kb buffer, 23ms average access time, 3.5 inch half high form
factor, and complies to the Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI).  This
drive can be installed in PS/2 Models 8580, 8565, and 8560 with the PS/2 Micro
Channel SCSI Adapter (#1005 P/N 6451109) or the PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter
with Cache (#1018 P/N 6451110) installed.

Drive specifications:

    Formatted Capacity       120Mb
    Bytes/Sector              512
    Sectors/Track             32
    Cylinders                 920(data)
    Sector buffer size        32Kb
    Number of Heads           8
    Disks                     4
    Data Transfer Rate        1.275Mb/sec (buffer to/from media)
    Average Access Time       23.0ms
    Average Latency           8.33ms
    Sector interleave         1to1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 369. IBM PS/2 SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE KIT A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1053

Part Number  6451053

Bus Master  No

Specifically designed and required to support the installation of two SCSI
fixed disk drives in PS/2 Models 8580, 8565, and 8560.  This kit converts the
5.25 inch full high bay, located in the front of the system, into two
horizontally oriented, 3.5 inch half high bays.  The kit contains a mounting
tray, cables and installation instructions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 370. IBM PS/2 SCSI 320MB SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1055

Part Number  6451055

Bus Master  No

A SCSI fixed disk drive that features 320 million bytes (320MB) of formatted
capacity, 64Kb look ahead buffer, 12.5ms average access time, synchronous SCSI
mode operation, 3.5 inch half high form factor, and complies to the Small
Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) for single ended devices.  This drive can be
installed in PS/2 Models 8580, 8565, and 8560 with the PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI
Adapter (#1005 P/N 6451109) or the PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache
(#1018 P/N 6451110) installed.

Drive specifications:

    Formatted Capacity        320Mb
    Bytes/Sector              512
    Sectors/Track             48
    Cylinders                 949(data)
    Sector buffer size        64Kb (read look ahead)
    Number of Heads           14
    Disks                     8
    Data Transfer Rate        2.0Mb/sec (buffer to/from media)
    Average Access Time       12.5ms
    Average Latency           6.95ms
    Sector interleave         1to1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 371. 3450 IBM 1.2GB 1/4-INCH CARTRIDGE TAPE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 3450 is IBM's low cost 1/4-inch cartridge solution for larger capacity
higher performance tape drives for personal computers. The 3450 is a 1.2GB
quarter-inch tape drive that attaches to a SCSI adapter in the host personal
system.  It supports many quarter-inch cartridge (QIC) formats.  The 3450 is
designed as a replacement product for the IBM 6157.  It can read 6157-001 and
can read and write 6157-002 formats.  The new 3450 provides performance and
capacity improvements over the 6157 models.  Software support for the 3450
comes in a wide variety of tape backup/restore utilities that offer support in
DOS*, OS/2*, AIX PS/2*, SCO-UNIX, and Novell** NetWare environments. In
addition the hardware support has been expanded to include PS/2 and IBM
Industrial Computer with Micro Channel*, PS/2 with AT bus, PS/1, and
PS/Valuepoint* systems.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides up to 1.2GB of data per cartridge or approximately
        eight times the capacity of the 6157 model 002.
    o   Enhanced performance with a data transfer rate of 300 Kbytes/sec,
        almost four times the 6157 data rate.
    o   Fully READ compatible with the 6157-001 and READ/WRITE compatible
        with the 6157-002
    o   Hardware support for:
        -   PS/2 Microchannel Systems
        -   PS/2 with AT bus
        -   PS/1
        -   PS/Valuepoint
    o   Lowest cost IBM solution for larger capacity 1/4-inch cartridge
        tape backup in personal computers.

The new 3450 1/4-inch tape drive offers approximately eight times the capacity
of the previous 6157 Model 2, and 20 times the capacity of the 6157 Model 1.
The increased capacity makes the 3450 an excellent unattended save/restore
device.

The 3450 Model 001 offers 1.2GB data capacity per cartridge. This increased
capacity makes the 3450 an excellent save/restore device for entry-level
Personal Systems.

The 3450 has the capability of reading and writing data cartridges used on our
previous model 1/4-inch tape offerings which make the 3450 an excellent
addition to allow customers to expand their 1/4-inch tape applications.

The 3450 can read tapes written on both models of the 6157 and can read and
write tapes written on the 6157-002. The 3450 can read and write tapes in QIC
standard QIC-120, QIC-150, QIC-525, and QIC-1000 formats.

The 3450 can read tapes written on both models of the 6157 and can read and
write tapes written on the 6157-002. The 3450 can read and write tapes in QIC
standard QIC-120, QIC-150, QIC-525, and QIC-1000 formats.

The 3450 has an effective data transfer rate of  300 Kbytes/sec which is almost
four times faster than the previous 6157 tape drive.

The increased data storage capacity combined with the improved data transfer
rate increases system administrator productivity by providing for less data
cartridge handling and quicker save/restore operations.

The 3450 can be attached to many personal computer systems or industrial
computers.  These include PS/2 and IBM Industrial Computer with Micro Channel
or AT bus, PS/1, and PS/Valuepoint systems.

Customers' processors and application investments are protected through the
ability to attach the 3450 to a wide variety of personal computer systems and
the ability to use it with a wide selection of backup restore utilities based
on the customer's operating system.

MODEL 001 P/N 46G4-003 in the U.S.; P/N 46G4-004 outside the U.S.

The 3450 is designated as Customer Setup (CSU).

The 3450 may be attached to any Personal System unit that has a standard SCSI
or SCSI-2 adapter. The 3450 is an external standalone streaming tape drive that
attaches to a host Personal System product through the SCSI adapter. The 3450
provides low cost save/restore functions and provides for easy data interchange
among other 1/4-inch tape drive based workstations and systems. The 3450 can
read QIC-24 and can read and write QIC-120, QIC-150, QIC-525, and QIC-1000 tape
formats.  One IBM test tape is included with the 3450. The test tape part
number is 21F8734. This tape is provided to allow customers to test the tape
drive read and write capabilities. One SCSI attachment cable is required to
attach the 3450 to the host personal system. See charges section for selection
of appropriate cable part number.

The 3450 can achieve maximum capacity using the IBM 1.2 data cartridge part
number 21F8732. The 3450 can read and write with other media at a lower
capacity.

The data transfer rate for the 3450 is 300 Kbytes/sec. The 3450 Tape Drive does
not support DC 600A data cartridges. Using this media will significantly reduce
the life of the read/write head and give unpredictable results.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Width:  280mm (11.0 inches)
    o   Depth:  287mm (11.3 inches)
    o   Height: 79mm (3.125 inches)
    o   Weight: 4.4Kg (9.6 pounds)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Temperature:  10 to 40 degrees C (50 to 104F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 (percent)
    o   Wet Bulb:  27.0C (80.6F) maximum
    o   Electrical power:  0.12 KVA
    o   Noise Level:  45 dBa (5.7 bels) operating; 40 dBa (5.5 bels) idle
    o   FCC Class:  B
    o   CISPR 22:  B
    o   Japan VCCI:  2
    o   VDE Class:  B

Subject to FCC approval. Orders will be accepted after FCC approval.

This product may be used on any PS/2 or IBM Industrial computer with Micro
Channel or AT bus, or PS/1 and PS/ValuePoint models with an internal or
external SCSI adapter feature such as Micro Channel SCSI adapter, Micro Channel
SCSI adapter with cache, or IBM 16-bit AT Fast SCSI adapter or equivalent.

The machine types for Micro Channel are 7546, 7568, 8556, 8557, 8570, 8573,
8580, 8590, 8595, 9556, 9557, 9576, 9577, 9585, 9590, and 9595.  Attachment to
the AT bus Personal Systems such as PC, AT or XT is also achieved by using the
IBM 16-bit AT Fast SCSI adapter or equivalent.  The machine types for PS/1 and
PS/2 AT bus systems are 2121, 2123, 2133, 2155, 8525, 8535, 8540, 6382, 6384
PS/ValuePoint, and 7537.

A software tape backup utility is needed to support this product. The vendors
listed below have certified that their indicated tape backup/restore software
will support this product:

    o   SYTOS-PLUS from Sytron Corporation that supports DOS, OS/2, LAN
        server, and client backup under Novell NetWare Software.
    -   SYTOS-PLUS Version 1.42 for DOS  (61G1442)
    -   SYTOS-PLUS Version 1.37 for OS/2 (61G1443)
    o   ARCserve from Cheyenne Software that provides high-performance
        backup for Novell operating systems.
    o   ARCsolo from Cheyenne Software provides support for DOS operating
        systems.
    o   CPbackup from Central Point
    o   Novaback from Novastor
    o   CorelSCSI from Corel
    o   Novell NetWare provides support in the NetWare environment
    o   ARCHIVE Backup Exec from Archive Corporation
    o   AIX PS/2 provides tape backup support in the AIX PS/2 environment
        Note: The AIX PS/2 1.3.0 Operating System will provide support
        for the announced product with the application of PTF U400005.
        The PTF is orderable by calling 800-237-5511.
    o   SCO-UNIX provides support in the SCO-UNIX environment.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Novell is a trademark of the Novell Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 372. 3445 IBM 5.0GB 8MM TAPE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 3445 5.0GB 8mm Tape Drive is a new improved 8mm tape drive for personal
computers. It offers improved mechanical and electrical design for greater
reliability and performance.  The 3445 is ideally suited for unattended backup
in LAN servers or any other large capacity disk storage applications.  Software
support for the 3445 comes in a wide variety of tape backup/restore utilities
that offer support in DOS, OS/2, AIX PS/2*, SCO-UNIX, and Novell NetWare
environments.

In addition the hardware support has been expanded to include PS/2 and IBM
Industrial Computers with Micro Channel*, PS/2 with AT bus, PS/1* and
PS/Valuepoint* systems.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Improved capacity up to (4X), performance (2X), reliability (4X),
        and usability over the 3532
    o   Fully read/write compatible with the 3532
        Hardware support for:
        -   PS/2 Microchannel Systems
        -   PS/2 with AT bus
        -   PS/1
        -   PS/Valuepoint*

The tape drive in the 3445 is four times as reliable as the drive in the 3532
as a result of significant technology enhancements such as a reduced number of
mechanical and electrical components, improved tape handling mechanism and use
of higher reliability components.

The 3445 offers increased capacity of 5GB of data per cartridge. The 3445
capacity can be extended to 10GB of data by enabling its data compression
hardware. The data transfer rate of the 3445 is 500 Kbytes per second and can
be increased to 1MB per second (typical) when using data compression.

The 3445 offers increased capacity of 5GB of data per cartridge.

The 3445 offers increased capacity of 5GB per cartridge. The 3445 capacity can
be extended to 10GB of of data by enabling its data compression hardware. The
data transfer rate of the 3445 can be increased to 1MB per second (typical)
when using data compression.

The 3445 can be attached to many personal computer systems or industrial
computers.  These include PS/2 and IBM Industrial Computer with Micro Channel
or AT bus, PS/1, and PS/Valuepoint systems.

Customers' processors and application investments are protected through the
ability to attach the 3445 to a wide variety of personal computer systems and
the ability to use it with a wide selection of backup restore utilities based
on the customer's operating system.

MODEL 001 P/N 46G2-642 in the US; P/N 46G2643 outside the US.

The 3445 is designated as Customer Setup (CSU).

The 3445 may be attached to any Personal System unit that has a standard SCSI
or SCSI-2 adapter. The 3445 is an external stand-alone streaming tape drive
that attaches to a host Personal System product through the SCSI adapter.

The 3445 can read and write tapes used on the IBM 3532 8mm tape drive.  One IBM
media kit is included with the 3445. The media kit part number is 59F3907. This
kit is provided to allow customers to test the Tape Drive read and write
capabilities. One SCSI attachment cable is required to attach the 3445 to the
host personal system. See charges section for selection of appropriate cable
part number.  The 3445 can achieve maximum capacity using the IBM 8mm data
cartridge (P/N 21F8595).

The data transfer rate for the 3445 is 500 Kbytes/sec.  The 3445 Tape Drive
does not support video data cartridges. Using this media will significantly
reduce the life of the read/write head and give unpredictable results.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Width:  280mm (11.0 inches)
    o   Depth:  287mm (11.3 inches)
    o   Height: 79mm (3.125 inches)
    o   Weight: 5.0Kg (11 pounds)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Temperature:  10 to 40C (50 to 104F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  20 to 80 percent
    o   Wet Bulb:  27.0C (80.6F) maximum
    o   Electrical power:  0.1 KVA
    o   Noise Level:  46 dBa (5.8 bels) operating; 40 dBa (5.5 bels) idle
    o   FCC Class:  B
    o   CISPR-22 Class:  B
    o   Japan VCCI: 2
    o   VDE Class:  B

This product may be used on any PS/2 or IBM Industrial computer with Micro
Channel or AT bus, or PS/1 and PS/ValuePoint models with an internal or
external SCSI adapter feature such as Micro Channel SCSI adapter, Micro Channel
SCSI adapter with cache, or IBM 16-bit AT Fast SCSI adapter or equivalent.

The machine types for Micro Channel are 7546, 7568, 8556, 8557, 8570, 8573,
8580, 8590, 8595, 9556, 9557, 9576, 9577, 9585, 9590, and 9595.

Attachment to the AT bus Personal Systems such as PC, AT or XT is also achieved
by using the IBM 16-bit AT Fast SCSI adapter or equivalent.  The machine types
for PS/1 and PS/2 AT bus systems are 2121, 2123, 2133, 2155, 8525, 8535, 8540,
6382, 6384 PS/ValuePoint, and 7537.

A software tape backup utility is needed to support this product. The vendors
listed below have certified that their indicated tape backup/restore software
will support this product:

    o  SYTOS-PLUS from Sytron Corporation that supports DOS, OS/2, LAN
       server, and client backup under Novell NetWare Software.
       -   SYTOS-PLUS Version 1.42 for DOS  (P/N 61G1442)
       -   SYTOS-PLUS Version 1.37 for OS/2 (P/N 61G1443)
    o   ARCserve from Cheyenne Software that provides high-performance backup for
        Novell operating systems.
    o   ARCsolo from Cheyenne Software provides support for DOS operating
        systems.
    o   CPbackup from Central Point
    o   Novaback from Novastor
    o   CorelSCSI from Corel
    o   Novell NetWare provides support in the NetWare environment
    o   ARCHIVE Backup Exec from Archive Corporation
    o   AIX PS/2 provides tape backup support in the AIX PS/2 environment
    o   SCO-UNIX provides support in the SCO-UNIX environment.

Note: The AIX PS/2 1.3.0 Operating System will provide support for this product
with the application of PTF U400005.  The PTF is orderable by calling
800-237-5511. * Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 373. 3440 IBM 2.0GB 4MM TAPE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 3440 is an industry leading state-of-the-art technology, low cost per
megabyte 4mm tape solution for personal computers. It addresses the growing
requirements for unattended backup of LAN servers or any other large capacity
disk storage applications. The small media size is easy to handle and even
easier to store. The 3440 contains onboard data compression which increases its
capacity to 4-8GB with 5 GB being typical There is a wide variety of tape
backup/restore software available for DOS, OS/2*, AIX PS/2, SCO-UNIX, and
Novell NetWare environments.  Hardware support includes PS/2* or IBM Industrial
Computer with Micro Channel* or AT bus, PS/1* and PS/Valuepoint* systems.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   2.0GB capacity per cartridge, 4-8GB with data compression (5GB
        typical)
    o   30 second average file search speed
    o   Hardware support for:
        -   PS/2 Micro Channel Systems
        -   PS/2 with AT bus
        -   PS/1
        -   PS/Valuepoint
    o   Features non-data grade media rejection for write operations
        (will not allow writing on audio grade media)

The new 3440 4mm is an industry leading state-of-the-art technology tape drive.
The 30 second average file access time simplifies data retrieval. The 3440
contains onboard data compression that increases the capacity to 4-8GB of data
with 5GB being typical.

The 3440 can have a data transfer rate of 183 Kbytes/sec up to 732 Kbytes/sec
depending on the type of data transferred and use of data compression.

The 3440 contains onboard data compression that increases the capacity to 4-8GB
of data with 5GB being typical.

Data compression allows much more data to be saved per cartridge allowing the
customer to reduce data cartridge purchases.

The 3440 can be attached to many personal computer systems or industrial
computers.  These include PS/2 and IBM Industrial Computer with Micro Channel
or AT bus, PS/1, and PS/ValuePoint systems.

Customers' processors and application investments are protected through the
ability to attach the 3440 to a wide variety of personal computer systems and
the ability to use it with a wide selection of backup restore utilities based
on the customer's operating system.

MODEL 001 P/N 46G4015 in the US; P/N 46G4016 outside the US.

The 3440 may be attached to any Personal System unit that has a standard SCSI
or SCSI-2 adapter. The 3440 is an external standalone 4mm streaming tape drive
that attaches to a host Personal System product through the SCSI adapter.

It can be used as an easy migration path from other 4mm cartridge tape drive
based workstations and systems. The 3440 will read tapes written on other 4mm
tape drives that adhere to the European Computer Manufacturer's Association
standard (ECMA-150) for 4mm wide, helical scan recording.

One media kit is included with the 3440.  This kit is provided to allow
customers to test the Tape Drive read and write capabilities. One SCSI
attachment cable is required to attach the 3440 to the host personal system.

The 3440 can only accept data grade cartridges for writing data. There is a
non-data grade media rejection feature that prohibits writing on audio video
data cartridges.

The data transfer rate for the 3440 is 183 to 732 Kbytes/sec depending on the
type of data transferred  and data compression.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Width:  280mm (11.0 inches)
    o   Depth:  287mm (11.3 inches)
    o   Height:  79mm (3.125 inches)
    o   Weight:  4.6Kg (10.2 pounds)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Temperature:  10 to 40C (50 to 104F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  20 to 80 percent
    o   Wet Bulb:  27.0C (80.6F) maximum
    o   Electrical power:  0.12 KVA
    o   Noise Level:  (LpA)33.8dB (4.8 bels) operating and idle
    o   FCC Class:  B
    o   CISPR-22:  B
    o   Japan VCCI:  2
    o   VDE class:  B

Product Safety/Country Testing/Certification:

    o   USA -- UL
    o   Canada -- CSA
    o   Germany -- GS mark (Safety --TUV)

ISO 9000 Certification, IBM locations:

    o   Santa Palomba, Italy
    o   Austin, Texas
    o   Rochester, Minnesota

This product may be used on any PS/2 or IBM Industrial computer with Micro
Channel or AT bus, PS/1, and PS/Valuepoint models with an internal or external
SCSI adapter feature such as Micro Channel SCSI adapter, Micro Channel SCSI
adapter with cache, or IBM 16-bit AT Fast SCSI adapter or equivalent.

The machine types for Micro Channel are 7546, 7568, 8556, 8557, 8570, 8573,
8580, 8590, 8595, 9556, 9557, 9576, 9577, 9585, 9590, and 9595.  Attachment to
the AT bus Personal Systems such as PC, AT or XT is also achieved by using the
IBM 16-bit AT Fast SCSI adapter or equivalent.

The machine types for PS/1 and PS/2 AT bus systems are 2121, 2123, 2133, 2155,
8525, 8535, 8540, 6382, 6384 PS/ValuePoint, and 7537.

A software tape backup utility is needed to support this product.  The vendors
listed below have certified that their indicated tape backup/restore software
will support this product:

    o   SYTOS-PLUS from Sytron Corporation that supports DOS, OS/2, LAN
        server, and client backup under Novell NetWare Software:
        -   SYTOS-PLUS Version 1.42 for DOS (P/N 61G1442)
        -   SYTOS-PLUS Version 1.37 for OS/2 (P/N 61G1443)
    o   ARCserve from Cheyenne Software that provides high-performance
        backup for Novell operating systems.
    o   ARCsolo from Cheyenne Software provides support for DOS operating
        systems.
    o   CPbackup from Central Point
    o   Novaback from Novastor
    o   CorelSCSI from Corel
    o   Novell NetWare provides support in the NetWare environment
    o   ARCHIVE Backup Exec from Archive Corporation
    o   AIX PS/2 provides tape backup support in the AIX PS/2 environment
        (See Note.)
    o   SCO-UNIX provides support in the SCO-UNIX environment

Note:  The AIX PS/2 1.3.0 Operating System will provide support for this
product with the application of PTF U400005.  The PTF is orderable by calling
800-237-5511. *Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 374. IBM AT HARD DISK DRIVE OPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  32G4194

Part Number  32G4195

Feature Code 5342

Feature Code 5343

Bus Master  No

IBM is enhancing their AT(R)-bus family of storage options by providing two
higher capacity disk drives customers can choose from, depending on their
system needs:

    o  IBM 245MB AT Hard Disk Drive (#5342, 32G4194)
    o  IBM 340MB AT Hard Disk Drive (#5343, 32G4195).

The 245MB (million bytes) and 340MB AT Hard Disk Drives provide higher capacity
storage than previously available, and improved performance at a competitive
price.

In addition, these disk drives adhere to ANSI ATA Standard X3T9.2/90-143
Revision 3.2. (TM) Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Choice of two AT Hard Disk Drives (245MB and 340MB) for AT-bus
       systems
    o  Recommended for users requiring:
       -  Higher capacity storage
       -  Improved performance at competitive price
    o  Systems supported:
       -  PS/2(R) (8535 and 8540)
       -  PS/ValuePoint(TM) (all models)
       -  IBM Industrial Computer (7537-011 and A11) (245MB hard disk
          drive only)
       -  PS/1(R) (2133 or 2155)
          -- 386SX-25 Model X1X
          -- 486SX-20 Model X4X
          -- 486DX-33 Model X7X
(TM) Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (R) Registered
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

The 245 and 340MB AT Drives enhance the non-Micro Channel(R) family of storage
options by providing both higher capacities than previously available as well
as improved performance.  They adhere to ANSI ATA Standard X3T9.2/90-143
Revision 3.2 and should be considered for systems in which increased capacity
and performance are required. (R) Registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Physical Specifications:

    Dimensions:    245MB/340MB
    Width:         101.6mm
    Depth:         146.0mm
    Height:        25.4mm

Drive Specifications:

    Formatted capacity*:             245MB          340MB
    Average media data
      rate:                          19.2Mb/sec     22.4Mb/sec
                                     (2.4MB/sec)    (2.8MB/sec)
    Average seek time:               15.0ms         14.0ms
    Average latency:                 8.45ms         9.0ms
    Sector interleave:               1 to 1         1 to 1
*  Actual user capacity may vary slightly based on differing   operating
environments.

Equipment Approvals/Safety:

                                     All
                                     Devices
    FCC Class B                      Yes
    UL/CSA recognized                Yes
    VCCI Class 2                     Yes
    GOP VDE                          Yes
    CSA 220                          Yes

Operating Environment:

                                     245MB          340MB
    Operating temperature            5-50 deg. C    5-55 deg. C
    Relative humidity
      (system on)                    8%-80%         8%-80%

Machine Requirements:  These AT hard disk drives are supported in the following
systems:

    o  PS/2:  8535 and 8540 system units
    o  PS/ValuePoint:  All models
    o  IBM Industrial Computer:  7537-011 and A11 systems unit (245MB
       hard disk drive only)
    o  PS/1: 2133 or 2155 (386SX-25 model X1X, 486SX-20 model X4X and
       486DX-33 model X7X.

Programming Requirements:  The AT hard disk drives are supported in the
following operating system environments:

    o  OS/2(R) Standard Edition and Extended Edition 1.30.1
    o  OS/2 Standard Edition and Extended Edition 1.30.2
    o  OS/2 2.0
    o  OS/2 2.0 plus Service Pak
    o  OS/2 Extended Services 1.0
    o  OS/2 LAN Server 2.0
    o  OS/2 LAN Server 3.0 and NTS/2
    o  DOS 4.01 and above
    o  NetWare(1) v3.11
    o  AIX(R) PS/2 1.3, SCO(2) XENIX System 2.3.4, UNIX(3) System V/386
       3.2v.4, OPEN DESKTOP(4) 2.0.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (1)
Trademark of Novell, Inc. (2) Trademark of Santa Cruz Corporation, Inc. (3)
Registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. (4) Trademark of UNIX
System Laboratories, Inc.

Compatibility:  The IBM AT Hard Disk Drives are designed to maintain
compatibility with current software support that uses the standard defined BIOS
interfaces.

The level of diagnostics shipped with the following systems will not function
with the 340MB hard disk drive:

    o  PS/2 8535 and 8540
    o  PS/ValuePoint
       -  486SLC-25 Models CXX
       -  486SX-25 Models FXX
       -  486DX-33 Models MXX.

For the 8535 and 8540 systems, the IBM PS/2 Model 25SX/35/40 Advanced
Diagnostic Diskette Version 1.30 is required.  For the PS/ValuePoint systems,
the IBM PS/ValuePoint Reference Diskette Version 1.01 is required.

Security and auditability features of the system in which these products are
installed are:

    o  Mechanical lock to allow the user to lock the system cover (PS/2)
    o  User-invoked password function to prevent use by unauthorized
       persons.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 375. IBM 2.0GB SCSI HARD DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  32G4336

Feature Code 5330

Bus Master  No

The IBM 2.0GB* SCSI Hard Disk Drive (#5330, 32G4336) enhances the SCSI family
of storage options by providing the customer with the choice of exceptional
performance and higher capacity across a wide range of environments.  The 2.0GB
SCSI Hard Disk Drive:

    o  Provides system configuration flexibility by requiring only one
       slot for multiple unit connections
    o  Allows for additional growth for systems in which fast seek times
       and additional capacity are critical
    o  Adheres to the industry standard SCSI interface X3.131-199X
       Revision 2.0.

The 2.0GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive is supported internally for an array of Micro
Channel(R) systems, and externally in the IBM PS/2(R) SCSI Storage Enclosure
(3510-0V0) and the IBM PS/2 External Storage Enclosure (3511-003).

The 2.0GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive may also be installed internally in the IBM
Industrial Computer 7537 AT(R)-bus system when configured with the IBM 16-Bit
AT Fast SCSI Adapter Kit (#4313, 32G4088).  The 2.0GB hard disk drive may be
installed externally in the 3510-0V0 SCSI storage enclosure when attached to
the PS/2, PS/ValuePoint(TM), PS/1(R) and the IBM 7537 Industrial Computer
AT-bus systems. *  2000 million bytes. (R) Registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation. (TM) Trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Recommended solution for environments requiring a high-capacity,
       high-performance 3.5-inch disk drive
    o  Average seek time:  9.5ms
    o  Average latency:  5.56ms
    o  Adheres to X3.131-199X Revision 2.0 industry standard

Micro Channel systems supported:

    o  Internal installation
       -  8590, 9590
       -  8595, 9595
       -  9557, 9577, 9585
       -  7546-A11 and 411
    o  External installation
       -  3510-0V0 and 3511-003:  When attached to SCSI-based Micro
       Channel systems (limitations apply)

AT-bus systems supported:

    o  Internal installation
       -  IBM Industrial Computer 7537:  When configured with the IBM 16-
          Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Kit
    o  External installation
       -  3510-0V0:  When attached to PS/2, PS/ValuePoint, PS/1 or IBM
          Industrial Computer 7537 system

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Physical Specifications:

                  2.0GB
                  (SCSI)
    Width:        101.6mm
    Depth:        146.0mm
    Height:       41.3mm

Drive Specifications:

                                     2.0GB
                                     (SCSI)
    Formatted capacity*:             2.0GB
    Average media data
      rate:                          41.8Mb/sec
                                     (5.2MB/sec)
    Average seek time:               9.5ms
    Average latency:                 5.56ms
    Sector interleave:               1 to 1
*  Actual user capacity may vary slightly based on differing operating
environments.

Equipment Approvals/Safety:

                          All
                          Devices
    FCC Class B           Yes
    UL/CSA recognized     Yes
    VCCI Class 2          Yes
    GOP VDE               Yes
    CSA 220               Yes

Operating Environment:

                                     2.0GB
                                     (SCSI)
    Operating temperature            5-55 deg. C
    Relative humidity
      (system on)                    8% to 90%

Industry Standards:  This SCSI fixed disk drive adheres to the industry
standard SCSI interface X3.131-199X Revision 2.0 and provides system
configuration flexibility by requiring only one slot for multiple unit
connections.

The 2.0GB drive may be installed externally in the IBM PS/2 SCSI Storage
Enclosure (3510-0V0) and the IBM PS/2 External Storage Enclosure (3511-003)
when attached to all SCSI-based Micro Channel systems (refer to the Limitations
section).

The 2.0GB drive may also be installed internally in the IBM Industrial Computer
7537 AT-bus systems, when configured with the IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter
Kit (#4313, 32G4088).

The 2.0GB drive may be installed externally in the External Storage Enclosure
(3510-0V0) when attached to all AT-bus PS/2, PS/ValuePoint, PS/1 and IBM 7537
Industrial Computer systems, when configured with the IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI
Adapter Kit and the IBM 16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter External Cable Kit (#4315,
32G4089).

Programming Requirements:  The 2.0GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive (#5330) is supported
in the following operating system environments:

    o  OS/2(R) Standard Edition and Extended Edition 1.30.1
    o  OS/2 Standard Edition and Extended Edition 1.30.2
    o  OS/2 2.0
    o  OS/2 2.0 plus Service Pak
    o  OS/2 Extended Services 1.0
    o  OS/2 LAN Server 2.0
    o  OS/2 LAN Server 3.0 and NTS/2
    o  DOS 4.01 and above
    o  NetWare(1) v3.11
    o  AIX(R) PS/2 1.3, SCO(2) XENIX System 2.3.4, UNIX(3) System V/386
       3.2v.4, OPEN DESKTOP(4) 2.0.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (1)
Trademark of Novell, Inc. (2) Trademark of Santa Cruz Corporation, Inc. (3)
Registered trademark of UNIX Systems Laboratories, Inc. (4) Trademark of UNIX
Systems Laboratories, Inc. (5) Trademark of Microsoft Corporation. *  For users
of OS/2 2.0 or 2.00.1, the fix for APAR #PJ07106 is required for   use with the
2.0GB drive.  Customers should call the IBM Support Center at   1-800-237-5511
and the fix will be sent to them.

Compatibility:  The 2.0GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive is are designed to maintain
compatibility with current software support that uses the standard defined BIOS
interfaces.

System BIOS in the PS/2 8556 and 8557 systems prevents the 2.0GB drive from
being supported either externally or internally.

If the 2.0GB SCSI drive is purchased for external attachment to an 8550, 8555,
8560, 8565, 8570, 8573 or 8580 system via the 3510-0V0 or 3511-003 enclosures,
the following SCSI adapter is required:

    o  Option Part #6451133, feature #1132, FRU #85F0063
       (32-Bit Micro Channel SCSI Adapter w/Cache)

This 2.0GB SCSI drive is not supported with the following SCSI adapter cards:

    o  Option Part #6451109, feature #1005, FRU #85F0002
    o  Option Part #6451110, feature #1018, FRU #85F0000.

The FRU # present on the SCSI adapter should be used as a means of identifying
the type of adapter installed in the system.

The processors in some of the early PS/2 8590 and 8595 systems are not
compatible with the 2.0GB SCSI hard disk drive, because the system programs do
not have the BIOS support for drives with capacities over 1.0GB.  However, with
the correct version of the system programs, and an EPROM upgrade (if
necessary), the 2.0GB drive can work in these systems.

Note: SCSI devices are not supported in bays A and B of the 8595, 9585 or 9595
system.  These bays are reserved for diskette drives.

Security and auditability features of the system in which this product is
installed are:

    o  Mechanical lock to allow the user to lock the system cover (PS/2)
    o  User-invoked password function to prevent use by unauthorized
       persons.

Limitations:  Small Computer System Interface (SCSI), as defined in the
American National Standard Institute (ANSI) standard X3.131-199X Revision 2.0
allows for multiple SCSI adapters (initiators) on the SCSI bus.  The SCSI bus
may be internal or external to the system unit.  The IBM PS/2 SCSI adapters are
in conformance with this standard and have an external port.

A data security exposure exists even with Power-On Password installed, since
external SCSI adapters can attach through the external SCSI port and gain
undetected read or write access to data stored on internal and external SCSI
devices.

Physical access to the system and external SCSI devices must be controlled to
limit this exposure.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 376. IBM PS/2 SCSI 400MB SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1081

Part Number  6451235

Bus Master  No

A SCSI fixed disk drive that features 400 million bytes (400MB) formatted
capacity, 128KB look ahead buffer, 11.5ms average seek time, synchronous mode
operation, 3.5-inch half high form factor, and complies to the ANSI SCSI
STANDARD X3.131-1986 for single ended devices.  This drive can be installed
with with the PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter (FC 1005 P/N 6451109) or the PS/2
Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache (FC 1018 P/N 6451110) installed. In
addition, this drive can be installed in the PS/2 External Storage Enclosure
for SCSI Devices (3511-003).  The PS/2 Models 60, 65, and 80 require the PS/2
SCSI Fixed Disk Drive Kit A (FC 1053 P/N 6451053) when installing a SCSI fixed
disk drive in the bay located at the front of the system.

Drive specifications:

    Formatted Capacity        400 million bytes *
    Bytes/Sector              512
    Sectors/Track             48
    Cylinders                 1201
    Sector buffer size        128KB look ahead buffer
    Number of Heads           14
    Disks                     8
    Data Transfer Rate        2.0MBytes/s
    Average Seek Time         11.5ms
    Average Latency           6.95ms
    Sector Interleave         1to1
    Nominal Operating Current: .7A on +5V Line, 1.2A on +12V Line

Actual user accessable capacity may vary slightly based on different operating
environment.

Dimensions:

    Width:  4.00 inch (101.6mm)
    Depth (HDA):  5.75 inch (152.37mm)
    Height:  1.62 inch (41.275mm)

Limitations: It is possible to damage the power supply or shutdown the system
if the total amount of nominal operating current required for the devices
installed exceeds the available current of the power supply in the PS/2 Models
90, 95, and 3511-003.  The following chart lists the nominal operating currents
for many of the devices that can be installed in a PS/2 system.  Use this chart
to add up the nominal operating currents of all the devices installed, and
compare your totals to the TOTAL ALLOWED CURRENTS chart for the appropriate
PS/2 system.

Maximum:  None.  Cable Order:  None.  Field Installed:  Yes.  Prerequisites:
PS/2 SCSI Adapter installed.  Corequisites:  None.  Customer Setup:  It is
recommended that a Service Representative set up and install these SCSI
devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 377. IBM PS/2 SCSI 320MB SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature Code  1108

Part Number  6451234

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 320MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive (FC 1108 P/N 6451234)
replaces a similar current option and features 320 million bytes (320MB) of
formatted capacity, 64KB look ahead buffer, 12.5ms average seek time,
synchronous SCSI mode operation, 3.5-inch half high form factor, and complies
to the ANSI SCSI STANDARD X3.131-1986 for single ended devices.

The PS/2 SCSI Fixed Disk Drive Kit A (FC 1053 P/N 6451053) is specifically
designed and required to support the installation of two SCSI fixed disk drives
in PS/2 Models 60, 65, and 80.  This kit converts the 5.25 inch full high bay,
located in the front of the system, into two horizontally oriented, 3.5-inch
half high bays.  The kit contains a mounting tray, cables and installation
instructions.

The IBM Personal System/2 320MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive supersedes the current
PS/2 320MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive (FC 1055 P/N 6451055).

Drive specifications:

    Formatted Capacity        320 million bytes *
    Data Transfer Rate        2.0MB/sec
    Average Seek Time         12.5ms
    Average Latency           6.95ms
    Sector interleave         1to1

Actual user accessable capacity may vary slightly based on different operating
environments.

Dimensions:

    Width:  4.00 inch (101.6mm)
    Depth (W/Card):  6.00 inch (152.4mm)
    Depth (HDA):  5.75 inch (146.0mm)
    Height:  1.63 inch (41.3mm)

Limitations:  None.  Maximum:  None.  Cable Order:  None.  Field Installation:
Yes.  Prerequisites:  An IBM PS/2 SCSI Adapter installed. Corequisites:  None.
Customer Setup:  It is recommended that a Service Representative setup and
install these SCSI devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 378. IBM PS/2 SCSI FIXED DISK DRIVE KIT D ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451120

Feature Code 1119

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 SCSI Fixed Disk Drive Kit D contains a tray, slide
assembly, screws, and installation instructions to support the installation of
either the PS/2 60MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive or PS/2 120MB SCSI Fixed Disk Drive
in a PS/2 Model 90, 95, or 3511-003. Limitations:  None.  Maximum:  None.
Cable Order:  None.  Field Installed: Yes.  Prerequisites:  PS/2 60MB or 120MB
SCSI Fixed Disk Drive and a PS/2 Models 90, 95, or 3511-003.  Corequisites:
None.  Customer Setup:  Recommend that a Service Representative set up and
install these SCSI devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 379. IBM PS/2 2.3GB FULL HIGH SCSI TAPE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

Part Number  6451121

Feature Code 1120

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2  2.3GB Full High SCSI Tape Drive is an internal
5.25-inch full high SCSI tape drive that features up to 2.3GB formatted
capacity per cartridge, 245KB per second data transfer rate, and complies to
the ANSI SCSI STANDARD X3.131-1986 for single ended devices. This tape drive is
supported when combined with Sytos Plus/IBM OS/2 File Backup Utilities (FC 1355
P/N 15F7193) (obtained separately), provides a high performance, easy-to-use
tape backup/restore system. The drive supports 8mm helical scan camcorder data
type cartridges that adhere to the ANSI Helical-Scan Digital Computer 8mm Tape
Cartridge Format Standard, X3B5/89-136.  One 8mm blank tape cartridge and one
Cleaning Tape (21F8593) are packaged with the tape drive.

Drive specifications:

    Formatted Capacity           2.3GB per cartridge (physically blocked
                                                      at 1024 bytes)
    Data Transfer Rate           245KB per second (sustained)
    Buffer                       248KB
    Form Factor                  5.25-inch

Dimensions

    Width         5.75 Inch
    Depth         8.00 Inch
    Height        3.25 Inch

Limitations:  Only one tape drive is supported in PS/2 Models 95 and 3511-003
and only in bay D (lowest front bay).  Maximum:  None.  Cable Order:  None.
Field Installed:  Yes.  Prerequisites:  PS/2 SCSI adapter installed in system.
Corequisites:  Sytos Plus/IBM OS/2 File Backup Utilities is required.  Customer
Setup:  It is recommended that a Service Representative set up and install this
SCSI device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 380. IBM PS/2 INTERNAL TAPE BACKUP UNIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  30F5279

Feature Code 5279

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 Internal Tape Backup Unit is a 3.5-inch, form factor
tape drive that is installed internally on a PS/2 Model 40, 50, 50Z, 60, 65SX,
70, 80, 90, and 95.  The IBM Personal System/2 Internal Tape Unit, when used
with the IBM Personal System/2 Internal Tape Backup Program allows the user to
transfer up to 120 MB of files from the disk storage device to a removable tape
cartridge for later recall.  The IBM Personal System/2 Internal Tape Backup
Convenience Kit packages the IBM Personal System/2 Internal Tape Backup Unit,
the IBM Personal System/2 Internal Tape Backup Program, and a formatted mini
tape cartridge together for the customer's convenience.  The IBM Personal
System/2 Internal Tape Backup Unit, when used with the IBM Personal System/2
Tape Backup Program, provides the customer with an easy to install, and
technologically advanced internal tape backup system.

Both DOS and OS/2 versions of the IBM Personal System/2 Internal Tape Backup
Program and the IBM Personal System/2 Internal Tape Backup Convenience Kit are
available as shown below:

    Part Number      Feature Code         Description
      34F3046          1188        IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup
                                   Program (OS/2 Version)
      34F3049          1189        IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup
                                   Program Upgrade (OS/2 Version)
      30F5272          1190        IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup
                                   Convenience Kit (OS/2 Version)
      64F7465          2991        IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup
                                   Installation Kit B
      87F9826          2992        IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup
                                   Unit Installation Kit C
      30F5278          5278        IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program
                                   (DOS Version)
      30F5280          5280        IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup
                                   Convenience Kit
                                   (DOS Version)

For IBM US, as of September 11, 1991, features #1188, #1189, #1190, #2991,
#5278, and #5280 are No Longer Available.  Feature #2991 has been replaced by
IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Unit Installation Kit C (#2992, P/N 87F9826).
Features #1188, #1189, #1190, #5278, and #5280 have been replaced by the IBM
PS/2 Internal Backup Program Version 2.0 (DOS compatible) (#1851, P/N 87F9828),
the IBM PS/2 Internal Backup Convenience Kit Version 2.0 (DOS compatible)
(#1852, P/N 87F9830), the IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program Upgrade Version
2.0 (DOS Compatible) (#1853, P/N 87F9854), the IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup
Program Version 1.01 (OS/2 compatible) (#1854, P/N 87F9827), the IBM PS/2
Internal Tape Backup Convenience Kit Version 1.01 (OS/2 compatible) (#1855, P/N
87F9829) and the IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program Upgrade Version 1.01
(OS/2 compatible) (#1856, P/N 87F9888).

The media used by this device is a 3M (TM) DC2120 cartridge.  Other media may
or may not be suitable for use with the IBM Personal System/2 Internal Tape
Backup Unit.  Data Cartridges may be acquired through a 3M media supplies
dealer.  One formatted mini cartridge is included in the IBM Personal System/2
Internal Tape Backup Convenience Kit to allow immediate use of the unit.
Customer Setup:  Yes.  Maximum Units per Machine:  One.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 381. AUDIO CAPTURE AND PLAYBACK ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  34F2783

Feature Code 2783

Bus Master  No

The Audio Capture and Playback Adapter provides the capability to record and
playback high-quality sound for use with the IBM Personal System/2 Models 25,
30, and 30-286.  The adapter works with standard audio input devices, including
microphone, compact disc players, and cassette players.  The sound can be
played back through a variety of devices, including headphones, speakers, and
amplifiers.  The sound can be manipulated and used in high-quality
presentations created with the IBM Audio Visual Connection Program Product.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 382. IBM PS/2 1.44MB 1 INCH HIGH DISKETTE DRIVE I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451063

Feature Code 1063

Bus Master  No

The IBM PS/2 1.44Mb Diskette Drive I is a new option for the IBM Personal
System/2 Model 25 286 only, that provides a second diskette drive for diskette
only models.  Prerequisite:  None.  Customer Setup:  Yes. Publication included
with option:  IBM Personal System/2 1.44Mb 1 Inch High Diskette Drive I.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 383. IBM PS/2 20MB FIXED DISK DRIVE I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451075

Feature Code 1075

Bus Master  No

The IBM PS/2 20Mb Fixed Disk Drive I is a new option for the IBM Personal
System/2 Model 25 286.  Prerequisite: Fixed Disk Drive Kit A, Customer Setup:
Yes.  Publication included with option:  IBM Personal System/2 Fixed Disk
Installation Instructions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 384. IBM PS/2 30MB FIXED DISK DRIVE I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451076

Feature Code 1076

Bus Master  No

The IBM PS/2 30Mb Fixed Disk Drive I is a new option for the IBM Personal
System/2 Model 25 286.  Prerequisite:  Fixed Disk Drive Kit A.  Customer Setup:
Yes.  Publication included with option:  IBM Personal System/2 Fixed Disk
Installation Instructions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 385. IBM PS/2 FIXED DISK DRIVE KIT A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451071

Feature Code 1071

Bus Master  No

Kit A is required to install a Fixed Disk option in the IBM Personal System/2
Model 25 286.  Prerequisite:  None.  Customer Setup: Yes.  Publication included
with option:  IBM Personal System/2 Fixed Disk Drive Kit A.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 386. IBM PS/2 1.44MB 1-INCH HIGH DISKETTE DRIVE KIT A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451034

Feature Code 1034

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 1.44Mb 1-inch High Diskette Drive Kit A is required
for the IBM Personal System/2 1.44Mb 1-inch High Diskette Drive (#1026) and
contains the diskette drive cable, diskette drive bezel, and the installation
instructions.  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup: Yes.

Prerequisites:

    o   Bay B available.
    o   IBM Personal System/2 1.44 1-inch High Diskette Drive (#1026, P/N
        6451026).
    o   The 1.44Mb diskette drive installed in bay A has the drive indicator
        light below the media insertion slot.
    o   The IBM 4869-001 5.25-inch External Diskette Drive (P/N 4869001) with its
        adapter (#8750, P/N 6450244) and cable (#4114, P/N 27F4245) cannot be
        installed in the same system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 387. IBM PS/2 1.44MB 1-INCH HIGH DISKETTE DRIVE KIT A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451037

Feature Code 1037

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 1.44Mb Diskette Drive Kit A contains the diskette
drive cable, diskette drive bezel, and the installation instructions and
provides the capability to install the IBM Personal System/2 1.44Mb Diskette
Drive (#3057, P/N 6450353) as the second diskette drive on IBM Personal
System/2 8530-E01 that has the first diskette drive indicator light above the
media insertion slot.  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer
Setup:  Yes.

Prerequisites:

    o   Bay B available.
    o   IBM Personal System/2 1.44 Diskette Drive (#3057, P/N 6450353).
    o   The 1.44Mb diskette drive installed in bay A has the drive indicator
        light above the media insertion slot.
    o   The IBM 4869-001 5.25-inch External Diskette Drive (P/N 4869001) with its
        adapter (#8750, P/N 6450244) and cable (#4114, P/N 27F4245) cannot be
        installed in the same system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 388. IBM PS/2 40MB FIXED DISK DRIVE I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451073

Feature Code 1073

Bus Master  No

The IBM PS/2 40MB Fixed Disk Drive I is an option for the IBM Personal System/2
Model 35 SX and 35 LS.  Prerequisite:  None. Customer Setup: Yes.

    Formatted Capacity          40 million bytes*
    Average Seek (ms)           17
    Data Transfer Rate (MB/s)   1.35Mbytes
    Average Latency (ms)        8.3ms
    Sector Interleave           1.1
    Interface                   AT
    Buffer                      32K

* Actual user accessible capacity may vary slightly based on different
operating environments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 389. IBM PS/2 80MB FIXED DISK DRIVE I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451074

Feature Code 1074

Bus Master  No

The IBM PS/2 80MB Fixed Disk Drive I is a new option for the IBM Personal
System/2 Models 35 SX and 35 LS.  Prerequisite: None,  Customer Setup: Yes.

    Formatted Capacity          80 million bytes*
    Average Seek (ms)           17
    Data Transfer Rate (MB/s)   1.35Mbytes
    Average Latency (ms)        8.3ms
    Sector Interleave           1.1
    Interface                   AT
    Buffer                      32K

* Actual user accessible capacity may vary slightly based on different
operating environments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 390. IBM PS/2 MODEL 35 LS UPGRADE KIT FOR HARDFILES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451128

Feature Code 5107

Bus Master  No

The IBM PS/2 Hardfile Upgrade Kit is available to Model 35 LS customers who
wish to upgrade the medialess system with a hardfile.  Prerequisite: None.
Customer Setup: Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 391. IBM PS/2 MODEL 35 LS UPGRADE KIT FOR DISKETTE DRIVES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451127

Feature Code 5106

Bus Master  No

The IBM PS/2 Diskette Drive Upgrade Kit is available for customers who wish to
upgrade the medialess Model 35 LS with a FDD.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 392. IBM PS/2 5.25-INCH EXTERNAL DISKETTE DRIVE ADAPTER CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451124

Feature Code 1124

Bus Master  No

The 5.25-Inch External Diskette Drive Adapter Cable is required to install the
PS/2 5.25-Inch External Diskette Drive Adapter in a PS/2 Model 35 SX and 35 LS.
This cable is installed internally and attaches the 5.25-inch adapter to the
diskette drive adapter.  Prerequisite: None.  Customer setup: Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 393. IBM PS/2 FLOOR STAND KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  95F5606

Feature Code 5606

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 Floor Stand allows the 8535 SX and LS to be
orientated vertically.  Prerequisite: None.  Customer Setup: Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 394. IBM 4/10GB 4MM DAT TAPE DRIVE OPTION KITS FOR PS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  8191339 3.5"

Service Part Number   16G8456

Feature Code      7499

Marketing Part Number  8191359 5.25"

Service Part Number   16G8454

Feature Code      7502

Bus Master  No

The 4/10GB 4mm Digital Audio Tape (DAT) option kit is an industry-leading
state-of-the-art technology, low cost-per-megabyte 4 mm tape solution for PS/2
(R).  It addresses the growing requirements for unattended backup of LAN
servers or any other large capacity disk storage application.  The small
easy-to-handle media size is even easier to store.

The 4/10GB 4mm tape option contains onboard data compression that increases its
capacity from 8GB to 16GB; 10GB typical.  It provides a data transfer rate of
400 to 1,600KB per second with 1,000KB per second typical in data compression
mode.

There is a wide variety of tape backup/restore software available for DOS, OS/2
(R), AIX (R) PS/2, SCO (1)-UNIX (2) and Novell (3) NetWare (3) environments.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (1)
Trademark of Santa Cruz Operation, Inc. (2) Registered trademark of UNIX
Systems Laboratories, Inc. (3) Registered trademark of Novell, Inc.

IN BRIEF . . .

    o   Has capacity of 4/10GB per cartridge, 8GB to 16GB (10GB typical)
        with data compression and with DDS2 data cartridges
    o   A 30-second average file search speed
    o   Uses the DDS-2 data grade media for higher reliability
    o   Features non-data grade media rejection for write operations
        (will not allow writing on audio grade media)
    o   Features enhanced self diagnostics and cleaning required
        indicator
    o   Read and write compatibility with DDSIIII tape cartridges in
        2.0GB format
    o   Designed using DAT technology
    o   Uses reliable Digital Data Storage (DDS) tape media

The 4/10GB 4mm tape option is an industry leading state-of-the-art technology
tape drive.  The 30-second average file access time simplifies data retrieval.
It contains onboard data compression that increases the capacity from 8GB to
16GB of data with 10GB being typical.

The increased capacity (8GB-16GB) per cartridge when using data compression
allows for unattended save/restore operations allowing customers the
flexibility to schedule save/restore operations during off-shift or other
periods.  This also improves system availability.

The 4/10GB 4mm Tape Drive Option kit can read and write data cartridges used by
the IBM 2.0GB tape drives and any other DDS supported tape product.

The new 4mm tape option kit is read and write compatible with tapes written on
2.0GB tape drives.  This compatibility allows customers the ability to protect
investments made in existing tape libraries. COST SAVINGS:  Data compression
allows much more data to be saved per cartridge, allowing the customer to
reduce data cartridge purchases.

The enhanced performance and reliability makes the 4/10GB 4mm tape option an
excellent save/restore device for Server 95 and other personal system
environments where 10GB or more of disk storage is required to be saved on a
single 4mm data cartridge.  The 4/10GB 4mm tape option kits should be marketed
where the customer requires more capacity than the 2GB 4mm tape option provides
but at a reduced price over the 8 mm tape option kit.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    o   Width:  102 mm (4.0 inches)
    o   Depth:  154mm (6.1 inches)
    o   Height:  41.3 mm (1.6 inches)
    o   Weight:  1.1 kg (2.4 pounds)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT:

    o   Temperature:  5 (degs) to 45 (degs) C (41 (degs) to 113 (degs) F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  20% to 80%
    o   Wet Bulb:  27.0 (degs) C (80.6 (degs) F) maximum
    o   Electrical Power:  5 Watts typical

FCC class determined by FCC classification of host system.

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS:  The 4/10GB 4mm DAT Tape Drive 3.5-Inch Option kit is
designed to be installed in the IBM PS/2 Server 95 A Models 3NG, 3NT, 3PG, 3PT,
and 3QT.

The 5.25-inch option kits apply to PS/2 machine types 8556, 8557, 8560, 8576,
8577, 8580, 8585, 8590, 8595, 7546 Industrial Computer, 9556, 9557, 9576, 9577,
9585, other than 9595 models above, 3510 and 3511 SCSI Enclosures, and 3550.

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS:  A software tape backup utility is needed to support
the announced product.  NovaBack with Quick Start Reference, from NovaStor
Corporation, is provided with the 5.25-inch option kit (8191359).  NovaBack
provides a full-featured backup and restore solution for DOS, OS/2 and Windows.
A QUICK START

INSTALLATION AND REFERENCE guide is included and full USER GUIDE documentation
is available through NovaStor at a nominal fee.  The software tape backup
utility needed to support the 3.5-inch option kit is obtained separately.

The vendors listed below have certified that their suggested tape
backup/restore software will support the announced product. Contact the
respective software vendor for a complete list of the SCSI host adapters and
hardware configurations supported.

    o   Sytos Plus, from Sytron Corporation, that supports DOS, OS/2, IBM
        LAN Server for OS/2, and client backup under Novell NetWare
        software.  Device drivers for 4/10GB 4mm DAT drives are not
        included in the Sytos Plus versions listed below and can be
        obtained by contacting Sytron Technical Support.
        -   Sytos Plus Version 1.42 for DOS (61G1442)
        -   Sytos Plus Version 1.37 for OS/2 (61G1443)
    o   ARCserve, from Cheyenne Software, Inc., provides fully automated
        data management services for your Novell NetWare network.
        ARCserve is available in a DOS edition (ARCserve Version 4.0) and
        a Windows edition (ARCserve Version 5.0).
    o   ARCserve/Solo, from Cheyenne Software, Inc., provides
        high-performance backup and restore for DOS 3.0, or later.
    o   CPBackup, from Central Point Software, Inc.  DOS 6.1 users can
        use the CPBackup version included in DOS 6.1 by calling the
        Central Point Software technical support line for an upgrade kit.
    o   NovaBack for DOS, OS/2 and Windows, from NovaStor Corporation,
        provides high-performance backup and restore.
        NOTE: NovaBack for DOS, OS/2 and Windows is included at no charge
        in the 5.25-inch option kit (8191359) along with a QUICK START
        REFERENCE guide.
    o   NovaNet-NLM, from NovaStor Corporation, provides Novell NetWare
        server-based backup and restore facilities.
    o   CorelSCSI for DOS from Corel Corporation.
    o   SBackup, from Novell, Inc., provides support in the Novell
        NetWare environment.
    o   Backup Exec, from Conner Corporation, is available in DOS,
        OS/2 and Windows versions.
    o   AIX PS/2 provides tape backup support in the AIX PS/2 1.3.0
        environment.
    o   Network Archivist, from Palindrome Corporation, provides
        automated network protection, archiving and storage management in
        the Novell NetWare environment.
    o   Legato NetWorker, from Legato Systems, Inc., provides storage
        management in the Novell NetWare environment.
    o   Microsoft Windows NT 3.1 compatibility testing has been
        successfully completed on this device.  This device is supported
        with device drivers available in the Windows NT Driver Library.

COMPATIBILITY:  The new 4/10GB 4mm DAT Tape Drive Option can read and write
data cartridges used by the IBM 2.0GB tape drives and other DDS supported tape
products.

The 4/10GB 4mm DAT Tape Drive Option kit is designated customer setup.
Installation and operation documentation is included with the hardware.

No cables required.

This product uses the security and auditability features of the personal system
product and related software with which it is operating.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 395. IBM PS/2 SERVERGUARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  70G7365

Service Part Number   61G3628 Adapter

Service Part Number   61G3629 Battery

Service Part Number   42G2593 Modem

Service Part Number   92F0287 Guard to DAA Cable

Service Part Number   43G3398 DAA to Phone Cable

Service Part Number   43G3392 DAA

Service Part Number   71G6222 Power Control Box

Feature Code 9023

Bus Master  Yes

Today IBM is announcing the IBM PS/2 ServerGuard Option. The ServerGuard Option
is a server Management solution that consists of a:

    o   Power Control Box
    o   Micro Channel Bus Master based card, with a Remote Maintenance
        Processor, and an integrated PCMCIA modem
    o   Software - IBM PS/2 ServerGuard Maximum Availability and Support
        System/2 for NetWare.

The ServerGuard enhances all IBM Micro Channel Servers running NetWare 3.11 by
providing on line Management capability of the server. ServerGuard monitors
internal temperatures, voltages, and preset server performance conditions.
ServerGuard allows the administrator to manage the performance of the server,
and allows reboot as well as power on/off control of the server system.

The ServerGuard increases an administrator's ability to monitor and control
server resources, improves server Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability
(RAS) capabilities, and provides information on server status. The ServerGuard
interacts with either local or remote consoles connected via various
communications options. These options include phone line (modem), Local Area
Network (LAN), or local server ports (video / keyboard or serial).  ServerGuard
will provide:

    o   Both PCMCIA (shipped with card) modem, and LAN communications
    o   Server Environment monitors
    o   Access to Configuration information
    o   Server power control and system reset capabilities controlled
        automatically or by real time commands
    o   Alerts triggered by thresholds which can be preset by the user
    o   The ability to direct alerts to pagers, LAN's, remote or local
        consoles
    o   A battery backup designed to allow communications with
        ServerGuard during server power outages or when the administrator
        has powered the server down
    o   Levels of security and password protection
    o   Comprehensive error logging
    o   Remote console capabilities
    o   Remote file transfer to and from the server
    o   Remote entry of Operating System commands for execution
    o   Compliance with emerging LAN Management standards and protocols

The ServerGuard incorporates significant portions of the PS/2 Server 295 Remote
Maintenance Processor design. ServerGuard operates with ServerGuard MASS/2 NW
which is a functional subset of the Maximum Availability and Support System/2
for NetWare (MASS/2 NW) found on the IBM Server 295.

ServerGuard and ServerGuard MASS/2 NW will support Servers running NetWare
3.11.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Monitors server operating environment
    o   Notifies LAN Administrator if preset operating limits are
        exceeded
    o   Battery backup allows remote access to error logs during power
        outages
    o   Provides multiple levels of security with password protection
    o   Provides access to server configuration information
    o   Complies with emerging LAN Management standards and protocols

The IBM PS/2 ServerGuard and ServerGuard MASS/2 NW will monitor the server's
operating environment and notify the administrator if preset operating limits
are exceeded or if a power outage occurs. Notification can be over the LAN, to
a remote terminal via self contained modem, or to a pager. Early detection of
potential problems will enhance the Administrator's ability to find and correct
problems before they reduce the performance level of the server.

ServerGuard MASS/2 NW provides important functions, key to improving user
productivity.

ServerGuard MASS/2 NW application runs under NetWare 3.11 and follows the
SAA(TM)/SNA guidelines, which ensure a consistent interface and higher
productivity.

ServerGuard along with its associated software ServerGuard MASS/2 NW provides a
graphical interface for managing functions, such as:

    o   Automatic reboot
    o   Comprehensive error logging
    o   Selective error notification including dial-out capability
    o   Remote file transfer to and from the server
    o   Remote entry of Operating System commands for execution
    o   Fail-safe access in  case of power outage
    o   Remote power cycling
    o   Warning alarms
    o   User and administrative password security
    o   Remote console capabilities

The PS/2 Server with ServerGuard and ServerGuard MASS/2 NW provides the
capability to monitor, tune and control the PS/2 Server from local or remote
locations.

With ServerGuard and ServerGuard MASS/2 NW, PS/2 Servers can be geographically
distributed across large organizations while retaining the ability to be
managed in a centralized support location.  ServerGuard provides continual
monitoring of resources and system critical parameters. In addition, remote
power cycling and alarm / alert generation are all possible with ServerGuard
and ServerGuard MASS/2 NW's comprehensive system management capabilities.

ServerGuard and ServerGuard MASS/2 NW's features are available from the system
console, from any PC on the network, or by modem from anywhere in the world.
With ServerGuard and ServerGuard MASS/2 NW, LAN networks can be easily managed
whether they are local or thousands of miles away.

Warning parameters for the system can be set with ServerGuard MASS/2 NW. Once
set, the system automatically sends warning alerts to users, dials out to
remote administrators, or shuts down if operational limits such as temperature
or voltages reach unacceptable limits.

ServerGuard MASS/2 NW information is displayed logically, and more detail is
available at the click of the mouse.  The systems operational statistics, such
as CPU, memory, disk utilization are available in real time. ServerGuard MASS/2
NW displays a record of the last 60 minutes for each statistic. The statistics
are stored to disk for long-term storage and analyses.

ServerGuard MASS/2 NW records all hardware failures, network errors and other
critical events.  These are maintained in a non-volatile log easily accessed
for review. Because the ServerGuard is battery-backed, the log can always be
accessed even if the server is not operating.

ServerGuard detects software timeouts, (Operating System stopped or hung), by
monitoring a series of watchdog timers. When a failure is detected Response
could be an auto reboot or a call to the LAN administrator, dependant upon
preset parameters.

The PS/2 Server with ServerGuard and ServerGuard MASS/2 NW provide the system
administrator with very high levels of management control and assures clients
that system availability will be maximized.

IBM PS/2 ServerGuard and ServerGuard Maximum Availability and Support System/2
for NetWare allows multiple servers to be managed from a central location. This
can provide greater efficiency and control by allowing a single administrator
to manage an increased number of servers without spending equivalent additional
time at the server locations.

ServerGuard MASS/2 NW will contact the administrator if preset thresholds are
reached, or if the monitored server encounters an alert condition or power
failure. This ensures that the administrator is aware of the potential problem
before server performance is impacted.  In case of a power failure the
administrator is immediately notified by the ServerGuard and will most likely
be aware of the problem before the Users begin to respond.

Notification of potential and occurring errors, results in both high
performance and high availability in a server that will continue to meet the
customer's needs.

ServerGuard and ServerGuard MASS/2 NW initally will support Servers running
NetWare 3.11.

IBM PC Co. intends to support OS/2 2.1 and LAN Server 3.0.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    The ServerGuard Adapter is a standard IBM type-3 Microchannel card
    size (3.475 inches X 11.500 inches).  The PC board contain 10
    layers, 3 voltage, 1 ground, 6 signal planes.
    Equipment Approvals/Safety:
    FCC Class B approval has not yet been received.
    "Sale or delivery of this device is subject to approval from the
    Federal Communications Commision."

                              IBM PS/2 ServerGuard
    FCC Class B                   IN PROCESS
    UL/CSA Recognized             IN PROCESS
    VCCI Class 2                  IN PROCESS
    TUV/VDE                       IN PROCESS
    NOM                           IN PROCESS
    NEMKO                         IN PROCESS
    SEMKO                         IN PROCESS
    SETI                          IN PROCESS
    OeVE                          IN PROCESS
    SAA                           IN PROCESS
    DENTORI                       IN PROCESS

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    ------------------------------------------------------------
    | Class B' Extended | Temperature |  Altitude  | Humidity  |
    | Environment       |   (Deg C)   |  (Meters)  | (Percent) |
    ------------------------------------------------------------
    | Product Operating |    10 - 35  |   0 - 914  |  8 - 80   |
    |                   |    10 - 32  | 914 - 2133 |  8 - 80   |
    | Product Power Off |    10 - 43  |            |  8 - 80   |
    | Machine Storage   |     1 - 60  |            |  5 - 80   |
    | Machine Shipment  | (-)40 - 60  |            |  5 - 100* |
    ------------------------------------------------------------
    | * Including condensation but excluding rain              |
    ------------------------------------------------------------

POWER REQUIREMENTS The ServerGuard's power requirements are as specified below:

               DC Power Requirements
               ---------------------
    NOMINAL       MIN       MAX        REGULATION
    OUTPUT                             TOLERANCE
    VOLTAGE
    -------     ------    ------       ----------
      +5.0V      4.75V     5.25V        +5%  -5%
     +12.0V     11.52V    12.60V        +5%  -4%
      +Vbb       4.75V     5.25V        +5%  -5%
      +Vbat      4.75V     5.25V        +5%  -5%
     Sleep       4.75V     5.25V        +5%  -5%
     Mode

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS: IBM PS/2 ServerGuard can be installed in the following
Micro Channel systems:

    Machine   Models
   --------- --------
      9595     All
      9590     All
      9585     All
      9577     All
      8595     All
      8590     All
      8580     All
      7546     411
               640
               641
      PS/55

The ServerGuard and ServerGuard MASS/2 NW require the following Operat- ing
Systems:

    NetWare(1) v3.11
    Windows(2) 3.0 or 3.1
    (1) Trademark of Novell Corporation, Inc.
    (2) Trademark of Microsoft Corporation, Inc.

This product uses the security and auditability features of the installed PS/2
Computer, and compliments them with the security features of the IBM PS/2
ServerGuard and ServerGuard MASS/2 NW.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 396. 170MB AND 424MB AT HARD DISK DRIVES, 3.5-INCH 1.44MB DISKETTE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  70G7024 170MB AT Hard Disk Drive

Service Part Number   71G4958

Feature Code 7557

Marketing Part Number  70G7025 424MB AT Hard Disk Drive

Service Part Number   71G4930

Feature Code 7558

Marketing Part Number  70G8986 3.5" 1.44MB Diskette Drive

Service Part Number   93F2361

Feature Code 9012

Marketing Part Number  70G8165 5.25" to 3.5" DASD Bay Conversion Kit

Service Part Number   70G8165

Feature Code 9010

The following Features are offered, including the 170MB (170 Million Bytes) and
424MB (424 Million Bytes) AT Hard Disk Drives, the newest additions to IBM's
family of AT(R)-bus drives.

The new 170MB disk drive offers customers significant performance improvements
over the previously released 170MB drive, with features such as write cache and
an average seek time of 13.0ms.

The 424MB disk drive also provides this same high performance at 2.5 times the
capacity of the 170MB disk drive.

The 3.5-inch 1.44MB Diskette Drive now provides customers the ability to add a
second 3.5-inch diskette drive to their ValuePoint(TM) systems.

The 5.25-inch to 3.5-inch DASD Bay Conversion Kit gives customers the ability
to add a 3.5-inch hard disk drive or diskette drive to the 5.25-inch bays of
their ValuePoint(TM) systems. (R) Registered trademark of the International
Business Machines Corporation. (TM) Trademark of the International Business
Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   New 170MB and 424MB AT Hard Disk Drive options with write cache
    o   3.5-inch 1.44MB Diskette Drive now available as an option for
        ValuePoint(TM) systems
    o   5.25-inch to 3.5-inch DASD Bay Conversion Kit allows the addition
        of 3.5-inch hard disks or 3.5-inch diskette drives to the 5.25-
        inch bays of ValuePoint systems.
(TM) Trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation.

The 170MB and 424MB hard disk drives provide additional capacity for customers
requiring additional data storage.  These drives also provide improved
performance with features such as average seek times of 13.0ms and write cache.
With the addition of the 3.5-inch 1.44MB diskette drive customers can now
expand their systems to include two diskette drives.  The 5.25-inch to 3.5-inch
DASD Conversion kit allows the customer to add any 3.5-inch hard disk or
diskette drive to the 5.25-inch bay of their ValuePoint(TM) systems. (TM)
Trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation.

The 170 and 424MB drives allow customers to expend the hard disk storage
capacity of their PS/2 8535/8540 and ValuePoint(TM)  systems. (TM) Trademark of
the International Business Machines Corporation.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Dimensions:

             170MB     424MB    1.44MB FDD
            -------   -------   ----------
    Width:  101.6mm   101.6mm     101.6mm
    Depth:  146.0mm   146.0mm     150.0mm
    Height:  25.4mm    25.4mm      25.4mm

Drive Specifications:

                            170MB        424MB        1.44MB FDD
                          ---------    ---------     ------------
    Formatted Capacity:     170MB        424MB         1.44MB
    Ave. Media Data Rate:   2.8MB/s      2.8MB/s       500Kb/sec
    Ave. Seek Time:         13.0ms       13.0ms        95.0ms
    Ave. Latency:            9.0ms        9.0ms        100ms

Machine Requirements: The features are supported in the following Machine
Type/Model Numbers:

                  *Machine
    *Description   Type      *Model
    -----------    -------   ------
    170MB Drive    8535       ALL
                   8540       ALL
                   6381       ALL
                   6382       ALL
                   6384       ALL
                   6387       ALL
                   7537       A11
                              710
                              711
                              720
                              722
    424MB Drive    8535       ALL
                   8540       ALL
                   6381       ALL
                   6382       ALL
                   6384       ALL
                   6387       ALL
                   7537       A11
                              710
                              711
                              720
                              722
    1.44MB FDD     6381       3x3,5x5
                   6382       3x3,5x5
                   6384       3x3,5x5
    DASD Bay Kit   6381       3x3,5x5
                   6382       3x3,5x5
                   6384       3x3,5x5

Programming Requirements: All hard disk drives and the diskette drive are
supported in the following environments:

    OS/2(R) STANDARD EDITION and EXTENDED EDITION 1.30.1
    OS/2 STANDARD EDITION and EXTENDED EDITION 1.30.2
    OS/2 2.0
    OS/2 2.0 PLUS SERVICE PAK
    OS/2 2.1
    OS/2 Lan Server 2.0
    OS/2 Lan Server 3.0 and NTS/2
    DOS 5.0 and Above
    NETWARE(1) v3.11
    AIX(R) PS/2 1.3
    SCO(2) XENIX 2.3.4, UNIX(3) System V/386 3.2v.4,
    OPEN DESKTOP(4) 2.0
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines. (1) Trademark of
Novell Corporation, Inc. (2) Trademark of Santa Cruz Corporation, Inc. (3)
Registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. (4) Trademark of UNIX
System Laboratories, Inc. (5) Trademark of Microsoft Corporation, Inc.

The 170MB and 424MB hard disk drives are supported in all systems that conform
to ANSI ATA Standard X3T9.2/90-143 Revision 3.2. (TM) Trademark of the
International Business Machines Corporation.

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT:

                              170MB     424MB    1.44MB FDD
                             -------   -------   ----------
    Temperature (degrees C)   5-55      5-55       10-50
    Relative Humidity:        8-80%     8-80%       8-80%
    Wet Bulb:                 33.0      33.0        29.4

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS: 170MB/424MB AT Hard Disk Drives:

    - IBM PS/2 Machine Types 8535/8540 (All Models)
    - PS ValuePoint(TM) 6381, 6382, 6384, 6387 (All Models)
    - IBM Industrial Computer 7537-A11, 710, 711, 720 and 722
    - All OEM systems complying with ANSI ATA Standard X3T9.2/90-143
      Revision 3.2

1.44MB Diskette Drive / 5.25-inch to 3.5-inch DASD Bay Conversion Kit:

    - PS ValuePoint(TM) Machine Types 6381/6382/6384 (3x3, 5x5 Models)
(TM) Trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation.

Security and auditability features of this product are:

    o    A mechanical lock to allow the user to lock the system cover
         (PS/2 and ValuePoint)
    o    A user-invoked password fucntion to prevent use by unauthorized
         persons

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 397. IBM PS/2 CABLE COVER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  95F5610

Feature Code 5610

Bus Master  No

This device allows the user to render the external I/O cables in the rear of
the system unit captive.  Prerequisite: None.  Customer Setup: Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 398. IBM S/370 CHANNEL EMULATOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  70X5061

Feature Code 3200

Bus Master  No

The S/370 Channel Emulator is an adapter card for the IBM Personal System/2
Model 30-021, which emulates the operation of an IBM System/370 channel.  The
card may be used with appropriate application software to channel attach
certain S/370 devices to the PS/2.  Prerequisite:  None Customer Setup:  Yes.

Highlights:

    o   Single card for insertion in an IBM Personal System Model 30-021 system
        unit
    o   32K of on-card high speed memory
    o   Hardware support for Initial Selection and Data Transfer 370 channel
        sequences
    o   Read/write record size of up to 32Kb
    o   Interlocked and data streaming interfaces may be emulated
    o   Byte, block or selector channel protocol may be emulated
    o   Support warranted for connection to the following 370 devices:  3820 Page
        Printer (See Programming Announcement Letter, Remote PrintManager 1.0.1.)

Publications:

    o   S/370 Channel Emulator Technical Library.  This library consists of:
    -   Guide to Operations
    -   Hardware Maintenance Guide
    -   Technical Reference
    -   Diagnostic diskettes (5.25- and 3.5-inch)

This adapter, when coupled with appropriate software, may be used to channel
attach certain S/370 peripherals to the IBM Personal System/2 Model 30-021.

The feature consists of a piggyback card that occupies a single slot and
provides a D-shell connector to an interface cable.  The interface cable is
fitted with 370 BUS and TAG serpentine channel connectors for connection to the
370 peripheral.

The diagnostics may be used to check the operation of the card.  The
diagnostics require DOS V2.1 or later.

With appropriate software, a S/370 byte, block or selector channel may be
emulated.  Both the DC interlocked and data streaming protocols are supported.

Under software control, hardware assistance is available for the Initial
Selection and Data Transfer channel sequences.  An on-card buffer of 32k is
used for the hardware data transfer sequence.

NOTE: The following components are included as part of Feature #3200 or can be
ordered separately.  They are available through IBM Direct at IBM-2468.


    Description               Feature
    Card Assembly             #3201
    Cable (10 ft)             #3202
    S/370 Channel Emulator
    Technical Library         #3203

IBM System/370 Channel Terminators (Bus, P/N 2282675 and Tag, P/N 2282676).
They are available through IBM Direct at IBM-2468.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 399. PS/2 5.25 INCH EXTERNAL DISKETTE DRIVE ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450244

Feature Code 8750

Bus Master  No

This attachment allows the 4869 to be connected to the 8530 Model E21.  It is a
half-length feature card and it occupies one expansion slot in the 8530 system.
The back of the card has a 37-pin D-shell connector that allows the 4869
external diskette drive unit to be attached.  The 8530 system "B" drive
connector plugs onto the 2 x 20 edge connector on the feature card.  When
installed, it becomes the "B" drive.  Prerequisites:  An available slot in the
8530 Model E21.  Maximum:  One.  IBM Personal System/2 5.25-inch External
Diskette Drive Adapter 2 Cable (#1033) P/N 6451033 required to attach the IBM
4869 Personal System/2 5.25-inch Drive and Adapter (#8750, P/N 6450244) to an
8530-E21 with serial numbers 2500000 to 2999999.  Field Installation:  Yes.
Customer Setup:  Yes.  Maximum:  One


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 400. PS/2 MULTIFUNCTION ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  30F5364

Feature Code 8635

Bus Master  No

The IBM Personal System/2 Multifunction Adapter is designed to support the 10M
hz and 16 bit performance of the IBM Personal System/2 Model 30 286.  The
adapter provides the Model 30 286 with an additional serial port, an additional
parallel printer port, and six pairs of memory sockets providing up to 12Mb of
extended memory for OS/2 and other extended memory applications.  A maximum of
two adapters may be installed in a Model 30 286 providing a maximum of 15Mb of
additional memory.  The Multifunction Adapter can use either 0.5Mb Memory
Module Kits (#3397, P/N 30F5348) or 2.0Mb Memory Module Kits (#7833, P/N
30F5360).  However, both sizes of kits cannot be installed on the same adapter.
Memory installed on the adapter, when combined with the All Chargecard (#3863,
P/N 34F2863), can be used as expanded memory for LIM EMS 4.0 applications
(including the IBM Workstation Connectivity Memory Manager Enhancement and
Software Carousel V3.0). Installation of the adapter requires a full sized
option card slot in the Model 30 286.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 401. 3.5-INCH 720KB 1 INCH HIGH DISKETTE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451056

Feature Code 1056

Bus Master  No

This feature allows the user to install a second diskette 3.5-inch, 720Kb
diskette drive in a Personal System/2 Model 25 (8525-001, G01, 004 and G04).

This drive is functionally equivalent to #4106, but must be installed in 8525s
with Serial Numbers greater than 100,000 and/or on which the first drive
indicator light is below the media insertion slot.  Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.  Customer Setup: Yes.  Limitation: Cannot be installed with
a 20Mb Fixed Disk Drive (#4107).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 402. M-AUDIO CAPTURE AND PLAYBACK ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  87F9908

Feature Code 3908

Bus Master  No

The M - Audio Capture and Playback Adapter provides the capability to record
and playback high-quality sound.  The adapter works with standard audio input
devices, including microphone, compact disc players and cassette players. The
sound can be played back through a variety of devices, including headphones,
speakers and amplifiers.  The sound can be manipulated and used in high-quality
presentations created with the IBM Audio Visual Connection Program Product.

Enhanced software drivers DOS only for the M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter
provide compatibility with software that requires the IBM Speech Adapter.  This
enhancement allows the M - Audio Capture and Playback Adapter to be used for
IBM educational courseware such as IBM Writing to Read, LinkWay, Basic Skills,
and Primary Editor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 403. M-AUDIO CAPTURE AND PLAYBACK ADAPTER UPGRADE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  87F9915

Feature Code 3915

Bus Master  No

M - Audio Capture and Playback Adapter Upgrade Kit is provided to update the
old versions of Audio Capture and Playback Adapters.

Compatibility:  The M - Audio Capture and Playback Adapters do support programs
written for the IBM Speech Adapter (i.e., IBM Writing to Read, Basic Skills,
LinkWay, Primary Editor, Listen to Learn, and other IBM Educational software
requiring the IBM Speech Adapter).  Limitations:  None.  Maximum: One Per
System.  Cable Orders:  Additional cables required for attachment of both audio
input/output devices are the customer's responsibility.  Field Installation:
Yes.  Technical Data:  Audio input and output signals:  Line Level
Input/Output, Microphone Input and Headphone/Speaker Output. Pre-requisites:
IBM Audio Visual Connection Program Product Customer Set-Up:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 404. PERSONAL SYSTEM/2 SPEECH ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  1501216

Feature Code 5002

Bus Master  No

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF SEPTEMBER 11, 1991.)

This adapter allows the user to add voice capability to the 8530 Personal
Computer.  It provides two technologies for speech reproduction:  speech
encoding (speech to data) and decoding (data to speech) using a Continuously
Variable Slope Delta (CVSD) modulation technique, and speech synthesis using
Linear Predictive Coding (LPC).  Non-application-oriented software support
needed to control the Speech Adapter is incorporated into an internal ROM
module.  This adapter requires one expansion slot.  Customer Setup:  Yes.
Limitation:  The Speech Adapter and the 3278/79 Emulation Adapter cannot be
installed in the same system unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 405. MICRO CHANNEL TO MAINFRAME CONNECTION (MMC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  95F1436

Feature Code 1436

POS ID: E014

Bus Master  No

Upstream Bus and Tag cable (with terminator) (#7988, P/N 12G7988)

Downstream Bus and Tag cable (#7993, P/N 12G7993)

78-pin to 78-pin 10-foot cable (#7989, P/N 12G7989)

78-pin to 78-pin 25-foot cable (#7990, P/N 12G7990)

78-pin to 78-pin 40-foot cable (#7991, P/N 12G7991)

78-pin to 78-pin 100-foot cable(#7992, P/N 12G7999)

The IBM PS/2 Micro Channel to Mainframe Connection, when used with appropriate
software, enables the customer to connect a Micro Channel PS/2 directly to a
System/370, System/390, ES/3090 or ES/9000 channel.  Since no communications
protocol is involved, the transfer of data between the two systems can be up to
4.5 megabytes (MB) per second.  Maximum:  A maximum of two MMC adapters can be
installed in a single PS/2.  Up to three MMC adapters can be daisy-chained on
the same internal channel.  Prerequisites:  To install the Micro Channel to
Mainframe Connection (MMC) in a PS/2 you need:

    o   A PS/2 Model 70, 80, 90, 95 or PS/55 with an available 32-bit slot.
    o   A color or monochrome display compatible with the PS/2.
    o   The MMC Option Diskette
    o   A V-cable which connects the MMC Adapter to the IBM Channel Cable
    o   An Upstream bus and tag cable (12G7988)
    o   Installation Instructions

Corequisites:  An application program that supports the MMC adapter is required
for the host system.  Following are some of the application programs that can
be used:

    o   LAN Resource Extension and Services/VM, Program Number 5684-142
    o   LAN Resource Extension and Services/MVS, rogram Number 5965-123
    o   IBM S/370 and S/390 Optical Media Attach/2, Program Number 5621-264
    o   Extended Operations Console Facility, Program Number 5695-067
    o   Workstation Lan File Services VM, Program Number 5684-120
    o   VSE-PS/2 Data Exchange Program Release 2, PRPQ P81081

Customer Set-up:  Yes.  It is recommeded that an IBM Service Representative
attach the MMC cables to the host system internal channel.

Upstream bus and tag cable:  The Upstream bus and tag cable, feature 7988, must
be ordered and installed concurrently with the IBM PS/2 Micro Channel to
Mainframe Connection.  This cable translates the bus/tag serpent connector
coming from the channel to the 78-pin internal cable standard.  This cable is
ordered once per channel and includes an internal channel terminator block.

78-pin to 78-pin Straight cables:  These cables go from 78-pin male to 78-pin
female and are intended to provide flexibility when attaching the MMC Adapter
cards on the channel.  They are used to provide distance between daisy-chained
control units.

Downstream bus and tag cable:  This cable translates the 78-pin internal
channel cable back to the serpent bus and tag connectors.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 406. IBM PS/2 S/370 CHANNEL EMULATOR/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  1674899

Feature Code 3205

POS ID: E014

Bus Master  No

This adapter card and cable for the Micro Channel PS/2 emulates the operation
of an IBM System/370 channel.  When coupled with appropriate software, the
S/370 Channel Emulator/A supports attachment of System/370 channel devices.

Diagnostics are provided with the adapter.  Prerequisite:  Appropriate software
and a full length I/O adapter slot with rear access for cable attachment.
Customer Setup:  Yes.  Limitations:  The S/370 Channel Emulator/A feature may
not work with devices that have stringent turn-around timing requirements.

Highlights:

    Support warranted for connection to the IBM 3820, 3825, 3827, and 3835
    Page Printers via Remote PrintManager Version 3.0.
    Single card adapter for PS/2 Models 50-80.
    Options diskette supports installation, test, and PCFRIEND demonstration
    program.
    Byte multiplexer, block multiplexer, or selector channel protocol may be
    emulated.
    Interlocked and data streaming (3.0 and 4.5M bps) protocols may be
    emulated.
    Hardware support for initial selection and data transfer System/370
    channel sequences.
    On-card 64Kb high speed memory, providing read/write record size of up to
    64Kb.
    Technical reference publication provides the programming interface.

The S/370 Channel Emulator/A adapter, coupled with Remote PrintManager
software, or other appropriate software, permits channel attachment of a 3820,
3825, 3827, or 3835 Page Printer to the 8550, 8555, 8560, 8570, 8573, or 8580
PS/2.

The feature consists of a card, a cable, diskette, and documentation.  The card
occupies a single slot and provides a D-shell connector to an interface cable.
The interface cable is fitted with System/370 BUS and TAG serpentine channel
connectors for connection to the System/370 peripheral device.  The

Installation and Maintenance Supplements include installation instructions,
pages to insert in the PS/2 Maintenance Manual, and an options diskette with
setup diagnostics and a demonstration program called PCFRIEND.

With appropriate software, a System/370 byte multiplexer, block multiplexer, or
selector channel may be emulated.  Both the DC interlocked and data streaming
protocols (3.0 and 4.5M bps) are supported. Under software control, hardware
assistance is available for the initial selection and data transfer channel
sequences.  An on-card buffer of 64Kb is used for the hardware data transfer
sequence.

The S/370 Channel Emulator Technical Reference publication provides the
programming interface which is needed to develop appropriate software to
channel attach other System/370 devices.  The Technical Reference includes
information about both this adapter and the Feature #3200 Personal Computer
adapter which was announced in 1987.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 407. SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE CABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  15F8866

Feature Code 6328

Bus Master  No

This cable is available for use with the Six Port RS-232-C Synchronous
Interface Board (FC 6327).  One end of the cable connects to the 78-pin
connector of the Interface Board.  The other end provides six 25-pin connectors
for attachment of up to six devices.  A wrap connector is provided to test the
cable when using the diagnostics.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 408. IBM PC NETWORK BASEBAND EXTENDER RACK MOUNT KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  1501226

Feature Code 1226

Bus Master  No

Attaches to the 5173 PC Network Baseband Extender and allows the IBM 5173 to be
mounted in a standard 19 inch equipment rack.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 409. 3.5-INCH 720KB DISKETTE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  78X8956

Feature Code 4106

Bus Master  No

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF JUNE 24, 1992)

This feature allows the user to install a second 3.5-inch, 720Kb diskette drive
in a Personal System/2 Model 25 (8525-001, G01, 004, G04).  This drive is
functionally equivalent to #1056, but must be installed in 8525s with Serial
Numbers below 100,000 and/or on which the first drive indicator light is above
the media insertion slot.  Limitation: Cannot be installed with a 20Mb Fixed
Disk Drive (#4107).  Maximum: One.  Field Installation: Yes. Customer Setup:
Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 410. 3.5-INCH 20MB FIXED DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  78X8958

Feature Code 4107

Bus Master  No

This feature allows the user to extend the storage media of all models of the
8525 by providing 3.5-inch 20Mb fixed disk drive function.  The feature
provides a key-locked bezel which disables the keyboard and helps prevent the
unauthorized opening of the electronics drawer.  The drive has a built-in
controller that plugs into a connector on the system board and does not require
the use of an expansion slot on the 8525.

Drive Specifications:

    Specification            Description
    Formatted Capacity           20Mb
    Disk Platters                 2
    Cylinders                   610
    Sectors/Track                17
    Data Bytes                  512
    Data Transfer Rate            5.0M bps
    Average Seek Time            80ms


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 411. SYSTEM BOARD 128KB MEMORY EXPANSION KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  78X8955

Feature Code 4105

Bus Master  No

This feature allows the user to install an additional 128Kb of RAM on the
system board which increases memory from 512Kb to 640Kb.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 412. ENHANCED 5250 EMULATION ADAPTER AND CABLE KIT FOR AS/400 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  30F5622

Feature Code 5622

Bus Master  No

The Enhanced 5250 Emulation Adapter and Cable Kit for the AS/400 provides a new
packaging convenience for customers no longer requiring the 5250 Emulation
Program.  This package contains:  (1) Enhanced 5250 Display Station Emulation
Adapter Kit (which can be (ordered as P/N 30F5383, #2911) and (2) Enhanced 5250
Display Station Emulation Integrated Cable Assembly (which can be ordered as
P/N 6403635, #2877).  This feature does not contain the 5250 Emulation program
but provides, in one package, the hardware required to attach an IBM Personal
System/2 Model 25 or 30, Personal Computer, or Personal Typing System in an
AS/400 system with PC support installed.  PC support enables the user to
download 5250 emulation function code from the host system to the work station.
An "Enhanced 5250 Display Station Emulation Adapter Guide to Operations" manual
(G570-2223, P/N 92X1167) is shipped with this feature.  Additional copies are
available.  Customer Set-up:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 413. PC NETWORK BASEBAND ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  1501221

Feature Code 1221

Bus Master  No

This feature card was specifically designed for connecting the Personal
System/2 Model 25 and 30 to the PC Network Baseband network.  The IBM PC
Network Baseband Adapter supports daisy chain, star, and tree topologies via
the IBM PC Network Baseband Extender (5173).  Work stations can be linked
together in a chain topology with an overall length of up to 200 feet with
eight work stations and up to 300 feet with two work stations.  A chain of work
stations linked to a single Baseband Extender can have an overall length of up
to 500 feet with eight work stations and up to 650 feet when connecting one or
two work stations.  Up to ten daisy chains with eight work stations each can
connect to a single Baseband Extender for a maximum of 80 work stations.
Multiple Baseband Extenders can be connected together to support greater
network distances (up to 2,600 feet from end to end) and more work stations.
This adapter requires one expansion slot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 414. AUDIO CAPTURE AND PLAYBACK ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  34F2784

Feature Code 2784

Bus Master  No

The Audio Capture and Playback Adapter/A has the same function as the Audio
Capture and Playback Adapter and is used with the IBM Personal System/2 Models
50, 55SX, 60, 70, and 80.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 415. VIDEO CAPTURE ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  92F3380

Feature Code 2785

Bus Master  No

The Video Capture Adapter/A provides the capability to capture, display, and
digitize high-quality video images for use in presentations and applications.

The adapter works with standard video input devices, including video cameras
and video cassette recorders (VCRs).  The Video Capture Adapter/A also attaches
to a monitor, which allows the user to view live or capture images during the
capture process.  The adapter is NOT REQUIRED TO RUN PRESENTATIONS containing
the captured images.

Included with the Video Capture Adapter/A is a set of high level functions
designed to facilitate the development of applications for this adapter. This
Video Application Program Interface offers significant savings in programming
effort by grouping many tasks into a single programming call. This reduces the
number of lines of code required for initialization of the adapter. In
addition, this interface code is modular and is divided into two functional
units.  This modularity minimizes the amount of memory overhead required by
this application program interface.

To utilize this interface code the following software prerequisites exist:

    DOS 3.3, 4.0 and 5.0
    OS/2 1.3
    Microsoft Windows 3.0

Limitations:  None.  Maximum:  One per system.  Cable Orders:  The Video
Capture Adapter/A is shipped with a required set of cables.  Additional cables
required for attachment of video input/output devices are the customer's
responsibility.  Technical Data:  Video input and output signal formats:  NTSC
(National Television Standards Code, also known as Composite Video), Y/C
(Luminance/Chrominance, also known as Super VHS) and RGB (Red-Green-Blue).
Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Set-Up:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 416. IBM PS/2 WIZARD ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  64F7351

Feature Code 3462

Bus Master  No

The IBM PS/2 Wizard Adapter is an application accelerator busmaster card for
the PS/2 Models 70 and 80 that significantly increases performance by adding
the Intel i860 64-bit microprocessor for advanced, numeric-intensive
applications.  The i860 processor features a RISC integer core, with an
advanced floating point processing unit, graphics unit, internal instruction
cache, and internal data cache integrated in a single 1-million transistor
chip.  The adapter contains 2Mb of RAM.  IBM PS/2 Wizard Adapter uses a set of
application device drivers, shipped with the product, that enable operation
with IBM Operating System/2 Standard Edition Version 1.1 or 1.2, and IBM
Operating System/2 Advanced Interactive Executive Version 1.2.  The developer's
toolkit (the Intel i860 OS/2 Developer's Tools) has been developed by Intel to
enable application developers to port OS/2 C software for IBM PS/2 Wizard
Adapter.  Also see FC 3461.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 417. IBM PS/2 M-MOTION VIDEO ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  34F3087

Feature Code 3487

Bus Master  No

The M-Motion Video Adapter/A is a PS/2 Micro Channel Adapter Card that allows
Micro Channel PS/2s to display full motion, interactive color video on standard
color PS/2 monitors.  This adapter card also provides full-line audio and
limited digital audio capabilities.  It receives analog signals from an
audio-video source, processes the signals, and sends them to a PS/2 monitor and
speaker.  It supports all existing InfoWindow applications.

This feature produces interactive full motion color video and audio on PS/2
Micro Channel systems, produces windowed video on color PS/2 monitors, and
allows two high quality stereo inputs as well as three NTSC/PAL video inputs or
two Super VHS video inputs.  It also allows recording and playback of narrative
quality audio to and from a DASD device and supports all VGA modes (640 x 480
pels).  It has a multiple connector cable allowing input from audio and video
devices provided and allows computer control of video and audio functions
(i.e., source selection, volume, tone, windowing, color, brightness, hue,
saturation contrast, etc.).

The video portion of the adapter allows the user to input full motion video
images from a variety of sources such as video disk, video cameras, closed
circuit television, or VCR players.  The video input may be captured and stored
within the PS/2 through the use of a utility program.  However, the primary use
of the adapter will be to support interactive full motion applications for
immediate viewing on a color PS/2 display.  A significant function of the
adapter is the mixing of realtime video images with VGA computer graphics
originating from the PS/2 system.

The audio function of the M-Motion Video Adapter/A enables high quality audio
reproduction.  Music, voice, or other sound input to the adapter can be
digitized and stored within the PS/2 system.  Stored digitized audio can be
mixed with up to two standard line-in stereo sources and played as one
narrative quality output.  The adapter accepts input from an attached
microphone, tape recorder, CD player, or any device that will attach to the
standard phono adapter.  The adapter provides output to attached headphones,
speakers, or amplifiers.

Machine Requirements:  A PS/2 Model 50, 55SX, 60, 70, or 80.  Also required is
one available video expansion slot and one 8512 Color Display, 8513 Color
Display, or 8514 Color Display (with or without Display Adapter 8514/A.  Also
required is a 3.5-inch diskette drive (1.4Mb).

Programming Requirements:  The M-Motion Video Adapter/A is designed to operate
with the M Control Program.  Any audio/video authoring and delivery system
interfacing through the M Control Program will be able to use the M-Motion
Video Adapter/A.  Customer Set-up:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 418. IBM PS/2 M-AUDIO CAPTURE AND PLAYBACK ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  92F3379

Feature Code 3909

Bus Master  No

The M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter/A provides the capability to record
and playback high-quality sound.  The adapter works with standard audio input
devices, including microphone, compact disc players and cassette players. The
sound can be played back through a variety of devices, including headphones,
speakers and amplifiers.  The sound can be manipulated and used in high quality
presentations created with the IBM Audio Visual Connection Program Product.

Enhanced software drivers (DOS only) for the M-Audio Capture and Playback
Adapter/A provide compatibility with software that requires the IBM Speech
Adapter.  This enhancement allows the M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter/A to
be used for IBM educational courseware such as IBM Writing to Read, LinkWay,
Basic Skills, and Primary Editor.

Four types of high and low level programming interfaces are also included with
the M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter/A.  These enhancements simplify
authoring by the software developers producing multimedia applications that
take advantage of the capabilities of this adapter.  The availability of this
interface code with the adapter provides the end user with the tools to run
newly developed multimedia applications using these interfaces.  Included are:

1.Windows Multimedia Development Kit Audio Device Driver This code gives
application program developers the ability to write multimedia applications
conforming to Microsoft's Multimedia Development Kit specifications when using
Microsoft Multimedia Extensions.

2.Audio Application Program Interface (AAPI) The AAPI is a set of high level
"C" functions that simplify application program access to the audio and stored
digitized functions of the M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter/A.  Audio
capabilities, such as playing and recording, can be added to applications with
a minimum of effort.

3.Audio Device Drivers The Audio Device Drivers are a set of computer programs
that provide a common audio interface to an application program.  This
eliminates the need for application software developers to write new multimedia
applications specific to the M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter/A.

Unique functions are supported by the above three types of interface code, as
follows:

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM): PCM is a technique for digitizing audio that
provides software developers the ability to create applications for recording
and playing back audio data in multiple formats.  This capability, included in
the AAPI, gives the user the flexibility to record and playback audio data of
varying levels of quality and frequency.  The sound quality and BANDWIDTH
selected dictates the size of the audio data generated.  The Audio Device
Drivers and AAPI included with the M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter/A
support the audio data format specified in the Microsoft Multimedia Development
Kit.

Following is a guide on the approximate file sizes that can be generated using
the Audio Device Drivers or the AAPI:

                                                 Mono
                                              Data Size
    Sample Width         Sampling Rate      (Kilobytes/sec.)
       8-bit            8.000 KS/second            8
       8-bit           11.025 KS/second           11
       8-bit           22.500 KS/second           22
       8-bit           44.100 KS/second           44
      16-bit            8.000 KS/second           16
      16-bit           11.025 KS/second           22
      16-bit           22.500 KS/second           44
      16-bit           44.100 KS/second           88
             KS/second = 1000s samples per second.

Source Mix: The Audio Device Drivers and AAPI offer software developers the
technical capability to mix audio coming in from an analog source, for example,
the analog output of a compact disc player, with PCM audio data and play them
simultaneously using the M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter/A.  Using PCM
with this adapter, software developers have the ability to offer in their
applications, the option to record and playback various sizes of audio data
commensurate with the sound quality and frequency range required.
Additionally, the end user can have the flexibility to mix audio being produced
by any analog input with PCM audio files.

File Format: Two types of audio file formats are supported by the AAPI.  The
Audio Video Connection file format is used to play and record compressed audio
containing audio data that was compressed using an Adaptive Differential Pulse
Code Modulation (ADPCM) technique.  The Microsoft Resource Interchange File
Format Waveform Audio File Format (RIFF WAVE) is used to play and record
uncompressed audio containing Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) data.

Synthesizer: The synthesizer feature, supported by the Windows Device Driver
and included in the AAPI and Audio Device Drivers, offers a software developer
the ability to create an application that can playback MIDI (Musical Instrument
Digital Interface) data when used with the M-Audio Capture and Playback
Adapter/A.  MIDI offers greatly enhanced compression over digitized audio.

The following is a comparison of different audio modes and the amount of
digitized storage calculated for one minute.

               Audio Mode               Data Size
                                       In Kilobytes
                                       (estimated)
    Compact disc 16-bit Stereo            10,500
    16-bit PCM 22.050 KS/sec. - Mono       2,640
    8-bit PCM 11.025 KS/sec. - Mono          660
    Voice - Mono                             330
    MIDI - Stereo                             12 *
    * Note:  MIDI cannot be used to store the human voice.

The synthesizer function on the M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter/A is
characterized as eight note multi-timbral, eight note polyphonic operation, and
has dynamic note allocation.

4.  JPEG Application Program Interface (JPEG API) The Joint Photographics
Expert Group (JPEG), an International Standards Organization (ISO) group, has
established a baseline industry standard, recognized by multimedia application
developers, for the compression and decompression of continuous tone still
images.  JPEG can be used to compress still images to a fraction of the
original size allowing for economical storage or transmission of the image.  It
can later decompress the image, which can then be displayed by an application
program.  The JPEG API offered by IBM meets this standard while taking
advantage of the digital signal processor (DSP) on the M-Audio Capture and
Playback Adapter/A.  It provides developers a fast compression and
decompression function for incorporation into multimedia applications.  This
hardware and software implementation offers a faster solution than would be
possible with software only.

JPEG can be implemented using three methods:

    -  Host only
    -  Host with a digital signal processor
    -  Specialized board

Each mode has performance considerations which are dependent on such things as
the speed of the host processor and the size and type of the image used.

The host only approach could be used by a casual user who does not require fast
performance.  The specialized board approach is typically for animation and for
users who require fast performance.  The IBM JPEG API uses the second mode.  It
uses the digital signal processor on the M-Audio Capture and Playback
Adapter/A, in addition to the 80386 host, and is designed for specific
applications such as the archiving and transmission of images.  This JPEG API
supports all possible JPEG baseline combinations of components and sampling
ratios.

The performance objective for decompression using the IBM JPEG API is on
average less than 10 seconds for the following image:

    Input
    -   Baseline Compressed Image
    -   640 X 480 Image
    -   YUV 4to2to2 Format
    -   Average 16 Bits Per Pixel
    Output
    -   Decompressed YUV 4to2to2 Format
    Depending on the size and type of image used and the processor speed, the
    performance could be slower or faster.

Programming Requirements: To utilize the high and low level interface code
available, the following software prerequisites exist:

    Windows Multimedia Development Kit Audio Device Driver
    -   DOS 3.3, 4.0 and 5.0
    -   Microsoft Windows 3.0
    -   Multimedia Windows Extensions 1.0
    Audio Application Program Interface and Audio Device Drivers
    -   DOS 3.3, 4.0 and 5.0
    -   OS/2 1.3

Program developers writing multimedia applications under Microsoft Windows
Multimedia Extensions will require the Microsoft Multimedia Development Kit. In
addition, the IBM C/2 Version 1.1 or higher or the Microsoft C Professional
Development System Version 6.0 or higher may be required.

Performance: Performance of these enhancements with this adapter is based on
serveral factors relating to the host machine and environment.  These items
include host system speed, channel speed, host processor disk performance(speed
and fragmentation), and memory availability.

Maximum:  One Per System.  Cable Orders:  Additional cables required for
attachment of both audio input/output devices are customer's responsibility.
Field Installation:  Yes.  Technical Data:  Audio input and output signals:
Line Level Input/Output, Microphone Input and Headphone/Speaker Output.
Customer Set-Up:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 419. IBM PS/2 CACHED PROCESSOR OPTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451231

Feature Code 1231

Bus Master  No

This option features the 20MHz IBM 386SLC microprocessor and provides the
capability of processor performance enhancement on the IBM PS/2 Model 8557
family of systems. The option significantly increases system processor
performane in compute intensive applications while providing investment
protection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 420. IBM PS/2 STORE CONTROLLER KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  83X8187

Feature Code 6500

POS ID: EFCF

Bus Master  No

Provides a kit which consists of a Store Loop Adapter/A, Store Loop Cable, and
a Store Controller Ship Group which contains the following:

    4683 Lock Accessory Kit
    4683 Frame Separation Tool
    IBM Store Loop Adapter/A Installation Guide
    IBM 4680 Store System: Terminal Operations Guide
    IBM 4683 Parts Catalogue
    IBM 4680 Store System:  Problem Determination Guide
    IBM 4683 POST:  Maintenance and Technical Reference Manual

The Store Loop Adapter/A provides for the attachment of the PS/2 to the store
loop to control the operation of IBM 4683 Point of Sale Terminals.  The number
of 4683's that can be attached via the Store Loop Adapter/A depends upon
throughput and response time requirements, therefore these requirements should
be reviewed with the user's IBM Marketing Representative.  The adapter contains
two 2,000 character battery protected data buffers to ensure that data is
correctly written to the file before that buffer is released for the next
operation.  The store loop adapter operational speed is 38,400 bps. Maximum:
One kit per PS/2.  Prerequisite:  An Expansion Slot on either a 8560 (-041,
-071), a 8570 (-E61, -121), or a 8580 (-041, -071, -111, or -311) System unit.
Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 421. IBM PS/2 SECOND STORE LOOP ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  83X7575

Feature Code 6701

POS ID: EFCF

Bus Master  No

This adapter provides for the attachment of the PS/2 to the store loop of
another PS/2 Store Controller and in conjunction with the 4680 Operating System
Version 2 will monitor that store loop for Store Controller activity.

When controller inactivity becomes evident, the monitoring Store Controller
will take over control of that store loop.  Users of this "backup" feature
should review their requirements with their IBM Marketing Representative
concerning number of point of sale terminals involved and throughput
requirements.  The adapter has two 2,000 character battery protected data
buffers that ensure that data is correctly written to the file before that
buffer is released for the next operation.  The store loop adapter operational
speed is 38,400 bps.  Maximum:  One per PS/2.  Prerequisite:  An Expansion Slot
on either a 8560 (-041, -071), a 8570 (-E61, -121), or a 8580 (-041, -071,
-111, or -311) system unit.  Store Controller Kit (FC 6500, P/N 83X8187) must
be ordered/installed on this system unit.  Field Installation: Yes.  Customer
Setup:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 422. IBM PS/2 MOUSE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6450350

Feature Code 8770

Bus Master  No

The 2-button Mouse is available for applications that operate more efficiently
using a pointing device.  The Mouse attaches to the system pointing device port
and requires no additional hardware features or external power.  A device
driver is packaged with each Mouse for addition to the operating system.
Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup: Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 423. PS/2 MICRO CHANNEL SCSI ADAPTER WITH CACHE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  6451133

Feature Code 1132

POS ID: 83FF

Bus Master  Yes

The IBM PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache (#1132, P/N 6451133) has a
16.6MB burst transfer rate and an intelligent on board 512KB Cache buffer,
32-bit data and 32 bit address capability and can be installed in either 16 or
32-bit system card slot. It supports internal and external devices that conform
to the ANSI SCSI Standard (X3.131-1986) for single ended devices.

These devices must adhere to the mandatory commands and messages specified in
addendum 4.b, also known as common command set. This adapter has been
redesigned to eliminate the requirement for a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter
External Terminator (#1039, P/N (6451039).  This terminator was previously
required to terminate the SCSI bus at the external port of the adapter, when no
external device was attached.

IBM SCSI adapters require the PS/2 Card to Option Cable (#1140, P/N 6451139) to
attach the first external SCSI device to a Micro Channel SCSI adapter, and the
PS/2 Option to Option Cable (#1042, P/N (6451042), to attach an external SCSI
device to another external SCSI device. The PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter
Option Interface Terminator, included with the PS/2 Card to Option Cable, is a
terminator that is installed on the last SCSI device to terminate the SCSI bus.

The PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache supports the following features:

    o   Attachment of up to seven SCSI physical devices (single ended)
    o   SCSI device dependent logical block size
    o   Multiple block data transfer of up to 65,535 blocks
    o   Allows multiple SCSI initiators for device sharing
    o   Allows disconnect/ reconnect of SCSI targets
    o   Supports synchronous and asynchronous SCSI data transfers
    o   Allows device level copy function
    o   DMA paging control command
    o   LBA (logical block address) architecture
    o   SCSI data transfer rate of up to 5.0MB/sec
    o   On-board ROM BIOS
    o   Supports interrupt sharing
    o   ROM-Resident diagnostics

The card requires +5 volt with a max 1.5 amps, this includes a 900mA allowance
for worst case SCSI bus terminator power.

Standard PS/2 card form factor with external edge connector.  Ambient Air
Temperature:

    Operating temperature:  10C - 35C
    Operating humidity:   8 to 80 percent non-condensing

Maximum:  Four of these cards can be installed per system.  Prerequisites: PS/2
Micro Channel system.  Corequisites:  None.  Compatibility Conflicts: None.
Customer Setup:  Recommend that a Service Representative set up and install
these SCSI devices.  Limitations:  None.  Field Installation:  Yes. Cable
Order:  None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 424. REMOTE TERMINAL INTERFACE (RTI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  05F5505

Feature Code 6078

Bus Master  Yes

The RTI is an adapter that installs in an Industrial Computer (5531, 7531,
7532, 7552) and provides an interface to connect the Industrial Computer to the
7552 through the keyboard port on the 7552.  When the 7552 is configured
without diskette, keyboard, or display, an Industrial Computer configured with
keyboard, display, and diskette is required to be used as a remote terminal to
load programs and to provide operator interface for the 7552. IBM program
product 5601-053 provides program utilities to support the RTI functions.  A
12-foot cable is included with this feature to connect the Industrial Computer
to the 7552.

The RTI should be ordered against the 7552.  When the RTI is to be installed in
an 5531, 7531, or 7532, the RTI should still be ordered against 7552 and with
one of the following specify codes to indicate the Industrial Computer in which
it will be installed:

    o   #6221 for IBM 5531 Industrial Computer
    o   #6222 for IBM 7531 or 7532 Industrial Computer
    o   #6223 for IBM 7552


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 425. IBM ASYNCHRONOUS/SDLC V.32 MODEM/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  93F0973

Feature Code 0960

POS ID: DDCD

Bus Master  No

The IBM Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A combines most of the function of the IBM
Multi-protocol Communication Adapter(MPA) card and the IBM 7855 modem into a
single internal card.

The MPA portion of the card uses the 8273 and 16550 communication chips so
asynchronous and SDLC/SNA/HDLC communication application programs should not
have to change to accommodate the IBM Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A. The IBM
Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A does not support the Bisync function and has its
own POS ID.  Synchronous direct memory access (DMA) is supported just like the
MPA card.

The modem portion of the IBM Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A functions much like
the IBM 7855 modem.  The top data rate for asynchronous data is 19,200 bps.
The top data rate for synchronous data and for asynchronous data that the modem
can not compress is 12,000 bps.  These data rates can be achieved for 2 wire
switched network and 2 or 4 wire point-to-point leased lines.  The IBM
Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A also supports today's popular slower speeds such
as 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, and 0-300 bps as specified in V.32, V.32
bis, V.22 bis, V.22, Bell 212, Bell 103, and V.21.  Its top telco line speed of
12,000 bps is compatible with V.32 bis modems.

In asynchronous mode, the IBM Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A is V.42
compatible, provides error correction and data transmission according to the
Microcom Networking Protocol (MNP(1)) class 4, and provides data compression
capability according to the MNP class 5.

When on leased lines, according to the configuration setting, in case of line
failure, the 7855 can dial automatically on the switched network, providing a
backup transmission at the same performance level as was previously provided on
the leased line, depending on the availability of equivalent quality line.
During the backup switched line operation, the modem has the ability to check
the failed leased line and is able to return to leased line operation after the
line is repaired.

The parameter settings of the modem can be modified from the front panel of a
remote 7855 modem, or from the local or remote system units.  The modem can be
set to automatically increase or decrease its telephone line speed to optimize
data throughput.  With some systems such modem speed changes are invisible.
The IBM Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A is certified for use as a class B device
by US FCC.

Corequisite: One of the following cables:

    o   4 wire leased-line cable - #6661 - P/N 93F0975
    o   RJ 11 switched cable     - #6662 - P/N 93F0976
    o   RJ 45 switched cable     - #6663 - P/N 93F0977

Maximum number of features: Two.  Field Installation: Yes.  Customer Setup:
Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 426. 2MB EXPANDED MEMORY ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  2685193

Feature Code 3905

Bus Master  No

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of September 11, 1991.)

Provides 2Mb of Expanded Memory function and a Standard Parallel Printer Port
for the Personal System/2 Model 30.  The 2Mb Expanded Memory Adapter supports
the device drivers resident within the 3270 Work Station program V1.0 or 1.1
which provide application programs with expanded memory support, an "EMS"
interface, and up to two PC DOS virtual disk interfaces.  The "EMS" is the
Expanded Memory Specification issued by Lotus, Intel and MICRO-SOFT.

The 2Mb Expanded Memory Adapter may be installed in any full-length slot of a
Personal System/2 Model 30.

The 2Mb Expanded Memory Adapter will backfill conventional memory from the
256Kb address to the 640Kb address.  It is not necessary to use separate memory
modules or cards for this purpose.  The remainder of the adapter memory will be
available for the "Expanded Memory Specification" function.

Up to two PC DOS virtual disk applications may run under "Expanded Memory
Specification".  The 2Mb Expanded Memory Adapter may be apportioned to the
virtual disk and other "Expanded Memory Specification" application programs in
16Kb increments.  The 3270 Work Station program V1.0 or 1.1 contain drivers.
These "Expanded Memory Specification" device driver programs provide a set of
standard routines that allow applications to access memory on the adapter (up
to 2Mb) through four 16Kb pages within the IBM Personal Computer address space.
Customer Setup:  Yes.  Limitations:  One 2Mb Expanded Memory Adapter.  Field
Installation:  Yes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 427. IBM CABLING SYSTEM LOBE ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F5501

Feature Code 5501

Bus Master  No

Provides IBM Cabling System attachment for from 0 to 20 workstations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 428. OPTICAL FIBER CONVERTER MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F5503

Feature Code 5503

Bus Master  No

Provides attachment for the base unit onto a optical fiber ring path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 429. 4 MBPS MEDIA FILTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  53F5551

Feature Code 5551

Bus Master  No

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF JULY 21, 1992)

Filters signals and allows 4 Mbps transmission on unshielded telephone twisted
pair cable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 430. RJ-45 LOBE ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  74F4040

Feature Code 5502

Bus Master  No

Provides attachment for from 0 to 20 workstations with RJ-45 connectors.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 431. IBM FDDI FIBER BASE ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  93F0345

Feature Code 0345

Bus Master  Yes

The IBM FDDI Workstation Adapters are used to attach models of the PS/2 and
Industrial Computer family of products to a 100Mbps FDDI network.  Models
supported are: 8570, 8580, 8590, 8595, 7561, 7562.  Maximum:  Two adapters per
machine, with an additional slot left vacant for power consumption reasons.
Prerequisites: None.  Corequisites: None.  Compatibility Conflicts: None.
Customer Setup: Yes.  Field Installable: Yes.  Cable Order: A variety of
customer orderable cables may be used with these adapters.  Consult the "IBM
Cabling System Optical Fiber Planning and Installation Guide", GA27-3943, and
the "IBM FDDI Network Planning and Installation Guide", GA27-3892 for details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 432. IBM FDDI FIBER EXTENDER ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  93F0346

Feature Code 0346

Bus Master  Yes

The IBM FDDI Workstation Adapters are used to attach models of the PS/2 and
Industrial Computer family of products to a 100Mbps FDDI network.  Models
supported are: 8570, 8580, 8590, 8595, 7561, 7562.  Maximum:  Two adapters per
machine, with an additional slot left vacant for power consumption reasons.
Prerequisites: None.  Corequisites: None.  Compatibility Conflicts: None.
Customer Setup: Yes.  Field Installable: Yes.  Cable Order: A variety of
customer orderable cables may be used with these adapters.  Consult the "IBM
Cabling System Optical Fiber Planning and Installation Guide", GA27-3943, and
the "IBM FDDI Network Planning and Installation Guide", GA27-3892 for details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 433. IBM FDDI COPPER BASE ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  93F0347

Feature Code 0347

Bus Master  Yes

The IBM FDDI Workstation Adapters are used to attach models of the PS/2 and
Industrial Computer family of products to a 100Mbps FDDI network.  Models
supported are: 8570, 8580, 8590, 8595, 7561, 7562.  Maximum:  Two adapters per
machine, with an additional slot left vacant for power consumption reasons.
Prerequisites: None.  Corequisites: None.  Compatibility Conflicts: None.
Customer Setup: Yes.  Field Installable: Yes.  Cable Order: A variety of
customer orderable cables may be used with these adapters.  Consult the "IBM
Cabling System Optical Fiber Planning and Installation Guide", GA27-3943, and
the "IBM FDDI Network Planning and Installation Guide", GA27-3892 for details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 434. IBM FDDI COPPER EXTENDER ADAPTER/A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  93F0348

Feature Code 0348

Bus Master  Yes

The IBM FDDI Workstation Adapters are used to attach models of the PS/2 and
Industrial Computer family of products to a 100Mbps FDDI network.  Models
supported are: 8570, 8580, 8590, 8595, 7561, 7562.  Maximum:  Two adapters per
machine, with an additional slot left vacant for power consumption reasons.
Prerequisites: None.  Corequisites: None.  Compatibility Conflicts: None.
Customer Setup: Yes.  Field Installable: Yes.  Cable Order: A variety of
customer orderable cables may be used with these adapters.  Consult the "IBM
Cabling System Optical Fiber Planning and Installation Guide", GA27-3943, and
the "IBM FDDI Network Planning and Installation Guide", GA27-3892 for details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 435. IBM 8240 FDDI CONCENTRATOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM 8240 Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Concentrator and two device
attachment modules attach up to 24 devices to a 100 megabits per second (Mbps)
network.  These devices may be on either the IBM Cabling System's shielded
twisted pair (STP) or on multimode optical fiber.  It is modular in design and
provides an orderly way to install, grow, and maintain an FDDI network while
providing greater bandwidth than is offered by existing local area networks
(LANs) such as Token-Ring and Ethernet.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   "Plug and Play" for easy installation and maintenance
    o   Supports the PS/2* FDDI adapters on both fiber and shielded twisted-pair
        cables.  The 8240 also supports the RISC/6000 fiber adapter announced
        January 21, 1992.
    o   "Hot pluggability", which allows for device expansion and improved
        network availability.  In addition, you can mix and match the Optical
        Fiber Device Attachment Modules and the Copper Device Attachment Modules.
    o   Standards-based SMT 6.2, American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
        X3T9.5 and International Standards Organization (ISO) 9314, for
        interoperability within a multi-vendor network.
    o   Includes a Maintenance Facility that provides device customization,
        Remote Program Update, and LAN segment topology via a user-friendly
        graphical interface.  Also included is an FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent Program
        which is supported by the AIX Netview/6000 network management system.

The 8240 is a "Plug and Play" concentrator that allows customers to be
productive quickly and easily on a high-performance 100Mbps FDDI network.
Further customization is achieved by a user-friendly Maintenance Facility which
also provides a graphical user interface to display all of the devices attached
to the 8240 and to the FDDI segment.

Customers can now achieve increased bandwidth along with higher network
availability than existing LANs such as Token-Ring and Ethernet.  Customers can
also easily migrate servers and requestors individually to a 100Mbps networking
environment.

The technology within the 8240 provides improvement of network availability as
a result of automatic reconfiguration of the network.  When a network link
failure occurs, the problem can automatically be isolated, bypassed, and
reported, and quickly repaired, resulting in less network downtime.

The 8240 is both versatile and robust.  As a stand-alone device, it can be used
to create a small, dedicated, high-performance LAN for specialized communities
of users or for a network test bed.  As the number of users grows, integration
into the FDDI network is achieved via easy-to-install device attachment
modules.

As a backbone unit within an FDDI establishment network, the 8240 can be used
to attach high-performance workstations and other devices such as FDDI to
Token-Ring and FDDI to Ethernet bridges.  The FDDI network thus provides a
migration for additional growth and capacity for new users and applications
along with greater drive distance for LAN extension.  Here, too,
easy-to-install attachment modules allow the customer the flexibility to grow
and maintain the network.

Customers can keep their investment in their current workstations and devices
while using the IBM Cabling System with IBM adapters and the 8240.  The 8240
provides ease of expandability and flexibility of attaching copper and fiber
media to the workstation.  Since FDDI supports industry-standard applications
and protocols such as IEEE 802.2, customers can also easily migrate their
current applications to a 100Mbps FDDI network.  In addition, widely used
protocols such as Novell are also supported.

The 8240 is based on the ANSI FDDI Station Management (SMT) 6.2 standard, thus
providing connection and operation in a 100Mbps FDDI network with
standard-based equipment from other vendors.  The 8240 allows the customer to
configure the network into subnetworks for specific applications such as
transaction processing.  With the improved network availability achieved as a
result of automatic network reconfiguration, downtime can be reduced and
problems can be isolated and repaired more quickly, without impacting overall
network operations.

The 8240 can operate as a dual-attached, single-attached, or dual-homed
concentrator.  As a dual-attached concentrator, it can be attached to a primary
and secondary ring.  The primary ring transmits the data, while the secondary
ring provides backup for the primary ring.  FDDI also provides the capability
to structure primary and alternate path connections to attaching devices such
as the 8240, improving the overall reliability, availability, and
serviceability of the network.  It allows the construction of hierarchical
topologies by "cascading" several levels deep and by "dual homing" (i.e.,
attaching an 8240 to each of two other 8240s) to provide optimum network
availability in case of a bypassed network failure. Diagnostic information is
also provided automatically both at the 8240 front panel and at the Maintenance
Facility workstation to enable the user to better maintain and manage the 8240.

Network management will be provided via an FDDI Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) Proxy Agent Program.  This agent will convert SMT to SNMP
protocols for use by AIX Netview/6000 or any original equipment manufacturer
(OEM) SNMP-based network management system.  The SMT protocol will be based on
SMT 6.2, and the Maintenance Facility will provide Remote Program Update
capability for 8240 support of future levels of SMT.

IBM intends to provide an FDDI LAN Management application on AIX NetView/6000
for graphical display of topology information provided by the IBM FDDI SNMP
Proxy Agent Program.  This application will allow the user to see changes and
initiate management functions dynamically.

MODEL 001 For U.S. non-Federal Government and World Trade and includes the main
chassis assembly, one Concentrator Control Module and six Slot Covers.

MODEL 002 Same as Model 001 except for use by the U.S. Federal Government.

The 8240 is designed for Customer Setup (CSU).  Two persons are required to
install the 8240.

The IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator will allow workstations and other FDDI devices
to attach to a 100Mbps network.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Width:  482.6 mm (19.0 inches)
    Depth:  442.0 mm (17.4 inches)
    Height: 443.7 mm (17.5 inches)
    Weight:
        25.0 kg (56.0 pounds) without modules
        50.0 kg (112.0 pounds) fully configured
    Temperature:  10 to 40C (50 to 104F)
    Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent
    Wet Bulb:  27C
    Calorific Value:  688 kcal/hour or 2,730 Btu/hour
    Electrical Power:  0.8 kVA
    Capacity of Exhaust:  2.8 cubic meters/minute
    Noise Level:  <70 dB

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS The Concentrator Control Module (Part Number 02F9703) is
shipped with each 8240.  The Ring Attachment Module (Feature Number 9773) must
be ordered to provide multimode connection to the FDDI network.  For
workstation attachment to the 8240, order either the Optical Fiber Device
Attachment Module (Feature Number 9783) or the Copper Device Attachment Module
(Feature Number 9793).

Each attachment module provides connection for four devices.  The 8240 can
accommodate any combination of up to six 9783 or 9793 attachment modules for a
total of twenty-four connections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 436. RING ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  02F9773

Feature Code 9773

Bus Master  No

This feature is required for the 8240 and provides multimode attachment to the
FDDI network.  Compatibility Conflicts:  None.  Customer Setup:  Yes.
Limitations:  Consult the "IBM FDDI Network Introduction and Planning Guide,"
(GA27-3892) for wiring rules.  Field Installable: Yes.  Cable Order:  Consult
the "Optical Fiber Planning and Installation Guide," (GA27-3943).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 437. OPTICAL FIBER DEVICE ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  02F9783

Feature Code 9783

Bus Master  No

FC 9783 and FC 9793 function the same, except for the media in which they
connect.  Each Device Attachment Module has four FDDI master ports for
attachment of up to four devices.  The 8240 supports any combination of up to
six Optical Fiber or Copper Device Attachment Modules for a total of
twenty-four devices attached to the FDDI network.  Compatibility Conflicts:
None.  Customer Setup:  Yes.  Limitations:  Consult the "IBM FDDI Network
Introduction and Planning Guide," (GA27-3892) for wiring rules.  Field
Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  Consult the "Optical Fiber Planning and
Installation Guide," (GA27-3943).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 438. COPPER DEVICE ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  02F9793

Feature Code 9793

Bus Master  No

FC 9783 and FC 9793 function the same, except for the media in which they
connect.  Each Device Attachment Module has four FDDI master ports for
attachment of up to four devices.  The 8240 supports any combination of up to
six Optical Fiber or Copper Device Attachment Modules for a total of
twenty-four devices attached to the FDDI network.  Compatibility Conflicts:
None.  Customer Setup:  Yes.  Limitations:  Consult the "IBM FDDI Network
Introduction and Planning Guide," (GA27-3892) for wiring rules.  Field
Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  Consult the "Optical Fiber Planning and
Installation Guide," (GA27-3943).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 439. IBM 16/4 8230 UNSHIELDED MEDIA FILTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  93F2976

Feature Code 2976

Bus Master  No

One 16/4 8230 Unshielded Media Filter is required on all 8230s that have a
workstation attached via Unshielded Twisted Pair Media that is operating at 16
or 4 Mbps. The filter reduces EM emissions to levels that are acceptable under
national emissions regulations.  Maximum Number of Features: One per 8230 base
unit.  Prerequisites: For Family One Adapters an updated copy of the Diagnostic
Diskette and for Family Two Adapters an updated copy of the Options Diskette.
Corequisites: None.  Compatibility Conflicts: None. Customer Set-up: Yes.
Limitations: None.  Field Installable: Yes.  Cable Order: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 440. IBM 16/4 UNSHIELDED MEDIA LOBE ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  74F4125

Feature Code 4125

Bus Master  No

The purpose of this feature is to provide attachment to the token-ring network
of any device with a 16 or 4 Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter via an RJ-11
connector. This new feature will allow operation of 16 Mbps on Unshielded
Twisted Pair (UTP) Media with more flexibility of cabling options than with the
current RJ-45 Lobe Attachment Module (LAM).  Corequisites:  The 8230 Model 002
base unit.  The 16/4 Mbps UTP Media Filters are required on their appropriate
devices when using this feature.  Compatibility Conflicts: This feature cannot
be used on the same 8230 base unit with an existing Shielded Twisted Pair (STP)
or RJ-45 LAM.  Customer Set-up:  Yes. Cable Order:  The required cables are
hard wired to the Lobe Attachment Module.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 441. FUTURE DOMAIN TMC-850IBM SCSI ADAPTER KITS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  37G0080

Feature Code 3780

Bus Master  No

The Future Domain(1) TMC-850IBM SCSI Adapter Kits provide an interface to PS/2
SCSI options.  The Future Domain Internal SCSI Adapter Kit (#3780, P/N
37G0080), External SCSI adapter kit (#3781, P/N 37G0081), and External cable
kit with terminator (#3782, P/N 37G0082) provide customers a way to connect IBM
PS/2 Models 25, 25 286, 25 SX, 30 286, 35 SX, 40 SX, PS/1 Model 386SX, PS/1
PRO, and the IBM 7537 Industrial Computer to IBM's SCSI 80MB Disk Drive, SCSI
160MB Disk Drive, SCSI 320MB Disk Drive, SCSI 400MB Disk Drive, PS/2 CD-ROM
Drive, PS/2 CD-ROM II Drive, and SCSI 3.5-inch Rewritable Optical Drive.
Software drivers are included with each adapter kit to provide device support.
A SCSI diagnostic utility is also included.  The Future Domain TMC-850IBM SCSI
Adapter Kits are manufactured exclusively for IBM by Future Domain Corporation.

Customers will realize growth opportunities with the Future Domain SCSI Adapter
Kits in many ways:

    o   Provides the ability to attach IBM CD-ROM and IBM CD-ROM II technology
        for utilizing high-capacity compact discs.
    o   Provides the ability to attach IBM 3.5-inch Rewritable Optical drives for
        greater storage capacity and data back-up.
    o   Provides the ability to connect additional SCSI Fixed Disk Drives with
        reasonable performance.
    o   Provides flexibility when connecting SCSI options to a system unit by
        allowing attachment internal, external or both.
    o   Provides expanded growth capabilities by operating in DOS and OS/2
        environments.

The Future Domain TMC-850IBM SCSI Adapter Kits provide users with a business
solution to storage requirements.  With the ability to connect to CD ROM drives
and the IBM Rewritable Optical drives, users will be able to run a greater
number of applications that take advantage of that type of media.

The Future Domain TMC-850IBM SCSI Adapter Kits should be offered to those
customers who require a supported IBM SCSI option to be attached to an IBM PS/2
non-Micro Channel or AT BUS systems.  The Future Domain TMC-850IBM SCSI
Adapters offer functional advantages by supporting a wide range of IBM SCSI
Options.  The enhanced functions provide additional SCSI capabilities that
allow for the attachment of SCSI devices such as the IBM 3.5-inch Rewritable
Optical Drive in addition to CD-ROM drives.  The TMC-850IBM Adapter is an 8 bit
card which can also be attached to other IBM SCSI Fixed Disk Drives for
increased capacity.

The following publications are shipped with the product.

    TMC-850IBM SCSI Adapter Kit User's Guide
    TMC-850IBM Options Diskette Users Guide
    TMC-850IBM Cable Installation Guide

Physical Specifications:

    o   8 bit SCSI adapter card:
            Width:  100mm (4.2 inches)
            Height:  80mm (3.2 inches)
            Weight:   4 oz.
    o   External cable:
            HCA-120 25-pin DSUB to 50 pin SCSI (35 inches).
    o   Internal cable:
            50-pin to 50-pin SCSI ribbon cable (36 inches).
    o   Terminator:
            50-pin external SCSI terminator.
    Electrical power: +5V, 2.1W typical, 2.5W maximum, excluding TERMPWR

The TMC-850IBM SCSI Adapter supports up to five IBM SCSI option devices per
adapter and as many as two adapters per machine may be installed.  Total cable
length should not exceed 10 feet.  The TMC-850IBM SCSI Adapter can be installed
the IBM PS/2 Models 25, 25 286, 25 SX, 30, 35, 40 (all models), IBM PS/1 (all
models), and the IBM 7537 Industrial Computer (all models).  Note: Some IBM
PS/1's require addition of PS/1 expansion unit.

The following operating systems support the Future Domain TMC-850IBM Adapter:

    o   Disk Operating Systems Version 3.3 and above
    o   OS/2 SE and OS/2 EE Version 1.30.2 and above (A)
    o   OS/2 Version 2.0
    o   Windows 3.0.

(A) When attaching to the IBM Rewritable Optical Drive, OS/2 2.0 or above and
DOS Version 5.0 or above must be used.

The Future Domain TMC-850IBM SCSI adapter kits will support the following IBM
SCSI options:

    o   SCSI 80MB Fixed Disk Drive
    o   SCSI 160MB Fixed Disk Drive
    o   SCSI 320MB Fixed Disk Drive
    o   SCSI 400MB Fixed Disk Drive
    o   IBM CD-ROM Drive
    o   IBM CD-ROM II Drive
    o   IBM 3.5-inch Rewritable Optical Drive
    o   3510 External SCSI Enclosure.

Customer Setup:  Yes.  Cables:  The TMC-850IBM External SCSI Adapter Kit
(#3781, 37G0081) includes an external HCA-120 25-pin DSUB cable designed for
installations of external SCSI options.  A 50-pin SCSI device-termination plug
is also included.  The TMC-850IBM Internal SCSI Adapter Kit (#3780, 37G0080)
includes a 50-pin SCSI ribbon cable.  The Future Domain External Cable and
Terminator Kit (#3782, 37G0082) need only be ordered if a customer is
installing the Internal TMC-850IBM SCSI Adapter Kit and wants to also add
external SCSI options. (1) Registered trademark of Future Domain Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 442. 5178 PC NETWORK TRANSLATOR UNIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODEL 001 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF FEBRUARY 17, 1993.)

The 5178 PC Network Broadband Translator Unit is a frequency translator that is
required  (one per network) on each PC Network.  This broadband network
provides simultaneous two-way communications between devices (nodes), each
connected to the network through a single coaxial cable.  The PC Network
transmits and receives data at different frequencies.  The Translator Unit
consists of a Frequency Translator and either a 120V or a 230V Transformer.

Each node on the network sends information at 50.75 MHz to the Frequency
Translator through the cabling system.  The Frequency Translator transmits this
information back to the nodes at a frequency 219.0 MHz.  The Transformer
provides power to the Frequency Translator.

The IBM PC Network is a low cost broadband local area network that allows
peer-to-peer communication among IBM Personal Computer XTs, and IBM Personal
Computer ATs in a shared resource environment.  The IBM PC Network includes the
IBM PC Network Translator Unit, IBM PC Network Adapters, and IBM PC Network
Cabling Components.  Programming support is provided by the IBM PC Network
Program.  (See Programming Announcements 284-293 and 184-100.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 443. 4869 PERSONAL SYSTEM/2 5.25-INCH EXTERNAL DISKETTE DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 4869 Personal System/2 5.25-Inch External Diskette Drive enhances the
Personal System/2 line by making available an external diskette drive that uses
the 5.25-inch diskette media.

The 4869 allows users to transfer data files and execute programs that follow
DOS and BIOS procedures from 5.25-inch media.  The 4869 is a replacement for
drive B and operates in the same fashion as an IBM system drive B.

MODEL 001

The 4869 does not support 1.2Mb 5.25-inch diskette media or diskettes prepared
on 1.2Mb drives even when a 360Kb format is used.  The 4869 has a maximum
formatted capacity of 360K bytes per diskette.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Can be used for data storage and/or program execution.
    o   Same standard functions as the 3.5-inch diskette drive (format, read, and
        write).
    o   Data transfer rate is 250Kb per second.
    o   Access speed is 6ms; track to track.
    o   Head settle time is 15ms.

STANDARD FEATURES The 4869 has the following standard features:

    o   One 5.25-inch 360Kb diskette drive (half-high)
    o   Universal power supply (Auto-sensing for line frequency and voltage)
    o   One-year warranty
    o   Supports features internally installed as drive B for the 8530-021, 8550,
        8560, and 8580 systems.

Prerequisites:  Model 001- #8750 (P/N 6450244) or #8760 (P/N 6450245); an
available expansion slot and an open B drive position; or #1007 (P/N 6451007)
and an available I/O slot.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    Width:  227mm (8.94 in.)
    Depth:  408mm (16.06 in.)
    Height:  62.5mm (2.46 in.)
    Weight:  4.6kg (10 lbs.)

MODEL 2  002

The IBM Personal System/2* 5.25-Inch External Diskette Drive, 4869-002, is an
external 5.25-inch 1.2Mb diskette drive unit for attachment to the IBM Personal
System/2 8550, 8560, 8570, and 8580 System units.  It provides a method for the
users to transfer data files and execute programs that follow DOS and BIOS
procedures from 5.25 inch media when attached to the 3.5 inch diskette equipped
systems.

IBM Personal System/2 5.25-Inch Internal Diskette Drive feature is an internal
5.25-inch 1.2Mb diskette drive for the IBM Personal System/2 8560 and 8580
System units.  It provides a method for the users to transfer data files and
execute programs that follow DOS and BIOS procedures from 5.25-inch media when
installed in the system unit.

IBM Personal System/2 5.25-Inch Diskette Adapter/A feature is an adapter card
that attaches either the 4869-001, 002 or the IBM Personal System/2 5.25-Inch
Internal Diskette Drive feature to the using system. *Personal System/2 and
PS/2 are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Can be used for data storage and/or program execution
    o   Same standard functions as the 3.5-inch diskette drive (format, read and
        write)
    o   Data transfer rate is 500Kb per second high-density mode; 300Kb per
        second low-density mode
    o   Access speed is 3 ms, track to track
    o   Head settle time is 15 ms

STANDARD FEATURES:

    o   One 5.25-inch 1.2Mb diskette drive (half-high)
    o   Universal Power supply (Auto-sensing for line frequency and voltage)
    o   One year warranty

Prerequisites: IBM Personal System/2 5.25-Inch Diskette Adapter/A (#1007) and a
3.5-inch diskette equipped 8550, 8560, 8570 or 8580 system unit with an
available I/O slot. Compatibility: The 4869-002 is compatible with the IBM
Personal System/2 8550, 8560, 8570 and 8580 system units.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Width:  227mm (8.94 in.)
    Depth:  408mm (16.06 in.)
    Height: 62.5mm (2.46 in.)
    Weight: 4.6kg (10 lbs)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 444. 8230 IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK CONTROLLER ACCESS UNIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit is an intelligent access
concentrator which allows connection of from 0 to 80 workstations, via
pluggable lobe attachment modules (LAMS), to a Token-Ring Network. The LAMs
come in two versions, one accepts IBM Cabling System (ICS) connectors and the
other accepts RJ-45 connectors. The 8230 is switchable between 16 and 4
megabits per second (Mbps) and has a media access control (MAC) appearance on
both the main and backup rings. The 8230 is shipped with copper main ring
modules and can be upgraded to fiber by plugging in the Optical Fiber Converter
Module Feature.  The 8230 functions as a repeater in both directions.  The 8230
will be purchased by customers desiring higher ring availability, via automatic
reconfiguration, and better access control and asset management. The 8230, in
most cases, will also allow for longer lobe lengths than the 8228. The
following lobe lengths will be possible:

    o   4 Mbps Data Grade Media (DGM):  375 meters
    o   16 Mbps Data Grade Media (DGM):  145 meters
    o   4 Mbps Unshielded Telephone Twisted Pair (UTP):  100 meters (UTP that
        meets or exceeds IBM Cabling System Type 3 Media Specification)
    o   Systems management is improved by:
        -   Automatic wrap/reconfiguration of failing ring segment, a failing
            lobe, a LAM of the 8230 or the entire 8230.
        -   LAN Network Manager directed wrap reconfiguration of failing ring
            segment
        -   Support of LAN Network Manager's configuration table
        -   Support of LAN Network Manager's access and asset control.
        -   User interface LEDs and two character hexadecimal error code display
            provide power status, wrap state, 8230 status and insertion state of
            each LAM.
    o   User productivity is enhanced by:
        -   The network being available more often because of reconfiguration
        -   LAN Network Manager's configuration table allowing better use of
            resources.
    o   Power supply meets worldwide requirements

The 8230's ability to wrap out a failure automatically, or upon direction from
LAN Network Manager, in the physical wire or optical fiber cable, a failing
lobe, a failing LAM or the entire 8230, improves the network's availability.

The 8230's support of the LAN Network Manager's configuration table provides
the adapter address, 8230 number, LAM number and lobe number to the LAN
Administrator, so that a particular workstation can be quickly located for
asset control or if there is a problem that requires maintenance or other
attention.

The 8230's support of the LAN Network Manager's access control allows an 8230
port to be disabled via direction from the LAN Network Manager, thus insuring
that only authorized users are allowed on the network.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

    o   The IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit attachment
        connectors will support either IBM Cabling System, (ICS), or unshielded
        telephone twisted pair, (UTP), as follows:
        -   The Lobe Attachment Module comes in two versions:
            --  Connections for ICS
            --  Connections for RJ-45
            In either case 4 Mbps transmission only is supported when using UTP
    o   The IBM 8230 base will function as a repeater in both directions and will
        have no lobe connections
    o   From one to four lobe attachment modules, each containing twenty lobe
        connectors can be added to the base unit.
    o   There will be a media filter allowing 4 Mbps transmission over UTP.
    o   One power supply meets worldwide requirements.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    o   Base Unit:
            Width:  483 mm (19.0 inches)
            Depth:  260 mm (10.25 inches)
            Height: 133 mm (5.25 inches)
            Weight: 6.8 kg (15 lb)
    o   Lobe Attachment Module (ICS):
            Width:  483 mm (19.0 inches)
            Depth:  190 mm (7.48 inches)
            Height: 133 mm (5.23 inches)
            Weight: 3.6 kg (7.9 lb)
    o   Lobe Attachment Module (RJ-45):
            Width:  483 mm  (19.0 inches)
            Depth:  190 mm  (7.48 inches)
            Height: 89 mm   (3.50 inches)
            Weight: 3.2 kg  (7.0 lb)

The IBM 8230 implements a subset of the LAN Station Manager function and is
dependent on the LAN Network Manager for full function.  The station manager
function allows the LAN Network Manager to determine the physical location of
workstations.  The 8230 may reside on a ring that also has 8228s, 8218s, 8219s,
and 8220s. The 8218s, 8219s and 8220s must be operating as repeater pairs. The
8230 will not operate as one half of a repeater pair with these products.  The
maximum number of workstations capable of being attached to an 8230 is 80.

The configuration reporting functions of the IBM 8230 are not compatible with
any of the following devices when such devices are attached to any lobes of the
IBM 8230 Lobe Attachment Modules. The devices will cause these IBM 8230
functions to provide invalid or incorrect data to the IBM LAN Network Manager.

The devices are:

    o   Adapters that do not participate in normal Token Ring protocols, such as
        the neighbor notification process.
    o   Fanout devices which attach more than one adapter to a single lobe.

The IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit will require either a
LAN Network Manager or the IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit
Maintenance Facility for maintenance purposes. The maintenance facility will be
shipped with each 8230.  The maintenance facility is for diagnostics and
control and remote program updates in the absence of LAN Network Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 445. 8230 IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK CONTROLLER ACCESS UNIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Unshielded Media Lobe Attachment Module is an
active LAM and is used to connect adapters operating at 16 megabits/second (16
Mbps) or 4 Mbps on Unshielded Twisted Pair Media to the main ring via the 8230
Model 002. This active combination provides customers with more cabling options
to meet their networking needs, including Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) and
Unshielded Twisted Pair Media. The 8230 Model 002 and the 16/4 Unshielded Media
Lobe Attachment Module (LAM) are used in conjunction with the 16/4 Mbps UTP
Media Filters.

The 8230 Model 002 is functionally and electrically equivalent to the Model 001
with the exception of the power supply which has an increased capacity
necessary to support up to four 16/4 LAMs.

The IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit is an intelligent access
concentrator which allows connection of from 0 to 80 workstations, via
pluggable lobe attachment modules (LAMs), to a Token-Ring Network. The LAMs
come in three versions, the LAM which accepts IBM Cabling System (ICS)
connectors, the RJ-45 LAM which accepts RJ-45 connectors and the 16/4 UTP LAM,
which accepts RJ-45 connectors and has active reclocking and retiming hardware.
The 8230 is switchable between 16 and 4 megabits per second (Mbps) and has a
media access control (MAC) appearance on both the main and backup rings. The
8230 is shipped with copper main ring modules and can be upgraded to fiber by
plugging in the Optical Fiber Converter Module Feature.  The 8230 functions as
a repeater in both directions.  The 8230 will be purchased by customers
desiring higher ring availability, via automatic reconfiguration, and better
access control and asset management. The 8230, in most cases, will also allow
for longer lobe lengths than the 8228. The following lobe lengths will be
possible:

    o   4 Mbps Data Grade Media (DGM):  375 meters
    o   16 Mbps Data Grade Media (DGM):  145 meters
    o   4 Mbps Unshielded Telephone Pair (UTP):  100 meters (UTP that meets or
        exceeds IBM Cabling System Type 3 Media Specification or EIA/TIA
        categories 3, 4 and 5)
    o   16 Mbps Unshielded Twisted Pair Media:  100 meters (UTP that meets or
        exceeds EIA/TIA Categories 4 and 5), 90 meters (UTP that meets or exceeds
        EIA/TIA Category 3).

Additional highlights to the Model 001 are:

    o   Increases user productivity by allowing quicker availability of
        information and better utilization of resources.
    o   Enhances growth potential by providing customers more cabling options and
        flexibility to meet their networking needs including STP and Unshielded
        Twisted Pair.
    o   Protects a customer's investment by providing more cabling options and
        flexibility to meet their networking needs including STP and Unshielded
        Twisted Pair.

The IBM 8230 Model 002 and the new IBM LAM's capability to support 16 Mbps
operation on Unshielded Twisted Pair Media will allow the customer to move more
data in a given amount of time, thereby reducing response time. This will allow
the customer to do more work on a given ring than is possible with 4 Mbps
operation.  The increased performance of 16 Mbps allows the customer to have
quicker availability of information.

Most customers that are currently operating a Token-Ring Network at 4 Mbps on
Unshielded Twisted Pair Media will now have more cabling flexibility and
options when upgrading to 16 Mbps networks.

The 8230 Model 002 and 16/4 Unshielded Media Lobe Attachment Module in
conjunction with the 16/4 Mbps filters will allow operation on UTP Media at 16
or 4 Mbps.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   8230 Model 002 Base Unit:
        -   Width:  483 mm (19.0 inches)
        -   Depth:  362 mm (14.25 inches)
        -   Height: 133 mm (5.25 inches)
        -   Weight: 9.5kg (21.0 lbs)

Electrical Specifications:

       Frequency        Nominal          Low     High    Maximum
         Range          Voltage        Voltage  Voltage  Current    Power
         -----          -------        -------  -------  -------    -----
    60 Hz +/-3 Hz   100 to 127 Vrms    90 Vrms  137 Vrms  5.5 A.   0.53 kVA
    50 Hz +/-3 Hz   200 to 240 Vrms   180 Vrms  265 Vrms  2.4 A.   0.53 kVA

  BTU:  Maximum thermal dissipation is 184 BTU/hour for base
        unit and 117 BTU/hour for each 16/4 UTP LAM.

The 8230 Model 002 is required when attaching an active 16/4 Unshielded Media
Lobe Attachment Module (LAM).

The 16/4 Unshielded Media LAM is a feature of the 8230 and is designed to
provide workstation attachment to the token-ring network at either 16 or 4
Mbps.  This active LAM will require the 8230 Model 002.  Active and the passive
RJ-45 LAMs cannot be mixed on the same base unit.  One 16/4 Unshielded Media
Filter will be required per 8230 base unit.  One 16/4 Workstation Filter will
be required at each workstation attached to the ring. One IBM 16/4 Lobe Filter
B will be required at the concentrator port of any UTP attached workstation.
One IBM 16/4 Repeater Unshielded Media Filter is required between any 8230 or
8220 and any 8228 with UTP Lobes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 446. 3510-001 IBM PERSONAL SYSTEM/2 EXTERNAL CD-ROM DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF JUNE 24, 1992)

The IBM Personal System/2** External CD-ROM Drive Model 001 (3510-001) is an
external Compact Disc-Read Only Memory drive.  This external device expands
application solutions of all PS/2 Micro Channel systems by enabling various
applications such as catalogs, libraries and archives that are distributed on
Compact Discs to be accessed by computer.  The PS/2 External CD-ROM Drive
utilizes the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) and supports compact discs
with 600Mb typical capacity.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Industry Standard SCSI Interface (single ended)
    o   Industry Standard Compact Disc (ISO 9660)
    o   600Mb Typical Formatted Capacity (disc dependent)
    o   380ms Average Access Time
    o   Analog Stereo Output Jacks
    o   Universal 32 Watt Power Supply
    o   External SCSI ID Selector
    o   Push Button Power Switch with Power On Indicator.

The IBM Personal System/2 External CD-ROM Drive Model 001 (3510-001) is an
external Compact Disc-Read Only Memory drive.  This external device expands
application solutions for all PS/2 Micro Channel systems by enabling various
applications such as catalogs, libraries and archives which reside on Compact
Discs to be accessed by a computer.  The PS/2 External CD-ROM Drive utilizes
the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) and supports compact discs with
600Mb typical capacity.  The drive has a 380ms average access time and features
analog stereo output jacks for sound reproduction.  The external enclosure
features pushbutton power switch with power on indicator, 32 watt universal
power supply, and two 50 pin SCSI connections for daisy chaining.

The first IBM PS/2 External CD-ROM Drive can be attached to a PS/2 Micro
Channel SCSI Adapter (#1005 P/N 6451005) or the PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter
with Cache (#1018 P/N 6451018) through the PS/2 Card to Option Cable (#1041 P/N
6451041, For IBM US, No Longer Available as of April 23, 1991. Replaced by PS/2
Card to Option Cable #1140, P/N 6451139) Additional PS/2

External CD-ROM Drives or external SCSI devices can be attached through the
PS/2 Option to Option Cable (#1042 P/N 6451042).

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

    o   Storage Capacity:  600Mb Typical Application; (disc dependent)
    o   Data Transfer Rate:  150 Kb/sec (sustained); 1.5 Mb/sec (burst)
    o   Access Time:  380 msec (average); 700 msec (maximum).
    o   Standard 5-1/4 inch Half High Form Factor
    o   Standard SCSI Interface connector (single ended)
    o   De-Facto Standard Caddy
    o   An external SCSI ID selector switch
    o   Analog stereo output jacks (front and rear)
    o   Volume control dial.

The PS/2 External CD-ROM Drive requires the PS/2 Card to Option Cable (P/N
6451041; no longer available and replaced by PS/2 Card to Option Cable #1140
P/N 6451139) to connect to the base system through either a PS/2 Micro Channel
SCSI Adapter (#1005 P/N 6451005) or a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with
Cache (#1018 P/N 6451018).  The second or additional PS/2 External CD-ROM Drive
requires the PS/2 Option to Option Cable (P/N 6451042).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 447. 3510-0V0 IBM PERSONAL SYSTEM/2 SCSI STORAGE ENCLOSURE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM Personal System/2* SCSI Storage Enclosure (3510-0V0) is an external
enclosure, that can accommodate one IBM 3.5-inch or 5.25-inch half high SCSI
storage device such as a SCSI fixed disk drive.  The enclosure features a 32
watt universal power supply, a cover key lock assembly and mounting holes in
the base assembly for added security.  When this enclosure is equipped with a
SCSI storage device, it expands the storage capacity of a PS/2 Micro Channel
(R) desktop or floorstanding system.  The enclosure adheres to the ANSI SCSI
standard X3.131-1986, which supports up to seven SCSI devices attached to
either PS/2 Micro Channel* SCSI adapter.  Multiple enclosures may be stacked to
satisfy storage requirements for LAN or other applications which require
accessibility to large amounts of data.

The IBM Personal System/2 Card to Option Cable (#1140, 6451139) replaces the
current PS/2 Card to Option Cable (#1041, 6451041). This 60 to 50-pin cable
provides the capability to attach the first external SCSI device to a PS/2
Micro Channel SCSI adapter.  The REQUIRED PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter
Option Interface Terminator, included with the PS/2 Card to Option Cable, is a
50-pin terminator that is installed on the last SCSI device to terminate the
SCSI bus.  This new terminator MUST BE USED for the PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure
(3510-0V0), and for external SCSI devices that are attached in a "daisy chain"
fashion through the PS/2 Option to Option Cable (#1042, 6451042).

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   A versatile package that accommodates a wide range of 3.5" and 5.25" half
        high SCSI storage devices
    o   Adheres to the ANSI SCSI standard and can attach to a PS/2 system in a
        "daisy chain" fashion
    o   Features include cover key lock assembly, mounting holes in base for bolt
        down, external audio connection capability, and external SCSI id selector
        switches

Up to seven PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosures can be attached in a "daisy chain"
fashion to a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI adapter, and up to four PS/2 Micro Channel
SCSI adapters can be installed in a PS/2 Micro Channel system.

Multiple enclosures may be stacked to satisfy storage requirements for LAN or
other applications which demand accessibility to large amounts of data.  It is
recommended that customers limit the number of stacked enclosures to four.

NOTE: Single ended implementation are limited to a maximum distance of 20 feet
(six meters) between the SCSI devices at the end to end position on the SCSI
bus.

The IBM Personal System/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure Model 3510-0V0 is an external
SCSI enclosure which can accommodate either one IBM 3.5-inch or 5.25-inch half
high SCSI storage device.  This external enclosure provides system
expandability for either a PS/2 desktop or floorstanding system by enabling a
SCSI storage device to attach to a PS/2 Micro Channel adapter in a "daisy
chain" fashion.  The PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure supports SCSI devices that
adhere to the ANSI Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) Standard X3.131-1986
for single ended devices.  Multiple enclosures may be stacked to satisfy
storage requirements for LAN or other applications which require accessibility
to large amounts of data.  It is recommended that customers limit the number of
stacked enclosures to four.  A populated IBM PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure can
attach to either a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter (#1005, P/N 6451109) or a
PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache (#1018, P/N 6451110) through the
PS/2 Card to Option Cable FC (#1140, P/N 6451139).

This 60 to 50-pin cable replaces the current PS/2 Card to Option Cable (#1041
P/N 6451041). The REQUIRED PS/2 Micro Channel Option Interface Terminator,
included with the Card to Option Cable, is a 50-pin terminator that is
installed on the last SCSI device to terminate the SCSI bus.  This new
terminator MUST BE USED for the PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure (3510-0V0), and for
external SCSI devices that are attached in a "daisy chain" fashion.

The PS/2 Option to Option Cable (#1042 P/N 6451042), is a 50 to 50-pin cable
that provides the capability to attach external SCSI devices, such as the PS/2
SCSI External Enclosure (3510-0V0), in a "daisy chain" fashion.

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS:

    o   Accepts either a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch half high SCSI device
    o   32 watt universal power supply (Automatic Voltage Sensing)
    o   Cooling fan
    o   Standard SCSI interface connector (single ended)
    o   An external SCSI ID selector switch
    o   Capability for external audio connectors
    o   Cover key lock assembly
    o   Mounting holes in the base of the product to accommodate bolting to a
        desk

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Dimensions:
            Width:  9.40 inches
            Depth:  11.00 inches
            Height:  3.00 inches
    o   Equipment Approvals and Safety:
            FCC - Class B
            UL Listed, CSA Certified, TUV Certified, Nordic Certified
            VCCI Class 2
            GOP VDE Class B
            CSA No. 220

The IBM Personal System/2 Card to Option Cable is approximately 4 feet in
length.

The PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure (3510-0V0) can accommodate one IBM 3.5-inch or
5.25-inch half high SCSI storage device such as a SCSI fixed disk drive.

The maximum number of internal/external SCSI devices that can be attached to
the SCSI adapter is seven.  The maximum number of PS/2 SCSI adapters that can
be installed in a PS/2 Micro Channel system is four.

Multiple enclosures may be stacked to satisfy storage requirements for LAN or
other applications which demand accessibility to large amounts of data.  It is
recommended that customers limit the number of stacked enclosures to four.

The IBM Personal System/2 Card to Option Cable (#1140, P/N 6451139) replaces
the current PS/2 Card to Option Cable (#1041, P/N 6451041).  The REQUIRED PS/2
Micro Channel SCSI Adapter Option Interface Terminator, included with the PS/2
Card to Option Cable, is a 50-pin terminator that is installed on the last SCSI
device to terminate the SCSI bus.  This new terminator MUST BE USED for the
PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure (3510-0V0), and for external SCSI devices that are
attached in a "daisy chain" fashion through the PS/2 Option to Option Cable
(#1042, P/N 6451042).

The PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure equipped with a SCSI storage device, requires a
PS/2 Card to Option Cable (#1140, P/ N 6451139) to connect to the base system
through either a PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter (#1005, P/N 6451109) or a PS/2
Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache (#1018, P/N 6451110).  The REQUIRED PS/2
Micro Channel SCSI Adapter Option Interface Terminator, included with the Card
to Option Cable, is a 50-pin terminator that is installed on the last SCSI
device to terminate the SCSI bus.  This new terminator is MUST BE USED for a
PS/2 SCSI Storage Enclosure (3510-0V0), and external SCSI devices that are
attached in a "daisy chain" fashion.  The PS/2 Option to Option Cable (#1042,
P/N 6451042) provides the capability to attach additional external SCSI devices
in a "daisy chain" fashion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 448. 8209 LAN BRIDGE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge interconnects an IBM Token-Ring Network and an
Ethernet* Version 2 or IEEE 802.3 Local Area Network.  Systems and workstations
with compatible protocols such as TCP/IP, OSI, SNA, NETBIOS, or IEEE 802.2 can
communicate across this connection.  The IBM 8209 handles all necessary
conversion to route information between the dissimilar LANs.

Token-Ring stations view the 8209 as a bridge to another Token-Ring source
routing bridge.  To Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 stations, the 8209 LAN Bridge is
functionally transparent. Novell's Netware protocols (IPX) is supported. *
Ethernet is a Trademark of XEROX, Inc.

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge when configured with the Enhanced Ethernet module will
support up to a combined total of 2,048 entries in the Token-Ring and Ethernet
address data bases.  The maximum number of Token-Ring data base entries is
limited to 1,024.

The 8209 LAN Bridge requires customer supplied cables for connection to the
LANs.  Refer to Cable Orders under the Planning Information section for
specifics.  It is recommended the installation of the cable plant for
connection to the Token-Ring Multistation Access Unit (MAU) and the Ethernet
transceiver tap be installed by a qualified installer/technician.

The interconnected LANs and LAN Stations must be compliant with the following
applicable specifications in order to correctly operate with the 8209.

    o   IBM Token-Ring Network
          Operational MODE 1 - IEEE 802.5 and 802.2
          Operational MODE 2 - IEEE 802.5 and 802.2
    o   Ethernet
          Operational MODE 1 - "The Ethernet:  A Local Area Network Data Link
          Layer and Physical Layer Specification Version 2," dated September
          1983, and issued by Digital Equipment, Intel, and Xerox Corporations.
          Operational MODE 2 - IEEE 802.3 and 802.2

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Bridges 4 or 16 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network to Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE
        802.3 LANs
    o   Supports Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE 802.3 simultaneously
    o   Appears as a source routing Token-Ring bridge to Token-Ring stations
    o   Functionally transparent to Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 stations
    o   Bridge configurations allow multiple protocols (TCP/IP, OSI, SNA,
        NETBIOS, IEEE 802.2 and IPX)
    o   Compatible with IBM LAN Manager program
    o   Suitable for tabletop or rack shelf-mount.

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge interconnects an IBM Token-Ring Network with an
Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE 802.3 Local Area Network.  The 8209 handles the
conversion necessary to route information between the dissimilar LANs.  IBM and
non-IBM systems and workstations using this connection require compatible
protocols such as TCP/IP, SNA, NETBIOS, IPX or IEEE 802.2 in order to
communicate.

Basic bridge configuration may be done using switches on the attachment module
or via a utility program shipped with the bridge.  Additional configuration
must be done with the utility.

The IBM 8209 bridges the LAN physical layer differences by providing two LAN
ports, one Token-Ring Network, and the other Ethernet/IEEE 802.3.  The
Token-Ring port operates at either 4 or 16 Mbps.  When the 16 Mbps rate is
selected, Early Token Release will be enabled, unless specifically disabled by
the customer using the 8209 Utility program.  When the 4 Mbps rate is selected,
the Early Token Release function is not supported.

The Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 port attaches to either an Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE
802.3 LAN.  The IBM 8209 accommodates these two CSMA/CD LANs through two modes
of operation.  Mode priority of 1 is used for Ethernet Version 2, while Mode
priority of 2 is used for 802.3 LANs.  In order to support both types of LANs,
an additional setting can be used for automatic mode detection.  The mode of
operation can be determined by configuration switches, or via a utility
program.  With the bridge set for Automatic Mode Detection, the 8209 will
examine the data stream and dynamically adapt to the correct operational mode.
This allows both modes to be used simultaneously.  When going from a Token-Ring
to an Ethernet LAN, if the destination address of the Ethernet/IEEE 802.3
attached station is not in the 8209 transparent bridge database, the correct
format cannot be dynamically determined.  In this case, the 8209 will perform
format conversion based on the setting of the "Mode 1/Mode 2 Priority
Operation."

The 8209 LAN Bridge maintains two data bases.  One contains station addresses
for Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 stations; the other contains Token-Ring station
addresses and routing information.  The Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 data base consists
of static and dynamic entries.  The Token-Ring data base, however, contains
only dynamic entries.  Static entries differ from dynamic entries in that they
are configured, loaded, and retained in non-volatile RAM.  Dynamic entries are
created as part of the IBM 8209's "learning process" and are lost when power is
removed, or when aged based on a configurable time period.

OPERATIONAL MODE 1

MODE 1 is used to bridge Token-Ring to Ethernet Version 2 LANs.  Above the
physical layer, Token-Ring and Ethernet Version 2 differ in Media Access
Control (MAC) and user Datagram services.  The Token-Ring MAC layer complies
with IEEE 802.5 while Ethernet uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detect (CSMA/CD) and does not specify an 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC)
interface.  However, a method has been developed to transport LLC based
protocols on Ethernet Version 2.  A type code of '80D5' is used by the PC-RT,
OS/2 EE and LSP to indicate an LLC based protocol.  This means that in MODE 1,
the 8209 will support two different forms of conversion; one for TCP/IP and the
other for LLC based protocol transport to/from an Ethernet Version 2 LAN.  For
TCP/IP, a Token-Ring to Ethernet Version 2 conversion will result in the 802.2
LLC fields being stripped from the frame.  For the '80D5' LLC frame, these LLC
fields will be copied into the Ethernet frames data field. All Ethernet Version
2 frames forwarded to the Token-Ring, with the exception of LLC protocol
frames, will be transmitted using the SNAP header, thus all protocols can be
supported in a backbone configuration.

The preceeding statement, relative to protocols supported, is applicable to
'single or odd' numbers of 8209 environments only (non-backbone).  When using
'paired' 8209's through a Token-Ring or Ethernet backbone configuration, the
TCP/IP or non-TCP/IP protocol conversion becomes irrelevant because whatever
MODE 1 conversion is done by the first 8209 will be reversed by the second 8209
of the backbone.

A slightly more complicated process is used to convert and forward Ethernet
frames onto the Token-Ring network.  The 8209 retrieves Token-Ring routing
information from its data base and inserts it into the frame.  For TCP/IP, the
Sub-Network Access Protocol (SNAP) format is used in the 802.5 frame. For LLC
based protocols the 'standard' 802.2 LLC fields are carried forward to the
802.5 frame.

OPERATIONAL MODE 2

MODE 2 interconnects Token-Ring and IEEE 802.3 LANs.  This mode provides IEEE
802.5 (Token-Ring) / IEEE 802.3 MAC level frame conversion.  Protocol layers
above the MAC are transparent to the 8209 LAN Bridge and their data units are
passed through without modification.

SNA, NETBIOS, IPX or IEEE 802.2 sessions between stations on the different LANs
are also supported in MODE 2.  (However, MODE 1 could also be used if Ethernet
Version 2 is required for other reasons.)

The 8209 LAN Bridge transparently handles conversions for routing information
between the two LANs, regardless of the operational mode (MODE 1 or 2).  To
stations on the Token-Ring Network, the 8209 appears as a source routing bridge
to another Token-Ring. A station on Token-Ring uses source routing to
communicate with any station on Ethernet/IEEE 802.3.  The 8209 is functionally
transparent to stations on Ethernet/IEEE 802.3, appearing as one or more native
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 stations.  Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 attached stations can
communicate with Token-Ring attached stations as if they were on the same LAN.

After power on initialization, the Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 data base is initialized
with static entries.  The 8209 enters the learning state, listens to all frames
on the Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 port and saves each unique source address in the
data base.  While in this state, the 8209 LAN Bridge will not forward any
frames.  After a few seconds the bridge leaves the learning state and begins
normal operations.  During normal operations the 8209 LAN Bridge updates the
data base when a new source address is detected in an Ethernet/IEEE 802.3
frame.

The Token-Ring data base is dynamically built during normal operations. Entries
will be added to the Token-Ring data base only for stations with frames that
are forwarded on the Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 port. The 8209 LAN Bridge provides for
a combined total of 2,048 data base entries. The Token-Ring data base portion
of this total may be from 1 to 1,024.  The number of entries in the
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 data base, however, may range from 1 to 2,047.  An Aging
Timer will determine how long inactive Dynamic Entries will remain in the data
base.  Static data base entries are not subject to removal by the Aging Timer.

Configurable filters are employed to reduce forwarding of unnecessary traffic.
For example, filters may be set up so that only TCP/IP or NETBIOS traffic is
forwarded to either port.  This means that even though general broadcast frames
are received from either port, they will be discarded if not identified as
TCP/IP or NETBIOS.  Filtering improves LAN performance for the LANs attached to
the 8209 by ensuring that no degradation of the attached LANs occurs due to
unnecessary traffic.

The 8209 LAN Bridge ensures that no traffic is held in the bridge longer than
the maximum transit time.  If due to network congestion, the 8209 is unable to
forward traffic and the traffic is held longer than permitted, it will be
discarded.  This function is useful for those high level protocols that
generally retransmit a message unless an acknowledgement is received within a
certain time.

Each 8209 LAN Bridge has a unique MAC address assigned for each port.  The IEEE
universal address administration process will be used to assign the MAC
addresses.

The 8209 LAN Bridge is physically packaged in a table top configuration
suitable for stacking or rack shelf mounting in industry standard racks.  It is
designed, manufactured and packaged to be easily set up and configured by the
customer.  The 8209 LAN Bridge is functionally packaged.  The base unit
contains Token-Ring functions and support for a single attachment to a
Token-Ring LAN.  The feature code specifications under the 8209 provide for two
types of LAN attachments:  An IBM Token-Ring connected to an Ethernet Version 2
or 802.3 LAN via the 8209 (#5156).  The second attachment is for an IBM
Token-Ring connected to an IBM Token-Ring via the 8209 (#8630).  One of these
feature codes must be specified when ordering the 8209.

In most environments LAN Management functions and configuration customization
are not required to install the 8209 LAN Bridge.  The 8209 shipped
configuration adapts itself to the installed environment.

The 8209 LAN Bridge is shipped with configuration variables set as follows:

    o   Operational Mode:   Automatic Mode Selection Enabled with Mode 1 Priority
        Operation
    o   Token-Ring Speed:   4 Mbps with Early Token Release Disabled
    o   Token-Ring LAN Number:  One
    o   Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LAN Number:  4080
    o   Initial Bridge Number:  Zero

The basic configuration uses switches, advanced configurations use the utility
program.  To accommodate additional and more complex environments, two
provisions are available.  They are hardware configuration switches on the
attachment module and an 8209 configuration utility program.

The following options can be selected by hardware switches:

    o   Enable/Disable Automatic Mode Selection
    o   Mode 1/Mode 2 Priority Operation
    o   4 or 16 Mbps Token-Ring
    o   Initial Bridge Number (0, 1, 2, or 3)
    o   Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LAN Number.
        The Automatic Mode Selection function allows the 8209 to support both
        Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802.3 (Mode 1 and Mode 2) at the same time.
        The determination for mode of operation is done dynamically.

The 8209 provides Token-Ring Network LAN Reporting Mechanism, Ring Parameter
Server, and LAN Bridge Server, Ring Error Monitor and Configuration Report
Server functions (as defined in the "IBM Token-Ring Network Architecture
Reference," SC30-3374).  The 8209, acting as a logical LAN management agent on
the Token-Ring Network, will:

    o   Keep and report statistical frame traffic information
    o   Accept and respond to requests for Bridge and End Station status
    o   Accept and respond to commands which change Bridge configuration
        parameters
    o   Report Ring Error conditions
    o   Report configuration changes.

A utility program is shipped with the 8209.  This utility runs under either PC
DOS or OS/2 EE in an IBM PC or PS/2.  The utility, acting as the controlling
LAN Manager, allows the customer to set up filters, static data base entries,
ring numbers, bridge number, and timers which control operation of the 8209 LAN
Bridge.  The PC or PS/2 communicates the configuration parameters to the 8209
over the Token-Ring or Ethernet.  The 8209 Utility Program allows the customer
to examine and modify the following parameters:

    o   Spanning Tree Parameters
    o   Operational Mode
    o   Enable/Disable Early Token Release
    o   Filter Definitions
    o   Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Static Database Entries
    o   Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Port Statistics
    o   Bridge Number
    o   Token-Ring LAN Number
    o   Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LAN Number
    o   Plus all the functions listed under "controlling LAN Manager".

In addition to configuration, the 8209 Utility Program provides a means to
collect Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 port statistics which are gathered by the 8209.

The LAN MANAGER, acting as the controlling LAN Manager, can set/reset these
configuration parameters:

    o   Notification interval for performance statistics
    o   Bridge internal status
    o   Route active status
    o   Hop count
    o   Ring number
    o   Bridge number
    o   Enabled functional addresses
    o   Reporting functional addresses.

The LAN Manager will be installed on a Token-Ring station and will establish a
link to the 8209 LAN Bridge in order to communicate these management functions.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Width:  445mm (17.5 inches)
    Depth:  533mm (21.0 inches)
    Height:  133.35mm (5.25 inches)
    Weight:  9.1kg (20 pounds)

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the Token-Ring Attachment Module connects two
local IBM Token-Ring Networks into one logical ring.  The connected rings can
be any combination of 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Networks.  The
Token-Ring Attachment Module utilizes the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge Base Unit thus
providing this function in a plug and play unit with no keyboard or display.

The IBM 8209 Token-Ring Attachment Module provides the same network management
and similar filtering capabilities as the local IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge
Program Version 2.2.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Compatible with IBM Token-Ring Bridge Program Version 2.2 (local Bridging
        only)
    o   Filtering on Both Source and Destination Addresses
    o   Capability to Write Your Own Filters
    o   Same Network Management as Local IBM Token-Ring Network Program Version
        2.2
    o   Plug and Play Configuration provides ease of installation.

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the Token-Ring Attachment Module offers high
reliability and availability for a local Token-Ring to Token-Ring bridge.  It
is easy to configure and is rack shelf- mountable enabling customers to grow
their LAN environment into new areas.  The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the
Token-Ring Attachment Module is compatible with the IBM Token-Ring Network
Bridge Program Version 2.2 allowing customers to add to their installed base.
This function is provided in response to customer requirements from GUIDE and
SHARE User Groups and from direct customer input.

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the Token-Ring Attachment Module provides the same
network management capabilities as the local portion of the IBM Token-Ring
Network Bridge Program Version 2.2.  In addition, the IBM 8209 Token-Ring
Attachment Module allows customers to filter on both source and destination
addresses as well as to write their own filters.  This enables the customer to
control information transmitted over the bridge and to tailor network
management information for the network.

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the Enhanced Ethernet (1) Attachment Module
interconnects an IBM Token-Ring Network and an Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE
802.3/ISO 802.3 Local Area Network.  The Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module
provides the same function as the original Ethernet Attachment Module plus it
offers enhanced network management on the IBM Token-Ring portion of the
network.  Specifically the Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module offers Ring
Error Monitor, a Configuration Report Server, and Ethernet LLC support for
linking with IBM LAN Manager and IBM LAN Network Manager programs.  The
Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module also provides filtering on both source and
destination addresses, address mapping between LANs, locally administered
addresses and IPX support. (1) Ethernet is a Trademark of XEROX, Inc.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Bridges 4 or 16 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network to Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE
        802.3/ISO 802.3 Networks.
    o   Provides Ring Error Monitor Management Server for Reporting IBM
        Token-Ring MAC Frame Error Conditions.
    o   Provides a Configuration Report Server for IBM Token-Ring Networks.
    o   Features Ethernet LLC Support for IBM LAN Manager/IBM LAN Network Manager
        allowing multiple IBM Token-Ring Networks to be managed across an
        Ethernet Backbone.
    o   Filtering Capability on both Source and Destination Addresses.
    o   Compatible with IBM LAN Manager or IBM LAN Network Manager.
    o   IPX support for Nowell Netware products.

The IBM 8209 Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module provides improved IBM
Token-Ring Network Management.  Ring Error Monitor is provided so that
Token-Ring MAC frame errors are reported to the 8209 LAN Bridge.  The 8209 LAN
Bridge uses a feature called the Configuration Report Server to report IBM
Token-Ring Network configuration changes to IBM LAN Manager or IBM LAN Network
Manager.  With this customers can determine what devices are on the IBM
Token-Ring Network through IBM LAN Manager/IBM LAN Network Manager. Ethernet
LLC support allows for IBM LAN Manager programs to link to the Bridge to
provide customers the ability to manage multiple IBM Token-Ring Networks across
an Ethernet backbone with one IBM LAN Manager/IBM LAN Network Manager.
Filtering on both source and destination addresses has been added so that
customers can more efficiently control the information to be transmitted across
the 8209 LAN Bridge.  The remaining functions of the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge remain
unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 449. 8220 OPTICAL FIBER CONVERTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODEL 001 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF FEBRUARY 17, 1993.)

The IBM 8220 Optical Fiber Converter is an electrical to optical and optical to
electrical signal converter that attaches as part of the IBM Token-Ring Network
and can be set to operate at either 4M bps or 16M bps.  The IBM 8220 Optical
Fiber subsystem consists of a pair of 8220s, one upstream and one downstream
and the fiber link between the two 8220s.  If a loss of power or failure occurs
in the upstream or downstream 8220 Optical Fiber Converter, each 8220 in the
affected subsystem will automatically disconnect from the ring and wrap the
main ring to the backup ring at each end of the subsystem, thus maintaining the
operation of the ring.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Converts IEEE 802.5 Token Ring electrical signals to optical signals for
        transmission over optical fiber cable.  Each 8220 also reconverts the
        optical signals back to IEEE 802.5 Token Ring electrical signals.
    o   Each 8220 also reconverts the optical signals back to IEEE 802.5 Token
        Ring electrical signals.
    o   Operates at either 4M bps or 16M bps.
    o   Participates in ring diagnostics and Network Management.
    o   Wraps the main ring to the backup ring as a result of optical fiber
        subsystem failures.
    o   Can be defined as a critical resource to the LAN Manager.

The 8220 is an electrical to optical and optical to electrical signal
converter.  The 8220 Optical Fiber Subsystem enables a continuous LAN to
connect multiple buildings to span a campus-like environment.  Optical signals
are more effective than electrical signals when transmission outside buildings
is required because they are less susceptible to electrical interference and
can travel longer distances without waveform reshaping.

The 8220 repeats and re-clocks the signal on a Token-Ring Network.  These
functions are needed when the ring has a large aggregate distance comprised of
lobes plus runs between wiring closets or when there are a large number of
devices attached to the ring.

The 8220 is capable of operation at either 16M bps or 4M bps, selectable by a
switch on the front panel.  The 8220 can be installed today at 4M bps, in
anticipation of being part of a 16M bps ring later.

The 8220 is an intelligent device that participates similarly to other stations
on the ring in diagnostics and error recovery.  When the 8220 determines a loss
of signal condition in the optical fiber subsystem, it automatically
disconnects from the ring and wraps the main ring to the backup ring.  If
defined as a critical resource to the LAN Manager, the LAN Manager will detect
the absence of this critical resource.  The downstream 8220 continuously
monitors the condition of the backup ring so that a potentially problem-causing
failure in the backup ring can be identified and corrected by operations
personnel before the backup ring is needed.

The 8220 will wrap to the backup ring when it determines a failure in the 8220
optical fiber subsystem.

    o   The maximum drive distance over the optical fiber length between the pair
        of converters is 2,000 meters.
    o   The IBM 8220 Optical Fiber Converter operates at a center wavelength of
        850 +/- 20 nm. It is designed to operate on 100/140 micron multimode
        fiber.  Other fiber sizes supported are: 62.5/125, 50/125, and 85/125
        with different drive distances. For information on drive distances for
        62.5/125, 50/125, and 85/125 consult the Optical Fiber Cable Options
        Guide.

Meets FCC Class A Criteria


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 450. 8228 TOKEN-RING NETWORK MULTISTATION ACCESS UNIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

Attaches up to eight devices into the IBM Token-Ring Network.

The access unit provides for the attachment of up to eight devices to the
network.  Cables from the attaching devices are simply plugged into the unit.
An access unit can be interconnected to other access units to form larger
networks.  The unit can automatically bypass an attached device by reacting to
the presence or absence of a signal from the device.

The access unit is designed for installation in a standard 19-inch rack (not
available from IBM) or in a component housing.  The component housing is
available as an optional accessory, and is required for installation of the
access unit on a wall or table top.  A cable bracket is included with the
access unit, and is used to organize and identify the cables attached to a rack
mounted access unit.

The starter kits provide the necessary hardware (excluding workstations) and
software to establish a four workstation token-ring network.  The kits include
an access unit (model 001), housing, four adapters, four adapter cables, four
9.1m (30 ft.) cable assemblies, four copies each of the IBM Local Area Network
Support Program and the IBM PC Local Area Network Program, and an Installation
Guide.  The kits are designed to help the new user quickly setup a small,
expandable pilot network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 451. SELECT-A-KEYBOARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part Number  SELKYBD

Feature Code XXXX

Bus Master  No

Select-a-Keyboard allows a customer to specify one of the PS/2 keyboards listed
here for the initial orders.  The keyboards available are the Space Saving
Keyboard and the Enhanced Keyboard.  These keyboards can operate the systems in
this announcement with U.S. publications, literature and operating systems.

                       Space Saving          Enhanced
                         Keyboard            Keyboard
                        P/N    F/C          P/N    F/C
    English (US)               6903                6001

While the customer will have the ability to specify which keyboard is required,
at time of initial order, the number of keyboards ordered must be equal to the
number of system units ordered. Keyboards can be neither purchased nor returned
by themselves.

Select-a-Keyboard continues to offer the Enhanced Keyboard and the Space Saving
keyboard, already offered on existing PS/2 systems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 452. IBM INTERNAL TAPE BACKUP PROGRAMS 250 FOR PERSONAL SYSTEMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

49F5-693 - IBM INTERNAL TAPE BACKUP PROGRAMS 250 FOR PERSONAL SYSTEMS (DOS AND
WINDOWS)

    5871-AAA       49F5693         IBM Internal Tape Backup Program 250
                                   for Personal Systems (DOS compatible
                                   Version 3.0)
    5871-AAA       49F5666         IBM Internal Tape Backup Program 250
                                   for Personal Systems (Windows
                                   compatible Version 1.0)
    5871-AAA       64G3736         IBM Internal Tape Backup Convenience
                                   Kit 250 for Personal Systems
                                   (DOS compatible Version 3.0)
    5871-AAA       64G3713         IBM Internal Tape Backup Convenience
                                   Kit 250 for Personal Systems
                                   (Windows compatible Version 1.0)

The IBM Internal Tape Backup Program 250 for Personal Systems (DOS compatible
Version 3.0) and the IBM Internal Tape Backup Program 250 for Personal Systems
(Windows** compatible Version 1.0) provide the user with an easy to use
application utility to backup and/or restore data from large capacity fixed
disks on network file servers as well as stand-alone systems. The DOS
compatible version 3.0 is an enhancement for the IBM PS/2* Internal Tape Backup
Program (DOS compatible version 2.01), while the Windows version 1.0 is a new
IBM tape backup offering.  Both programs include data compression, data
encryption, librarian option, multi file and multi disk operation. These
programs and the currently available IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program
version 2.0 (OS/2(R) PM compatible) support most models of PS/2 Systems.  The
programs are available for separate order or packaged with the appropriate tape
drive and a mini tape cartridge as an orderable Convenience Kit.

The IBM Internal Tape Backup Program 250 for Personal Systems (DOS compatible
Version 3.0) and the IBM Internal Tape Backup Program 250 for Personal Systems
(Windows compatible Version 1.0) are written to support those users who want an
easy-to-use, low cost backup solution.  When used with the IBM PS/2 Internal
Tape Backup Unit they provide a high capacity internal tape backup solution for
that requirement. Network backups are supported, including the IBM Classroom
Local Area Network Administration System (ICLAS) Version 1.4. Additional
features include data compression, data encryption, the ability to back up and
restore data from multiple hard disk drives in a single operation, and a
librarian option.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Single application support for compatible Personal Systems.
    o   Single mini tape cartridge stores as much as 250 megabytes
        (250MB) of data using software data compression.
    o   Provides common user access across the leading industry operating
        systems
        - DOS, Microsoft Windows, OS/2 Presentation Manager*, Netware**.
    o   Designed for individual or network file server backup.
    o   Standard recording format provides data integrity when using the
        IBM tape backup programs and IBM personal systems.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc. **
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 453. IBM TOUCHMOBILE SOFTWARE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Three software products provide complete support for the IBM 7684 Portable Data
Collection Terminal (PDCT): the IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station, the IBM
7686 Vehicle Docking Station and the associated personal computer host.

The TouchMobile Programming Application Environment Services/DOS program
(53G4409) supports the PDCT terminal with data collection, data management,
data display, graphic data and host communication capabilities for the 7685
Stationary Docking Station.  Application building blocks are included for
touch-screen support, signature capture capability and bar code scanning
functions.

The TouchMobile Management Services/2 program (53G4407) is an OS/2(R) Version
1.3 or Version 2.0-based product that provides program and data distribution
and collection services for PDCTs via the Stationary Docking Station.  It
includes an application programming interface (API) for communications and a
Presentation Manager(R) program which provides monitoring and supervisory
functions.

The TouchMobile High-Level Application Generator/2 program (53G4408) is an
OS/2-based application development tool designed for the unique touchscreen,
keyboard-less environment of the PDCT.  A graphical user interface (GUI)
replicates the appearance of the PDCT display and simplifies the construction
of the application screens and associated database and input-output actions.

The TouchMobile High-Level Application Generator/2 provides the complete
run-time environment necessary to display the generated screens, react to touch
input, scan barcodes, and access databases, thus eliminating the need for most
application coding in the PDCT.  TouchMobile High-Level Application Generator/2
also includes a Prototype Application for transferring messages and files
between the PDCT and the Management Services/2 computer.  This application may
be used as-is or used as a basis for a customer-specific application. (R)
Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Three programs provide application development support for the TouchMobile
Portable Data Collection Terminal (PDCT), both Docking Stations and the host
personal computer system.

An easy-to-use design aid creates, modifies, and sequences application screens
and data recording facilities for the PDCT. Touch-screen data entry support for
the PDCTs includes signature capture and bar code scanner input.

Communications and application support for the PDCT operates under the
TouchMobile Disk Operating System for Portable Data Collection Terminals
(provided with the Stationary Docking Station).

Data handling, validity checking, upload and download of both data and
application changes between the PDCTs and the host personal computer is
provided via a Stationary Docking Station.

Intuitive screen presentations and easy-to-read publications help the customer
create and operate applications related to data collection.

Applications developed for TouchMobile terminals can be easily transferred to
the PDCTs using the facilities of the TouchMobile Management Services/2
program.  Terminals are identified and loaded with individual, new, or changed
applications or databases.

The High-Level Application Generator/2 enables easy adaptation of terminal
applications to the user's data formats in existing host applications,
adaptation of user unique terminology and worker management procedures.

Programming exploits the facilities of OS/2, the features of DOS 5.0, the
touch-screen function of the terminal and the terminal bar code scanning
feature.  Programming has been designed for international use and has observed
industry standards for graphic symbols and user interface.

The software usability features facilitate implementation of new end-user
applications and provide the capability of managing an increased number of
terminals or users without undue constraint.

Performance associated with application expansion and an increase in the number
of terminals should not limit growth.

Reliability and availability of the software and applications produced should
not be affected by user growth.

New applications and additional terminals can be installed without restrictions
on growth.

Application changes may be made in most cases with little or no user training
because the touch screen application presentation is intuitive and easily
installed in terminals when the change has been designed and tested. The
application concept is adaptable to a wide variety of mobile worker
environments such as inventory, sales and utility workers.

From a systems management viewpoint the usability features of the High-Level
Application Generator/2 will facilitate application development and application
change control.

Applications which are developed or changed can be reviewed on the High-Level
Application Generator/2 via the screen traversal facility, which enables the
developer to verify screen content, flow and usability prior to live testing
and installation on the TouchMobile terminal.  When applications are developed
and terminals are identified for installation, installation is easily
accomplished through the Management Services/2 Program.

The High-Level Application Generator/2 Program facilitates application
maintenance and new application development.  Screens are saved by the
Application Generator/2 and can be easily modified for desired application
changes or data structure changes.

Product information for the Application Generator/2 is presented in screen
formats consistent with OS/2 presentation conventions and can be used on an
intuitive basis with minimum special education for a PC-OS/2 application
developer.

The High-Level Application Generator/2 provides unstructured application
development and design capability that can be adapted to a wide range of data
collection or distribution uses.

Features of the TouchMobile DOS for PDCTs, the personal computer and OS/2 are
exploited in the implementation of the software, enabling the user or
application developer to take advantage of existing skills in these areas.

The Application Generator and the Management Services programs operate under
the facilities of OS/2 and the Application Environment Services program
operates under the facilities of a subset of DOS, conforming to and utilizing
the standards and architecture of these operating systems. estment Protection

The usability features of the software allows easy modification and extension
of applications developed for the portable terminal and allows easy creation of
data formats to interface with existing application programs.

The programs provide for easy loading of revisions, extensions and
modifications to applications that run on the PDCT, which will minimize the
investment needed for program maintenance.

The applications can be used for additional purposes such as inventory
operations or loading dock activity after vehicle pick-up and delivery uses
have been completed.

Exploitation of end-user investment in host applications, communications, OS/2
and personal skill development is possible due to the program implementation.

Graphical User Interface (GUI), communications and national language standards
implemented by the end user are supported by the programs. Productivity is
significantly enhanced by the ease of development and maintenance of
applications, the installation of new or modified applications and the
operation of the Management Services/2 program that monitors the docking
stations and associated terminals. Worker productivity is enhanced by the
automatic and error-free capture of information at the point of delivery or
use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 454. Drag & Drop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

With the conversion to 32-bit code, ICPA can now take advantage of one of the
many advanced capabilities of OS/2 2.x and 32-bit applications.

This is the ability to drag & drop. An "object" in one 32-bit OS/2 application
can be "dragged" OUT of the application, and "dropped" into a completely
separate application.

This function is being added to ICPA version 7.00 to permit future
applications, for example


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 455. Help for ICPAIND Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these choices to find out how to use help, to get extended help, to go to a
list of keys, or to go to the help index.

Help for help
     Provides detailed information on the kinds of help available and how to
     use help.

Extended help
     Displays general help.

Keys help
     Displays a list of keys.

Help index
     Displays the help index.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 456. Help for Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this choice to obtain information on how to use the Help facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 457. Help for Extended Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this choice to obtain general information on the tasks you can perform
while you are viewing a help window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 458. Help for Help Index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this choice to display the help index.

The help index lists the titles of the help information that is available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 459. Help for Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this choice to see a list of keys and a description of the function of the
keys.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 460. Extended Help for ICPAIND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Integrated Configurator and Pricing Application (ICPAIND) provides a fast,
convenient and accurate way to configure and price Industrial Computer systems.
The Presentation Manager user interface is used to select components from pop
up menus. Selected components, part numbers and prices are displayed on the
screen when selected. Priced configurations can be saved and restored. ASCII
files for printing or inclusion in customer proposals may be created.

Pricing options may be selected from a pull down menu.

Generally, the steps required to do a configuration are:

o Select the required pricing method using the  Pricing option on the action
  bar.

o Select the required System using the  System push button.

o Select other components ( Screens,  Memory,  Extras,  Printers or  Software)
  using the other push buttons.

o Use the  File pull-down menu to Print or Save the configured system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 461. Get Cfg ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this option to start the configuration process with a pre-configured
system.  All lines in the existing configuration will be cleared and you will
be prompted for the specific configuration name. The file extension .CFF is
used for all configuration files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 462. File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File options provide the following functions:

o Get existing configuration

o Save Configuration for future use with ICPAIND

o Save Configuration under a new name

o Save output of configurator as a text file

o Save output of configurator under a new name

o Add output of configurator to a text file

o Add output of configurator to a different text file

o Print output of configurator


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 463. Save Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This will save the current configuration in external format. In this format,
the file can be edited with a text editor such as the OS/2 System Editor. It
can be used for inclusion in customer proposals.

If a filename was not specified previously during the current execution of the
program, you will be prompted for one.  This option will write the
configuration details to the specified file, overwriting the contents of the
existing file or creating a new file if no file with the specified filename
exists.

If there is a marked selection, only the marked lines are written to the output
file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 464. Save Text As ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This will save the current configuration in external format. In this format,
the file can be edited with a text editor such as the OS/2 System Editor. It
can be used for inclusion in customer proposals.

You will be prompted for a file name.  This option causes an existing file to
be overwritten with the new configuration details.

If there is a marked selection, only the marked lines are written to the output
file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 465. Save Config As ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This will save the current configuration in internal format. The file extension
.CFF must be used. This extension is automatically added if you do not enter an
extension.

You will be prompted for a file name.  This option causes an existing file to
be overwritten with the new configuration details.

You may use this option to save a number of standard configurations. These
configurations may then be used as a starting point to obtain modified
versions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 466. Save Config ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This will save the current configuration in internal format. The file extension
.CFF must be used. This extension is automatically added if you do not enter an
extension.

If a filename was not specified previously during the current execution of the
program, you will be prompted for one.  The configuration details is written to
the specified file, overwriting the contents of an existing file.  A new file
is created if a file with the specified filename does not exist.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 467. Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting this option will print the current configuration on LPT1, which would
normally be a pc attached printer. If the OS/2 LAN server is installed, LPT1
may be a printer on the server.

If there is a marked selection, only the marked lines are printed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 468. Append Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option causes the output to be added to the end of an existing file, if
one exists.  If not, a new file is created.

The current configuration is saved in external format. In this format, the file
can be edited with a text editor such as the OS/2 System Editor. It can be used
for inclusion in customer proposals.

If a filename was not specified previously during the current execution of the
program, you will be prompted for one.

If there is a marked selection, only the marked lines are written to the output
file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 469. Append Text To ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option causes the output to be added to the end of an existing file, if
one exists.  If not, a new file is created.

You will be prompted for a file name.

The current configuration is saved in external format. In this format, the file
can be edited with a text editor such as the OS/2 System Editor. It can be used
for inclusion in customer proposals.

If a filename was not specified previously during the current execution of the
program, you will be prompted for one.

If there is a marked selection, only the marked lines are written to the output
file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 470. Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit options allow you to do the following functions:

o Delete a marked selection

o Undo (delete) the last selected part

o Delete all selections in the current configuration

o Copy all or marked selection to the clipboard


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 471. Delete Marked ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this option to delete a marked selection from your configuration.  You may
mark any selection by clicking with the mouse on the part of the screen
containing the selection.  When you click on a marked selection, it becomes
unmarked.  Only one selection may be marked at a time.

It is not possible to delete a System which still has other selections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 472. UnDo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This will remove the part last added to your configuration. This includes all
optional components added with the part.

Repeated UnDo requests are possible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 473. Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This will remove all parts selected and allows you to start a new
configuration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 474. Help for Copy to Clipboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

All lines in the current configuration will be copied to the clipboard in text
format. The current clipboard contents is cleared before the data is copied.

Once copied into the clipboard, the data may be pasted into programs which
allow pasting of text data from the clipboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 475. Push Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The push buttons allow you to configure systems in a predefined sequence:  A
System is selected first. From now on, only options which are valid for the
selected system will be displayed.

Once a System has been selected, you may proceed to select a Display, a total
memory size, Extra options such as Adapters, Mouse etc, Printers and Software
Only one memory choice and one display is allowed per system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 476. Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

All the systems available for configuration file are displayed.  To select a
particular system, you must position to the one of your choice (using the
mouse), and double click.  The details of the selected system will be
displayed.

Only one System can be selected for one configuration. Only the parts that are
valid for the selected system will be presented to you when you select other
components (Memory options, Displays etc).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 477. Displays ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This push button list the available displays.  Only the displays which are
valid for the selected system will be presented.  Only one display may be
selected per config.  You must position to the one of your choice, and double
click.  This will display the details of the selected screen, at the same time
updating the total configuration price.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 478. Memory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A list of memory options is displayed. Only the options which are valid for the
selected system will be presented. Only one memory option may be selected per
config. You must position to the one of your choice, and double click. This
will display the details of the selected option, at the same time updating the
total configuration price.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 479. Extras ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A list of add-on options is displayed. Only the options which are valid for the
selected system will be presented. Many options may be selected per config. You
must position to the one of your choice, and double click. This will display
the details of the selected option, at the same time updating the total
configuration price. The Extra options will remain on the screen to allow you
to select another option.  When you have selected all the required options,
click on the EXIT push button to remove the options box from your screen.

Many of the options will automatically include other options when selected. For
example, when a 8514 screen is selected, an 8514 adapter may be included.  Some
adapters may also be individually selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 480. Printers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A list of printers is displayed. Only the printers which are valid for the
selected system will be presented. More than one printer may be selected per
config. You must position to the one of your choice, and double click. Printers
generally have quite a few optional components. You will be prompted for the
optional components on the selected printer. Once all components have been
chosen, all details will be displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 481. Software ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A list of software options is displayed. More than one software package may be
selected per config. You must position to the one of your choice, and double
click. This will display the details of the selected package, at the same time
updating the total configuration price. The Software options will remain on the
screen to allow you to select another.  When you have selected all the required
packages, click on the EXIT push button to remove the options box from your
screen.

The Software options become valid once a valid System has been selected.

A list of software options is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 482. Pricing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The formulas used for pricing can easily be modified by editing the profile
(PRICING.PRO) using a text editor such as the OS/2 System Editor.

Up to ten different pricing formulas using the same or different price files
may be used.

The pricing option may be changed at any time during the configuration process.
Prices of selected parts will be updated to reflect the latest pricing option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 483. Bays ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This button brings up a pop up window that displays the DASD bays for the
particular system you are configuring. The bays window will not always
represent the actual physical layout for the system you have selected.  If
external enclosures are added to the configuration, these new bays will be
added after the ones from the system unit using the next free numerical value.
Empty bays will be shown as well as factory filled bays. Factory filled bays
will show the device name.  If you click on one of the bays lines, you can
obtain further details on the bay.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 484. Slots ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This button brings up a pop up window that displays the slots for the
particular system you are configuring. The slots window will not always
represent the actual physical layout for the system you have selected.  If
external enclosures (i.e. docking station) are added to the configuration,
these new slots will be added after the ones from the system unit using the
next free numerical value.  Empty slots will be shown as well as factory filled
slots.  Factory filled slots will show the device name.  If you click on one of
the slots lines, you can obtain further details on the slot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 485. Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The font can be easily selected through this pull-down option. The pop-up
window will display the available font options.

The number of systems desired for this configuration can be specified.

The font, window size, and column spacing will be saved and become the defaults
for all subsequent sessions.  The settings information will be saved in the
path defined in the parameter settings, otherwise it will default to the
working directory.

The column widths displayed in the configuration window can be re-sized by the
user.  To change the columns, move the mouse pointer to a column line.  When
the pointer changes to 2 parallel lines, press and hold the left mouse button
(button 1) and drag the column to the desired width.  This can be done on any
column.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 486. View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The View option allows you to toggle the price in selection function.

The price in selection option will allow you to view the price on most parts
prior to selecting them.  This feature gives you a kind of price comparison
ability between certain systems or other options.

The price used will be the one currently selected in the pricing options menu.
If you want to switch pricing methods between selections then you will need to
back out one level of the selection window in order to refresh the prices the
selection windows use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 487. Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this choice to end the ICPAIND program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 488. Keys Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FUNCTION KEYS

F1
     Get help

F2
     Get Extended Help for ICPAIND (from within any help window)

F3
     Close a window (e.g. ICPAIND Application)

F5
     Restore the window

F9
     Go to Keys Help (from within any help window)

F10
     Go to/from the action bar

F11
     Go to the Help Index (from within any help window)

ALT+FUNCTION KEYS

Alt+Esc
     Switch to the next program, including full-screen programs

Alt+F4
     End Help

Alt+F6
     Go to/from Help and Program

Alt+F7
     Move the window

Alt+F8
     Size the window

Alt+F9
     Minimize the window

Alt+F10
     Maximize the window

OTHER KEYS

Arrow keys
     Move among choices

End
     Go to the last choice in a pull-down

Esc
     Cancel a pull-down or the system menu

Home
     Go to the first choice in a pull-down

PgUp
     Scroll the contents of the window up one page

PgDn
     Scroll the contents of the window down one page

Underlined letter
     Activate that item on the action bar

CTL+KEYS

Ctrl+PgDn
     Scroll the contents of the window right one page

Ctrl+PgUp
     Scroll the contents of the window left one page

Ctrl+Esc
     Switch to the Task List

SHIFT+KEYS

Shift+Esc or Alt+Spacebar
     Go to/from the system menu

Shift+F10
     Get help for Using the Help Facility (from within any Help window).*

Shift+Esc or Alt
     Go to/from the system menu of a text window